2008 GCR.indd - The IT2 Initiative

2008 GCR.indd - The IT2 Initiative
CLUB RACING
2008 EDITION
GENERAL
COMPETITION
RULES
Sports Car Club of America, Inc.
Club Racing Department
6700 SW Topeka Blvd.
Building 300
Topeka, Kansas 66619
(800) 770-2055
www.scca.com
2008 Revised
©
SPORTS CAR CLUB OF AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by means electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system,
without permission in writing from the Sports Car Club of America.
Printed in the United States of America
The following are registered trademarks of SCCA and are used throughout
the General Competition Rules without the circle R.
AMERICAN SEDAN
CANADIAN AMERICAN CHALLENGE CUP
CAN AM
FAST FIVE
FAST FIVE PACESETTER CHALLENGE
FASTRACK
FORMULA CONTINENTAL
FORMULA SUPER VEE
FORMULA VEE
MATTERS OF THE MOMENT
NATIONAL RACING SCHOOL
OLYMPUS RALLY
PACESETTER CHALLENGE
POR
PRESS ON REGARDLESS
PRO RALLY
PRO SOLO
PRO SPORTS 2000
RACETRUCK
RUNOFFS
SCCA
SCCA PRO RACING
SOLO I
SOLO II
SPEC RACER
SPORTSCAR
TRANS AM
WIRE WHEEL
WORLD CHALLENGE
GCR - II
The General Competition Rules of the Sports Car Club of America are
intended to assist in the orderly conduct of race events. They are in no
way a guarantee against injury or death to participants, spectators, or
others. No express or implied warranties of safety or fitness for a particular purpose are intended or shall result from publication of or compliance
with these rules.
FOREWORD
It is hoped that the layout of the GCR will be of benefit to users. It must
be remembered however, that the GCR is a reference book, and not a
novel. To find the answer, the reader must first know the question. The
index will help, but the Table of Contents will give a good idea of the
general layout.
Effective January 1st, of each year, all editions of the SCCA General
Competition Rules and all Court of Appeals rulings are superseded by the
following SCCA General Competition Rules.
All dimensions are in inches unless otherwise noted.
The masculine pronouns he, him, his will be used generically, without
actual reference to gender.
In all societies where men compete with one another - and in which societies, pray, do they not? - there must be laws to regulate that competition. The extent to which that competition is carried, whether by intensity
or sophistication, determines the degree of complexity of the necessary
laws; and the extent to which those laws are willingly accepted determines, no less, the degree of civilization of that society.
Translated from Thales of Miletus, c 600 BC.
This book is the property of:
Name: ______________________________________________________
Address: ____________________________________________________
City: _______________________________________________________
State: ______________________________________ Zip: ___________
Region: _____________________________________________________
GCR - III
TABLE of CONTENTS
1. CONTROLLING COMPETITION
1.1.
SCCA (Sports Car Club of America, Inc.)
1.2.
SCCA GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
1.2.1.
Application of the GCR
1.2.2.
Revision of the GCR
1.2.3.
Replacement of the GCR
1.2.4.
Interpretation and Application of the GCR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2. PARTICIPANT CONDUCT
2.1.
BREACH OF THE RULES
2.2.
ADDITIONAL PARTICIPANT RESPONSIBILITIES
2.2.1.
Authorized Events
2.2.2.
Pets at the Track
2.2.3.
Driver and Entrant Responsible for Crew
2.2.4.
Waiver Signer Responsible for Minor
2.2.5.
Official’s Conflicts of Interest
2.3.
IMPAIRMENT
2.3.1.
Alcoholic Beverages, Narcotics, and Dangerous Drugs
2.3.2.
Medical Fitness
A. Medical Responsibility of Drivers
B.
Medical Condition Affecting Fitness of Driver
C. Medical Condition Affecting Fitness of Official
D. Medical Condition Affecting Fitness of Crew Member
E.
Involvement in Accident at an Event
F.
Loss of Consciousness
2.4.
DRIVER OR OFFICIAL REVIEW
2.4.1.
Official’s Loss of License
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
3. EVENTS
3.1.
TYPES OF SCCA RACE EVENTS
3.1.1.
National Championship Events
3.1.2.
Double National Races
3.1.3.
Dual National Races
3.1.4.
Restricted Nationals
3.1.5.
Regional Events
3.1.6.
Restricted Competitions
3.1.7.
Driver Schools
3.1.8.
Vintage/Historic
3.2.
SCHEDULING EVENTS
3.2.1.
Divisional Scheduling Representative
3.2.2.
Scheduling Policies and Procedures
3.2.3.
Exceptions to Scheduling Policies
3.2.4.
Final Schedule
3.2.5.
Calendar Listing Fees
3.2.6.
Schedule Changes
3.2.7.
Postponing, Abandoning, or Canceling Events
3.3.
SANCTIONS
3.3.1.
Submission to Rules
3.3.2.
Sanction Procedures
3.3.3.
Application For SCCA Sanction
3.3.4.
Sanction Requirements
3.3.5.
Event Related Fees
A. Sanction Fee Refunds
B.
Late Sanction Fee
C. Excess Sanction Fee
D. Tow Fund
E.
Compliance Surcharge
3.4.
COURSES
GCR - IV
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
3.9.
3.4.1.
Types of SCCA Course Approval
13
3.4.2.
Number of Cars Allowed on the Course
13
3.4.3.
Application For Event On Unapproved Course
13
3.4.4.
Scaffolding At SCCA Events
13
SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS AND ENTRY FORMS
14
3.5.1.
Required Contents of Supplementary Regulations
14
3.5.2.
Combining Classes into Race Groups
14
3.5.3.
Additional Classes
14
3.5.4.
Multiple Classifications on Course
14
3.5.5.
Changes To The Supplementary Regulations
15
3.5.6.
Required Contents of Entry Forms
15
INSURANCE
15
3.6.1.
Insurance Requirements
15
3.6.2.
Insurance Availability
15
3.6.3.
Coverage And Limits
15
A. Event Liability Coverage
15
B.
Participant Accident Coverage
16
3.6.4.
Increased Limits For Licensed SCCA Members
16
3.6.5.
Alternative Liability Insurance Procedures For Events 16
ADDITIONAL ORGANIZER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
16
3.7.1.
Entry List
16
3.7.2.
Race Results Distribution
17
3.7.3.
Trophy Availability
17
3.7.4.
Event Program
17
3.7.5.
Private Event Definition
17
AWARDS
18
3.8.1.
Distribution Of Awards
18
3.8.2.
Expense, Starting, And Appearance Money
18
3.8.3.
Prize Money
18
3.8.4.
Trophies
18
3.8.5.
Points For Co-Driver
18
CHAMPIONSHIPS
18
3.9.1.
Divisional Championships
18
A. Divisional Championship Points
18
B.
Point Awards
19
C. Ties
19
D. Dead Heats
19
E.
Points Awarded Only to One Driver
19
F.
Drivers’ Division
19
3.9.2.
Interdivisional Championship Event
20
A. Invitations to the SCCA Runoffs
20
B.
Defending National Champions
20
C. Refusal Of Entry
21
D. Late Entries
21
E.
Number of Races
21
4. PARTICIPANT LICENSING, EVENT CREDENTIALS, & ENTRIES
4.1.
SCCA RESERVATION OF RIGHTS
4.1.1.
Submission to Rules
4.2.
LICENSES - Types/Grades/Expiration
4.2.1.
Types and Grades
A. Competition
B.
Official
C. Steward
4.2.2.
License Expiration
4.3.
ENTRANTS, DRIVERS AND CREW
4.3.1.
Possession of License
4.3.2.
Presentation of License
4.3.3.
Crew Members
4.4.
COMPETITION LICENSING
GCR - V
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.
4.4.1.
Medical Requirements
4.4.2.
Participation Requirements
4.4.3.
Novice Permits
A. Novice Permit Issuance
B.
Driver School Requirements
C. Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
D. Private Driving Schools
E.
Racing on a Novice Permit
F.
Revocation
4.4.4.
Regional Competition License Requirements
A. Applying for Regional License
B.
Refusal to Approve License; Appeal
C. Novice Permit as Temporary License
D. Renewal of Regional Competition License
E.
Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
4.4.5.
National Competition License Requirements
A. Eligibility
B.
Application
C. Completion During Regional/National Event
D. Renewal of National Competition License
E.
Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
F.
Canadian “ASN Canada FIA” Licensing
4.4.6.
Licensing of Minors
A. Licensing
B.
Age of Majority
4.4.7.
Vintage Competition Licensing
A. Eligibility
B.
Application
C. Renewal
D. Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
4.4.9.
Special Handling Fee
4.4.10. Unusual Licensing Circumstances
A. Probation Letter as a License
B.
Statement of Facts Affidavit in lieu of license
RACE OFFICIALS
4.5.1.
Officials’ Licensing Specialties
4.5.2.
Race Official Licenses
4.5.3.
Officials’ Membership Requirements
EVENT CREDENTIALS
4.6.1.
Waivers
4.6.2.
Photo ID
4.6.3.
Minor Credentials
ENTRIES
4.7.1.
Refusal Of Entry
4.7.2.
Falsification Of Entry
4.7.3.
Withdrawal (Scratch) Of Entry
4.7.4.
Assumed Names
4.7.5.
Dual Entry
5.
OFFICIALS, THEIR DUTIES, OPERATING PROCEDURES, AND
EQUIPMENT
5.1.
PRINCIPAL OFFICIALS
5.1.1.
Required Officials
5.1.2.
Appointment
A. Interdivisional Event
B.
SCCA National, Regional, and Restricted Events
5.1.3.
Minimum Grades of Licenses
5.1.4.
Right to Supervision
5.1.5.
Plurality of Duties
5.1.6.
Separation of Duties
GCR - VI
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.
5.7.
5.8.
5.9.
RACE CHAIRMAN
5.2.1.
Race Chairman Responsibilities
COURSE MARSHAL
EMERGENCY SERVICES - MEDICAL and FIRE SAFETY
5.4.1.
Purpose
5.4.2.
Personnel
A. Medical
B.
Fire Fighters
C. Wrecker Operator(s)
5.4.3.
Equipment
A. Ambulances
B.
Fire Truck
C. Wrecker
D. Telephone
E.
Other Recommended Equipment
5.4.4.
Operating Rules
A. Emergency Plan
B.
Briefing
C. Dispatching
D. Hospital Arrangements
E.
Identification of Personnel
F.
Start of Race
G. Suspension of Racing
H. Counter-Race Direction Driving or Towing
FLAGGING AND COMMUNICATIONS
5.5.1.
Flag Chief
5.5.2.
Communications Chief
5.5.3.
General Organization
5.5.4.
Corner Stations
A. Number
B.
Location
C. Personnel
D. Equipment
REGISTRATION
SOUND CONTROL
5.7.1.
Sound Control Chief
5.7.2.
General Procedures and Requirements
5.7.3.
Standards
5.7.4.
Equipment
5.7.5.
Measurements
A. GENERAL
B.
TECHNIQUE
5.7.6.
Microphone Location
START
5.8.1.
Chief Starter
5.8.2.
Responsibility
5.8.3.
Function
5.8.4
Location
5.8.5.
Equipment
TECHNICAL AND SAFETY INSPECTION
5.9.1.
Chief/Series Chief Technical and Safety Inspector
5.9.2.
Inspecting Automobiles
A. Annual Inspection
B.
Minimum Event Safety Inspection/Tech Sticker
C. Reinspection
D. Alterations or Damage After Inspection
5.9.3.
Impound
A. Post Race Impound
B.
Impound Safety
C. Minimum Impound Inspection
GCR - VII
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
41
42
42
42
42
42
42
D. Impound Waiver
5.9.4.
Official Scales
5.10. TIMING AND SCORING
5.10.1. Chief Timer and Scorer
5.10.2. Timing and Scoring Systems
5.10.3. Results
A. Provisional Results
B.
Final Results
5.10.4. Media
5.11. ADDITIONAL OFFICIALS
5.11.1. Driver Observers
5.11.2. Press Officer
5.11.3. Judges
5.12. STEWARDS
5.12.1. Stewards of the Meeting (SOM)
A. Powers of the SOM
B.
Chairman of the SOM
5.12.2. Chief Steward/Series Chief Steward
A. Execution of the Event
B.
Maintenance of Order
C. Powers of the Chief Steward
D. Additional Powers of the Chief Steward
5.12.3. Assistant Chief Steward - Safety
5.12.4. Compliance Checking Crew
43
43
43
43
44
46
46
46
47
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
51
6. RACING RULES and PROCEDURES
52
6.1.
THE GRID
52
6.1.1.
Cars Run in the Proper Class
52
6.1.2.
Starting Positions for a Race
52
6.1.3.
Qualifying for Oversubscribed Classes
52
6.1.4.
Tire Warmers
52
6.1.5.
Starting the Engine on the Grid
53
6.1.6.
Push Starts on the Grid
53
6.2.
THE START
53
6.2.1.
Starter’s Orders
53
6.2.2.
SCCA Standard Start (Rolling Start)
53
6.2.3.
Split Starts
54
6.2.4.
Late Starters
55
6.3.
PACE and SAFETY CAR
55
6.3.1.
Operation and Control
55
6.3.2.
Safety Car Procedures
55
6.4.
STOPPING A COMPETITION
56
6.5.
RESTARTS
56
6.6.
RAIN RACING PROCEDURE
56
6.7.
TIMING & SCORING; STARTERS, FINISHERS, AND WINNERS 56
6.7.1.
Starting Line for Timing and Scoring
56
6.7.2.
Classification of Car as a Race Starter
56
6.7.3.
Finishers
57
6.7.4.
Winner
57
A. Checkered Flag
57
B.
Late Checkered Flag
57
C. Winning Car Not Running
57
D. Dead Heats
57
6.7.5.
Shortened Races
57
6.7.6.
Lap Record
58
6.8.
RULES OF THE ROAD
58
6.8.1.
On Course Driver Conduct
58
6.8.2.
Hand Signals
58
6.8.3.
Off-Course Excursions
58
6.8.4.
Counter-Race Direction Driving or Towing
58
GCR - VIII
6.8.5.
Stopping on a Course; Accepting Assistance
6.8.6.
Use of the Engine Self-Starter on Course
6.8.7.
Passengers
6.9.
RULES OF THE PITS
6.9.1.
Pit Area Defined
6.9.2.
Required Equipment
6.9.3.
Number of Authorized Crew Members in the Pits
6.9.4.
Authorized Personnel in the Pits
6.9.5.
Control
6.9.6.
Pit Barrier
6.9.7.
Overshooting the Pit
6.9.8.
Air Bottles/Gas Cylinders
6.9.9.
Fueling of Vehicles
6.10. RULES OF THE PADDOCK
6.10.1. Paddock Area Defined
6.10.2. Retiring to the Paddock
6.11. FLAGS
6.11.2. Meaning of Each Flag
A. GREEN FLAG
B.
YELLOW FLAG
C. BLUE FLAG
D. SURFACE CONDITION FLAG
E.
WHITE FLAG
F.
BLACK FLAG
G. MECHANICAL BLACK FLAG
H. CHECKERED FLAG
I.
RED FLAG
6.11.3. Lights Instead of Flags
58
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
62
7. PENALTIES
7.1.
WHO MAY BE PENALIZED
7.2.
RANGE OF PENALTIES
7.3.
MULTIPLE PENALTIES
7.4.
AUTOMATIC PENALTIES
7.5.
AMENDMENT OF RESULTS
7.6.
PUBLICATION
63
63
63
64
64
65
65
8. STEWARDS’ ACTIONS, PROTESTS, and APPEALS
8.1.
TYPES OF STEWARDS’ ACTIONS
8.1.2.
Chief Steward’s Action
8.1.3.
Request for Action
8.1.4.
Rules Interpretation
8.2.
HEARING
8.3.
PROTESTS
8.3.1.
Who May Protest
8.3.2.
Lodging a Protest
A. Protest Fee
B.
Time Limits
8.3.3.
Protests Against Cars
A. Establishing a Bond
B.
Conduct of Inspection
C. Refusal to Allow Inspection
D. Disposition of Bond
E.
Time of Disbursement of Bond; Appeal Escrow
F.
Preservation of Evidence
8.3.4.
Hearing a Protest
8.3.5.
Judgment
8.3.6.
Reasonableness
A. Forfeiture of Protest Fee
B.
Vexatious or Bad Faith Protests
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
67
67
68
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
GCR - IX
8.4.
APPEALS
8.4.1.
Right to Appeal
8.4.2.
Jurisdiction
8.4.3.
Appealing an Adverse Ruling
A. Fines, Licenses, Financial Obligations
B.
Stay of Decision
C. Dual Sanction Weekends
D. Well Founded Appeals
8.4.4.
Hearing Appeals
8.4.5.
Judgment of the Court of Appeals
8.4.6.
Publication and Effect of Decision
8.4.7.
Bad Faith Appeals
8.4.8.
Appeals Affecting Final Points Standings
69
69
70
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
72
72
72
9. CARS AND EQUIPMENT
73
9.1.
CATEGORIES AND CLASSES
73
9.2.
VEHICLE DOCUMENTATION
75
9.3.
GENERAL TECHNICAL AND SAFETY PREPARATION
77
9.4.
ROLL CAGES FOR GT AND PRODUCTION BASED CARS
93
9.4.5. ROLL CAGES FOR FORMULA CARS AND SPORTS RACERS 100
APPENDIX A. ADMINISTRATIVE GLOSSARY
106
APPENDIX B. TECHNICAL GLOSSARY
108
APPENDIX C. FACTS, FORMULAS, MEASUREMENT STANDARDS 137
1.
FACTS AND FORMULAS
137
2.
MEASUREMENT STANDARDS
138
3.
MEASURING COURSES
138
4.
MEASURING TRACK
138
APPENDIX D. OVAL TRACK RACING RULES
139
APPENDIX E. DUTIES, AUTHORITIES, AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE
CHIEF STEWARD
143
APPENDIX F. INDEX
148
APPENDIX G. 2007 ROLL CAGE RULES
155
APPENDIX H. 2004 PRODUCTION CATEGORY ROLL CAGE RULES 169
9.1.1.
A.
A.5.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
FORMULA CATEGORY
FORMULA ATLANTIC PREPARATION RULES
FORMULA SCCA PREPARATION RULES
FORMULA CONTINENTAL PREPARATION RULEs
FORMULA VEE PREPARATION RULES
FORMULA FORD PREPARATION RULES
FORMULA 500 PREPARATION RULES
FORMULA MAZDA
FORMULA S CLASS (FS) (Regional Class Only):
FORMULA 1000 PREPARATION RULES
175
175
183
192
202
215
227
232
238
241
9.1.2.
GT CATEGORY SPECIFICATIONS
F.
GT-2, 3, LITE PREPARATION RULES
247
267
9.1.3.
329
IMPROVED TOURING CATEGORY
GCR - X
9.1.4.
PREPARED CATEGORY
9.1.4.1. B PREPARED SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
9.1.4.2. D PREPARED SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
375
386
389
9.1.5.
PRODUCTION CATEGORY
393
9.1.6.
AMERICAN SEDAN CATEGORY
465
9.1.7.
SHOWROOM STOCK CATEGORY
483
9.1.8.
SPEC MIATA CLASS
501
9.1.9.
A.1.
A.2.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
SPORTS RACING CATEGORY
ASR CLASSIFICATION - (REGIONAL ONLY CLASS)
CSR AND DSR CLASSIFICATION
SPORTS 2000 PREPARATION RULES
SCCA SPEC RACER FORD
FORD-COSWORTH YAC SERIES 2 LITER
SHELBY CAN-AM RACER
OLDSMOBILE QUAD 4
SRSCCA PREPARATION RULES
ELAN VAN DIEMEN DP02 SPORTS RACER
9.1.10.
TOURING CATEGORY
GCR - XI
511
512
517
524
532
544
547
552
554
562
565
NOTE: Vertical solid bars, found in the outside margins, and italicized text
indicate a change or an amendment has been made in adjacent sentences
or paragraphs. A paragraph with a vertical bar, but no italicized text indicates a deletion.
GCR - XII
1.
CONTROLLING COMPETITION
1.1.
SCCA (SPORTS CAR CLUB OF AMERICA, INC.)
A non profit organization, incorporated within the state of Connecticut,
dedicated to the ownership,operation, and preservation of sports cars,
and the arrangement and regulation of sports car events and exhibitions,
the encouragement of safe and sportsmanlike conduct on public highways, and the development of technical information relevant to any of
these purposes. The SCCA is delegated the authority to sanction FIA
listed events by ACCUS FIA. The address of SCCA is:
SCCA, Inc.
Club Racing
6700 SW Topeka Blvd. Building 300
Topeka, Kansas 66619
SCCA is sometimes referred to as “National Office” or the “Club Office.”
1.2.
SCCA GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
The Sports Car Club of America, Inc., (SCCA) has established these
General Competition Rules (GCR).
1.2.1. Application of the GCR
The GCR shall govern all Club Racing events sanctioned by SCCA.
1.2.2. Revision of the GCR
A. The SCCA may revise, in its sole discretion, the GCR or issue
Supplements to it, at any time through “FasTrack,” “Racing Bulletins,” or “Tech Bulletins”, or on the official SCCA website. All
supplements will have a published stated date.
B.
Rules changes for National classes shall become effective the
Monday after the Runoffs rather than January 1 of the following
year so that competitors will have the opportunity to test rules
changes in competition before January 1st.
C. If circumstances create a situation where a rule clarification or
change is found necessary to be implemented immediately, the
Board of Directors may issue a memorandum stating the change
and its effective date. Those memorandums will be posted on the
SCCA website and sent to all Executive Stewards, and Divisional
Administrators of Tech.
D. Specifications on cars classified for the first time, or reclassified,
may be changed on thirty (30) day’s notice during the first year of
competition if the advance estimates of performance are grossly
inaccurate.
1.2.3. Replacement of the GCR
Effective on January 1st of each year, all previous editions of the GCR will
be superseded by the current edition. No revisions previously published
in FasTrack will remain in effect unless included in the new edition of the
GCR.
1.2.4. Interpretation and Application of the GCR
The GCR shall not be given a strained or tortured interpretation and shall
be applied in a logical manner, keeping in mind that it cannot specifically
cover all possible situations. The word “shall” (either positive “shall” or
negative “shall not”) is mandatory. The word “may” is permissive. If there
GCR - 1
General
1. Controlling Competition
1. Controlling Competition
is a conflict between the GCR and a Specification Book the Specification
Book has precedence over the GCR. In cases where the specification line
for a particular car conflicts with the class/category rules the spec line
shall have precedence. If an item is not addressed in the Specification
Book then the item is controlled by the GCR.
The interpretation and application of the SCCA General Competition
Rules by SCCA officials shall be final and binding. In order to promote the
sport of automobile competition, to achieve prompt finality in competition results, and in consideration of the numerous benefits to them, all
members, including competitors and officials, expressly agree that:
A. Determinations by SCCA officials are non-litigable;
B.
They will not initiate or maintain litigation of any kind against SCCA
or anyone acting on behalf of SCCA to reverse or modify such
determinations, or seek to recover damages or other relief allegedly
incurred or required as a result of such determination; and
C. If a member, competitor, or official initiates or maintains litigation
in violation of this provision, that member, competitor, or official
agrees to reimburse SCCA for all costs of such litigation, including
travel expenses and attorneys’ fees.
GCR - 2
2.
PARTICIPANT CONDUCT
Entrants, drivers, officials, and all other participants at an event shall
conduct themselves according to the highest standards of behavior and
sportsmanship, particularly in relationship with other competitors and officials, and in a manner that shall not be prejudicial to the reputation of the
SCCA or to the sport of automobile racing. Failure to do so may result in
a penalty as provided in Section 7, Penalties. Officials are also subject to
the loss of official appointment for the event.
2.1.
BREACH OF THE RULES
In addition to any other offenses or violations of specific rules, each of the
following shall be deemed a breach of the GCR.
2.1.1. Bribery or attempt to bribe anyone connected with the event; and
the solicitation of, acceptance of, or offer to accept a bribe.
2.1.2. Any action having as its objective participation in a competition
of a person or car known to be ineligible or not properly entered or
credentialed.
2.1.3. Any fraudulent proceeding or act prejudicial to the interests of
the SCCA or of car racing generally.
2.1.4. Reckless or dangerous driving, either on course or in the pits and
paddock.
2.1.5.
Failure to obey a direction or order of an Official.
2.1.6. Refusing to cooperate with, interfering with, or obstructing the
actions of the Chief Steward, the SOM, other Courts, or Court of Appeals
in the performance of their duties.
2.1.7.
Unsportsmanlike conduct.
2.1.8. Physical violence towards any other participant or spectator at
the event.
2.2.
ADDITIONAL PARTICIPANT RESPONSIBILITIES
2.2.1. Authorized Events
SCCA-licensed drivers and officials may participate in any events except
those which have been specifically disapproved by the SCCA Club Racing
Board or the Executive Steward of the Division concerned.
2.2.2. Pets at the Track
Pet owners shall be fully responsible for actions of their pets, and for
any liability arising there from. A pet may be in the paddock, provided it
is enclosed in a vehicle or on a leash. When a pet is on a leash, it shall
be controlled by an adult, and the leash may not exceed ten (10) feet in
length. Pets are prohibited in the pits.
2.2.3. Driver and Entrant Responsible for Crew
Drivers and entrants shall at all times during an event be responsible for
the conduct of their crew. An offense during an event against the GCR or
the Supplementary Regulations committed by a crew member is directly
chargeable to the driver and the entrant. For purposes of this section, an
event begins with the opening of registration and ends when the driver,
GCR - 3
General
2. Participant Conduct
2. Participant Conduct
entrant and all crew members have left the track property.
2.2.4. Waiver Signer Responsible for Minor
Any person signing an event waiver for a minor shall be held responsible
for that minor.
2.2.5. Official’s Conflicts of Interest
A. The Chief Steward, Series Chief Steward, Assistant Chief Stewards, and the Stewards of the Meet shall have no financial, employment, business interest, or significant personal relationship with
the organizer or sponsor of an event. Membership or holding an
office in an SCCA Region shall not be deemed to be a conflict of
interest in the absence of other evidence.
B.
It is recommended that a Steward not operate a session in which a
family member, co-worker, or with whom there is significant business, financial, or personal relationship is an entrant or driver.
C. A Steward of the Meet shall not be involved in a hearing involving
a family member, co-worker, or any person with whom there is
significant business, financial, or personal relationship.
2.3.
IMPAIRMENT
2.3.1. Alcoholic Beverages, Narcotics, and Dangerous Drugs
A. Consumption of alcoholic beverages by any participant is expressly
prohibited until all practice, qualifying, and racing activity for his or
her class or until his or her official’s duties have been completed for
the day. Any crew member who is impaired by the consumption of
alcohol may be excluded from the event, and the driver and entrant
penalized. (See 2.) Any driver or official who has consumed any
alcoholic beverage on the day of an event, other than as provided
above, shall not participate, and may be excluded. In addition, officials may be may be penalized as provided in Section 7, Penalties.
Consumption of alcoholic beverages in the pits is prohibited.
B.
The use of any narcotic or dangerous drug, as defined by Federal
law or by the law of the state where the event is being held, by
any participant is specifically prohibited. Any participant who uses
narcotics or dangerous drugs during an event or on the grounds
where an event is being held shall not participate, may be excluded
from the event by the Chief Steward or the Chief of the official’s
specialty, may be removed from the grounds at the order of the
Chief Steward, and may be penalized as provided in Section 7,
Penalties.
2.3.2. Medical Fitness
Each competitor and worker is encouraged to have someone in their group
maintain medical information about them in the event it may be needed by
a medical treatment team.
A. Medical Responsibility of Drivers
No driver shall compete in any event unless he has been examined by
a physician within the period specified in Section 4.4.1., Competition
Licensing Medical Requirements and recommended by the physician to
be approved for a competition license. Approval will only come from
SCCA Licensing Department with the assistance of the Club Racing
Medical Director and the Medical Review Board.
B.
Medical Condition Affecting Fitness of Driver
GCR - 4
Any known medical condition (including pregnancy) which could affect
medical fitness to compete shall be reported immediately to the Medical
Review Board via the Licensing Department. Any significant change in
medical status including cardiac or neurological problems, such as heart
attack, heart surgery, strokes, seizures, any major surgery or diagnosis
of cancer must be reported before the competitor resumes racing. The
driver cannot compete until reapproved by the Medical Review Board.
C. Medical Condition Affecting Fitness of Official
Any known medical condition (including pregnancy) which could affect
the ability to perform some or all of the assigned duties of the specialty
shall require a request for reassignment based on the recommendations
of the person’s physician. Some medical conditions (including pregnancy) may require reassignment to non-hazardous areas only.
D. Medical Condition Affecting Fitness of Crew Member
Any known medical condition (including pregnancy) which could affect
medical fitness to perform the duties of a crew member may prohibit
admittance to the pit area or any other hazardous area.
E. Involvement in Accident at an Event
A driver who is involved in an accident in which his or her car rolls
over, collides with a stationary object hard enough to cause structural
damage to his or her car, who is aware of possible injury from an accident, or who is directed to do so by an official shall report to the Chief
Medical Officer of the event as soon as possible. Any driver at an event
transported off-site to a medical facility shall not subsequently compete
in that event without a medical release signed by the attending physician at the treating facility or the event Chief Medical Officer.
F. Loss of Consciousness
A driver or volunteer who suffers loss of conciousness, (LOC) to be
defined as lack of response to others or amnesia for the incident, shall
be evaluated as follows:
1.
Any traumatic LOC <5 minutes will receive a trackside medical
evaluation by the Chief Medical Officer (CMO) or an emergency
room and shall not participate the rest of the day. If they are
neurologically normal per the CMO 24 hours after the event
they may participate. If not normal or not re-evaluated, the
Licensing Department shall be notified and they shall submit a
neurological evaluation before participating again.
2.
Any traumatic LOC >5 min needs ER visit, brain imaging and
shall not be allowed to participate until cleared by the SCCA
Medical Review Board They shall submit a normal neurological
evaluation to the Medical review Board before their license can
be re-activated.
3.
If a driver has sustained >3 concussions during same season
they shall be evaluated neurologically, and not race for the rest
of the season. SCCA Licensing shall be notified immediately.
4.
Any significant non-traumatic and unexplained LOC (excluding
obvious vaso-vagal, dehydration, expected hypoglycemia) shall
result is a suspension of participation until diagnosed, treated,
and cleared by the SCCA Medical Review Board.
2.4.
DRIVER OR OFFICIAL REVIEW
The Divisional Executive Steward is authorized to convene a court to
GCR - 5
General
2. Participant Conduct
2. Participant Conduct
review a driver’s or official’s conduct, car legality, competition record,
and/or other matters. Such a court shall have the power to invoke penalties as specified in Section 7., Penalties, and may also revoke licenses, or
may return the driver to school. The driver or official shall have the right
to appeal this decision as specified in Section 8.4., Appeals.
2.4.1. Official’s Loss of License
A. Any license holder (whose actions are deemed by the SCCA Club
Racing Board to be contrary to the best interest of SCCA) may
have his or her license revoked, either for a period specified by the
Club Racing Board, or permanently. This action is appealable to the
Board of Directors.
B.
Any license holder may be denied renewal of license for lack of
participation, conduct in violation of the GCR, or acting contrary to
the best interests of SCCA.
C. Any license holder may have his or her license down graded at
any time for lack of participation, conduct in violation of the GCR,
acting contrary to the best interests of SCCA, or inability to perform
satisfactorily at the current license grade.
GCR - 6
3.
EVENTS
3.1.
TYPES OF SCCA RACE EVENTS
Events sanctioned by the SCCA shall be classified according to the
persons eligible to take part, the categories of cars eligible to participate,
and the awards offered. SCCA may grant sanctions to organize various
classes of events to be conducted in accordance with the GCR.
3.1.1. National Championship Events
Each year the SCCA shall designate a series of National Championship events in each division open only to drivers holding SCCA National
Competition Licenses. Each event shall provide a competition for each
class of car recognized in Section 9., Cars and Equipment.
The following procedures are required for all National races:
A. Number of race groups. There shall be at least five race groups.
B.
Practice/Qualifying. There shall be at least forty-five (45) minutes
in total of practice and/or qualifying time available to each class. All
cars entered in the event shall practice and qualify by race group.
Each group shall have at least two (2) sessions. National practice
may be combined with Regional practice and qualifying. National
qualifying shall not be combined with Regional practice or qualifying.
C. Establishing the Grid.
1. At all National Championship events, grid positions shall
be determined by official qualifying times certified by the
Chief Timer. See 6.1.2., Starting Positions, and 6.1.3, Over
Subscribed Classes.
2.
Each competing driver/car combination shall qualify within a
maximum of 120% of the qualifying time of the fastest qualifier in his or her class in order to be permitted to start the race
unless waived by the Chief Steward.
3.
Any other method of determining starting position shall be
described in the Supplementary Regulations and approved by
SCCA.
D. Duration of Races. To be counted for National points, a race shall
be scheduled for a number of laps equaling at least forty-five (45)
miles. The SOM may reschedule all of any of the races to thirty
(30) minutes if conditions so require.
E.
Combining Professional and National Races. Whenever Professional
races are combined with National races at the same event, absolute
conformity to the National Championship race requirements shall
be maintained.
3.1.2. Double National Races
A Double National is a two National race event. Double National races will
be run under the following conditions:
A. There must be a separate qualifying session for each event.
B.
Standard points will be given for each event.
GCR - 7
General
3. Events
3. Events
3.1.3. Dual National Races
A dual national is two events on one weekend at a track where regions
in at least two divisions regularly sanction events. The purpose of a dual
national is to provide entrants with one in-division and one out-of-division
national event during one weekend at one location. A dual national must
meet the following criteria:
A. Each sanctioned national meets all the rules of a national event.
B.
Each national is sanctioned separately by two different regions,
each one in a different division.
C. Each national runs separately, under separate sanctions, applications, and fees.
Entrants may enter one or the other event or both. The entrant must make
application to each national separately, as if they were single nationals.
3.1.4. Restricted Nationals
Restricted Nationals are experimental events developed by the National
Office under the auspices of the Director, Club Racing. These events may
include semi-Pro events during a National, and or fewer National classes
than those listed in the GCR.
3.1.5. Regional Events
Regional events shall ordinarily be open to any drivers holding SCCA
Vintage, Regional, and National Competition Licenses and to certain other
drivers holding SCCA Novice Permits as provided in Section 4.4.3.E.,
Racing on a Novice Permit. Regional events shall also be open to Canadian
residents holding current ASN National Licenses who are twenty-one (21)
years of age or older and who are members of SCCA. The Supplementary
Regulations for a Regional event may also provide for the participation of
drivers who are members of SCCA holding Competition Licenses issued
by other SCCA-approved organizations. (See 9.1., Categories and Classes
for classes of cars eligible to compete in Regional events.)
Note: the current organizations whose licenses have been approved by
SCCA for competition in Regional events are;
BMW CCA Club Racing (Full Competiton), FIA (issued by any sanctioning
body), ICSCC (Area Conference), IMSA, Midwestern Council of Sports Car
Clubs MCSCC (Full), Porsche Club of America (Full Competition), SCCA
Pro Racing, Waterford Hills Road Racing Club (Full), West Canada Motorsport Assoc (Amateur)., Ontario Region CASC (Regional), Confederation
of Autosport Car Clubs CACC(Competition), SVRA, Historic Sportscar
Racing (HSR), Vintage Motorsports Council (VMC).
Any questions should be directed to the National Office.
3.1.6. Restricted Competitions
Restricted competitions are conducted under special Supplementary
Regulations that limit participation to classes of cars not recognized in the
GCR, or to invited drivers only. Vintage cars shall NOT be grouped with
any other type of cars. Restricted competitions may be run concurrently
with other classes of events. Restricted events shall be open to Canadian
residents holding current ASN National Licenses who are twenty-one (21)
years of age or older and who are SCCA members, unless otherwise
stated in the Supplementary Regulations.
GCR - 8
3.1.7. Driver Schools
SCCA Driver Schools shall be organized and conducted by regions of
the SCCA, in full compliance with the GCR. As a minimum, cars shall
be separated into open wheel and closed wheel groups in accordance
with Section 3.5.2., Combining Classes into Race Groups, and will run
separately. Driver School events shall be organized and conducted as
separate speed events, and shall not be combined on the same day with
other competitions or speed events, except when approved and sanctioned by SCCA. They shall not be open to any driver except students
undergoing instruction, and their instructors. Showroom Stock cars that
are not eligible to race because of their model year are allowed at SCCA
Drivers’ Schools provided all safety equipment is in satisfactory order.
3.1.8. Vintage/Historic
Vintage/Historic cars may be included on SCCA programs under the
following conditions:
A. Inclusion of the Vintage/Historic race event is specifically indicated
in the SCCA sanction.
B.
The driver is an SCCA member.
C. The driver holds an approved SCCA license.
D. The Chief Steward of the race event will set the standards for car
preparation, classes (if any), and driver conduct, and shall state
these requirements in the Entry Form for the sanctioned event.
E.
Vintage/Historic cars shall not be allowed to be grouped with any
other SCCA racing classes (except in a Drivers’ School).
F.
Former Spec Racer Renaults may compete in Vintage/Historic
events. (See 9.2.1.G., Vehicle Logbooks)
Note: the current organizations whose licenses have been approved by
SCCA for competition in Vintage events are:
SOVREN, Vintage Auto Racing Association (VARA), Classic Sports Racing
Group (CSRG).
Any questions should be directed to the National Office.
3.2.
SCHEDULING EVENTS
3.2.1. Divisional Scheduling Representative
A Divisional Scheduling Representative is appointed for each division by
the Divisional Executive Steward. The term of appointment shall be from
July 1st until June 30th of the following year.
3.2.2. Scheduling Policies and Procedures
Immediately upon appointment, the Divisional Scheduling Representative shall prepare a list of available National Championship race dates
for the following calendar year for his or her Division. The list of available National Championship race dates shall be mailed by the Divisional
Scheduling Representative to the Regional Executive of each region in the
division no later than August 15th. Written requests for National Championship race dates shall be returned to the Scheduling Representative
no later than October 15th. To be considered a firm date request, the
region’s request shall be confirmed in writing by the circuit owner or
manager. The schedule of available dates may note and assign traditional
GCR - 9
General
3. Events
3. Events
dates on a tentative basis, may recognize holiday weekends established
by tradition or law, and may otherwise be formulated in compliance with
the following scheduling policies:
A. There shall be at least six (6) National Championship races in a division, unless a waiver is granted by the Board of Directors.
B.
In conflicts involving a non-spectator and a spectator race, preference will be given to the spectator races.
C. Wherever possible, avoid scheduling National Championship races
on consecutive weekends.
D. A region shall not conduct more than two (2) National Championship events.
E.
There shall not be more than two (2) National Championship events
on any one course.
F.
No National races shall be scheduled after Labor Day weekend.
G. Scheduling of National Championship races on three (3) consecutive weekends in the same division is prohibited. Waiver of this
policy can only be made by the Board of Directors.
H. A Double National is defined as two National races at the same
facility within a contiguous 3-day period. Double National races will
be run under the following conditions:
1.
No more than one-fourth of the regions within in the division
object.
2.
Should be held on a three (3) day National holiday weekend
and should be a three (3) day event.
I.
The Club Racing Department, working with each Divisional Executive Steward, and the Area Director, is to establish the ratio of
drivers schools to Nationals for each racing division.
J.
Principal SCCA Club events will not be scheduled on National
Convention dates.
3.2.3. Exceptions to Scheduling Policies
Requests for exceptions to the above scheduling policies shall be made
in writing to the Manager of Club Racing and to the Divisional Scheduling Representative. Their recommendation requires the approval of the
Chairman of the Club Racing Board.
3.2.4. Final Schedule
The Scheduling Representatives shall mail copies of the final racing
schedule for their division to the Manager of Club Racing (WITH THE
APPROPRIATE NON-REFUNDABLE CALENDAR LISTING FEES - See
3.2.5.); and to the Chairman of the Club Racing Board, the Regional Executives of all regions in their division, and to the Scheduling Representatives of the other divisions no later than December 1st.
3.2.5. Calendar Listing Fees
A calendar listing fee was established in 1968 for subsequent National,
Regional, Restricted, and Driver School events as a condition for SCCA
calendar approval. Change-of-date requests are considered as new appliGCR - 10
cations, and a separate fee is required. Only one (1) fee is required for
each weekend of racing.
Calendar listing fees, payable to SCCA, are forwarded to the Scheduling
Representative with date applications. On approval of the date, the fees
are forwarded to the National Office. If a date request is denied, the
Scheduling Representative returns the fee to the applicant. The purpose
of the calendar listing fee is to bring about a more stable calendar as
promptly as possible. The calendar listing fees are separate and distinct
from the Sanction fees.
3.2.6. Schedule Changes
The Scheduling Representative shall notify the parties listed in 3.2.4.,
Final Schedule, as changes are made in the final schedule.
3.2.7. Postponing, Abandoning, or Canceling Events
All or part of an event may be postponed or canceled if:
A. Provision for doing so is made in the Supplementary Regulations for
the event, or
B.
The SOM order that all or part of the event be postponed or
cancelled for reasons of safety or forces beyond their control.
1.
Postponement. In consultation with the organizing region, the
SOM may order a postponement for classes who were not
afforded the opportunity to race (as opposed to practice or
qualify), provided a scheduled date is available at the same
facility within the same competition year. The postponed races
shall be run under the original sanction number.
2.
Cancellation. If an entire event (all classes, all sessions) is postponed for more than 24 hours, it is considered to be cancelled,
and entry fees shall be returned. If an event is cancelled during
the competition, then the entry fees shall be prorated by class
and a reasonable portion of the entry fee shall be returned.
3.
Credit for Start. If an entire event is cancelled, there shall be
no credit for a start. If a race is postponed, the competitors
have the option of either competing in the postponed race, or
receiving a prorated refund and being classified as DNS for that
race, provided they have participated in a practice session or
are shown on the qualifying results for that race.
3.3.
SANCTIONS
The sanction is the documentary authority, granted by SCCA, to organize
and hold a competition. The Club Racing Department must approve all
sanctions.
An SCCA-sanctioned event may be organized by:
A. The SCCA.
B. An SCCA Region(s).
C. Double National may be sanctioned by more than one region.
The names or emblem of the SCCA shall be associated only with events
sanctioned by SCCA.
3.3.1. Submission to Rules
Every person, body, group or persons, region of the SCCA, or organizer
who applies for and is granted an SCCA sanction to conduct an event
shall be deemed to have agreed to the following and so acknowledge in
GCR - 11
General
3. Events
3. Events
writing upon request:
A. He or she is familiar with the GCR.
B. He or she agrees without reservation to the consequences resulting
from the GCR.
C. He or she renounces the right to have recourse, except with the
written consent of the SCCA, to any arbitrator or tribunal not
provided for in the GCR.
3.3.2. Sanction Procedures
When all the requirements listed below have been met and the application has been approved by the National Office, a sanction number will be
assigned and a formal document issued to the organizers within five (5)
working days. Sanction Numbers will be issued only in writing, not via
telephone, and application submission should be planned accordingly.
3.3.3. Application For SCCA Sanction
Applications shall be submitted for approval at least forty-five (45) days
prior to the scheduled date of the event and shall include the following:
A. Completed Official Sanction Application Form (revised 12/05); the
Application shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
C.
D.
E.
name and address of applicant;
organization or person on whose behalf the application is made,
and the official position held by the applicant;
nature and classification(s) of the event for which a sanction is
requested;
date and place of the proposed event.
Appropriate sanction fee;
Draft of the Entry Form;
Supplementary Regulations;
Schedule of Events.
3.3.4. Sanction Requirements
A. The event must be listed on the official SCCA calendar.
B. The course must be approved by the SCCA.
C. There are no outstanding fees for prior events.
3.3.5.
Event Related Fees
A. Sanction Fee Refunds
There shall be no refunds of Sanction fees unless notice of cancellation
is received by the National Office at least fifteen (15) days prior to the
event.
B. Late Sanction Fee
A late fee of fifty (50) percent of the sanction fee shall be charged
on all sanctions postmarked after the applicable deadline, unless prior
arrangements have been made and approved by the National Office
Sanction Administrator.
C. Excess Sanction Fee
Upon conclusion of all Regional, Double Regional, National and Double
National events, the organizing region shall submit to the SCCA the
Excess Sanction fee for every car exceeding 150, per sanction number,
within fourteen (14) days following the event. No further sanctions will
be issued to a region until this has been paid.
GCR - 12
D. Tow Fund
Upon conclusion of a National race, the organizing region will remit
immediately to the SCCA the funds specified by the Board of Directors per paid entrant in National Championship classes only for a fund
authorized by the Board of Directors to be distributed to entrants in the
Interdivisional Championship events. No further sanctions will be issued
to a region until this has been paid.
E. Compliance Surcharge
A $10 surcharge for each Spec Racer, and Formula SCCA, car must be
submitted to the SCCA National Office with the tow fund and excess
sanction fees for the event.
3.4.
COURSES
Notwithstanding definitions to the contrary, the word ‘course’ and the
word ‘circuit’ may be used interchangeably in these rules.
3.4.1. Types of SCCA Course Approval
The selection of any course for an event shall be subject to the approval
of the SCCA. Specifically, the SCCA may:
A. Limit a course as to the classification of event to be sanctioned
there.
B.
Restrict the number of cars which may be started simultaneously
or in total.
C. Restrict the number of entries which may be accepted for an event
or a competition.
D. Restrict the course to certain classes and categories of cars.
E.
Restrict the course to certain grades of drivers.
F.
Disapprove the course for all SCCA speed events.
3.4.2. Number of Cars Allowed on the Course
A. The maximum number of cars that may be started simultaneously
on any course shall be twenty-five (25) per mile.
B.
The maximum number of cars that may occupy a course in practice, qualifying, or a race shall not exceed twenty-five (25) per
mile, and then only if an extreme speed differential does not exist
between the fastest and the slowest cars.
C. Only the Executive Steward of the Division may authorize an
increase in this number or may require a decrease for any or all car
classes.
3.4.3. Application For Event On Unapproved Course
In the case of an Application for Sanction to conduct an event at a course
which is not already approved by the SCCA (see 3.4.1., Types of SCCA
Course Approval), application shall be submitted at least two (2) months
before the proposed event and shall be accompanied by a full description
of the course and facilities, including a scale map.
3.4.4. Scaffolding At SCCA Events
Scaffolding is prohibited unless its use is specifically authorized by the
Event Chief Steward after consultation with the SCCA Risk Management Department. Separate insurance coverage for this exposure may be
GCR - 13
General
3. Events
3. Events
required as a condition of use.
3.5.
SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS AND ENTRY FORMS
Organizers shall not distribute Entry Forms or Supplementary Regulations
for an SCCA event prior to obtaining an SCCA Sanction.
3.5.1. Required Contents of Supplementary Regulations
The Supplementary Regulations shall establish for competitors and officials the specific conditions for an event. The Club Racing Board must
approve all regulations different than those of the GCR prior to a Sanction
being issued. They shall contain the following information:
A. The name, location, dates, nature, and classification of the event.
B. The sanction number and type of sanction for the event.
C. An announcement conspicuously placed: “Held under the SCCA
General Competition Rules.”
D. The name and address of the organizers.
E. A complete description of the proposed event, including the length
of individual competitions, and the classes of cars eligible. SCCA
National licenses shall be accepted at any SCCA event unless
otherwise specified by the Supplementary Regulations.
F. Schedules and locations of activities, inspections, meetings, and
competitions.
G. The name and address of the Registrar or other person to whom
the entry is to be sent, closing date for receipt of entries, and
amount of entry fee.
H. The names of the Chief Steward and the Chairman SOM.
I. The manner of determining results and awarding trophies and
prizes.
J. Hours during the event when official scales shall be available for
competitors to check the weight of their cars.
K. All other information necessary for the proper conduct of the event,
not already included in the GCR.
3.5.2. Combining Classes into Race Groups
A. Any Formula class may be combined with Sports Racing cars.
B.
Whenever possible it is preferable to combine Sports Racing cars
with appropriate Formula classes than with Production or GT cars.
C. Whenever possible it is preferable to not combine FA, FM, FC with
FV and/or F500. FV may be combined with F500.
D. SRF may be combined with G and H Production and GT-Lite.
E.
Formula cars shall not be combined with cars from any other category except Sports Racing. This does not apply to race groups
consisting of solely Vintage/Historic cars.
F.
Whenever possible it is preferable to not combine GT1, AS, T1, T2,
T3 classes with DSR, CSR, SRF, S2000, FP, GP, HP, GT-Lite.
3.5.3. Additional Classes
Competitions for classes, other than those specified in Section 9.1 Categories and Classes, shall not jeopardize a full schedule of competitions for
the recognized classes. Organizers may also schedule extra competitions
for other classes, provided specifications are clearly set forth in Supplementary Regulations.
3.5.4.
Multiple Classifications on Course
GCR - 14
Where there are two (2) classifications of races during one event, it shall
not normally be permissible for races of both classifications to be run
simultaneously.
3.5.5. Changes To The Supplementary Regulations
No changes shall be made to the Supplementary Regulations, except for
the schedule and/or class groupings, after the beginning of the period
for receiving entries unless unanimous agreement is given by all affected
competitors already entered, or the Stewards of the Meeting so decide
for reasons of safety or forces beyond their control. All schedule changes
shall be approved by the SOM. (See 5.12.1.A., Powers of the SOM.)
3.5.6. Required Contents of Entry Forms
A. Spaces for full names, addresses, membership numbers, and
license numbers of entrants and drivers, and for driver’s Region of
Record.
B.
Space for full description of cars to be entered.
C. An announcement: “Held under the SCCA General Competition
Rules.”
D. Spaces for signatures of entrants and drivers for waiver of liability
and/or indemnity declarations, acknowledgment of the authority of
the GCR, declaration that cars entered comply with the provisions
of the GCR, persons to be notified in case of accident.
E.
The Sanction Number assigned to the event.
F.
Any other information required for the clarification of all other
details of the event.
3.6.
INSURANCE
3.6.1. Insurance Requirements
All events sanctioned by the SCCA shall be insured for Event Liability and
Participant Accident coverage. Event Liability coverage may be provided
by the SCCA Event Insurance Plan or an equivalent policy if obtained in
compliance with the procedures described in paragraph 3.6.5., “Alternative Liability Insurance Procedures for Events.” Participant Accident
coverage shall be provided by the SCCA Event Insurance Plan.
3.6.2. Insurance Availability
The Chief Steward shall delay the beginning of the event until he/she is
satisfied that the insurance required under this section is provided.
3.6.3. Coverage And Limits
The minimum coverage and limits for competitive events are:
A. Event Liability Coverage
Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability; Contractual Liability (written
and oral); Personal Injury/Advertising Liability; Host Liquor Liability;
Participant Legal Liability (including participant to participant liability);
Official Vehicle and Personal Property Damage; Pollution-sudden and
accidental; Medical Malpractice liability.
The policy shall designate as additional insureds, among others: The
Sports Car Club of America, Inc., SCCA Pro Racing, Ltd., regions chartered by the Sports Car Club of America, Inc., and their respective
officers, members, officials, car owners, drivers, pit crews, entrants,
GCR - 15
General
3. Events
3. Events
their successors and assigns, sponsors, advertisers, and land owners
while involved in and acting in their capacity during the presentation or
conduct of an event. Additional names may be required. An updated list
will be available from the SCCA Risk Management Department.
Minimum Limits
General Liability (including participant legal liability) - $5,000,000 per
occurrence CSL (general aggregate applies per event)
Directors, Officers, and Stewards Errors and Omissions Liability $100,000
Medical Malpractice Liability (excess coverage) - $5,000,000
Official Vehicle and Personal Property Damage – $50,000, $500
deductible
B.
Participant Accident Coverage - SCCA Event Insurance Plan is
required.
Accidental Death - $25,000
Blanket Medical Reimbursement - $50,000
Disability Income - $100 per week for the first 104 weeks after a seven
(7) day waiting period
Accidental Dismemberment - Up to $10,000 according to schedule
All Participants are covered by Participant Accident Insurance.
3.6.4. Increased Limits For Licensed SCCA Members
$1,000,000 medical expense reimbursement benefits are provided to
SCCA members properly credentialed for an event.
3.6.5. Alternative Liability Insurance Procedures For Events
The organizers and/or promoters of any SCCA-sanctioned event which
is to be insured with liability coverage other than that provided by the
current SCCA Master Insurance Plan shall adhere to the following:
A. A fully worded and certified Liability Policy (or policies) of insurance
equivalent to the requirements set forth in Section 3.6.3.A., Event
Liability Coverage, shall be forwarded to the SCCA Risk Management Department so that receipt of the Liability Policy (or policies)
will occur not less than twenty (20) days prior to the scheduled
commencement of the event to be insured by such Liability Policy
(or policies). The Risk Management Department in its sole discretion, shall determine whether the Policy is equivalent and acceptable.
B.
3.7.
If such fully worded and certified Liability Policy (or policies) is
not received by a date twenty (20) days prior to the scheduled
commencement of the event to be insured, the Risk Management
Department shall have the right, but not the obligation, to cause the
event to be insured for liability under the current SCCA Event Insurance Plan. Certificates evidencing such coverage and a billing for
the appropriate premium charge therefore shall be sent to the event
organizers and promoters. In case the premium charge is unpaid by
a date fourteen (14) days prior to the scheduled commencement of
the event, the Risk Management Department shall cause the event
to be canceled.
ADDITIONAL ORGANIZER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
3.7.1. Entry List
The organizers shall make the official list of competitors available to all
GCR - 16
entrants at no charge as early as possible prior to the commencement of
the event.
3.7.2. Race Results Distribution
The organizing region will send Official Race Results to the National Office
within five (5) days of the event. Additionally, the organizing region will
send one (1) copy to the appropriate Divisional Pointskeeper (including
qualifying) within five (5) days of the event. Additionally, the organizers
shall provide Official Race Results (printed or photocopied) for each
entrant either during the event, or shall mail photocopied results, at the
organizer’s expense, within seven (7) days after the conclusion of the
event.
3.7.3. Trophy Availability
Race Officials shall ensure event awards are available for distribution at
the end of each competition so placing drivers can take their awards
(trophies) home with them before the end of the day.
3.7.4. Event Program
Any program offered to the public by the organizers shall contain the
following information:
A. The words “Official Program” in prominent lettering and the SCCA
emblem on the front cover.
B. The Sanction Number assigned to the event on the front cover.
C. A conspicuous announcement: “Held under the SCCA General
Competition Rules.”
D. The name of the organizer.
E. Name, location, and date of the event.
F. Schedule of planned competitions.
G. Names of entrants and drivers entered for each competition, with
identifying numbers and marques for their cars.
H. A detailed list of awards for each competition, if other than those
provided in the GCR.
I. The names of the principal Officials.
3.7.5. Private Event Definition
A private event is one where no admission charge of any kind is made.
Participants’ entry fees or other charges to participants are not admission
charges. Attendance at private events shall be limited to the following:
A. Drivers and entrants, plus a nominal crew, whose size may be
limited by the Supplementary Regulations, not to exceed a total of
six (6), including the driver and entrant.
B.
SCCA members and their guests whose names have been furnished
to the Registrar before the event; such guests shall identify themselves at Registration.
C. Any other individual having a specific assigned duty at the event,
who holds and has available credentials for the assigned job, plus
one guest each.
D. Minors under twelve (12) years of age are not counted under these
limitations.
E.
Non-spectator Club Races are considered private events.
F.
The classification of “private event” shall be removed and the
appropriate insurance premium for a public event shall be considered due and payable if there is any local newspaper, radio, televiGCR - 17
General
3. Events
3. Events
sion, or similar publicity placed by or traceable to the course owner,
the organizing region, or a representative of either of them.
3.8.
AWARDS
In SCCA Events, participants shall compete primarily for points and
trophies. Financial awards may be offered.
3.8.1. Distribution Of Awards
The organizers shall distribute all awards immediately after determination
of the Official Results of a competition, or after such additional time as
the SCCA may allow. Distribution of awards shall commence after the
period for receiving protests has elapsed. When a protest which would
affect distribution of awards has been lodged, distribution shall be withheld until the protest has been settled. The SOM, if notified of an intention to appeal their decision, shall order awards, which may be affected
by the outcome of the appeal, to be withheld pending the decision of the
Court of Appeals.
3.8.2. Expense, Starting, And Appearance Money
Participants are free to accept, and organizers, car owners, or sponsors
shall be free to offer such expense, starting, and appearance money as
they may wish.
3.8.3. Prize Money
The SCCA may require as one of the conditions of sanction for an event
that any prize money to be offered be placed in escrow a satisfactory
period of time prior to the start of the event, and that the SCCA may
control the distribution of these awards.
3.8.4. Trophies
In SCCA National Championship and Regional events, trophies shall be
awarded on the following minimum basis for each class and category of
car.
Number of Starters
Trophies Awarded For Finishing Position
2
1st position only
3
1st and 2nd
4
1st, 2nd, and 3rd
See 3.7.3., Trophy Availability.
3.8.5. Points For Co-Driver
In events that allow for nomination of co-drivers, such as endurance
races, series points (if any) shall be awarded in full to any co-driver who
completes the minimum distance stated in the Supplementary Regulations, or one-third (1/3) the distance if none is specified.
3.9.
CHAMPIONSHIPS
3.9.1. Divisional Championships
The SCCA shall designate a champion in each division for each class
of car eligible to compete in National Championship events. Winners of
these championships shall be designated Northeast, Southeast, Central,
Great Lakes, Midwest, Southwest, Northern Pacific, Southern Pacific,
Great Lakes, and Rocky Mountain Division Champions in each class.
A. Divisional Championship Points
Championships shall be determined annually on the basis of a driver’s
accumulation of points earned in his or her best performances in a
maximum of six (6) National Championship races. No more than two
(2) races shall be outside the division in which the driver’s Region of
GCR - 18
Record is located.
B. Point Awards
Points in SCCA National Championship events shall be awarded to all
finishers through 9th place as follows:
Position
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
Points
12
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C. Ties
Ties in the final point totals shall be resolved on the basis of each
driver’s record of first place finishes; then if necessary, second place
finishes; then if necessary, third place finishes, including those finishes
in excess of a driver’s best six, if any. If two or more drivers have
accumulated the same number of first, second and third place finishes
in the races counted, they shall be considered tied for the position in
the standings.
D. Dead Heats
In the case of a dead heat for any race finishing position, the total
points involved based on the number tied shall be divided evenly among
those tied. Example: If the dead heat is for second place involving two
cars, the points from second and third place shall be added together
and divided by two to obtain the points awarded for a dead heat for
second place. Eight (8) would be the number of points awarded each
driver; there would be no third place points awarded in that event.
Points shall continue starting with fourth place, etc.
E. Points Awarded Only to One Driver
Points shall be awarded to one driver per car placing in one predesignated competition per championship event. When more than one driver
competes in a given car, neither shall be awarded points.
F.
Drivers’ Division
1. Region of Record. If an SCCA driver is a member of only one
SCCA region, that region shall be the driver’s Region of Record.
If an SCCA driver belongs to more than one SCCA region, the
driver shall designate one region as the Region of Record.
2.
Division of Record. A driver’s division shall be determined by
his official Region of Record as recorded in the membership
files at the SCCA National Office.
3.
Change of Division. Change of Division of Record shall be
PRIOR to the conduct of the third National in EITHER incoming
or outgoing division, whichever is earlier. A driver desiring to
change his or her division for the purpose of accumulating
National Championship points is responsible for notifying the
Manager of the Membership Department, in writing, and shall
also provide written confirmation of membership in a region in
the division to which they are transferring.
GCR - 19
General
3. Events
3. Events
Such notification and confirmation shall be received, in writing,
by the Manager of the Membership Department at the National
Office, prior to the conduct of the third National Championship
event in EITHER incoming or outgoing division. It is the responsibility of the driver to initiate action to ensure such notification and confirmation reaches the Club Racing Division of the
National Office.
4.
Points Per Division. A driver entering multiple classes may
accumulate points towards eligibility in the National Championship Runoffs in one or multiple divisions. Eligibility for the
National Championship Runoffs may only be earned in one division per class. A competitor may not earn eligibility for the
National Championship Runoffs in one class in more than one
division. The driver shall provide confirmation of membership
in each region/division he is designating for each class. Such
notification and confirmation shall be received, in writing, by
the Manager of the Club Racing Department at the National
Office, prior to the conduct of the third National Championship
event in the relevant division.
3.9.2. Interdivisional Championship Event
SCCA shall schedule an event each year called the SCCA Runoffs, open
by invitation to the highest placing drivers in the National Point Championship Series held in each division. This event shall be considered a National
Campionship event per GCR section 3.1.1. The SCCA Runoffs event shall
determine the SCCA National Champion in each eligible class.
Supplementary Regulations defining driver and car eligibility and other
details of this event shall be published by the SCCA.
The 2008 Event date is October 6-12, 2008.
A. Invitations to the SCCA Runoffs
Invitations may be issued to the highest placing drivers in each Runoffseligible class of the National Championship point series held in each
division.
As a minimum, a driver shall have been classified as a starter in at least
four (4) National Championship events in the current race season, of
which two (2) shall have been in his or her Division of Record, and a
finisher in at least three (3) National Championship events, and qualifying in the same class (or classes) for which their entry is accepted,
but they may drive any car eligible for that class.
B. Defending National Champions
When determining the number of invitations to be issued for the SCCA
Runoffs, a current defending National Champion will not be included
in that count. The defending National Champion may participate in
the Runoffs without qualifying in the class being defended. Current
defending National Champions who do not qualify as an entrant to the
SCCA Runoffs the following year may be accepted as an entry in the
same class under the following conditions:
1. Shall hold a current SCCA National Competition License.
2.
Participation in the Runoffs without having been a starter in
the same class in at least four national championship events
during the current year. This cannot be invoked two years in a
row.
GCR - 20
3.
Cannot bump anyone from the field of starters who is an
accepted entry.
4.
May not participate in the SCCA Runoffs Travel Fund distribution, unless otherwise qualified.
C. Refusal Of Entry
A competitor whose entry has been refused for the SCCA Runoffs shall
have standing only to protest and appeal such refusal of entry. He may
do so up to 15 days before the start of the event. (See 4.7.1., Refusal
of Entry.)
D. Late Entries
1. Entries shall be postmarked with a US Government Postmark
by a date announced annually by the SCCA.
2.
An entrant who fails to file an entry application to the SCCA by
the required date may apply for a late entry to the Club Racing
Department. The application shall be accompanied by a NONREFUNDABLE late fee in the amount of two hundred dollars
($200), payable to SCCA, in addition to the normal entry fee.
3.
The late entry applicant forfeits any claim he or she may have
to participate in SCCA Runoffs Travel Fund distribution or any
contingency money that may be posted by the SCCA.
4.
A late entry applicant cannot bump or otherwise change the
status of an entrant who has entered on time and has been
accepted. The decision on acceptance of a late entrant may be
made on a date announced annually by the SCCA.
E. Number of Races
The number of races allowed in the Runoffs will not exceed 24. If there
are more than 24 National classes in a given year, the classes eligible
for Runoffs competition in the following year will be determined by the
total entries per National class over all divisions, and class(es) with
the least number of entrants will be determined as ineligible for the
following year.
GCR - 21
General
3. Events
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
4.
PARTICIPANT LICENSING, EVENT CREDENTIALS, & ENTRIES
4.1.
SCCA RESERVATION OF RIGHTS
SCCA is a private, not for profit organization. It reserves the right to deny
the issuance of any license, or to revoke any license previously issued, for
any reason or no reason, except that it will not deny or revoke a license
solely on the basis of race, creed, color, sex, or national origin.
4.1.1. Submission to Rules
Any person who applies for an SCCA license shall be deemed to have
agreed to the following and so acknowledge in writing upon request:
A. He or she is familiar with the GCR.
B. He or she agrees without reservation to the consequences resulting
from the GCR.
C. He or she renounces the right to have recourse, except with the
written consent of the SCCA, to any arbitrator or tribunal not
provided for in the GCR.
4.2.
LICENSES - TYPES/GRADES/EXPIRATION
4.2.1. Types and Grades
A. Competition
1. Novice Permit
2. Regional
3. National
4. Vintage
5. Minor (See 4.4.6., Licensing of Minors)
B.
Official
1. Regional
2. Divisional
3. National
4. Senior
C. Steward
1. Steward-in-training
2. Divisional
3. Divisional Chief
4. National
5. National/Divisional Chief
6. National Chief
7. National Series Chief
8. Senior
4.2.2. License Expiration
All licenses shall indicate the month and year of expiration. This shall
coincide with the SCCA membership anniversary date. Competitors and
officials, once registered, may participate for the duration of the weekend,
even though his/her membership may lapse during that period.
4.3.
ENTRANTS, DRIVERS AND CREW
4.3.1. Possession of License
Every driver who registers for an event shall be in possession of a current
license of the grade required for that classification of event (See 3.1.,
Types of SCCA Race Events), and a current SCCA Membership Card. All
entrants shall be members of SCCA and are subject to all provisions of
the GCR.
GCR - 22
4.3.2. Presentation of License
A driver or entrant, where Entrant Licenses are required, shall show his or
her license to an official on demand.
4.3.3. Crew Members
Any individual may be a crew member.
4.4.
COMPETITION LICENSING
4.4.1. Medical Requirements
A. Every applicant for a Competition License or Permit shall submit a
completed physical examination on the SCCA form to the National
Office. The examination date shall be no more than three (3) months
prior to the date of application. A new medical form is not required
for a Novice Permit holder upgrading to a Regional or National
License. A current physical examination form must be submitted
every five (5) years for applicants ages 16-35; every two (2) years
for applicants ages 36-59; and every year for applicants age sixty
plus (60+). A member shall maintain continuous membership and
license for physical examination form to be valid.
B.
Medical forms are available from regions and from the National
Office.
C. Many medical conditions may impact the fitness of a competitor.
They will be reviewed by the Club Racing Medical Director and the
Medical Review Board to determine whether to issue a license or
not. The specific medical conditions that may preclude issuance
of a license are varied and change according to medical improvements. They will not be listed, but any denial of a license medically
will be explained to the applicant.
4.4.2. Participation Requirements
A. A competition license holder shall participate in the minimum
number of SCCA races specified for his or her grade of license. No
credit shall be given for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drivers Schools
Races held as part of a Drivers School
Events not sanctioned by the SCCA
Events resulting in a DNS or DNF
B. Credit for One Race Per Event
A driver shall receive credit for only one race per race group per sanctioned event, regardless of the number of races entered. A Novice driver
shall receive credit for only one race per sanctioned event, regardless of
the number of races entered.
4.4.3. Novice Permits
As provided in Section 4.4.3.A. below, Novice Permits will be issued to
enable student drivers to obtain the training and experience needed for
Regional Licenses.
With an active membership, a Novice Permit is valid for 24 months, with
the following exceptions:
1. Minors must have current waiver on file at National Office
2. Drivers over age 60 must have a physical every year. (See 4.4.1.)
3. Drivers requiring a medical waiver must have a physical every year.
(See 4.4.1.)
GCR - 23
General
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
If the requirements have not been completed by the expiration date of
the permit, the applicant shall start over with no credit given for previous
schooling or racing.
A. Novice Permit Issuance
An SCCA Regular, or Spouse member who is over sixteen (16) years
of age, who holds a valid Operators Permit/State Driver’s License in his
or her state of residence which allows the solo operation of a motor
vehicle, may apply for a Novice Permit. For applicants under the age of
majority (typically eighteen (18) years of age but see Section 4.4.6.B.),
only the National Office may issue permits. All others may be issued
by the National Office, a Divisional Licensing Chairman, or a Region by
submitting the following:
1. Completed current medical form. (See 4.4.1.)
2. Fee of $110. Good for 2 years, includes GCR. (Region retains
$40)
3. Two (2) passport photographs.
4. Proof of age.
5. A completed Novice Permit Application.
For applicants under the age of majority, the following must also be
submitted:
6.
7.
8.
A completed Parental Consent, Release and waiver of Liability,
Assumption of Risk and Indemnity Agreement.
A completed Minor’s Assumption of Risk Acknowledgment.
A copy of both sides of their State Operator’s Permit/Driver’s
License.
The applicant will receive the Novice Permit, with one photo attached.
This Permit shall be presented at Driver School.
B. Driver School Requirements
Holders of Novice Permits shall meet the following minimum Driver
School requirements before they may participate in a Regional race:
1. Obtain the signature of the Chief Steward attesting to participation at each SCCA Drivers School attended.
2.
Complete a total of at least six (6) hours of in-car, on course
time at Drivers School events.
3.
Complete at least two (2) Driver School events with a “Satisfactory” rating.
C. Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
The Chief Steward of an SCCA Driver School, or the Divisional License
Chairman, may waive all or part of the Drivers School requirements
for drivers with prior racing experience. Only the Divisional License
Chairman, the National Administrator for Driver Licensing, or the
Manager of Club Racing may waive anything other than Driver School
requirements. Applicants under the age of eighteen (18) may only be
waived by the Director of Club Racing. If at any time the Club has no
Director of Club Racing, the Club Racing Manager or designated department head shall process applicants.
D. Private Driving Schools
Completion of a course at an SCCA accredited private driving school
may be submitted in lieu of one SCCA Driver’s School, and credit for
it granted at the discretion of the Chief Steward of an SCCA school or
GCR - 24
the Divisional Licensing Chairman upon completion of three (3) hours incar on course time at SCCA schools. Students completing the requirements associated with an SCCA Competition License issuing school
may submit their license application with their completion certificate
and medical form to recieve their SCCA Competition License. A list
of accredited driving schools will be published in FasTrack or may be
requested from the Club Office. Schools are subject to being disapproved at any time. Certificates issued to students before disapproval
shall be honored. Applicants under the age of eighteen (18) may apply
only to the Club Racing department for waiver of one (1) SCCA Driver’s
School.
Private Driving Schools can be accepted for credit towards a Novice
Permit under the following conditions:
1. The Chief Steward of the SCCA Drivers’ School or the Divisional
Licensing Representative may accept one(1) private Driving
School in lieu of an SCCA School for license purposes.
2.
The Club Racing Department will list those private schools
whose graduates may receive the above-mentioned SCCA
acceptance.
3.
The private schools on the above list will pay SCCA a service
fee.
E. Racing on a Novice Permit
Upon completion of Driver School requirements, the holder of a Novice
Permit shall:
1. Participate in two Regional events and obtain the signature of
the Chief Steward attesting to satisfactory performance.
2.
Complete the requirements for a Regional license within a
maximum of two (2) years from date of issue.
3.
A driver who logs six (6) Regional races on the Novice Permit,
and then applies directly for a National License may be licensed
for a fee of $75. Applicant shall supply official results for any
races beyond the two (2) required.
F. Revocation
A Novice Permit may be revoked by the Divisional License Chairman
appointed by the SCCA for his division of record, upon recommendation
of the Chief Steward of an event.
4.4.4.
Regional Competition License Requirements
A. Applying for Regional License
Holders of Novice Permits who are current SCCA Regular or Spouse
members in good standing and who have satisfactorily completed the
Driver School requirements and two (2) Regional events may apply to
the National Office for a Regional Competition License.
Submit the following to:
SCCA
Competition License
6700 SW Topeka Blvd. Building 300
Topeka, Kansas 66619
1.
Novice Permit with approving signature of the Chief Steward
or the Chairman SOM of the second “satisfactory” event.
GCR - 25
General
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
2.
A current medical form if necessary (See 4.4.1.).
3.
Regional License fee of $75, payable to SCCA; includes GCR.
B. Refusal to Approve License; Appeal
Refusal by the Chief Steward or Chairman SOM to approve the Regional
Competition License application may be appealed by the applicant to
the Divisional License Chairman for final decision.
C. Novice Permit as Temporary License
Once a Novice Permit holder has completed the requirements for a
Regional Competition License and has had the permit signed on the
front page, he or she may photocopy the entire permit. The photocopy
is valid for the three consecutive weekends immediately following the
submission of the Novice Permit to the National Office. The original
shall be submitted as outlined in 4.4.4.A., above. If the Permit holder
elects to run six (6) races on the logbook as provided in 4.4.3.E.3., he
or she shall use the original Novice Permit and not a photocopy.
D. Renewal of Regional Competition License
Renewal forms will be mailed automatically. Regional License holders
may apply for renewal by submitting to the National Office:
1. Completed renewal application with a record of completing
at least two (2) events during the preceding twelve (12)
months.
2.
A completed Medical form if necessary (See 4.4.1.)
3.
Regional License fee of $75, payable to SCCA; includes GCR.
4.
A “Special Handling Fee” may apply. (See 4.4.9.)
E. Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
Participation requirements for issuance or renewal of a Regional License
may be waived in total or in part only by the Divisional License Chairman
of the applicant’s Division of Record, the National Administrator of
Driver Licensing, or the Manager of Club Racing. Applicants under the
age of eighteen (18) may only be waived by the Director of Club Racing.
If at any time the Club has no Director of Club Racing, the Club Racing
Manager or designated department head shall process applicants.
Licenses accepted in section 3.1.5 paragraphs 1 and 3 shall be accepted
in lieu of requirements as listed in section 4.4.4.A.1 and 2 for issuance
of a Regional Competition License.
4.4.5.
National Competition License Requirements
A. Eligibility
Drivers who are current SCCA Regular, or Spouse members in good
standing and who have completed at least four (4) Regional events as a
Regional Competition License holder within the license year may apply
to the National Office for a National Competition License.
B. Application
Submit Regional Competition License with record of completion of at
least four (4) events in the past twelve (12) months, signed by applicant. The two (2) events run as a Novice do not count. Send in a
current medical form if necessary (See 4.4.1.) and the appropriate
National License fee.
GCR - 26
C. Completion During Regional/National Event
A driver satisfactorily completing his/her license upgrade requirements
or receiving a waiver from the Divisional Licensing Administrator during
a Regional/National event needs only Chief Steward approval to enter
that National event.
D. Renewal of National Competition License
Renewal applications will be mailed automatically. National Competition
License holders may apply for a renewal by submitting:
1. Completed renewal application with a record of completing in
the preceding twelve (12) months either three (3) SCCA Sanctioned National, Professional, or FIA events, or two (2) SCCA
Sanctioned National, Professional, or FIA events, and one (1)
Regional event, or four (4) SCCA Sanctioned Regional events.
A driver who has not met these participation requirements shall
contact his or her Divisional License Chairman for a waiver of
the requirements.
2.
A completed medical form if necessary (See 4.4.1.)
3.
National License fee of $75, payable to SCCA; includes GCR.
4.
A “Special Handling Fee” may apply (See 4.4.9.).
E. Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
Participation requirements for issuing or renewing a National Competition License may be waived in total or in part only by the Divisional
License Chairman of the applicant’s Division of Record, the National
Administrator of Driver Licensing, or the Manager of Club Racing. Applicants under the age of majority may only be waived by the Director of
Club Racing. If at any time the Club has no Director of Club Racing,
the Club Racing Manager or designated department head shall process
applicants.
F. Canadian “ASN Canada FIA” Licensing
Canadian residents holding a current ASN Professional Grade “A” or
better license may apply to the National Office with the appropriate fee
for issuance of an SCCA National Competition License.
1. Applicant shall be a current member of SCCA.
4.4.6.
2.
Application shall include a copy of the current ASN License and
ASN Medical form.
3.
The normal requirements of this Section may be followed
thereafter.
Licensing of Minors
A. Licensing
No one under sixteen (16) years of age may be issued a Novice Permit
or Competition License.
B. Age of Majority
The age of majority for licensing purposes is determined by state law
but is typically 18 years of age. Certain states may impose higher age
limits and all license applicants must be of the age of majority for the
state they are residing in.
4.4.7.
Vintage Competition Licensing
GCR - 27
General
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
A. Eligibility
Holders of Novice Permits who are current SCCA Regular, or Spouse
members in good standing and who have satisfactorily completed the
Driver School requirements and two (2) Regional events, within the
preceding 24 months, may apply to the National Office for a Vintage
Competition License.
B. Application
Submit Novice Permit with approving signature of the Chief Steward or
the Chairman SOM of the second “satisfactory” event with a current
medical form if necessary (See 4.4.1.) and the appropriate license fee
payable to SCCA.
C. Renewal
Renewal forms will be mailed automatically. Vintage License holders
may apply for renewal by submitting:
1. Completed renewal application with a record of completing at
lease two (2) Vintage or SCCA sanctioned Regional events in
the preceding twelve (12) months.
2.
A completed medical form if necessary (See 4.4.1.)
3.
Vintage License fee of $55, payable to SCCA; does not include
a GCR.
4.
A “Special Handling Fee” may apply. (See 4.4.9.)
D. Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
Participation requirements for issuance or renewal of a Vintage License
may be waived in total or in part only by the Divisional License Chairman
of the applicant’s Division of Record or the Manager of Club Racing.
Applicants under the age of eighteen (18) may only be waived by the
Director of Club Racing. If at any time the Club has no Director of Club
Racing, the Club Racing Manager or designated department head shall
process applicants.
4.4.9. Special Handling Fee
A special handling and/or FAX transmission fee shall be charged for any
special attention over and above the normal processing time for a competition license.
Special handling is a twenty-four (24) hour turn around process. The
license is returned via Federal Express. The Special Handling Fee of $125
is in addition to the normal appropriate license fee.
4.4.10. Unusual Licensing Circumstances
A. Probation Letter as a License
1. When probation is given as a penalty, the Chairman of the
Stewards of the Meeting (SOM) shall issue a Probation Letter
to the competitor. The Chairman SOM shall confiscate the
competitor’s license and enclose the license and a copy of the
Probation Letter with the Observer’s Report. While the probation is effective immediately, the designated probation period
does not begin until the competition license, as well as any
imposed fine, is received by the Chairman SOM or the National
Office.
2.
The competitor shall use the Probation Letter as his/her license
GCR - 28
until the terms of the probation have been met completely.
3.
Upon completion of the terms of probation, the competitor
shall send the completed Probation Letter to the Club office via
registered mail for the return of his/her license.
B. Statement of Facts Affidavit in lieu of license
Statement of Facts Affidavit shall be used ONLY if a competitor has
received a current competition license from the Central Licensing
Department and does not have it in his/her possession at the event. If
the Statement of Facts Affidavit cannot be verified by Central Licensing
shall be subject to automatic penalties per 7.4.D.
4.5.
RACE OFFICIALS
4.5.1. Officials’ Licensing Specialties
1. Emergency Services
2. Flagging and Communications
3. Grid/Pits
4. Race Administration
5. Registration
6. Scrutineering
7. Sound Control
8. Starters
9. Stewards
10. Timing and Scoring
NOTE: Emergency Services includes three sub-areas of Medical, Fire
Rescue, Course Marshal. Race Administration includes Race Chairman,
Radio Tech, Paddock, Hospitality, Data Coordinator, Press, Announcer,
etc. (functions that are not hot-track related and may not be included in
every event).
4.5.2. Race Official Licenses
It is required that all Officials under SCCA control at all SCCA sanctioned
events shall either be licensed in the specialty or hold a logbook in the
specialty, except physicians and nurses. These licenses are to be checked
at Registration (preferred) or by the Chief of the Specialty at each event.
4.5.3. Officials’ Membership Requirements
A. SCCA Runoffs: All officials shall be licensed members of SCCA.
B.
Other Events: Only licensed members may be placed and/or work
in hazardous areas. Non-members may work only in areas where
the hazards do not exceed those to the general public. Exception:
Employees of Services hired by the region or track who will be
entering a restricted area such as ambulance, wrecker and fire crews
are recommended to be, but do not have to be, SCCA members.
For the purpose of determining a hazardous area, the definition
“outside the protection of a positive barrier” will be used.
C. Temporary /Trial Memberships and Licenses are available. This
membership/license is good for 90 days from the date of issue,
is renewable, and allows for individuals to receive certain regular
membership privileges. The issuing region may charge fees.
4.6.
EVENT CREDENTIALS
4.6.1. Waivers
All persons desiring to participate in an event shall sign the SCCA authoGCR - 29
General
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
rized Release and Waiver of Liability Agreement prior to being issued
event credentials (passes).
4.6.2. Photo ID
A Club Racing Photo ID card is required for any licensed SCCA members
registering as a participant at all SCCA events except for those possessing
trial or temporary memberships. (See 4.5.3.C., above) It must include
a current photo of the member named on the photo ID card. The use
of state issued driver’s licenses, university ID cards, or any other cards
of this type ARE NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable forms are those
issued by the SCCA National Office as a license, the Club Racing Department, the SCCA Pro Racing Department as a participant ID, or one issued
by an SCCA region as a substitute for a license. These are to be accepted
by all regions at all events regardless of issuing region. The name, photograph, member number, and entry credential for the current event shall
be clearly visible. Photo ID’s will not be issued to temporary members (90
days). Instead, cardboard or wristband credentials shall be issued.
4.6.3. Minor Credentials
At all SCCA Sanctioned events requiring drivers to hold a National or
Regional Competition License or Novice Permit, participants sixteen (16)
years old and older may be issued pit credentials only if they hold the
proper minor Crew License. All other minors under the age of eighteen
(18) shall not be allowed to enter the pit area, or any other areas, which
provide less protection than that provided for the general public. Participants who are members, and over the age of eighteen (18), may be
issued crew (pit) credentials.
4.7.
ENTRIES
An entry made and accepted in accordance with the GCR and the Supplementary Regulations shall constitute a contract binding an entrant to
take part in the competition entered unless prevented by forces beyond
his or her control. The organizers shall comply with the conditions of
entry, provided that the entrant has made every effort to take part in the
competition. A breach of such contract may be treated as a breach of
the GCR.
An entry is considered official and a competitor is considered entered in
an event when:
A. A signed (or in the case of an electronic entry, the approved Club
Racing consent box checked), completed, and official entry blank
has been submitted and received by the organizers (subject to
subsequent refusal per section 4.7.1.).
B.
The entry fee has been paid and received by the organizers.
C. All fines due and payable to SCCA must have been paid.
4.7.1. Refusal Of Entry
The organizers have the right to refuse an entry at their discretion without
giving a reason for refusal. If an entry for any competition is refused, notification of such refusal shall be sent to the entrant at the address given
on the Entry Form as soon as possible and normally at least five (5) days
before the event. (See 3.9.2.C. regarding refusal of Runoffs entry.)
4.7.2. Falsification Of Entry
An entry which contains a false or incorrect statement may be determined
to be null and void by the SOM or other First Court. The entrant may be
deemed guilty of a breach of the GCR, the entry fee may be forfeited, and
GCR - 30
further penalties may be imposed. (See 7, Penalties.)
4.7.3. Withdrawal (Scratch) Of Entry
An entry may be withdrawn without penalty if the withdrawal is made
in writing or by wire prior to the entry deadline date. In such cases, the
organizers shall return the entry fee. For withdrawals after the entry deadline, return of all or part of the entry fee is at the organizers’ discretion.
However, an entrant or driver accepted to take part in a competition who
does not take part in that competition but takes part in another on the
same day may be held in violation of the GCR.
4.7.4. Assumed Names
In events requiring SCCA National or Regional Competition Licenses,
or Novice Permits, drivers shall not race under assumed names, unless
authorized by the Manager of Club Racing. All official documents (entry,
waivers, etc.) shall be signed with the driver’s legal name.
4.7.5. Dual Entry
Dual entry is permitted under a single sanction number. Separate entry
forms and fees are required for each class entered.
GCR - 31
General
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5.
OFFICIALS, THEIR DUTIES, OPERATING PROCEDURES, AND
EQUIPMENT
5.1.
PRINCIPAL OFFICIALS
The staff of principal officials, whose duty it shall be to direct the control
of the event, may include:
Race Chairman
Chief Course Marshal
Chief of Emergency Services
Chief of Flagging
Chief of Communications
Chief Registrar
Chief of Sound Control
Chief Starter
Chief/Series Chief Technical and Safety Inspector (Scrutineer)
Chief Timer and Scorer
Chief Observer
Chief of Pit
Chief of Grid
Chief of Race Administration
Judges
Stewards of the Meeting (SOM)
Chief Steward/Series Chief Steward
Assistant Chief Steward-Safety
They shall be termed “Officials” and may, with the exception of the SOM,
have assistants also termed “Officials,” to whom any of their duties may
be delegated. Any worker is considered an official.
5.1.1. Required Officials
At every event there shall be a Chief Steward, at least two (2) SOM, an
Assistant Chief Steward-Safety, and a Chief Medical Official, in addition
to other officials as necessary.
5.1.2.
Appointment
A. Interdivisional Event
All officials shall be appointed by SCCA.
B. SCCA National, Regional, and Restricted Events
All Stewards shall be appointed by the Executive Steward of the Division. All other Officials shall be appointed by the Region conducting the
event, subject to approval by the Executive Steward.
5.1.3. Minimum Grades of Licenses
At the following events the listed minimum license grades are mandatory:
A. National Championship Events - National License minimum for
Chief of Emergency Services, Chief of Flagging and Communications, Chief Registrar, Chief Starter, Chief Timer and Scorer, Chief
Scrutineer, Chief of Grid, and Chief of Pit. The Chief Steward shall
be a National Series Chief Steward.
B.
Regional Events - Divisional License minimum for all the Chiefs of
specialties listed in Section 5.1.3.A. The Chief Steward shall hold
a Divisional Chief, National Chief, or National Series Chief Steward
License.
GCR - 32
C. Driver Schools - National License minimum for all Chiefs of specialities listed in 5.1.3.A, except Timing and Scoring. The Chief Steward
shall be a National Chief or National Series Chief Steward.
D. For all racing events - The Stewards of the Meeting must include,
at a minimum, a Chairman and one other licensed steward in addition to any Stewards-in-Training. The minimum license grade for
the Chairman of the Stewards of the Meet for a national race is a
National Stewards License or higher. The minimum license grade
for the Chairman of the Stewards of the Meet for all other events
is a Divisional Stewards License or higher. The Assistant Chief
Steward-Safety shall be at least a Divisional Steward.
5.1.4. Right to Supervision
The SCCA reserves the right to designate a qualified person to evaluate
any competition.
5.1.5. Plurality of Duties
The same person may hold more than one official position. The Chief
Steward, Series Chief Steward, and Chairman SOM shall have no plurality
of duties.
5.1.6. Separation of Duties
An Official shall not perform duties other than those clearly attached to
his or her appointment or appointments.
5.2.
RACE CHAIRMAN
5.2.1. Race Chairman Responsibilities
The Race Chairman shall be responsible for the organization of an event.
Specifically, he or she shall:
A. Determine with the promoters, organizers, and the Chief Steward
the schedule and all other activities to occur during the event, draft
the Supplementary Regulations, and see that all Entry Forms are
printed and mailed.
B.
Arrange that insurance conforming to SCCA requirements is
procured, and that a copy of the Insurance Certificate is presented
to the Chairman of the SOM and the Chief Steward prior to the
commencement of the event.
C. See that qualified Officials and workers are appointed and that they
are on station.
D. Arrange for the use of the course and all necessary facilities.
E.
Arrange for emergency vehicles and equipment.
F.
Arrange for trophies and their proper distribution.
G. Arrange for receipt and acknowledgment of entries.
H. Arrange for proper registration of all entries.
I.
Arrange for the distribution of Official Results to the SOM, entrants,
the organizers, and the SCCA.
J.
Obtain the necessary equipment to conduct all post-race and prerace inspections as required at all SCCA race events.
GCR - 33
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
K.
Arrange, in conjunction with the Chief of Emergency Services,
the required equipment and facilities in accordance with Section
5.4.3.
5.3.
COURSE MARSHAL
The Course Chief shall be responsible for final preparation and maintenance of the course and other related duties assigned to him or her by the
Chief of Emergency Services in conjunction with the Chief Steward.
5.4.
EMERGENCY SERVICES - MEDICAL AND FIRE SAFETY
The Chief of Emergency Services shall be responsible, in conjunction with
the Race Chairman and Assistant Chief Steward-Safety or Chief Medical
Official, for staffing and equipping the medical organization.
5.4.1. Purpose
A. To establish equipment and personnel needed to effect a workable
medical, fire, and safety plan. Detailed plans need to be based
on the specific conditions at the event facility and local, state or
federal protocols and regulations.
B.
The Chief Medical Officer needs to be familiar with local, state, and
federal regulations for accident and medical emergencies. At tracks
where SCCA volunteer medical personnel cannot perform medical
duties, the Chief Medical Officer will still be responsible to ensure
the proper medical equipment is available, and that proper medical
procedures are being followed.
C. A copy of the medical, fire and safety plan for each track must be
submitted by the Divisional Executive Steward to the Club Office
and the following officials prior to the beginning of the racing
season: Divisional Administrator Emergency Services, Club Racing
Department, Risk Management Department, National Administrator
of Stewards, National Administrator Emergency Services, National
Administrator Race Control.
5.4.2.
Personnel
A. Medical
The following minimums apply:
1. There will be a Chief Medical Officer who is either: 1) Physician,
MD or DO, preferably with an EMS background and licensed to
practice in at least one (1) state or, 2) Paramedic or equivalent
(advanced life support technician) with an active license or, 3)
PA (Physicians Assistant) or APN (Advanced Practice Nurse)
trained and experienced in EMS and emergency medicine with
an active license.
B.
2.
There should be a second licensed medical person (EMT, paramedic, physician’s assistant, registered nurse, etc.) to assist
the Chief Medical Officer(s) and may serve as the Medical
Records Secretary.
3.
Medical personnel shall report to the Chief Medical Officer for
the event.
4.
It is recommended the initial medical response, which may be
an ambulance, occur within two (2) minutes.
Fire Fighters
1. There shall be at least one (1) person assigned to each fire
GCR - 34
truck who is trained to use the equipment on the truck. It is
recommended two (2) persons be assigned to each fire truck.
2.
Fire fighters shall report to the Assistant Chief Steward-Safety
unless there is a Chief of Emergency Services assigned.
C. Wrecker Operator(s)
1. There shall be at least one (1) person assigned to a wrecker
who is trained to use the equipment.
2.
5.4.3.
Wrecker personnel shall report to the Assistant Chief
Steward-Safety unless there is a Chief of Emergency Services
assigned.
Equipment
A. Ambulances
1. There shall be at least one (1) ambulance which shall meet all
requirements for the jurisdiction (where “jurisdiction” means
the governing body, such as a township, city, or county) in
which the event occurs for Advance Life Support at the track
during any competition event. Basic Life Support is acceptable
only if the track medical facility is equipped and staffed for
Advance Life Support.
2.
Arrangements for transportation from track by EMS service
should be in the medical operations protocol.
B. Fire Truck
There shall be at least one (1) fire truck which shall be equipped to fight
automobile fires. It is recommended the vehicle be stationed so it can
reach any point on the racing surface within two (2) minutes at a speed
not to exceed fifty (50) mph.
C. Wrecker
There shall be at least one (1) wrecker which shall be capable of lifting
any race car in the event. The wrecker may also serve as a fire truck if
so equipped.
D. Telephone
There shall be an operating telephone or radio in the tower or medical
duty station which can contact community emergency services and
hospitals.
E.
Other Recommended Equipment
1. It is recommended the Emergency Services Team be equipped
with the following:
a. Sharp knife
b. Bolt cutters, 3-foot
c. Fire axe
d. Pry bars, 2-foot and 6-foot
e. Rope, (3/4 inch nylon/or strap, 6000 lb test), 30 feet
f. Bow saw (30 inch blades) or equivalent tool
g. Tool box, containing: vice grip pliers, hammer (5 lb), cold
chisel (9 inch by 1 inch), small pry bar, screwdrivers (flat
head and Phillips), “Y”-shaped chisel, tin shears, hack
saw and blades, adjustable crescent wrenches (large and
small).
h. Oil dry compound
GCR - 35
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
2.
The equipment should be carried on the fire truck, wrecker or
MERV (Multiple Emergency Response Vehicle).
3.
If a power compound rescue tool and trained operator is on call
and available within ten (10) minutes, it does not have to be
located at the event site.
4.
Comparable equipment may be substituted with the advance
approval of the Divisional Executive Steward and Divisional
Medical Administrator.
5.4.4.
Operating Rules
A. Emergency Plan
The Chief Medical Officer and the Assistant Chief Steward-Safety shall,
before allowing the commencement of racing (including practice and
qualifying), verify that a written emergency plan has been prepared and
distributed to all emergency and supervisory personnel.
B. Briefing
All emergency service personnel should have a briefing to review duties,
duty stations, equipment, race circuit characteristics, vehicle, and other
protocol.
C. Dispatching
The dispatching of emergency vehicles on the track shall be authorized
by the Chief Steward. Dispatching procedures shall be agreed on in
advance by the Chief Steward, Chief(s) of Flagging and Communications, Chief Medical Officer, Chief of Emergency Services (if assigned),
and Assistant Chief Steward-Safety.
D. Hospital Arrangements
1. The Race Chairman and Chief Medical Official shall establish a
primary route to the primary and secondary hospital prior to an
event, and advise the vehicle drivers.
2.
The Chief Medical Official shall confirm, well in advance of the
event, the availability of adequate hospital staff and facilities
and the protocols to be followed.
E. Identification of Personnel
Emergency services personnel should be readily identifiable by some
means other than the usual passes (e.g., vest, arm bands, jackets).
F. Start of Race
All emergency vehicles shall be equipped, staffed and engines running
for the first lap of each race group.
G. Suspension of Racing
Racing shall be suspended if the personnel specified in 5.4.2.A and
5.4.2.B, or the equipment specified in 5.4.3.A - C., are no longer on the
premises or are unable to perform their assigned duties.
H. Counter-Race Direction Driving or Towing
During an event it is expressly forbidden to drive or tow a car, at any
time under any conditions, in a direction opposite to that in which the
event is being run without the specific approval of the Chief Steward.
Infraction of this rule may result in a penalty. (See 7, Penalties)
5.5.
FLAGGING AND COMMUNICATIONS
GCR - 36
5.5.1. Flag Chief
The Flagging and Communications Chief shall be responsible for the
establishment and operation of the Flagging and Communications organization at each SCCA speed event. The Flag Chief shall be responsible for
recruiting, training, and assigning qualified persons to corner stations.
5.5.2. Communications Chief
The Communications Chief shall be responsible for the establishment and
operation of the communications system, which shall include all corner
stations and a central control. He or she shall, in conjunction with the
Chief Flag Marshal recruit, train, and assign qualified persons to operate
and maintain the system at an event. The Communications Chief shall
have charge of the Central Control Station where all communications
affecting the control of the event are carried out. The Central Control
Station shall maintain immediate liaison with the Chief Steward and all
corner stations.
5.5.3. General Organization
The purpose of this organization shall be to provide safe course control
by:
A. Informing the drivers, through flags, lights, or other signals, of
the conditions of the course, the condition of their cars, or of any
unusual conditions affecting the running of the event;
B.
Informing the Chief Steward and other Officials, through the
communication network, of the condition of the course and the
competing cars, and of any situation requiring decisions and/or
action by the Race Officials;
C. Relaying information and instructions from the Chief Steward to
the persons operating the various emergency vehicles and equipment around the course as well as to the race drivers and turn
personnel;
D. Undertaking emergency action needed to protect the lives and
property of drivers, workers, or spectators in the event of an accident;
E.
Maintaining a clear course.
F.
A race log shall be kept of all communications on the race network
by person(s) in the immediate vicinity of the Operating Steward.
5.5.4. Corner Stations
A. Number
There shall be a sufficient number of corner stations established and
manned to keep the entire course under observation at all times and
to protect all areas of the course not immediately visible to oncoming
drivers.
B. Location
Each corner station shall be located in accordance with the following
considerations: The flagmen to have a clear view of the area to be
covered; maximum visibility of the flagmen to the oncoming drivers;
maximum protection for the corner station crew from out of control
automobiles. The yellow flag shall be displayed when a corner worker
or other personnel move to a less protected or unprotected area.
C. Personnel
GCR - 37
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
Each corner station shall be staffed with a minimum of two (2) people
and should be staffed by at least four (4) people: a flagger, a communicator, a safety worker, and a corner captain who shall be designated to
be in charge of the station. At least twenty (20) percent of the Flagging
and Communications specialists should have had experience in fighting
actual or simulated vehicle fires.
D. Equipment
Each corner station should be equipped with at least the following:
1. Device for communicating immediately, privately, and without
interference with the Central Control Station, other corner
stations, and other stations as appropriate.
2. The following flags or signaling paddles: Yellow (2), yellow and
red striped, white, blue with a yellow stripe, black, and red.
3. One dry chemical type fire extinguisher of at least 20-pound
size although two (2) 10-pound extinguishers are recommended.
4. Pry bar of sufficient length (4-5 feet).
5. Broom (push type).
6. Oil/gasoline absorbent material.
7. Blanket or fire sheet.
8. Vest or arm band to distinguish the Corner Captains.
9. Pair of Day-Glo orange re-entry gloves.
10. 20-foot length of half-inch rope.
11. Flame/Heat resistant gloves.
12. Each black flag station shall additionally be equipped with black
and mechanical black flags, plus a blackboard or other means
of displaying simultaneously the affected car’s number or the
word “ALL.”
5.6.
REGISTRATION
The Chief Registrar shall be responsible for accepting, certifying, and
processing all entries and credentials for drivers, crew, and Officials and
the posting of all required signs/placards in the registration area.
5.7.
SOUND CONTROL
5.7.1. Sound Control Chief
The Sound Control Chief shall be responsible for monitoring racing vehicles at sound-controlled events in accordance with the GCR and the SCCA
Sound Control Manual. Specifically, he or she shall:
A. Review or establish sound meter monitoring location.
B.
Establish how reading(s) shall be made.
C. Advise the Chief Steward of the readings.
D. Submit post-race reports to the Chairman of the SOM.
E.
Monitor weather and ambient conditions throughout the day.
F.
Perform field calibration in accordance with the Sound Control
Manual for sound meter, microphone, or other instruments.
G. Obtain yearly calibration of equipment from manufacturer or qualified laboratory.
5.7.2. General Procedures and Requirements
This Section shall establish SCCA test procedures, instrumentation, and
environmental requirements for determination of race vehicle sound emisGCR - 38
sions.
Competitors carry sole responsibility to determine that their vehicles
comply with Sound Control Regulations at each event. Mufflers may be
required.
Sound Control will be in effect for all events. All cars will be monitored
and readings will be posted for competitors’ information. A driver registering a single sound level reading over 103dB shall not be black flagged.
If a driver is black flagged due to sound, the car shall not re-enter the
course until corrective steps are taken.
A. The Chief Steward need not seek out and advise each individual
competitor of his violations of the sound levels. However, the Chief
Steward shall ensure that a competitor can determine his sound
readings after each session at the place established via the Supplementary Regulations or other official notification. Competitors will
use these readings to monitor their legality.
B.
The Sound Control Chief, and/or Team, may offer advice to the
competitors. This advice, however, shall be in no manner construed
to imply that said suggested corrective action(s) absolves competitor from complying.
C. Vehicle sound emission is not a constant factor which can be
trimmed to barely legal (in the manner of engine displacement
or vehicle weight); sound emissions may vary significantly from
morning to afternoon, and day-to-day; therefore, the competitor is
advised to target his sound level at least 2 or 3 decibels under the
limit to allow for meteorological variations.
5.7.3. Standards
The primary standard for SCCA Sound Control shall be a sound pressure level of 103db “A” frequency weighted (dba) measured on the fast
response setting at 50 feet (+/- 2 feet) from the edge of the track pavement, and/or artificial markers indicating track edge. Numbers shall be
truncated to the lower whole number. (Anything after the decimal point
is ignored.)
5.7.4. Equipment
A. A sound level instrument (meter) which meets American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) Specification S1.4-1971, Class 2, Type
S2A or better, and provides the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Demountable microphone
Fast response (not peak)
“A” frequency (scale) weighting
Max. (maximum) hold
General accessories shall include:
a. Tripod
b. Microphone cable for remote operation, fifty (50) foot
minimum
c. Operating Manual
d. Infield calibrator
Weather (meteorological instruments to support sound readings):
1. Barometer, capable of reading 0.1 inches of mercury (recommended).
2. Thermometer, accurate to +/- 1 degree Fahrenheit (wet bulb
thermometer recommended).
GCR - 39
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
C. General equipment
1. Tape Measure, fifty (50) foot minimum
5.7.5. Measurements
The SCCA Sound Control criteria are a composite of Federal Standards
and the Society of Automotive Engineers’ specifications.
A. GENERAL
Proper location and use of all test instrumentation is essential to obtain
valid measurements. Operating Manuals or other Manufacturer’s literature should be referenced for both recommended operation and precautions to be observed.
B.
TECHNIQUE
1. Acoustic calibration procedures should include extension cable
influence.
2. Field calibration shall be done at least every four (4) hours
while in the operating mode.
3. Weather conditions should be recorded every hour when conditions are unstable, or otherwise every two (2) hours.
5.7.6. Microphone Location
A. The microphone shall be:
1. 3.5 feet (minimum) above the ground surface.
2. 2.0 feet (minimum) above the level of the roadway.
3. No more than 6 feet above the level of the roadway.
4. Two hundred (200) feet or more away from any tunnel or overpass through which the target vehicle passes.
B.
The microphone shall be mounted on a tripod, remote from the
sound meter, using at least fifty (50) feet of cable.
C. Whenever possible it is recommended (but not mandatory) that the
microphone shall be located on the outside of the track between
race car and outside perimeter of the racing facility, aimed into
infield areas.
5.8.
START
5.8.1. Chief Starter
The Chief Starter directs and manages the volunteers working the
speciality, ensuring that directions given to competing drivers by flag,
hand, and body signals are done so as prescribed by the GCR with respect
to starting, suspending, and ending a race.
5.8.2. Responsibility
The Starter shall operate directly under, and shall carry out the orders of,
and shall be responsible solely to the Chief Steward.
5.8.3. Function
The Starter shall control the competing drivers by conveying to them the
orders of the Chief Steward.
5.8.4 Location
The Starter shall be stationed so as to be at all times in a location of
maximum visibility to the competing drivers. The Starter shall have immediate communication with the Chief Steward.
5.8.5.
Equipment
GCR - 40
The Starter shall be equipped with a complete set of signal flags required
by the SCCA General Competition Rules.
5.9.
TECHNICAL AND SAFETY INSPECTION
5.9.1. Chief/Series Chief Technical and Safety Inspector (Scrutineer)
The Chief Technical and Safety Inspector or Series Technical and Safety
Inspector shall ascertain that the cars comply with the GCR and Supplementary Regulations. Specifically, he or she shall:
A. Approve cars that comply with all safety regulations.
B.
Conduct inspections of cars at the request of the Chief Steward
and recommend inspection of cars to the Chief Steward as necessary.
C. Report to the Chief Steward any cars that he or she finds do not
conform with requirements of the GCR.
The Chief Technical and Safety Inspector shall have the responsibility for
approving every car before it is allowed to take part in a competition. The
inspection procedures used to carry out this responsibility are set out in
Sections 5.9.2 and 9, Inspecting Automobiles and Cars and Equipment,
respectively. A driver or entrant whose car is disapproved and who drives
it in competition or who presents it for recheck after disapproval without
the corrections specified may be penalized as provided in Section 7.,
Penalties.
5.9.2.
Inspecting Automobiles
A. Annual Inspection
A full and complete Technical and Safety Inspection shall be performed
by a Licensed Scrutineer (Divisional/National) on each car once a year
(12 months). If the car passes Annual Technical Inspection, the tech
inspector shall enter the date of the safety harness expiration in the
logbook, the logbook shall be stamped with the “official” inspection
stamp, dated, and signed.
Driver Safety Equipment shall comply with Section 9.3.19., Driver’s
Safety Equipment. The scrutineer performing the inspection shall affix
a dated, non-removable sticker or decal to helmets that comply with
Section 9.3.19.B.. This sticker or decal and the other drivers’ safety
equipment which must be worn may be checked by Grid or Scrutineering personnel on the starting grid.
B. Minimum Event Safety Inspection/Tech Sticker
Minimum Safety Inspection—Minimum inspection for each event thereafter shall consist of reviewing the Vehicle Logbook. If it is in order, a
Tech sticker shall be issued.
In order to enter the race course at any time during an event, a vehicle
shall display a Tech Sticker signifying successful completion of technical
and safety inspection as prescribed in the following sections. Technical
inspection assists event officials with determining, in their judgment,
eligibility for participation in a SCCA sanctioned event. The technical
inspection does not ensure, certify, or warrant that the vehicle or any
part thereof is safe or totally and ultimately compliant with all applicable
rules. The technical inspection does not in any way change the fact
that the driver, the crew members, and the vehicle owner are ultimately
responsible for the safety and operation of the vehicle and equipment.
By conducting a technical inspection, SCCA and each of its directors,
GCR - 41
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
officers, employees, and officials, make no representations, warranties,
or assurances that a technical inspection, including the review of any
written information, will do any or all of the following:
• Detect every or any problem with a vehicle or a driver’s personal
equipment or clothing; or
• Detect every problem with rule compliance; or
• Prevent bodily injury, death, or personal monetary damage.
The participant agrees that the participant bears the ultimate responsibility at all times to ensure the safety of participant’s vehicle, equipment, and clothing and compliance with all SCCA rules, regulations,
and agreements, including but not limited to those contained in the
GCR. Moreover, in the case of technical violations, the participant
acknowledges, understands, and agrees that the participant is charged
with full knowledge of every component of participant’s vehicle and
that even if a third party (for example, an engine builder) has caused
the participant’s vehicle to be noncompliant, the participant will still be
responsible for and charged with any applicable violation and penalty.
C. Reinspection
A car shall be reinspected if damage or deficiencies from the car’s
previous event(s) are noted in the logbook or the car changes category.
Inspection above the minimum level (see 5.9.2.B.) may be performed on
a vehicle whose logbook indicates no competition for three (3) months
or more during the current year; or on vehicles as specified in Supplemental Regulations; or at the request of the Chief Steward. Throughout
the racing season, the Tech crew is encouraged to perform regular
reinspections through walk around observation in the pits and paddock,
or through special impounds by group or class with the concurrence of
the Chief Steward.
D. Alterations or Damage After Inspection
Cars which have been altered or damaged after they have been approved
at technical and safety inspection shall be subject to reinspection and
reapproval.
5.9.3.
Impound
A. Post Race Impound
Post-race impound is mandatory at all National Championship events
and recommended at all other events.
B. Impound Safety
It is recommended that there be at least one (1) nominal ten (10) pound
dry chemical agent capacity, minimum UL 60 BC or ABC rated, CO2 or
equivalent Halon fire extinguisher present in the impound area.
C. Minimum Impound Inspection
The first three (3) finishers in each class shall be immediately impounded
for a minimum of thirty (30) minutes after the completion of each race,
unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Regulations. The Chief
Steward may direct that additional finishers in any class be impounded
immediately following a competition. It is the driver’s responsibility to
ascertain his or her finishing position and present his or her car to
impound immediately, without going to the paddock, if among the top
three (3) in class. Failure to do so promptly may result in a penalty.
Each impounded car shall be given an inspection that shall, at minimum,
include verification of conformity to the minimum weight and two additional items as appropriate for the class, as determined by the Chief
Technical Inspector and Chief Steward. The Chief Steward may also
GCR - 42
order the removal of a wheel or intake choke(s) or restrictors during
impound. These inspections are not subject to the fees outlined in
section 5.12.2.C.5. Additional inspections may be conducted through
the protest procedures outlined in section 8.3.3.
During the weighing, if there is any doubt about the weight, the car
shall be weighed in both directions. Cars found to be underweight at
impound are subject to penalty and shall have it noted on the next page
of the Vehicle Logbook. The car shall be weighed at the next event
and must meet the proper minimum weight before being allowed to
qualify.
If there is any other doubt about the car’s conformity to the rules, any
appropriate methods may be used by the Technical Inspector to determine the car’s legality.
D. Impound Waiver
A waiver of appearing at post-race impound may be implemented at
non-National Championship events in the presence of the Chief of Tech
prior to the race with the approval of the Chief Steward.
5.9.4. Official Scales
A. The scales at the event are the official scales for the event. The
times when they are available shall be published in the supplemental regulations so drivers may compare their car’s weight to the
official measurement.
B.
The following scale configurations are acceptable: platform scales,
individual scales that weigh one axle (two wheels) at a time, or
four individual scale pads that each weighs a single wheel. If all
four wheels cannot be weighed at the same time, the driver shall
be weighed independently of the car. Scales or test weights shall
be certified.
C. Certification
The scales shall be certified by:
5.10.
1.
On-site certification by a commercial scale service within ninety
(90) days prior to the event, OR
2.
Use at the track of certification weights, minimum 250 pounds
total for individual wheel scales and minimum 750 pounds total
for platform scales.
TIMING AND SCORING
5.10.1. Chief Timer and Scorer
The Chief Timer and Scorer shall be responsible for the accurate timing
and scoring of the event in accordance with the GCR. Specifically, he or
she shall:
A. Recruit, train, assign, and supervise qualified personnel to time and
score the event.
B.
Furnish the Chief Steward and the SOM any times and results that
they may request.
C. Maintain records of official times and lap charts for all competing
cars.
D. Compile and publish the Official Results of all competitions, submit
GCR - 43
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
copies of completed Official Results to the Race Chairman for
distribution to the SOM, the organizers, and the SCCA, and submit
complete Official Results (including qualifying) within five (5) days
to the Divisional Pointskeeper.
E.
At spectator events, work closely with the Press Officers, press,
and other media, as well as with circuit, radio, and/or television
announcers, providing qualifying information, results, and any other
data requested, as quickly as possible.
5.10.2. Timing and Scoring Systems
A. The Timing and Scoring systems described in this section shall be
required for SCCA National races. It is recommended that these
systems be used at Regional races and Drivers Schools.
B.
The Chief of Timing and Scoring should employ the Timing and
Scoring systems described below in recording the performance of
cars in competition. These systems should enable the Timing and
Scoring staff to produce the following information: a set of grids
for each race group, a set of time cards for each car from qualifying
and the race, continuity tapes, independently prepared lap charts,
provisional results, and final results. Titles as used in this section
are used in a functional sense. The Chief of Timing and Scoring
may delegate any task to any member of the Timing and Scoring
staff as appropriate.
C. Should there be insufficient staff to run two separate systems as
described, the Chief of Timing and Scoring should notify the Chief
Steward. The Chief Steward may then decide to waive the twosystem requirement, allowing the Chief of Timing and Scoring to
use the Timing and Scoring staff in the most productive manner
possible. In this case, the Timing system should be used to establish grid positions and the Scoring system should be the primary
source of information for tabulating race results. Overall timing of
class leaders during races is recommended to provide the information described in Section 5.10.3. No protests concerning the
Timing and Scoring requirements will be accepted.
D. The Timing system:
1. It is recommended that an electronic timer (such as a Chronomix, a Meca, a Heuer, Alge, or similar device) be used. The
timer shall be actuated by a photoelectric cell or other means
on the timing control line. Times should be recorded to the
1/1000th of a second. The minimum acceptable resolution for
an electronic timer is 1/100th of a second. The electronic timer
may provide data to an appropriate computer program capable
of processing the data and printing results.
Transponder/transmitter systems used in SCCA Club Racing
shall be manufactured by AMB or be compatible with AMB
systems. Those other transponder/transmitter systems which
are currently in use may continue to be used, but shall not be
the primary system for any National race.
There shall be a minimum of three independently prepared
tapes. The tapers shall record the car numbers in the order
they cross the timing control line. The tapers should indicate “yellow flag,” “black flag,” or “red flag,” as personally
observed and/or officially observed or reported. “Checkered
flag” should be written on the final tape when the checkered
GCR - 44
flag has been displayed. These tapes should be compared and
audited, corrected if necessary, and then the car numbers will
be matched with the times recorded by the electronic timer.
These tapes may be shared with the Scoring System.
E.
2.
An acceptable alternative to an electronic timer is a group of
Timers with stopwatches. The stopwatches should time to the
nearest 1/100th of a second. The minimum acceptable resolution for a stopwatch is 1/10th of a second. Timers will record
the cumulative time of passage for their assigned car(s), then
compute and record the individual lap time. Timers should note
on the time card for each assigned car such occurrences as
“pit stop,” “black flag,” “checkered flag,” “off course,” etc.,
as personally observed and/or officially observed or reported.
At the end of each session, the Timer will indicate on the time
card the fastest lap time for each assigned car.
3.
For the start of a qualifying session, the electronic timer (and/
or stopwatches) shall be started simultaneously on a signal
given by the Chief Timer.
4.
At the end of each qualifying session, the Chief Timer shall
audit the time cards produced from the timing system. These
time cards should show the cumulative times as well as the
lap times. Once the Chief Timer is satisfied that the times are
correct, a Provisional Grid should be prepared, as described
in Section 6.1.2., Starting Positions, and posted. At the expiration of the protest period, these Provisional Grids may be
considered final.
5.
For the start of a race, the electronic timer (and/or stopwatches)
shall be started simultaneously when the first car crosses the
timing control line at the completion of the pace lap.
6.
A car crosses a control line when any portion of the car first
intercepts the vertical plane of the control line, as observed by
the officials assigned to record the passage, who may be aided
by suitable automatic or semi-automatic equipment.
7.
At the end of each race, the Chief Timer shall audit the time
cards produced by the timing system. Once the Chief Timer
is satisfied that the times are correct, and the order of finish
agrees with the Scoring system, Final results should be
prepared as described in Section 5.10.3.B., Final Results.
The Scoring system:
1. There shall be a minimum of three independently prepared
tapes. The tapers shall record the car numbers in the order
they cross the timing control line on consecutively numbered
sheets. The sheet number should coincide with the overall
leader’s completed laps. The tapers should indicate “yellow
flag,” “black flag,” or “red flag,” as personally observed and/
or officially observed or reported. “Checkered flag” should be
written on the final tape when the checkered flag has been
displayed. These tapes should be compared and audited,
corrected if necessary, and then distributed to the Charters.
These tapes may be shared with the Timing System.
2.
A minimum of three independent lap charts should be prepared.
These charts can be done either on paper or on a computer and
GCR - 45
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
can include charts generated by the Timing system. They shall
be prepared so that position and lap count are indicated on
different axis. Each car’s number shall be entered on the chart
in the order recorded on the tape, appearing on the chart only
once for each lap. Some method shall be used to indicate on
the lap chart all cars taking the checkered flag as shown on the
final tape. The Charters should indicate the overall and class
position and laps completed for each car.
3.
At the end of each race, the Chief Scorer shall compare the
three charts. Once the Chief Scorer is satisfied that two of the
three charts are correct, Provisional Results may be posted as
described in Section 5.10.3.A.. It is strongly advised that the
Chief Scorer determines what errors prevented the third chart
from agreeing with the other two.
5.10.3. Results
A. Provisional Results
One of the two lap charts or a printout showing order of finish and
number of laps completed for each car shall be posted and titled as
Provisional Results. The time of posting shall be noted on the Provisional Results and an announcement made.
Pending the decision of the SOM, the results of the competition shall
be considered Provisional.
B.
Final Results
1. At the expiration of the protest period, Provisional Results may
be considered final. The Final Results should be titled as Final
or Official Results and shall include the following types of information: description of event, timing and scoring information,
and driver information.
2.
The description of the event shall include: location of event,
date, sanction number, name of conducting region, length of
course, and duration of race (laps or miles).
3.
The timing and scoring information shall include: total number
of entries, including DNF’s and DNS’s, the overall and class
finishing positions for all starters, the number of laps completed
for all starters, the overall time of the race, the winner’s margin
of victory, the winner’s average speed, the fastest lap time for
all starters and any new course records.
4.
The driver information shall include: driver’s full name, hometown, state, region of record, car number, car make and model,
and car year as required per GCR. It is required that the competition license number be included in the driver information.
5.
Optional information to show on the Final Results includes:
the overall time and average speed for each class winner, pit
stop information, accident reports, and sponsorship. This may
be provided on documents (i.e. Entry List) other than “Final
Results” and submitted to the national office, divisional pointskeeper and other officials.
6.
When a car is disqualified, excluded, or withdrawn, the results
should list the car at the bottom of the finishing order, showing
the true finishing order as affected by the disqualification,
GCR - 46
exclusion, or withdrawl. The results should show the final
overall and class positions, as adjusted, for all finishers.
5.10.4. Media
It is strongly recommended that at spectator events the Chief Timer
and Scorer meet with the Course and Regional Press Officers in order
to establish close cooperation with the announcer and all media, and to
arrange for fast transmission of unofficial and official Timing and Scoring
information to these people.
The track announcer and all media at spectator events should be furnished
as quickly as possible with Unofficial Qualifying times as they occur, thus
providing constantly updated unofficial grid positions, but making certain
that this information is clearly titled “Unofficial.” When the qualifying
times become Official, together with the Official Grid, these should be
transmitted at once to the announcer and media. During the race, upto-date standings should be provided, as well as average speed records
established, etc. These can be Unofficial until verified or corrected. Within
a very few minutes after the completion of each spectator race, and
prior to the preparation of Official Results which require time consuming
auditing and verification, Unofficial Results showing at least the top ten
(10) finishers, the winner’s average speed, fastest lap turned in miles per
hour, time and/or distance separating the first three finishers, and overall
time for the race should be transmitted to the track announcer and media.
Again caution is recommended to ensure that this information is clearly
labeled “Unofficial.”
It is always preferable that the Circuit announcer and any radio and television announcers receive information relating to Timing and Scoring from
members of the Official Timing and Scoring personnel, via the Circuit or
Regional Press Officer.
5.11.
ADDITIONAL OFFICIALS
5.11.1. Driver Observers
The Observers shall occupy posts along the course assigned to them by
the Chief Steward, or by the Chief Observer if one is nominated. As soon
as a competition is started, each Observer shall be under the orders of the
Chief Steward to whom he or she shall report all incidents which occur
on the section of the course for which he or she is responsible. At the
conclusion of each competition, Observers shall give the Chief Steward a
written report of all incidents or accidents witnessed by them.
5.11.2. Press Officer
The Press Officer advises the Officials on press information and acts as
liaison with the promoter’s press director, if any. Chief Officials and SOM
shall cooperate with the Press Officer in carrying out his or her responsibility to apprise the press on matters of public interest.
5.11.3. Judges
Judges are optional and may perform one or more of following duties:
A. Starting Judges shall point out to the Chief Steward any false
starts immediately after they occur. Finishing Judges declare the
order in which cars cross the finish line. Judges of the Fact shall
decide whether a car has touched or passed a given line or shall
rule on other facts of the same type provided in the Supplementary
Regulations.
B.
A protest shall not be made against the decision of a Judge.
GCR - 47
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
C. An error by a Judge may be corrected by him or her with the
approval of the SOM.
5.12.
STEWARDS
5.12.1. Stewards of the Meeting (SOM)
The SOM shall be responsible only to SCCA, and they shall have the duty
of enforcing compliance with the GCR and Supplementary Regulations.
They shall act primarily in a judicial capacity, and therefore shall not incur
any responsibility for the organization or execution of an event.
A. Powers of the SOM
1. Settle any dispute within the administrative functions, or
protest arising from an event, subject to the rights of appeal
provided by the GCR.
2.
Hear and act on Requests for Action from the Chief Steward.
(See Section 8.1.3.)
3.
Impose any penalty permitted by the GCR and Supplementary
Regulations. (See Section 7., Penalties)
4.
Appoint substitutes to replace any Stewards or Officials not
able to perform their duties. This power shall be used by the
remaining Steward or Stewards to ensure that there are always
at least two (2) SOM.
5.
Modify the Supplementary Regulations. (See 3.5.5., Changes
to the Supplementary Regulations)
6.
Alter the schedule.
7.
Modify the position of the starting or finishing lines where
necessary to ensure the safety of drivers and spectators.
8.
Amend the results of a competition:
a. Based on a correction or error by the Chief Timer and
Scorer.
9.
b.
To take into account a time, distance, or lap penalty
against a competitor.
c.
To change the sequence of finishing positions in case a
competitor is disqualified.
Postpone a competition for reasons of safety or forces beyond
their control.
B. Chairman of the SOM
One of the SOM shall be appointed Chairman of the SOM for the event.
He or she shall not be a member of the organizing Region at National
events, and should not be for Driver’s Schools/Regional events.
1. Observer’s Reports
As soon as practical after the conclusion of an event, (not later
than ten days), the Chairman of the SOM shall forward to the
SCCA Manager of Club Racing a report to include:
a. Details of all protests.
b.
Actions taken.
GCR - 48
c.
Penalties imposed (including reprimands and suspensions
to be noted in driver’s file).
d.
Notice(s) of intention to appeal and appeals, including
appeal fee(s).
e.
Fine(s) collected.
f.
Full details of any accidents.
g.
Official Results of all competitions.
h.
General comments and recommendations of the SOM on
the organization and conduct of the event.
2. Notice of Probation
Written notice shall first be given by faxing or emailing the Club
Racing Department on Monday following the event with notification of any drivers who have been placed on probation at the event.
Written notice shall also be provided by including the confiscated
license and tear-off coupon from the probation letter with the
Observer’s Report from the event.
3. Notice Of Suspension
Written notice must be given by faxing or e-mailing the Club Racing
Department on Monday following the event to notify them of any
drivers who have had their competition privileges suspended at the
event. Please supply the name of the member, membership number,
event date/location where suspension occurred and Chairman,
SOM’s name. Written notice shall be provided by including the
appropriate paperwork and the suspended competition license with
the Observer’s Report from the event.
5.12.2. Chief Steward/Series Chief Steward
The Chief Steward is the executive responsible for the general conduct
of the event in accordance with the GCR and the Supplementary Regulations. He or she shall have the powers and the duties set out this
Section. See Appendix E, Duties, Authorities, and Responsibilities of the
Chief Steward, for specific powers of the Chief Steward. “Series Chief
Steward” shall be substituted for “Chief Steward” in these rules when a
Series Chief Steward is carrying out a Chief Steward’s duties.
A. Execution of the Event
The Chief Steward shall:
1. Execute the program of competitions and other activities safely
by controlling drivers, their cars, the Officials, and workers
from the commencement of activities until the time for protests
from the last competition has expired.
2.
Ascertain whether Officials are at their posts and report the
absence of any of them to the SOM.
3.
Ensure that all Officials and workers are provided with necessary information.
4.
Collect all reports and other official information for the determination of results.
5.
Prepare any information required to enable the Chairman of the
GCR - 49
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
SOM to prepare the report.
6.
Authorize a change of driver or car.
7.
Convey to the SOM any proposal to modify the schedule of
competitions.
8.
Prevent an ineligible driver from competing.
B. Maintenance of Order
The Chief Steward shall:
1. Keep order in conjunction with the authorities who are policing
the event and who are responsible for public safety.
2.
Exclude from the event any entrant, driver, crew, Official,
worker, or SCCA member who is guilty of misbehavior.
3.
Exclude from participation a worker or Official who is ineligible
for the position to which he or she is assigned or who the
Chief Steward determines is incapable of carrying out his or
her duties.
4.
Order removal from the premises any person who refuses to
obey the order of any responsible Official or of a public safety
officer.
5.
Prohibit from competing any driver or car considered
dangerous.
6.
Convey to the SOM a report dealing with the misbehavior of
any entrant or driver. This may be accompanied by a Request
for Action. (See 8.1.3.)
7.
Receive protests from entrants, drivers or officials and immediately transmit them to the SOM.
C. Powers of the Chief Steward
The Chief Steward may:
1. Disqualify a driver or an ineligible car.
2.
Remove technical inspection stickers.
3.
Disallow qualifying times.
4.
Direct cars to be impounded at any time during the event.
5.
At his or her discretion and without necessarily receiving a
request to do so, order disassembly and inspection of any
entered car to ascertain its conformance with the GCR. If the
car is found to be eligible for the competition in which it is
entered, the race organizers shall stand the expense of the
disassembly, inspection, and reassembly. If it is not eligible,
the entrant shall bear the expense, in addition to whatever
penalties the SOM may direct after receiving the Chief Steward’s report.
6.
Convey to the SOM a report of any breach of the GCR or
Supplementary Regulations. This report may be accompanied
by a Request for Action. (See 8.1.3.)
GCR - 50
7.
Impose a fine of up to $100.
8.
Prevent an ineligible car from competing.
9.
Reprimand.
10. Impose time, lap, event points, or position penalty.
D. Additional Powers of the Chief Steward
See Appendix E. for additional/specific powers of the Chief Steward.
5.12.3. Assistant Chief Steward - Safety
The Assistant Chief Steward-Safety is responsible to the Chief Steward,
and shall be responsible for the following:
A. To investigate accidents and forward the originals of all reports,
including original releases, to the Risk Management Department of
SCCA.
B.
To notify Risk Management Department, the same day via telephone, of any accident which involves serious injury to a participant or any injury to a spectator.
C. To mail copies of the material sent to the Risk Management Department to the Divisional Safety Administrator.
D. During the event, to report to the Chief Steward any hazards which
require further investigation or action.
E.
To perform such duties as are delegated by the Chief Steward.
F.
To supervise Emergency Services personnel and equipment in
conjunction with the Race Chairman (pre-event) and the Chief
Medical Officer (during the event), if no Emergency Services Chief
is assigned.
5.12.4. Compliance Checking Crew
When assigned to an event by the Club Racing Department, each member
of this crew will have the official status of an Assistant Chief Steward.
Their sole responsibility is to advise the Chief Steward of cars not in
compliance with the GCR and/or the Supplemental Regulations for the
event. The Chief Steward may delegate all or any part of his powers
under 5.12.2.C., and 8.1.2., Chief Stewards’ Action, to them.
GCR - 51
General
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6.
6.1.
RACING RULES AND PROCEDURES
THE GRID
6.1.1. Cars Run in the Proper Class
A. All cars shall race in their respective classes. One (1) car in a class
shall constitute a class. A car shall not compete in more than one
race class in the same race group.
B.
The running of cars in classes and/or categories for which they
were not designed or intended is strongly discouraged. The Chief
Steward shall approve the proposed classification. He or she shall
not approve if the car is so dissimilar or the car/driver combination
otherwise unsuitable so as to pose a hazard to safety or an impediment to the fair competition among the other cars in the class and
race group.
6.1.2. Starting Positions for a Race
A. It shall be the car/driver combination which qualifies a starting position.
B.
Cars shall be positioned at the start in order of their official qualifying times without regard to engine displacement or class, with
the fastest cars nearest the starting line, unless the Supplementary
Regulations specify a different method.
C. In case of a tie in qualifying times, the second fastest lap, then the
third fastest, etc., shall be used to break the tie.
D. The fastest qualifier shall have the choice of the inside pole position (nearest the direction of the first turn) or the outside. Absent a
choice, the pole position is assumed to be the inside. When outside
position is chosen, the second qualifier will be inside, the third
outside, the fourth inside, etc. Continue to alternate the entire
grid.
E.
Non-Qualifiers may be gridded behind qualifiers by the Chief
Steward per 3.1.1.C.2., Establishing the Grid.
F.
Cars not in position on the grid prior to the one (1) minute signal
(6.2.2.A and 6.2.2.B) shall relinquish their starting positions and
shall start from the back of the field.
6.1.3. Qualifying for Oversubscribed Classes
Qualifying for an oversubscribed single class race shall be split into two
(2) groups. The race grid shall be split into two (2) groups. The grid shall
be determined in accordance with 6.1.2., Starting Positions. If the Chief
Steward determines that there is a significant difference in track conditions between the two (2) qualifying sessions, he or she may recommend
the parallel column procedure to the Stewards of the Meeting. If they
approve, one-half of the grid shall be taken from each session and gridded
in columns (e.g., one column of a 2-2 grid from each session). The fastest
car overall, regardless of track conditions, shall have the pole position and
be followed by the cars from its session in order of qualifying time. (See
3.4.2., Number of Cars Allowed on Course)
6.1.4. Tire Warmers
Pre-heating of tires prior to competition by electrically heated covers or
GCR - 52
similar means is prohibited on the grid.
6.1.5. Starting the Engine on the Grid
In all SCCA competitions, engines shall be started with a starter operated
by the driver in normal driving position, except F500, and an on-board or
supplementary power supply. Carburetor or fuel injection systems may be
manipulated and/or primed in the process of starting cars. Push starts are
permitted only as specifically authorized below.
6.1.6. Push Starts on the Grid
A driver unable to start the car on the false grid may push start provided
the car is back in position prior to the-one minute signal. Push starts on
the false grid shall be under the supervision of the Grid Marshal to guarantee they are done in a suitable manner. After the one-minute signal, the
right to start the car by push starting is relinquished.
6.2.
THE START
6.2.1. Starter’s Orders
Drivers and automobiles shall come under the orders of the Starter from
the time the Chief Steward delegates this control to the Starter until the
green flag is displayed.
6.2.2. SCCA Standard Start (Rolling Start)
The following rolling start technique shall be known as the SCCA Standard Start and shall be utilized at all SCCA races, unless an alternate
procedure has been approved by the Divisional Executive Steward and is
set out in the Supplementary Regulations for the event.
A. On instruction of the Chief Steward, a signal, plainly audible or
visible to the full grid, shall be given at five (5) minutes and at one
(1) minute prior to the scheduled starting time of each race. This
will alert drivers to man their cars, and crews to complete lastminute preparations.
B.
At the one-minute signal the Starter or Grid Marshal shall give the
signal to start motors.
C. At or before the expiration of the one-minute period, the Starter or
Grid Marshal shall signal the field to begin the pace lap.
D. There shall be one (1) pace lap. At the discretion of the Chief
Steward, an additional unscored pace lap may be authorized. All
flag stations shall display double yellow flags during all pace laps.
E.
The pace car, with emergency lights flashing, shall position itself at
the head of the pack. It shall proceed at a constant slow speed, the
front row drivers having been instructed not to pass the pace car
until the pace car pulls off for the start. If a pace car is not utilized,
the “pole” car shall serve the same function as a pace car from its
position in the front row. In the event the race is not started, necessitating another pace lap, depending on conditions, the pace car
may overtake the field and resume its function, provided the front
row drivers have been previously advised of this plan. Otherwise,
the “pole” car shall assume the duty of the pace car, remaining in
this front row position. Once the pace car pulls off for the start, the
pole car shall maintain the speed of the pace car just prior to the
pace car pulling off.
F.
During the pace lap, the Starter shall be positioned at a safe locaGCR - 53
General
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
tion where the majority of the drivers in the approaching field can
clearly see him or her. The Starter shall remain motionless, with the
green flag hidden, and no other flags visible.
G. Upon determining that the approaching field is at a constant slow
speed, well bunched and in line, and close enough that the majority
of the drivers can see the flag, the Starter shall suddenly and
continuously wave the green flag, until all cars have passed the
start line. The race shall be under way throughout the field at the
instant the green flag is waved and passing may occur at any point,
within reasonable safety standards.
H. If the Starter determines that the field is not in good order, or that
some drivers have improved their positions by moving out of line or
by passing prior to the waving of the green flag, the Starter shall
abort the start by making no flag movements whatsoever, and at
the same time shake his or her head in a negative manner, to indicate that a start shall not take place. This will inform the drivers to
proceed on another pace lap. Drivers will raise one hand to indicate
that the start is aborted. (Except as provided in 6.2.3.B.)
I.
Should an aborted start occur and additional pace laps be run, those
additional laps will be run under double standing yellow flags at all
flag stations, and they shall be scored as race laps. Timing will start
when the pole car crosses the timing control line, unless otherwise
specified by the Supplementary Regulations for the event.
J.
A car may not improve its position in the field once it comes under
the Starter’s orders, regardless of circumstances.
K.
1.
A car that fails to start with the pack or falls out of position
during a pace lap relinquishes its grid position. It may rejoin the
field only at the rear of the pack.
2.
A car that improves its position is guilty of a false start and
may be penalized. A false start shall occur when a driver under
the Starter’s orders moves forward from his or her prescribed
position before the start. In the case of a rolling start, this
movement shall refer to improving the driver’s position in relation to the moving field by moving out of line or passing prior
to the waving of the green flag.
3.
If the Chief Steward determines that a false start has occurred,
and the race has been started, that driver or drivers may be
black-flagged and held in the pits or at the start line for a period
of up to one minute. Other penalties may also be imposed.
(See 7., Penalties)
It is to be emphasized that the SCCA Standard Start is a rolling
start, not a “flying” start. While the pace lap may proceed at a brisk
pace, the field shall be slowed at a sufficient distance before the
start line to allow orderly grouping of the field. The actual speed
immediately prior to the start is somewhat dictated by the types of
cars, size of the field, and course layout. Only one (1) Official shall
be designated to brief the front row drivers before each race, preferably the Starter, acting under the orders of the Chief Steward.
6.2.3. Split Starts
A. Split starts are recommended where there is a large differential in
speed or cornering ability between the classes or categories in a
GCR - 54
single race group. The procedures for a split start shall be set out in
the Supplementary Regulations or explained at a Drivers’ Meeting.
The class containing the car with the fastest qualifying time shall
start first. The lead start group may contain one or more classes.
B.
The second group also should be led by a pace car which should
keep the first group in sight (on the longest straight). If the first
group gets a green flag, then the second group’s race will be
considered to start no matter what flag the starter displays. This
will allow the starter to display a yellow flag if warranted by an
incident in the first group. Anyone jumping the start in the second
group may be penalized.
C. A starting judge should be appointed for a split start.
6.2.4. Late Starters
After the field has left the grid, the Chief Steward may add an alternate
entry that has started or permit a gridded entry to push start and join the
field at the back of the pack. The Chief Steward shall direct whether the
car may enter the track during the pace lap or start from the pit exit after
the green flag has been displayed.
6.3.
PACE AND SAFETY CAR
6.3.1. Operation and Control
The Chief Steward is responsible for the operation and control of the
pace car(s). The safety car driver and communicator /observer shall be
approved by the Chief Steward. The driver shall be a current or previous
National license holder or have other qualifying experience.
6.3.2. Safety Car Procedures
At the discretion of the Chief Steward, a safety car may be used to control
the field in emergency situations and provide for expeditious restarts.
No car shall pass the safety car unless directed to do so by an official in
the safety car. In the event the safety car is not dispatched in front of
the lead car, the official shall wave cars by until the leader is behind the
safety car. Any car passing the safety car without being directed to do so
may be black flagged, penalized per Section 7, or both.
The safety car, emergency lights flashing, shall proceed at steady, reduced
speeds appropriate to track conditions and gathering the field. When the
double yellow is displayed, drivers shall make every effort to safely catch
the field and form up behind the Pace (Safety) Car or race leader. Drivers
of cars that are disabled or cannot keep the pace should not hold up the
field. These drivers shall signal that their vehicle is disabled by raising an
arm, pulling to the side of the course, and staying well off the racing line.
Other drivers may safely pass the signaling vehicle. Drivers of disabled
cars should seek assistance at the nearest corner station or pit at the first
opportunity.
The field shall follow the safety car in a safe and sportsmanlike manner,
evenly spaced in single file, allowing sufficient racing room for fellow
competitors. All cars shall pass the incident area well under control and
in single file. The lead car shall keep pace with the safety car and shall
not balk the field.
The safety car shall maintain the established pace and exit the course,
lights out, prior to the restart. Drivers shall maintain the pace established
by the safety car and shall not improve their positions or begin racing until
GCR - 55
General
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
the green flag has been displayed and the race restarted.
6.4.
STOPPING A COMPETITION
When it is necessary to stop a competition, the Chief Steward may do
any of the following:
A. Order a Black Flag and an “ALL” sign to be displayed on the Starter’s stand (this sign may be repeated at stations located elsewhere
on the course) and a Black Flag to be displayed at all flag stations
around the course. These flags shall inform all drivers that they
shall stop racing immediately and proceed to the pits, exercising
extreme caution.
B.
Order a red flag to be displayed simultaneously at all flag stations.
Further instructions shall be conveyed by the Corner Officials. Once
a red flag has been displayed, it shall not be withdrawn until all cars
have come to a stop.
C. No replenishment of or assistance to cars shall be allowed after a
race is stopped and before it is restarted.
D. Order the Checkered Flag to be displayed to the lead car if fifty
(50) percent or more of its scheduled time or distance has been
completed. (See Appendix A for definition of Competition.)
6.5.
RESTARTS
When a race is restarted, each pace lap shall count as a race lap. In a
timed race, the clock shall be restarted when the field is dispatched. Any
method of restarting the engine is permitted.
If a race is stopped, the Chief Steward may:
A. Order a complete restart according to the original starting positions.
B.
Restart the cars in a single file in the overall order in which they
completed their last completely scored lap;
C. Restart from a scoring tape or a lap chart whichever best fits the
conditions at hand.
6.6.
RAIN RACING PROCEDURE
If a race is started in the dry, and it starts to rain on all or part of the
course, the Chief Steward may use the following procedure: If the race
has covered half distance or more, it may be stopped with the checkered
flag at any time. If the race has not reached half distance, the black flag
“ALL” procedure shall be used to bring all cars into the pits, and fifteen
(15) minutes will be allowed for installing rain tires if the driver elects to
do so. At that time cars shall be restarted in single file in the positions that
they had the lap before the black flag was displayed.
6.7.
TIMING & SCORING; STARTERS, FINISHERS, AND WINNERS
6.7.1. Starting Line for Timing and Scoring
For a rolling start, the starting line shall be the control line on the crossing
of which the timing commences unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Regulations.
6.7.2. Classification of Car as a Race Starter
To be considered a starter, a car shall receive the green flag at the start
or, in the case of an aborted start, cross the control line. Cars that are on
the course, not in the pits, when the green is displayed shall be considGCR - 56
ered starters. A car which completes the pace lap for the first start is
considered a starter. Cars entering the race after the start shall also be
considered starters. A car shall enter the race before the checkered flag is
displayed in order to be classified as a starter.
6.7.3. Finishers
A. In order to be considered a finisher, a car shall complete half the
distance covered by the overall winner of the race. If the race
length is an uneven number of laps, divide the overall winner’s laps
by two and round down to the nearest whole integer. A car has five
(5) minutes after the checkered flag is displayed to complete his or
her lap.
B.
A car may be considered a finisher if it is pushed across the control
line or driven using on-board power (e.g. starter motor). This may
only occur in the pit lane. Pushing a car on the racing surface is
strictly forbidden.
6.7.4. Winner
The winner shall be the competitor who covers the prescribed distance
of the competition in the least time, or the greatest distance within the
prescribed time of the competition. If the race is shortened, the leader
of the last completely scored lap is the winner, provided the race is
completed. (See 6.7.3.A.)
A. Checkered Flag
The checkered flag shall be displayed first to the winner as he or she
completes the prescribed distance of the course or crosses the finish
line after completing the prescribed time, and then to the other finishers
as they cross the finish line. If the checkered flag is displayed first to
the wrong car, the race shall still finish when the actual winner crosses
the finish line.
B. Late Checkered Flag
If the checkered flag is not displayed at the scheduled end of the race
(in other words, if a race is one or more laps longer than scheduled), the
race shall be scored as if it had ended at the scheduled length.
C. Winning Car Not Running
In timed duration races if the winning car is not running at the expiration of the prescribed time, the checkered flag shall be displayed to the
highest placing car still running. The winner is not required to take the
checkered flag.
D. Dead Heats
In case of a dead heat, the competitors concerned shall share the prizes
allotted to their places in the Results. (See 3.9.1.D., Dead Heats, with
respect to allocation of National Race points.)
6.7.5. Shortened Races
A. If a race is stopped at less than fifty (50) percent of it’s scheduled
time or distance and is not restarted, it shall be considered incomplete. Championship points shall not be awarded, and organizers
shall not be required to distribute trophies or other awards.
B.
A race that is stopped at fifty (50) percent or more of its scheduled
time or distance, and not restarted, shall be scored as a complete
race as of the end of the last completely scored lap (even if that lap
is less than fifty (50) percent of the scheduled distance).
GCR - 57
General
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6.7.6. Lap Record
The official lap record for each class, at each circuit, shall be set during a
race and not in practice or qualifying. When a driver is disqualified for an
illegal car, the lap times (lap record) are disqualified also.
6.8.
RULES OF THE ROAD
6.8.1. On Course Driver Conduct
A. It is the responsibility of all drivers to avoid physical contact
between cars on the race track.
B.
All competitors have a right to “racing room” on the marked racing
surface. “Racing room” shall be generally defined as sufficient
space on the marked racing surface so as to allow a competitor
to maintain control of his car in close quarters, under racing conditions.
C. It shall be incumbent on all drivers to preserve the right of his fellow
competitors to racing room on the race track. Abrupt changes in
direction so as to impede or affect the path of a car attempting to
overtake or pass may be interpreted by Officials as an attempt to
deprive a fellow competitor of his right to racing room.
D. The responsibility for the decision to pass another car and to accomplish it safely rests with the overtaking driver. The overtaken driver
has the responsibility to be aware that he or she is being overtaken
and not to impede the overtaking car. The overtaken driver shall
not block. Any driver who fails to make use of the rear view mirror,
or who appears to be blocking another car seeking a pass, may be
black flagged and/or penalized. (See 7, Penalties)
6.8.2. Hand Signals
A. Before entering the pits from the course, the driver should signal by
raising an arm.
B.
An overtaken driver shall point to the side on which an overtaking
driver should pass.
C. The driver of a stalled car shall raise both arms to indicate that he
or she shall not move until the course is clear.
6.8.3. Off-Course Excursions
The driver is required to follow the pavement or marked course during a
competition, and shall not gain an advantage from an off-course excursion. Unless otherwise provided by Supplementary Regulations, whenever a driver leaves an artificially marked course or an airport circuit with
all four (4) wheels, he shall re-enter the course at the same spot where he
went off, and cannot simply re-enter further down the course, subject to
the directions of the Corner Worker controlling re-entry.
6.8.4. Counter-Race Direction Driving or Towing
During an event it is expressly forbidden to drive or tow a car, at any time
under any conditions, in a direction opposite to that in which the event
is being run without the specific approval of the Chief Steward. Infraction of this rule may result in a penalty. (See 7., Penalties; and 5.4.4.H.,
Counter-Race)
6.8.5. Stopping on a Course; Accepting Assistance
A. If a driver is forced to stop his or her car on the course, he or she
shall make every effort to place the car in such position that it will
GCR - 58
not be a danger or obstruction to other competitors.
B.
Drivers shall obtain no assistance during the race other than from
their pit crews and in the pits. This does not preclude assistance by
Race Officials for safety reasons.
C. For assistance during restarts, see 6.4.C. and 6.5.
6.8.6. Use of the Engine Self-Starter on Course
Cars shall not be moved under power of the starting device while on
course, except to move them from a hazardous position to one of greater
safety or under provisions of 6.7.3.B.
6.8.7. Passengers
No one shall ride outside the cockpit area or on the coach work of any
automobile at any time, including victory laps.
6.9.
RULES OF THE PITS
6.9.1. Pit Area Defined
The Supplementary Regulations for an event shall designate a hot pit area
in which competing cars and their equipment and crews shall be placed
during their assigned time to use the track for practice, qualifying, or
racing (“track time”). This area shall be divided by a protective barrier into
storage space for tools and equipment and “hot pits.” The “hot pit” shall
be the pit area in which the car itself is placed and which is part of or
connects with the access road leading directly to the track.
There may be a definite place in the pits assigned by the Chief Pit
Marshal, or selected with his or her assent, for the accommodation of
each competing car’s equipment and crew, and in which repairs shall be
accomplished during track time.
6.9.2. Required Equipment
In the “hot pit” lane, fire extinguishers, with a nominal ten (10) pound
dry chemical agent capacity having a minimum UL 60 BC or ABC rating,
shall be placed at fifty (50) foot intervals along the pit wall. If the event
calls for refueling stops during the race, each pit crew shall provide one
(1), minimum ten (10) pound /60 BC or ABC rated fire extinguisher for
their own use.
6.9.3. Number of Authorized Crew Members in the Pits
A car shall have a crew of no more than four (4) attendants in the pits
in addition to the driver or drivers. This number may be modified by the
Supplementary Regulations or at the discretion of the Chief Steward.
6.9.4. Authorized Personnel in the Pits
Any crew member in the pits shall be a member of the SCCA and hold an
SCCA license. Minors sixteen (16) years of age and older may be issued
pit credentials only if they hold the proper minor Crew License. All other
persons under eighteen (18) years old are prohibited from entering the pit
area or any other hazardous area.
6.9.5. Control
Pit crews are at all times under the control of the Pit Marshal.
6.9.6. Pit Barrier
Unless the car is actually in the hot pit, no one shall be allowed across the
pit barrier, except that not more than two (2) crew members may do so
for the purpose of signaling to the driver.
GCR - 59
General
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6.9.7. Overshooting the Pit
If a pit-bound driver overshoots his or her pit, the car shall either be
pushed back into the pit by hand, or else continue for another lap. No car
may be pushed back to the pit under conditions which would constitute
a hazard.
6.9.8. Air Bottles/Gas Cylinders
All compressed air bottles/gas cylinders, with a pressure in excess of 200
psi, shall have a protective structure around their gauges and valves when
in the pit/grid/pre-grid areas.
6.9.9. Fueling of Vehicles
Fueling is not permitted in the pits or on the false grid unless authorized
by the Supplementary Regulations or the Chief Steward.
6.10.
RULES OF THE PADDOCK
6.10.1. Paddock Area Defined
Any area on the race track grounds where a car is located, other than
during its track time is called the Paddock. If possible, it will be delineated
in the Supplementary Regulations and equitable amounts of space in it
assigned to each competitor.
6.10.2. Retiring to the Paddock
A car once moved to the pits shall remain there or on course during its
track time. A car that enters the paddock during qualifying and subsequently re-enters the track shall forfeit any qualifying times recorded prior
to re-entry. A car that is removed from the pits or course during a race is
ineligible to return during that period of track time, except when provided
for in the Supplementary Regulations or when approved by the Chief
Steward.
6.11.
FLAGS
6.11.1. The names and described flags below are used in racing to
convey the commands or information indicated. They shall be obeyed
immediately and without question. The directives of Section 6.11. shall
not be amended by any event Supplemental Regulations.
6.11.2. Meaning of Each Flag
A. GREEN FLAG (Solid Green)
A race is under way the instant the green flag is displayed. This flag shall
normally be in possession of the Starter only, and shall not ordinarily be
displayed at the flag stations around the course. When displayed, the
green flag indicates that the course is clear.
B. YELLOW FLAG (Solid Yellow)
STANDING YELLOW -- Take care, Danger, Slow Down, NO PASSING
FROM THE FLAG until past emergency area.
WAVED -- Great Danger, Slow Down, be prepared to stop -- NO
PASSING FROM THE FLAG until past emergency area.
DOUBLE YELLOW, DISPLAYED AT ALL STATIONS — Indicates the
entire course is under a yellow condition. SLOW DOWN, NO PASSING.
This flag condition may be used with or without a Pace (Safety) Car,
including pace lap(s). Cars may carefully pass emergency vehicles. Cars
may also pass other cars that are disabled or otherwise cannot keep the
GCR - 60
pace as signified by a raised arm on the part of the driver of the off-pace
car (see Section 6.3.2.).
NOTE: A driver may encounter several flags before reaching the emergency area. The requirements are still the same “SLOW DOWN, NO
PASSING.”
C. BLUE FLAG (Blue with Diagonal Yellow Stripe)
Another competitor is following you very closely or is trying to overtake
you. This flag may be displayed standing or waving, depending upon
the speed with which you are being overtaken.
D. SURFACE CONDITION FLAG (Yellow with Vertical Red Stripes)
Take care. Oil has been spilled, or a slippery condition exists, or debris
is present on the racing surface. This flag is displayed standing.
E. WHITE FLAG (Solid White)
Caution – you are approaching a slow moving race car (e.g., with
mechanical trouble), ambulance, or other emergency vehicle on the
racing surface. Take care. This flag shall be shown standing for two
(2) flag stations prior to the vehicle. A standing white flag shall also
be displayed during the first lap of a practice or qualifying session to
indicate the location of the flagging stations.
F. BLACK FLAG (Solid Black)
CLOSED BLACK FLAG (Furled) Pointed or shaken at an individual car
from the Starter’s stand (optionally, accompanied by a number board
indicating the car number): WARNING! You have been observed driving
in an unsafe and/or improper manner. If the action continues, you shall
be given an OPEN BLACK FLAG.
BLACK, OPEN - Displayed from the Starter’s stand, and accompanied
by a number board indicating the car number: Proceed directly to the
pits and the location designated by the Chief Steward or event Supplementary Regulations for consultation with Officials. DO NOT TAKE
ANOTHER LAP. NOTE: This flag and accompanying number board may
be additionally displayed at another station location elsewhere on the
course.
BLACK, OPEN, DISPLAYED AT ALL STATIONS - The session has been
halted. Practice/qualifying/racing has stopped and all cars shall proceed
directly to the pits. This flag condition shall be accompanied by an ‘ALL’
sign displayed at the Starter’s stand and the sign may be repeated
at stations located elsewhere on the course. If the session/race is
restarted, it is done under the provisions of Section 6.5, Restarts.
NOTE: THE BLACK FLAG CAN ONLY BE DISPLAYED BY ORDER OF
THE CHIEF STEWARD AS RELAYED THROUGH RACE CONTROL.
G. MECHANICAL BLACK FLAG (Black with Orange Ball)
There is something mechanically wrong with your car. Proceed to your
pit or designated black flag area at reduced speed.
H. CHECKERED FLAG (Black and White Checks)
You have finished the race (or practice/qualifying session). Continue
cautiously to the pits.
I. RED FLAG(Solid Red)
Displayed at each station and on the Starter’s stand - EXTREME
DANGER - THE SESSION HAS BEEN STOPPED. Come to an immediate,
GCR - 61
General
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
controlled stop at the side of the race track (indicated by an official at
that location or as specified in the event Supplementary Regulations).
When released by an Official, proceed cautiously to the pits.
NOTE: THE RED FLAG CAN ONLY BE DISPLAYED BY ORDER OF THE
CHIEF STEWARD AS RELAYED THROUGH RACE CONTROL.
6.11.3. Lights Instead of Flags
The Supplementary Regulations shall state where on the course and for
what purpose lights shall be used.
GCR - 62
7.
PENALTIES
All participants shall be subject to control by SCCA, the organizing SCCA
Region, other organizers, and all appointed officials of the event. (See
Appendix A, for definition of Participant)
This Section provides the penalties for violation of the GCR and the
Supplementary Regulations.
7.1.
WHO MAY BE PENALIZED
Any organizer, entrant, driver, crew member, official, worker, guest of
the above, or SCCA member may be penalized.
7.2.
RANGE OF PENALTIES
The penalties in increasing order of severity are:
A. Fine ($1-$99)
B. Reprimand
A reprimand against an SCCA driver shall be noted in his or her
license file.
C. Loss of event points
D. Fine ($100-$249)
E. Fine ($250)
A fine of up to $250 may be imposed. Fines shall be in whole dollar
amounts only.
F. Probation of competition privileges
Probation is effective immediately. However, the designated probation period does not begin until the competition license, as well as
any imposed fine, is received by the Chairman SOM or the National
Office. Probation may restrict the driver to competing in his or
her division, restrict the driver to certain types or level of events,
require the driver to perform specified event related activities, or
require the driver to attend an SCCA Driver’s School. The driver
shall be required to notify the Chief Steward at any event he or
she participates in, prior to his or her first on track session, that he
or she is on probation. Failure to do so is a violation of probation.
(See 4.4.10.A.)
1. Term of Probation
Probation may be for up to six (6) months, except that up to ten (10)
months may be imposed between September 1st and September
30th, and nine (9) months may be imposed on or after October 1st,
or a specified number of SCCA event days.
2. Violation of Probation
Failure to comply with the terms of probation may be the basis
for further penalties by a First Court appointed for the purpose of
hearing the violation, by a Court of Driver Review (See 2.4., Driver
or Official Review), or by the SOM at the event where the violation
occurs.
G. Time, Lap, or Position
Penalties expressed as loss of time, loss of completed laps, loss of
event points, or loss of finishing position may be imposed.
H. Disqualification from competition
Disqualification from competition (Appendix A., Competition) may be
imposed on an entrant, driver, or car. Any entrant or driver who is
disqualified in any competition shall automatically forfeit all rights to
GCR - 63
General
7. Penalties
7. Penalties
awards in that competition.
I. Suspension of competition privileges
Suspension of SCCA licensed privileges may be imposed for up to
twelve (12) months. When a penalty of suspension is imposed, the
license holder shall immediately surrender his or her license to the
Chairman of the Court. While the suspension is effective immediately,
the designated suspension period shall not begin until the receipt of the
surrendered license by the Chairman of the Court or the National Office
and the payment of any fines imposed.
A member whose license has been suspended by Club Racing shall
not participate in a Club Racing event using any other grade or form of
license. In addition to suspension of competition privileges, a competitor, in cases where the vehicle is found to be mechanically illegal, will
have the infraction noted in the vehicle logbook.
J. Loss of accrued points
Loss of accrued points may be imposed.
K. Expulsion from SCCA
Expulsion from the SCCA may be imposed as provided by the SCCA
bylaws.
7.3.
MULTIPLE PENALTIES
Multiple penalties may be imposed. Consecutive penalties may be
imposed (i.e., two thirty (30) day suspensions, total sixty (60) days; two
(2) months’ suspension and six (6) months’ probation). Both suspension
and probation, each for the maximum allowable term, may be imposed
for a single violation.
7.4.
AUTOMATIC PENALTIES
A. Penalties assessed by the Stewards of the Meeting or the National
Court of Appeals will accumulate points resulting in automatic
probation or suspension.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Reprimand
Fine $1 - $99
$100 - $249
$250
Time, loss of lap or finishing position
Probation of SCCA competition privileges
Disqualification from competition
Suspension of SCCA competition privileges
Loss of accrued points
1 point
no points
1 point
2 points
3 points
3 points
4 points
6 points
7 points
Penalties imposed by the Chief Steward shall not incur automatic
penalty points. In the event that the Chief Steward’s action is
protested and the protest is disallowed, thus upholding the Chief
Steward’s action, the Stewards of the Meet may assign penalty
points as listed above.
C. When multiple penalties result from a single action, only the most
severe penalty will accumulate points. Accumulation of eleven (11)
points in a consecutive three (3) year period will result in Probation of SCCA Competition Privileges for six (6) months or six (6)
events (to be determined by the Executive Steward). Accumulation
of fifteen (15) points in a consecutive three (3) year period will
result in Suspension of SCCA Competition Privileges for six (6)
months. The imposition of either of the two (2) penalties, probation
GCR - 64
or suspension, will not result in additional points.
D. A competitor using a Statement of Facts Affidavit in lieu of a
license which cannot be verified by Central Licensing shall receive
an automatic penalty consisting of disqualification from the event
and a sixty (60) day license suspension. The imposition of this
penalty may be appealed.
E.
Refusal to permit disassembly (tear down) in a Protest/Request for
Action is an automatic penalty of disqualification, six (6) month
suspension, and two-hundred-fifty dollars ($250) fine.
7.5.
AMENDMENT OF RESULTS
When an entrant or driver is disqualified, the Stewards of the Meeting
shall advance the subsequent competitors in the finishing order and
advise the Chief of Timing and Scoring of any consequent amendment
to the results.
7.6.
PUBLICATION
The SCCA shall have the right to publicize a notice that any person,
organization, or car has been penalized and the reasons for the action.
Any person or organization referred to in the notice shall have no right of
action against SCCA or against any person for publishing such notice or
for its contents.
GCR - 65
General
7. Penalties
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
8.
8.1.
STEWARDS’ ACTIONS, PROTESTS, AND APPEALS
TYPES OF STEWARDS’ ACTIONS
8.1.2. Chief Steward’s Action
The Chief Steward may file a Chief Steward’s Action (CSA) describing a
breach of the GCR or the supplemental regulations and the corresponding
action taken as outlined in Section 5.12.2.C.
8.1.3. Request for Action
The Chief Steward may submit to the SOM a Request for Action describing
a suspected breach of the GCR or the Supplementary Regulations. The
SOM shall act on this Request in the same manner as they would act
on a protest, and shall have the same authority to levy penalties as in a
protest. The Chief Steward shall not submit a Request for Action for any
single breach of the rules for which he has already imposed a penalty as
outlined in Section 5.12.2.
8.1.4. Rules Interpretation
To obtain a determination on the legality of a vehicle or component,
without filing a formal protest, a competitor may request such a ruling
from the Club Racing Office. The Chairman of the Stewards Program will
then convene a first court. Their decision would then be reviewed by the
Court of Appeals. The fee for this service is $250. A portion of this fee
may be refundable at the discretion of either or both courts. Penalties
or penalty points will not be assessed in the event of a negative ruling.
A non-compliant ruling will be published; a compliant ruling will not be
published.
8.2.
HEARING
No penalty shall be imposed by the SOM except after a hearing that
follows the procedures set out in 8.3.4., Hearing A Protest, whether the
matter is brought to the attention of the SOM by Protest or by a Chief
Steward’s Request for Action (See 8.1.3., Request for Action).
8.3.
PROTESTS
8.3.1. Who May Protest
The right to protest shall rest with any entrant, driver, organization, or
official taking part in the competition in question. Each, alone, may protest
any decision, act, or omission of the organizers, an official, entrant, driver,
or other person connected with the competition, which the protestor
believes is in violation of the GCR, the Supplementary Regulations, or any
conditions attached to the sanctioning of the event by SCCA (hereafter in
this section collectively referred to as “the rules”).
8.3.2. Lodging a Protest
A protest shall be made in writing, specifying which sections of the GCR
or other applicable rules are alleged to have been violated, and signed by
the protestor. It shall be addressed to the Chief Steward and delivered to
him in person or to an Assistant Chief Steward at the control point for the
race. It shall be promptly forwarded to the Chairman of the SOM.
A. Protest Fee
The protest shall be accompanied by a protest fee of $50 for National
races, $25 for Regional races and Driver’s Schools.
B.
Time Limits
GCR - 66
1.
A protest against the validity of an entry or qualification and
conformity to the rules of an entrant, driver, or car shall be
lodged no later than one hour before the start of the race
segment of a competition.
2.
A protest against a starting position or handicap shall be made
within thirty (30) minutes of announcement of starting position
or handicaps.
3.
A protest against any driver’s action or other mistake or irregularity occurring during a competition shall be made within thirty
(30) minutes of the conclusion of the competition.
4.
A protest against the results of a competition shall be made
within thirty (30) minutes of their posting.
5.
A protest against a Race Official shall be made within thirty
(30) minutes after completion of the competition or notification of Official’s Action.
6.
Any action initiated by the Chief Steward shall be received by
the SOM prior to thirty (30) minutes after the posting of the
Results of the last race, except a Request for Action resulting
from a post-race inspection. Such Requests shall be made
within a reasonable time after discovery of the suspected violation of the rules.
7.
The SOM may extend these time limits in exceptional cases
where the protestor can demonstrate that evidence pertinent
to the protest was not available within the time limit, or where
the protestor can demonstrate he or she was unable to meet
the deadline due to circumstances beyond his or her control.
8.3.3. Protests Against Cars
Entrants or drivers taking part in a competition (See Appendix A, Competition) may protest a car in the same competition for not conforming to
the rules. A protest against a car is also a protest against its driver and
entrant.
The protestor may request that the car be disassembled, inspected, or any
other test made, provided he or she posts a bond with the SOM sufficient
to cover the total expenses of disassembly, inspection, and reassembly. A
protest may be reduced in scope but not added to at the time the bond is
set. Once a bond is posted, the stipulated inspections shall be completed,
unless the protest is wholly or partially withdrawn by the protestor. The
SOM shall apportion the costs incurred, including reassembly, up to the
point of withdrawal, provided no illegality has been discovered.
In the event a car is found in non-compliance, a claim that the noncompliant item(s) offer no performance advantage shall have no influence
on any ruling.
In addition, a competitor, in cases where the vehicle is found to be
mechanically illegal, will have the infraction noted in the vehicle logbook.
(See 9.2.1.I.)
A. Establishing a Bond
1. The bond shall be established by the SOM after consulting
separately with the protestor and the protestee, and with the
Chief Technical Inspector, and any other experts whose advice
GCR - 67
General
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
the Stewards believe shall be useful.
2.
Items covered by the bond may be priced individually, with
consideration given to possible logical linking of some items.
This cost schedule shall be set up prior to initiation of the
inspection. The bond may be awarded after tear down on a
predetermined apportionment basis. Apportionment of the bond
after the fact is not permitted, except where the protestor has
withdrawn all or part of the protest.
3.
The bond shall be by cash or check.
4.
Where the circumstances warrant, the SOM shall require the
protested party to post bond and/or sign a repair order with a
service establishment to cover the costs of disassembly and
inspection. The bond shall be established in the same manner
as a protestor’s bond.
5.
In the event of a protest involving verification of camshaft
specifications, SCCA Club Racing Technical Services offers
verification services for protest and/or compliance resolution
according to the following requirements:
a.
A complete description of the vehicle/engine combination
should be included (i.e. make, model, year, VIN #, engine
code, displacement, etc.).
b.
A known stock example of the camshaft in question must
be included with the protested camshaft. The sample
cam must be of the same make, model and year of the
protested camshaft.
c.
An accurate description of the intake and exhaust valve
arrangement relative to the #1 cylinder is required (i.e., EX
/ IN, EX / IN, EX / IN, EX / IN).
d.
The engine firing order and crankshaft rotation direction
is required. NOTE: For camshaft testing purposes, crankshaft rotation is determined by looking at the front of the
engine, NOT from the driver’s seat.
e.
The cost for each camshaft test is $100. Provisions for
shipping to and from the national office should be included
in the bond.
f.
Upon receipt of the above information and samples, a
complete camshaft comparison will be produced within 5
working days. This information will be conveyed to the
Chairman SOM directly via fax or mail.
B. Conduct of Inspection
The inspection and/or disassembly shall be conducted under the supervision of the SOM. They shall determine which portions of the inspection and/or disassembly, if any, may be observed, and by whom. Any
additional item(s) found during the inspection shall be forwarded to the
Chief Steward.
On a mechanical RFA or protest, noncompliant items found by tech
during disassembly, and not part of the original action, must be referred
to the Chief Steward. In such situations, associated tear down bonds
GCR - 68
shall not be rewarded for noncompliant cars.
C. Refusal to Allow Inspection
Refusal of an entrant or driver of a protested car to allow inspection
under the terms established by the SOM shall result in immediate automatic penalties per 7.4.E.
D. Disposition of Bond
If the car conforms to the rules, the protestor shall forfeit the bond.
If the car does not conform to the rules, the protestor’s bond shall be
returned, and the protested party shall stand the expenses. Awarding of
the bond on a predetermined apportionment basis is permitted.
E. Time of Disbursement of Bond; Appeal Escrow
The tear down bond shall be sent to the Manager of Club Racing to
be held in escrow until the time limit for appeal has passed, an appeal
has been rejected (See 8.4.4., Hearing Appeals), or an appeal has been
finally decided by SCCA.
F. Preservation of Evidence
Any recorded evidence such as technical data or inspectors’ reports
or measurements shall be forwarded to the Club Office with the tear
down bond (See 8.3.3.A.). The Chairman SOM shall accept any parts
tendered by the owner for safekeeping pending appeal. The SOM shall
have the authority to impound parts.
8.3.4. Hearing a Protest
The SOM shall hear the protest as soon as practical after the protest is
lodged. All parties concerned shall be given adequate notice of the time
and location of the hearing. They shall be entitled to call witnesses, but
shall state their cases in person. In the absence of a party, judgment
may go by default. Each party or witness shall be heard separately and
in private. If judgment cannot be given immediately after the hearing, all
parties shall be informed of the time and method by which the decision
shall be conveyed. Anyone who has filed a protest, been protested or is
the subject of a Chief Stewards action shall remain until a ruling has been
issued, or until expressly released by the Chairman SOM.
8.3.5. Judgment
All parties concerned shall be bound by the decision given, subject only to
appeal as provided in Section 8.4., Appeals.
8.3.6. Reasonableness
It is expected that protests shall be reasonable, logical, and based on
sound evidence, thus well-founded. A well-founded protest shall further
be defined as one upon which reasonable men or women may differ. A
protest may be well-founded even if not upheld.
A. Forfeiture of Protest Fee
If a protest is judged to be not well-founded, the protest fee shall be
forfeited.
B. Vexatious or Bad Faith Protests
A protestor who has acted in bad faith or in a vexatious manner may
be penalized by the SOM.
8.4.
APPEALS
8.4.1. Right to Appeal
Any person, entrant, or organization named as a party to a protest or
GCR - 69
General
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
Chief Steward’s Request for Action, shall have the right to appeal any
decision or penalty imposed by the Stewards of the Meet (SOM). In addition, the Chief Steward of the event shall have the right to appeal any
decision or penalty imposed.
8.4.2. Jurisdiction
The Chairman of the Board of Directors, SCCA, Inc., will appoint a three
(3) member Court of Appeals each year to review and render a final decision on any appeal filed under this section. It is the intent of these provisions to provide for resolution of differences before a Court composed of
individuals with individual and collective expertise in racing matters.
8.4.3. Appealing an Adverse Ruling
An appeal permitted under the GCR shall be started by filing a written
notice of appeal with the SCCA, Inc., at its headquarters, or as provided in
Section .C, below. The notice of appeal shall specify the party making the
appeal, shall state the decision or portion thereof appealed, shall explain
the reason or reasons why the appeal should be decided in their favor,
shall include all information the appellant wishes the Court to consider,
and as applicable, which part(s) of the GCR, Category Specifications and/
or Supplemental Regulations of an event, are considered to have been
enforced in a manner that was not fair or equitable to the appellant. The
Notice of Appeal shall be U.S. Government postmarked or registered with
a carrier service (i.e., UPS, Federal Express, etc.) within ten (10) days
after the announcement of the decision being appealed has been given to
the appellant and shall include the appropriate appeal fee of $125, payable
to SCCA, Inc. A minimum of $50 of the appeal fee will be retained by the
SCCA on all appeals that are filed, unless otherwise determined by the
Court of Appeals. An appeal properly started may be withdrawn, without
penalty, by written notice to the SCCA, Inc., prior to start of the review
of the appeal by the National Court of Appeals. Review of the appeal shall
have started when members of the Court have physically received copies
of the appeal and begin review at a regular session of the Court.
A. Fines, Licenses, Financial Obligations
All fines must be paid in cash or by check with US funds. Fines imposed
by the SOM, Chief Steward and/or suspended licenses shall be received
by SCCA, Inc., before an appeal will be heard. When a Letter of Probation is issued, the competition license also must be surrendered to the
SOM or Chief Steward, and then forwarded to SCCA, Inc. Any appeal
received by SCCA, Inc., will not be heard until said license is received
by SCCA, Inc. Any other financial obligation owed SCCA, Inc., or any
of its chartered Regions, and duly reported to be in arrears to SCCA,
Inc., shall be received by SCCA, Inc., before an appeal will be heard.
B. Stay of Decision
An appeal filed on a penalty rendered by the SOM or other Court
involving either a suspension of competition privileges or expulsion from
the SCCA will permit the appellant to enter and compete in subsequent
races, until the appellant’s appeal has been decided and a decision
announced by the Court of Appeals. The results and awards from these
races shall be considered Provisional until the Court’s ruling upholds or
overturns the suspension or expulsion, at which time the Provisional
Results and awards will be considered Final and Official. If the Court of
Appeals ruling upholds the suspension or expulsion, the awards won by
an appellant in races while awaiting the Court of Appeals ruling will be
considered null and void. Race results for those events will be revised to
entirely remove the appellant’s name, and other information, from the
Final and Official Results.
GCR - 70
C. Dual Sanction Weekends
On a dual event weekend, (i.e., where more than one sanction number
has been issued by Club Racing; Double Regional, National, Regional/
National, or any other combination permitted), a party who has had
their competition privileges suspended (per Section 7.2.I.) may, by
filing a Notice of Intent to Appeal together with the appeal fee with the
Chairman of the Stewards of the Meet (SOM), be allowed to compete in
the other event that weekend that is being conducted under a different
sanction number than the one where the party was suspended. The
notice of appeal shall be filed within ten days of the date the decision
of the SOM was given to the appellant. THIS APPEAL CANNOT BE
WITHDRAWN. The party may compete in subsequent events until the
Court of Appeals renders its ruling. On a single event weekend, if a
competitor’s competition privileges are suspended by the SOM, that
competitor is prohibited from further competition activities during that
event from the time the decision is rendered. A notice of an Intent to
Appeal at a single sanctioned event may not be accepted by the SOM
for any reason at any time.
D. Well Founded Appeals
For an appeal to be considered well founded, it shall be based on sound
evidence. Reasonable people may differ on the interpretation of the
evidence. An appeal may be determined to be well founded even if
the decision of the first Court remains unchanged by the Court of
Appeals.
8.4.4. Hearing Appeals
All properly filed appeals (per Section 8.4.3.) shall be heard by the Court.
The Court will review the SCCA Official Observer’s Report, the Notice
of Appeal, containing all the evidence the appellant wishes the Court
to consider; and will make any other inquiries it feels warranted, before
making its decision. It may, at its discretion, require the appellant to
submit any additional evidence it deems necessary for an equitable decision; hear directly evidence from any person deemed to have pertinent
information or necessary data prior to making a decision; permit other
parties to the decision under appeal to make written comments on the
appellant’s Notice of Appeal; and/or seek information from any source
it desires. The Court of Appeals shall make every effort to make its final
decision and render a decision on the appeal, within (30) days of its
receipt of the Notice of Appeal.
No member of the Court shall have taken part as a competitor or Official
in the event in which the Court will render a decision, or shall have been
directly or indirectly interested or involved in the matters under consideration. The Court shall determine the procedure for hearing an appeal
which procedure shall not be subject to appeal.
8.4.5. Judgment of the Court of Appeals
A. After considering all material it deems relevant, the Court of
Appeals shall meet privately, reach its decision, and prepare a
written opinion. It may decide that the penalty or other action of the
SOMs or other body appealed from should be nullified, mitigated,
affirmed, increased, or a different penalty imposed, but it shall not
order a competition to be re-run. The Court of Appeals may order
a rehearing by the original SOM committee at the Court’s discretion.
B.
At no time shall the Court of Appeals act as a first court.
C. Penalties imposed by the Court of Appeals shall incur automatic
GCR - 71
General
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
penalty points outlined in section 7.4.
D. The Court may order the return or forfeiture of appeal fees or of
stay bonds. The Court shall direct the disposition of protest fees
and teardown bonds, if any, in those cases where the original
Court’s decision is nullified or otherwise changed.
E.
The Court’s decision shall be final, binding and not subject to further
appeals by any other party, either within the SCCA organization or
outside the Club.
8.4.6. Publication and Effect of Decision
SCCA, Inc. will distribute a copy of the final decision of the Court to
all parties of the appeal as soon as possible after the decision becomes
final and will use its best efforts to publish said final decisions as soon
as possible after finalization. Persons, entrants, or organizations referred
to in each said decision shall have no right of action against SCCA, Inc.,
or any person publishing such notice, and said decision shall be final and
binding. Any penalty of the Court shall be effective immediately or as
stated in its decision. Penalties involving time, disqualification, or loss
of points shall be made effective from the date of the conclusion of the
event involved. Penalties involving suspension shall be made effective
from the date of the COA decision.
8.4.7. Bad Faith Appeals
If the Court determines that the appellant has acted in bad faith or in a
vexatious manner, it may deem such conduct a breach of the GCR and
impose any penalty listed in Section 7., for said breach.
8.4.8. Appeals Affecting Final Points Standings
For all National Races held less than 31 days prior to the commencement
of the Runoffs, any appeal affecting the National Championship points
standings within a division, including all evidence, must be received in
the National Office within 48 hours after either the receipt of a judgment
issued by the Stewards of the Meet or the completion of the event, whichever comes last. Runoffs invitations to all parties named in or affected by
the appeal will be held until the appeal has been finalized. An “ Intent to
Appeal” will not be accepted. This rule shall supercede any other time
allowances for filing an appeal.
GCR - 72
9.
CARS AND EQUIPMENT
9.1.
CATEGORIES AND CLASSES
Descriptions of the automobiles eligible to compete in the various SCCA
Club Racing competition events are carried in the GCR and category
specification books. Their amendments and clarifications are published in
FasTrack and on the Official SCCA web site.
To compete in an SCCA sanctioned event, all cars shall comply with the
requirements of the GCR and of the specifications for their category and
class. If these General Provisions and Specific Provisions for a category/
class shall conflict, the specific category/class provisions shall take precedence. in cases where the specification line for a particular car conflicts
with the class/category rules the spec line shall have precedence.
Organizers of SCCA Regional, National Championship, and Interdivisional
Championship events shall provide competitions for the following classes
and categories (see 3.9.2.E). Classes not designated “Regional Only” shall
be eligible to compete for an invitation to the Interdivisional Championship
(Runoffs) per section 3.9.2. Note: ( ) Indicates identification markings per
9.3.28.
9.1.1.
FORMULA CATEGORY CLASSES
Formula Atlantic
(FA)
Formula 1000
(FB)
Formula Continental
(FC)
Formula SCCA
(FE)
Formula Vee
(FV)
Formula Ford
(FF)
Formula 500
(F5)
Formula Mazda
(FM)
Formula S
(FS) - Regional Class Only
9.1.1., continues in the Formula Category Specifications Section.
9.1.2.
GRAND TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES
GT-1
(GT1)
GT-2
(GT2)
GT-3
(GT3)
GT-Lite
(GTL)
9.1.2., continues in the GT Category Specifications Section.
9.1.3.
IMPROVED TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES (Regional Only)
R
(ITR)
S
(ITS)
A
(ITA)
B
(ITB)
C
(ITC)
9.1.3. continues in the Improved Touring Category Specifications Section.
9.1.4.
PREPARED CATEGORY CLASSES
B Prepared
(BP)
D Prepared
(DP)
9.1.4., continues in the Prepared Category Specifications Section.
9.1.5.
PRODUCTION CATEGORY CLASSES
E Production
(EP)
F Production
(FP)
G Production
(GP)
GCR - 73
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
H Production
(HP)
9.1.5., continues in the Production Category Specifications Section.
9.1.6.
SEDAN CATEGORY
American Sedan
(AS)
9.1.6., continues in the American Sedan Category Specifications Section.
9.1.7.
SHOWROOM STOCK CATEGORY CLASSES
B
(SSB)
C
(SSC)
9.1.7., continues in the Showroom Stock Category Specifications Section.
9.1.8.
SPEC MIATA CLASS
Spec Miata
(SM)
9.1.8., continues in the Spec Miata Class Specifications Section.
9.1.9.
SPORTS RACING CATEGORY CLASSES
A Sports Racing
(ASR) - Regional Class Only
C Sports Racing
(CSR)
D Sports Racing
(DSR)
Sports 2000
(S2)
Spec Racer Ford
(SRF)
9.1.9., continues in the Sports Racing Category Specifications Section.
9.1.10. TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES:
Touring 1
(T1)
Touring 2
(T2)
Touring 3
(T3)
ST
(ST)
9.1.10., continues in the Touring Category Specifications Section.
9.1.11. OPTIONAL REGIONAL-ONLY CLASSES
Super Production Class (SP) (Regional Class Only): Cars which exceed the
preparation limitations of the applicable Production or GT Specifications
but which meet the general regulations of Section 9 of the GCR for GT
category cars. This includes cars not listed in the GT or Production spec
pages, such as FIA homologated production cars.
Legend Cars (LC) (Regional Class Only): Cars that are manufactured by
600 Racing and comply with current Legend Car Rules, as published by
600 Racing. Competitor must be in possession of the current Legends Car
Rules at all competitions. It is recommended that they be grouped with
cars of similar weight, configuration and speed potential. Note: Legend
Cars are not eligible for any other Club Racing category. Modifications
outside of those permitted in the current Legend Car rules shall render the
car ineligible for SCCA Club Racing competition.
9.1.12. PARTICIPATION REQUIREMENTS FOR NATIONAL CLASSES
A. A National Championship class shall retain its National Championship status as long as its annual average number of entrants
remains at 2.5 or more per National event.
B.
When the average number of entrants in a class at Nationals falls
below 2.5, the class shall be allowed one additional year to bring
the participation level above the current requirement. Alternatively,
it may be immediately consolidated into an existing class. If, in
the grace year, the class does not exceed current requirement per
National race, it shall either be consolidated into an existing class
or revert to a Regional only class.
GCR - 74
C. Based on member input, a Regional Class meeting or exceeding the
participation requirements outlined in paragraph 9.1.12.A. for one
(1) year may be considered for inclusion in the National Championship racing program, except Improved Touring.
D. Based on member or manufacturer input, the CRB may recommend the creation of new National classes to the BoD for approval.
National classes created under 9.1.12.D shall be given five (5)
years to attain an average of 2.5 cars per National event before
being considered for consolidation or reversion to Regional status
per paragraph B above.
Note 1: For the purposes of this section, “entrants” shall be defined as
drivers classified in the final official race results of National races as
finishers, did-not-finish (DNF), or disqualified (DQ). Drivers classified as
did-not-start (DNS) shall not count as entrants.
Note 2: For the purposes of this section, GTL shall be considered a new
class from 2005, T3 and Spec Miata from 2006, and B Prepared, D
Prepared, FE, and Formula 1000 from 2007.
Note 3: Classes such as Improved Touring, Super Production, Formula S,
Legends, etc.; have been created for competitors to race at a Regional
Competition level. These classes will not be eligible for National Competition as they were created with the express understanding that they
remain Regional Competition Classes only. There may be other classes
added to this philosophy, as we require places for our members to race
cars that do not fit within our National Competition program.
9.2.
VEHICLE DOCUMENTATION
9.2.1. Vehicle Logbooks. Each car shall have a complete and up-to-date
logbook.
A. A standard SCCA Vehicle Logbook shall be used by all competitors
at all SCCA competitions, unless excepted by the Supplementary
Regulations.
All vehicle logbooks shall remain solely in possession and control of
a Divisional or National Scrutineer prior to their issuance, whether
new, replacement, or continuation.
B.
Only one Logbook shall be issued for each vehicle (other than as a
continuation of the original or replacement). When a continuation
logbook is issued the original issuance date of the logbook shall
be written on the front page of the continuation logbook. (It is not
necessary to present all old logbooks for issuance of annual inspection stamp or a tech sticker.) The possession of two Logbooks for
one vehicle shall be deemed a breach of the rules under 2.1.3.,
Breach of Rules (Fraud).
C. A complete description of the vehicle, its safety roll bar/roll
cage, and the required photographs shall be entered in the places
provided. All changes of ownership of the vehicle shall be recorded
as provided.
D. ASN Canada FIA Vehicle History Logbooks shall be accepted at all
SCCA events.
E.
The Vehicle Logbook shall be issued only by a Nationally licensed
GCR - 75
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
Technical Inspector, who shall also complete the required vehicle
information in the front and back of the Logbook. He or she shall
conduct a thorough inspection of the vehicle, as provided in
Section 9.3., General Technical and Safety Prepartion Provisions.
The logbook issue date is the date of registration.
F.
Identity Numbers:
1. Each vehicle shall have an identity number corresponding to
that of its logbook permanently stamped on its roll bar.
2.
The first digit(s) corresponding to the region’s identity number
shall be separated from the balance of the numbers by a dash
(-).
3.
The car numbering system, beginning with (001), shall be
issued consecutively as the vehicles are registered during a
thorough inspection.
G. All Formula and Sports Racing Cars registered after January 1, 1983
are required to be Homologated by SCCA and issued a Certificate
of Approval. Exceptions: Spec Racer Ford, FSCCA, SRSCCA, and
Shelby Can-Am. The original certificate shall be presented along
with the car for issuance of a new Vehicle Logbook. Additionally, former Spec Racer Renaults may compete in Vintage/Historic
events using their originally issued logbook.
H. At each event, this Logbook and the Certificate of Approval (for
cars required by these rules to have one) shall be presented at
Technical Inspection with the signature of the driver/entrant for
that event in the space provided. During Technical Inspection all
deviations regarding both safety and legality shall be noted by the
Technical Inspector. If a waiver for the event is permitted, by the
Chief Steward or his/her designated representative, the duration of
the waiver shall be noted and complied with by the competitor.
I.
If a car is protested during an event and found to be illegal, the
results of this protest shall be noted by the Chairman SOM, or
delegated to another official, such as the Chief Scrutineer. (See
8.3.3.)
J.
In the event the vehicle is involved in an accident or is damaged due
to a mechanical failure, the damage shall be noted in the Vehicle
Logbook by the accident investigator or Chief Technical Inspector.
K.
Cars found to be underweight at impound are subject to penalty
and shall have it noted on the next page of the Vehicle Logbook.
L.
In the event the Vehicle Logbook is not available at Technical
Inspection, the vehicle may be accepted for competition only after
a thorough inspection during which all details required for the issuance of a logbook shall be recorded.
M. One car may be entered in more than one class within a single sanction numbered event. Only one (1) Vehicle Logbook is required, but
shall contain pictures of each configuration.
9.2.2. HOMOLOGATION REQUIREMENTS
Homologation is required for all Formula and Sports Racer cars registered
after January 1, 1983. All Formula and Sports Racer cars shall be homologated for their class. All Formula and Sports Racer cars applying for a reGCR - 76
homologation, conversion, dual homologation or a new homologation in a
different class shall comply with the current rules.
Homologation is required on all Legend Cars, and therefore they shall also
comply with the SCCA Legend Car Homologation Request sheet.
Homologation forms must be on file with SCCA Inc., Topeka, Kansas for
any car to be allowed to compete in any SCCA event.
The SCCA Club Racing Technical Manager, with the approval of the Club
Racing Board Chairman, may deny Homologation of any car that is determined to be of a configuration that is unsafe, of a configuration that is
incompatible within the relevant class structure, or incorporates design
characteristics or conditions that are fundamentally divergent from standard safety considerations.
Modifications may be made to a vehicle after it has been homologated as
long as said modifications stay within the scope of the rules.
9.3.
GENERAL TECHNICAL AND SAFETY PREPARATION PROVISIONS
The points covered at Technical and Safety Inspection shall be:
9.3.1. ACCUMULATORS (e.g., Accusumps)
An accumulator (e.g., Accusump) may be installed (except for Touring,
Spec Miata, and Showroom Stock). Location is free, but it shall be
securely mounted within the bodywork. All oil lines that pass into or
through the driver/passenger compartment shall be of metal braided hose
(e.g., Aeroquip).
9.3.2. ACTIVE SUSPENSIONS AND TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Active suspensions and traction control systems, as installed by the automobile manufacturer and unmodified, are allowed only in Touring, Showroom Stock, and B Prepared.
9.3.3. ADVERTISEMENTS AND GRAPHICS
Advertising and graphics (names, symbols and logos) may be displayed
on cars provided they are in good taste and do not interfere with identification marks and SCCA logos.
9.3.4. AERODYNAMIC SKIRTS
Aerodynamic skirts are prohibited in Club Racing.
9.3.5. ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
Four wheel (All-Wheel) drive is prohibited except in Showroom Stock,
Touring, and Prepared.
9.3.6. APPEARANCE NEAT/CLEAN & SUITABLE FOR COMPETITION
Appearance neat and clean, and suitable for competition. Specifically,
cars that are dirty either externally or in the engine or passenger compartments, or that show bodywork damage, structural or surface rust, or that
are partially or totally in primer, or that do not bear the prescribed identification marks shall not be approved for competition.
9.3.7. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS AND HAND CONTROLS
Automatic transmissions are prohibited in all classes. However, the use of
alternative transmissions, including automatic transmissions, and/or hand
controls may be approved on a case-by-case basis. Such approval shall
be in writing from the Club Racing Technical Manager and shall be in the
driver’s possession at all competitions.
GCR - 77
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
9.3.8. BALLAST
Ballast may be added to all cars as required, to meet minimum weight,
provided it is securely mounted within the bodywork and serves no other
purpose.
9.3.9. BATTERIES
Battery location is unrestricted within the bodywork (except Showroom
Stock, Spec Miata, Touring, and Improved Touring). If located in the
driver/passenger compartment, wet cell batteries shall be in a nonconductive marine type container or equivalent. The hot terminal shall be insulated on all cars. All batteries (on-board power supplies) shall be attached
securely to the frame or chassis structure independent of the marine type
container.
9.3.10. BODY PANELS
Body panels shall be securely mounted. Fender skirts and hub caps shall be
removed. The hood and engine compartment shall be securely fastened.
9.3.11. BRAKES
Shall be pedal-operated, working directly on each wheel, and in good
working order. Rolling brake tests are prohibited. ABS or Anti-lock braking
systems are not allowed except in Showroom Stock and Touring. To
satisfy this rule, the ABS shall be disabled by removing or disconnecting
all of the wheel sensors.
9.3.12. CAMERA MOUNTS
The mounts for video / photographic cameras shall be of a safe and secure
design. The body of the camera (recording unit) shall be secured at a
minimum of two (2) points on different sides of the camera body, neither
of the attachments may be elastic or plastic. If a tether is used to restrain
the camera, the tether length shall be limited so that the camera can
not come in contact with driver. These rules of attachment do not apply
to the remote lens of “lipstick” cameras, which weighs approximately 2
oz. The remote lens of these cameras may be secured with items such
as cable ties and racer’s tape. Helmet mounted cameras are prohibited
regardless of size, weight, or location of camera on the helmet.
9.3.13. CARBURETOR FUEL INLET FITTING
On all carburetors, (except SU, C and D Sports Racers with motorcycletype carburetors and Formula 500 Mikuni VM38) with a non-threaded
fuel inlet fitting, the fitting shall be replaced by drilling and tapping the
carburetor body for a threaded fitting.
9.3.14. COOL SUITS
Cool suits are allowed in all classes. Water tank mounts shall be of a safe
and secure design.
9.3.15. CRYOGENIC TREATMENT
Cryogenic treatment of components is allowed unless specifically prohibited in the category or class preparation rules.
9.3.16. DATA COLLECTION DEVICES
Data collection devices are considered to be instrumentation and are
therefore allowed in all classes that permit the installation, replacement or
addition of gauges, indicators or instruments.
9.3.17. DETACHABLE PANELS/SUNROOFS
Detachable hardtops, detachable panels, and detachable doors (e.g.,
Lotus 7) shall be removed, unless authorized in the Category Rules or
Specification Book for that car to remain in place. All glass panels in the
GCR - 78
roof must be removed. Movable or removable metal or composite panels
in the roof may be either removed or positively secured in the closed position. Any openings in the roof resulting from the removal of a panel must
be covered with panels of stock contour made of the same material as the
stock surrounding roof structure.
9.3.18. DRIVER’S RESTRAINT SYSTEM
All drivers in SCCA sanctioned speed events shall utilize either a five, six
or seven point restraint harness meeting the following specifications. A
seven-point restraint harness is recommended. Arm restraints are required
on all open cars including open Targa tops, sunroofs and T-tops. The
restraint system installation is subject to approval of the Chief Technical
and Safety Inspector.
A. A five point system, for use in automobiles where the driver is
seated in an upright position, consists of:
• A three-inch seat belt or an FIA or SFI 16.5 certified two-inch
seat belt.
• An approximately three-inch shoulder harness; or FIA or SFI
16.5 certified two-inch shoulder harnesses only if the HANS®
device is used by the driver. Should the driver, at anytime not
utilize the HANS® device, then three-inch shoulder harnesses
are required.
• An approximately two-inch anti submarine strap.
A five-point harness is considered a minimum restraint system. Six
or seven-point systems are highly recommended in all cars including
automobiles where the driver is seated in an upright position.
B.
A six or seven point system, recommended for use in all automobiles, consists of:
• A three-inch seat belt or an FIA or SFI 16.5 certified two-inch
seat belt.
• An approximately three-inch shoulder harness; or FIA or SFI
16.5 certified two-inch shoulder harnesses only if the HANS®
device is used by the driver. Should the driver, at anytime not
utilize the HANS® device, then three-inch shoulder harnesses
are required.
• Two or three approximately two-inch leg or anti submarine
straps.
C. The shoulder harness shall be the over the shoulder type. There shall
be a single release common to the seat belt and shoulder harness.
When mounting belts and harnesses it is recommended that they
be kept as short as reasonably possible to minimize stretch when
loaded in an accident.
The shoulder harness shall be mounted behind the driver and
supported above a line drawn downward from the shoulder point
at an angle of twenty (20) degrees with the horizontal. The seat
itself, or anything added only to the seat shall not be considered a
suitable guide. Guides must be a part of the roll cage or a part of
the car structure.
Only separate shoulder straps are permitted. (“Y” type shoulder
straps are not allowed.) “H” type configuration is allowed.
D. The single anti submarine strap of the five point system shall be
attached to the floor structure and have a metal to metal connection with the single release common to the seat belt and shoulder
GCR - 79
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
harness.
E.
The double leg straps of the six point or seven-point system may
be attached to the floor as above for the five point system or be
attached to the seat belt so that the driver sits on them, passing
them up between his or her legs and attaching either to the single
release common to the seat belt and shoulder harness or attaching
to the shoulder harness straps. It is also permissible for the leg
straps to be secured at a point common to the seat belt attachment
to the structure, passing under the driver and up between his or her
legs to the seat belt release or shoulder harness straps.
All straps shall be free to run through intermediate loops or clamps/
buckles.
F.
Each seat (lap) and shoulder belt of the harness (5, 6, or 7 points)
shall have an individual mounting point (i.e. 2 for seat belt and 2
for shoulder belt minimum). Six or seven point system anti-submarine straps may share a mounting point with one or both seat (lap)
belt(s). The minimum acceptable bolts used in the mounting of all
belts and harnesses is SAE Grade 5. Where possible, seat belt,
shoulder harness, and anti submarine strap(s) should be mounted
to the roll structure or frame of the car. Where this is not possible,
large diameter mounting washers or equivalent should be used to
spread the load. Bolting through aluminum floor panels, etc., is not
acceptable.
G. All driver restraint systems shall meet one of the following: SFI
specification 16.1, 16.5, or FIA specification 8853/98.
1.
Restraint systems meeting SFI 16.1 or 16.5 shall bear a dated
SFI Spec label. The certification indicated by this label shall
expire on December 31st of the 2nd year after the date of
manufacture as indicated by the label. If for example the manufacture date is 2006 the second year after the date of manufacture is 2008.
2.
Restraint systems homologated to FIA specification 8853/98
will have a label containing the type of harness designation
(‘C-###.T/98 or D-###.T/98) and date of expiration which is
the last day of the year marked. All straps in this FIA restraint
system will have these labels.
3.
If a restraint system has more than one type of certification
label, the label with the latest expiration may be used.
H. Harness Threading: Assemble in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
GCR - 80
FIGURE 1
9.3.19. DRIVER’S SAFETY EQUIPMENT
The following required equipment shall be in good condition and free of
defects, holes, cracks, frays, etc.
A. Driving suits that effectively cover the body from the neck to the
ankles and wrists. One piece suits are highly recommended. All
suits shall bear an SFI 3.2A/1 or higher certification label or FIA
8856-2000 homologation. Underwear of fire resistant material
shall be used except with suits carrying FIA standard 8856-2000
or SFI 3-2A/5 or higher (e.g., /10, /15, /20) Certification Patch.
B.
Crash helmets approved by the Snell Foundation with Snell sticker
2000 or later Special Application (SA2000), or by the SFI with a
SFI Sticker 31.1a for open faced helmets and a SFI sticker 31.2a
for closed faced (if purchased prior to 12/31/04), SFI 31.1 (if
purchased after 1/1/05), or by the FIA standard 8860-2004. The
back of each driver’s helmet shall be labeled with a minimum of the
driver’s name. The use of a head and neck support system is highly
recommended. Accident damaged helmets should be sent by the
driver or his or her representative to the Snell Memorial Foundation,
3628 Madison Ave., North Highland, CA. 95660 (ph) 916-3315073 (attn. Edward B. Becker). Details of the accident should be
included. Freon based total loss helmet cooling systems are not
allowed.
C. Gloves made of leather and/or accepted fire resistant material
containing no holes.
D. Socks made of accepted fire resistant material.
GCR - 81
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
E.
Face coverings (balaclavas) of accepted fire resistant material for
drivers with beards or mustaches. Hair protruding from beneath a
driver’s helmet shall be completely covered by fire resistant material. As an alternative to balaclavas, a full helmet skirt of accepted
fire resistant material may be used. Double-layer balaclavas are
recommended. If balaclavas are used voluntarily, they shall be of
accepted fire resistant material.
F.
Goggles or face shields, preferably made of new impact resistant
materials, for drivers of open cars.
G. A driver’s restraint system meeting SCCA standards (See Section
9.3.18.) shall be used at all times while on the track.
H. Shoes, with uppers of leather and/or nonflammable material that at
a minimum cover the instep. Ventilation pinholes by the manufacturer are allowed.
9.3.20. ELIGIBILITY
Eligibility for class entered - compliance with the GCR and Specification
Books.
9.3.21. EXHAUST SYSTEM
Shall be directed away from the body and shall terminate at or behind a
point which is equidistant from the front and rear hubs.
9.3.22. FIRE SYSTEM
All cars shall be equipped with an On-Board Fire System except Showroom Stock, Touring, Spec Miata, and Improved Touring.
A. On-Board Fire System Requirements
Cars registered after 1/1/09 shall comply with the following onboard fire system requirements:
• Systems certified to SFI specification 17.1
• Those listed by the FIA on Technical List No. 16
The following information must be visible of the unit:
• Certification label
• Capacity
• Type of extinguishing agent
• Weight, or volume, of the extinguishing agent
The following is acceptable for cars registered before 1/1/09:
On-board fire systems shall use Halon 1301 or 1211, with
a five pound minimum capacity (by weight). Alternatively,
on-board fire systems may use AFFF or equivalent surfactant
foam material, 2.25 liter minimum capacity (by volume). All
AFFF fire system bottles shall incorporate a functional pressure
gauge and shall be marked with the manufacturer’s recommended “filled weight.” CO2 cartridge propellant fire extinguishing systems are permitted provided that the seal of the
manufacturer specified CO2 cartridge is not punctured and the
fire bottle is equal to the weight specified by the system manufacturer.
Cars shall meet the following regardless of registration date:
1. The fire system cylinder shall be securely mounted in such
a manner that it can be checked during a technical inspection and may be removed for weighing periodically for
compliance to full weight shown on the cylinder. (Weight
is without valve assembly.)
GCR - 82
2.
Manual or automatic release is
allowed. The release mechanism
shall be within reach of the driver
when belted in the car.
3.
All on-board fire systems shall be
identified with a circle “E” decal.
a.
b.
Item #2607
In GT and Production cars, two circle “E” decals may
be required – one at the release location and the
second on the outside bodywork in line with or as
near to the release location as possible.
In Formula and Sports Racing cars, a circle “E” decal
shall be located on the outside bodywork as near to
the release location as possible.
4.
There shall be a minimum of two nozzle locations – one in
the driver’s compartment and one in either the engine area
or the fuel cell area. The nozzles shall be suitable for the
type of extinguishing agent used.
5.
All AFFF fire system bottles shall incorporate a functional
pressure gauge. This does not apply to non-pressurized
AFFF systems with CO2 propellant.
6.
The firing safety pin(s) shall be removed from all on-board
fire systems prior to going on track. It is recommended
that a warning tag be attached to the safety pin to remind
the driver to remove the safety pin before entering the
racing surface.
7.
All fire systems shall be serviced according to manufacturer’s specifications.
B. Hand-Held Fire Extinguisher Requirements
The following are acceptable for Showroom Stock, Touring and
Improved Touring cars:
1. Halon 1301 or 1211, two (2) pound minimum capacity by
weight.
2.
Dry chemical, two (2) pound minimum with a positive indicator showing charge. Chemical: 10 BC Underwriters Laboratory rating, potassium bicarbonate (Purple K) recommended,
1A10BC Underwriters Laboratory rating multipurpose, ammonium phosphate and barium sulfate or Monnex.
3.
The fire extinguisher shall be securely mounted in the cockpit.
All mounting brackets shall be metal and of the quick-release
type.
9.3.23. FIREWALL AND FLOOR
Firewall and floor shall prevent the passage of flame and debris into the
driver’s compartment. Belly pans shall be vented to prevent the accumulation of liquids, except composite/honeycomb structures. All rear-engined
Formula cars are required to have an undertray, from driver’s foot area to
the firewall, for protection of legs and torso.
9.3.24. FORMULA CAR VISIBILITY
The driver of all Formula cars shall have a field of vision of not less than
GCR - 83
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
ninety (90) degrees to either side (total of 180 degrees) with both eyes
by turning his or her head, but without lifting his or her head forward or
otherwise moving from the normal driving position. Plexiglas or similar
uncolored transparent material may be substituted for existing bodywork. “Token” portholes do not satisfy this requirement. Only a structural
member such as a roll bar brace or frame tube may interrupt the required
field of vision.
9.3.25. FUEL
All cars shall use fuel, as defined below, unless a specific exemption is
made in the provisions for a specific category/class.
A. Permitted Fuel
Permitted fuel is herein defined as gasoline. Gasoline is a mixture of
refined hydrocarbons. Gasoline is an electrical insulator and its relative
effectiveness as an insulator is represented by its dielectric constant
(D.C.). The average D.C. of gasoline, as measured by an SCCA Fuel
Check Meter (High Desert Engineering HDE-1), is defined as “0.0”.
Gasoline may be tested and certified at SCCA events by the determination of the dielectric constant using the SCCA Fuel Check meter
and through the application of various chemical analyses (e.g., Reagent
“A”).
SCCA Approved Fuel Meter: High Desert Engineering Model G-01
SCCA Approved Reagent Test(s) Germane Engineering Reagent “A”
Use of propylene oxide, ethylene oxide, paradioxane, and basic nitrogen
or sulfur-bearing compounds (i.e. pyridine, aniline, pyrrole, dimethylsulfoxide, etc.) is prohibited.
Fuel Standards
Classes
Type
DC
max
Reagent
A
All Prepared, FB, FE, SS, SM, T, IT, SRF, and
Olds SR, and Elan spec DP-02 running as CSR
Gasoline w/ no added oil
15
N/A
All other classes (incl. 2-cycle w/ oil injection)
Gasoline w/ no added oil
0
No pos.
All 2-cycle w/o oil injection
Gasoline w/ oil mixture
2
No pos.
All rotary engines
Gasoline w/ or w/o oil
mixture
15
N/A
B. Fuel Sample Acquisition
All cars shall be equipped with an easily accessible sampling valve/port
located between the fuel tank and the carburetor(s) or fuel injectors
to facilitate acquisition of fuel samples. To avoid fuel spillage, the fuel
sampling valve/port shall not consist of removing a fuel line from any
fuel system component unless a dry break fitting has been installed.
A capped and/or sealed “T” may be fitted inline, or a capped and/or
sealed auxiliary sample port may be fitted to a fuel system component
(carburetor, fuel rail, etc.) without using a dry break fitting. Under no
circumstances is siphoning of fuel from the fuel tank/ cell acceptable.
If possible, the sampling valve/port should not be located in the engine
compartment. Cars equipped with a factory fuel pressure test port (e.g.
fuel injected SS, T, IT, SRF, etc.) or competitors having factory fuel
pressure test equipment available, are not required to have an additional
fuel sampling port. On all other cars, to avoid fuel spillage it is recommended that a valve or dry-break fitting be installed in the fuel line. In
all cases competitors shall provide the appropriate tooling necessary
GCR - 84
to safely obtain the fuel sample. A manned fire extinguisher shall be
present whenever fuel samples are being acquired.
9.3.26. FUEL CELL SPECIFICATIONS
All cars must be equipped with a safety fuel cell complying with these
specifications, except for Showroom Stock, Touring, Spec Miata, and
Improved Touring. All safety fuel cells shall be constructed and certified in
accordance with the FIA FT-3 or higher (FT-3.5, FT-5, etc.) specifications.
All safety fuel cells shall consist of a foam-filled fuel bladder enclosed in
a metal container at minimum.
There is no restriction of fuel cell capacity or dimensions of the fuel cell,
except where otherwise specified.
The installation of more than one cell is permitted.
1. Installation
Internal body panels may be modified to accommodate the installation
of fuel cells as long as modifications serve no other purpose. In the
event If installation includes encroachment into the driver’s compartment, a metal bulkhead must prevent exposure of the driver to the fuel
cell. The fuel cell must not be installed any closer to the ground than 6
inches, unless enclosed within the bodywork or OEM floor pan.
2.
a.
There must be a metal bulkhead between the driver/passenger
compartment and the compartment containing the fuel cell.
This includes fuel cells that are flush mounted with driver/
passenger compartment panels or otherwise exposed to the
driver/passenger compartment.
b.
Fuel cells must be located within 12 inches of the standard
tank. The 12- inch measurement is taken from the perimeter
of the stock and alternative fuel cell. Fuel filler location is unrestricted with installation of a safety fuel cell.
Container
a. GT and Production Category
The bladder shall be installed in a container of .036 inch steel,
or .059 inch aluminum that fully surrounds the bladder.
b.
Sports Racing Category and Formula Cars
The fuel bladder shall be completely surrounded by a container
(which may also be a part of the structure or bodywork of the
car) to ensure rigid and secure mounting of the bladder and
provide additional protection. A minimum of .036 inch steel,
.059 inch aluminum, or an approved equivalent is required for
all vehicles.
3. Filler Cap and Vents
A positive locking fuel filler cap (no Monza/flip type) shall be used. Fuel
pickup openings and lines, breather vents, and fuel filler lines shall be
designed and installed so that if the car is partially or totally inverted,
fuel shall not escape. Fuel filler necks, caps, or lids shall not protrude
beyond the bodywork of the car.
If the fuel filler cap is located directly on the fuel cell, a check valve is
not required, provided the filler cap is a positive locking type and does
not use an unchecked breather opening. If the filler cap is not located on
the fuel cell, a check valve must be installed on the fuel cell to prevent
fuel from escaping if the cap and filler neck are torn from the tank.
GCR - 85
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
Fuel cell breathers shall vent outside the car. The cell need not incorporate a drain fitting. It is recommended that all lines, filler openings,
and vents be incorporated in a single fitting located at the top of the
fuel cell.
In Formula and Sports Racer cars registered prior to January 1, 1994,
the filler cap and neck are exempt from the bulkhead requirements of
9.3.26.1.a.
Factory installed gas tank evaporative emission control devices must be
removed from all Production and GT Category cars. Fuel cell vents must
not discharge into the driver/passenger compartments, even if installed
that way by the manufacturer. The fuel system cannot vent through the
roll bar/roll cage structure.
4. Rotary Molded Cell
The use of rotary molded fuel cells not having a bladder, or not contained
in a metal can, is allowable in those cars that do not require the use of
a fuel cell, but where they are an allowed option.
9.3.27. FUEL, OIL, AND WATER LINES
All fuel, oil, and water lines, including gauge and vent lines, that pass
into or through the driver/passenger compartment, shall be of steel tube
or metal braided hoses or bulkheaded. The driver shall not be exposed to
header tanks.
9.3.28. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
Each car shall carry identification numbers and class letters per A and
B, below, SCCA logos per C, below; and any markings required by the
Supplementary Regulations.
A. Numbers and Class Letters
Numbers shall be placed on the front and both sides of the car so that
they are legible. All Formula cars with a rear wing shall have legible
numbers on each rear wing side plate. Numbers shall be no more than
two (2) digits, and shall meet the approval of the Chief of Timing
and Scoring. Three (3) digit numbers may be used when individually
approved in advance by the Chief of Timing and Scoring. Class letters
shall be placed on both sides of the car so that they are legible. Rear
numbers and class letters are recommended.
B. Size of Numbers and Class Letters
Numbers shall be at least eight (8) inches high, with a 1.5 inch stroke on
a contrasting background (rear winged Formula cars shall have as large
a number as possible on their rear wing side plates). Metallic (reflective)
numbers and class letters are prohibited. The distance between two (2)
numbers shall be at least as wide as the stroke of the numbers. Class
letters shall be at least four (4) inches high, with a half (1/2) inch stroke
on a contrasting background.
C. SCCA Logo
Each driver’s suit shall display the official SCCA uniform patch logo
(see figures 2 and 3). Each car competing in an event shall display the
official SCCA field logo (see figures 4 and 5) unobstructed and prominently on both sides of the car and adjacent to the side numbers. A
third logo shall be displayed on the front of the car unobstructed and
prominently near the front number. The logo shall be on the spoiler of
cars so equipped.
GCR - 86
FIGURE 2
(SCCA OR SCCA CLUB RACING UNIFORM PATCH)
Item 3619
Item #3637
FIGURE 3
Logos and decals of sanctioning bodies other than SCCA shall be
removed or covered (car and driver’s suit).
Vintage cars when participating in vintage events may use the four (4)
inch diameter “SCCA Wire Wheel” in place of the current field logo.
FIGURE 4
Item # 2608
(8-1/2 x 3-1/2 inches)
GCR - 87
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
FIGURE 5
9.3.29. INSIDE NET
An inside net running between the main roll hoop and the dash is recommended for all production-based cars and two-seater sports racers (see
figure 6). It is recommended that the lower strand of the net pass the
shoulder and run horizontally from the cage to the dash. The upper strand
should pass the Cg of the helmet in the side view. The net should run
parallel to the center of the car in plain view and be as close to the seat
as possible. It is recommended that the net be tensioned tightly and have
a way to quickly disconnect it in case the driver needs to exit through
the car in an emergency. Metal collars, or some other equivalent method,
should be used to keep the strands of the net from moving along the rollcage. If possible, the recommended mounting method is to wrap the net
strands around the back of the seat and attach them to the main hoop
upright. However, teams should consult the net manufacturer to verify
their recommended method of mounting.
FIGURE 6
9.3.30. LEAKAGE AND CAPS
There shall be no visible fluid leaks.
9.3.31. LIGHTS
All non-Formula cars shall have two operating red brake lights. All Formula
GCR - 88
(open wheel) and Sports Racer cars shall be equipped with a red taillight
of at least the equivalent illumination power of a fifteen (15) watt bulb.
This light shall be mounted as high as possible on the centerline of the car
and be clearly visible from the rear. The taillight shall be illuminated when
ordered by the Chief Steward. LED assemblies shall be considered one
light for the purposes of this rule, irrespective of the number of individual
LEDs the assembly may contain.
Exposed glass headlights shall be taped. Rear brake lights may be taped
with transparent tape. Turn signals, front parking lights, backup lamps,
and side marker lights may be taped. Lights mounted on or below the
bumper shall be removed, and all resulting holes shall be covered to
prevent air passage through said holes.
9.3.32. LOSS OF BODYWORK
All major body components such as front and rear hoods, fenders, doors,
and windscreens shall be maintained in normal position throughout the
competition. If loss of bodywork is a safety hazard, the car may be blackflagged. A car completing a competition with bodywork missing may be
penalized.
9.3.33. MASTER SWITCH
All cars, except Showroom Stock and Touring shall be
equipped with a master switch easily accessible from
outside the car. Spec Racer Fords shall be wired per
RFSRII. The master switch shall be installed directly in
either battery cable and shall cut all electrical circuits but
not an on-board fire system. All terminals of the master
switch shall be insulated to prevent shorting out. It shall
be clearly marked by the international marking of a spark
in a blue triangle and mounted in a standard location. Off
position shall be clearly indicated at the master switch
location. The standard locations shall be as follows:
Item #2606
A. Formula and Sports Racing Cars - In proximity to the right-hand
member of the roll bar, but in a location so that it cannot be operated accidentally. It can be mounted on a bracket welded to the
inside of the upright member or mounted so that the operating lever
or knob is outside of the body panel immediately in-board of the
upright member. This is the standard location on Formula cars built
to the Constructor’s Association requirements for Formula 1.
B.
Closed Sports Racing Cars, Production Cars, Improved Touring and
GT Cars - In front of the windshield on either the cowl or on top
of the fender, but close enough to the windshield to be accessible
if the car is overturned. Alternatively, it may be mounted below
the center of the rear window or on a bracket welded, clamped
or bolted to the roll cage or dash, easily accessible through the
open window. (Drilling of holes in roll cage to attach the bracket is
prohibited.)
C. Open Production, GT, and Improved Touring Cars - May exercise a
choice among the above locations.
9.3.34. MIRRORS
Shall provide driver visibility to the rear of both sides of the car.
9.3.35. NON-METALLIC WHEEL/CHASSIS CONSTRUCTION
Non-metallic wheel construction is prohibited. Non-metallic chassis
construction is prohibited, except in ASR, CSR, DSR, S2000, and FA.
GCR - 89
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
9.3.36. OIL AND OIL ADDITIVES
Any oil or oil additive may be used. Oil additives are defined as: Any liquid
or particulate compound(s) delivered into the engine via the engine oil
for the purpose of friction/temperature reduction, and/or metal surface
conditioning (i.e. PTFE resins (Teflon, “Slick-50”), Molybdenum Disulfide,
etc.).
9.3.37. OIL CATCH TANKS, FILTERS, AND BREATHERS
Oil holding tanks and engine breathers, whether directly or indirectly
ventilating the crankcase, and all transmission/transaxle breathers shall
be equipped with oil catch tanks. Minimum catch tank capacity shall be
one U.S. quart for the engine and transmission/transaxle. Oil holding tanks
and oil filters may be mounted in the driver/passenger compartment. A
metal bulkhead shall prevent exposure of the driver to oil spillage. Oil
catch tanks shall vent into the engine compartment or outside the driver’s
compartment. A crankcase vacuum breather that passes through the oil
catch tank(s) to exhaust systems or vacuum devices that connect directly
to exhaust systems is prohibited.
9.3.38. ROLL CAGE/ROLL BAR
Shall comply with Section 9.4., Driver Protection Structures.
9.3.39. SCATTERSHIELDS/CHAIN GUARDS
The installation of scattershields or explosion-proof bell housings shall be
required on all cars (except Showroom Stock, Spec Miata, Touring and
Improved Touring) where the failure of the clutch or flywheel could create
a hazard to the driver. Chain drive cars shall be fitted with a protective
case/shield to retain the chain in case of failure.
Minimum material specifications are:
.125 inch SAE 4130 alloy steel
.250 inch mild steel plate
.250 inch aluminum alloy
NHRA or SFI approved flexible shields.
9.3.40. SEATS
The driver’s seat shall be a one-piece bucket-type seat and shall be
securely mounted. In cars where the seat is upright the back of the seat
shall be firmly attached to the main roll hoop, or its cross bracing, so as
to provide aft and lateral support. Seats homologated to and mounted in
accordance with FIA standard 8855-1999 or higher need not have the
seat back attached to the roll structure. The homologation labels must
be visible. Seat supports shall be of the type listed on FIA technical list
No.12 (lateral, bottom, etc). Passenger seat back - if a folding seat, it
shall be securely bolted or strapped in place.
A system of head rest to prevent whiplash and rebound, and also to
prevent the driver’s head from striking the underside of the main hoop
shall be installed on all vehicles. Racing seats with integral headrests
satisfy this requirement.
The head rest on non-integral seats shall have a minimum area of thirtysix (36) square inches and be padded with a minimum of one inch thick
padding. It is strongly recommended that padding meet SFI spec 45.2
or FIA Sports Car Head Rest Material. The head rest shall be capable of
withstanding a force of two-hundred (200) lbs. in a rearward direction.
The head rest support shall be such that it continues rearward or upward
from the top edge in a way that the driver’s helmet can not hook over
the pad.
GCR - 90
9.3.41. STEERING WHEEL LOCKS
Steering wheel lock devices shall be removed (except Showroom Stock
and Touring).
9.3.42. STEERING WHEELS
Wood rim steering wheels are prohibited.
9.3.43. SUSPENSION AND STEERING
Suspension and steering shall be of suitable design and in good working
order. Four wheel steering is prohibited.
9.3.44. TIRES
Tires shall be 120 mph rated or better unless otherwise specified or
controlled.
9.3.45. TONNEAU AND BOOT COVERS
Tonneau covers and boot covers shall be removed.
9.3.46. TOWING EYES
All cars without an exposed roll bar shall have a towing eye or strap,
front and rear that does not dangerously protrude from the bodywork
when the car is racing, to be used for flat-towing or hauling the vehicle.
A removable towing eye carried inside the car is not acceptable, except
in formula cars and sports racers. These towing eyes or straps shall be
easily accessible without removal or manipulation of bodywork or other
panels. Towing eye minimum ID two (2) inches.
The required tow eyes must be strong enough to tow the car from a
hazard such as a gravel trap. Front tow eye may be mounted in the driver
/ passenger side window openings, or any location forward of the windshield. If mounted in the driver/passenger side window openings, it must
be attached to the forward roll cage down tube as close to the base of the
windshield as possible. If the front tow eye is located in the side window
openings there shall be one on each side of the car. Rear tow eyes must
be accessible rearward of the rear axle centerline.
9.3.47. VENTILATION
Holes for ventilation in quarter or rear windows on Production or GT cars
are not allowed, unless specified in PCS, GTCS.
9.3.48. WEIGHT
All cars shall meet or exceed the minimum weight specified with driver,
exactly as they come off the race circuit, at the conclusion of a race or
qualifying session.
9.3.49. WHEEL FANS
Wheel fans are permitted, unless otherwise restricted.
9.3.50. WHEEL RIM WIDTH
Wheel rim width shall be measured at the base of the bead seat.
9.3.51. WINDOWS
Windows shall be clear or uncolored. Officials may require the replacement of windshields that are considered a safety hazard. All closed cars
shall run with both front door windows fully open.
9.3.52. WINDOW SAFETY NETS
Window safety nets shall be used on the driver’s side window of all
closed cars. All window nets shall meet SFI Specification 27.1., and shall
GCR - 91
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
bear an “SFI Spec 27.1., Label” to that effect. (Note: Window nets need
not be dated.) The window net shall be equipped with a quick-release
device and when released it shall fall down, thus not having to be flipped
up on the roof. Nets shall be attached to the roll cage; plastic buckles,
cable ties, hose clamps, and elastic cords are not permitted. Holes in
the rollcage to accommodate either support rod is unacceptable unless
bushed and welded completely. Refer to figures 7 and 8, “Proper Window
Net Installation,” for additional information on mounting methods. Closed
cockpit sports racers may use arm restraints in lieu of a window net.
FIGURE 7
GCR - 92
FIGURE 8
9.3.53. WINDSHIELD CLIPS/REAR WINDOW STRAPS
Windshield safety clips and rear window safety straps shall be installed on
all closed cars (except Showroom Stock, Spec Miata, Touring, Improved
Touring, and Prepared).
Three (3) clips (3 inch x 1 inch x 1/8 inch) shall be bolted or riveted to the
body at the top of the windshield.
Two (2) clips (3 inch x 1 inch x 1/8 inch) shall be bolted or riveted to the
cowl and extend over the bottom edge of the windshield. Clips shall be
spaced a minimum of twelve (12) inches apart.
It is recommended that three (3) one (1) inch wide strips of steel or
aluminum be installed behind the windshield to support it from collapsing
inwards if it becomes damaged. The rear window shall be secured with
two (2) metal straps (1 inch wide x 1/8 inch thick) bolted or riveted to the
body at the top and bottom of the rear window.
9.4.
ROLL CAGES FOR GT AND PRODUCTION BASED CARS
All cars must utilize a roll cage compliant with the following specifications. These specifications apply to all vehicles registered (issued an
SCCA logbook) after 1/1/08. Cars registered before 1/1/08 may continue
to compete with their previous roll cage as specified in Appendix G. Cars
registered as Production class cars prior to 1/1/08 may continue to use
their existing roll cage per Appendix H.
A. DEFINITION
The roll cage consists of the main hoop, front hoop, side protection,
and braces as specified in these rules.
B.
MAIN HOOP
1. The main hoop (behind the driver) must be the full width of the
cockpit for all cars. It must be one continuous length of tubing
with smooth bends and no evidence of crimping or wall failure.
The main hoop must maintain a single plane.
GCR - 93
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
a.
On all closed cars, the main hoop must be as close as
possible to the roof and “B” pillars.
b.
Open cars without the windshield frame may use an asymmetric main hoop. The main hoop must be full width to the
passenger side of the car. On the passenger side of the car
the hoop must be at least as high as the top of the rear
corner of the door as illustrated in figure 9.
FIGURE 9
The main hoop must be high enough that a straight line
drawn from the top of the main hoop to the top of the
front hoop would pass over the driver’s helmet and steering
wheel when the driver is seated in the normal driving position. Additionally, the top of the main hoop must be at
least 2 inches above the driver’s helmet as illustrated in
figure 10.
FIGURE 10
GCR - 94
c.
On open cars retaining the windshield frame the main hoop
must be full height for the entire width of the hoop. The
top of the main hoop must be at least 2 inches above the
driver’s helmet as illustrated in figure 11.
FIGURE 11
2.
Main Hoop Bracing
a. Main hoops shall incorporate a diagonal brace. The brace
shall either be in the plane of the main hoop, or extend
from the top of one rear brace (described in 9.4.B.2.c) to
the bottom of the opposite rear brace. Automobiles with
mid mounted engines can have the lower mounting point
attach to the frame of the automobile within six inches of
the main hoop. In the case of braces in the plane of the
main hoop, the brace must span at least 50% of the width
of the main hoop, and at least 75% of the height of the
main hoop as shown in figure 12.
FIGURE 12
GCR - 95
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
b.
Cars must incorporate a main hoop horizontal brace at the
approximate level of the driver’s shoulders but not lower
than the shoulder belt mounting point as described in
section 9.3.18.D. If a double-diagonal “X” brace is used in
the plane of the main hoop, a half-width horizontal brace
may be used behind the driver’s seat to mount the seat
back and shoulder harness as shown in figure 13.
FIGURE 13
c.
Cars must have two braces extending to the rear from the
main hoop and attaching to the frame or chassis. Braces
must be attached as near as possible to the top of the
main hoop (not more than 6 inches below the top), and at
an included angle of at least 30 degrees.
d.
Open cars must have two braces extending forward from
the main hoop and attaching to the front hoop, not more
than 6 inches below the top of the front and main hoop.
It is recommended that the front and rear braces attach to
the main hoop as close as possible to each other.
C. FRONT HOOP
1. Roll cages may be of two designs, low front hoop or high front
hoop. All closed top cars and cars that retain the windshield
frame must have a high front hoop design. Open cars may
incorporate a high or low front hoop design. High front hoop
are also referred to as side hoops.
a.
Closed cars
The front hoop (side hoop) must follow the line of the Apillars to the top of the windshield and be connected by
horizontal bars to the top of the main hoop on each side
(as close to the roof as possible). Instead of a single front
hoop, two side hoops (down tubes) may be used. Alternatively, a top “halo” hoop following the roof line from
the main hoop to the windshield with forward down tubes
following the A-pillars to the floor may be used. RegardGCR - 96
less of which one of the two approved tubing configurations there shall be a tube connecting the two A-pillar
tubes at the top of the windshield.
b.
Open cars
The height of the front hoop (per section 9.4.B.1.b) must
be consistent across the full width of the cockpit.
c.
Front Hoop Bracing
All open cars with a high front hoop and all closed cars
except those competing in the Improved Touring, Showroom Stock, and Spec Miata classes must incorporate a
horizontal front hoop brace at the approximate level of
the dashboard. It is recommended that cars competing
in Improved Touring, Showroom Stock, and Spec Miata
classes also have the front hoop brace.
2.
One tube must extend, from each front down tube, forward
to the firewall or through the firewall except in vehicles in
Improved Touring, Showroom Stock, Spec Miata, and Touring.
This tube, one on each side, must connect to the chassis at a
point not more than 12 inches forward of the front axle centerline.
3.
Cars competing in Improved Touring, Showroom Stock, Spec
Miata, and Touring may extend one tube, from each front down
tube, forward to the firewall but not penetrating the firewall.
D. SIDE PROTECTION
Two side tubes connecting the front and rear hoops across both door
openings are mandatory. NASCAR-style side protection or one bar
bisecting another to form an “X” is permitted. Door side tubes may
extend into the door. In American Sedan, Improved Touring, Showroom Stock, Spec Miata, and Touring the door window glass, window
operating mechanism, inner door trim panel, armrest, map pockets, and
inside door latch/lock operating mechanism may be removed and the
inner door structural panel may be modified, but not removed only if the
door bars extend into the door cavity. The stock side impact beam and
the outside door latch/lock operating mechanism shall not be removed
or modified unless specifically authorized in the category rules.
E.
ROLL CAGE ATTACHING POINTS
1. AMERICAN SEDAN, IMPROVED TOURING, SHOWROOM
STOCK, SPEC MIATA, AND TOURING CLASSES – The roll
cage must attach to the vehicle structure (floor pan/ rocker
boxes) within the passenger compartment in a minimum of
six points and a maximum of eight points as specified in these
rules.
2.
All other classes – There is no limit on cage attachment points.
The roll cage shall be integrated into the frame or chassis.
3.
Mounting Plates
a. Mounting plates welded to the structure of the car shall not
be less than .080 inches thick. The maximum area of each
mounting plate in the American Sedan, Improved Touring,
Showroom Stock, Spec Miata, and Touring classes shall
be 144 square inches. Plates may be on multiple planes
but shall not be greater than fifteen inches on any side.
GCR - 97
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
F.
b.
The thickness of mounting plates bolted or riveted to the
structure of the car must not be less than the thickness of
the roll hoop or brace that they attach to the chassis, and
must be backed up with a plate of equal size and thickness
on the opposite side of the chassis panel. The maximum
area of each mounting plate must be 144 square inches.
Plates may be on multiple planes but shall not be greater
than fifteen inches on any side.
c.
Fasteners for bolted or riveted mounting plates must be
Grade 5 or better with a minimum diameter of 5/16”.
TUBING
1. Seamless or DOM mild steel tubing (SAE 1020 or 1025 recommended) or alloy steel tubing (SAE 4130) must be used for all
roll cage structures. Alloy and mild steel tubing may not be
mixed. ERW tubing is not allowed.
2.
The following table shows the minimum allowed tubing outer
diameter and wall thickness by vehicle weight:
GCR Vehicle Weight
Tubing Size (inches)
(outer diameter x wall thickness)
Up to 1700 lbs
1.375 x .080
1701 - 2699 lbs
1.500 x .095
2700 lbs and up
1.750 x .095
If the tubing diameter used is at least .250 inch above the
minimum diameter required, based on vehicle weight, the
minimum wall thickness may be .080 inch.
3.
The required tubing elements must meet the material minimums set forth above. Optional tubing elements may be any
size.
4.
The minus variance of tubing wall thickness due to manufacturing tolerances is limited to .010 inch.
5.
An inspection hole between 3/16 and 1/4 inch diameter must
be drilled in a non-critical area of the front and rear hoop as
well as one of the supplemental braces to facilitate verification
of wall thickness.
G. BASIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
1. All portions of the roll cage subject to contact by the driver
must be padded with a minimum 1 inch of material. Padding
that meets or exceeds SFI 45.1 or FIA 8857-2001 (curved
padding), or SFI 45.2 or FIA sports car head rest material (flat
padding) specification is recommended.
2.
No portion of the roll cage may have an aerodynamic effect by
creating a vertical force.
3.
The radius of all bends in the roll cage (measured at centerline
of tubing) must not be less then three times the diameter of the
tubing.
4.
It is recommended that all joints of the roll cage be welded. All
GCR - 98
welding must include full penetration, no cold lap, no surface
porosity, no crater porosity, no cracks, no whiskers, and so
forth. Alloy steel must be normalized after welding. It is recommended that a certified AWS D1.1 welder do all welding.
5.
It is recommended that gussets be used at all joints. In Improved
Touring, Showroom Stock, and Spec Miata a maximum of
two gussets per joint are allowed and must be no thicker than
.125”.
6.
Any number of additional tube elements is permitted within the
boundaries of the minimum cage structure. Such tube elements
may pass through any mandatory or optional bulkhead or panel
separating the driver/passenger compartment from the trunk/
cargo area/fuel tank/fuel cell area provided the bulkhead is
sealed around such tube elements.
7.
Removable roll cage bracing is acceptable in one of the
following configurations:
a. If one tube fits inside another tube to facilitate removal,
the removable portion must fit tightly and must bottom by
design, and at least two bolts must be used to secure each
joint. The telescoping section must be at least 8 inches
long. The minimum bolt diameter is 3/8 inch.
b.
Removable bracing may incorporate connectors of the
double-lug, double ear-type, tapered, or muff-type as
shown in figures 14 and 15. The double-lug type must
include a doubler, gusset, or capping arrangement to avoid
distortion or excessive strain caused by welding. Double
ear-type joints must be fully welded at all the mating
surfaces.
FIGURE 14
GCR - 99
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
FIGURE 15
8.
MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED / FIA HOMOLOGATED ROLL
CAGES: Cars may compete with FIA homologated cages
provided the cage was built by the manufacturer or a manufacturer designated shop/team and approved for use. Cars
must have the FIA identification plate attached to the cage
along with a letter from SCCA Technical Services certifying
the origins of the car.
9.4.5. ROLL CAGES FOR FORMULA CARS AND SPORTS RACERS
All Formula and Sports Racing automobiles are required to have full roll
cages. Cage may be of two designs, low front hoop (top of steering
wheel) or high front hoop (equal to rear hoop) but with no diagonal brace.
Two (2) seat Sports Racers shall have full cockpit width cages. All tube
frame automobiles shall have both front and rear hoops formed of tubing
per 9.4.5.E.4. On automobiles of full monocoque construction, a fabricated sheet metal front hoop structure may be approved upon specific
application to the SCCA. All Formula Car and Sports Racing roll cage
tubing specifications must meet the current GCR specifications, effective
1/1/98.
A. Main Hoop
The main hoop shall be constructed of tubing per 9.4.5.E.4. The
minimum bend radius shall not be less than three (3) times the tube
diameter measured from the tube centerline. The main hoop shall not
be less than two (2) inches above the driver’s helmet, seated normally
and restrained by seat belt/shoulder harness. A straight line drawn from
the top of the main hoop to the top of the front hoop shall pass over
the driver’s helmet. On Formula cars and single seat Sports Racers the
vertical members of the main hoop shall not be less than fifteen (15)
inches apart (inside dimension) at their attachment to the chassis. If the
hoop does not go to the belly pan, proper gussets and tube triangulation
shall be used under its attachment. On monocoque chassis the main
hoop shall be welded to mounting plates not less than .080” thick. It
is important that these plates be attached to the chassis in such a way
as to spread the loads over a wide area. There shall be a plate of equal
thickness on the inside of the monocoque with solid rivets or bolts
(5/16” minimum bolt diameter) through the non-ferrous material.
GCR - 100
B. Front Hoop
Low front hoops must be no lower than the top of the steering wheel.
It is recommended the hoop extend to the belly pan. If not, it shall
be attached to the chassis with gussets and triangulation in order to
spread the loads. In automobiles of full height (top of the steering wheel)
monocoque or composite construction, a steel cap plate, not less than
.080” thick must be attached as a rub block.
C. Roll Cage Bracing
1. The main hoop must have two forward braces extending from
the hoop and attached to the frame, monocoque, or front
hoop. Braces must be attached as near as possible to the top
of the hoop but must not be more than six (6) inches below
the top and at an included angle of at least thirty (30) degrees.
If these braces do not extend to the front hoop, an additional
brace or gusset (14 gauge - .078” minimum thickness) must be
installed between the lower frame rail and the upper frame rail
at the point of attachment of the forward hoop brace. If these
braces do not extend to the front hoop, an additional brace or
gusset must be installed at the point of attachment to the main
rear hoop or lower frame rail or other major frame member in
such a manner as to reinforce the attachment point to help
prevent collapse of the frame rail at the point of attachment.
These tubes shall be 1” x .080” minimum and gussets shall be
14 gauge - .078” minimum thickness.
Two seat Sports Racers with full width main hoops must
incorporate a lateral brace to prevent lateral distortion of the
hoop (See figure 12). All bracing on full width cages must
be the same diameter and wall thickness as the main hoop.
Formula and single seat Sports Racers under 1500 lbs., may
use bracing with a minimum dimension of 1.0” diameter by
.080” wall thickness. Braces attached to monocoque chassis
must be welded to plates not less than .080” thick and backed
up on the inner side by plates of equal thickness using bolts of
Grade 5 or better with 5/16” minimum diameter.
2.
The front hoop must have two (2) braces near its top extending
forward to protect the driver’s legs. It is recommended that
this bracing extend to the bulkhead in front of the driver’s
feet; but in any case it must be integrated into the chassis to
provide substantial support for the front hoop. Full width front
hoop bracing shall be a minimum dimension of 1.0” diameter
by .080” wall thickness tubing.
Formula and single seat Sports Racers under 1500 lbs., may
use tubing with a minimum dimension of 1.0” diameter by
.080” wall thickness. When monocoque construction is used as
bracing for the front hoop, it must be approved on an individual
basis. If a high front hoop is used, it must be similar in shape
to the rear hoop and have two horizontal tubes connecting the
top of the front hoop to the top of the main hoop. The bracing
for the main hoop remains the same.
3.
Removable bracing must incorporate connectors of the doublelug, tapered, or muff-type as shown in figures 14, and 15.
The double-lug type must include a doubler, gusset, or capping
arrangement so as to avoid distortion or excessive strain
caused by welding.
GCR - 101
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
D. Composite Chassis Safety Structures
1. The basic purpose of safety structures is to protect the driver.
This purpose is the primary design consideration.
2.
All cars must have at least two (2) roll over structures, but the
use of titanium is prohibited.
The first roll over structure must be in front of the steering
wheel, not more than 25cm forward of the steering wheel rim,
and at least as high as the top of the steering wheel rim.
The second roll over structure must not be less than 50cm
behind the first. It must be high enough for a line extending
from the top of the front structure to the top of the rear structure to pass over the driver’s helmet when he is seated normally
in the car with his helmet on and the seat belt fastened. This
second structure behind the seat must be symmetrical about
the lengthwise centerline of the car and comply with the
following dimensions: The top of the roll bar must be at least
two (2) inches (5cm) above the driver’s helmet when the driver
is seated in a normal driving position. No second roll structure
on a composite chassis will be considered unless it contains a
main hoop having a minimum tubing size of 1.375” x .080”
wall thickness. Supplemental braces must have a minimum
tubing size of 1.00” x .080” wall thickness.
The roll bar must be capable of withstanding the following
stress loading applied simultaneously to the top of the roll
bar:
1.5 (X) laterally
5.5 (X) longitudinally in either direction.
7.5 (X) vertically
where (X) = the minimum weight of the car.
The induced loads must be carried over into the primary structure of the chassis.
The ability of the roll bar to bear and distribute the load through
the chassis must be demonstrated satisfactorily in test conditions to the SCCA. In conjunction with SCCA, manufacturers
of cars utilizing carbon fiber composite survival cell construction will be required to designate repair locations capable of
proper evaluation and damage repair. In the event of damage
to the chassis, repairs can only be made at these locations.
Proper documentation must be made in the vehicle logbook. No
car will be allowed to compete after damage without following
this procedure.
E.
Basic Design Considerations
1. The basic purpose of the roll cage is to protect the driver if
the car turns over, runs into an obstacle such as a guardrail or
catch fence, or is struck by another car. It shall be designed
to withstand compression forces from the weight of the car
coming down on the rollover structure and to take fore/aft and
lateral loads resulting from the car skidding along on its rollover
structure.
2.
No portion of the safety roll cage shall have an aerodynamic
GCR - 102
effect by creating a vertical thrust.
3.
Roll cage or chassis design shall prevent engine intrusion into
the driver compartment.
4.
Material:
a. Seamless, or DOM (Drawn Over Mandrel) mild steel tubing
(SAE 1010, 1020, 1025) or equivalent, or alloy steel
tubing (SAE, 4130) shall be used for all roll cage structures. Proof of use of alloy steel is the responsibility of the
entrant.
b.
Minimum tubing sizes for all required roll cage elements
(All dimensions in inches):
Vehicle Weight
Without Driver
Up to 1500 lbs.
1500-2500 lbs.
Over 2500 lbs.
Mild Steel
Material
1.375 x .095
1.50 x .095
1.50 x .120
1.625 x .120
1.75 x .095
Alloy Steel
1.375 x .080
1.375 x .095
1.50 x .095
c.
For purposes of determining tubing sizes, the vehicle
weight is as raced without fuel and driver. The minus
tolerance for wall thickness should not be less than .010”
below the nominal thickness.
d.
An inspection hole at least 3/16 inch diameter, but no
greater than 1/4 inch diameter shall be drilled in a noncritical area of the front and rear hoop as well as the one
of the supplemental braces to facilitate verification of wall
thickness. Formula Cars and Sports Racers with alternate
roll structures are not required to have inspection holes,
the wall thickness will be indicated on the back of the
homologation certificate.
5.
One (1) continuous length of tubing shall be used for the main
hoop member with smooth continuous bends and no evidence
of crimping or wall failure. The radius of bends in the roll cage
hoop (measured at centerline of tubing) shall not be less than
three (3) times the diameter of the tubing. Whenever possible,
the roll cage hoop should start from the floor of the car, and, in
the case of tube frame construction, be attached to the chassis
tubes by means of gussets or sheet metal webs with support
tubes beneath the joints to distribute the loads. It is recommended that gussets be used.
6.
Welding shall conform to American Welding Society D1.1:2002,
Structural Welding Code, Steel Chapter 10, Tubular Structures.
Whenever D1.1 refers to “the Engineer” this shall be interpreted to be the owner of the vehicle. Welds shall be continuous around the entire tubular structure.
All welds shall be visually inspected and shall be acceptable if
the following conditions are satisfied:
a. The weld shall have no cracks.
b.
Thorough fusion shall exist between weld metal and base
GCR - 103
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
metal.
c.
All craters shall be filled to the cross section of the weld.
d.
Undercut shall be no more than 0.01 inch deep.
7.
Aluminum bronze or silicon bronze welding technique is
permitted, but extreme care shall be used in preparation of
parts before bronze welding and in the design of the attaching
joints.
8.
Forward braces and portions of the main hoop subject to contact
by the driver’s helmet (as seated normally and restrained by
seatbelt/shoulder harness) shall be padded with a non-resilient
material with a minimum thickness of one-half inch. Padding
meeting SFI spec 45.1 or FIA 8857-2001 is strongly recommended.
F. Exceptions for Formula Cars and Sports Racers
Any roll hoop design which does not comply with the specifications in
9.4.5., will only be considered if it is accompanied by engineering specifications signed by a registered engineer. No alternate roll hoop will
be considered unless it contains a main hoop having a minimum tubing
size of 1.375” x .080” wall thickness. The roll bar must be capable of
withstanding the following stress loading applied simultaneously to the
top of the roll bar: 1.5 (X) laterally, 5.5 (X) longitudinally in both the
fore and aft directions, and 7.5 (X) vertically, where (X) = the minimum
weight of the car.
G.
1.
Front Impact Attenuation
All formula cars homologated with SCCA as of 1/1/1986 must
have a front impact attenuation device meeting at least one of
the following criteria:
A. An FIA-approved front impact attenuation structure.
B.
A metallic structure, securely attached to the front bulkhead, with a minimum cross section of 200 sq cm (31 sq
in.), 40 cm (15.75 in.) forward of the clutch and brake
pedals (not depressed), constructed of a minimum of 18
gauge 6061-T4 or equivalent aluminum.
C. A non-metallic composite structure, securely attached to
the front bulkhead or incorporated into the nose piece,
with a minimum cross section of 200 sq cm (31 sq. in.),
40 cm (15.75 in.) forward of the clutch and brake pedals
(not depressed), constructed of a minimum of 6 mm stabilized (honeycomb) material with inner and outer reinforcements of a minimum of two 5-ounce laminates of fiberglass, carbon, or kevlar material.
2.
Formula Vee and other formula cars using the VW sedan Hbeam front suspension may use the front crush structure specified in 9.1.1.C.3.a.10., or any of the structures listed in G.1
above.
3.
Formula Mazda cars may use the spec front wing support as
a front crush structure, or any of the structures listed in G.1
above.
GCR - 104
4.
Radiators may be incorporated in impact attenuation structures.
5.
Composite impact attenuation structures may incorporate
carbon and/or kevlar regardless of any class restrictions on
materials.
6.
Rear impact attenuation structures are strongly recommended
for all formula cars, and may incorporate the materials and/or
construction techniques listed above for front impact attenuation structures.
7.
Pre-1986 formula cars and all sports racers are strongly urged
to use front and rear impact attenuation structures, and may
incorporate the materials and/or construction techniques for
front impact attenuation structures listed above.
GCR - 105
General
9. Cars and Equipment
Appendix A. Administrative Glossary
APPENDIX A. ADMINISTRATIVE GLOSSARY
The following nomenclature, definitions, and abbreviations shall be used
in the GCR, all Supplemental Regulations and Entry Forms, and for general
use.
1.
FIA (Federation Internationale de l’Automobile)
The International Federation of National Automobile Clubs.
2.
FISA (Federation Internationale du Sport Automobile)
The International Sporting Commission which is appointed by the FIA to
deal with competition matters.
3.
THE CODE (Code Sportif Internationale of the FIA)
The International Sporting Code. FIA listed events sanctioned by the
SCCA shall also be governed by the Code.
4.
ASN (National Sporting Authority)
A national governing body of automobile competitions recognized by the
FIA.
5.
ACCUS FIA (Automobile Competition Committee for the United
States FIA, Inc.)
The ASN of the United States of America.
The Automobile Competition Committee for the United States (ACCUS) is
recognized by the FIA as the National Club (ASN) of the U.S.A. Under the
terms of the International Sporting Code of the FIA, ACCUS is the sole
authority for the control of international automobile competition in the
U.S.A., its territories, and protectorates.
6.
CLUB RACING BOARD
The SCCA Club Racing Club Racing Board establishes rules and standards
for the scheduling, organization, and conduct of SCCA sanctioned Club
Racing events, and the licensing of drivers and officials. The Board supervises the execution of these rules and standards.
The Club Racing Board may appoint specialized Advisory Committees
to assist in the review of member requests for rules development, and
changes to individual vehicle specifications. These committees are empowered to solicit and make recommendations to the Club Racing Board based
on their research and knowledge of the items. The committee members
serve at the discretion of the Club Racing Board and the Board of Directors.
7.
SCCA DIVISIONS
Geographic separations of the SCCA, established for the administration of
SCCA policies, competitions, events, and the GCR under the direction of
the SCCA Club Racing Board and its subcommittees.
8.
EXECUTIVE STEWARD
The individual appointed by the Board of Directors in each SCCA Division to supervise and administer SCCA policies and standards for all Club
Racing events.
9.
CAR (Automobile)
A self propelled land vehicle running on four wheels, not in a line, which
shall be in contact with the ground. At least two (2) wheels shall affect
GCR - 106
the steering and at least two (2) the propulsion.
10.
CLASS
A group of cars, classified according to the provisions of the GCR.
11.
CATEGORY
A combination of similar classes of cars.
12.
COMPETITION
A contest in which a car takes part and which is of a competitive nature
or is given a competitive nature by publication of results. Practice and
qualifying for starting positions are included in the term “competition”. A
competition may also be referred to as a “race”.
13.
EVENT
An entire program of competitions.
14.
SPEED EVENT
Competition in which more than one car is on the course at a time, vehicles are driven at maximum speeds, and a high level of driver and vehicle
safety equipment is essential.
15.
NON SPEED EVENT
An event in which the hazards do not exceed those encountered in legal
travel on public roads, and which therefore do not require drivers to hold
Competition Licenses.
16.
SANCTION
The documentary authority, granted by the SCCA, to organize and hold
a competition.
17.
SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS
Regulations which are consistent with the GCR and which define the
additional ground rules of competition for a specific event. (See Section
3.5.)
18.
DRIVER
A person named as the driver of a car in any competition. Also, any
person who drives a race car in any competition whether or not properly
registered, entered, or named as the driver.
19.
ENTRANT
A person whose entry is accepted for any competition. The signature on
an entry form and the membership number shall be that of an individual
SCCA member.
20.
PARTICIPANT
Any person admitted to an event after having signed a SCCA authorized
Release and Waiver of Liability Agreement.
GCR - 107
General
Appendix A. Administrative Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
APPENDIX B. TECHNICAL GLOSSARY
NOTE: Should any of the definitions contained in this Glossary appear to
be in conflict with a specific rule, then the GCR or Specification Book will
take precedence.
2 Cycle - A reciprocating engine in which the intake, compression, combustion and exhaust phases are completed each revolution of the crankshaft.
4 Cycle - A reciprocating engine in which the intake, compression, combustion and exhaust phases are completed each two revolutions of the
crankshaft.
A-Pillar - The forward most roof support in a passenger car, which also
serves as the side support for the windshield.
Accelerator Pedal - A foot-operated device which allows the driver to vary
the degree of opening of the induction system throttle(s).
Accessible - Capable of being reached without removal of other components.
Accumulator - A pressurized free-piston device, in which the compression
of a fixed volume of air by the piston, upon the application of a force
caused by fluid under pressure, provides a pressurized reservoir of the
fluid.
Active Suspension - Automatic ride height and / or roll control by an active system receiving power from a pump or compressor.
Addition - To introduce a component not present in the cars stock state,
or attachment to an existing component.
Adhesive - A bonding agent designed to cause two or more components
to adhere to each other without fusing them into a single component.
Adjustable Timing Gear - A camshaft drive gear or sprocket which permits
a range of angular adjustment of the outer portion relative to the attachment point of the driven camshaft.
Advance Curve - The degrees of distributor advance from the static setting as a function of rotational speed, usually achieved by a system of
rotating weights, springs, and limit stops within the distributor body.
Advance Plate - The plate inside a distributor on which the ignition points
are mounted, which is free to rotate over a prescribed angle in response
to the actions of the advance mechanism(s), thus altering the phase relationship of the points and distributor cam.
Advance Springs - Springs which provide the restoring force against the
actions of the advance mechanism(s) in a distributor.
Aerodynamic Device - An attachment to, or an integral part of, a car intended to generate atmospheric downforce by the action of air flowing
through or around the attachment.
Aerodynamic Skirts - Body panels, movable or fixed, at the bottom of
GCR - 108
the sides of a car’s body, which aid in the creation of “ground effects”
downforce by ensuring that little air passing under the car can escape at
the sides.
Aeroquip Line - A brand name, used generically, for a braided metal-covered hose.
Air Cleaner - An induction system component intended to filter particulate
matter from the incoming air.
Air Dam - An air control device at the lower front of a car, intended to
divert some of the air which would normally pass under the car when the
car is in motion.
Air Horn - See Velocity Stack.
Air Pump - An engine-driven pump intended to provide a supply of air
(without fuel) to the engine to assist in the reduction of pollution components.
Air Throttle - The valve which allows the driver to modulate the volume of
air passing into a fuel injection induction system.
Airfoil - An aerodynamic device or part of a car which the flow of air over
its surface will generate a vertical force by creating a pressure differential
between top and bottom surfaces.
Air Throttle/Throttle Body - The component which allows the driver to
regulate the volume of air passing into a fuel injection induction system.
Alloy - A homogeneous mixture of two or more elements, at least one of
which is a metal, and where the resulting material has metallic properties.
Alter (verb) - To change a component by modifying.
Alternator - A component intended to generate current with which to
maintain a proper level of charge in the on-board storage battery.
AN Coupler - A threaded high pressure hydraulic coupling of the type
normally used with metal braided hose.
Annular Discharge - A carburetor type in which the fuel is introduced into
the flowing air from an annulus on the periphery of the main duct.
Anti-Roll Bar (Sway bar) - A torsion control device connected to a car’s
structure, and to moving portions of the suspension, which is intended
to control body roll. (Some types of ARB may also serve as a suspension
component.)
Anti-Submarine Strap - A safety strap intended to provide additional support against motions of the driver’s lower torso in the forward direction.
Aspect Ratio - The ratio of tire section height to section width, expressed
as a percentage.
Attachment Points (Suspension) - The locations at which the fixed and
moving ends of a shock absorber are mounted and/or the location of the
suspension component on the frame or structure of a car.
GCR - 109
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Automatic Transmission – A transmission which is capable of allowing
a car to start from a stop without use of a clutch, which may be shifted
from gear to gear without use of a clutch, and in which such shifting of
gears is accomplished by hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric actuation.
Automobile - See Car, Appendix A.
Axle Housing - The housing which contains axle shafts and may provide
support for wheel hubs.
Axle Shaft - A shaft whose purpose is to carry rotational drive from a differential or transaxle to the driven wheels, or simply to support one (1) or
two (2) undriven wheel hub(s).
Axle Tube - See Axle Housing. Also, the beam connecting the rear wheels
on a front wheel drive car.
Backing Plate - A braking component used in drum type brake systems,
generally to support the brake shoes and wheel cylinder(s) at a wheel.
Baffle - A plate or panel in a fluid container, which is designed to inhibit
the rapid transfer of the fluid within the container when it is subject to
changing dynamic forces.
Balance (Verb) - To minimize the dynamic off-axis forces of rotating components, or to equalize the weights of like reciprocating components.
Balance Pipe - A tubular induction system component which connects
two (2) or more independent branches of the system.
Ball Joint - A bearing coupling, generally in suspension or steering systems, consisting of two (2) mating surfaces, one (1) convex and one (1)
concave, which permits a range of angular displacements of the two (2)
attached shafts over a prescribed range.
Ballast - Non-functional mass fastened inside a car to increase the weight
of the car.
Base Circle - The constant radius portion of a camshaft lobe which is closest to the centerline of the camshaft.
Battery (Storage) - An on-board electrical storage component which may
be used to activate electrical devices or systems, such as starter, ignition, etc.
Battery Box - A covered container for an on-board storage battery.
Beam Axle - A solid, non-rotating axle connecting the undriven wheels
of a car.
Bearing - A mechanical component provided to allow connected parts to
move with respect to one another in a manner consistent with durability
and minimal friction.
Bearing Carrier - A housing in which the bearings carrying a shaft are
mounted.
Bell Housing - A nominally bell-shaped extension or attachment to the engine or transmission which serves as a coupler between these assemblies,
and usually encloses the clutch/flywheel assembly.
GCR - 110
Belt Drive (Car) - A drive system in which the engine power is coupled to
the driven wheels through a flexible belt and pulleys.
Bezel/Rim – Outer trim components which determine the assembled appearance.
Bias Ply Construction - A tire construction in which the structural plies of
the main carcass form an angle considerably greater than zero relative to
a cross section of the tire.
Big End - The crankshaft end of a connecting rod.
Blanking Sleeve - A replacement for a thermostat designed to divert the
flow of cooling water away from the cooling system bypass circuit.
Block - The elemental component of a reciprocating engine which contains
at least the cylinder location(s) and the crankshaft mounting points.
Blueprinting - The practice of engine improvement achieved by the use of
selected standard parts and/or by optimizing the factory machined surfaces of stock engine components to achieve the most advantageous
specifications within the normal range as defined by the manufacturer for
that engine.
Within the above definition of blueprinting, any procedures that involve
the following are not permitted unless specifically authorized:
a) The addition of material of any kind to any component (this includes, but is not limited to, the addition of sleeves/bushings and
the application of anti-friction, oil shedding and thermal barrier/
retention coatings).
b)
The machining, tooling or any other physical or chemical modification (including shot blasting) of any surface that was not
originally a factory machined surface. Glass or other media blasting for cleaning purposes only is allowed as long as it does not
remove or modify the base material of the original part.
c)
Mixing/matching of parts from any other year, make, model or
type of vehicle or engine.
d)
Balancing procedures that involve spot machining of all rotating
and/or reciprocating parts (i.e. one rod/piston assembly must remain untouched).
Note: Under no circumstances may any factory specification be exceeded
as a result of any permitted blueprinting operation(s) (i.e. compression
ratio, valve lift, bore, stroke, etc.).
Body - All parts of the car licked by the airstream and situated above the
belly-pan/floor with exception of the roll bar or cage. For Formula and
Sports Racing cars, further exceptions are those units definitely associated with the function of the engine or transmission.
Body Panel - A replaceable section of the body.
Bodywork - See Body.
Bolt Pattern - The arrangement of bolts or other fasteners used to join two
(2) components.
GCR - 111
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Boost - The degree of induction pressurizing in a turbo/supercharged engine.
Boot Cover - A cover for the area behind the driver/passenger seating area
in an open car.
Bore - The diameter of a cylinder.
Boss - A protrusion from a casting or forging which provides the surface(s)
and/or structure necessary to accomplish particular function of the component.
Brake Light - A signaling light mounted on the rear of the car, which may
be actuated only by driver braking actions.
Brake Lining/Pad - Replaceable friction material which accomplishes braking action by making rubbing contact with the brake drum or rotor.
Brake Rotor - The disc component of a braking system, which is attached
to a wheel hub and provides a friction surface for braking actions.
Brake Rotor Hat - The integral part of a brake rotor or a separate component that locates and provides attachment for the brake rotor to the
hub.
Braking System - A system, including hydraulic and mechanical components, which allows the driver to reduce the velocity of a car.
Breather Vent - An aperture which allows the flow of air into or out of an
enclosure.
Bulb - A lighting system component which contains the actual light emitting element(s).
Bulkhead - A partition separating compartments.
Bump Steer - The change in toe-in or toe-out which results from changes
in suspension geometry as the wheel(s) rises or falls from its neutral position.
Bump Stop - A cushioning pad which acts as the limit to suspension travel
in one vertical direction.
Bumper - A semi-rigid attachment to the structure of a car at the front
or rear, which is intended to absorb a portion of low speed front or rear
collision forces.
Bumper Block - See Bump Stop.
Bushing/Bush - A sleeve or tubular insert, whose purpose is to reduce the
dimension(s) of an existing hole. A protective liner that cushions noise,
friction, or movement such as a rod end or spherical bearing.
C-Pillar - The body roof support bordering on the rear window or hatch.
Caliper - A braking system component which is the disc brake equivalent
of a wheel cylinder, and converts hydraulic pressure into mechanical braking force at a wheel.
Cam Carrier - That portion of a reciprocating engine that contains the supGCR - 112
porting bearings for an overhead camshaft.
Cam Cover - Equivalent to a valve cover in an engine with an overhead
cam.
Camber - The angle of a wheel relative to true vertical. Negative camber
implies that the top of the wheel is closer than the bottom to the car’s
centerline.
Camber Compensator - A wheel location device designed to control the
wheel camber under varying conditions of bump/rebound.
Camshaft - An engine component, driven by the crankshaft, whose function is to actuate the valves, and often, to drive other engine components.
Camshaft Timing - The phase relationship of the camshaft to the crankshaft, which determines when in the crankshaft cycle the valves will
open.
Canard - A near-horizontal aerodynamic device normally mounted at the
extreme front of a (race) car.
Carburetor - The component of a non-fuel injection induction system which
achieves the mixing of fuel and air to create a combustible mixture.
Car - See Appendix A, Car.
Caster - The angle which the swivel axis of a steered wheel makes with
the vertical in the fore/aft direction.
Catalytic Converter - An emissions control device in the exhaust system
which reduces emissions by catalysis.
Catch Tank - A container with the purpose of collecting liquid, generally
lubricant, vented from an engine, transmission, transaxle, or differential
and preventing the loss, from the car, of the liquid.
cc - Cubic centimeter (a unit of volume).
Center-Lock - A type of road wheel/hub which is retained by a single
central fastener.
Centerline - A line coincident with the axis of rotational symmetry of a
component.
Centrifugal Clutch - A clutch which automatically engages in response to
an increase from low engine speed, and disengages upon return to low
speed operation.
Chain Drive - A drive system in which the engine power is transmitted
through a chain and sprockets.
Chapman Strut - An adaptation of the McPherson strut for a rear suspension (without steering swivel).
Check Valve - A valve designed to prevent the flow of a fluid in one direction, while allowing relatively unimpeded flow in the opposite direction.
Choke - A carbureted induction system mechanism which, when actuGCR - 113
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
ated, causes an enrichment of the fuel/air mixture to assist cold starting.
Clinch Nut - A threaded female fastener which has been distorted on one
end to supply a gripping force when assembled to a stud or bolt thread.
Clutch - A device whose function is to permit the driver to engage/disengage a power coupling between the engine and the transmission or
transaxle.
CO - Carbon monoxide.
Cockpit - The driver/passenger volume within a car in which driver control
devices, gauges, and seating are provided.
Coil - The transformer component of an ignition system which converts
each low voltage pulse into a pulse of sufficiently high voltage to bridge
the gap in a spark plug and initiate combustion in the engine.
Coil-Over Shock - A tubular shock absorber which contains top and bottom mounting locations for a coaxial coil spring, and is used with such a
spring supporting the weight of the car.
Cold Air Box - An engine carburetor attachment of unspecified size and
composition, whose purpose is to provide a source of ambient air alternate to that existing in the engine compartment.
Component - A constituent part of an assembly.
Compression Ratio - Reciprocating engines: the ratio of the sum of swept
plus unswept volumes to the unswept volume. Rotary engines: the ratio
of the largest to the smallest volume of the working chamber.
Compression Ring - A reciprocating engine component which is intended
to seal the gap between the piston and cylinder wall against the pressure
differential arising from compression, induction or combustion.
Compressor (AC) - The engine-driven pressurizing pump in an automotive
air conditioning system.
Concentric - Two components or objects are concentric if they share a
common centerline.
Condenser (AC) - The portion of an automotive air conditioning system in
which the refrigerant in vapor phase is converted to liquid phase.
Connecting Rod - A component physically connecting a piston to a crankshaft in such a way as to convert the rotary motion of the crankshaft to
a reciprocating motion of the piston.
Constant-Velocity Joint - A type of universal joint in which the angular
velocities of input and output shafts are held approximately equal.
Cool Suit - A driver’s safety suit which has provision to be cooled by a
circulating liquid.
Cooling System - Those components directly associated with the cooling
of an engine, including any hoses, fans, radiators, etc.
Cowl Induction - An arrangement in which the incoming air for an induction system is ducted from the cowl area below the windshield.
GCR - 114
Crank-Triggered Ignition - An ignition system in which the triggering pulses are obtained from a pickup and wheel connected directly to the crankshaft, or to an intermediate pulley.
Crankshaft - The rotating engine component which, driven by piston/connecting rod assemblies, transmits, for external coupling, the torque resulting from the combustion process.
Crossflow Head - A cylinder head in which the intake and exhaust ports
for each cylinder are on opposite sides of the head.
Crown - The top face of a piston at which combustion takes place.
Curvature - The dimension defined by the maximum distance between a
curving surface and the straight line between its ends.
Cylinder Liner (Sleeve) - An insert in an engine block which defines the
path followed by a piston in its reciprocating motion.
Dash board - See instrument panel.
Decamber (Verb) - To make the wheel camber more negative.
Deck - Generally the rearmost upper body panel of a car, but not present
in all cars.
Deck Height - The distance between the top of the piston at its outer
edge and the machined surface which forms the head/block interface of
the block.
Deck Lid - The access door into the volume (often “trunk”) beneath a
deck.
Differential - A gear assembly, physically separate from the transmission, whose purpose is to reduce the rotational velocity transmitted from
the engine/gearbox, while providing a division of driving force to two (2)
wheels.
Differential Housing - The housing in which the differential (final drive)
gears are mounted.
Disc Brake - A braking system which relies on the friction between a
suitable material in the form of a “pad” and a rotating disc to supply the
braking force at a wheel.
Discriminator Valve - A check valve designed to install on the vent line of
a fuel cell, allowing vapors to vent while retaining liquid.
Dish - A concave piston crown.
Displacement (Engine) - Reciprocating engine: the swept volume of one
(1) cylinder times the number of cylinders. Rotary engine: the difference
between the largest and smallest volumes of the working chamber, times
the number of lobes, times the number of rotors.
Distributor Cap - An ignition system distributor component which contains the high voltage distribution contacts and means for securing the
high voltage wires.
GCR - 115
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Dome - A convex piston crown.
Door Panel - The inner shell of a door which normally supports the trim.
Dowel - A tubular or cylindrical pin, the sole purpose of which is to make
positive location of two assembled components possible.
Drive Belt - A continuous flexible reinforced elastomer band which provides the driving force for engine accessories, when attached by pulley to
a rotating part of the engine, such as the crankshaft.
Drive Shaft - The mechanical drive train coupling between transmission
and differential, which may allow an angular displacement of the driving
and driven axes by the use of universal, constant velocity, or flex joints.
Drive Train - Those components in a car which produce and convey the
driving power to the ground, and the housings containing these parts.
Dry Break Coupling - An attachment to an on-board fuel cell/tank filler
neck/hose which is designed to prevent the spillage of fuel during refueling operations.
Dry Sump - An engine lubrication system in which the residual lubricant
is pumped to an external storage tank by a “scavenge pump,” and an
additional pump or pumps return a supply of pressurized lubricant to the
engine from the storage tank.
Dry Tire - A race tire, often with groove-less tread, intended strictly for
use in competition under dry conditions.
Dryer (AC) - A component of an automotive air conditioning system which
is intended to remove water from the refrigerant.
Duct/Ducting - A tube or passage for conveying a material, usually air.
Dust Shield - A cover intended to protect disc brake components from
mud, dirt, etc.
Eccentric Shaft - The analog of a crankshaft in a rotary engine, the shaft
driven by the actions of the rotor.
EGR Valve - An engine pollution control device which channels a portion
of the exhaust gases back into the combustion regions of the engine.
End Plate - An air control panel mounted at each end and perpendicular
to a wing, intended to maximize the efficiency of the wing by preventing
spillage of flowing air at the ends.
Engine - The primary power plant of a car, including all physically attached
ancillary components necessary for power production.
Engine Air Box - An induction system attachment, generally part of the
bodywork, which ducts air from an opening protruding into the airstream
to the induction system intake(s).
Engine Case - See rotor housing and/or block.
Engine Compartment - The loosely defined volume, nominally enclosed
by panels on top and sides, which is the normal location of the engine in
a car.
GCR - 116
Engine Mount - A passive mechanical coupling used to support the weight
of an engine at its attachment points to the structure of a car.
Engine Steady Bar (Torque suppressor) - A constraining beam or rod intended to resist the tendency of an engine to rotate on its mounts in reaction to torque forces.
Epitrocoidal Curve - The contour of the interior surface of a rotary engine
rotor housing, which, with the rotor, determines the volume of the working chambers at any point in the rotation of the rotor.
Evaporator (AC) - That portion of an automotive air conditioning system in
which the transition from liquid phase to vapor phase occurs.
Exhaust Pipe - A duct of unspecified dimensions, whose function is to
convey exhaust products toward the rear of a car and away from the
driver.
Exhaust Port - The duct within a cylinder head or rotor housing through
which the exhaust gases pass from the exhaust valve(s) to the outer
flange of the head.
Exhaust System - A passive system, whose components serve to convey
the exhaust of an engine past the driver and away from the car.
Expansion Tank - A container, often operating at system pressures, which
is designed to contain engine coolant on expansion at operating temperatures.
Extension - An external modification resulting in more material on the
outside of the component than originally existed.
Fairing - A covering intended to divert airflow in a specific region of a car,
to reduce air drag.
Fan - A rotating bladed device intended to provide a cooling flow of air to
a heat exchanger.
Fan Belt - A flexible drive belt which is used to drive a water radiator cooling fan, and, often simultaneously, furnish drive to one (1) or more other
rotating attachments to the engine.
Fasteners – Any mechanism which serves no other purposes than to
cause a component to maintain a fixed position (i.e. bolt, nut, screw,
etc.).
Fender - The body panel covering a road wheel assembly.
Fender Flare - An attachment to an existing fender which extends the
fender outward so as to more completely cover the tire within.
Fender Skirt - A removable fender extension which partially closes the
wheel opening, smoothing the air flow in this region.
Ferrous - An alloy containing iron.
Filler Cap - A closure which prevents the loss of fuel from the filler neck/
hose when the car is in use, but which may be removed for refueling.
GCR - 117
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Filler Neck/Hose - The attachment to a fuel cell/tank through which fuel is
supplied from a source external to the car.
Final Drive Housing - See Rear Axle Housing.
Final Drive Ratio - The ratio of input to output shaft motions in a final drive
or differential.
Fire Extinguisher - An on-board container of specified capacity charged
with approved fire extinguishing material which provides the driver or others with the capability to control small fires. See Section 9.3.22.
Fire System - An on-board fire extinguishing system designed to be activated in the event of fire, whose purpose is to extinguish or retard the
fire, thus providing a measure of protection for driver and car. See Section
9.3.22.
Firewall - A vertical (plus or minus ten (10) degrees) metal panel separating and protecting the driver/passenger compartment from the engine
compartment, preventing the passage of flame and debris. Metal ducts
may penetrate the firewall, but must begin and end outside of the driver/
passenger compartment. No intakes are allowed in the firewall.
Firing Order - The order in which the cylinders in a reciprocating engine
produce power under normal conditions.
Flare (Verb) - 1. To extend by extrusion or attachment a fender so as to
more completely cover the tire mounted within (Noun) - 2. Extruded end
of a pipe or tube.
Flat Bottom - A race car construction in which the underside of the car is
nominally flat and contains no “ground effects” shaping or ducting.
Flex Joint - A coupling designed to fulfill the function of a universal joint,
but employing flexible materials to achieve changes in the drive axis.
Float - A carburetor component which, with an associated valve, controls
the fuel level in the reservoir supplying the carburetor jet(s).
Float Chamber - The carburetor component which contains the reservoir
of fuel supplying the jet(s).
Float Valve - The shut off valve actuated by a carburetor float, which
controls the maximum level of the fuel in the float chamber.
Floor Pan - The section(s) of a car normally used as a supporting platform
for seats and to physically separate the interior (cockpit) area from the
underside of the car.
Fluid - Any material which readily flows at the specified temperature, e.g.,
liquids and gases at room temperature.
Flywheel - An engine attachment whose normal functions are to provide
a gear appropriate for starter engagement, to provide a friction drive surface and attachment points for a clutch pressure plate, and to smooth the
flow of power.
Frame - The minimal configuration of a car necessary to contain all running gear and to provide support for the body. Not present on “frameless”
or “unibody” cars.
GCR - 118
Fuel - The chemical mixture which, when mixed with air, is burned in an
engine to produce power.
Fuel Cell - A crash-resistant container for the on-board fuel supply of a
car.
Fuel Distribution Unit - A fuel injection induction system component which
accomplishes the distribution of fuel to the injection nozzles.
Fuel Injection - A system, including mechanical and/or electrical components, whose function is to provide fuel, via pressurized nozzles, to the
engine in lieu of carburetion.
Fuel Line - A hose or tube which conveys fuel from one point to another.
Fuel Metering Unit - A component of a fuel injection system which, under
external control, determines the quantity of fuel supplied to the engine at
any given time.
Fuel Pickup - The attachment to a fuel tank or fuel cell at which point the
supply line(s) leading to the fuel pump(s) are attached.
Fuel Pump - A pump, mechanical or electromechanical, whose function is
to cause the transport of fuel from the fuel cell or tank to the induction
system.
Fuel Tank - A conventional OEM container, not of the safety fuel cell type,
for the on-board fuel supply of a car.
Gas Cap - See Filler Cap.
Gasket - A sealing component of unspecified composition which is intended to prevent the leakage of a fluid (air, water, oil, etc.) at the interface
between two demountable assemblies.
Gauges - Mechanical or electronic readouts of automotive parameters.
Gear - A toothed drive train component used, in mesh with another gear,
for the transmission of rotational force.
Generator - An engine-driven attachment which produces direct current to
replenish an on-board storage battery.
Girdle - An engine component whose purpose is the structural reinforcement of the bottom end of an engine block by the replacement of the
main bearing caps with a continuous block of material containing equivalent bearing mountings.
Grille - The decorative covering for the grille opening.
Grille Opening - The opening in the front of a car, through which cooling
air is ducted to the radiator(s), and in some cases, to other accessories,
or to the engine.
Ground Effects - A term for a car design in which airflow produces a significant pressure differential between the upper and lower portions of the
body/chassis, creating downforce on the assembly.
Gudgeon Pin - English term for piston wrist pin.
GCR - 119
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Gusset - A brace generally formed by attaching, by welding, a plate at or
near the junction of two structural beams or tubes, providing reinforcement particularly in the plane including the tubes and the plate.
H.D. - Heavy duty.
H.T. - High tension. English term for spark plug voltage in regard to ignition components.
Hand Brake - A braking system component causing a braking action on
one (1) or more wheels, or on another part of the drive train, which may
be actuated and locked in the engaged position by the driver.
Hardtop - A removable rigid substitute for a convertible or roadster top.
Hatchback - A hinged body component containing the rear window which,
in the open position, gives access to the interior of a car from the rear.
Head and Neck Restraint - A protection device which attaches to the
helmet and is intended to decease neck stresses and forward head movement during an impact.
Head Rest - See Head Restraint.
Head Restraint - A cushioned, fixed restraining object intended to protect
the driver under conditions which cause the driver’s head to be thrust
rearward.
Header - A multibranch exhaust system assembly, whose function is to
convey the exhaust products from more than one cylinder to one or more
exhaust pipes.
Header Tank - A component of an engine cooling system, generally at the
top or above the radiator, which is often used as the filling point for the
system.
Headlight Cover - A protective cover for headlight(s) which is part of the
original configuration of the body design.
Heat Riser Tube - An attachment to an induction system which provides
a source of warmed air, generally from the exhaust system, as an aid to
cold running.
Heat Sink - A part of a system used to convey and dissipate heat from
another part of the system.
Helicoil - A commercial repair for internal threads.
Homologation - A system whereby the manufacturer/competitor certifies
that a Formula or Sports Racing car, as produced, complies with the applicable specifications.
Hood - The panel or assembly of panels which cover the engine compartment.
Horn - The audible signaling device with which highway cars are
equipped.
Hot Terminal - The terminal of a storage battery which is not connected
GCR - 120
to the frame or chassis of the car.
Hub - A component to which a road wheel is attached, which provides
support for the wheel, and has the capability, via attached internal bearings to rotate on a fixed shaft.
Hub Caps - Decorative removable attachments to the central area of road
wheels.
Hub Carrier - A suspension component which provides the means for
mounting a rotating wheel hub, and for attachment of suspension components and stabilizers.
Idler Shaft - A shaft which rotates, or supports another component which
rotates, without itself transmitting the rotational force.
Ignition System - A system which converts on-board storage battery supply voltage into a timed sequence of high voltage pulses suitable for igniting engine combustion mixtures in a controlled manner.
Independent Suspension - A suspension system in which either wheel
on the referenced end of the car can undergo its normal vertical motions
without directly influencing the motions of the other wheel.
Induction System - Those engine components directly associated with the
creation and conveyance of the combustible mixture, and any functional
associated attachments thereto.
Injection Nozzle - The fuel induction system component through which
fuel is forced under pressure to form a combustible mixture with air.
Inlet Port - The cylinder head duct leading to intake valve(s).
Insert (Strut) - The replaceable portion of a suspension strut, basically a
tubular shock absorber with the necessary fastening element(s) for the
upper strut mounting point.
Instrument - An indicator or readout which, when active, contains information about some aspect of car operation for driver reference.
Instrument Panel - A panel, the associated mounting bracket(s), and
HVAC ducting components, located within the cockpit of a car, and in
a position convenient for driver visibility, which may provide a mounting
area for various gauges and controls. Also referred to as a dash pad or
dash panel.
Intake - An opening through which fluid/air enters an enclosure.
Intercooler - A heat exchanger associated with a turbocharging or supercharging system, which is intended to reduce the temperature of the
incoming air or air/fuel mixture, and is located in ducting between the
turbo/super-charger and the engine.
IR - Individual runners. (No balance pipe, no plenum)
Jack Points - Locations on the underside of a car suitable for the application of a lifting jack.
Jack Shaft - A shaft which transfers a driving force from one element of
an engine to another, such as the drive for an oil pump and/or distributor,
GCR - 121
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
taken from an overhead camshaft.
Jet - A carburetor aperture component which is used to meter air and/or
fuel flowing into the mixing region of the carburetor by presenting restriction to the flow.
Kill Switch - See Master Switch.
L.T. - Low tension. English term for battery voltage in regard to ignition
components.
Limited Slip Differential - A differential which is designed in such a way as
to overcome the normal action of a differential to apply most of the available torque to the least loaded wheel, and instead to apply a significant
portion of the torque to the most loaded wheel.
Linkage - A link or system of links (cables, rods, etc.) which convey a
mechanical force from one location to another.
Lip-Type Rear Spoiler - A directly attached aerodynamic device which
generates downforce from the action of air flowing over a single surface,
creating a turbulent depression away from the direction of motion.
Lobe Center - The angular position of a camshaft, defined as that position
in the rotation at which the lift of an associated tappet will be greatest.
Locked Differential - A variation of the limited slip differential in which no
relative slippage of the two driven wheels is permitted under any conditions.
Lubricant - A substance which, when interposed between components
moving with respect to each other, reduces friction and promotes durability. (see 9.3.36)
Luggage Compartment - The region within the bodywork of a car which is
designated as being intended for the carrying of luggage.
Magneto - An ignition system component which generates the electrical
power for ignition of combustion with a system of magnets and coils in
relative motion.
Main Bearing Cap - A reciprocating engine component which has provision for nominally half of one main crankshaft bearing, and which, when
attached to the engine block, may also provide lateral location for the
crankshaft.
Manifold - A passive device for conveying gases into or out of an engine,
generally to achieve the connection of differing numbers of ducts.
Master Cylinder - A hydraulic component of the braking system which
produce positive pressure in the hydraulic lines on the application of mechanical force.
Master Switch - A safety switch which can be actuated by the driver or
other to disable all operating electrical functions, without disconnecting
the electrical supply to any fire system present.
McPherson Strut - (See strut type suspension) A front suspension type
utilizing a strut with integral tubular shock absorber and coil spring, with
the steering swivel axis that of the strut/shock. Upper location is by strut
GCR - 122
only.
Metal - An element that forms metallic bonds between its atoms, is usually shiny, is usually ductile and malleable, usually has a high melting
point, is usually hard, and conducts electricity and heat well.
Metallic - A material having iridescent or specular (mirror-like) reflective
qualities (e.g. aluminum foil).
Metering Rod - A carburetor component which aids in the metering of
fuel flow.
Mirror (Rear View) - A reflective device whose sole purpose is to enable
the driver’s field of vision to extend in a rearward direction.
Modify/Modification - To change a component from stock.
Monocoque - A frameless construction in which the main structure of a
car is composed of a permanent assembly of panels to which the running
gear, suspension and body are attached.
Motor Mount - See Engine Mount.
Mudguard - A partial fender, generally not contiguous with the car body.
Muffler - A component, whose function is to reduce the sound level from
an exhaust system.
NASCAR-Style Door Bars - If installed, shall consist of one or more sidebars that intrude into the door cavity and connect the main hoop to the
front hoop
Needles (Carb) - Tapered carburetor fuel flow metering shafts, or tapered
shafts used in float shutoff valves.
Nitride (Verb) - To heat process ferrous metal components so as to increase the surface hardness.
O-Ring - A seal or gasket, generally made from an elastomer or metal, in
the shape of a torus with a circular cross section.
O E M - Original Equipment Manufacturer.
Offset Key - A metal drive key for coupling a shaft and a pulley, wheel,
or sprocket, in which opposite radial ends of the key are offset to achieve
adjustment of the phase relationship of the driving and driven parts.
OHC (Overhead Cam) - A type of reciprocating engine in which the
camshaft(s) are located in the cylinder head(s), and act on the valves,
either directly or through a linkage.
OHV (Overhead Valve) - A type of reciprocating engine in which the
camshaft(s) are located in the engine block, and act on the valves through
linkage, generally including pushrods and rocker arms.
Oil Filter - An engine accessory intended to intercept all or a portion of
the lubricant circulating from the oil pump, and to remove, by trapping,
solid particles from the lubricant.
Oil Galley - A passage within an engine block which carries the flowing
GCR - 123
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
lubricant to various internal distribution points.
Oil Line - A hose or pipe, external to the engine, which conveys lubricating
oil from one point to another.
Oil Pan - An oil sump fixed to the bottom of an engine.
Oil Passage - A duct within an engine component intended to convey
lubricating oil.
Oil Pump - A mechanically-driven pump designed to draw lubricant from
a reservoir, or sump, and supply it under pressure to the balance of the
lubrication system.
Oil Strainer - A screen surrounding the oil pickup in an engine which is
intended to keep relatively large solid particles from being drawn into the
pump.
Oil Sump - The container in which the return lubricant from the engine is
collected to form the supply from which the pump may draw.
Orientation - Alignment relative to its major axis.
Outline - A line that marks the outer limits of an object or figure.
Overhang - The distance which the end of the bodywork extends away
from the wheels at the referenced end of the car.
Panhard Rod - A rear axle lateral locating device, which has one end connected via a link to the axle housing, and the other end connected to the
car structure or bodywork.
Parkerizing - A commercial process in which a metal part, usually a camshaft, is treated to increase resistance to break-in scuffing.
Parking Brake - See Hand Brake.
Parking Light - A non-racing lighting component, frequently combined
with lighting components of other functions, intended to illuminate the
extremities of a car while parked.
Phase - The angular relationship between two rotating components, or
between one (1) rotating component and a periodic event.
Pickup point (Suspension) – The location of attachment of a suspension
component on the frame or structure of the car. Pickup point is also referred to as “pivot axis.”
Pilot Bearing - A bearing, generally within one end of a shaft, which is
intended to support another shaft under conditions of relative rotary motion.
Piston - A reciprocating engine component whose functions are to provide a partial vacuum with which to induce the flow of fuel/air into the
combustion region, to convert the combustion pressures to reciprocating
motion, and to expel exhaust gases.
Piston Ring - A reciprocating engine component which, when mounted on
a piston, provides either sealing or oil control functions when the engine
is in operation.
GCR - 124
Pitman Arm - A steering system component which translates the rotation
of the steering gears to a linear motion of steering links.
Plenum - An induction system chamber generally interposed between
carburetor(s) or air intake(s) and ducts feeding ports.
Points (Ignition) - The switch portion of a distributor actuated by cam
lobes, which interrupts the current flowing through the primary windings
of an ignition coil, thus generating high voltage pulses which are conveyed to the spark plug.
Polish (Verb) - To reduce the roughness of a surface by mechanical,
chemical, or electrochemical means.
Port - See Intake, Exhaust Ports.
Power Brakes - A braking system in which the driver-initiated mechanical
force acting on a master cylinder is assisted by a servo mechanism, generally derived from manifold vacuum.
Power Steering - A steering system in which the driver-initiated force
acting on the steering gears is assisted by a servo mechanism, usually
involving an engine-driven hydraulic pump.
Pressure Equalizing Device - A braking system component intended to
equalize or allow adjustment of the relative pressures in separate branches of the hydraulic system (e.g. front/rear).
Pressure Plate - The clutch assembly component which provides the force
necessary to couple the engine to the next component in the drive train
through friction surfaces.
Pressure Regulator Spring - A spring whose installed force determines the
pressure at which a valve or valve system will open to allow the flow of
fluid.
Profile (Verb) - To measure or to reshape the contour of a camshaft lobe,
rocker arm or similar component.
Propeller Shaft - See Drive Shaft.
Proportioning Valve - A braking system component intended to allow adjustment of the hydraulic pressures available in separate branches of the
system (e.g., front/rear).
Pulley - A rotational attachment for a drive belt.
Pushrod - A cylindrical or tubular reciprocating engine component which
transmits a reciprocating motion arising from camshaft rotation to or toward the valves.
Pushrod Tube - An engine component which encloses a pushrod in the
region between the engine block and the cylinder head.
Qualifier - (a) One who receives a time, or (b) One who is waived into a
race by the Chief Steward and starts the race.
Racers Tape - Generally duct tape, an adhesive, fabric-backed tape.
GCR - 125
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Rack and Pinion - A type of steering system, or the gear components
thereof, in which the rotary motions of a pinion gear attached to the steering shaft act on a rack, or linear gear.
Radiator (Cooler) - A heat exchanger intended to remove heat from engine
or gear fluids.
Radius (Verb) - To contour an abrupt edge on a component by increasing
the radius of the transition.
Rain Tire - A racing tire intended solely for competition in wet conditions.
Ram Air - A type of induction system in which the incoming air is obtained
from an extension into the airstream outside the bodywork.
Ratio (Gear) - The number of rotations of the drive shaft which produces
one (1) rotation of the driven shaft(s).
Rebound - A suspension term referring to motion in the upward direction.
Reciprocating Engine - An internal combustion engine in which the driven
actions of one or more pistons are converted to the rotary motion of a
crankshaft.
Relief Valve - A check valve intended to vent at a predetermined pressure
differential.
Remote Reservoir Shock Absorber - Any shock absorber or dampening
device which uses an externally mounted (connected either by hose or
“piggy back” design) fluid and/or gas reservoir.
Removal - To take off a component.
Repair (Verb) - To remove the effect(s) of accidental damage to a component, returning it to original or legally modified dimensions and function.
Replica - A component identical to or very similar in appearance and function to the original which it replaces.
Resistor Spark Plug - An ignition system spark plug containing electrical
resistance which is intended to reduce radio interference.
Ride Height - The distance from level ground to the specified portion of
the car, with the tires, wheels, air pressure, etc., as normally raced.
Rim Width - The distance between the opposing lateral sides of a road
wheel in the region where the bead of a tire seats. Measuring method per
tire and rim association standard.
Ring Gear - The main driven gear in a final drive assembly, driven by a
pinion gear. Also the starter engagement gear on a flywheel.
Rocker Arm - A valve train component which transfers the motions of the
camshaft, often with a multiplication of travel, to a valve.
Rocker Cover - See Valve Cover.
Rocker Panel - The body panel closest to the ground extending along eiGCR - 126
ther outer side of a car between the wheels.
Rod End - A load-bearing threaded mechanical coupling with angular freedom of the relative axes and which allows rotation of the inner portion
with respect to the outer, i.e. heim joint.
Roll Bar - A safety device designed to protect the driver from injury in the
event of a roll over accident. See Section 9.4.
Roll Cage - An extension of a minimal roll bar, designed to protect the
driver from injury from accidental forces in several directions. See Section
9.4.
Roller Cam Follower - An engine component (tappet) which utilizes a rolling member to contact the camshaft.
Rotary Engine - A non-reciprocating engine of the NSU-Wankel type.
Rotary Engine Rotor - The main rotating component of a rotary engine,
which essentially accomplishes the compression, power delivery and exhaust functions of a reciprocating engine in constrained rotation in a specially shaped housing.
Rotary Piston - See Rotary Engine Rotor.
Rotor Housing - The housing of a rotary engine in which the rotor rotates.
Analogous to the engine block of a reciprocating engine.
Rub Strip - Expendable material added to bottom of a car to prevent contact with the road surface from damaging non-expendable portions of the
car.
Runner - A duct of an induction system leading to the cylinder head.
Running Light - A signaling light of specified size and location, which can
be activated by driver control, and is intended to improve the ability of
other drivers to detect the signaling car.
Scattershield - A stationary safety device intended to protect the driver in
the event of catastrophic clutch/flywheel failure.
Scraper - A passive internal attachment to an oil pan whose purpose is
to control the return flow of lubricant by removing it from the rotating
crankshaft.
Seal - A conformable sealing component generally used to inhibit the passage of fluids along the shafts of moving parts, such as valves, master
cylinders, etc.
Seat Belt - A safety strap, generally containing the attachment/release
mechanism for all other safety straps, intended to restrain the driver
against forces tending to move the driver. See Section 9.3.18.
Section Width - The lateral cross section of a tire, sidewall to sidewall.
Servo Assist - The application of mechanical assistance, through vacuum
or hydraulic or other external action, to reduce the forces required from
the driver.
Shaved Tread - A tire tread which has been abraded or cut to reduce the
GCR - 127
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
tread depth.
Shift Fork - A transmission or transaxle component which directly moves
gears into engagement or disengagement in response to driver actions.
Shock Absorber - A device intended to dampen the actions of road
springs.
Shot Blasting - See Shot Peening.
Shot/Glass Peening - A treatment, consisting of impelling small glass or
metal balls into metal parts, intended to reduce stresses in components.
Shoulder Harness - A safety strap assembly intended to restrain the driver’s upper body under conditions of rapid reduction of forward velocity.
See Section 9.3.18.
Side Marker Light - A small light fixture normally mounted on the side of
a fender, which is intended to make the car more readily visible from the
side under appropriate conditions.
Signal Light - A light fixture used to signal turns or, in some cases,
stops.
Single Inlet Restrictor (SIR) - A system to limit engine performance that
meets the following criteria:
A. The intent of this restriction system is to have a sealed system
from the restrictor to the intake ports of the cylinder head. All of
the air entering the intake ports shall pass through the specified
restrictor. Modification or addition to any part of the intake system
that allows the introduction of air into the intake ports that has not
passed through the specified restrictor is prohibited.
B.
The engine air intake system must be fitted with an aluminum air
restrictor. The intake system is defined as an assembly of parts,
including but not restricted to: the restrictor, restrictor housing,
ducting, filters, air box, velocity stacks, throttle body, carburetors,
manifold and manifold gasket up to the intake ports on the cylinder
head.
C. The restrictor must be round in shape. The maximum ID of the
restrictor is listed on the vehicle’s spec line. The restrictor’s
maximum ID must be maintained for a minimum length of 3mm.
Restrictor mounting/placement within the intake system is free, but
must allow accessibility for measurement. It is acceptable to have
some minor disassembly of the intake system to provide access to
the restrictor for measurement. Measurement device and restrictor
shall be similar temperatures when used.
D. Sealing the restrictor from its supply of air must cause the engine
to stop within 4 seconds. This check is to be made at an engine
speed of approximately 2500 rpm. The sealed airbox must withstand this test. Pressure sensors present inside the intake system
must be disconnected during this check.
Slave Cylinder - A hydraulic system component which achieves the conversion of hydraulic pressure to mechanical force, usually to accomplish
a disengagement of the clutch.
Space Frame - An automotive frame constructed of multiple small tubes.
GCR - 128
See also Tube Frame.
Spark Plug - An engine component which, by means of high voltage supplied by an ignition system, initiates the combustion of the air/fuel mixture.
Specification - A detailed presentation of parameters which determine
the performance or suitability of a system or assembly of systems to accomplish design goals.
Spherical Bearing - A load-bearing connector in which the central portion
is convex and the outer portion is concave, allowing both angular displacements of the axes and relative rotation.
Spider Gears - Components of the torque division section of a conventional differential gear assembly.
Spindle (Stub Axle) - The shaft, and integral assembly supporting a wheel
hub, and often, braking and/or steering components.
Spoiler - A panel attached to the body of a car at the front or rear, intended to alter the airflow around or under that end of the car when in
motion.
Spring Cap - See Valve Spring Retainer.
Spring Shock - A suspension assembly containing a coil spring surrounding a tubular shock absorber.
Spring Washer - A spacer designed to exert force against securing pressure, thus reducing the tendency of an attached threaded fastener to
separate.
Sprocket - A gear made specifically for use with a drive chain.
Stabilizer - An attachment to the suspension system, not usually part
of the suspension, which aids in maintaining the relative alignment of a
wheel or wheels to the car.
Starter (Self Starter) - An electrical device which is used to initiate normal
engine operation by converting electrical energy into mechanical rotation
of the engine.
Starter Ring - The gear on the outer periphery of a flywheel for application
of drive from a starter.
Stayrod - A rigid reinforcement bar or rod interconnecting opposite sides
of a car at structurally significant locations.
Steering - The mechanical system of components that allow a wheel to be
turned side to side to follow the desired course of its driver.
Steering Arm - The rigid link in a steering system which conveys the steering action from the steering gears and linkage to a wheel assembly.
Steering Column - The shaft forming the connection between the steering
wheel and the steering gear, through which driver-initiated steering motions are transmitted.
Steering Linkage - The various components, exclusive of gears, steering
GCR - 129
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
column and steering wheel, which transmit the driver’s steering motions
to the steered wheels.
Steering Lock - The degree of turning motion given to the steering wheel,
and hence to the steered wheels. “Full lock” denotes the maximum available turning angle.
Steering Lock Mechanism - An antitheft device used to lock the steering
shaft or wheel when the ignition key is withdrawn.
Stock - In the exact same state or location as supplied by the original
manufacturer.
Streamlining - Smoothing the airflow over a portion of the car.
Stroke - The length of travel of an engine piston from uppermost to lowermost positions.
Strut (Stabilizer) - A rigid beam used to assist in the location of suspension components.
Strut Type Suspension - Strut suspension consists of three pivoting attachment points including a single upper attachment point, the spindle
being mounted on a telescoping post with no vertical movement at the
top attachment point.
Stub Axle - See Spindle.
SU-type Carburetor - Any single barrel automotive-type side draft, overhead sliding piston type carburetor regardless of manufacturer.
Sub-frame/Cross Member - A component attached to the frame or structure of a car in order to augment its strength while at the same time serving as a platform for mounting suspension and drive train components.
Substitution - To remove a component and replace it with another.
Surround - To enclose on all sides.
Sunroof - A movable panel in the roof of a car, which may normally be
partially opened from within the car.
Supercharger - An induction system compressor component, mechanically driven from the engine, which provides forced flow of the fuel/air
mixture into the engine by the generation of positive pressure.
Suspension - A mechanical system of components controlling vertical motion and connecting the axle housing and wheels to the chassis of a car.
Suspension Bushing - A hollow cylindrical mounting component which
acts as a bearing, allowing constrained motion, between a suspension
component and attachment point.
Suspension Control Arm - A beam or frame intended to limit the normal
motion of the affected suspension part to predetermined paths.
Swaged Fitting - A tubing fitting which utilizes some form of extrusion
of the tubing to form a seal against the leakage of pressurized fluid from
within the tubing.
GCR - 130
Sway Bar - See Anti Roll Bar.
Synchronizer - A transmission component which aids in matching speeds
of two gears as they are engaged.
System - An assembly of components with an identifiable primary function.
T-type Top - A body design in which the roof contains, above the front
seats, two (2) removable panels separated by a fixed section which joins
to the balance of the roof.
Taillight - The running (parking) light assembly at the rear of a car, which
may include lights with stop and/or turn signaling functions.
Tap (Verb) - To cut threads in a hole to retain a stud or bolt with threads
of matching pitch and diameter.
Tappet - (Cam follower, valve lifter) An engine component which, in contact with the camshaft, follows its rotating profile, resulting in a programmed reciprocating motion suitable for actuating valves.
Targa-Type Top - An automotive roof design in which the area over the
front seats is removable.
T D C - Top dead center, referring to the rotational position of the crankshaft when the number one piston is farthest from the crankshaft.
Tender Spring - A spring used to capture the spring with the perches at
full droop and are completely compressed when the car is at static ride
height. Static ride height shall be determined with driver seated in the
normal driving position.
Thermostat - An engine cooling system regulator device which is intended
to control the temperature of the coolant by modulating the flow through
an aperture.
Throttle Butterfly - An induction system component which may effectively vary the area of the induction port when turned (in response to
driver input) from parallel to the flow in the port (“full throttle”), to almost
perpendicular to the flow (“closed throttle”).
Throwout Bearing - A bearing which, in response to driver actuation,
accomplishes the application of the force needed to release the friction
clutch through the actuation of the pressure plate.
Tie Rod - The link connecting a portion of the steering system which is
fixed to the chassis to a sprung wheel.
Time (Verb) - To adjust the phase relationship of ignition and crankshaft,
or of camshaft(s) and crankshaft.
Timing Belt - A toothed belt used, with appropriate pulleys, to convey
drive force in a synchronous manner from the crankshaft to one or more
camshafts.
Timing Gear - The engine gear or sprocket attached to a camshaft and
driven by the crankshaft via gear(s) or chain.
Tire Tread - The portion of a tire containing the material intended to be in
GCR - 131
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
road contact while a car is in straight-ahead motion.
Toe (-In, -Out) - The measure of the position of the wheels on either axle
of a car with respect to each other, with reference to the fore/aft direction.
Tonneau Cover - A cover for the passenger portion of an open car.
Top (Removable) - A removable covering for an open car, normally supplied for protection against the elements.
Torque Biasing Differential - A form of limited slip differential.
Torque Converter - An engine-driven power transmission device which
couples driving and driven shafts with a variable speed reduction.
Torque Suppressor - See Engine Steady Bar.
Torsion Bar - A bar or beam intended to act as a springing medium, in
which the “springing” is derived from resistance to twisting along the
main axis of the bar.
Track - The distance between the center of the rims of two wheels at one
end of a car, with any angular adjustments at normal settings and steered
wheels in the straight ahead position.
Traction Bar - A longitudinal link to an axle housing or hub carrier which
resists torque reaction from the driven wheel(s) by acting in compression
or tension.
Trailing Arm - A wheel control linkage locating the wheel in the fore/aft
direction, which is attached to the car structure at the forward end of the
arm, and to the wheel carrier at the rear of the arm.
Transaxle - A component containing the mechanisms necessary to achieve
the combined functions of a transmission and a differential.
Transistor Ignition - A system of ignition in which electronic components
are utilized.
Translucent - Permitting the passage of a reasonable amount of visible
light. In the case of fluid containers, permitting the visual assessment of
fluid levels by observing these through the container.
Transmission (Gearbox) - An assembly of driver-selectable gears in an
independent housing, located between the engine and driven wheels,
whose function is to alter the rotational velocity reaching the wheels.
Transparent - Offering very little resistance to the passage of visible light,
suitable for use in the line of sight.
Transverse Engine - An engine located in a car such that the crankshaft
centerline is nominally perpendicular to the normal direction of car motion.
Trim - Coverings or attachments whose function is solely cosmetic.
Trued Tread - The tread of a tire which has been cut after mounting on a
wheel so as to ensure that the surface of the tread is equidistant from the
center of the wheel at all angles of rotation.
GCR - 132
Trumpet - See Velocity Stack.
Trunk Area - The spare tire and/or luggage region inside the body of a
car.
Tub - The central contiguous assembly of stressed panels which form the
basic structure of a frameless car.
Tub-based (non tube-frame) Car - A non-tube frame car has a stock floor
pan, firewall, door pillars, sills, windshields conforming to stock profile,
and window frames, etc.
Tube Frame Car - A car intended solely for racing, whose main structure
or frame is fabricated from an assembly of tubes welded into the desired
configuration.
Tuftriding - A commercial surface hardening process for ferrous metals.
Turbo Boost Control - An adjustment which causes a change in the degree
of turbo boost available.
Turbocharger - An induction system compressor component, driven by
exhaust gases from the engine, which provides forced flow of the fuel/air
mixture into the engine by means of positive pressure.
Undertray (Belly Pan) - An attachment to the underside of a car intended
to smooth airflow and/or to offer driver protection in this region of the
car.
Unibody - A type of construction in which the main car structure is fabricated from an assembly of panels and reinforcements, permanently fastened together, generally by welding, into a single unit.
Universal Joint - A mechanical drive train component which permits a
change in direction of the axis of rotation conveying the force.
Unswept Volume - The enclosed volume existing in a cylinder/cylinder
head with the piston at its closest approach to the cylinder head.
Vacuum Advance Mechanism - An ignition distributor mechanism which,
under the influence of manifold vacuum, changes the ignition timing in a
prescribed fashion.
Valance - Bodywork welded or bolted to the cars body/structure, at the
front or rear of a car, normally but not always located behind and/or below the bumper.
Valve - A reciprocating engine component, consisting of head and a stem,
which may be opened or sealed in phase with crankshaft rotation, so as
to control the induction of fuel/air mixtures or the exhaust of products of
the combustion process.
Valve Cover - A cylinder head attachment whose function is to contain
lubricants and to protect the valve actuation mechanism from outside
contaminants.
Valve Guide - A sleeve bearing whose function is to provide axial location
of a valve, while allowing normal reciprocating motions.
GCR - 133
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Valve Head - the portion of the valve that is larger than the stem.
Valve Keeper - The component, generally two-piece, which secures the
valve spring retainer to the valve stem in a cylinder head.
Valve Relief - A cutout in a piston crown to allow close approach of a
valve.
Valve Seat - The area in a cylinder head in which the head of a valve under
spring pressure forms a gas seal.
Valve Size - The diameter of the head of a valve.
Valve Spring Retainer (Collar) - A valve train component which serves the
dual purpose of containing the outer end of the valve spring(s), and, by
means of valve keepers, connecting the valve stem to the spring.
Valve Spring Shim - A valve train component whose purpose is to allow
the adjustment of the seated valve spring pressure by effectively changing its seated length.
Valve Stem (Engine) - The shaft portion of a reciprocating engine poppet
valve.
Valve Stem (Wheel) - The attachment to a road wheel through which
pressurizing air is admitted/released.
Vapor Lock - A condition in the fuel delivery system caused by the existence of vapors, rather than liquid fuel, in the fuel pump, resulting in
abnormal fuel delivery.
Variable Ratio Drive - A power transmission device in which at fixed input
shaft rotational velocity the rotational velocity of the driven shaft is continuously variable over a prescribed range of ratios.
Velocity Stack (Air Horn/Trumpet) - An induction system attachment,
generally in the form of a cylindrical flare, used to alter the dynamic coupling between carburetor and the mass of incoming air.
Vent - An aperture which allows pressure equalization between a semisealed volume and the outside of this volume by providing a flow path
for gases.
Ventilation - Cooling a component by an intentional flow of air, or modifying a component so as to facilitate this process.
Venturi - A region of constriction in an air duct of a carburetor in which,
through the actions of incoming air flow, a reduced pressure is created to
induce the inflow of fuel through one or more jets.
Vibration Dampener - Generally a rubber-mounted rotating circular disc
or pulley whose function is to reduce the amplitude of vibrations in the
mechanism or part to which it is attached.
Visible - Capable of being seen, perceptible to the eye, apparent, evident.
Voltage Regulator - An electronic or electromechanical device intended to
regulate the charging actions of an alternator or generator.
GCR - 134
Watts Linkage - A rear axle lateral location system which employs a
frame/body-mounted central pivoting attachment (bell crank) for two (2)
lateral links, whose opposite ends are attached to either end of the axle
housing or vice versa.
Wave Washer - A thin, continuous spring washer.
Welding – The process of fusing one or more components into a single
unit by means other than adhesives or fasteners (i.e. TIG, MIG, soldering,
brazing, etc.).
Wheel - Flange and Rim.
Wheel (Steering) - The cockpit-mounted control device, normally circular,
which allows the driver to exert manual force with which to control the
car’s direction of motion.
Wheel Cover - A removable decorative covering for a road wheel.
Wheel Cylinder - A hydraulic component of the braking system, which
produces mechanical force at the wheel brakes in response to positive
hydraulic pressure.
Wheel Fan - An integral part of or attachment to a wheel assembly with
blade-like elements, intended to improve brake cooling.
Wheel Spacer - A plate of unspecified thickness or material which is
mounted between a road wheel and hub to increase the distance from the
inside of the wheel to the hub, thereby increasing track.
Wheel Trim Rings - Decorative removable attachments to road wheels effectively covering the rim area of the wheels.
Wheel Well - The volume under a fender.
Wheelbase - The distance between the front and rear axle centerlines of a
car, with the front wheels in the straight ahead position.
Windage Tray - An internal baffle attachment to an engine oil pan which
is intended to help maintain a sufficient supply of lubricant at the location
of the oil pickup under cornering, braking or acceleration.
Windows:
A. Door or Side - The opening where the window normally is raised
or lowered in a door. Does not include a “vent” window whether
fixed or movable.
B.
Quarter (1/4) - On a 2-door or 4-door vehicle, the window to the
rear of the rearmost door. Such windows are not generally raised
or lowered, but they may be hinged and open to the rear. Quarter
windows are not “rear” windows.
C. Rear - Rear windows are positioned at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the car.
Windshield (Windscreen) - An attachment to the bodywork of a car intended to divert the flow of air from forward motion without obstructing
forward vision.
Windshield Pillar - A body component which extends nominally upward
GCR - 135
General
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
Appendix B. Technical Glossary
from the cowl area, forming one supporting attachment for the windshield.
Wing - An aerodynamic attachment to the structure of a car specifically
intended to generate downforce from the action of air flowing over the
upper and lower surfaces, creating a pressure differential.
Wiring Harness - Bundles of electrical wires which provide the electrical
links in a car.
Wishbone Type Susp. - A form of suspension in which the lower (and often upper) locating links are in the form of a wishbone or “A-frame”, and
provide the lateral and at least a portion of the fore/aft wheel location.
Working Chamber - The volume in a rotary engine which is defined by the
case and the two adjacent rotor tip seals, and which will vary in capacity
with position in rotation.
Worm and Sector - A steering gear type in which the steering forces from
the driver are transmitted to the steering linkage via a worm gear and a
sector gear in mesh.
Wrist Pin - The one-piece physical link between a connecting rod and a
piston.
Zerk Fitting (Grease gun fitting) - A small check valve attachment to a
bearing housing through which pressurized lubricant may be applied to
the bearing.
GCR - 136
APPENDIX C. FACTS, FORMULAS, MEASUREMENT STANDARDS
1.
FACTS AND FORMULAS
Facts and Formulas to be used at all SCCA events.
1 inch = 2.54 cm = 25.4 mm
1 cubic inch = 16.387 cubic cm
1 millimeter = .03937 inch
1 kilometer = 1000 meters =.62137 mile = 1093.6 yards
1 mile = 1,760 yards = 1.60934 kilometers
Miles per hour = kilometers per hour x .62137
Kilometers per hour = miles per hour x 1.60934
1 cubic centimeter = .061 cubic inch
1 liter = 61.03 cubic inches = 1000 cubic centimeters (cc)
1 kilogram = 2.21 pounds
1 pound = 453.6 grams
Cylinder volume (displacement) =
3.1416 x bore x bore x stroke
4
Engine displacement = Cylinder volume times number of cylinders
Compression ratio = V1 + V2
V2
Where V1 is total volume of one cylinder
V2 is volume of space above piston at top of stroke
Piston speed (ft. per min.) = 2 x RPM x stroke in feet
Brake Horsepower (BHP) = RPM x torque (in lbs ft.)
5252
Note: Formula is actually: 6.28 x RPM x torque
33,000
6.28 into 33,000 we get 5250
Torque = BMEP x Swept volume (in cc)
2473
Frontal Area (for figuring air resistance) = T x H (square feet)
144
Where T is front tread in inches, H is overall height in inches.
MPH = RPM x wheel diameter (in inches)
gear ratio x 336
Note: Wheel diameter is overall diameter of the inflated tire, not the
nominal diameter of the wheel.
GCR - 137
General
Appendix C. Formulas, Measurement Standards
Appendix C. Formulas, Measurement Standards
2.
MEASUREMENT STANDARDS
The following specifications shall meet the standards set below unless
otherwise specified or unrestricted in the individual category or class preparation rules. Any specification not listed herein shall meet stock factory
specifications unless otherwise specified or unrestricted in the individual
category or class preparation rules. For these specifications, the tolerance
shall be equivalent to ½ of the final digit of the specification (e.g. .01”
tolerance equals +/- .005”). Absolute maximum means tolerances of
+0.000 inches or +0.00 millimeters. Absolute minimum means a tolerance of -0.000 inches or -0.00 millimeters. Measuring devices available to
scrutineers differ from location to location so it is the responsibility of the
driver to insure that measurements comply with these rules.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Weight is absolute minimum.
Track is absolute maximum.
Rim width is absolute maximum.
Wheelbase has a tolerance of +/- 1”
Valve size is absolute maximum.
Throttle bore and/or venturi size and intake restrictor size is absolute maximum.
7. Drum brake size is nominal i.d. plus manufacturer’s “turning” tolerance.
8. Disk brake rotor diameter has a tolerance of +0.1”.
9. Engine cylinder bore is absolute maximum before allowable overbore.
10. Engine stroke length is absolute maximum.
11. Valve lift is absolute maximum.
12. Compression ratio is absolute maximum
3.
MEASURING COURSES
The official length of a course shall be measured along the centerline of
the road.
4.
MEASURING TRACK
Track is the distance between the centerlines of the wheels as raced,
without driver, measured at a horizontal plane through the wheel hub
centerline. Alternatively, it may be measured from the inside of one
wheel at the hub centerline height to the outside of the other wheel, then
conversely from the outside of the first wheel at hub centerline to the
inside of the second wheel. The two (2) dimensions obtained are to be
added together and divided by two to obtain the average. Measurements
are to be taken at both front and rear of the wheels and averaged to
compensate for toe-in/out. Under certain circumstances it may be preferable to measure from the outside of one wheel to the outside of another
and from this dimension deduct the thickness of one wheel. This should
be repeated 180° opposite to the first measurement and the two dimensions averaged.
GCR - 138
APPENDIX D. OVAL TRACK RACING RULES
This section is intended as a guideline and recommendation for SCCA
Club Racing events conducted entirely on paved oval tracks.
1.
EVENTS
Club Racing Oval Events are to be sanctioned as Regional or Restricted
Regional racing events. National Races may not be conducted as Oval
Events. Driver’s Schools may be conducted as Oval Events, but not as
a substitute for a road course driver’s school. Regions conducting Oval
Drivers Schools are encouraged to seek out local drivers who have experience at that track to advise students at the Oval Drivers School.
All items of Section 3., Events, which apply to Regional or Restricted
Regional events shall apply to Oval Events.
Depending on the length and banking of the oval course being used, it is
recommended that regions consider restricting the faster classes (GT1,
FA, and CSR) from competition at Oval Events.
Oval Events may consist of any combination of practice sessions, qualifying sessions, heat races, and feature races. On tracks of less than 1
mile in length, it is recommended that qualifying be conducted one car
at a time.
2.
COURSES
Courses for Oval Events must be approved by the Divisional Executive
Steward prior to applying for a race sanction. These approvals shall expire
at the end of the calendar year or upon written notification to the region
by the Executive Steward which ever comes first.
3.
TIMING AND SCORING
Timing and Scoring standards may be modified in favor of short-track
scoring techniques. It is not necessary to time every lap of every car
during a race, though an overall time for the winner should be recorded.
4.
FLAGGING AND COMMUNICATIONS
Generally, all communications with the drivers while they are on course
shall be done via flags at the Starters Stand and/or signal lights around the
course. It is recommended that Flagging and Communications personnel
be stationed around the course so as to communicate to Race Control
the observations they make regarding the condition of the course or the
nature of any incidents within their field.
5.
RULES OF THE ROAD
5.1.
Racing Surface
For the conduct of all competitions (qualifying or race), the racing surface
shall be defined as only the marked, paved race track and it’s curbing. Pit
lanes, their entries and exits; grass verges; etc.; are expressly excluded
from the racing surface.
5.2.
Flags
For Oval Events, flags will normally be only displayed at the Starter’s
Stand. Flags may be supplemented by signal lights displayed around the
course. The flags used in an Oval Event shall be as defined in Section
6.11., Flags, with the following exceptions:
GCR - 139
General
Appendix D. Oval Track Racing Rules
Appendix D. Oval Track Racing Rules
A. RED FLAG – Come to a stop as soon as possible on driver’s left (for
counterclockwise tracks) or driver’s right (for clockwise tracks).
Then proceed very slowly and with great caution to the hot pit area
and await further instructions.
B. Yellow Flag and/or Yellow Light
STANDING YELLOW — Take care, Danger, Slow Down, NO PASSING.
The entire course is in a yellow flag condition.
WAVED — Great Danger, Slow Down, be prepared to stop, NO
PASSING. The entire course is in a yellow flag condition.
DOUBLE YELLOW – Not used.
C. SURFACE CONDITION FLAG (Yellow with Vertical Red Stripes)
– Not used. Any course condition warranting a surface condition
flag is cause for displaying a Yellow Flag until the course condition
can be corrected.
D. WHITE FLAG (Solid White) – The leader is starting his last lap. The
White Flag shall be waved to the leader and then to each successive car during that lap.
5.3.
Practice / Multi-Car Qualifying
A. During practice and multi-car qualifying sessions, all cars must
enter the pit area and stop at their pit at the first opportunity after
observing a yellow flag or yellow light at any flag or light station on
the track. No car shall re-enter the track from the pit lane until the
course becomes green again.
B.
The scheduled practice time is total running clock time, not ontrack green flag time, subject to event scheduling requirements.
5.4.
Single-Car Qualifying
A. The number of warm-up laps, timed laps, and cool-down laps
allowed in a qualifying session will be defined in the supplementary
regulations and/or announced at the drivers meeting.
B.
Cars will qualify in an order determined by the Chief Steward. If
a random drawing is used to determine qualifying order, details of
the drawing will be announced prior to the drawing. Positions in the
qualifying order are reserved as long as the car is in the qualifying
line prior to the order to begin its qualifying attempt.
C. If a car does not proceed with the qualification attempt when
ordered to do so, the qualifying order position will be forfeited. The
car may be penalized further by the loss of one qualifying lap.
D. A qualifying attempt shall be considered started when the front
tires of the car cross the starting line after the qualifying start
signal is given by the Starter.
E.
If the car stops anywhere on the course after the qualifying start
signal is given by the Starter, the driver will be charged with an
attempt. Time permitting, those cars having started a qualifying
attempt, but unable to complete the attempt, will be permitted to
begin a second qualifying attempt. First priority for a second qualifying attempt will go to cars that failed to receive any qualifying
time during their first attempt.
GCR - 140
F.
In the event qualification cannot be held or completed within the
allotted qualification time, the field, or remaining field, will be filled
by means of a seeded lottery by those drivers who have entered,
but who have not qualified.
5.5.
Races
A. Initial Race Start
1. A pace car may or may not be used. If no pace car is used, the
responsibility of pacing the field will fall to the pole car.
B.
2.
The number of pace laps prior to the start of the race will be
announced by the Chief Steward.
3.
On the final pace lap prior to start, the pace car, if used, will
turn its lights out and accelerate to leave track.
4.
The pole car will bring the field gradually up to speed for
possible start.
5.
Cars shall not improve position prior to crossing start/finish
line. (Pulling out of line alongside the car in front of you is
improving your position.)
6.
In case of an aborted start, the starter will display a standing
green flag to the field. After the cars have entered turn one,
the course will go yellow and the field will reform on the back
straight for a restart.
Yellow Light/Flag Condition the track.
1. In the event of a yellow flag, the lead car is responsible for
controlling the field and getting the field to slow down in a
smooth, orderly fashion.
2.
A pace or safety car may be employed to bring the field under
control. Whenever a pace car is used, it will remain out for
a minimum of two laps subject to race conditions and at the
discretion of the Chief Steward. The Chief Steward may designate to the lead car the duties of pace car to safely pace the
field to a restart or to slow the field down gradually prior to a
safety car entering the track.
3.
In case of a pass in progress when the yellow light goes on,
the over-taking car is expected to fall back and take station
behind
the car he was attempting to pass. The field does
not race to the start/finish line.
4.
The running order as of the last completed green flag lap immediately prior to the yellow flag shall determine the running order
for the re-start.
5.
Any yellow light or flag at an oval track is a full course yellow,
whether or not there is a safety car. The lead car will slow the
field down to permit the entire field to “bunch up” single file
behind the leader. The track will stay yellow until the field is
consolidated behind the leader. Drivers strung out around the
track are expected to quickly move up to catch “the pack”
while observing the yellow flag situation.
6.
Cars entering the pits during a yellow flag condition, or cars
responsible for causing the yellow flag condition, shall, assume
GCR - 141
General
Appendix D. Oval Track Racing Rules
Appendix D. Oval Track Racing Rules
a position at the rear of the formed pack on rejoining the
field.
C. Restarts
1. On the lap prior to a possible yellow-to-green restart, the field
will be notified of a possible restart on the next lap by:
a. Safety car turning lights off and exiting the track.
b.
If no safety car is used, Starter indicating one more lap.
2.
In either case, the lead car gradually brings the field up to
speed for a possible restart.
3.
At the instant the starter waves the green flag, all yellow lights
will go green. Racing resumes immediately over the entire
track.
5.6.
Driving Conduct
A. It is the responsibility of all drivers to avoid physical contact
between cars on the race track.
B.
All competitors have a right to “racing room” on the marked racing
surface. “Racing room” shall be generally defined as sufficient
space on the marked racing surface so as to allow a competitor
to maintain control of his car in close quarters, under racing conditions.
C. It shall be incumbent on all drivers to preserve the right of his fellow
competitors to “racing room” on the race track. Abrupt changes in
direction so as to impede or affect the path of a car attempting to
overtake or pass may be interpreted by Officials as an attempt to
deprive a fellow competitor of his right to “racing room”.
GCR - 142
APPENDIX E. DUTIES, AUTHORITIES, AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF
THE CHIEF STEWARD
This Appendix summarizes all references to the Chief Steward in the GCR,
except those in 5.12.1. and 5.12.2., the primary sections governing the
powers and responsibilities of the Chief Steward and the SOM. These are
only summaries and are intended to direct the reader to the appropriate
specific reference for the full citation. Because they are summaries, they
are guidelines only. The statements in this Appendix are non-protestable
or appealable.
2.1.6.
Refusing to cooperate with, interfering with, or obstructing the
CS is a breach of the rules.
2.2.5.A.
The CS shall have no conflict of interest as defined in this
section.
2.3.1.B.
The CS may exclude any participant using narcotics or
dangerous drugs, may have that person removed from the
grounds, and may cause that person to be penalized.
3.1.1.C.2. The CS may waive the 120% qualifying rule at a National
Race.
3.1.8.D.
The CS will establish car prep and driver conduct standards
for a Vintage/Historic race and shall publish them in the Entry
Form.
3.4.4.
The CS must approve scaffolding in consultation with SCCA
Risk Management.
3.5.1.H.
The name of the CS must appear in the Supplementary Regulations.
3.6.2.
The CS shall delay beginning an event until he is satisfied that
the required insurance is provided.
4.4.3.B.1. The CS signs Novice Permits attesting to the participation in
SCCA Drivers’ Schools.
4.4.3.C.
The CS of a Drivers’ School may waive all of part of the DS
requirements for drivers with prior racing experience.
4.4.3.D.1. The CS of the SCCA Drivers’ School may accept one (1) private
school in lieu of one SCCA School, upon completion of three
(3) hours of in-car on course time at SCCA schools.
4.4.3.E.1. The CS signs Novice Permits attesting to the participation in
SCCA Regionals.
4.4.3.F.
The CS of an event may recommend to the Driver’s Divisional
Licensing Chairman that his or her Novice Permit be revoked.
4.4.4.A.1. The CS (or the Chair SOM) signs off the Novice Permit following
completion of the second satisfactory Regional race.
4.4.B.
The CS’ (or the SOM) refusal to sign off a Novice Permit is
GCR - 143
General
Appendix E. Chief Steward’s Powers
Appendix E. Chief Steward’s Powers
appealable to the driver’s Divisional Licensing Chairman.
4.4.5.C.
The CS may approve entry in the National portion of a
Regional/National race weekend for a driver who completes
license upgrade requirements during the Regional portion or
who receives a waiver from the driver’s Divisional Licensing
Chairman.
4.4.7.B.
The CS (or Chair SOM) signs off the Novice Permit following
the second satisfactory event, enabling a driver to complete
application for a Vintage Competition License.
5.1.
The CS is listed among the principal officials.
5.1.1.
There shall be a CS at every event.
5.1.3.
Minimum Grades of Licenses
A. National Championship Events - The Chief Steward shall be a
National Series Chief Steward.
B. Regional Events - the Chief Steward shall hold a Divisional Chief,
National Chief, or Series Chief Steward License.
C. Driver Schools - The Chief Steward shall be a National Chief
Steward.
5.1.5.
The Chief Steward shall have no plurality of duties.
5.2.1.A.
The CS shall, with the Race Chairman, determine the schedule,
draft the Supplementary Regulations, and assure that the Entry
Forms are printed and mailed.
5.2.1.B.
The CS shall receive a copy of the Insurance Certificate prior
to the beginning of the event.
5.3.
The CS and the Chief of Emergency Services oversee the activities of the Course Marshal.
5.4.4.C.
The CS, F&C Chief, Chief Medical Officer, Chief of ES, and
ACS-Safety agree on emergency dispatch procedures.
5.4.4.H.
The CS must specifically approve counter-race driving or towing.
5.5.2.
There shall be immediate communications among the CS, Race
Control, and the corner stations.
5.5.3.B.
The CS and other officials shall be informed of the course and
car conditions, and on-track situations via the communications
network.
5.5.3.C.
The communications network shall be used to convey information and instructions from the CS to the on-track emergency
vehicles, the corners, and the drivers.
5.7.1.C.
The Sound Control Chief shall advise the CS of sound readings.
5.7.2.A.
The CS need not find drivers to advise them of their sound
violations, however, he or she shall ensure that the location of
sound reading postings is published in the Supplemental Regulations or other official notification.
GCR - 144
5.8.2.
The CS oversees the activities of the Starter.
5.8.3.
The Starter controls the field by conveying CS orders while the
cars are on course.
5.8.4.
The Starter and the CS shall have immediate communication
with one another.
5.9.1.B.
The CS may request that the Scrutineer conduct inspections.
5.9.1.C.
The Scutineer shall report non-conforming cars to the CS.
5.9.2.C.
The CS may request reinspection of any car (beyond the
Annual), and may request special impounds.
5.9.3.C.
The CS may require impounding cars post-race beyond the top
three finishers.
5.9.3.D.
The CS may waive post-race impound at non-National events
prior to the race in the presence of the Chief of Tech.
5.10.2.C. The CS may waive the two-system T&S requirement when
there is insufficient staff. T&S protests will not be accepted.
5.11.1.
The CS may assign Driver Observers on course, whose activities are overseen by the CS, and to whom they report in writing
regarding all incidents or accidents witnessed.
5.11.3.A. The CS may assign Start, Finish, and Judges of Fact who shall
report directly to the CS.
5.12.4.
The CS may delegate all or part of his or her powers under
5.12.2.C, and 9.1.2. to the Compliance Checking Crew, who
are responsible to advise the CS of non-compliant cars.
6.1.1.B.
The CS shall approve the classification of cars; and shall not
approve if the proposed classification poses a hazard to safety
or an impediment to fair competition.
6.1.2.E.
The CS may approve gridding non-qualifying cars at the back
of the back.
6.1.3.
The CS may recommend the parallel column procedure to
establish the grid when conditions merit for oversubscribed
classes.
6.2.1.
The CS delegates control (“Starter’s Orders”) of the field until
the green flag is displayed.
6.2.2.A.
The CS initiates the five minute warning to the grid.
6.2.2.D.
The CS may authorize a second unscored pace lap.
6.2.2.J.3. The CS may direct, following a race start, that a driver has
false started be black-flagged and held in the pits for up to one
minute. This, in addition to other penalties.
6.2.2.K.
The CS may direct the Starter to brief the front row prior to a
race.
GCR - 145
General
Appendix E. Chief Steward’s Powers
Appendix E. Chief Steward’s Powers
6.2.4.
The CS may allow alternate entries or push started cars to
join the field at the back, and he or she shall direct whether
the entry is during the pace lap or from the pit exit after the
green.
6.3.1.
The CS is responsible for the pace cars. He or she shall approve
the driver and right seat.
6.3.2.
The CS may use a safety car to control the field in emergency
situations and in restarts.
6.4.
The CS may stop a competition in any of the following ways:
A. Black Flag “ALL”
B. Red flag
D. Checkered Flag, if fifty (50) percent or more of a race scheduled
time or distance has been completed
6.5.
The CS may restart a competition in any one of the following
ways:
A. Complete restart according to original grid positions.
B. Single file restart according to the last completely scored lap.
C. Restart from tape or lap chart best fitting conditions.
6.6.
The CS may use the Black Flag “ALL” procedure to stop a
race less than fifty (50) percent complete to give competitors
fifteen (15) minutes to change to rain tires (at their discretion).
6.8.4.
The CS must approve counter-race driving or towing.
6.9.3.
The CS or the Supplemental Regulations must approve more
than 4 hot pit crew.
6.9.9.
The CS or the Supplemental Regulations must approve fueling
in the pits or on the grid.
6.10.2.
The CS or the Supplemental Regulations must approve a car
returning to the course from the paddock during a race.
6.11.2.F. The CS or the Supplemental Regulations will define where a
car stops in the pits upon receiving an Open Black Flag with a
number board.
6.11.2.F. The CS will direct the Black Flag “ALL” procedure when needed.
6.11.2.I. The CS will direct the Red Flag procedure when needed.
7.2.F.
The CS must receive notification from any driver on probation
before that driver enters the course the first time.
7.4.B.
Penalties imposed by the CS shall not incur automatic penalty
points, but the SOM may assign points when a CSA is protested
and the CSA is upheld.
8.1.2.
The CS may file a Chief Steward’s Action describing a breach
and the action taken.
8.1.3.
The CS may file a Request for Action with the SOM describing
GCR - 146
a breach, but he or she shall not file an RFA for a single breach
for which he has already imposed a penalty.
8.3.2.
The CS shall receive protests ind shall promptly forward them
to the Chairman SOM.
8.3.2.B.6. The CS shall initiate actions no later than 30 minutes following
the posting of race results, except for RFAs resulting from
post-race technical inspection.
8.3.3.B.
Items beyond the scope of a mechanical protest found noncompliant during the inspection shall be forwarded to the CS.
8.4.1.
The CS shall have the right to appeal any decision or penalty
imposed by the SOM.
8.4.3.A.
The CS must receive all fines and/or competition licenses
before an appeal will be heard.
9.2.1.H.
The CS may waive deviations from safety and compliance
requirements for a car for an event.
9.3.31.
The CS may direct that the taillight on formula or sports racers
be illuminated.
Ax.D.5.4. The CS will determine the order of single car qualifying at an
oval event.
Ax.D.5.5.A.2. The CS will announce the number of pace laps before
the start of an oval race.
Ax.D.5.5.B.2. The CS may use a safety car at an oval race, or may
designate the lead car to pace the field safely to a restart or to
slow the field for the safety car.
GCR - 147
General
Appendix E. Chief Steward’s Powers
Appendix F. Index
APPENDIX F.
INDEX
A
Abandoning 11
Aborted Start 54, 56
ABS. See Anti-lock Brakes
Accident
Involvement in 5
Reports 51
Accumulators 77
ACCUS 106
Advertisements 77
Affidavit 29, 65
Air Bottles 60
Alcoholic Beverages 4
Ambulance 35
Annual Tech 41
Anti-lock Brakes 78
Appeals 69
Appearance
Car 77
Money 18
Appointments 9, 32
ASN 8, 27, 75
Assistance
Accepting 58
During Race 59
During Restarts 59
Assistant Chief Steward-Safety 32, 34, 51
Assumed Names 31
Authorized Events 3
Automatic Penalties 64
Awards 17, 18, 57,64
B
Ballast 78
Batteries 78
Black Flag 61
Station 38
Blocking 58
Bodywork
Loss of 89
Bond 67
Brake Lights 88
Brakes 78
Breach of Rules 75
C
Camera Mounts 78
Canceling 11
Car 106
Category 107
Carburetor 53, 78
Catch Tanks 90
Chain Guards 90
Chairman - SOM 26, 28, 29, 33, 48, 66, 71, 76
Duties 48
GCR - 148
Chairman of the Club Racing Board 10, 77
Change of Division 19
Checkered Flag 57, 61
Late 57
Chief Course 32, 34
Chief Flag 32, 37
Chief Grid 32
Chief Medical Official 32, 34, 36
Chief Observer 32, 47
Chief of Communications 32, 37
Chief of Timing and Scoring 43, 65, 86
Chief Paddock 29
Chief Pit 32
Chief Registrar 32, 38 See also Registrar
Chief Scrutineer 32, 41, 76
Chief Sound Control 32, 38
Chief Starter 32, 40
Chief Steward 3, 9, 13, 24, 32, 42, 49, 53, 63, 66, 143
Duties 49
Powers 50
Request for Action 66
Chief Technical and Safety Inspector. See also Scrutineer
Class 107
Classes 73
Combining 14
Minimum Participation Level 74
Optional Regional-Only 74
Oversubscribed 52
Co-Driver 18
Communications 36, 139
Club Racing Board 106
Compliance Checking Crew 51
Conduct 3, 58
Conflict of Interest 4
Control Line 44, 56
Corner Stations 37
Counter-Race Direction 36, 58
Course 13
Approval 13
Measurement of 138
Court of Appeals 70, 71
Crew 3, 22, 59, 63
Cryogenic Treatment 78
D
Dangerous Driving 3
Data Collection Devices 78
Dead Heats 19, 57
Decals 41, 83, 87
Definitions 105
Disqualification 63, 72
Double National 7, 10
Driver 5, 9, 19, 22, 26, 39, 41, 63, 66
Conduct 3, 58
Definition 107
Observers 47
Review 5
Restraint System 79
Safety Equipment 81
GCR - 149
General
Appendix F. Index
Appendix F. Index
Seat 90
Suit 78, 81
Driver School 9, 10
Private 24
Requirements 24
Drugs 4
E
Emergency 34
Equipment 35
Operations 36
Personnel 34
Plan 36
Entrant 3, 22, 41, 63, 66, 69, 107
Entries 21, 30
Entry Form 14
Falsification 30
Withdrawal 31
Entry List 16
Event 7, 9, 107
Classification of 7
FIA 106
Interdivisional 20, 32
National Championship 7, 10
Non-Speed 107
Private 17
Regional 8
Restricted 8
SCCA 7
Speed 107
Executive Steward 5, 9, 13, 32, 34, 53, 64, 106
F
False Start 54
FIA 1, 8, 27, 74, 79, 81, 85, 98, 106
Final Results 46
Fines 30, 63, 70
Finishers 57
Fire System 82, 118
Fire Truck 35
Firewall 83, 118
FISA 106
Flagging & Communications 36
Equipment 38
Oval Racing 139
Flags 60, 139
Fuel 84, 119
Fuel Cell 84, 85, 119
Fuel Sample 84
Fueling 60
G
Gas Cylinders 60
Gloves 38, 81
Grid 52
Grouping 7, 14
GCR - 150
Appendix F. Index
General
H
Hand Controls 77
Hand Signals 58
Helmet 41, 78, 81
Historic 9
Homologation 76, 120
Hospital 36
Hot Pit 59
I
Identification Markings 86
Impound 42
Insurance 15, 33
Interdivisional Championship 20, 68
J
Judges 47
L
Lap Charts 43
Lap Record 58
Late Starters 55
Licenses 22
ASN Canada 27
Competition 22, 23
Fees 69
FIA 27
Minors 24, 27
National Competition 26
Novice Permit 23
Official 22, 29
Regional Competition 25
Revocation 25
Vintage Competition 27
Licensing Specialties
Officials 22, 29, 32
Lights 62, 88
Logbook 26, 29
Vehicle 41, 43, 64, 67, 75
Logo - SCCA 77, 86
M
Master Switch 89
Measurement Standards 138
Media 47
Medical 4, 5, 23, 34
Requirements 23
Medical Personnel 34
Minors 17, 22, 23, 27, 30, 59
Mirrors 89
N
Narcotics 4
National Champion 20
Defending 20
National Championship Racing 7, 75
National Competition License 26
Novice Permit 8, 22, 23
GCR - 151
Appendix F. Index
Numbers 86
O
Observer Reports 48
Observers 47
Off-Course Excursions 58
Official Review 5
Officials 3, 29, 32, 47
Minimum Grades Required 32
Required 32
Oil Lines 77
Oval Track Racing 139
P
Pace Car 55, 141
Pace Lap 53, 141
Paddock 60
Participant 107
Participation Level74
Passengers 59
Passenger Seat90
Passing 58
Patch 86, 87
Penalties 63
Automatic 64
Pets 3
Photo ID 30
Physical Examination 23
Physician 34
Pits 59
Points 18, 19, 64, 71
Penalty (see Penalities)
Postponement 11
Practice 7, 140
Press Officer 47
Probation 28, 49, 63
Program 17
Protest 66, 67, 76
Protest Fee 66, 69, 72
Provisional Results 46, 70
Push Starts 53
Q
Qualifying 7, 52, 140
R
Race Chairman 33
Race Log 37
Racing Room 58, 142
Rain Racing Procedure 56
Reckless Driving 3
Red Flag 56, 61, 140
Region of Record 19
Regional Competition License 25
Regional-Only Classes 74
Registrar 32, 38
Reprimand 63, 64
Request for Action (RFA) 66
GCR - 152
Appendix F. Index
General
Retiring 60
Restarts 56, 142
Restraint System 79
Results 17, 46, 65, 70
Roll Cages 90, 127, 155
Showroom Stock 157
Touring 159
GT 93, 161
Production 93, 164, 169
Formula 100
Sports Racers 100
Rolling Start 53, 56
Rule
Changes 1
Interpretation 66
Rules of the Road 58, 139
Runoffs 20
S
Safety Car. See Pace Car
Safety Car Procedure 55
Safety Inspection 41, 77
Sanctions 11
Scaffolding 13
Scales 43
Scattershields 90
Scheduling 9
Scoring 43, 45, 139
Scrutineer 41
Seat 90
Seat Belts 79
Self-Starter 59, 129
Shoes 82
Shortened Race 57
Sound Control 38
Split Starts 54
Start
The 53
Starter 40, 53-57, 139
Stewards of the Meeting (SOM) 4, 15, 28, 33, 48, 64
Sunroofs 78
Supplementary Regulations 3, 8, 11, 12, 14, 30, 48, 50, 52, 59, 60,
62
Changes to 15
Definition 107
Required Contents 14
Steering Wheel Locks 91
Suspension 36, 49, 64, 65, 70, 72
T
Tapes
Scoring 45
Timing 44
Technical Inspection 41
Temporary Members 30
Ties 19
Timing 43, 139
Tire Warmers 52
Tires 91
GCR - 153
Appendix F. Index
Tow Fund 13
Towing Eyes 91
Track - Car 138
Traction Control 77
Transmissions
Automatic 77
Transponders 44
Trophies 18
U
Unsportsmanlike Conduct 3
V
Video Camera Mounts 78
Vintage 8, 9, 14, 27
Visibility 83, 89
W
Waivers 30, 107
Impound 42
Scheduling 10
Weight 42, 43, 76, 78, 91
Wheel Fans 91
Window Safety Nets 91
Window Straps 93
Windows 91
Windshield Clips 93
Wrecker 29, 35
Y
Yellow Flag 37, 44, 60, 140
GCR - 154
APPENDIX G. 2007 ROLL CAGE RULES
9.4.
DRIVER PROTECTION STRUCTURES
These general specifications are for all automobiles. Roll cages are required
in all automobiles.
Roll cages may be of two (2) designs, low front hoop (top of steering
wheel) or high front hoop (top of windshield). Specific installations are
subject to approval by the Technical and Safety Inspectors at each
event.
The Technical Staff of Club Racing shall have the responsibility to ensure
specification compliance with SCCA safety standards. To that end, the
Technical Staff of Club Racing may or may not accept alternate construction standards from any source that significantly vary from SCCA standards of protection.
9.4.1. BASIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A. The basic purpose of the roll cage is to protect the driver if the
car turns over, runs into an obstacle such as a guardrail or catch
fence, or is struck by another car. It shall be designed to withstand
compression forces from the weight of the car coming down on
the rollover structure and to take fore/aft and lateral loads resulting
from the car skidding along on its rollover structure.
B.
Forward braces and portions of the main hoop subject to contact by
the driver’s helmet (as seated normally and restrained by seatbelt/
shoulder harness) shall be padded with non-resilient material such
as Ethafoam® or Ensolite® with a minimum thickness of one-half
(1/2) inch. Padding meeting SFI spec 45.1 or FIA 8857-2001 is
strongly recommended.
C. No portion of the safety roll cage shall have an aerodynamic effect
by creating a vertical thrust.
D. Roll cage or chassis design shall prevent engine intrusion into the
driver compartment.
E.
Material:
1. Seamless, or DOM (Drawn Over Mandrel) mild steel tubing
(SAE 1010, 1020, 1025) or equivalent, or alloy steel tubing
(SAE, 4130) shall be used for all roll cage structures. Proof of
use of alloy steel is the responsibility of the entrant.
2.
Minimum tubing sizes (all Formula, Sports Racing, GT, and
Production Category automobiles, and all automobiles registered prior to June 1, 1994) for all required roll cage elements
(All dimensions in inches):
Vehicle Weight
Without Driver
Up to 1500 lbs.
1500-2500 lbs.
Over 2500 lbs.
Mild Steel
Material
1.375 x .095
1.50 x .095
1.50 x .120
1.625 x .120
1.75 x .095
GCR - 155
Alloy Steel
1.375 x .080
1.375 x .095
1.50 x .095
General
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
3.
Minimum tubing sizes for (all Showroom Stock, Touring and
Improved Touring Category auto-mobiles registered after June
1, 1994) for all required roll cage elements (All dimensions in
inches):
Up to 1500 lbs.
1501-2200 lbs.
2201-3000 lbs.
1.375 x .095 DOM
1.500 x .095 DOM
1.500 x .120 DOM
1.625 x .120 DOM
1.750 x .095 DOM
(American Sedans may construct to these specs
3001-4000 lbs.
Over 4000 lbs.
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
regardless of weight.)
1.750 x .120 DOM / Seamless / Alloy
2.000 x .120 DOM / Seamless / Alloy
Note: ERW tubing is not permitted in any car registered with SCCA after
1/01/2003.
Main hoop: 4 bends max., totaling 180º ± 10º
Front hoop: 4 bends max. or
Front downtubes: 2 bends max.
Rear hoop supports: No bends.
If any of the above bend requirements cannot be met, all components of the roll cage shall be fabricated from the tubing size(s)
listed for the next heavier category of automobiles.
F.
4.
For purposes of determining tubing sizes, the vehicle weight is
as raced without fuel and driver. The minus tolerance for wall
thickness should not be less than .010” below the nominal
thickness. Improved Touring roll cage tubing size are to be
calculated based on the published vehicle weight minus 180
lbs.
5.
An inspection hole at least 3/16 inch diameter, but no greater
than 1/4 inch diameter shall be drilled in a non-critical area of
the front and rear hoop as well as the one of the supplemental
braces to facilitate verification of wall thickness. Formula Cars
and Sports Racers with alternate roll structures are not required
to have inspection holes, the wall thickness will be indicated
on the back of the homologation certificate.
General Construction
1. One (1) continuous length of tubing shall be used for the main
hoop member with smooth continuous bends and no evidence
of crimping or wall failure. The radius of bends in the roll cage
hoop (measured at centerline of tubing) shall not be less than
three (3) times the diameter of the tubing. Whenever possible,
the roll cage hoop should start from the floor of the car, and, in
the case of tube frame construction, be attached to the chassis
tubes by means of gussets or sheet metal webs with support
tubes beneath the joints to distribute the loads. It is recommended that gussets be used.
2.
Welding shall conform to American Welding Society D1.1:2002,
Structural Welding Code, Steel Chapter 10, Tubular Structures.
Whenever D1.1 refers to “the Engineer” this shall be interpreted to be the owner of the vehicle. Welds shall be continuous around the entire tubular structure.
GCR - 156
All welds shall be visually inspected and shall be acceptable if
the following conditions are satisfied:
3.
a.
The weld shall have no cracks.
b.
Thorough fusion shall exist between weld metal and base
metal.
c.
All craters shall be filled to the cross section of the weld.
d.
Undercut shall be no more than 0.01 inch deep.
Aluminum bronze or silicon bronze welding technique is
permitted, but extreme care shall be used in preparation of
parts before bronze welding and in the design of the attaching
joints.
9.4.2. SHOWROOM STOCK ROLL CAGE
A. Full width roll cages are required in all Showroom Stock automobiles. Roll cages installed in Showroom Stock automobiles are
for driver safety and shall be contained entirely within the driver/
passenger compartment without removing any panel or accessory
not specifically authorized in these rules. The carpet/padding may
be cut around the mounting base plates.
B.
1.
The cage need not be removable. It shall be bolted and/or
welded to the car.
2.
It shall attach to the car at no more than eight (8) points,
consisting of the basic cage with six (6) points and two optional
braces.
3.
The forward part of the cage shall be mounted to the floor of
the vehicle. In addition, if the two optional braces referred to in
item 2, above are utilized they shall be mounted, one on either
side, from the forward section of the cage to the firewall or
front fender wells (see figure 16). No braces shall pass through
the front firewall.
4.
Rollcage gussets shall be no thicker than .125”. A maximum of
two gussets per rollcage joint are allowed.
Removable roll cages and braces shall be very carefully designed
and constructed to be at least as strong as a permanent installation. If one tube fits inside another tube to facilitate removal, the
removable portion shall fit tightly and shall bottom by design and
at least two (2) bolts shall be used to secure each such joint. The
telescope section shall be at least eight (8) inches in length except
forthe door bars which shall be a minimum of four (4) inches in
length. Minimum bolt diameter is 3/8 inches.
C. For tubing sizes for front and main hoop and all required bracing,
see 9.4.1.E.3.
GCR - 157
General
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
FIGURE 16
D. Main Roll Hoop:
1. Main roll hoop (behind the driver) shall extend the full width
of the driver/passenger compartment and shall be as near the
roof as possible. It shall incorporate a diagonal lateral brace
to prevent lateral distortion of the hoop (See figure 16). Any
number of additional reinforcing bars are permitted within the
structure of the cage. It is required that the horizontal brace
behind the driver’s seat (described in Section 9.4.2.J.) continue
from the diagonal to the passenger side main hoop upright or
that a second diagonal be installed in the main hoop.
E.
F.
Front Roll Hoops:
1. The front or side hoops shall follow the line of the front pillars
to the top of the windshield (as close to the roof as possible)
then horizontally to the rear attaching to the main hoop. These
two side hoops are to be connected together by a tube over
the top of the windshield, or
2.
A front hoop following the line of the front pillars and connected
by horizontal bars to the main hoop on each side at the top
may be used, or
3.
A top “halo” hoop following the roof line from the main hoop
to the windshield with forward down tubes following the line
of the front pillars to the floor.
4.
The front or side hoops may extend through the dash pad. This
includes the forward part of the door panel if it is an extension
of the dash panel.
5.
One (1) bar is recommended in a horizontal plane between
forward cage braces in the dash area.
Bracing:
GCR - 158
The main roll hoop shall have two braces extending to the rear attaching
to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near as possible
to the top of the main hoop not more than six (6) inches below the top
and at an included angle of at least thirty (30) degrees. On cars where
the rear window/bulkhead prohibits the installation of rear braces (e.g.,
Honda del Sol), the main hoop shall be attached to the body by plates
welded to the cage and bolted to the stock shoulder harness mounting
points. This installation design must also incorporate a diagonal bar
connecting the top of the main hoop to the lower front passenger side
mounting point (“Petty Bar”).
1.
Rear hoop braces may pass through the factory bulkhead or
panel separating the driver/passenger compartment from the
trunk/cargo area/, fuel tank/fuel cell area, provided the bulkhead
is sealed around said cage braces. Metal tape may be used to
seal the openings between the bulkhead and the tubes.
G. Side Protection:
Two (2) side tubes connecting the front and rear hoops across both
door openings are mandatory. Door side tubes may extend into the
door. NASCAR-style side protection, or one bar bisecting another to
form an “X” is permitted. The door window glass, window operating
mechanism, inner door trim panel, armrest, map pockets, and inside
door latch/lock operating mechanism may be removed and the inner
door structural panel may be modified, but not removed to facilitate this
type of side protection. The stock side impact beam and the outside
door latch/lock operating mechanism shall not be removed or modified.
H. Mounting Plates:
1. Each mounting plate shall be at least .080 thick if welded and
3/16” thick (with appropriate backing plates) if bolted. There
shall be a minimum of three (3) bolts per mounting plate if
bolted.
2.
Each mounting plate shall not be greater than 100 square
inches and shall be no greater than twelve (12) inches or less
than two (2) inches on a side.
3.
Whenever possible, mounting plates shall extend onto a vertical
section of the structure (such as a rocker box).
4.
The mounting plate may be multi-angled but must not exceed
these dimensions in a flat plane.
5.
Any number of tubes may attach to the plate or each other.
I. Hardware: (Bolts)
All hardware shall be Grade 5 or better. 5/16” minimum diameter.
J.
In order to provide a secure seat back support a section of tubing
equal to the roll bar shall be installed horizontally from the main
hoop upright to the diagonal brace. This tube shall be no higher
than shoulder height.
9.4.3. TOURING ROLL CAGE
A. All cars registered after 1/1/03 shall conform to these roll cage
rules. Effective 1/1/08 all Touring cars shall conform to these roll
cage rules. Full width roll cages are required in all Touring automobiles. Roll cages installed in Touring automobiles are for driver
GCR - 159
General
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
safety and shall be contained entirely within the driver/passenger
compartment without removing any panel or accessory not specifically authorized in these rules. The carpet/padding may be cut
around the mounting base plates.
B.
1.
The cage shall be welded to the car, and all mandatory tubes
shall use welded joint construction.
2.
It shall attach to the car at no more than eight (8) points, with
the forward section of the cage attaching to the front bulkhead
or front fender wells (see figure 16).
3.
The front down tubes of the cage shall be mounted to the floor
of the vehicle.
For tubing sizes for front hoop, main hoop, and all required bracing,
see Section 9.4.1.E.3. It is recommended that gussets (flat steel,
tubing, etc.) be utilized to strengthen the joints of all required cage
elements.
C. Main Roll Hoop:
1. Main roll hoop (behind the driver) shall extend the full width
of the driver/passenger compartment and shall be as near the
roof as possible. It shall incorporate a diagonal lateral brace
to prevent lateral distortion of the hoop (See figure 16). Any
number of additional tubes/braces are permitted within the
structure of the cage. It is required that the horizontal brace
behind the driver’s seat (described in Section 9.4.2.J.) continue
from the diagonal to the passenger side main hoop upright or
that a second diagonal be installed in the main hoop.
D. Front Roll Hoops:
1. The front or side hoops shall follow the line of the front pillars
to the top of the windshield (as close to the roof as possible)
then horizontally to the rear attaching to the main hoop. These
two side hoops are to be connected together by a tube over
the top of the windshield, or
2.
A front hoop following the line of the front pillars and connected
by horizontal bars to the main hoop on each side at the top
may be used, or
3.
A top “halo” hoop following the roofline from the main hoop to
the windshield with forward down tubes following the line of
the front pillars to the floor.
4.
The front or side hoops may extend through the dash pad. This
includes the forward part of the door panel if it is an extension
of the dash panel.
5.
One (1) bar is required in a horizontal plane between forward
cage braces in the dash area.
E. Bracing:
The main roll hoop shall have two braces extending to the rear attaching
to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near as possible
to the top of the main hoop but, not more than six (6) inches below
the top and at an included angle of at least thirty (30) degrees. On
cars where the rear window/bulkhead prohibits the installation of rear
braces (e.g., Honda del Sol), the main hoop shall be attached to the
GCR - 160
body by plates welded to the cage and bolted to the stock shoulder
harness mounting points. This installation design must also incorporate
a diagonal bar connecting the top of the main hoop to the lower front
passenger side mounting point (“Petty Bar”).
1.
Rear hoop braces may pass through the factory bulkhead or
panel separating the driver/passenger compartment from the
trunk/cargo area/, fuel tank/fuel cell area, provided the bulkhead
is sealed around said cage braces. Metal tape may be used to
seal the openings between the bulkhead and the tubes.
F. Side Protection:
Two side protection tubes (door bars) are mandatory on each side of the
car. NASCAR-style side protection is required on the driver’s side and
is optional on the passenger side. The driver’s window safety net may
be mounted to this side protection and the top cage tube. NASCARstyle side protection tubes shall extend into the door. The door window
glass, window operating mechanism, inner door trim panel, armrest,
map pockets, and inside door latch/lock operating mechanism may be
removed only if it interfered with the installation of NASCAR-style side
protection tubes. The inner door structural panel may be modified, but
not removed to facilitate this type of side protection. The stock side
impact beam and the outside door latch/lock operating mechanism shall
not be removed or modified.
G. Mounting Plates:
1. Each mounting plate shall be at least .080 thick.
2.
Each mounting plate shall not be greater than 100 square
inches and shall be no greater than twelve (12) inches or less
than two (2) inches on a side.
3.
Whenever possible, mounting plates shall extend onto a vertical
section of the structure (such as a rocker box).
4.
The mounting plate may be multi-angled but must not exceed
these dimensions in a flat plane.
5.
Any number of tubes may attach to the plate or each other.
9.4.4. GT ROLL CAGE
All GT automobiles shall have full width roll cages. Open automobiles
without full windshields may have a low front hoop. All closed automobiles shall have full height (top of windshield) front hoops.
A. Main and Front Hoops
1. Main Hoop:
The main hoop (behind the driver) shall be full width of the cockpit.
The main hoop shall be as near to the roof as possible on closed
automobiles and not less than two (2) inches above the driver’s
helmet on open automobiles, with the driver seated normally and
restrained by seat belt/shoulder harness. Low front hoops shall be
cowl height, or at a minimum, a straight line drawn from the top
of the main hoop to the top of the front hoop shall pass over the
driver’s helmet.
2.
Front Hoop:
a. The front hoop shall follow the line of the front pillars to
the top of the windshield and be connected, by horizontal
GCR - 161
General
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
bars, to the top of the main hoop on each side (as close to
the roof as possible).
b.
Two (2) side hoops following the line of the front pillars to
the top of the main hoop may be used. These two (2) side
hoops are to be connected by a horizontal bar over the top
of the windshield. (See figure 17), or
c.
A top “halo” hoop following the roof line from the main
hoop to the windshield with forward down tubes following
the line of the front pillars to the floor.
d.
Double “ear-type” joints are allowed, provided that they
are fully welded at all mating surfaces.
FIGURE 17
3. Fabrication:
The main hoop shall be one continuous length of tubing with
smooth continuous bends with no evidence of crimping or wall
failure. The minimum radius for all bends shall be three (3) times
the tube diameter measured from the tube centerline. Whenever
possible, the roll hoops should start from the floor of the automobile, and, in the case of tube frame construction, be attached to
the tubes by means of gussets or metal webs in order to distribute
the loads. On automobiles of frameless construction, consideration should be given to using a vertical roll hoop of 360 degrees
completely around the inside of the automobile and attached with
suitable mounting plates.
B. Bracing
All required bracing shall be the same diameter and wall thickness as
listed in 9.4.1.E, Material. (Main and Front Hoops)
All main hoops shall incorporate a diagonal brace (same diameter and
wall thickness as main hoop) to prevent lateral distortion of the main
hoop.
1. Main Hoop Bracing:
Main hoops shall have two (2) braces extending to the rear,
GCR - 162
attaching to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near
as possible to the top of the main hoop (not more than six (6)
inches below the top) and at an included angle of at least thirty
(30) degrees. Open cars with a low front hoop shall have (Effective 1/1/99) two braces extending from the main hoop to the low
front hoop. These braces shall be mounted no lower than six inches
below the top of the main hoop as illustrated in figure 18.
FIGURE 18
2. Front Hoop Bracing:
There shall be two (2) braces extending forward from the front
hoop to protect the driver’s legs. It is recommended that this
bracing extend to the bulkhead in front of the driver’s feet; but, in
any case, it shall be integrated into the frame or chassis to provide
substantial support for the front hoop.
C. Side Protection - Open and Closed Automobiles
1. The minimum side protection shall consist of a side tube
connecting the front and rear hoops across both the door openings. Additionally, there shall also be either a diagonal tube
from the front hoop to the rear hoop bisecting the door opening
below the horizontal side tube, or not less than two (2) horizontal side tubes. Additional tubing may be added. NASCARstyle door bars are recommended.
2.
In automobiles with full roll cage installations including side
bars, interior door panels may be altered, replaced, or removed.
When door panels are removed, all sharp edges or projections
shall be protected.
D. Mounting Plates:
The thickness of mounting plates bolted to the structure of the car shall
not be less than the thickness of the roll hoop or brace that they attach
and shall be backed-up with a plate of equal dimensions on the opposite
side of the panel, with the plates through-bolted together. A minimum
of three (3) bolts per mounting plate is required for bolted mounting
plates. All hardware (bolts) shall be Grade 5 or better with 5/16” diameter minimum. Mounting plates welded to the structure of the car shall
not be less than .080” thick. Whenever possible the mounting plates
should extend onto a vertical section of the structure (such as door
GCR - 163
General
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
pillar).
9.4.6. PRODUCTION ROLL CAGE
All automobiles shall have full width roll cages. Roll cages may be of
two (2) designs, low front hoop or high front hoop. Specific installations
are subject to approval by the Technical and Safety Inspectors at each
event. The Technical Staff of Club Racing, with the concurrence of the
Club Racing Board, shall have the responsibility to ensure specification
compliance with SCCA safety standards. Alternate structures which do
not meet the following criteria will not be considered unless they are
eligible under Section 9.4.6.D.
A. Main Hoop
For all cars, the main hoop (behind the driver) shall be full width of the
cockpit.
1. Closed Automobiles:
The main hoop shall be as near to the roof as possible on closed
automobiles
2.
Open top Automobiles:
a. The main hoop shall be not less than two (2) inches above
the driver’s helmet on open automobiles, with the driver
seated normally and restrained by seat belt/shoulder
harness as illustrated in figure 18.
b.
Open top automobiles without a windshield may use an
asymmetric main hoop provided:
i. The main hoop shall be full height (over the driver) for
at least 50% of the width of the hoop as illustrated in
figure 19.
ii.
On the passenger side of the car, the hoop shall be at
least as high as the top of the rear corner of the door
as illustrated in figure 19.
FIGURE 19
B. Front Hoop
For all cars, the front hoop shall be full width of the cockpit.
1. Closed Automobiles and open top automobiles with a windshield:
a.
The front hoop shall follow the line of the front pillars to
the top of the windshield and be connected, by horizontal
bars, to the top of the main hoop.
GCR - 164
b.
Instead of a single front hoop, two (2) side hoops following
the line of the front pillars to the top of the main hoop may
be used. These two (2) side hoops are to be connected by
a horizontal bar over the top of the windshield. (See figure
17)
c.
Another option is a top “halo” hoop following the roof line
from the main hoop to the windshield with forward down
tubes following the line of the front pillars to the floor.
d.
Double “ear-type” joints are allowed, provided that they
are fully welded at all mating surfaces.
e.
It is recommended the hoop extend to the belly pan. If
not, it shall be attached to the chassis with gussets and
triangulation in order to spread the loads.
f.
It is recommended that the vertical bars of the front hoop
be connected by a horizontal bar at a point above the driver’s legs
g.
All front hoop options (a, b, c) shall be connected to the
main hoop in the following manner.
i. On open top cars, attachments shall be no more than
six inches below the top of the main hoop.
ii.
2.
Open top Automobiles without a windshield and with a high
front hoop design. Front hoop requirements for open top automobiles with a windshield are to be followed with the following
exceptions.
a. Since the windshield frame is to be removed with the
windshield, there is no requirement to follow the line of
the A-pillar.
b.
3.
On closed top cars, attachments shall be as close to
the roof as possible.
Since there is no windshield for the hoop to be above, the
front hoop shall be above the driver’s line of sight.
Open top Automobiles without a windshield and with a low
front hoop design
a. Low front hoops shall be cowl height, or at a minimum, a
straight line drawn from the top of the main hoop to the
top of the front hoop shall pass over the driver’s helmet
(See figure 18).
b.
Open cars with a low front hoop shall have two braces
extending from the main hoop to the low front hoop.
These braces shall be mounted no lower than six inches
below the top of the main and front hoops as illustrated in
figure 18.
c.
Fabrication - Open and Closed Automobiles
The main hoop shall be one continuous length of tubing
with smooth continuous bends and no evidence of crimping
or wall failure. The minimum radius for all bends shall be
three (3) times the tube diameter measured from the tube
centerline. Whenever possible, the roll hoops should start
from the floor of the automobile, and, in the case of tube
GCR - 165
General
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
frame construction, be attached to the tubes by means of
gussets or metal webs in order to distribute the loads. On
automobiles of frameless or uni-body construction, consideration should be given to using a vertical roll hoop of 360
degrees completely around the inside of the automobile
and attached with suitable mounting plates.
C. Bracing - Open and Closed Automobiles
All required bracing shall be the same diameter and wall thickness as
listed in 9.4.1.E, Material. (Main and Front Hoop)
All main hoops shall incorporate a diagonal brace (same diameter and
wall thickness as main hoop) to prevent lateral distortion of the main
hoop. The brace shall either be in the plane of the main hoop or extend
from the top of one rear brace (see figure 20) to the bottom of the
opposite brace. In the case of braces in the plane of the main hoop, the
brace must be attached at both ends to the main hoop, span at least
50% of the main hoop, and at least 75% of the height of the main
hoop.
FIGURE 20
1. Main Hoop Bracing
Main hoops shall have two (2) braces extending to the rear,
attaching to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near
as possible to the top of the main hoop (not more than six (6)
inches below the top) and at an included angle of at least thirty (30)
degrees. Rear braces may penetrate required bodywork provided
the resulting hole serves no other function, and the holes are sealed
around the braces.
2. Removable Bracing
Removable bracing shall incorporate connectors of the double lug,
tapered, or muff-type as shown in figures 14 and 15. The doublelug type shall include a doubler, gusset, or capping arrangement so
as to avoid distortion or excessive strain caused by welding.
GCR - 166
3. Front Hoop Bracing
There shall be two (2) braces extending forward from the front
hoop to brace the front hoop and protect the driver’s legs. It is
recommended that this bracing extend to the bulkhead in front
of the driver’s feet; but, in any case, it shall be integrated into
the frame or chassis to provide substantial support for the front
hoop. Front braces may penetrate required bodywork provided the
resulting hole serves no other function, and the holes are sealed
around the braces.
D. Exceptions
When it is manifestly impractical or unsafe to construct and install a
roll structure meeting the minimum requirements as set forth above, an
alternate design roll structure may be submitted to the SCCA Technical
Staff who may, in a proper case, accept such alternate roll structure
design on a specific case by case basis.
E.
Side Protection - Open and Closed Automobiles
1. The minimum side protection shall consist of a horizontal side
tube connecting the front and rear hoops across both the door
openings. Additionally, there shall also be either a diagonal
tube from the front hoop to the rear hoop bisecting the door
opening below the horizontal side tube, or not less than two
(2) horizontal side tubes. Additional tubing may be added.
NASCAR-style door bars are recommended.
2.
F.
In automobiles with full roll cage installations including side
bars, interior door panels may be altered, replaced, or removed.
When door panels are removed, all sharp edges or projections
shall be protected.
Mounting Plates:
1. Bolt In cages.
The thickness of mounting plates bolted to the structure of the car
shall not be less than the thickness of the roll hoop or brace that
they attach and shall be backed-up with a plate of equal dimensions on the opposite side of the panel, with the plates throughbolted together. A minimum of three (3) bolts per mounting plate
is required for bolted mounting plates. All hardware (bolts) shall be
Grade 5 or better with 5/16” diameter minimum.
2. Welded in cages.
Mounting plates welded to the structure of the car shall not be
less than .080” thick. Whenever possible the mounting plates
should extend onto a vertical section of the structure (such as door
pillar).
9.4.7. APPENDAGES
The following procedures are approved for modification to roll bars/cages
that do not meet the two (2) inch required minimum: The old main hoop
may be cut off near the chassis mounting and a new main hoop of equal
tube size or a section of equal tubing size may be added, and inner tube(s)
must be used to mate all sections together. All braces must be minimum
distance from top of hoop per Section 9.4. All welding for this modification must be arc welded (min.). The inner tube(s) must be rosette welded
three (3) places near top and bottom, see figure 21.
GCR - 167
General
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
Appendix G. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
FIGURE 21
GCR - 168
APPENDIX H. 2004 PRODUCTION CATEGORY ROLL CAGE RULES
18.
PRODUCTION ROLL CAGES
All Production Category automobiles shall have full width roll cages. Open
automobiles without full windshields may have a low front hoop. All
closed automobiles shall have full height (top of windshield) front hoops.
Roll cages may be of two (2) designs, low front hoop (top of steering
wheel) or high front hoop (top of windshield). Specific installations are
subject to approval by the Technical and Safety Inspectors at each
event.
The Technical Staff of Club Racing shall have the responsibility to ensure
specification compliance with SCCA safety standards. To that end, the
Technical Staff of Club Racing may or may not accept alternate construction standards from any source that significantly vary from SCCA standards of protection.
18.1. BASIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
1. The basic purpose of the roll cage is to protect the driver if the
car turns over, runs into an obstacle such as a guardrail or catch
fence, or is struck by another car. It shall be designed to withstand
compression forces from the weight of the car coming down on
the rollover structure and to take fore/aft and lateral loads resulting
from the car skidding along on its rollover structure.
2.
Forward braces and portions of the main hoop subject to contact by
the driver’s helmet (as seated normally and restrained by seatbelt/
shoulder harness) shall be padded with non-resilient material such
as Ethafoam® or Ensolite®, or other similar material with a minimum
thickness of one-half (1/2) inch. Padding meeting SFI spec 45.1 is
recommended.
3.
No portion of the safety roll cage shall have an aerodynamic effect
by creating a vertical thrust.
4.
Roll cage or chassis design shall prevent engine intrusion into the
driver compartment.
5.
Material:
A. Seamless, or DOM (Drawn Over Mandrel) mild steel tubing (SAE
1010, 1020, 1025) or equivalent, or alloy steel tubing (SAE,
4130) shall be used for all roll cage structures. Proof of use of
alloy steel is the responsibility of the entrant.
B.
Minimum tubing sizes
dimensions in inches):
Vehicle Weight
Without Driver
Up to 1500 lbs.
1500-2500 lbs.
Over 2500 lbs.
for all required roll cage elements (All
Material
Mild Steel
Alloy Steel
1.375x.095
1.375x.080
1.50x.095
1.375x.095
1.50x.120
1.50x.095
1.625x.120
1.75x.095
C. For purposes of determining tubing sizes, the vehicle weight is
as raced without fuel and driver. The minus tolerance for wall
thickness should not be less than .010” below the nominal
GCR - 169
General
Appendix H. 2004 Production Roll Cage Rules
Appendix H. 2004 Production Roll Cage Rules
thickness.
D. An inspection hole at least 3/16 inch diameter, but no greater
than 1/4 inch diameter shall be drilled in a non-critical area of
all tubes with a specified size to facilitate verification of wall
thickness.
6.
General Construction
A. One (1) continuous length of tubing shall be used for the main
hoop member with smooth continuous bends and no evidence
of crimping or wall failure. The radius of bends in the roll cage
hoop (measured at centerline of tubing) shall not be less than
three (3) times the diameter of the tubing. Whenever possible,
the roll cage hoop should start from the floor of the car, and, in
the case of tube frame construction, be attached to the chassis
tubes by means of gussets or sheet metal webs with support
tubes beneath the joints to distribute the loads. It is recommended that gussets be used.
B.
Welding shall conform to American Welding Society D1.1:2002,
Structural Welding Code, Steel Chapter 10, Tubular Structures. Whenever D1.1 refers to “the Engineer” this shall be
interpreted to be the owner of the vehicle. Welds shall be
continuous around the entire tubular structure. All welds shall
be visually inspected and shall be acceptable if the following
conditions are satisfied:
1.
The weld shall have no cracks.
2.
Thorough fusion shall exist between weld metal and base
metal.
3.
All craters shall be filled to the cross section of the weld.
4.
Undercut shall be no more than 0.01 inch deep.
C. Aluminum bronze or silicon bronze welding technique is
permitted, but extreme care shall be used in preparation of
parts before bronze welding and in the design of the attaching
joints.
18.4.1. Main and Front Hoops
A. Main Hoop: The main hoop (behind the driver) shall be full width of
the cockpit. The main hoop shall be as near to the roof as possible
on closed automobiles and not less than two (2) inches above
the driver’s helmet on open automobiles, with the driver seated
normally and restrained by seat belt/shoulder harness. Low front
hoops shall be cowl height, or at a minimum, a straight line drawn
from the top of the main hoop to the top of the front hoop shall
pass over the driver’s helmet.
B.
Front Hoop:
1. The front hoop shall follow the line of the front pillars to the
top of the windshield and be connected, by horizontal bars, to
the top of the main hoop on each side (as close to the roof as
possible).
2.
Two (2) side hoops following the line of the front pillars to the
top of the main hoop may be used. These two (2) side hoops
are to be connected by a horizontal bar over the top of the
GCR - 170
windshield. (See figure 17), or
3.
A top “halo” hoop following the roof line from the main hoop
to the windshield with forward down tubes following the line
of the front pillars to the floor.
4.
Double “ear-type” joints are allowed, provided that they are
fully welded at all mating surfaces.
C. Fabrication: The main hoop shall be one continuous length of tubing
with smooth continuous bends with no evidence of crimping or wall
failure. The minimum radius for all bends shall be three (3) times
the tube diameter measured from the tube centerline. Whenever
possible, the roll hoops should start from the floor of the automobile, and, in the case of tube frame construction, be attached to
the tubes by means of gussets or metal webs in order to distribute
the loads. On automobiles of frameless construction, consideration should be given to using a vertical roll hoop of 360 degrees
completely around the inside of the automobile and attached with
suitable mounting plates.
18.4.2. Bracing
All required bracing shall be the same diameter and wall thickness as
listed in 18.1.5., Material. (Main and Front Hoops) All main hoops shall
incorporate a diagonal brace (same diameter and wall thickness as main
hoop) to prevent lateral distortion of the main hoop. A horizontal bar
connecting the sides of the main hoop is highly recommended.
A. Main Hoop Bracing:
Main hoops shall have two (2) braces extending to the rear, attaching
to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near as possible
to the top of the main hoop (not more than six (6) inches below the
top) and at an included angle of at least thirty (30) degrees. Open
cars with a low front hoop shall have (Effective 1/1/99) two braces
extending from the main hoop to the low front hoop. These braces shall
be mounted no lower than six inches below the top of the main hoop
as illustrated in figure 18.
B. Removable Bracing:
Removable bracing shall incorporate connectors of the double lug,
tapered, or muff-type as shown in figures 14, and 15. The double-lug
type shall include a doubler, gusset, or capping arrangement so as to
avoid distortion or excessive strain caused by welding.
C. Front Hoop Bracing:
There shall be two (2) braces extending forward from the front hoop
to protect the driver’s legs. It is recommended that this bracing extend
to the bulkhead in front of the driver’s feet; but, in any case, it shall
be integrated into the frame or chassis to provide substantial support
for the front hoop. It is recommended that the verticle bars of the fornt
hoop be connected by a horizontal bar at a point above the driver’s
legs.
18.4.3. Side Protection - Open and Closed Automobiles
A. The minimum side protection shall consist of a side tube connecting
the front and rear hoops across both the door openings. Additionally, there shall also be either a diagonal tube from the front hoop
to the rear hoop bisecting the door opening below the horizontal
side tube, or not less than two (2) horizontal side tubes. Additional
tubing may be added. NASCAR-style door bars are recommended.
GCR - 171
General
Appendix H. 2004 Production Roll Cage Rules
Appendix H. 2004 Production Roll Cage Rules
B.
In automobiles with full roll cage installations including side bars,
interior door panels may be altered, replaced, or removed. When
door panels are removed, all sharp edges or projections shall be
protected.
18.4.4. Mounting Plates:
The thickness of mounting plates bolted to the structure of the car shall
not be less than the thickness of the roll hoop or brace that they attach and
shall be backed-up with a plate of equal dimensions on the opposite side
of the panel, with the plates through-bolted together. A minimum of three
(3) bolts per mounting plate is required for bolted mounting plates. All
hardware (bolts) shall be Grade 5 or better with 5/16” diameter minimum.
Mounting plates welded to the structure of the car shall not be less than
.080” thick. Whenever possible the mounting plates should extend onto
a vertical section of the structure (such as door pillar).
GCR - 172
NOTES:
GCR - 173
You’ve got
the rules…
...now get
the edge!
With millions of in-stock parts, low prices, fast,
free shipping, and the industry’s largest full-time
tech department, Summit Racing Equipment can
help you get ahead of the competition quickly and
affordably. Chances are we’ve got the parts you
need in stock and ready to ship today!
Call today for a
FREE Catalog!
1-800-230-3030
SummitRacing.com
®
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
9.1.1. FORMULA CATEGORY
The Formula Category is intended to provide the membership and interested manufacturers with the opportunity to compete in purpose built,
highly modified open wheel single seat cars. The Club may alter or adjust
specifications and require, permit, or restrict certain specific components
to equate competitive potential.
A.
FORMULA ATLANTIC PREPARATION RULES
Formula Atlantic is a restricted class. Therefore, any allowable modifications, changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions.
New chassis of non-metallic composite construction shall be proven to
meet FIA specifications for non-metallic composite chassis prior to being
submitted to the SCCA for homologation. Contact the SCCA national
office for a list of the relevant FIA specifications/SCCA requirements.
The SCCA shall publish Formula Atlantic Category Specifications
containing the basic officially recognized specifications for each car
eligible to compete in the Category during the calendar year. These classifications are listed in Table 2.
A.1.
General
a. A single seat, four open-wheeled racing car with firewall, floor, and
safety equipment conforming to GCR Section 9. Homologation is
required for all cars registered after January 1, 1983.
b.
Cars shall be equipped with on-board self starter controlled by the
driver in a normal driving position.
c.
The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
removal or manipulation of any part or panel except for a removable
steering wheel and/or cockpit padding.
d.
Cars shall be equipped with a dual braking system operated by a
single control. In case of failure or leak at any point in the system,
effective braking power shall be maintained on at least two
wheels.
e.
Superchargers or turbochargers are not permitted.
f.
Power shall not be applied to more than two (2) wheels.
g.
Bodywork:
1. No part of the bodywork and aerodynamic devices shall exceed
in height a horizontal plane 90cm (35.4”) above the ground.
The safety roll bar/roll cage and the engine air box are not
included in this height restriction. Measurements are to be
made as raced with driver on-board.
2.
Behind the front wheels, the bodywork shall not exceed a
GCR - 175
FCS
These specifications are part of the SCCA General Competition Rules
(GCR) and all automobiles shall conform with GCR Section 9.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
maximum width of 130cm (51.18 inches) with the exception
of lateral fuel tanks. The overall maximum width behind the
front wheels to the leading edge of the rear wheels shall not
exceed 130cm (51.18 inches). The maximum width of any
aerodynamic device situated behind the front wheels, including
the rear wing, shall not exceed 110cm (43.307 inches).
3.
The bodywork ahead of the front wheels may be extended to
an overall maximum width of 150cm (59.055 inches) provided
it does not extend beyond the outside of the front tires. Flexible or movable aerodynamic skirts are prohibited. No part of
the body or suspended part of the car shall extend more than
1cm (0.394 inches) below the horizontal plane forming the
bottom of the tub or chassis floor (both static or in motion).
4.
Any part of the bodywork ahead of the front wheels exceeding
an overall width of 110cm (43.307 inches) shall not extend
above the height of the front wheel rims.
5.
Any specific part of the car which has an aerodynamic influence on the stability of the vehicle shall be mounted on the
entirely sprung part of the car and shall be firmly fixed while
the car is in motion. Aerodynamic devices, including wings and
end plates, shall not extend to the rear more than one meter
(39.4 inches) from the centerline of the rear wheel hubs.
6.
Neither the safety roll bar nor any of the units associated with
the functioning of the engine or transmission shall have an
aerodynamic effect by creating a vertical thrust.
7.
The leading edge of an airfoil fixed to the front of the car shall
not be sharp. Minimum radius -- 0.5cm (0.2 inches).
8.
Cars registered with SCCA January 1, 1976, and after, shall
be fitted with deformable structures per FIA regulations for
Formula II as follows: Deformable Structure: The entire fuel
tank area of the car licked by the airstream shall incorporate a
crushable structure conforming to the following specifications.
The term “licked by the airstream” is considered to define
the complete external area of the body/monocoque construction irrespective of such added items as water radiators, inlet
ducts, windscreens, etc.
A. The crushable structure shall be a sandwich construction based on a fire-resistant core of minimum crushing
strength of twenty-five (25) lbs./ square inch. Water pipes
are permitted to pass through this core. The sandwich
construction shall include two (2) sheets of 1.5mm (.060”)
thickness, one of which shall be aluminum sheet having a
tensile strength of fourteen (14) tons/ square inch and a
minimum elongation of five (5) percent.
B.
The use of a magnesium sheet will be authorized only if its
thickness exceeds 3mm (.120”).
C. The minimum thickness of the sandwich construction
shall be 10mm (.3937”). The fore and aft fuel tank area,
however, shall provide for a crushable structure of at least
100mm (3.937”) thickness at such crushable structure’s
thickest point. The position of this widest point to be at
GCR - 176
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
9.
The minimum wheel diameter is thirteen (13) inches. Ex-FSV
cars are permitted front wheel width: minimum six (6) inches,
maximum eight (8) inches; rear wheel width: minimum eight
(8) inches, maximum ten (10) inches. All other cars front wheel
width: ten (10) inches; rear wheel width: minimum fourteen
(14) inches, maximum fifteen (15) inches.
10. All cars with venturi section side pods (e.g. Ralt RT-4) shall
comply to the following rule. Aerodynamic devices shall
comply with the rules relating to bodywork. Any part having
an aerodynamic influence and/or any part of the bodywork and
attachments to the bodywork shall be rigidly secured to the
entirely sprung part of the car (chassis/monocoque), shall have
no degree of freedom in relation to the entirely sprung part
of the car (chassis/monocoque), and shall remain immobile in
relation to the chassis/monocoque at all times. At any transverse section through the car from the rear edge of the front
wheels to the forward edge of the rear wheels, no part of the
car except the basic chassis/ monocoque structure shall be
below a horizontal line situated 1cm (0.4”) above the bottom
of the chassis/ monocoque. This measurement will be taken
without regard to bolt heads, rivets, etc.
Movable or hinged skirts are prohibited. Flexible sidepod skirts
are allowed on cars which have their primary load bearing
structure (tub) constructed of ferrous or non-ferrous alloys. No
part of the bodywork or suspended part of the car between
the front and rear wheels shall extend more than one (l) cm
(.3937”) below the horizontal panel forming the bottom of the
chassis. Within the above restrictions, only wearable material
(fiberglass, Kevlar, carbon fiber, high density polypropylene,
Telflon, Lexan, or wood) may be attached to the side panels as
a rubbing strip. Ceramics, plexiglass, plastic, and other materials which shatter or break-up causing hazardous track condition are prohibited.
The intention of this Section (9.1.1.A.1.g.10.) is to control
ground effects on all cars by prohibiting “sealing” or bridging
the gap between the bodywork and the road surface, and to
do so in a uniform and consistent manner. Any means adopted
to circumvent this intention shall automatically be regarded as
a breach of these regulations.
h.
Exhaust outlets shall be positioned not more than twenty-four (24)
inches above the ground and shall not extend more than six (6)
inches beyond the overall length of the car. In no case can the
GCR - 177
FCS
the manufacturer’s discretion over a length of at least
35cm (13.78”) after which it may be gradually reduced to
10mm (.3937”).
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
exhaust terminate more than 45.4” behind the centerline of the
rear axle.
A.2.
Engines
a. Displacement -- over 1100cc and below or equal to 1600 cc,
unless otherwise noted. Cars with rotary piston engines covered by
the NSU-Wankel patents will be admitted on the basis of a piston
displacement equivalence. The equivalence is twice the volume
determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum
capacity of the working chamber.
b.
Engines shall be derived from automobiles recognized by FIA
Appendix J., Group 1 (Series Production Touring), Group 2
(Touring), or Group 3 (Grand Touring) approved by the SCCA, and
shall conform to definitions and specifications shown on the FIA
Recognition Form of the homologated car, except as permitted in
the chart.
Note: If intake restrictors are specified, the restrictors shall be round
orifices (unless otherwise specified) and located within four (4) inches of
the throttle butterfly. Restrictors shall be a minimum 0.060” thick and of
the specified diameter.
The following engines are approved:
Table 1
Manufacturer
A
Alfa Romeo
Engine
Series
Notes
Req’d
Restrictor
Weight
(lbs)
1600
Twin-Cam
includes GTA model
n/a
1160
B
Audi
80
n/a
1160
C
BMW
1600 SOHC
n/a
1160
D
Datsun
1600 SOHC
n/a
1160
E
Fiat
1438cc DOHC
n/a
1160
F
Fiat
1592cc DOHC
n/a
1160
G
Ford
1500 pushrod
n/a
1160
H
Ford
1600 pushrod
n/a
1160
I
Ford
BD Series
(4-valve)
1600cc
any BD series iron or alloy
cylinder block permitted
n/a
metallic chassis
1230
non-metallic
chassis 1255
J
Ford
1600 SOHC
from Cortina model
n/a
1160
K
Ford
1600 SOHC
from Escort model
n/a
1160
L
Honda
B-16A
(4-valve)
n/a
1160
M
Honda
1595cc VTEC
n/a
1160
N
Lotus Ford
1600 TwinCam
alternate aluminum block
permitted
n/a
1160
O
Mazda
12A streetport
no peripheral port or bridgeport
n/a
metallic chassis
1230
non-metallic
chassis 1255
from 124
GCR - 178
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
Table 1 Cont.
Manufacturer
Engine
Series
Notes
Req’d
Restrictor
Weight
(lbs)
One (1) auto-type 2 bbl carb
or one (1) 2 bbl throttle body.
Restrictors/venturis shall be no
more than 4 inches from the
center line of the throttle butterfly shaft. All intake air shall pass
through the required restrictors
and the throttle body or carburetor body. Intake manifold for either carburetion or injection shall
have individual runners connecting one throttle plate to one rotor, only. No balance tubes or
other device shall connect runners between rotors.
36mm
metallic chassis
1230
non-metallic
chassis 1255
n/a
1160
Mazda
12A bridge
port
Q
Porsche
1582cc
pushrod
R
Renault
1600cc
n/a
1160
S
Toyota
1600 pushrod
n/a
1160
T
Toyota
1588cc DOHC
n/a
1160
U
Toyota
DOHC
(4-valve)
1600cc
42mm
metallic chassis
1230
non-metallic
chassis 1255
V
Toyota
1ZZ & 2ZZ
1600cc
n/a
1160
W
Volkswagen
1835cc SOHC
FI restrictors - between cylinder
head and butterflies
unrestricted carbs
or F.I. w/
37mm
1190
X
Volkswagen
1600cc
DOHC
(16 valve)
Alt block and crankshaft permitted with max. displacement of
2135cc, valve lift (measured at
zero lash): .500” max.
42mm
1160
Y
Mazda
13B streetport
One (1) 2-bbl auto-type carb or
throttle body. Intake manifold
shall have individual runners
connecting one throttle plate/
butterfly to one rotor, only. No
balance tubes or other devices
shall connect runners between
rotors.
44mm
metallic chassis
1230
non-metallic
chassis 1255
Z
Mazda
Renesis
(6 port)
Porting not permitted. Unmodified OEM lower intake manifold
required, upper manifold unrestricted. Balance tube not permitted. Apex seals unrestricted
F.I. only
w/ 70mm
throttle
body
metallic chassis
1230
non-metallic
chassis 1255
from Gordini model
FCS
P
NOTE: Add 25 lbs for fuel injection (except Volkswagen)
NOTE: Add 25 lbs for sequential transmission
c.
The following modifications are permitted.
1. Any carburetor(s), fuel injection, or intake manifold(s), are
permitted. Fuel injected engines shall use the specified intake
restriction. Where Weber or Weber-type carburetors are specified and used, they shall retain their standard configuration of
fuel distribution. This is to prohibit annular discharge carburetors.
2.
The use of any exhaust manifold(s).
3.
The use of any oil sump.
4.
The use of any oil pump(s).
GCR - 179
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
5.
The use of a dry sump lubrication system.
6.
The use of any crankshaft of the stroke specified in the homologation forms for the engine.
7.
Main bearing caps may be reinforced or substituted.
8.
The make and location of the ignition coil and condenser may
be changed.
9.
Any distributor and/or transistor ignition may be used provided
it’s installation does not require any modification of the
engine.
10. Any make or type of spark plug may be used.
11. The use of any starter is permitted provided it can be fitted
without any modification to the engine.
12. Substitution of the clutch and flywheel is allowed provided
there is no increase in clutch diameter. The use of dowel pins
is permitted.
13. Any pistons and piston pins may be used.
14. Any camshaft(s) may be used.
15. Cam followers may be altered or substituted.
16. It is permitted to lighten, balance, or modify in shape by tooling
the standard or optional components of the engine, provided
it is always possible to identify them positively as such. It is
not permitted to add any material to the components unless
specifically authorized.
17. Engines may be rebored a maximum of 1.2mm (0.047 inches)
over the standard size provided the resulting increase in total
displacement does not exceed 1615cc.
18. The use of any alternate engine components considered replacement parts such as seals, bearings, valve guides, nuts, bolts,
studs, washers, and gaskets is allowed, provided they are of
the same type and dimension. Bushings may be added where
none are fitted as standard, provided they are concentric and
that the centerline of the bushed part is not changed. Water
and oil passages may be restricted or plugged. The substitution of valve springs, valve spring retainers, and keepers is
permitted. Any pushrods may be used.
19. Pulleys, including camshaft drive pulleys, may be altered or
replaced with others of unrestricted origin. The use of any
crankshaft vibration dampener is permitted.
20. The compression ratio may be increased by machining, using
any head gasket(s), or eliminating of head gasket(s).
21. The installation of any engine vent or breather is permitted.
22. Generator or alternator is unrestricted.
GCR - 180
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
23. The use of any rocker arms or rocker arm supports.
24. Use of any connecting rod of the same basic material.
26. Exhaust emission control air pumps, and associated lines and
nozzles cannot be modified in any way except they may be
completely removed. When these nozzles are removed from a
cylinder head, the holes shall be completely plugged.
27. The use of any fuel pump(s) is permitted.
28. Valve or cam covers may be substituted.
29. Any external surface of the engine may be plated, painted, or
anodized.
30. Engines produced with a cam carrier as a separate and distinct
piece from the cylinder head or engine block may replace that
cam carrier with a cam carrier of other manufacture, provided
the replacement cam carrier affords no additional function
other than the original cam carrier and provided the type and
number of camshaft bearings remains the same.
31. The replacement of any jack shaft or idler shaft with another
of the same basic material as the standard shaft is permitted,
provided it performs no additional function over the original
shaft.
A.3.
Transmission
a. For all types of transmissions, no more than five forward speeds
and an operational reverse gear shall be used.
b.
The use of an automatic gearbox is prohibited.
c.
All gear changes shall be initiated by the driver. Mechanical gear
shifters, direct-acting electric solenoid shifters, air-shifters and
similar devices are permitted. Electronically controlled differentials
and devices that allow pre-selected gear changes are prohibited.
d.
Gearboxes with shafts that are transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the chassis are not allowed. The sole exception are the gearbox
final drive (crownwheel) shaft axis and final drive shafts (half
shafts). All change gears must be located in the case aft of the
final drive.
GCR - 181
FCS
25. Valves are unrestricted in both size and material, provided the
valve centerline is not altered.
Table 2
Engine
Wheel
Width (in)
± .060
Aero
Transmission
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
See Table 1
(F) 10
(R) 14 Min.
& 15 Max.
See FA rules
Up to 5 forward gears,
limited slip and locked differential allowed (sequential
trans. carries 25 lb penalty
See
Table 1
All current FA rules allpy
Pro Star Mazda
Mazda rotary - Sealed
Renesis with Pro Star
Mazda Fuel injection and
a 70 mm throttle body
Pro Star
Mazda
specified
series
wheels
(F) 9
(R) 11
See Table 3
6 spd sequential transmission with open differential.
Traction control is allowed.
Spec Gear Ratio Stacks
(no mixing) apply. Pro Star
Mazda Gear Stacks:Stack
A: 1st-12/29, 2nd-15/30,
3rd-15/25, 4th-19/27, 5th20/25, 6th-19/21. Stack
B:1st-12/29, 2nd-17/30,
3rd-19/27, 4th-18/22, 5th24/26, 6th-24/24.
1325
Front Wing - Angle of attack for the front wing (main plane) is fixed.
Front wing flaps may be adjusted within the range provided from an
original STAR Mazda endplate. Secondary wing flaps may not be altered
from STAR Mazda original part. Rear Wings - May be adjusted to include
the following: Angle of attack of the lower element. Note: Rear wing
endplates must be adjusted to within +/- 5 deg of vertical as measured
at the trailing edge of the endplate. All Cars must use all three upper
elements. Angle of attack of the upper elements must have a minimum
angle of 13 degs measured front the leading edge of the forward element to the rear edge of the trailing element. The zeroing point for
checking the angle of the top three elements is the rollover block on the
forward edge of the cockpit opening. No gurney tabs. ECU and Shocks
shall be sealed as provided by Star Mazda. Engine shall be sealed by the
Star Mazda approved engine builder.
Formula 3 car
1600 VW (non Crossflow
head) or 1835cc
Volkswagen with carbs
(no restrictor), FI with
37mm restrictor located
between cylinder head
and butterfly
(F) 9 Min.
(R) 10 Min.
See FA Rules
Up to 5 Forward Gears,
Limited Slip Differential
(sequential Carries a 25 lb
Weight Penalty)
See
Table 1
NOTE: Any other classified engine must be approved by the SCCA
Club Racing Technical Manger on a case by case basis. Alt block
and crankshaft allowed with max. displacement of 2135cc, valve lift
(measured at zero lash): .500” max.
Ex-Fran-Am
2000
Renault 2.0L with
Magneti-Marelli Renault
Sport Formula Renault
2000 ECU
(F) 8
(R) 10
See FA Rules
Renault Sport Formula
2000 6 Speed sequential
transmission with limited
slip differential. Gear ratios
unrestricted.
1250
Must have roll bar meeting the requirements of GCR 9.4. Must use
Formula Renault or Fran-Am engine seals on the cam cover, oil pan and
crankshaft pulley bolt as applied by an approved engine builder. Fuel
shall meet the requirements for IT cars per GCR section 9.3.25. An SIR
will be required at a time to be determined by the CRB.
Ex-Pro Formula
Super Vee
1600 VW (non Crossflow
head) or 1835cc
Volkswagen with carbs
(no restrictor), FI with
37mm restrictor located
between cylinder head
and butterfly
(F) 6 Min.
(R) 8 Min.
or
(F) 8 Min.
(R) 10 Min.
See FA Rules
Up to 5 Forward Gears,
Limited Slip and Locked
Differentials allowed
(sequential transmission
carries a 25 lb Weight
Penalty)
See
Table 1
Water cooled Super Vee cars compete in the FA class and may be
prepared to their professional racing rules. GT engine prep rules, no
changes in bore x stroke, unrestricted weber type side draft carburetors
with no modifications. These cars can also run the present fuel injection
with these engine prep rules.
Pro Formula
Ford 2000
2.0 Liter Zetec
(F) 8
(R) 10
See FA Rules
Up to 5 Forward Gears,
Limited Slip Differential
(sequential Carries a 25 lb
Weight Penalty)
1230
Engine must be prepared to current FC rules except that ECU map and
cams are unrestricted. An air restrictor is not required.
Formula Car Category Specifications
GCR - 182
Purpose built
and Ex-Pro
Atlantic cars
9.1.1.
Car
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
Pro Star Mazda Dimensions - Table 3
Measurement (cm)
A. Maximum rear overhang from rear wheel axis
B. Maximum front overhang from front wheel axis
C. Maximum height measured from the ground
D. Exhaust height measured from the ground
60
100
94 @ rear wing
34-44
E. Maximum height of any aerodynamic device
30
F. Minimum safety rollover bar height inline with driver’s spine
92
G. Minimum allowed helmet clearance
5
H. Maximum width
180
I. Maximum rear aerofoil width (includes endplates)
96
J. Maximum body width behind front wheels
132
K. Maximum nose width
129
L. Minimum cockpit opening
37
M. Minimum cockpit parallel opening length
42
N. Minimum cockpit overall opening length
82
S. Maximum exhaust length from rear wheel axis
52
7. Minimum wheelbase
254
5. Minimum track
150
A.5.
FORMULA SCCA PREPARATION RULES
1.
Definition
One design, fixed specifications, open cockpit, single seat Formula car
with Mazda 2.3 engine. Cars are packaged and sold by SCCA Enterprises,
Inc. All replacement parts are supplied through SCCA Enterprises, Inc.,
and shall be official SCCA Spec Formula Car parts except where noted
in A.5.4.
2.
Safety Requirements
Car will be delivered from the manufacturer with approved safety equipment. Replaced items shall be supplied through SCCA Enterprises, except
safety harnesses may be replaced by any other that conforms to GCR
Section 9.
3.
Vehicle Configuration
All SCCA Formula cars to GCR section 9 with the following exceptions:
Section 9.3.1, Accumulators.
4.
Maintenance and Repairs
It is permitted to perform routine maintenance and repairs as long as
existing parts are in no way modified and replacement parts are official
SCCA Enterprises Formula Car parts. If any official SCCA Enterprises’
seal is broken, lost by accident or intent, the procedures outlined under
A.5.18., shall be followed. Parts and materials with an Enterprises part
number having the prefix “WM10” are considered to be unrestricted,
providing their dimensions and materials are comparable. No other parts
are to be considered “unrestricted” except where specified.
5.
Chassis
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED except as noted in these rules.
GCR - 183
FCS
Dimension (Refer to FC drawing)
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
a.
All cars shall use the stock, as delivered by SCCA Enterprises,
wood floor of 6mm, with an allowable deviation of 3 mm across
the surface for wear.
b.
Seats are free. Panels inside the cockpit may be attached to the
frame as long as the points of attachment are no closer than 6
inches apart. No welding or gluing of the seat to the structure of
the car is allowed.
Definition of cockpit is: area between the front roll hoop and rear
roll hoop.
c.
Painting or powder coating of the chassis is allowed.
d.
Enterprises foot drop box part # WM180020J may be installed.
6.
Bodywork
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED (except as specified). If any seal, label,
stamp is missing the parts must be returned to SCCA Enterprises for
resealing.
a.
Bodywork shall remain unmodified with the exception of holes for
a slave or jumper battery plug, trackside beacon receiver, and tow
hooks. All repair work must match original body dimensions and
contours.
b.
Bodywork fasteners are free.
c.
The car may be painted any color(s), except primer.
d.
It is required that all cars display the official sponsors of SCCA
Enterprises decals and locations as specified by Enterprises.
e.
Radiator screens are allowed and recommended.
f.
All aerodynamic devices shall be used as delivered: i.e. wings, body
winglets. No modification to mounting location or holes.
g.
The front wing main plane, front wing secondary elements, front
wing support mounts, and front wing endplates must be used and
mounted as delivered from SCCA Enterprises. Any modification
to these parts is strictly forbidden. The main wing plane angle is
zeroed on the rear upper aft transmission surface measured with
a suitable angle gauge, i.e.: digital level on the top main plane 2
inches outward from the nose box mounts. It must meet a minimum
measurement of negative .5 degrees (angled down in the back) and
a maximum measurement of positive 2.5 degrees (angled up in
the back). It is acceptable to shim the main plane to obtain this
measurement.
h.
The rear wing and its related mounting components are to be used
and mounted as delivered. Any modifications are strictly prohibited.
The lower plane angle, zeroed on the rear upper aft transmission
surface, measured with a suitable angle gauge. i.e.; digital level
on the top surface of the lower rear wing must meet a minimum
of –3.0 degrees (angled down in the back) and a maximum of
+2.0 degrees (angled up in the back). It is acceptable to adjust
the lower rear element to meet these requirements. The upper rear
wing element may only be adjusted within the parameter of the
endplates and wing adjusters as provided from SCCA Enterprises.
GCR - 184
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
No additional holes may be added.
The stock headrest may be modified or replaced with any headrest
meeting GCR section 9.4.1.B. The stock lateral bolsters may be
modified or removed.
j.
SCCA Enterprises windscreen P/N: WM137000 is allowed.
7.
FCS
i.
Engine and Drivetrain
a.
Engine
1. NO MODIFICATIONS ARE ALLOWED EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFICALLY AUTHORIZED WITHIN THESE RULES. This includes all
fuel injection and engine management components, including
exhaust, cooling, electrical and lubrication systems. All systems
are subject to test procedures and must conform to OEM
specifications as stated and supplied by SCCA Enterprises. All
fluids, except fuel, are unrestricted.
2.
SCCA Enterprises, Inc., seals on the engine, and other components shall remain in place at all times. All engines shall be
rebuilt, checked on an engine dynamometer, and sealed
through SCCA Enterprises.
3.
Engine maintenance, which is permitted, includes the replacement, but not modification of external engine and engine
systems parts.
4.
There are six (6) seals on the engine. Two (2) on the timing
cover, two (2) on the top of the valve cover, and two (2) on
the oil sump. They may not be removed or tampered with.
5.
All rubber oil lines may be replaced with braided metal-covered
(Aeroquip type) lines. Hose clamps may be installed on the
rubber oil lines.
6.
Intake manifold: No modifications are allowed. Absolutely no
porting or the addition of material is allowed. No coating is
allowed on the exterior or interior of the manifold.
7.
Engine Control Unit (ECU): Manufactured by MBE and sealed
by SCCA Enterprises. Tampering of the ECU, ECU program,
seal, wiring or sensors is prohibited.
8.
The flywheel weight is a minimum of 2.6 pounds for the SCCA
Enterprises supplied flywheel. No modifications to the flywheel
with the exception of normal resurfacing for clutch wear are
allowed.
9.
No modification to the crankshaft dampener is allowed.
The following parts must be used:
10. Clutch: SCCA Enterprises supplied clutch and flywheel
contained in kit #WM701000A, Piston #WM701004A, Throw
out bearing #WM701006A, Small O-ring #WM1010405,
Large o-ring #WM1010406, Flexplate and Ring Gear #
WM1101053.
11. Spark Plugs, Part # NGK PTR5F-11, NGK ITR5F-13, or MotorGCR - 185
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
craft # AGSF32FEC.
12. Fuel Injectors: Part # WM591929
13. Throttle Body: Part # WM591930
14. Fuel Filter: Part # WM591924
15. Air Filter: Part # WM301020
16. Exhaust systems may be thermal coated or wrapped.
17. A heat shield between the engine block and the exhaust system
is recommended for the purpose of protecting hoses, shifter
cable, and wiring from the heat of the exhaust.
18. An SCCA Enterprises muffler kit part # WM301046 is required.
The muffler may not extend beyond the back of the transmission. An additional muffler may be added to accompany the
stock muffler as needed to meet sound requirements.
19. An optional air to oil cooler is allowed. The maximum core
size is 13 inches wide by 6.5 inches high. No water to oil heat
exchanger is allowed.
20. An optional SCCA Enterprise alternator kit is allowed, Part #
WM1100101
21. Fuel shall meet the requirements for IT cars per the GCR.
b.
Transmission
1.
The 5 speed sequential transaxle supplied by SCCA Enterprises
is the only permitted gearbox. The casting has to remain original. No internal or external modification (including lightening)
other than normal racing repair.
2.
The servicing, replacement and modification of internal components is permitted by the competitor. With the following exceptions:
a.
All components must be ferrous metal, except for bearing
retainers and bearing cages.
b.
Components manufactured by alternate manufacturers
are permitted. Replacement components must be direct
replacements to the original components. Absolute
minimum weights are listed below.
3.
The rear cover plate may manufactured or remanufactured
using aluminum.
4.
Only the following gear ratios are permitted:
1st gear combination 12:29 Ratio number 2.41
2nd gear combination 15:28 1.86
3rd gear combination 16:24 1.50
4th gear combination 18:22 1.22
5th gear combination 24:26 1.08
5.
Differential – Only final drive ratio allowed is 2.75. The
GCR - 186
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
6.
Polishing, shot peening, REM© Isotropic treatment, heat and cold
treatments are allowed. No coatings or plating is allowed.
7.
Shift cable is free, but shifting must remain cable operated.
8.
Throttle cable is free, but must remain cable operated.
9.
The shift actuator assembly must operate as supplied by SCCA
Enterprises. It can be polished, shot peened, or have REM treatment, heat and cold treatments.
MINIMUM WEIGHTS OF THE FOLLOWING PARTS
Differential Housing (both parts including bearings) 7.4 lbs
Ring Gear 3.6 lbs
Pinion Shaft 4.0 lbs
1st gear 2.7 lbs
2nd gear 1.2 lbs
3rd gear 1.1 lbs
4th gear 1.1 lbs
5th gear 1.0 lbs
8.
a.
Suspension
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED. Adjustments are permitted within
the limits of the suspension and steering components. All rod ends
shall be engaged at least 1.5 times the diameter of the end.
b.
Front Springs: 600 lbs. ±25 lbs. Part # WM203008. Wire size
shall measure .360” ±.005”.
Rear Springs: 1000 lbs. ±25 lbs. Part # WM203009. Wire size
shall measure .410” ± .005”.
c.
Competitors may use the entire travel of all suspension adjusted
components as delivered. Alternate parts are not allowed.
d.
All suspension parts shall have the SCCA code embedded (a label/
or an SCCA Enterprises stamp) in the part. If they do not it is
required to return part to Enterprises for proper labeling.
e.
Rod ends may be replaced with rod ends having specifications
equal to or greater than the OEM supplied rod ends. This includes
dimensional material and strength specifications. Replacement rod
ends shall be capable of being installed with no modifications to
any original components.
f.
Anti-roll bars (sway bars) may be disconnected, but not removed.
Anti roll bar sizes:
Front .875” OD ±.005”
Top Tee .750” x .135” wall, ±.005”
Top Tee Length: 7.5” maximum end to end
Rear lower stalk .615” Dia. ±.005”
Upper stalk .765” ±.005”
Arm length 5.470” shoulder to shoulder
GCR - 187
FCS
differential must remain an open differential. No limited slip
mechanism is allowed. Differential must work as supplied (no
tightening of the differential to limit slip) Must be able to use
existing components.
9.1.1.
9.
Formula Car Category Specifications
a.
Shocks
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED. 4 Bilstein Shocks, Part #
WM203001 or 4 Penske shocks, Part # WM1180090. Same type
on all 4 corners.
b.
Only shims provided on the shocks are legal (no bump rubbers,
packers or modification to shims).
c.
Adjustments for the Bilstein will be at the spring perch and with
pressure (if rebuilt). Adjustments for the Penske will be at the spring
perch or with the rebound adjuster.
d.
Bilstein shocks may be used in the original configuration or may be
rebuilt. Both shock types can only be rebuilt by SCCA Enterprises
or its authorized rebuilder.
e.
All shock absorbers must be sealed by SCCA Enterprises or its
authorized rebuilder.
10.
Steering
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED, except as described within these rules
a.
An alternate steering wheel may be used. “Butterfly” style steering
wheels are not allowed.
b.
Upper steering shaft may be modified to accept an alternate steering
wheel and/or hub (if applicable). It may also be modified to accommodate a larger driver.
11.
Brakes
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED, except as described within these rules.
Only the AP 4 PISTON CALIPER BRAKE SYSTEM AS SUPPLIED WITH
VENTED ROTORS as supplied by SCCA Enterprises shall be used
a.
Brake pads as labeled and supplied from SCCA Enterprises.
b.
Brake rotors are used as delivered, no drilling or lightening is
allowed. Minimum Diameter is 10.450”. Part # WM801002x Left,
Part # WM801003x Right. Min width is .600”
c.
Master cylinders must be the Girling type.
Front master cylinder is.700” piston diameter, Part # WM802005
Rear master cylinder is .750” piston diameter, Part # WM802006
d.
Calipers must be AP 4 piston. Part numbers are:
LF # WM802004 RF #WM802003
LR # WM802002 RR # WM802001
e.
Brake lines are free (no plastic allowed).
12.
Wheels (Only wheels supplied by SCCA Enterprises)
NO MODIFICATIONS or MACHINING ALLOWED Aluminum racing wheel
supplied from SCCA Enterprises with SCCA logo. If logo is worn off
or wheels that have been painted or powder coated, wheels must be
inspected by SCCA Enterprises or one of their designated Customer
Service Representatives and logos replaced.
Front: 8 in X 13 in Part # WM 205001
Rear: 10 in X 13 in Part # WM205002
a.
All wheel bearings shall be run with grease (not oil), no special
GCR - 188
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
coatings are allowed, and the bearing grease seal shall be intact.
No ceramic wheel bearings are permitted.
Wheel spacers are not allowed.
13.
Tires
Tires must run in sets of 4 as stated below:
Hoosier R45 or R45A (SCCA Labeled) Compound
Front: PN: 43270, 21.5 in X 8.0 in X13.0in
Rear: PN: 43301, 22.0 in X10.0 in X 13.0 in
Hoosier Wet Compound
Front: PN: 44195, 21.5 in 7.5 in X 13.0 in
Rear: PN: 44217, 22.0 in 9.0 in X13.0 in
a.
A competitor shall start the race on the same set of tires (meaning
the original four) as used in a qualifying session for the race. The
only exception is rain tires. It is the responsibility of the competitor
to ensure their tires are marked appropriately for qualifying and
race sessions. It is recommended that regions offer these services
at a central location such as pre-grid or Tech.
b.
A change of tires during or between a qualifying and race session
shall automatically result in all previous times being disallowed.
c.
If a tire is damaged during a qualifying session the competitor
may replace that tire with a used tire upon approval of the Chief
Steward. Should a tire be replaced for any reason, the competitor
shall forfeit his grid position and start at the back of the grid.
14.
Electrical System
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED, except as described within these rules.
a.
Wiring harnesses must remain as delivered.
b.
Battery may be replaced with a larger one as long it remains in the
same location.
c.
Battery wiring is free. Car must shut off when master switch is
turned off.
d.
Any instrumentation is allowed.
e.
Data acquisition is allowed, no telemetry is allowed.
f.
Any rain light is allowed.
15.
Weight
The car shall weigh 1265 lbs. minimum, including the driver.
a.
Ballast must be placed between the front dash bulkhead and the
front engine bulkhead. They shall be fastened securely to the floor
with flat head 5/16 bolts, washers and nuts on both ends of the
weight.
16.
Updates
Provisions will be made for updates on all safety and mechanical improvements. Such updates will be effective when authorized by SCCA Enterprises, announced by the National Office, and published in FasTrack.
GCR - 189
FCS
b.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
17.
Vehicle Logbook
The Vehicle Logbook for each SCCA Formula Car remains the property of
SCCA Enterprises and will contain not only the record of technical inspections, but also the major maintenance performed and all transfers of
ownership. The Vehicle Logbook number will be the same as the factory
chassis number that is stamped on the name plate mounted on the fuel
cell behind the driver’s shoulders. When the vehicle is sold, traded, or
scrapped, the logbook shall be sent to SCCA Enterprises, Inc.,. 14550 E.
Easter Ave Suite 400 Centennial, Co. 80112. The logbook will them be
reissued to the new owner. When the logbook has been filled, a new one
shall be requested from SCCA Enterprises, Inc.
A FEE OF $200 WILL BE CHARGED FOR LOST LOGBOOKS.
The logbook shall be presented at scrutineering for each event entered.
All SCCA Formula Cars are subject to normal safety inspection. Additionally, scrutineers will check each official seal. A competitor may not be
barred from competing at a specific event if a seal is broken, damaged,
lost or part not properly labeled but the part may be considered suspect
and will be treated as such and will be required to be sent back to SCCA
Enterprises for inspection. If engine cam cover or oil pan seals are broken,
damaged, or missing, the engine shall be removed and sent to SCCA
Enterprises for testing and resealing. The competitor will bear all expenses
at the competitor’s cost prior to the next event.
18.
Seals
SCCA Enterprises engine seals are required for all races. Any competitor
who runs an event without all proper engine seals in the required locations shall have his engine removed and shipped to SCCA Enterprises for
testing and sealing after that event. The competitor will be responsible for
all cost incurred by this procedure regardless of the findings, and subject
to penalty by the SOM if engine is found to be not as specified.
SCCA Enterprises, Inc., seals are required on all Formula Car Engines.
Any counterfeit engine seal found by an authorized representative of
SCCA, Inc., or SCCA Enterprises, Inc., shall immediately render that
engine illegal for further use, without need of dyno testing or inspection.
SCCA Enterprises, Inc., will not be under any obligation to bring an illegally sealed engine back to legal condition. Penalties shall include all of
the following: 19.1., 19.2., 19.3., and 19.4.
19.
Penalties (Specific to SCCA Enterprises Spec Cars)
If a competitor refuses to give his engine and/or unlabeled parts for testing
per a request of the Chief Steward, the following penalties will automatically be imposed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Vehicle logbook will be impounded.
Disqualification from the event.
Suspension of SCCA competition privileges for thirty (30) days.
The car and drive train are suspended from competition until the
unit(s) specified by the Chief Steward are replaced.
In a case where a competitor does comply with the Chief Steward’s
request to have an engine and/or parts inspected and the impounded
unit(s) are found legal, the SCCA, will stand all the costs incurred for the
testing, including shipping. Should the impounded unit(s) be found illegal,
the following penalties will be imposed:
1.
Disqualification from the event.
GCR - 190
Formula Car Category Specifications
2.
A fine of $250.00.
3.
$500.00 testing fee plus freight charges paid to SCCA Enterprises.
4.
Competition privileges will be suspended immediately, and the
suspension will continue for a minimum of thirty (30) days after
the date when all fines and costs are paid in full and the license is
received by the Chairman SOM or the SCCA Topeka Office.
5.
For a second illegal drive train offense, the competitor will be
permanently disqualified from further SCCA Formula Car competition.
20.
a.
b.
SCCA Formula Car Drive Train Protest
Protests shall be filed per the GCR.
Protestor will specify the drive train item suspected (i.e., transmission or engine). The teardown bond to remove the motor and
transmission is in three (3) parts:
1.
Remove and replace motor and transmission - $400.00
a. Will be done by an SCCA representative or other shop that
is equipped for this type of work and will be paid directly.
2.
Ship motor to Enterprises and test - $500.00 plus freight and
crating charges
a.
3.
SCCA Enterprises will inspect the motor, (item 2), and will
notify the Chairman SOM as soon as possible as to the
results.
Protest Fee: Regional - $25.00, National - $50.00.
c.
Enterprises shall retain the evidence, and the SCCA shall retain the
fee, (item 3), until the period for appeal has passed.
d.
The Chairman SOM is required to inform SCCA Enterprises of
the protest using the FE Protest Information Form. A copy of the
protest shall be sent to Enterprises.
If the protest proves to be valid and any appeal fails, the protest fee,
(item 3), will be returned to the protestor. Also, the protestee will
be required to reimburse the protestor the remaining fees ($900).
The protestee will not be allowed to compete again until all costs
are paid. If found legal, the protester forfeits fee (items 1 and 2)
above.
e.
If found illegal, competition privileges will be suspended immediately, and the suspension will continue for thirty (30) days after all
costs are paid in full.
f.
For a second illegal drive train offense, the competitor will be
permanently disqualified from competing in FE competition.
21.
a.
b.
Accessory Items
Mirrors are free.
Two-way radios may be installed in the car. All components shall
GCR - 191
FCS
9.1.1.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
be securely attached and approved by Tech inspection.
c.
Racers tape may be used to repair crash damage, or as a precautionary means of securing the body retaining latches. Crash-damage
is defined as having occurred during the current event, and the tape
should be of an appropriate color if possible. Taping of body joints
is not allowed
d.
The spark plug wires may be fire sleeved and may be loomed, but
must be original Mazda wire as supplied by SCCA Enterprises.
e.
Engine compartment fluid hoses may be insulated using heat shield
or wrap.
f.
Front and rear tow hooks are required, see GCR section 9.3.46.
B.
FORMULA CONTINENTAL PREPARATION RULES
Formula Continental is a Restricted class. Therefore, any allowable modifications, changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF IN DOUBT, DON’T. Homologation is required for all cars registered after January 1, 1983.
Description: Single seater racing cars as defined by these regulations.
All newly constructed cars shall meet the 1986 construction rules for
Formula F cars.
B.1.
Chassis
The chassis shall be of tubular steel construction with no stress-bearing
panels except bulkhead and undertray; curvature of the undertray shall
not exceed 2.54cm (1 inch). Monocoque chassis construction is prohibited. Stress bearing panels are defined as: sheet metal affixed to the
frame by welding, bonding, rivets, bolts, or screws which have centers
closer than 15.24cm (6 inches). Body panels cannot be utilized as stress
bearing panels, except as required for 1986 construction rules. The use of
composite materials using carbon and/or Kevlar reinforcement is prohibited.
No engine oil or water tubes are permitted within the cockpit.
It is not permitted to construct any suspension member in the form of an
airfoil or to incorporate a spoiler in the construction of any suspension
member.
B.2.
Bodywork and Airfoils
See Table 4. (Airfoils are a requirement for this class.)
The use of composite materials using carbon reinforcement is prohibited,
except as permitted herein.
Ground effects are prohibited. Deviation of the undertray may not exceed
2.54cm (1”) in the area between the rearmost point of the front tire to the
frontmost point of the rear tire. Diffuser undertrays are permitted.
Cockpit: Forward-facing roll bar/roll cage bracing and required padding
will not be considered in the dimensions shown in the table.
GCR - 192
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
B.3.
Engines
The only permitted engines are:
The Ford 2 liter single overhead camshaft “NE” series engine or the 197174 Pinto/Capri 2 liter single overhead camshaft engine.
The Ford 2 liter single overhead camshaft “NE” series engine and the
1971-74 Pinto/Capri 2 liter single overhead camshaft engine shall conform
to the following specifications. The nominal bore is 90.84mm and the
nominal stroke is 76.95mm (Note: All blocks shall contain casting number
HM6015BA, HM6015AA, HM6015BB, HM6015AB, HM6015DA, or
HM6015AD. Dashes in the casting number are not relevant.). Production tolerances are permitted providing the total swept volume does not
exceed 2000cc.
a.
The rockers shall remain entirely unmodified. Alternate manufacturers may be used as long as the original materials and dimensions
are the same. Camshafts must be from Ford Motor Company, or
Crower part # E-57553 FF2000, or from the approved supplier.
Camshaft geometry shall be stock. Offset keys are permitted.
Tuftriding or Parkerizing is permitted. Maximum valve lift at determined points by camshaft rotation will be established. The use of
a low rate substitute valve spring is permitted. Load characteristics of special checking spring: twelve (12) lbs., at 1.417 inches,
thirty (30) lbs., at 1.000 inches. Maximum valve lift against cam
angle with zero tappet clearance: 0.400 +/- 0.005 An adjustable
camshaft sprocket which retains the same number of teeth and
pitch as the stock sprocket may be used.
b.
A standard crankshaft shall be used. Spot machining to achieve
balance is permitted. Tuftriding, Parkerizing, shot peening, shot
blasting, and polishing are permitted. Minimum weight: twentyseven point five (27.5) lbs.
c.
The flywheel shall be a standard component or the approved alternate Elite-001. The minimum weight is 14.4 lbs. with ring gear.
The flywheel may be machined to achieve minimum weight. Spot
machining to achieve balance is permitted. Flywheel bolts are free
and locating dowels are permitted. A 1600 GT starter ring may be
fitted. The use of any single plate clutch is permitted provided no
modification is made to the flywheel other than changing the points
of attachment of the clutch to the flywheel. Carbon fiber clutches
are not permitted.
d.
Maximum compression ratio will be controlled as follows:
1. Minimum Cylinder Head combustion chamber volume 49cc (not
including head gasket). Polishing and/or tooling of the cylinder
head to achieve only the required combustion chamber volume
is permitted.
e.
2.
Standard Ford gasket, Fel-Pro #8361PT, or Ferrea part number
G50100 may be used. Gaskets will have a minimum thickness
of 0.9mm, minimum diameter of cylinder aperture of 92mm.
3.
Pistons shall not protrude above cylinder block surface at
TDC.
It is permissible to reshape inlet and exhaust port by removal of
GCR - 193
FCS
The Ford Zetec ZX3 2 liter dual overhead camshaft engine (see section
B.4.)
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
metal within limits. Addition of material in any form is prohibited.
Maximum diameter of inlet port at manifold head face 39.5mm.
Maximum dimensions of exhaust port at manifold face 35.5mm x
27mm. The distance between the valve centers and the angles of
the valves shall not be altered.
f.
Pistons shall be standard Ford Mahle, AE Hepolite, or J&E. Pistons
must be unmodified in any way except for balancing and as detailed
herein.
The following combinations are permitted:
1. Mahle piston P/N 80HM6102LA with rings, pin, connecting rod
(with bolts), but without bearings:Minimum permitted weight
= 1332.5 grams.
2.
Mahle piston P/N 85HM6102DA with rings, pin, connecting
rod (with bolts), but without bearings: Minimum permitted
weight = 1240 grams.
NOTE: This piston may have either casting #90V108 or
#90V118.
3.
AE Hepolite piston P/N 21426, casting P/N 21426 (AE Hepolite) with rings, pin, connecting rod (with bolts), but without
bearings: Minimum permitted weight = 1240 grams.
4.
JE piston P/N M-6102-B200 with rings, pin, connecting rod
(with bolts), but without bearings: Minimum permitted weight
= 1240 grams.
NOTE: M-6102-B200 piston assembly is now made by JE and
is visually different. I.D. Marks: M-6102-B200, Ford racing
logo. All marks pin stamped on wrist pin bosses.
Rings are unrestricted provided that:
A. One oil control and two compression rings are used.
B. No modification is made to the piston for the installation of
the rings.
Localized machining of the gudgeon pin bosses to achieve
balance and weight by simple machining; all external surfaces,
dimensions, and profiles shall remain standard with the exception of the top surface of the piston crown which may have
simple machining to achieve balance, and as required in Section
9.1.1.B.3.c.
g.
Valves may be of Ford manufacture or Ferrea part numbers
VSOIN200 and VSOEX2000. Valves shall remain standard; no
reprofiling or polishing is permitted.
The original forty-five (45) degree seat angle shall be maintained.
Maximum face diameter inlet 42.2mm.
Maximum face diameter exhaust 36.2mm.
Maximum valve stem diameter 8.4mm.
h.
Full connectng rods may be standard Ford, Cosworth, Oliver, or
Crower. The approved Crower part numbers are SP93230B-4 or
SP93230PF-4. Any rod bolts may be used. Floating piston pins may
be used. Standard rod length must be 5.00 inches (+.005” -.010”).
Machining is permitted to remove metal from the balancing bosses
GCR - 194
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
i.
Maximum valve lift against cam angle with zero tappet clearance:
(Lift measured in mm)
Inlet
Exhaust
Angle
Opening
Closing
Opening
Closing
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
10.442
10.36
10.11
9.69
9.11
8.37
7.45
6.38
5.17
3.86
2.59
1.5
0.86
0.65
0.54
0.46
0.37
0.26
0.2
10.442
10.36
10.11
9.69
9.11
8.37
7.45
6.38
5.17
3.86
2.58
1.47
0.81
0.56
0.43
0.33
0.19
0.08
0.01
10.442
10.36
10.11
9.69
9.11
8.37
7.45
6.38
5.17
3.86
2.58
1.47
0.81
0.56
0.43
0.33
0.19
0.08
0.01
10.442
10.36
10.11
9.69
9.11
8.37
7.45
6.38
5.17
3.86
2.59
1.5
0.86
0.65
0.54
0.8
0.37
0.26
0.2
j.
Engines will be mounted upright, and aligned fore and aft in the
chassis.
k.
A single carburetor only will be used on a standard inlet manifold.
The carburetor will be a Weber 32/36 DGV 26/27mm venturi, its
origin being from a 1600 GT “Kent” or 2000 SOHC NE engine.
The Holly 5200 32/36 carburetor also may be used; carburetor
with the swaged fuel inlet fitting shall be replaced by drilling and
tapping the carburetor body for a threaded fitting. The air cleaner
may be removed and a trumpet fitted, and jets may be changed,
both throttles may open together, cold start devices and diffused
bar may be removed, internal and external antisurge pipes may be
fitted, and seals on emission control carburetors may be removed.
The bottom of the lower column portion of the auxiliary venturi
may be machined for purposes of high speed enrichment. No other
modifications are permitted. Chokes (venturi) shall remain standard
and no polishing or profiling is permitted.
l.
The addition of material by any means to any component is prohibited.
m. It is permitted, as a means of repair, to replace damaged valve
seats and cylinder bores by replacement cast iron valve seat inserts
and cast iron cylinder liners; valve guides may be replaced with
cast iron or bronze, all to standard dimensions. Repairs to the cam
towers to facilitate replacement of cam bearing and/or replacements of broken or cracked towers is permitted as long as the cam
bearing center line is not changed and that one original cam tower
is retained. Line boring of cam bearing caps is permitted.
n.
Balancing of reciprocating and rotating parts is permitted only by
removal of metal from locations so provided by the manufacturer.
GCR - 195
FCS
to achieve balance only. Tuftriding, Parkerizing, shot peening, shot
blasting, polishing, etc., are permitted.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
o.
Non-standard rocker covers are permitted providing they in no way
improve the performance of the engine.
p.
Standard valve spring retainers shall be used, and single valve
springs only are permitted. Shims are permitted, and valve springs
are otherwise free.
q.
Exhaust system and manifold are unrestricted, within SCCA safety
regulations.
r.
Lubrication system is unrestricted; dry sump is permitted. Localized
machining of the cylinder block is permitted to allow fitting of the
oil pump.
s.
Oil coolers are unrestricted.
t.
Cooling system unrestricted. The radiator, if housed in or incorporating a cowl air-scoop deflector, shall comply with body regulations.
u.
Fuel Pump: Unrestricted.
v.
Distributors are unrestricted providing they retain the original drive
and location. The distributor is defined as the component which
triggers the L.T. current and distributes the H.T. current. The Ignition Timing may only be varied by vacuum and/or mechanical
means. It is prohibited to use any other method or component to
trigger, distribute, or time the ignition.
w. Only the standard inlet manifold shall be used.
The ports may be reshaped by the removal of metal as long as the
following dimensions are maintained: maximum size at head face
= 1.437” (36.5mm), maximum size at carburetor flange = 3.405”
(86.5mm) x 1.595” (40.5mm). The carburetor seat face may be
machined to horizontal in the fore to aft plane. The diameter of the
ports may exceed the above listed dimensions if the casting bore is
untouched and in its original state. The water passages in the inlet
manifold may be plugged. Holes in the inlet manifold resulting from
the removal of emission/vacuum lines shall be plugged.
x.
Gaskets and seals are unrestricted except for the cylinder head
gasket that has the requirements listed in B.3.D.2. and the intake
gasket. The intake gasket thickness must not exceed 1.1mm.
Intake gasket is not to be construed as a spacer.
y.
Pump, fan, and generator drive pulleys are unrestricted.
z.
The crankcase breather may be altered or removed, but all breathers
shall discharge into a catch tank.
aa. Mechanical tachometer drives may be fitted.
bb. Generators are optional.
cc. Standard oversize and undersize bearings are permitted. This does
not allow reducing the bearing surface area by reducing the width
of standard bearings.
GCR - 196
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
ee. Only modifications or additions specifically covered by these regulations are permitted. All engine components not covered by these
regulations shall remain completely standard and unmodified.
ff. The use of the Fast Forward aluminum cylinder head is permitted.
B.4.
Engines - Zetec
The Ford Zetec ZX3 engine shall conform to the following specifications
and may be modified only as specifically allowed. If these specifications
do not explicitly allow a modification, then it may not be done. The philosophy of the Zetec engine in FC is to allow limited engine rebuilds but no
performance modifications to the engine. Blue printing, balancing, head
porting, polishing, etc. are strictly prohibited and against the spirit of the
Zetec formula. Where Ford part numbers are specified, normal industry
part number supersession is expected and the superseding part numbers
are automatically included.
a.
The cylinder head may not be ported, polished, or machined. A
standard three-angle “production” valve job is required and the
only allowed angles are those defined in the Ford factory manual.
The intake valve seats must be 30° 45° 70° with the 45° face
a minimum 1.5 mm wide. The exhaust valve seats must be 30°
45° 55° with the 45° seat 1.5 mm wide minimum. The camshaft,
valves, springs, and shim/bucket components must be original Ford
parts and may not be modified in any way. Only original unmodified Ford parts may be used for direct replacement. The camshafts
must remain as ground by Ford; no polishing is permitted. Valve
seats may not be replaced. The head may not be surfaced or milled
beyond the minimum thickness of 5.230” measured between the
cam cover seating surface and the lower plane of the head. Only
the Ford #RFYS4E6090AC head is allowed. The only allowed
camshafts are the Ford #L913B YSAA intake and #L913B C2B
exhaust. The original, unmodified Ford camshaft and crankshaft
timing pulleys must be used. Camshaft timing is unrestricted.
b.
Pistons, crankshaft, and rods may be replaced only with standard
original Ford replacement parts. The crankshaft may not be ground
or polished in any way and must have stock dimensioned main
and rod bearing journals. The rod journals must remain stock and
the rods may not be bored or remanufactured in any way. The rod
and crankshaft bearings may be replaced only with original sized
Ford bearings. Oversize bearings are not permitted. The required
crankshaft main bearing journal dimension is 2.282-2.283 inches
and the required crankshaft rod journal dimension is 1.846-1.847
inches. The crankshaft centerline to deck dimension is 8.378 inches
and may not be altered. The main bearing housing bore is 2.4522.453 inches and the rod housing bore is 1.9642-1.9650 inches.
Only original Ford rod bolts with a minimum weight of 24.6 grams
or ARP rod bolts with a minimum weight of 23.5 grams may be
used.
c.
Only original stock Ford replacement piston rings may be used. The
ring end gaps may not be altered and must remain as manufactured
by Ford. All of the rings must be installed including the complete
oil scraper assembly. The piston bore may be honed solely to allow
GCR - 197
FCS
dd. The use of non-standard replacement fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws,
studs, and washers) which are not connected with or which do not
support the intake manifold or any moving parts of the engine is
permitted.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
piston ring seating. The first and second compression rings must be
installed in the positions designated by Ford.
d.
All surfaces on the head, block, rods, pistons, and crankshaft must
remain as manufactured by Ford and may not be altered in any
way. The original casting marks and cast surfaces must remain ascast and also meet all of the Ford design values and tolerances as
stated in the Ford factory manual or as delineated in these specifications. The block may not be decked. Only Ford Zetec ZX3 blocks
with block numbers #RFYS4G6015AA or #RFYS4G6015AD are
permitted. The required compression ratio is 9.6:1, the required
standard bore is 3.3390 – 3.3410 inches and the required stroke
is 3.461 inches. The maximum bore dimension of 3.3410 inch
is intended to allow for cylinder wear only. It is not permitted to
machine to this dimension. This measurement will be taken .250
below the block deck where the bore is untouched by the piston
ring.
e.
Flywheel: The minimum weight is 8.0 lbs. and any weight removal
from the specified flywheel must come from the clutch plate
surface. Only the Quarter Master #QM107160 flywheel may be
used.
f.
Any 7¼ inch single plate or double plate, non-carbon fiber clutch is
allowed.
g.
Any oil pan is allowed. The oil pan may not contain an oil scraper
between the oil pan and the block. No device in the oil pan may be
contoured to the crankshaft assembly to function as an oil scraper
nor may any device be closer to the rotating crankshaft assembly
than 0.5 inches.
h.
Any three-stage oil pump with a maximum of two scavenge stages
is allowed. The maximum scavenge rotor dimensions are 1.375
inches in diameter and 1.600 inches in length. The minimum pressure rotor dimensions are 0.863 inches in diameter and 1.600
inches in length.
i.
The exhaust system manifold tubing OD must be 1.5 inches and
the manifold tubes must be a minimum of 24 inches in length
and must terminate into a single exhaust pipe through a 4 into
1 collector. The collector angles must be the standard 15 degree
bend, (30 degree included angle) with an exit diameter of 2 inches.
The tail pipe must be a minimum of 24 inches in length. The tail
pipe includes a muffler, if present, as long as the inlet and outlet
pipes of the muffler are the same diameter as the tail pipe. 4 into 2
into 1 exhaust collectors or reduced diameter venturi sections are
prohibited.
j.
ECU: The Pectel T2 unit is required. The current specification
“SCCA Club” map is required. Failure to use the current “SCCA
Club” map will result in an automatic penalty of 1 year suspension
from SCCA club racing. The map is available at the SCCA web
site.
k.
Intake manifold and fuel injection components: The Quicksilver
RacEngines (QSRE) intake manifold, throttle bodies, air horns, fuel
rail and injector system are required and must be used with no
modifications of any kind. The only allowed intake manifold and
throttle body combination is the #0138 manifold available through
GCR - 198
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
l.
Intake restrictor: The QSRE #1975 intake restrictor must be used.
It must not be modified in any way. The restrictor internal diameter
is 1.295 inches and this value cannot be exceeded in any measurement of the diameter. The restrictor port centerlines or shape may
not be altered.
m. Engines will be mounted and aligned fore and aft in the chassis
n.
The addition of material by any means to any component is prohibited
o.
Non-standard rocker covers are permitted providing they in no way
improve the performance of the engine.
p.
Oil coolers are unrestricted.
q.
A liquid cooling system is mandatory, but radiator and water pump
are unrestricted.
r.
Fuel pump is unrestricted.
s.
Gaskets and seals are unrestricted except for
1. cylinder head gasket, Ford part number XS7Z6051CA
2.
a continuous o-ring of cross-section of 0.100 inches must be
fitted to each intake runner groove between the intake manifold and the head which to ensures that no air by-passes the
o-ring seal
t.
Pump, fan, and generator drive pulleys are unrestricted.
u.
The use of non-standard replacement fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws,
studs, and washers) which are not connected with or which do not
support the intake manifold or any moving parts of the engine are
permitted.
B.5.
Suspension
All parts shall be of steel or ferrous material, with the exception of hubs,
hub adapters, hub carriers, bell cranks, pivot blocks, bearings and bushes,
spring caps, abutment nuts, anti-roll bar links, shock absorber caps, and
nuts. Titanium is prohibited.
Springs: Steel only.
Shock Absorbers: Steel or aluminum alloy body.
B.6.
Brakes Unrestricted (with the below restrictions)
Brake rotors and calipers must be ferrous.
B.7.
Steering Unrestricted
B.8.
Wheels and Tires
Thirteen (13) inch diameter wheels with a maximum front rim width of
six (6) inch and rear of eight (8) inch are the only wheel sizes permitted.
Material is unrestricted providing it is metal.
GCR - 199
FCS
QSRE. Only stock Ford fuel injectors may be used and they may not
be modified in any way. Fuel injectors may be replaced only with
stock Ford injector part number #0280155887 XS4U-AA.
9.1.1.
B.9.
a.
Formula Car Category Specifications
Transmission
The gearbox shall contain not more than four (4) forward gears and
include an operable reverse gear, capable of being engaged by the
driver while normally seated. The ratios are unrestricted.
1.
The use of automatic and/or sequentially shifted gearbox is
prohibited.
2.
Electronic assisted gear change mechanisms and electronically
controlled differentials are prohibited.
3.
Gearboxes with shafts that are transverse to the longitudinal
axis of the chassis are not allowed. The sole exception are
the gearbox final drive (crownwheel) shaft axis and final drive
shafts (half shafts). All change gears must be located in the
case aft of the final drive.
b.
Rear wheel drive only is permitted.
c.
Final drive ratio is unrestricted.
d.
The differential cannot be modified in any way to limit its normal
function. Torque biasing, limited slip, and locked differentials are
prohibited.
B.10.
Fuel Capacity: Maximum capacity 41 liters (10.83 gallons)
B.11.
Weight
Pinto Engine - 1190 lbs.
Pinto w/ aluminum cyl. head - 1215 lbs.
Zetec Engine - 1220 lbs.
B.12. Converted Formula Ford: cars shall reapply for homologation as
Formula C cars and meet the 1986 construction rules for Formula Ford.
FC Dimensions - Table 4
Dimension (refer to drawing)
Measurement (cm)
A. Maximum rear overhang from rear wheel axis
B. Maximum front overhang from front wheel axis
C. Maximum height measured from the ground
D. Exhaust height measured from the ground
80
100
90
20-60
E. Maximum height of any aerodynamic device
F. Minimum safety rollover bar height inline with driver’s spine
G. Minimum allowed helmet clearance
Rim height
92
5
H. Maximum width
185
I. Maximum rear aerofoil width (includes endplates)
J. Maximum body width behind front wheels
95
95
K. Maximum nose width
135
L. Minimum cockpit opening
45
M. Minimum cockpit parallel opening length
30
N. Minimum cockpit overall opening length
60
S. Maximum exhaust length from rear wheel axis
80
7. Minimum wheelbase
200
5. Minimum track
120
GCR - 200
Formula Car Category Specifications
F-2000 SPECIFICATION
1. Safety roll-over bar.
5. Front track.
2. Substantial support structure.
6. Rear track.
3. Crushable structure.
7. Wheelbase
4. Substantial structure.
Maximum height is measured with the driver aboard.
Maximum height excludes safety rollover bar on which there is no
maximum height.
Note: Dimensions shown at the rear refer to the rear while those shown
at the front refer to the front.
GCR - 201
FCS
9.1.1.
9.1.1.
C.
Formula Car Category Specifications
FORMULA VEE PREPARATION RULES
C.1.
Background
A. History and philosophy of the class
Formula Vee was recognized by SCCA in 1963. The class is highly
restricted, originally requiring the use of genuine VW parts “from the
standard Volkswagen 1200 Sedan Series type 1, US model sedan as
imported by VW” in the engine, drivetrain and suspension. Over the
years, the rules have changed slowly to maintain parts availability and
allow a gradual evolution of the class. However, the focus remains
the same: to provide a cost effective, highly competitive class that,
through consistent and tightly controlled component and preparation
rules, emphasizes driver ability rather than technological development
of the car. Today, as throughout its long history, FV is one of the most
highly subscribed classes in SCCA. The goal of these rules is to maintain both the competitiveness and cost effectiveness of the class.
B. Definition
A formula for single seat, open wheel racing cars based on standard
Volkswagen 1200 series Type 1, U.S. model sedan (imported by VW)
components, and restrictive in specifications so as to emphasize driver
ability and preparation rather than design and technology of the car.
Formula Vee is a Restricted Class. Therefore, any allowable modifications, changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF IN DOUBT, DON’T. Homologation is required for all cars registered after January 1, 1983.
No component of the engine, power train, front suspension, brakes
shall be altered, modified, or substituted unless specifically authorized.
Mass-produced, direct replacement components may be substituted for
the following as long as they are of the same material and dimensionally
identical to the original VW components they replace:
•
VW transmission components
•
Rear axle components
•
Front suspension
•
Brake components
These replacement parts must be generally available to all competitors
and must offer no competitive advantage over the original VW parts.
Replacement engine components are allowed as described in section
C.5.
Any external surface of the suspension, brakes, and transmission/ rear
axle may be painted, plated, or anodized.
Engine components shall be assembled in standard configuration.
Exceeding the wear limits specified in the VW manual or other official
VW guides is allowed provided that tolerances, dimensions, and specifications stated in the GCR are met.
C.2.
Weight and Dimensions
Minimum weight as qualified or raced, with driver: 1025 lbs.
Wheel base, minimum:
81.5”
Wheel base, maximum:
83.5”
Track, front: Standard VW – maximum 52.5” (no spacers allowed)
Track, rear:
49-13/16” + 7/8” - 5/8”
Overall length, minimum:
123” (includes exhaust)
GCR - 202
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
C.3.
Suspension
A. The front suspension and steering shall be standard VW Sedan as
defined herein, or an exact replica of the same material and dimensionally identical. The following modifications are allowed:
1.
Removal or modification of spring packs including the use of
ride height adjusters incorporated into the front beam provided
they are not adjustable from the cockpit. At least one spring
pack shall be retained as the primary spring media for the front
suspension.
2.
The use of any anti sway bar(s), mounting hardware, and
trailing arm locating spacers.
3.
The use of any direct acting, tube type shock absorber(s)
mounted in a longitudinal, vertical plane and acting through the
standard mounting points. Spring shocks and linkage activated
shocks are prohibited.
4.
Relocation of the steering gearbox to any position utilizing an
appropriate mounting structure and replacements of the tie
rods. Steering damper mount and/or the steering box locating
bumps may be removed.
5.
Any desired pitman arm may be used.
6.
Steering column may be altered or replaced and any steering
wheel may be used.
7.
Standard steering arms may be altered or replaced and speedometer cable hole may be plugged. No other modification of
the wheel spindle is permitted. Non-VW replacement spindles
shall maintain the same bearing dimensions and locations and
shall maintain the geometric relationship between the spindle
and the king pin bore and boss.
Wheel tethers are recommended. If wheel tethers are used,
a hole may be drilled in the spindle for the purpose of attachment.
8.
The rubber portion only of the bump stop may be altered or
removed.
9.
Caster, camber, and toe in/out settings are unrestricted. Clearancing of carrier or trailing arm to eliminate binding is permitted.
Offset suspension bushings and alternate locating spacers are
permitted.
10. No structure, item, or component (including the battery) other
than bodywork, can protrude further forward than ten (10)
inches from the front of the lower axle beam tube. Any item
protruding further than eight (8) inches must include a vertical
safety plate. This plate must be constructed of no less than
.060” 6061-T-6 aluminum or no less than 16 gauge steel. The
plate shall have a minimum frontal surface area of 42 square
inches, and shall have a height of not less than four (4) inches
GCR - 203
FCS
Overall length, maximum:
127” (includes exhaust)
Body height at firewall (bottom of frame to top of bodywork),
minimum:
25”
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
and a width of not less than six (6) inches. The plate may
have no more than ½ inch curvature or deflection from the
vertical plane, and shall be attached to the chassis (frame) at
all four corners. The lower braces shall not exceed a 15-degree
upward angle when measured from the horizontal plane of the
lower frame tubes.
If a vented lead acid battery is mounted in front of the axle
beam, it shall be encased in a marine-type container.
It is recommended that the front area of the nose be filled with
foam to aid in impact absorption.
B.
The rear axle assembly shall be standard VW sedan as defined
herein with axle location provided by a single locating arm on each
axle.
1.
The rear axle tube may be rotated about its axis.
2.
Coil spring(s) shall provide the primary springing medium, with
telescopic shock absorber(s) mounted inside the spring(s).
Cables, straps, or other positive stops may be used to limit
positive camber. An anti roll bar or camber control device may
also be used. When said anti roll bar or camber control device
is removed, the required coil springs shall continue to perform
functionally.
3.
The shock absorber mounts may be modified.
C. Wheels shall be standard fifteen (15) inch X 4J as used on the
1200cc and 1300cc VW sedan as defined herein, or any steel (15)
inch X 4.5J wheel within the track dimensions of C.2. Wheels
may be balanced only by the use of standard automotive balance
weights (adhesive or clip on). Hub cap clips shall be removed.
D. Any tire size may be fitted, except that ungrooved radial race tires
(radial slicks) are not allowed.
C.4.
Brakes
A. Brake drums, backing plates, and wheel cylinders shall be standard
VW Sedan as defined herein, or an exact replica of the same material and dimensionally identical. Ribbed type rear drums (VW Part
# N113-501 615 D or ICP Part # 113 501 615 D) may be used in
place of the 1200 series rear brake drums. Rear backing plates may
be from any Type 1 model year.
B.
These cars shall be equipped with a dual braking system operated
by a single control. In case of a leak or failure at any point in the
system, effective braking power shall be maintained on at least two
wheels. Any master cylinder(s) may be used.
C. A separate hand brake (emergency brake) is not required. Removal
of the hand brake and operating mechanism is permitted.
C.5.
Engine
A. The engine shall be a standard VW power plant, as normally fitted
to VW sedans as defined herein. Any engine part(s), listed by the
manufacturer (VW) as a current, superseding, replacement part for
the standard VW 1200 series, Type 1, U.S. model sedan and interchangeable with the original part(s), may be used. Turbocharging is
GCR - 204
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
not permitted.
The engine/transmission shall be mounted in the chassis with the
transmission to the rear.
C. The following component parts may be replaced with that of other
manufacture, provided said part is of the same material, is dimensionally identical, and meets all other tolerances and specifications
stated in the GCR.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Engine Case – Type I or Type III style single or dual relief cases
only
Cylinder Heads
Cylinders (an O ring for centering is permitted).
Pistons and wrist pins minimum combined weight without clips
or piston rings = 330.0 grams
Cam followers Minimum weight = 60.0 grams
Connecting rods with bolts and small end bushing minimum
weight = 425.0 grams
Oil pump exact replica of any standard VW oil pump
Distributor
Ignition points or drop-in ignition triggering module (e.g.,
Pertonix)
Distributor cap
Fuel pump any standard type VW fuel pump which can be
fitted without modification of any other part
Crankshaft minimum weight sixteen (16) lbs.
Crankshaft gear
Flywheel minimum weight twelve (12) lbs.
Pressure plate, or alternate SACHS 211 141 025 DAM pressure plate
Clutch disc – 180mm nominal diameter only
Throw out bearing
Push rods
Push rod tubes
D. Allowed Modifications
1. Replacement of standard exhaust system with any exhaust
system terminating one (1) to three (3) inches behind the rearmost part of the body.
2.
Lightening of the flywheel to a minimum of twelve (12) lbs.
3.
Balancing of all moving parts of the engine, provided such
balancing does not remove more material than is necessary to
achieve the balance except on those component parts where
weights are specified.
4.
The crankshaft may be ground and the case may be machined
to accommodate the use of standard factory oversize/undersize crankshaft bearings, provided the crankshaft location is
not changed.
5.
Where minimum weights are specified, any lightening is permissible provided the original part complied with the dimensional
restrictions set forth.
6.
The following standard dimensions and tolerances of
engine components are included as information and shall be
observed:
GCR - 205
FCS
B.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
a.
Maximum bore: 3.040 inches
b.
Stroke: 2.520 inches +/ 0.005 inch.
c.
Minimum capacity of combustion chamber in head: 43.0cc
(Polishing and/or tooling is prohibited.)
d.
Minimum depth, top of cylinder barrel to top of piston:
0.039 inch.
The above dimensions may be achieved by machining any
previously machined surface, provided that the total surface
is machined on the same plane as the previously machined
surface. The above dimensions shall be the average of all four
(4) cylinders.
7.
Complete or partial removal of any cooling duct component.
Removal of the fan and the fan housing. Fan belt origin is unrestricted. The use of a fan belt is optional.
8.
Installation of a spark plug hole repair utilizing standard thread
repair methods, such as Helicoil or welding and rethreading
is permitted providing that the spark plug centerline is not
changed. The original size and shape of the combustion
chamber must be maintained.
9.
Polishing of the intake and exhaust ports, provided such
polishing does not enlarge the intake port beyond 29mm
(1.142”) inside diameter and the exhaust port beyond 33mm
(1.299”) inside diameter. The measurements are to be taken at
the juncture of the seat insert and the aluminum port material,
and at the manifold face. Valve seat angles shall be machined
as specified in the official VW Workshop Manual.
10. Replacement of intake and exhaust valve seats is allowed for
the purpose of repair only. Valve Seats may not be moved from
their original position. Welding is allowed to facilitate repair and
installation of replacement seats. The original size and shape of
the combustion chamber must be maintained. Installed seats
may neither be proud or recessed of the combustion chamber
surface.
GCR - 206
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
VW O.D.
(inches)
Max O.D.
(inches)
Max I.D.
(inches)
Max Depth
(inches)
Intake
1.385
1.445
1.142
0.375
Exhaust
1.265
1.315
1.299
0.375
Inside diameter of intake seat shall be 1.142” at the juncture of
the seat to the aluminum on original seats. A depth of 0.340”
from the combustion chamber on replacement seats. This is to
allow blending of the seat to the port. Valve seat angles may
not be larger than the outer diameter of the original VW seat
(1.385” intake, 1.265” exhaust).
11. The following standard dimensions are included for information
only and must be observed:
a.
b.
c.
Exhaust valve diameter: 1.102 or 1.18 inches
Intake valve diameter: 1.18 or 1.24 inches
Reprofiling of valves is not permitted.
12. Alternate exhaust valves are allowed provided the dimensions
and materials are the same as standard (VW) exhaust valves.
13. In addition to the original VW manufactured valve, any mass
produced, replacement intake valve may be used provided
the material, profile, and finish remain essentially identical to
the original VW valve, including the prominent lip at the inner
edge of the valve seat. The valve must also meet the following
dimensions:
stem diameter
0.305 inches minimum, measured
just below the keeper grooves
head diameter
1.24 inches maximum
length
4.450 inches maximum
valve face width
0.090 inches
distance from combustion chamber 0.020 - 0.090 inches
face to seat surface (including any
chamfer at valve head)
stem diameter within 1.25 inches 0.293 inches minimum
of the head of the valve
14. Valve springs are unrestricted providing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
No more than one spring shall be used per valve.
Any steel spring cap and retainers may be used.
Spring shall be made of steel.
Valve spring shims may be used.
15. Rocker arms may be lightened to a minimum weight of 80.0
grams. VW parts must be used, from 1200, 1300, 1500 or
1600 Type 1 engines; 1:1 or 1.1:1 ratios only.
16. Rocker arm shafts may be modified or replaced by those of
other manufacture, including shafts that replace the stock clips
GCR - 207
FCS
Seat Dimensions
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
with a solid center spacer and bolt on end caps/washers. Wave
type spacer washers may be replaced by solid steel type flat
washers.
17. The rocker arm shaft assembly may be shimmed out on the
cylinder head mounting studs by placing appropriate shims
between the cylinder head mounting boss and the blocks on
the rocker arm shaft assembly.
18. Valve covers are unrestricted and may be bolted on.
19. Fitting of any standard Solex 28 PCI or 28 PICT carburetor
and any jets may be used. Any venturi of standard VW/Solex
dimensions may be fitted without alteration to the carburetor
body. The venturi shall be fitted in the standard position, but
its internal diameter may be machined. The carburetor may
be rotated 180 degrees about its vertical axis. Modification of
the float is allowed as long as no change is made to the float
chamber and/or float valve.
The carburetor must remain untouched with the following
exceptions:
a.
No material shall be added.
b.
Bead blasting is permitted for cleaning only.
c.
Throttle shaft Shall be a minimum of 0.185” with throttle
plate installed. Machined sides shall remain flat and parallel
with no chamfering or radiusing.
d.
Throttle Plate Shall be a minimum of 0.053”, flat and
parallel with no chamfering or radiusing. Diameter shall be
a minimum of 1.095 inches.
e.
Carburetor Top The junction of the bowl and bore may be
radiused. The bore beneath the radius shall be a maximum
of 1.120 inches. Accelerator pump boss shall remain original. The orifice in the base of the accelerator pump boss
shall not allow a #56 (0.046 in.) drill bit to pass through
(maximum hole diameter shall be less than 0.046 in.).
f.
Carburetor Body The removal of flashing from internal
surfaces is permitted, but no additional material is to be
removed from the casting in the area of the bore, emulsion
tube carrier, or any carrier supports. Bore diameter from
throttle shaft down shall not exceed 1.110 inches.
g.
Carburetor air cleaner and choke mechanism may be
removed. Choke shaft holes may be plugged. Plugs may
not protrude into the choke bowl.
20. The manifold heat riser tube and heat sink shall be removed.
Removal of metal from the interior of the intake manifold and
the interior rust-proofed is permitted provided that the following
dimensions are not exceeded.
a.
Down Tube: The down tube shall be measured at two
different locations within an area between .500” and
2.00” above the horizontal manifold tube. Each measureGCR - 208
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
b.
Horizontal Tube: The horizontal tube shall be measured
at four different locations on each side of the down tube.
The area to be measured on each side of the down tube
is defined as being between the bend and a point that is
1.500” from the center of the down tube connection. Each
measurement will be taken four (4) times, rotating around
the circumference of the tube, and averaged. Averaged
horizontal tube dimension shall not exceed 0.994 inches
O.D.
c.
The manifold shall not weigh less than 24 ounces.
d.
All exterior surfaces shall be in original condition and
unpainted but may have a thin, transparent coat of rust
proofing material.
e.
Matching of manifold flanges is permitted.
21. Voltage regulator, generator, and/or generator stand may be
removed.
22. Fitting of any standard VW distributor (not restricted to 1200,
series) may be used. Use of any standard 6- or 12-volt non
transistorized ignition coil is allowed. Coil mounting location is
unrestricted.
23. A VW “D” camshaft, Part Numbers 113 109 015D,113 109
017D, 113 109 019D, 113 109 021D,113 109 023D, 113 109
025D, 13 109 027D, or an exact replica of the same material
and dimensionally identical shall be used. The maximum lift at
the valve spring collar with zero valve clearance is as follows:
a.
b.
Intake
Exhaust
.354” + 0.000”
.3365” + 0.000”
The camshaft profile shall match those which are specified
by the official SCCA camshaft plots, plus or minus .002 inch.
It is permitted to regrind the camshaft to duplicate the official SCCA profile. In so doing, the relationship between the
centerlines of peak lift at the exhaust/intake lobes shall remain
at 214 degrees fifteen (15) minutes, plus or minus 1degree.
(Reference the Official SCCA Camshaft Checking Procedure).
The camshaft timing may be changed in relationship to the
crankshaft by utilizing an offset key at the crankshaft timing
gear. The camshaft timing may also be changed in its relationship to the crankshaft by utilizing an adjustable cam gear
that retains the existing helical gear thrust angle and that is
statically adjustable only (e.g., no dynamic adjustment mechanisms that respond to engine speed changes). Camshaft timing
is unrestricted within the restrictions provided as authorized
above. The camshaft profile shall be checked using the official
procedure published by the SCCA.
24. The crankcase may be machined to permit the use of standard
VW camshaft bearing inserts, provided that camshaft location
is not changed.
GCR - 209
FCS
ment shall be taken four times, rotating around the circumference of the tube, and averaged. Averaged down tube
dimension shall not exceed 1.140 inches O.D.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
25. Crankshaft pulley is unrestricted and may be fitted with an oil
seal. The engine case may be machined to facilitate the installation of an oil seal.
26. The installation of baffles housed completely within the original
oil sump and crankcase.
27. The use of any oil temperature indicating device.
28. The oil pump cover may be modified or replaced.
29. An oil sump extension may be fitted utilizing the oil strainer
cover plate, provided the extension does not extend horizontally beyond the edge of the oil strainer cover plate and the
capacity does not exceed 250cc. The oil pump pickup pipe
may be extended into the sump extension. Accumulators
(Accusump) may be fitted.
30. Replacement of oil galley plugs with threaded plugs.
31. A single standard automotive oil filter of not more than one
quart total capacity, and a suitable mounting bracket and bypass valve may be installed. Modification to the lubrication
system to facilitate installation of the oil filter is permitted. All
components shall be contained within the body to the rear of
the firewall.
32. Any oil cooler is allowed. Oil coolers shall be mounted
completely inside a plumb line extending downward from the
outermost edge of the bodywork.
33. An alternate oil pressure regulator spring and/or shims may be
used.
34. The standard clutch operating arm may be modified to allow its
attachment in any appropriate position. Dowel pinning of the
clutch pressure plate to the flywheel is permitted.
35. The use of any starter is permitted provided it can be fitted
without any modification to the engine/transmission.
C.6.
Transmission/Rear Axle
A. The transmission/rear axle assembly shall be standard VW sedan,
as defined herein.
B.
The synchromesh components shall be in place and operating on at
least three gears.
C. Reverse gear shall be operable from the driver’s seat.
D. Transmission shall not be installed in an inverted position.
E.
The differential cannot be modified in any way to limit its normal
function. Torque biasing, limited slip, and locked differentials are
prohibited.
F.
Allowed modifications:
Installation of any standard VW gear set which can be fitted without
modification of any component of the transmission or of the gear
GCR - 210
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
set itself and the transposing of the ring gear to provide proper axle
rotation. Permanent attachment of the synchro sleeve to 3rd and
4th gears is permitted.
Gear
Part Number
# of Teeth
Ratio
1st
113 311 251A
10:38
3.80
2nd
113 311 261
17:35
2.06
3rd
113 311 275
22:29
1.32
113 331 275B
23:29
1.26
113 331 275A
23:28
1.22
4th
211 311 341
28:23
0.82
113 311 341
27:24
0.89
Ring & Pinion
211 517 143A
8:35
4.375
311 517 143B
8:33
4.125
Part Number
# of Teeth
Ratio
1st
113 309 251
10:36
3.60
2nd
113 309 261A
17:33
1.94
113 309 261
17:32
1.88
113 309 275
23:28
1.22
Partly synchromeshed transmission
Gear
3rd
113 309 275A
22:27
1.23
4th
113 309 341A
28:23
0.82
Ring & Pinion
113 517 141B
7:31
4.43
There are different part numbers for various gears in addition to the
ones listed here. This in general indicates changes on the parts such
as:
Gear
Part Number
Ratio
Comment
4th
113 311 341
0.82
with key way
113 311 341A
0.82
with splines
113 517 143
4.125
6 mgt bolts
113 517 143
4.125
8 mgt bolts
Ring & Pinion
However, there are no other standard ratios than the ones listed here.
A gear removed from a transmission can be identified by the number
of teeth.
C.7.
Ballasting
Ballasting is permitted, per GCR.
C.8.
Frame
A. The frame/chassis shall be constructed of steel tubing of a
maximum diameter or width of 4 inches and be of a safe and suitable design.
GCR - 211
FCS
Fully synchromeshed transmission
9.1.1.
B.
Formula Car Category Specifications
The driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the rear of the front axle
beam tubes.
C. There shall not be frame/chassis rigidity or strength derived by
means other than the frame tubes. Stressed skin, monocoque, or
semi monocoque construction is not permitted, except that:
The firewall panel and undertray(s) may be rigidly attached to the
frame tubes.
D. The undertray (belly pan) from the nose to the rear roll hoop shall
not be wider than the bodywork at the bottom of the frame rail or
no more than 1/4 inch wider (on each side) than the frame rail when
the undertray has an upward turned edge that facilitates mounting
the undertray to the chassis or that facilitates mounting the body
to the chassis.
E.
Engine bay undertrays shall be no wider than the frame rails in this
area or no more than 1/4 inch wider (on each side) than the frame
rail when the undertray has an upward turned edge that facilitates
mounting the undertray to the chassis or that facilitates mounting
the body to the chassis.
F.
Any undertray(s) between the axle center lines shall be rigidly
attached to the frame provided the curvature of said tray(s),
measured vertically from the lowest point to the highest point at
their attachments to the frame rail members at their sides, shall not
exceed 1 inch and have no downward turned edges.
G. Transmission undertrays for cars with a rear subframe shall be no
wider than the subframe or no more than 1/4 inch wider (on each
side) than the subframe when the undertray has an upward turned
edge that facilitates mounting the undertray to the subframe or
that facilitates mounting the body to the subframe or 16 inches,
whichever is wider. For cars without a subframe, the tray shall be
no wider than 16 inches and shall not deviate more than 1 inch
from the horizontal plane. Undertray must be firmly attached and
have no downward turned edges.
H. The area between the upper and lower main frame tubes, or at
least 14 inches above the floor pan whichever is greater, from
the front roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead shall be
protected by one of the following methods to prevent the intrusion
of objects into the cockpit.
1.
Panel(s), minimum of either .060 inch heat-treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or 18 gauge steel, attached outside of
the main frame tubes.
2.
Reinforced body - at minimum, consisting of a double layer,
5 ounce bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorporated
into the body which shall be securely fastened to the frame.
For either method, fasteners shall be no closer than an average of
6 inch centers (no stress bearing panels). The material used for the
chassis braces in this area shall be at least equivalent to the roll
hoop brace material.
C.9.
Body
A. The chart (figure - Section C.12) illustrates both the intended
minimum frontal area and car configuration.
GCR - 212
9.1.1.
The rear bodywork shall enclose the engine by surrounding it from
a point no higher than the lower edge of the intake manifold and
extending from the front of the engine to its rear on each side.
C. The rear bodywork must have the ability to enclose the original
Volkswagen fan shroud mounted in its stock location (see illustration in Section C.12).
D. The top of the rear bodywork shall extend from the back of the
firewall to a point at least 16 inches to the rear of the centerline of
the rear axle.
E.
Any bodywork forward of the center of the torsion bar tubes shall
have a maximum width of 31.75 inches (80.645cm).
F.
No part of the frame or bodywork shall project beyond a plane
connecting the vertical centerline of the front and rear tires.
G. The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
removal or manipulation of any part or panel.
H. Wings (airfoils) are prohibited.
I.
Floor and safety equipment shall conform to Section 9 of the
GCR.
J.
A firewall to prevent passage of flame and debris between the
engine area and driver’s compartment shall extend the full width
of the cockpit and be at least equal to the top of the carburetor in
vertical height.
K.
Air ducting may be attached to the carburetor and/or the engine.
L.
Forward facing air ducts may be installed for the purpose of delivering cooling air directly to the engine, cylinder heads, oil cooler,
and/or carburetor. If these ducts are within the profile area defined
in Section C.12, then the ducted air must make a 90 degree bend
within the bodywork.
M. Air duct openings may be located within the cockpit area, and/or
penetrate the firewall, provided the duct is baffled or the firewall is
extended to prevent flame and debris from reaching the driver. Any
shape may be used to form firewall extension. Any other firewall
inlet shall also prohibit passage of flame and debris.
(Recommended: All of this extension be the same width as the
firewall, allowing for bodywork contour limitations, and extend in
a horizontal plane back 2 inches, minimum, past the carburetor
body.)
N. The bottom of any bodywork that extends below the frame members
shall be on the same flat plane as the undertray (ref. C.8) and shall
not deviate from that flat plane by more than 1 inch front to rear
effective for any newly registered cars after January 1, 1983.
O. The rear locating arm(s), coil spring(s), and shock absorber(s) shall
not be faired in and shall be visible from the side without removal
or manipulation of any part or panel.
GCR - 213
FCS
B.
Formula Car Category Specifications
9.1.1.
P.
Formula Car Category Specifications
The front suspension upright(s) (shock absorber mounts), shock
absorbers, and/or trailing arms shall not be faired in by covering or
shrouding away from the air-stream except that the front shocks
may be mounted behind the shock uprights.
C.10. Non-Standard Parts
The use of the following non standard replacement parts is permitted
provided that no unauthorized modification of any other component
results.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws, etc.)
Wiring
Gaskets and seals
Brake lines and fuel line
Spark plugs (maximum ½ inch reach)
Piston rings
Wheel bearings
Connecting rod bearings and crankshaft main bearings of same
type and size as standard VW
Brake shoes and brake lining
Valve guides
C.11. Battery
A. The use of any single 6- or 12- volt battery is permitted to power
the starter and engine ignition system.
B.
Any secondary batteries connected only to gauges, and communications or data acquisition equipment are allowed.
C.12. Front View
The following illustrates a fan shroud in its stock location.
GCR - 214
9.1.1.
D.
Formula Car Category Specifications
FORMULA FORD PREPARATION RULES
D.1.
Definition
A formula for single-seat, open-wheel racing cars using standard Ford
1600 “crossflow” pushrod engines and with firewall, floor, and safety
equipment conforming to the GCR.
Formula Ford is a Restricted class. Therefore, any allowable modifications, changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions.
IF IN DOUBT, DON’T. Homologation is required for all cars registered after
January 1, 1983.
D.2.
Engine
a. General
The engine shall be standard Ford 1600 GT “Kent” pushrod “crossflow”
as installed in the following vehicles:
Original Version: Cortina 1600 GT (through 1970 model)
Uprated version: Cortina 1600 GT (1971)
Components shall not be interchanged between the original and uprated
versions of the engine unless specifically authorized. Regulations
contained herein apply to both versions of the engine unless specifically stated otherwise.
The engine shall not be altered, modified, or changed in any respect
unless specifically authorized herein.
1.
The gasket face of the cylinder head may be resurfaced
provided the maximum compression ratio is not exceeded and
the minimum depth of the combustion chamber is maintained.
2.
Valve guides are unrestricted provided the position of the
valve is not changed. Standard Ford replacement valves, with
oversize stems, may be used as normal repair/maintenance
procedures. Specifications, under D.2.f., “Valves,” shall be
observed. It is permitted to recut or replace valve seats. Valve
seat angles are unrestricted.
Exhaust emission control, air pumps, and associated lines and
nozzles shall be completely removed. When these air nozzles
are removed from a cylinder head, the holes shall be completely
plugged. Balancing of all moving parts of the engine is permitted
provided that such balancing does not remove more material
than is necessary to achieve such balance. It is permitted to
polish parts of the engine providing the contour of the part is
not altered and can be recognized as the original part. Pistons
may be balanced to the minimum weight by removing weight
from the pin boss, the underside of the piston crown, or the
bottom edge of the skirt. “Gas porting”, re-profiling, or any
other modification to the piston, other than expressly permitted
herein, is prohibited.
Maximum compression ratio: 10.0 to 1 -- Original engine
9.3 to 1 -- Uprated engine
GCR - 215
FCS
NOTE: Contained herein are the 1986 Formula Ford chassis construction
requirements.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
The following specifications are used in determining
compression ratio:
Uprated 1.33cc - top ring to top of piston, -0.3cc - volume
of valve protrusion
Original: 1.64cc - top ring to top of piston
Both engines: 4.75cc - head gasket.
Compression ratio shall be checked using the official
procedure published by SCCA.
Minimum unswept volume per cylinder:
44.4cc (original engine with standard pistons)
45.1cc (original engine with .030”0/s pistons)
48.2cc (uprated engine with standard pistons)
b. Block
Bore: May be enlarged for clearance between cylinder and piston.
Cylinder liners may be fitted. The top surface of the block may be milled
or surface ground to obtain the maximum compression ratio specified
above. Any steel center main bearing cap may be used. The oil pump
mounting face on the block may be machined for the purpose of fitting
an oil pump.
The 1600 Pinto block, P/N DIFZ-6010-C, may be used as a replacement
for the Cortina GT block; Standard Pinto tappets, P/N DORY 6500A and
DIFZ 6500A may also be used when this block is used as a Cortina GT
replacement. 1600 Fiesta block permitted.
c. Cylinder Head
Ports may be reshaped by the removal of metal as long as the port
diameter at the manifold face of the head does not exceed the following
dimensions:
Inlet: 1.50” Exhaust: 1.16”
Combustion chamber (original engine only):
Minimum depth 0.115”
Maximum length: 3.15”
Minimum volume per cylinder: 7.8cc
Reshaping is prohibited.
The use of the Pierce aluminum cylinder head is permitted.
The standard head gasket shall be used. Head gaskets may be interchanged between the original and uprated versions of the engine.
Ford Pinto cylinder head P/N DORY 6049B is permitted on the Cortina
GT engine.
The following
1.
2.
3.
head gaskets are allowed:
Ford Part # 931M6051AA
Payen Part # AH-750
Felpro Part # 8360PT-1
d. Inlet Manifold
The ports may be reshaped by the removal of metal as long as the
GCR - 216
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
following dimensions are maintained:
Uprated
Engine
1.340”
1.340”
Maximum size at carburetor flange: see figure
Max. length: 3.80”
The carburetor face of the inlet manifold may be machined to the horizontal to compensate for fore/aft tilt of the carburetor.
The water passages in the inlet manifold may be plugged. Holes in the
inlet manifold resulting from the removal of emission/vacuum lines shall
be plugged.
e. Pistons
Standard 0.015 inch oversize or 0.030 inch over size pistons may be
used in the original engine. Standard or 0.005 inch oversize pistons
shall be used in the uprated engine.
Standard size AE pistons P/N 18649, casting P/N 18634, standard size
CP piston, part # 81-2 FF1600, or CP oversize piston, part # 81-2FF1600+5 may be used in the uprated engine.
Alternate piston identified as follows is allowed: P/N AE-M717D, casting
number 711 M 6110. AE Hepolite P/N 20552, Casting # 20548A.
Note: Mahle pistons are not allowed.
GCR - 217
FCS
Maximum Size at head face:
Original
Engine
Cyl. 1 & 4:
1.48” x 1.28”
Cyl. 2 & 3:
1.25”
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
Maximum diameter:
Standard:
0.005” o/s:
0.015” o/s:
0.030” o/s:
Depth of bowl:
Minimum volume of bowl:
Maximum diameter of bowl:
Centerline of wrist
pin to crown:
Overall height:
Minimum weight
w/rings & pin:
Weight of pin:
Original
Engine
Uprated
Engine
3.189”
Not Permitted
3.204
3.219”
0.500” ±.005”
31.5cc
2.28”
3.189”
3.194”
Not permitted
Not permitted
0.470” (minimum)
2.44”
2.50” CP Piston
1.737” +/- .002” 1.737 +/- .002”
3.30”
3.30”
2.80” CP Piston
525 grams
515 grams
115 +/- 2 grams
Piston rings are unrestricted provided that:
1. One oil control and two compression rings are used.
2. No modification is made to the piston for the installation of
rings.
3. Pocketing of the piston valve reliefs is allowed up to a maximum
of .050” to obtain the maximum combustion chamber
volume.
f.
Valves
Distance apart at centers:
Max. diameter:
Inlet:
Exhaust:
Overall length:
Inlet:
Exhaust:
Original Engine
Uprated Engine
1.540” +/- .020” 1.540” +/- .020”
1.502”
1.252”
1.560”
1.340”
4.280” +/- .006” 4.367” +/- .020”
4.260” +/- .006” 4.355” +/- .020”
Reshaping of the valves is specifically prohibited.
Alternate valve AE # V34524(intake), V34525(exhaust) are permitted.
g. Camshaft
The camshaft lobe profile shall not be altered. The following specifications are provided for checking purposes:
Lobes, heel to toe:
Inlet:
1.311” Maximum
Exhaust: 1.312” Maximum
Lobes, base circle radius:
Inlet:
0.540”
Exhaust: 0.545”
Lift at top of pushrod:
Inlet:
0.231” +/- .002” Maximum
Exhaust: 0.232” +/-.002” Maximum
Lift at spring cap:
Inlet:
0.356” Maximum
(Zero tappet setting)
Exhaust: 0.358” Maximum
GCR - 218
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
Note: Recontouring of the valve stem contact pad of the rocker
arm is permitted, provided the maximum lift at the spring cap is not
exceeded.
Camshaft profile and lobe centers shall be checked using the official
procedure published by SCCA.
A camshaft that is a replica of the original camshaft and of the same
material and dimensionally identical may be used.
h. Valve Springs
Valve springs and valve spring shims are unrestricted:
1. No more than one spring shall be used per valve.
2.
The standard spring cap and retainers shall be used.
3.
Spring shall be made of steel.
i.
Pushrod
Original Engine
Minimum stem diameter: 0.25”
Overall length:
7.64” Minimum
Minimum weight:
50 grams
j.
Connecting Rods
Any ferrous connecting rod may be used provided it meets a
minimum weight of 630 grams and has a center to center length
of 4.925 +/- 0.020 inches. (Note: Weights include cap, bolts,
and small end bush, but not big end bearing shells).
k. Crankshaft (Fiesta crankshaft permitted)
Alternate cast steel crankshaft is permitted with same weight as stock
crankshaft.
Weight: Original engine: 23 lbs. 8 oz. Minimum
Uprated and Fiesta Crankshaft: 24 lbs. 8 oz. Minimum
Stroke (at piston): 3.056” +/- .004”
Crankshaft pulley: unrestricted.
Either crankshaft may be used in either engine.
The crankshaft may be shot peened.
l. Flywheel
Weight with ring gear: 15.5 lbs minimum for the original and uprated
engine.
The flywheel may be machined provided the machining to reduce weight
to the above minimum weight retains the standard profile. Flywheel
locating dowels are permitted.
An alternate flywheel from JAE, part # JAE1600 is also allowed to the
above weight of 15.5 lbs.
m. Carburetor
Original Engine: Weber 32 DFM or DFD or Holley 5200
Venturi Diameter:
Primary: 26mm
GCR - 219
FCS
Offset camshaft/sprocket dowels are permitted.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
Secondary: 27mm
Uprated (Kent) Engine: Weber 32/36 DGV or Holley 5200
Venturi diameter:
Primary:
26mm
Secondary: 27mm
1.
The fitting of any jets (including accelerator pump discharge
nozzle) which may be fitted without modification to the carburetor body.
2.
Modification or substitution of external throttle linkage.
3.
The fitting of internal and/or external anti-surge pipes.
4.
The removal of the air cleaner.
5.
The fitting of a velocity stack (intake air horn).
6.
The removal of the choke butterflies and linkage.
7.
An alternate carburetor gasket is permitted provided it is the
same thickness as the original gasket.
8.
The carburetor housing may be modified for the installation
of throttle shaft bearings provided the modification serves no
other purpose.
n.
Fuel Pump: Unrestricted
o.
Exhaust Manifold: Unrestricted
p. Lubrication System
Oil pump and sump: Unrestricted
Dry sump system is permitted.
q. Cooling System
Radiator, fan, and water pump: Unrestricted
Pump/fan/generator drive belt: Unrestricted
r. Electrical Equipment
Distributor: Distributors are unrestricted provided the original drive, location, and housing (standard Motorcraft, Bosch, or Lucas) are retained.
The distributor is defined as the component that triggers the LT current
and distributes the HT current. The ignition timing may only be varied
by vacuum and/or mechanical means. It is prohibited to use any other
method or component to trigger, distribute, or time the ignition. Standard Motorcraft (Autolite), Bosch, or Lucas. The vacuum advance
mechanism may be removed, and the distributor advance plate may be
secured by soldering or welding or by suitable fasteners. The advance
curve and advance springs are unrestricted. Generator/ Alternators:
not required. All other electrical components are unrestricted. Mallory
distributor #4558101 is allowed.
s.
Miscellaneous
1. The timing chain/sprocket cover may be altered or replaced.
2.
The use of the following non-standard replacement parts is
permitted provided their use does not result in any unauthorized modification of any other component:
GCR - 220
Formula Car Category Specifications
A. Fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws, studs, etc.) except intake
manifold fasteners. Intake manifold fasteners may be of
either a socket head or hex head configuration.
B. Gaskets, except head gasket, carburetor to inlet manifold gasket, and inlet manifold to head gasket. Carburetor to inlet manifold gasket as used with Holley 5200 is
allowed.
C. Washers.
D. Seals.
E. Connecting rod, crankshaft, and camshaft bearings of the
same size and type as original. Normal oversize/undersize
bearings are permitted. This does not allow reducing the
bearing surface area by reducing the width of standard
bearings.
F. Spark plugs.
G. Rocker pedestals that are of the same material and dimensionally identical (i.e. shaft location, offset, etc.) to the
original components may be used.
3.
Mechanical tachometer drive is permitted.
4.
The crankcase breather may be altered or removed.
5.
The rocker cover may be altered to provide for crankcase ventilation, and the filler cap may be altered or replaced.
6.
The crankshaft and main bearing caps may be treated with
salt-bath nitriding cover under SAE specification AMS 2755A
(tuftriding, etc.)
7.
The use of any oil or lubricants.
8.
Valve or rocker covers may be substituted, provided that the
replacement cover affords no additional function than that of
the original stock cover.
9.
Water pump, fan, and generator/alternator pulley(s) are unrestricted.
10. Exhaust Outlets
Exhaust outlets on cars registered after January 1, 1986 shall
not extend more than 60cm (23.60”) behind the centerline of
the rear axle and shall be positioned between 30cm (11.8”)
and 60cm (23.6”) from the ground, measured to the bottom of
the exhaust pipe.
11. Exhaust Outlets: Cars registered prior to January 1, 1986.
A. It is recommended that all exhaust outlets be no longer
than 60cm (23.60”) behind the centerline of the rear axle
and positioned between 30cm (11.8”) and 60cm (23.6”)
from the ground.
B.
For cars unable to comply with the above rule (A.), they
shall have a support bracket that attaches within six (6)
inches of the outlet end, and the support bracket shall
extend no more than thirty (30) degrees from vertical to
the rear. Beginning January 1, 1986, it is mandatory for all
GCR - 221
FCS
9.1.1.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
Formula Ford cars.
D.3.
Transmission
Any transmission may be used with not more than four (4) forward gears
and an operational reverse gear.
a. The use of automatic and/or sequentially shifted gearbox is prohibited.
b.
Electronic assisted gear change mechanisms and electronically
controlled differentials are prohibited.
c.
Gearboxes with shafts that are transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the chassis are not allowed. The sole exception are the gearbox
final drive (crownwheel) shaft axis and final drive shafts (half
shafts). All change gears must be located in the case aft of the
final drive.
D.4.
Final Drive
Any final drive unit may be used except:
a. Drive shall be to rear wheels only.
b.
The differential cannot be modified in any way to limit its normal
function. Torque biasing, limited slip, and locked differentials are
prohibited.
D.5.
Clutch
The use of any single plate clutch is permitted provided no modification is
made to the flywheel other than changing the points of attachment of the
clutch to the flywheel, and provided that it shall have an operable clutch
system. Carbon Fiber clutches are not permitted.
D.6.
Chassis/Frame
Formula Ford 1986 construction requirements as of January 1, 1986. All
new Formula Ford cars are to be built to these specifications covered in
D.6., through D.7.h.. (Required for Formula 2000 also.)
a.
The chassis shall be of steel space frame construction. Monocoque-type structures are prohibited. Stabilized (honeycomb) or
composite (carbon fiber or Kevlar) materials are not permitted,
except as specifically authorized within these rules. Forward-facing
braces protecting the driver’s legs and feet shall extend from the
front roll hoop to the front bulkhead. (The front bulkhead is defined
as the furthest forward transverse section of the main frame.) The
soles of the driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the front edge of
the wheel rims (in normal position; i.e., pedals not depressed) and
shall remain behind the front bulkhead. The lower main frame rails
shall be a minimum of twenty-five (25) centimeters (9.84”) apart
(inside dimension) from the front bulkhead to the rear roll hoop.
b.
The area between the upper and lower main frame tubes from the
front roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead shall be
protected by one of the following methods to prevent the intrusion
of objects into the cockpit.
1.
Panel(s), minimum of either .060” heat treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or eighteen (18) gauge steel, attached
outside of the main frame tubes.
2.
Reinforced body - at minimum, consisting of a double layer,
five (5) oz., bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorpoGCR - 222
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
rated into the body which shall be securely fastened to the
frame.
c.
A stress-bearing floor pan/undertray, minimum of .060” heat
treated aluminum or eighteen (18) gauge steel, is required; at a
minimum this shall extend from the front bulkhead to the rear roll
hoop bulkhead. Its curvature shall not exceed one inch.
Sheet materials attached to the frame by welding, bonding, or by
rivets or threaded fasteners which are located closer than six (6)
inch centers, are defined as stress-bearing panels. Composite or
stabilized materials shall not be used for stress-bearing panels. The
mountings for brake and clutch pedals and cylinders (front bulkhead), instruments, (front roll hoop bulkhead), and rear roll hoop
bulkhead (behind the driver) may also be stress-bearing panels. No
other stress-bearing panels are permitted.
The firewall portion of the rear roll hoop bulkhead (panel) shall
extend the full width of the cockpit and be at least equal to the top
of the carburetor in vertical height. Forward facing air ducts may
be installed for the purpose of delivering air directly to the engine
area. Air duct openings may be located within the cockpit provided
the firewall is extended to prevent flame and debris from reaching
the driver. (Any shape may be used to form firewall extension.) All
firewall inlets shall prohibit passage of flame and debris.
Brackets for mounting components, such as the engine, transmission, suspension pickups, instruments, clutch and brake components, and body panels may be nonferrous, of any shape, and
fastened to the frame in any manner.
D.7.
Bodywork
a. The bodywork opening giving access to the cockpit shall have the
following minimal dimensions:
Length: 60cm (23.622 inches)
Width: 45cm (17.717 inches) This width extends over a length of
30cm (11.811 inches) minimum. This minimal rectangular opening
may exist anywhere forward of the bracing, and required padding
will not be considered in these dimensions.
b.
The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
manipulation or removal of any part or panel.
c.
Bodywork (including fuel tanks) shall not exceed a maximum width
of 95cm (37.44 inches). No part of the bodywork, rear spoiler, or
exhaust system shall extend more than 100cm (39 inches) behind
the centerline of the rear axle. Bodywork shall not increase in width
behind the centerline of the rear axle in any horizontal section.
There shall be no forward facing gaps or openings in the bodywork
with the exception of those necessary for engine cooling, engine air
inlet, shock, or brake cooling. All bodywork shall be firmly attached
to the chassis. Wings and other airfoil devices which create aerodynamic downforce are prohibited. No extension of the undertray
or attached components for the purpose of downforce or ground
effects are permitted. Any part of the car which has an influence
GCR - 223
FCS
For either method, fasteners shall be no closer than six (6) inch
centers (no stress-bearing panels). The material used for the
chassis braces in this area shall be at least equivalent to the
roll hoop brace material.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
on the aerodynamic stability of the vehicle shall be firmly attached
with no provisions for adjustment to vary downforce, except
that a single rear spoiler, which may be capable of adjustment, is
permitted. Cockpit adjustment is not permitted. This spoiler shall
be no wider than the surface to which it is attached, and there shall
be no gap between the spoiler and the body surface to which it is
attached.
d.
No part of the bodywork or rear spoiler shall exceed the height of
a horizontal plane 90cm (35.4 inches) above the ground, with the
car as qualified or raced, with driver aboard. The safety roll bar/roll
cage and engine air box are not included in this height restriction.
e.
It is the intent of these rules to minimize the use of “ground effects”
to achieve aerodynamic downforce on the vehicle. Thus, for the
full width of the body between the front and rear axles, the lower
surface (surface licked by the airstream) shall not exceed 2.54cm
(1 inch) deviation from the horizontal in any longitudinal section
through that surface. (This is not to be interpreted as requiring a
floor pan beneath the motor, transaxle, transmission, or final drive
housing.) Diffuser undertrays or venturi tunnels are prohibited. No
aerodynamic devices (e.g., skirts, body sides, etc.) may extend
more than 1cm (0.394 inches) below the lower surface of the floor
pan to the rear of the front axle. Seat buckets or other protrusions
shall not circumvent this rule. It is not permitted to duct air through
any part of the bodywork for the purpose of providing aerodynamic
downforce on the car. All ducted air for heat exchangers (water/oil)
shall pass through those heat exchangers.
f.
Fuel cell air vents shall be located at least 25cm (9.84 inches) to
the rear of the cockpit.
g.
Carbon fiber is not permitted.
D.8.
Suspension
Suspension is defined as the system of springs, shock absorbers, control
arms, links, etc., supporting the vehicle on its axles. Sway bars, sway bar
links, steering components, etc., are not classified as suspension for this
discussion.
All suspension components shall be of steel or ferrous material, with the
exception of hubs, hub adapters, hub carriers, bell cranks, pivot blocks,
bearings, and bushings. Front and rear hub carriers shall be only steel or
aluminum alloy for cars manufactured after January 1, 1983. Springs
shall be steel only.
Control arms and all associated items which attach directly to the chassis
members shall be boxed in or captured to prevent intrusion into the
cockpit.
Shock absorbers: Design - unrestricted; Casing Material steel or aluminum
alloy.
All components which are not defined as chassis/frame or suspension
are unrestricted, unless otherwise restricted by these rules or the GCR.
Titanium is prohibited.
It is not permitted to attach spoilers, fairings, or other devices which may
exert downforce to the movable suspension members. If the suspension
member is of streamline or airfoil cross section, it shall be symmetrical
GCR - 224
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
about its horizontal axis. Brake lines may be attached to the suspension.
Forward facing brake cooling ducts may be installed, but shall serve no
other function or purpose.
D.10. Wheels
Wheels are unrestricted except that:
a. Material is unrestricted providing it is metal.
b.
Diameter shall be thirteen (13) inches.
c.
Rim width shall not exceed 5.5 inches.
d.
Wheel covers, wheel fans, or any device to fair in the wheel is
prohibited.
D.11.
Weight
Minimum weight as qualified or raced, with driver:
1050 lbs. - Original Engine
1100 lbs. - Uprated Engine
D.12. Cars Registered Prior To 1/1/86
The following specifications are for cars registered prior to January 1,
1986 and for Technical Inspection only. No cars are to be built to these
specifications as of January 1, 1986.
A. Chassis/Frame
The chassis is defined as the frame. It shall be a steel space
frame. Monocoque-type structures are prohibited. Sheet material
affixed to the frame by welding, bonding, or riveting, or by bolts or
screws which are six (6) inch centers are defined as stress-bearing
panels.
The undertray, for safety reasons, shall be a stress-bearing panel.
Its curvature shall not exceed one (1) inch. The mountings for brake
and clutch pedals and cylinders, and for the instrument panel and
the bulkhead (panel) behind the driver may be stress-bearing. No
other stress-bearing panels are permitted.
Brackets for mounting components, such as the engine, transmission, suspension pick-ups, instruments, clutch, and brake components, and body panels may be non-ferrous, of any shape, and
fastened to the frame in any manner.
Gussets are defined as of steel, fastened to a maximum of two (2)
members, and are specifically permitted.
The firewall portion of the bulkhead (panel) shall extend the full
width of the cockpit and be as high as the top of the carburetor.
Forward facing air ducts may be installed for the purpose of delivering air directly to the engine area. Air duct openings may be
located within the cockpit provided the firewall is extended to
prevent flame and debris from reaching the driver. (Any shape may
be used to form firewall extension.) All firewall inlets shall prohibit
passage of flame and debris.
GCR - 225
FCS
D.9.
Brakes
Unrestricted, except that calipers shall be cast iron, and rotors are
restricted to ferrous material.
9.1.1.
B.
Formula Car Category Specifications
Suspension and Running Gear
Suspension is defined as the system of springs, shock absorbers,
A-arms, links, etc., supporting the vehicle on its axles. Sway bars,
sway bar links, steering rack housings, steering links, etc., are not
classified as suspension or running gear for this application.
All components shall be of steel, with the exception of hubs, hub
adapters, rear hub carriers, and bearings and bushings. Front hub
carrier material shall be of steel or aluminum alloy. The materials
for front and rear hub carriers on cars manufactured after January
1, 1983 will be only steel or aluminum alloy. Springs: steel only,
titanium is prohibited.
Shock absorbers: Design: Unrestricted.
Casing Material: Steel or aluminum alloy.
All components which are not defined as chassis/frame or suspension or running gear are unrestricted, unless otherwise restricted by
the GCR. Titanium is prohibited.
C. Body
1. Definition of Bodywork
Internally: All visible parts of the passenger compartment.
a.
The bodywork opening giving access to the cockpit shall
have the following minimal dimensions:
Length:
Width:
60cm (23.622 inches)
45cm (17.72 inches)
This width extends over a length of 30cm (11.811 inches)
minimum. This minimal rectangular opening may exist
anywhere forward of the firewall. Forward facing roll bar/
cage bracing and required padding will not be considered
in these dimensions.
b.
The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without
the manipulation or removal of any part or panel.
c.
Bodywork, including fuel tanks, shall not exceed a
maximum width of 95cm (37.4 inches).
d.
No part of the bodywork and aerodynamic devices shall
exceed the height of a horizontal plane 90cm (35.4 inches)
above the ground. The safety roll bar/roll cage and engine
air box are not included in this height restriction. Measurements are to be made in any condition, driver on board.
e.
No part of the bodywork shall extend more than 100cm
(39 inches) behind the centerline of the rear axles.
f.
Any specific part of the car which has an aerodynamic
influence on the stability of the vehicle shall be firmly fixed
with no provisions for adjustment to vary downforce.
g.
Side-mounted radiators (behind the front wheels) may
extend beyond the 95cm (37.4 inches) limitation, but not
beyond a vertical plane passing through the centerlines
of the front and rear tires. Any portion of a radiator that
GCR - 226
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
E.
2.
Wings and other airfoil devices which have the principal effect
of creating aerodynamic down-thrust are prohibited. Airfoil:
Any device or part of a car (excepting normal and conventionally styled bodywork) which has a principal effect of creating
aerodynamic downthrust. Within this definition may be included
forward facing gaps or openings in the bodywork, but shall not
include spoilers in the form of raised surfaces, continuous with
the body surface, and not wider than the body surface.
3.
It is the intent of these rules to minimize the use of “ground
effects” to achieve aerodynamic down-force on the vehicle.
Thus, for the full width of the body between the front and
rear axles, the lower surface (surface licked by the air-stream)
shall not exceed 2.54cm (1 inch) deviation from the horizontal
in any longitudinal section through that surface. (This is not
to be interpreted as requiring a floor pan beneath the motor,
transaxle, transmission, or final drive housing.) No aerodynamic devices (e.g., skirts, body sides, etc.) may extend more
than 1cm (0.394 inches) below the lower surface of the tub or
chassis floor to the rear of the front axle. Seat buckets or other
protrusions shall not circumvent this rule. It is not permitted
to duct air through any part of the bodywork for the purpose
of providing aerodynamic downforce on the car. All ducted air
for heat exchangers (water/oil) shall pass through those heat
exchangers.
4.
Fuel tank air vents shall be located at least 25cm (9.843
inches) to the rear of the cockpit.
FORMULA 500 PREPARATION RULES
E.1.
Definition
A class for single-seat, open-wheel, rigid-suspension race cars using snowmobile-derived engines and drive components. Specifications are restrictive in nature in order to emphasize driver ability rather than design.
Formula 500 is a Restricted class. Therefore, any allowable modifications,
changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF
IN DOUBT, DON’T. Homologation is required for all cars registered after
January 1, 1983.
E.2.
Weight and Dimensions
Minimum weight as qualified and raced, with driver, shall be 700 pounds
(800 lbs. for AMW and Rotax 494 engines, 825 lbs. for Rotax 493
engines).
Wheelbase:
Maximum
80”
Overall Length:
Minimum
110”
Maximum
150”
Overall Width:
Minimum
50”
Maximum
55”
E.3.
Suspension shall be restricted and of a safe, suitable design.
“Restricted” is defined as follows:
GCR - 227
FCS
extends beyond the 95cm (37.4 inches) limitation cannot
be covered with any type of shrouding. Radiators mounted
in front of the front wheels are considered front mounted
and cannot exceed the 95cm (37.4 inches) limitation.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
A. There shall be no springs or shock absorbers acting either directly
or indirectly between the frame/chassis and axle.
B.
Rear driving axle shall be of solid or tubular steel. Axle shall be one
piece live axle, driving both rear wheels. Trailing arms are allowed.
Differentials and/or slip joints are not permitted. The object of
E.3.B., is to eliminate independent rear suspension of any type,
or provision for lateral movement of the axle shaft to facilitate
independent-type suspension.
C. Blocks, bushings, and/or mounts of rubber or similar material shall
be used to isolate engine and drive assemblies, and/or axles from
vibration, shock, or track irregularities. The number of mounts shall
not exceed one (1) per wheel and shall not exceed one (1) inch in
thickness in uncompressed state nor shall they be stacked. The
diameter of the mounts shall not exceed two (2) times their thickness. The mounts shall carry the weight of the car. Installation will
be evaluated on compliance with both the letter and the intent of
this provision.
D. Front axle(s) design and/or mounting configuration shall be such
that the axle(s) does not function as a torsion bar. Split-axle/independent front suspension is permitted so long as suspension control
is effected solely by the mounting defined herein.
E.
Anti-sway bars are not permitted.
E.4.
Brakes
Brakes shall be foot-pedal operated, hydraulic disc or drum-type, acting
on all four wheels. The brakes shall be a dual system, arranged in a
manner to provide braking for at least two (2) wheels in the event of
failure in part of the system.
E.5.
Steering
Steering is unrestricted provided it is of a safe and suitable design.
E.6.
Transmission and Final Drive
Transmission of power from the engine to the rear wheels shall be through
an automatic torque converter-type, centrifugal variable ratio drive, using
a belt and/or drive chain and centrifugal clutch. Sprocket and/or pulley
diameters may be changed to alter the drive ratio. No electronically or
driver-controlled variable drive is permitted.
E.7.
Frame/Chassis
The frame/chassis assembly shall be constructed of steel tubing, and shall
be of a safe and suitable design. The monocoque-type chassis is permitted
but shall have reinforcement plates at all points of attachment for axles,
engine, drive components, roll cage, and driver restraint system. There
shall be a bulkhead incorporated in the chassis forward of the soles of the
driver’s feet with the pedals depressed. Forward-facing braces protecting
the driver’s legs and feet shall extend from the front roll hoop to the front
bulkhead.
The soles of the driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the front edge of
the wheel rims (in normal position; i.e., pedal not depressed).
E.8.
Roll Cage
Cars shall have a full roll cage complying with section 9.4, made of steel,
designed so that when viewed from overhead, an opening, having a
minimum width of fourteen (14) inches and a minimum length of sevenGCR - 228
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
E.9.
Bodywork
All mechanical components of the car, forward of the roll cage, shall be
covered by suitable bodywork. Exceptions are the wheels, brakes, front
suspension components, and the cockpit. Driver’s seat shall be capable
of being entered without the removal or manipulation of any part or panel.
Sports car noses are recommended provided they do not extend beyond
the outside edge of the front tires, do not stand taller than the top of
the front tires, and their rearward most portion does not extend beyond
an imaginary line drawn from the center of the front wheel, forty (40)
degrees forward from vertical.
Bodywork behind the front wheels and forward of the rear wheels shall
extend to within one (1) inch of a line connecting the outer edges of the
front and rear wheels. In a horizontal plane it shall begin within two (2)
inches (+ 1/2 inch) of the turned position of the front tire and extend to
within four (4) inches (+ 1/2 inch) of the rear tire. The sidepod(s) shall be
continuous from the outside edge of the main bodywork, at a minimum
height of nine (9) inches, maximum twelve (12) inches measured from the
bottom plane of the car. The sidepod(s) shall be closed across the front
except for air duct openings to heat exchanger(s), but ALL ducted air shall
pass through those exchanger(s). The sidepod(s) may be open to the rear.
Sidepod(s) is (are) intended to restrict wheel entanglement between cars.
The purpose of these rules is to eliminate the use of “ground effects” to
achieve aerodynamic downforce on the vehicle. Thus, for full width of
the body between the front and rear axles, the lower surface (surface
licked by the airstream) shall not exceed 2.54cm (1 inch) deviation from
the horizontal in any longitudinal section through that surface. (This is not
to be interpreted as requiring a floor pan beneath the motor or rear axle.)
The bodywork shall not extend below the surface of the tub or chassis
floor to the rear of the front axle. Seat bucket or other protrusions shall
not circumvent this rule. It is not permitted to duct air through any part
of the bodywork for the purpose of providing aerodynamic downforce on
the car. Wings are prohibited.
E.10.
Tires
Any recognized ten (10) inch racing tire with any tread width up to a
designed 7.5 inch width may be used. Any HR rated radial tire may be
used as a rain tire.
GCR - 229
FCS
teen (17) inches is available for driver extraction under emergency conditions.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
E.11.
Wheels
Wheels shall not exceed a ten (10) inch diameter and 8.5 inch width.
E.12.
Ballast
Ballast may be added to meet the minimum weight requirement provided
it is securely mounted within the bodywork and serves no other purpose.
It is recommended that underweight cars be brought to the minimum
limit by adding strengthening material to areas providing driver protection;
i.e., roll cages, frame rails, etc., rather than simply bolting in additional
weight.
E.13.
Fuel Tank
The fuel container shall be located within the bodywork, ahead of the rear
wheels and behind the centerline of the front wheels.
E.14.
Engines
Engines shall be two-cylinder, two-cycle, water-cooled in stock configuration as listed below: Fuji “Chaparral” Model G44bw. “Kawasaki TC440A”/
C-200, B-201, C-201, C-202, F-202, and G-203. The F-202 and the
G-203 are electric start engines. Cylinder head P/N 440/2A is permitted
for the engines listed. Only the “A” series engine is legal; the use of any
parts from other Kawasaki series engines is prohibited. Rotax Model 494
and Model 493, single expansion chamber and electric and/or pull starter.
Rotax 494 RAVE engine not allowed.
AMW engine as specified:
The AMW engine approved for F500 shall be the AMW model no. 2502 RC2, two-cylinder, two cycle, liquid cooled, reed valve engine with a
nominal bore and stroke of 72mm x 61mm and a displacement of 497cc.
All components of the engine shall be in “as cast” condition or as delivered from AMW. No component of the engine may be altered, modified,
or changed nor be of any other origin than the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) unless specifically authorized in these rules. Any Y-pipe
exhaust manifold and single expansion chamber meeting 9.1.1.E.14.B is
permitted. All factory technical bulletins shall be approved by the Club
Racing Board prior to implementation and publication. AMW Technical
Bulletins #10/96.01, Published October 1996, #03/97.01, Published
January 1997 and Technical Bulletin #04/99.01, Published February
1999, have been approved by the Club Racing Board.
The engine must be installed in the chassis so that the exhaust ports face
the front of the car. The engine may be inclinded from vertical.
Hardware items (nuts, bolts, etc.) may be replaced with similar items
performing the same fastening function(s).
No component of approved engines may be altered, modified, or changed,
nor be of any other than original equipment manufacture unless specifically authorized. Engine components shall be assembled in stock configuration. Stock configuration is defined as including: thermostat, water
outlet elbow, ignition harness, etc.
Authorized Changes:
A. Carburetors: The induction system is restricted to two (2) 38mm
Mikuni VM 38 round slide carburetors (except AMW). No modifications are permitted to the carburetor bodies. The use of any jets or
jet needles is permitted.
Carburetor mounting shall be of individual runners, no balance
GCR - 230
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
B.
Any exhaust pipe(s) may be used (unless otherwise specified).
Maximum exhaust length behind the rear axle centerline is twentyfour (24) inches. It is the intent of this rule that the exhaust pipe
includes the exhaust manifold.
C. Alternate piston replacement for Chaparral engine only, “Wiseco”
one-ring piston.
D. Any thermostat may be used.
E.
Alternate AMW/Wiseco piston (#2687) is permitted.
F.
Engine specifications will not be changed during the current year.
G. Rotax 494 and 493 engines: Any Rotax 494 or 493 respectively,
model thermostat housing or water outlet elbow may be used. The
water bypass may be blocked.
H. Rotax 494 engine only: Rotax OEM 0.010” overbore piston P/N
887-554 is permitted. Engines may be overbored as specified by
Rotax so that this piston may be fitted.
I.
Alternate WISECO piston (#2084PS) is permitted (for Kawasaki
engine only).
J.
Rotax 493 engine only: Rotax OEM 0.010” overbore piston P/N
420888443 is permitted. Engines may be overbored as specified
by Rotax so that this piston may be fitted.
E.15.
Chain/Belt Guards
Protective guards made from 1/8” aluminum or 3/32” steel are required
where belt or chain breakage could result in injury to the driver or damage
to items necessary for the safe operation of the vehicle. This includes,
but is not limited to, fuel lines, fuel tanks, brake lines, radiator, and water
hoses.
E.16.
Radiator
Capacity, size, shape, location, and number are unrestricted. Overhead
radiators shall be at least six (6) inches rearward of driver’s head.
E.17.
Safety Items
In addition to previously mentioned items, the following equipment is
required. Vehicle will be fitted with:
A. Mirrors affording the driver clear fields of vision behind him/her,
and on both sides of the car.
B.
Cars shall not be started with rear wheels on the ground unless a
driver is on board.
GCR - 231
FCS
pipes, no plenums unless fitted as standard as on the 493 engine.
Supercharging, turbocharging, and direct fuel injection are prohibited.
9.1.1.
F.
Formula Car Category Specifications
FORMULA MAZDA
F.1.
Eligibility
Only cars homologated as Formula Mazda are eligible for competition in
this class.
F.2.
Formula Mazda Description
Formula Mazda cars are one design, single seat, open wheel automobiles
conforming to safety standards as per regulations. Engine - Mazda 13B
rotary as approved by SCCA Club Racing.
F.3.
The Intent of the Rules
All components of the car shall be purchased from Star Race Cars, sourced
from the supplying manufacturer to Star Race Cars or fabricated as exact
replicas of components supplied by Star Race Cars. It is the explicit intention of these rules and regulations to prohibit innovation and alteration of
the cars except as provided by these regulations or supplements.
F.4.
Additional Safety Requirements, Decals, and Patches
A firewall, full width between the roll bar upright, securely attached at
the level of the shoulder harness attachment bolts, up to and bolted to
the upper headrest cross member, is mandatory. The manufacturer’s new
rollover bar design (February 2000) for the Star Race Car FM chassis is
accepted. All Star Race Cars Formula Mazda chassis shall be converted to
the manufacturer’s new rollover bar design by 1/1/2001.
F.5.
Electrical
A. Alternators (P/N 3A2T4167 Mitsubishi 65 Amp or P/NA5T41474
Mitsubishi 60 Amp) shall be in working order and not modified in
any manner. Belt tension shall be within the factory tolerance.
B.
Battery shall be securely mounted in front of the master cylinders,
in the center nose support frame. Battery type is unrestricted.
C. The wiring harness may be modified so long as it does not change
the actual electrical function of the car and does not override the
alternator or rev limiter.
D. The use of the MSD (P/N 6446 only) 6T spark box, MSD Soft
Touch limiter, or MSD (P/N 6420 - 6AL) is mandatory. Location
of the spark box and limiter is unrestricted, provided that access
to visually inspect and remove the limiter chip is not impeded. A
6600 rpm limiter chip is standard. A maximum rpm of 6850rpm
is allowed. Competitors may use adjustable rev chip (MSD part #
080-135). Competitors are advised that MSD chip function may
vary with temperature, and should take measures to ensure compliance at all times.
E.
Instrumentation is unrestricted
F.
Bosch Blue coil is mandatory.
G. MSD Spark Plug wires (Part #31919) are mandatory.
F.6.
Radiators and Plumbing
A. Fluidyne oil cooler #DB30130 or any brand oil cooler measuring
(+/- 1/2”) 2” thick x 12” wide x 12 1/4” high shall be fitted behind
the engine in front of the wing, above the gearbox.
GCR - 232
9.1.1.
Water radiators shall be fitted in both sidepods. They shall be
installed in series with each other. The swirl pot shall be connected
to the inboard inlet of the left radiator. The outboard outlet of the
left radiator shall be connected to the right side radiator’s outboard
inlet. Approved radiators: Volkswagen P/N 171121253D. STAR
RACE CARS P/N 100-101 and STAR RACE CARS P/N 100-142.
C. All cars shall be equipped with oil and coolant catch tanks per GCR
Section 9.3.
D. Flat sheet metal blanking material may be fitted surrounding the
radiators and oil cooler to prevent cooling air from leaking around
the radiators or oil cooler rather than passing through. Synthetic
foam sealing material may also be used for this purpose, provided
that any combination of materials do not extend more than 3”
beyond the plane of the radiator or cooler, and may not extend
outside the standard bodywork.
F.7.
Engine
A. The spec engine shall be the six (6) port Mazda 13B Rotary or
the four (4) port Mazda Renesis Rotary as approved by SCCA Inc.
Said engine is to be sealed by an approved engine builder and shall
remain so with no modifications to the engine or any of its accessories or components.
All engines shall be returned to an SCCA approved engine builder
to be dynoed and resealed with the new generation engine seals.
B.
No engine may be rebuilt except by a rebuilder approved by SCCA
Club Racing.
Approved Engine Builders:
Daryl Drummond Enterprises, Inc.
3590 North River Rd
Gold Hill OR 97525
mailing address:
PO Box 678
Rogue River OR 97537
(541) 582-1786
C. The use of any impregnating material in the engine is expressly
prohibited.
D. Engine drain plugs shall be safety wired.
E.
Alternate Header (13B) STAR RACE CARS P/N 050-133 or Star Race
Cars system provided with Renesis conversion kit is permitted.
F.
Minimum flywheel weight - 8.5 lbs.
G. Alternate one-piece intake manifold (part # 050-142) is permitted.
If the Renesis motor is used, the standard, unmodified factory fuel
injection must be used.
H. Spark plugs are unrestricted
I.
Ceramic apex seals, Mazda part number 0000-01-9115, may be
used.
GCR - 233
FCS
B.
Formula Car Category Specifications
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
F.8.
Fuel System
A. All carburetor jets are unrestricted, but no other modifications shall
be made to the carburetor (50mm DCO/sp or 48mm DCO modified
to 50mm, as supplied). Chokes 44mm. F.15 emulsion tubes are
required.
B.
Only the standard Weber 48 DCOE intake horns are permitted.
C. Fuel pump, fuel filter(s), fuel pressure regulator are unrestricted.
Fuel lines shall be –6 metal braided hose, otherwise unrestricted.
D. Only the factory fuel injection can be used with the Renesis motor.
A restrictor plate supplied by the engine builder must be utilized in
the throttle body. The plate shall measure .250” thick and contain
one 44.0mm hole centered in the plate with no radiusing. No air
shall bypass the restrictor.
F.9.
Drivetrain
A. Limited slip differentials, torque biasing devices, locking differentials or full locked differentials are prohibited. Aluminum or modification of the unit provided is prohibited.
B.
10:31, ring and pinion.
C. The use of any impregnating material in the drivetrain is expressly
prohibited. REM Isotropic© or REM type treatments are not
allowed.
F.10.
Weight and Dimensions
A. Maximum wheelbase - 94-5/8”
B.
Maximum track front - 59-1/4”
C. Maximum track rear - 57-3/4”
D. Minimum weight with driver = 1350 lbs w/ 6 port 13B, 1400 lbs
w/ 4 port Renesis.
E.
Ballasting is permitted. Ballast shall be mounted forward of the fuel
cell but aft of the instrument panel bulkhead and/or aft of the nose
pole but ahead of the master cylinder bulkhead. Ballast shall be
mounted securely.
F.11.
Suspension
A. Ride height is unrestricted within the standard adjustment range.
Droop limiters are not allowed.
B.
Anti-roll bar stiffness may be adjusted within the range allowed by
sliding clamps on the anti-roll bar or front bars may be drilled for
adjustment. Anti-roll bars may be disconnected.
C. 5/8 or 11/16 inch front and 11/16 or 3/4 inch rear anti-roll bars
(solid) are required.
D. Shock absorber settings are unrestricted, but no alteration to the
internal mechanism or fluid medium is allowed. Extended top shock
spring retainers may be used to ensure clearance from suspension
members, or to prevent spring disengagement at full droop.
E.
Shock absorber - front: Koni P/N 82x-2236, rear: 82x-2269.
GCR - 234
Formula Car Category Specifications
Alternates: front: 8216-2420, rear: 8216-2421, or front: 30121604FMF, rear: 3012-1616FMR. Spring rates are unchanged.
Shock absorber sealastic – 55mm P/N 000-141 (Koni P/N 70-34-53000-0) or 40mm P/N 000-146 (Koni P/N 70-34-54-000-0). Shock
absorber packer(s) P/N 000-147 (Koni P/N 15-34-62-000-0). The
number of packers is unrestricted. Sealastics and packers shall be
unmodified except that the standard slit may be widened or made
into a wedge shape to facilitate installation and removal. When
Koni shock absorbers 3012-1604FMF and/or 3012-1616FMR are
used, the Koni shock bumpers P/N 000-152, Koni P/N 71-34-48000-0 may also be used.
F.
Springs: Front: six (6) or seven (7) inch unrestricted length, 450, or
750 lbs./inch rate. Rear: eight (8) inch unrestricted length, 400 or
500 lbs/inch rate.
G. Camber, caster, toe-in/out, bump steer, are unrestricted within the
adjustment range provided on the car.
H. Manufacturer and construction of spherical bearings and rod
ends are unrestricted; however, geometry and length cannot be
changed.
F.12.
Wings
A. Wing “angle of attack” (front and rear) is unrestricted within the
adjustment range. Rear wing adjuster link (P/N 110-126) length is
2.25” overall. It is permitted to shorten existing rear wing adjuster
links to 2.25” overall length to match revised part (P/N 110-126).
B.
Wings may be of aluminum construction, but shall conform to stock
dimensions as described by the manufacturer.
C. Gurney flaps for wings (3/4” Front max. & 3/8” Rear max.) are
permitted, provided they are mounted on the upper surface of
the wing). Note: Gurney flaps are measured from the upper wing
surface, normal to the surface and must not serve to increase the
plane of the wing. (Quick change attachment is prohibited, bolted
or riveted only)
F.13.
Brakes
A. Tilton brakes bias adjustment may be fitted.
B.
Brake master cylinder - Use of (any) 3/4” or 5/8” master cylinders
(with individual reservoir) is approved.
C. Any mass produced brake pad that fits the standard caliper without
modification is permitted.
D. Modification of brake rotor is prohibited. Option: Two piece brake
rotor, STAR RACE CARS P/N 040-126 and STAR RACE CARS P/N
040-127 may be used. Minimum brake rotor thickness = 0.300”.
E.
Optional brake caliper STAR RACE CARS P/N 040-130 may be
substituted.
F.
The use of any ferrous brake caliper piston is permitted.
F.14.
Tires and Wheels
A. A competitor shall start the race on the same set of tires (meaning
the original four) used in the qualifying session. It is the responsiGCR - 235
FCS
9.1.1.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
bility of the competitor to ensure their tires are marked appropriately for the qualifying and race sessions. It is recommended that
regions offer these services at a central location and at a standardized time, preferably at Tech.
B.
Any change of tires during or between a qualifying session shall
automatically result in all previous times being disallowed.
C. If a tire is damaged during a qualifying session, the competitor
may replace that tire with a used tire upon approval by the Chief
Steward. Should a tire be replaced for any reason, the competitor
shall forfeit his grid position and start at the back of the grid.
D. Rain tires may be used at any time.
E.
Any competitors deemed to have taken steps to circumvent these
rules, or deemed to have used a foreign substance on the tire in
order to gain an advantage shall be immediately disqualified from
that event.
F.
All cars shall run BBS (8” x 13”) front and (10” x 13”) rear wheels
as specified by the manufacturer. Alternate BBS wheel center (part
# 000-143 & 000-154) is permitted.
G. Use of tire warmers or cooling methods other than natural air
convection or conduction is prohibited.
F.15.
Gearbox
A. All cars shall be equipped with some combination of the following
gears:
Mark5, or Mark8 Series Gears 15:36 – 15:30 – 15:25 – 17:34
– 19:32 – 18:25 – 21:29 – 17:23 – 22:30 – 24:27 – 19:23
– 23:28 – 25:26 – 26:25 – or 26:26 Webster; 24:24 Hewland
B.
Additional approved gear ratios may be added by the manufacturer
with SCCA Club Racing authorization.
C. Reverse shall be installed and in workable condition.
D. Gearbox rear covers may be modified to permit installation of longer
shift finger shafts.
E.
Transmission drain plugs shall be safety wired.
F.
Shift rail stops may be added to transmission shift mechanism.
F.16.
Clutch
A. Only 1700 pound KEP or 2300 pound KEP pressure plate
permitted.
B.
Clutch disc may be a “Dalkin” or “Marchal” or L&T disc remanufactured on VW core with organic friction material. STAR RACE CARS
P/N 060-103
C. Minimum flywheel weight - 8.5 pounds. STAR RACE CARS P/N
060-102
F.17.
Mufflers
A. All cars shall be equipped with a SuperTrapp muffler P/N 5AS-2556
GCR - 236
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
with none or any number of plates installed as needed to meet
sound If no plates are present the end plate is not required.
The main muffler, Power Pulse Muffler (Racing Beat) P/N 16400,
shall be in good working order with no removal of steel wool or
other alternations allowed.
C. The following options are allowed:
1. Use of the approved “Lo-back” muffler as a substitute for the
Racing Beat muffler. Alternate Muffler STAR RACE CARS P/
N 050-134 and header STAR RACE CARS P/N 050-133, are
permitted. All other specifications to remain the same.
2.
Use of deflectors such as the SuperTrapp mud ring are
alowed.
F.18.
Headers
Headers must be unmodified except that high-temperature coatings are
permitted.
F.19.
Hardware and Fluids
A. Fasteners, links, and rod ends may be either metric or standard
threads, but shall be at least grade five (5). Hardware and fasteners
may not be modified to change adjustment parameters.
B.
Brake fluid, fasteners, clamps, and radiator hoses are unrestricted.
C. Lubricants and fluids, except fuel, are unrestricted.
F.20.
Cockpit
A. Cockpit controls and mechanisms may be adjusted within their
stock operating range.
B.
It is permissible to modify the driver’s seat. The driver’s seat attachment bracket on the chassis may be modified to facilitate adjustment, but shall ensure positive retention of seat attachment bolts.
Seat shell may be removed and the assembly replaced by a poured
foam seat.
C. The head rest may be extended forward to improve head support,
provided the spacer(s) and attachments serve no other purpose.
D. A quick disconnect steering wheel may be used. Make and diameter are unrestricted.
E.
A fabricated sheet aluminum cockpit liner is permitted.
F.21.
Bodywork
A. Engine covers are required. Air inlet ducts may be trimmed but
must not change profile of outside bodywork.
B.
Mirrors are California by Vitaloni - Model #01CBT. Alternate rear
view mirror (P/N 110-136) is permitted.
C. No modification to body external contour or dimensions is permitted.
No openings may be added or reshaped. A blister may be added
to the engine cover if needed for clearance between carburetor
linkage and bodywork. Optional: rearmost, rear face of sidepods
may be open, closed, or vented by drilling.
GCR - 237
FCS
B.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
D. The aluminum undertray may be replaced with a stress-bearing
undertray, minimum of eighteen (18) gauge steel. This undertray
shall be attached to the frame by welding, bonding, or by rivets or
threaded fasteners.
E.
Star Formula Mazda bodywork or exact equivalent is required.
F.
A windscreen may be added to the bodywork, it shall: 1) Not
exceed 144 square inches of surface, nor stand more than six
inches normal (measured 90 degrees to the surface) to the bodywork. 2) Be constructed from flat stock with no compound curves.
3) Be symmetrical left to right. 4) Not extend more than 12 inches
to each side from the car’s longitudinal centerline, measured along
the cockpit opening. 5) Not constitute a potential hazard to driver,
emergency crews or other competitors.
G. Engine compartment belly pan, STAR RACE CARS P/N 030-132, or
any sheet metal pan covering the underside of the engine compartment, provided it is flat when viewed from the bottom (may have a
bend up at the leading edge for stiffness), and does not extend past
the trailing edge of the frame, nor more than 1.5” past the outer
edges of the frame on each side.
G.
FORMULA S CLASS (FS) (REGIONAL CLASS ONLY):
G.1.
Definition
A formula for purpose built, highly modified single-seat, open-wheel, open
cockpit racing cars, which meet the general regulations of Section 9.
of the GCR for Formula Category cars, yet are different in concept and
specifications from the current SCCA Formula classes. Homologation is
required on ALL Formula S cars.
All Formula S cars registered after January 1, 2003 shall meet all preparation rules of Section G. Formula S cars registered prior to January 1,
2003 may be updated to Section G. specifications but they shall meet all
requirements of Section G. without exception.
Exceptions to the FS specifications must be requested with the homologation application and will be listed on the homologation certificate.
G.2.
Chassis/Frame
Chassis/frame construction is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Chassis of non-metallic composite construction shall be proven to
meet FIA specifications for non-metallic composite chassis prior
to being submitted to the SCCA for homologation. There are no
exceptions. Contact SCCA National Office for a list of the relevant
FIA specifications/SCCA requirements.
B.
Chassis of metallic tube and/or metallic monocoque construction
shall be manufactured to be consistent with the safety requirements outlined within these rules and the GCR.
G.3.
Engines
Any engine(s) may be used within the following limitations:
A. Piston or rotary internal combustion, gasoline-fueled engines only.
No turbines. Turbo and/or supercharging is permitted.
GCR - 238
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
G.5.
Electrical System
Electrical system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Self Starter: Cars shall be equipped with on-board self-starter and
on-board power supply controlled by the driver while in a normal
driving position.
G.6.
Transmission / Final Drive
Transmission / final drive system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Power shall not be applied to more than two (2) wheels.
G.7.
Bodywork and Airfoils
Bodywork and airfoils are unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Cockpit Opening:
The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
removal or manipulation of any part or panel (except for a removable steering wheel and removable cockpit padding).
The cockpit opening of metallic chassis shall have the following
minimal dimensions:
Length: 60cm (23.622 inches)
Width: 45cm (17.717 inches)
This width extends over a length of 30cm (11.811 inches) minimum.
This minimal rectangular opening may exist anywhere forward of
the bracing, and required padding will not be considered in these
dimensions.
The cockpit opening of non-metallic chassis shall be designed to
meet the FIA F3 homologation requirements (article 275).
B.
Aerodynamic Devices:
1. The mounting apparatus of any part having an aerodynamic
influence (i.e. bodywork, floor, sidepods, wings, spoilers, etc.),
shall be rigidly secured to the entirely sprung part of the car
(chassis/monocoque), shall have no degree of freedom in relation to the entirely sprung part of the car (chassis/monocoque),
and shall remain immobile in relation to the chassis/monocoque
at all times. This allows for actively adjusted aerodynamic
elements (i.e. wings, diffusers, etc.).
2.
No Aerodynamic skirts per GCR Section 9.3.4. Within the
preceding restrictions, only wearable material (fiberglass,
Kevlar, carbon fiber, high density polyethylene, polypropylene,
Teflon, Lexan, or wood) may be attached to the side panels as
a rubbing strip. Ceramics, brittle plastics (i.e. Plexiglas), and
other materials which shatter or break-up causing hazardous
track conditions are prohibited.
3.
Ground effects are permitted, but may not be attained by
“sealing” or bridging the gap between the bodywork and the
road surface. Any means adopted to circumvent this intention
shall automatically be regarded as a breach of these regulations.
GCR - 239
FCS
G.4.
Fuel System
Fuel system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Fuel Cell Vents: Fuel tank air vents shall be located at least 25cm
(9.843 inches) to the rear of the cockpit.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
4.
Leading Edges of Airfoils: The leading edge of any airfoil fixed
to the front of the car shall not be sharp. Minimum radius:
0.5cm (0.2 inches).
G.8.
Suspension
Suspension is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. All cars shall be equipped with a full suspension system (i.e. springs,
torsion bars, etc.) front and rear. Rigid mounted suspensions are
prohibited. Monoshock/monospring systems are permitted.
G.9.
Steering
Unrestricted provided that it is of a safe/secure design and acts upon at
least two wheels at one end of the vehicle.
G.10. Wheels and Tires
Wheels and tires are unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Tires shall have a minimum speed rating of 120 mph or better.
Tires shall be the same size and design (i.e. radial, bias-ply, etc.)
for the right and left sides of the front axle(s), and same size and
design (i.e. radial, bias-ply, etc.) for the right and left sides of the
rear axle(s).
B.
Wheels: Minimum diameter 10”, minimum width 5.5”. Wheels
shall be identical for the right and left sides of the front axle(s),
and identical for the right and left sides of the rear axle(s). Wheel
material shall be metal. Cars shall be equipped with a minimum of
four (4) wheels. Wire wheels are prohibited.
G.11. Brakes
Brakes are unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Cars shall have a braking system that acts upon all wheels of the
vehicle. Chain/belt driven cars may have a single brake caliper that
acts upon the differential, thereby applying braking force to the
two (2) drive wheels.
B.
Cars shall be equipped with a dual braking system operated by a
single control. In case of failure or leak at any point in the system,
effective braking power shall be maintained on at least two
wheels.
G.12. Weight (without driver)
The minimum weight of the vehicle as raced, without driver, shall be 750
lbs.
G.13. Additional Safety Equipment
A. Mirrors per GCR Section 9.3.34. Additionally, there shall be at least
two (2) mirrors, each with a minimum 55cm² (8.53 in²) of reflective surface.
B.
Towing Eyes per GCR Section 9.3.46. Additionally, if the rollbar
is faired-in, the fairing shall have rollbar access hole(s) to allow for
quick retrieval.
C. Side Intrusion Protection
For metallic chassis, the area between the upper and lower main frame
tubes from the front roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead
shall be protected by one of the following methods to prevent the intrusion of objects into the cockpit.
GCR - 240
Formula Car Category Specifications
1.
Panel(s), minimum of either .060” heat-treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or eighteen (18) gauge steel, attached
outside of the main frame tubes.
2.
Reinforced body - at minimum, consisting of a double layer,
five (5) oz., bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorporated into the body which shall be securely fastened to the
frame.
3.
For either method, the material used for the chassis braces
in this area shall be at least equivalent to the roll hoop brace
material.
4.
Non-metallic chassis are covered under the FIA chassis homologation.
D. Driver’s Feet Position
For metallic chassis, the frame shall incorporate forward-facing braces
to protect the driver’s legs and feet. The braces shall extend from the
front roll hoop to the front bulkhead. (The front bulkhead is defined
as the furthest forward transverse section of the main frame.) The
soles of the driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the front edge of the
wheel rims (in normal position; i.e., pedals not depressed) and shall
remain behind the front bulkhead. The lower main frame rails shall be a
minimum of twenty-five (25) centimeters (9.84”) apart (inside dimension) from the front bulkhead to the rear roll hoop.
1.
H.
Non-metallic chassis are covered under the FIA chassis homologation.
FORMULA 1000 PREPARATION RULES
Formula Formula 1000 is a restricted class. Therefore, all allowable modifications, changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF IN DOUBT, DON’T. Homologation is required for all cars.
H.1.
Definition
A formula for purpose built, open-wheel, open cockpit racing cars. F1000
allows converted Formula Continental, Formula 2000, Formula Ford, and
purpose-built motorcycle-powered tube frame chassis. Re-homologation
as an F1000 is required for all converted cars.
H.2.
Chassis
A. The chassis shall be of tubular steel construction only. Composite
construction (defined as carbon fiber, Kevlar, honeycomb or fiberglass) in a structural application is prohibited, except as specifically allowed in these rules. Stress bearing panels are not permitted
except as specifically allowed in these rules. Stress bearing panels
are defined as sheet metal affixed to the frame by welding, bonding,
rivets, bolts, or screws which have centers closer than 150mm.
B.
The soles of the driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the front edge
of the wheel rims (in normal position; i.e., pedals not depressed)
and shall remain behind the front bulkhead. The lower mainframe
tubes shall be a minimum of 25cm apart (inside dimension) from
the front bulkhead to the rear roll hoop.
GCR - 241
FCS
9.1.1.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
C. The area between the upper and lower mainframe tubes from the
front roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead shall incorporate one of the following:
1. Panel(s), minimum of either .060 inch heat-treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or eighteen (18) gauge steel, attached
outside of the chassis tubes.
2.
Reinforced body - at a minimum, consisting of a double layer,
five (5) oz., bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorporated into the body which shall be securely fastened to the
frame.
For either method, fastener centers shall not be closer than 150mm
(no stress-bearing panels). The material used for the chassis braces
in this area shall be at least equivalent to the roll hoop brace material.
D. A stress-bearing floor pan/undertray is permitted between the front
bulkhead and the rear axles. Composite or stabilized materials shall
not be used for stress-bearing panels. The mountings for brake and
clutch pedals and cylinders (front bulkhead), instruments, (front
roll hoop bulkhead), and rear roll hoop bulkhead (behind the driver)
may be stress bearing panels, also. The firewall portion of the rear
roll hoop bulkhead (panel) shall extend the full width of the cockpit.
Forward facing air ducts may be installed to deliver air directly
to the engine area. Air duct openings may be located within the
cockpit provided the firewall is extended to prevent flame and
debris from reaching the driver. (Any shape may be used to form
the firewall extension.) All firewall inlets shall prohibit passage of
flame and debris.
E.
Brackets for mounting components, such as the engine, transmission, suspension pickups, instruments, clutch and brake components, and body panels may be nonferrous, of any shape, and
fastened to the frame in any manner.
F.
No engine oil or water tubes are permitted within the cockpit.
G. It is not permitted to construct any suspension member in the
form of an asymmetrical airfoil or to incorporate a spoiler in the
construction of any suspension member. Symmetrical streamlining
of suspension members is permitted.
H. Front and rear impact attenuation structures are strongly recommended. Impact attenuation structures shall be securely attached
to the entirely sprung part of the car. Attachment of any front
impact attenuation structure shall not extend more than 50mm to
the rear of the front bulkhead. Impact attenuation structures may
be fabricated from metallic and/or composite materials.
H.3.
Bodywork and Airfoils
A. See Table 5. (Airfoils are a requirement for this class.) Forwardfacing roll bar/roll cage bracing and required padding will not be
considered in the cockpit opening dimensions shown in the table.
B.
The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
manipulation or removal of any part or panel, except the steering
wheel and/or driver’s head surround structure. The steering wheel
and head surround must be removable by the driver without the
use of any tools.
GCR - 242
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
D. The entrant shall designate a flat rectangular reference area with
minimum dimensions of 30cm by 30cm. This reference area is
located on the lower surface of the car (the surface licked by the
air stream) between the rear of the front tire and the front of the
rear tire. The center of the reference area must be no more than
75mm from the longitudinal centerline of the vehicle.
Between the rear of the front tire and the front of the rear tire, no
point on the lower surface of the car (the surface licked by the air
stream) shall be more than 25mm above the plane determined by
the reference area designated by the entrant and on a line perpendicular to that reference plane. No point on the lower surface of the
car may be below the plane determined by the reference surface on
a line perpendicular to that reference plane, except as specifically
permitted herein. Compliance with these requirements shall be
accomplished by placing a straight edge on the reference surface
designated by the entrant and verifying that the requirements are
met. A maximum of four (4) rub blocks of maximum dimension
75mm by 125mm are allowed anywhere on the lower surface of
the chassis, and may extend below the reference plane.
E.
A diffuser is permitted behind the front of the rear tires. The
maximum width of the diffuser is 95cm.
F.
Movable aerodynamic devices, including aerodynamic skirts, are
prohibited.
G. The maximum permitted width of the bodywork is 150cm. The
width of the entire lower surface of the car between the rear of
the front tires and the front of the rear tires shall not exceed the
maximum width of the bodywork by more than 50mm and shall not
exceed 150cm.
H. The safety roll bar/roll cage and engine air box are not included in
the maximum height restriction (dimension C in Table 5).
H.4.
Engines
A. Motorcycle-based 4-cycle up to 1000cc.
B.
Engine internals and compression ratio must remain stock. The
competitor must present, on demand, an original factory manual
for the engine to allow compliance verification.
C. The stock ECU shall be used. The ECU fuel map may be changed.
Devices that modify inputs to the ECU (e.g., Power Commander)
may be used. Stand-alone after market ECUs are not permitted.
D. Turbochargers and superchargers are prohibited.
E.
Carburetion and fuel injection are unrestricted.
F.
The exhaust system and exhaust manifold are unrestricted, within
SCCA safety regulations.
GCR - 243
FCS
C. Carbon fiber is prohibited in any external panels or any panels licked
by the airstream (e.g., radiator ducting or engine air inlet), with the
exception of impact attenuation structures. Carbon fiber may be
used in internal panels and components (e.g., instrument panel,
radio boxes) unless otherwise restricted.
9.1.1.
Formula Car Category Specifications
G. The lubrication system is unrestricted. A dry sump system is
permitted; any oil pan and/or baffling is permitted.
H. Oil coolers are unrestricted.
I.
The cooling system is unrestricted. Radiators, if housed in or incorporating a cowl air-scoop deflector, shall comply with bodywork
rules.
H.5.
Inlet Restrictors
The air inlet system is unrestricted at this time. However, the CRB may
require the use of an inlet restrictor at any time by publishing the requirements in FasTrack.
H.6.
Fuel system
The fuel system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Any fuel permitted for any class per GCR 9.3.25 may be used in
F1000.
B.
Fuel Cell Vents: Fuel tank air vents shall be located at least 25cm
to the rear of the cockpit.
C. Fuel capacity: maximum 10.83 gallons.
H.7.
Electrical System
The electrical system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Self-starter: Cars shall be equipped with an on-board self-starter
and an on-board power supply controlled by the driver while in a
normal driving position.
H.8.
Transmission/Final Drive
A. Rear wheel drive only is permitted.
B.
The final drive ratio is unrestricted. Internal transmission gears shall
remain stock.
C. Cars may use sequentially shifted motorcycle transmissions.
Reverse gear is not required.
D. All gear changes must be initiated by the driver. Mechanical gear
shifters, direct-acting electric solenoid shifters, air-shifters and
similar devices are permitted. Devices that allow pre-selected gear
changes are prohibited.
E.
The clutch assembly is unrestricted.
H.9.
Suspension
A. All suspension components shall be of steel or ferrous material,
except that hubs, hub adapters, hub carriers, bell cranks, pivot
blocks, bearings and bushings, spring caps, abutment nuts, anti-roll
bar links, shock absorber caps, and nuts may be aluminum alloy.
B.
Springs: steel only.
C. Shock absorbers: Steel or aluminum alloy body.
D. Control arms and all associated items that attach directly to the
chassis members shall be boxed in or captured to prevent intrusion
into the cockpit.
GCR - 244
9.1.1.
Front A-arms shall be equipped with anti-intrusion bars to limit
intrusion into the cockpit.
H.10. Brakes
Unrestricted, except:
A. All pistons in a given caliper must be of the same size. Calipers
must be ferrous or aluminum alloy.
B.
Brake rotors are restricted to ferrous material.
H.11. Steering
Unrestricted.
H.12. Wheels and Tires
Thirteen (13) inch diameter wheels with a maximum rim width of ten
(10) inches are the only wheel sizes permitted. Material is unrestricted
providing it is metal.
H.13. Minimum weight
Minimum weight is 1000 lbs.
F1000 Dimensions - Table 5
Dimension (Refer to FC drawing)
Measurement (cm)
A. Maximum rear overhang from rear wheel axis
B. Maximum front overhang from front wheel axis
C. Maximum height measured from the ground
D. Exhaust height measured from the ground
80
100
90
20-60
E. Maximum height of any aerodynamic device
H. Maximum width of entire car
Rim height
185
I. Maximum rear aerofoil width (includes endplates)
95
J. Maximum width of body and lower surface of the car behind the front wheels
150
K. Maximum front wing width
135
L. Minimum cockpit bodywork opening
45
M. Minimum cockpit parallel opening length
30
N. Minimum cockpit overall opening length
60
S. Maximum exhaust length from rear wheel axis
80
7. Minimum wheelbase
200
5 & 6. Minimum track
120
Maximum diffuser width
95
Note: Maximum height is measured with the driver aboard. The safety
roll bar/roll cage and engine air box are not included in the maximum
height restriction (dimension C).
GCR - 245
FCS
E.
Formula Car Category Specifications
WHAT DOES YOUR TRAILER COMPANY DO ON WEEKENDS?
PACE AMERICAN QUALITY, TRACK TESTED TRAILERS FOR OVER 20 YEARS
SHADOW GT
TAGS/GOOSENECKS/STACKERS
SILVER ARROW
ALUMINUM
PURSUIT
TAGS/GOOSENECKS
RALLYE
ECONOMY TAG
AND PREMIUM ALUMINUM
®
WWW.OPTIMAMOTORHOMES.COM
ALUMINUM
MOTORHOMES
ALUMINUM
TOTERHOMES
PACEAMERICAN . COM
© 2007 PACE AMERICAN, INC.
OFFICIAL TRAILER
WE CONTINUE TO PARTICIPATE
IN AND SUPPORT RACING!
• 800.247.5767
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
9.1.2. GT CATEGORY SPECIFICATIONS
A.
PURPOSE
The GT Category is intended to provide the membership and interested
manufacturers with the opportunity to compete in purpose built, highly
modified replicas of series produced automobiles. To that end, cars shall
be classified in GT Classes based on their competitive potential. The Club
may alter or adjust specifications and require, permit, or restrict certain
specific components to equate competitive potential.
B.
INTENT
It is the intent of these rules to allow modifications useful and necessary
in the construction and preparation of an extremely high performance
road racing vehicle. It is understood that such a vehicle can be updated
and/or changed from marque-to-marque, based on member interest and
manufacturer incentive. With this in mind, the Club will use the following
guidelines in the determination of the suitability for classification in the
GT Category:
1.
Basic vehicle size, shape, engine displacement, and cylinder head
design of the standard and/or alternate engine(s).
2.
Member interest.
3.
Manufacturer interest and potential support to competitors.
4.
Vehicle production quantities of no less than 3000 units of the
specified make/model within a twelve (12) month period, all such
units being approved by the EPA and DOT for sale in the United
States (Production Cars that have been reclassified into the GT
Category need not meet minimum production quantities).
C.
SPECIFICATIONS
The SCCA shall publish the GT Category Specifications (GTCS) containing
recognized specifications for each car eligible to compete in the GT Category during the calendar year. Cars shall be listed according to the manufacturer’s make and model designation. In the case of doubt involving
specifications not adequately described in the GTCS, Scrutineers/Stewards may refer to maintenance manuals, spare parts books, general catalogs and performance catalogs published by the vehicle manufacturer,
MVMA specifications, and FIA Homologation Certificates for the make
and model, or may inspect other cars of the same make and model.
1.
GT Category automobiles shall be divided into Classes based on
relative performance as follows: GT1, GT2, GT3, and GTLite.
2.
Cars may be updated or backdated within the specifications of the
recognized make and model as listed on the Approved Automobile
List of the GTCS (GT-1), or as listed on a single GT Specification
Form line of the GTCS. Any classified engine may be used in a
classified chassis within the same manufacturer as shown on the
specification line.
3.
Cars shall meet or exceed their minimum specified weight, as listed
in the GTCS, as qualified or raced, with driver.
GCR - 247
GTCS
These specifications are part of the SCCA GCR, and all automobiles shall
conform with GCR Section 9.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
4.
No permitted component/modification shall additionally perform a
prohibited function.
5.
Turbocharging/supercharging is not permitted.
6.
Construction of tube frame cars is permitted. Standard maximum
track dimensions for all cars, unless otherwise noted, are as
follows:
GT-1
70.0” F & R
GT-2
64.0” F & R
GT-3 / GT-Lite
60.0” F & R
D.
1.
AUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS (GT-1)
Engine (GT-1)
a. Component Modification
1. It is permitted to lighten, balance, or modify in shape, by
any mechanical or chemical means, the standard, optional,
or alternate components of the engine, provided it is
always possible to positively identify them as such.
b.
c.
2.
Material shall not be added to these components unless
specifically authorized by these rules.
3.
The original direction of engine rotation shall be retained.
Induction System
1. All inducted air shall pass through the throttle venturis.
2.
The specified carburetor(s) or specified fuel injection may
be modified. The number, model, type, throttle bore and/
or venturi restriction shall remain as specified. Refer to
Section E.1.a. of these rules for additional induction specifications.
3.
Any air filter(s), velocity stack(s), and or air box(es) may be
fitted. Air may be ducted to the carburetor or fuel injection
provided that the ducting is completely contained within
the engine compartment and that the air to be ducted
is supplied through normal (or as specifically authorized
herein) openings in the bodywork. Cars may duct air to
the carburetor airbox through an opening in the back of the
hood, rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20 inches,
maximum length of 3.5 inches.
4.
Intake manifolds are unrestricted.
5.
Any throttle linkage may be used. All throttle linkages shall
be equipped with more than one system of positive throttle
closure
Fuel System
1. Any fuel line(s) may be used. All fuel line(s) passing through
the driver/passenger compartment shall be made of metal
braided hose with AN-Series threaded couplings.
2.
Any fuel pump(s), filter(s), and pressure regulator(s) may
be used. Such components may not be located in the
driver/passenger compartment, but their location within
the bodywork of the car is otherwise unrestricted.
GCR - 248
Grand Touring Category Specifications
d.
Emission Equipment
1. Exhaust emission control equipment shall be removed in
their entirety. When air injection nozzles are removed from
a cylinder head, the resultant holes shall be completely
plugged.
e.
Cylinder Heads
1. The standard production, optional, or specified alternate(s)
cylinder head(s) shall be used. Any valve guides and valve
seats may be used.
f.
g.
2.
Material(s) may be added to the combustion chamber(s)
and interior ports/passages of the cylinder head(s). The
addition of such material(s) shall not enable the combustion chamber and/or interior ports/passages to be moved
external to the original physical limitations of the cylinder
head(s).
3.
V-6 and V-8 General Motors engines are permitted: Buick,
Chevrolet, Oldsmobile, Pontiac, Brodix, Brownfield, Dart,
Edlebrock, Pro Action 14-degree, or Airflow Research 210,
215, 220, and 227 cylinder heads of cast iron or aluminum.
All Pro cylinder head, part # 270-LM-13 is permitted Any
cylinder head(s) utilized shall be of a conventional design
(siamesed intake ports, two (2) valves per cylinder, all
valves inline), direct replacement type. General Motors SB2 cylinder heads are permitted.
4.
V-6 and V-8 Ford engines are permitted: Ford Motorsports
SVO inline-valve or canted-valve cylinder heads of cast
iron or aluminum. Alternate cylinder heads from Airflow
Research, Brodix, Cylinder Head Innovations, Dart, Edelbrock, Pro Action, and World Products. Any alternate
cylinder head(s) utilized shall be of a conventional design
(two valves per cylinder, all valves inline) direct replacement type.
5.
V-6 and V-8 Chrysler engines are permitted: MOPAR
Performance conventional design (siamesed intake ports,
two (2) valves per cylinder, all valves inline), direct replacement cylinder heads.
Camshaft and Valve Gear
1. Any camshaft(s) mounted in the standard location(s) may
be used. Any cam followers may be used. Springs and
mounting hardware which act directly on the cam followers
may be added.
2.
Camshaft drive mechanism is unrestricted.
3.
Push rods, rocker arms, and rocker arm supports are unrestricted.
4.
Valves are unrestricted.
5.
Valve springs, retainers, keepers, and seals are unrestricted.
Block
1. The standard production, manufacturer’s heavy duty (of
GCR - 249
GTCS
9.1.2.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
the same basic materials as the original block), or specified
alternate engine block shall be used.
h.
2.
The block may be bored and/or sleeved to achieve the
correct displacement.
3.
The block may be machined, and O-rings may be added to
replace or supplement the head gasket(s).
4.
The crankshaft main bearing caps may be substituted.
Additional main bearing caps and/or bolts may be used
provided that no material is added to the block for their
attachment.
Pistons and Rods
1. Pistons and piston pins are unrestricted. The compression
ratio is unrestricted.
2.
i.
j.
k.
Connecting rods are unrestricted, provided that they are
made of a ferrous material, e.g., steel. Aluminum, titanium, graphite, etc., rods are prohibited.
Crankshaft and Flywheel
1. The crankshaft is unrestricted, provided it is made of the
same basic material as the standard production crankshaft.
Those vehicles originally equipped with an iron crankshaft
may use a steel crankshaft. All alternate crankshafts shall
retain the same angle(s) of crank throws as the original
crankshaft.
2.
The use of any crankshaft vibration damper is permitted.
3.
The use of any flywheel and clutch is permitted.
Oiling System
1. The use of any oil pan (sump), oil pump(s), and/or oil
pickup(s) is permitted. Oil pump(s) shall be mechanically
driven by the engine. Dry sump systems are permitted.
Any oil tank(s) used by such a system shall be located
within the bodywork, and any oil lines utilized within the
system shall be metal or metal braided, equipped with ANSeries threaded couplers.
2.
The use of any oil filter(s) is permitted.
3.
The oil tank(s), cap(s), oil filter(s), and any fittings attached
thereto shall be isolated by a metal bulkhead(s), so that in
the event of any spillage, leakage, or failure, oil will not
reach the driver.
Electrical System
1. The use of any driver operated electrical starter is permitted.
2.
The use of any ignition system (except magneto ignition)
is permitted, provided the number of spark plugs remains
the same as that of the standard production, optional,
or alternate cylinder head(s). Driver controlled adjustable
spark timing is prohibited.
3.
The remaining components of the engine electrical system
GCR - 250
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
are unrestricted.
l.
Exhaust System
1. The components of the exhaust system are unrestricted.
Refer to sections D.8.c.2., and D.8.j.3., of these rules for
additional exhaust system and bodywork specifications.
2.
Generator/alternator, crankshaft, and water pump pulleys
are unrestricted.
3.
Engine mountings are unrestricted.
A. Cars with the engine mounted longitudinal to the
chassis may relocate the engine in a longitudinal direction, centered along the longitudinal centerline of the
vehicle as defined by the track. A one (1) inch transverse deviation tolerance from the absolute centerline
is permitted. Unless otherwise so fitted in its standard
production location or specifically authorized in the
vehicle’s GTCS specifications, said relocation shall
align the center of the foremost spark plug hole with
the front axle centerline.
B.
Transverse mounted engines may be relocated for
axle/CV joint alignment. Alternately, they may be relocated to a longitudinal position if authorized specifically by the GTCS.
C. General Motors, Ford, and Chrysler front mounted V-6
engines may be positioned so that the center of the
foremost spark plug hole is no more than 4.5 inches
behind the front axle center line (bellhousing and
transmission locations are the same as a V-8 motor).
2.
3.
Engine, Rotary Piston (GT-1)
a. Component Modification
1. Rotary piston engines in GT-1 may be prepared using
GTCS specifications D.1.a., b., c., d., j., k., l., and m.
2.
The standard production or specified alternate rotor housings shall be used. No changes in the epitrochoidal curve
of the motor are permitted.
3.
The capacity of the working chamber(s) shall not be
changed.
4.
The eccentric shaft may be replaced with another of the
same basic material, but no changes in its eccentricity or
bearing journal dimensions are permitted.
5.
The rotor(s) is/are unrestricted, provided the material and
number of lobes remains unchanged.
Cooling System (GT-1)
GCR - 251
GTCS
m. Other Engine Components
1. Alternate engine components considered replacement
parts, such as seals, bearings, water pumps, nuts, bolts,
studs, washers, and gaskets are permitted. Bushings or
offset keys of unrestricted origin may be installed.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
a.
b.
Radiator
1. Any water radiator is allowed, provided that there are no
changes to the exterior bodywork to accommodate its use.
It shall not be located in the driver/ passenger compartment. Radiator overflow line(s) shall terminate in a catch
tank.
2.
Separate expansion or header tank(s) are permitted. Any
such tanks shall not be located in the driver/ passenger
compartment.
3.
The heater core and all attendant heater controls, lines,
and accessories may be removed in their entirety, but shall
not be modified or replaced.
Radiator Fan
1. The cooling fan(s) may be modified, substituted, or
removed.
2.
c.
Radiator Shroud/Ducting
1. The original radiator shroud may be altered, removed, or
replaced.
2.
4.
Electrically operated cooling fan(s) may be installed,
provided it/they serve no other purpose.
Sealing or shrouding the airflow area between the normal
grill opening and the water radiator is permitted.
d.
Water Pump
1. The water pump(s) may be replaced with any other water
pump(s) mechanically driven by the engine.
e.
Thermostat
1. The thermostat(s) may be modified or replaced with
blanking sleeves or restrictors.
f.
Oil/Lubricant Coolers
1. The use of any engine, transmission, and differential
cooler(s) is permitted, provided that it/they are mounted
completely within or under the bodywork, but not in the
driver/passenger compartment.
2.
Associated cooler pumps and lines are permitted for the
transmission and differential coolers.
3.
Air may be ducted to said coolers only through normal
openings in the bodywork. Air ducts or other openings
shall be added to body parts only where specifically authorized by these rules.
4.
Air may be ducted to the rear brakes and rear mounted
coolers from an interior bulkhead behind the driver. Air
may also be ducted to these components from free air
under the car, provided that such under car ducting does
not create “ground effects.”
Transmission/Final Drive (GT-1)
a. Component Modification
1. It is permitted to lighten, balance, or modify in shape, by
GCR - 252
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
any mechanical or chemical means, the standard, optional,
or alternate components of the transmission and final
drive, provided that it is always possible to identify them
as such.
Transmission
1. Automatic transmissions are not permitted unless specifically authorized on a vehicle’s GTCS line.
2.
Any readily available manual transmission having no more
than five (5) forward speeds and an functional reverse
speed may be used, provided that it is fitted in the same
basic location used in the standard production automobile. Any relocation or repositioning of the transmissionto-engine dimensional relationship shall be specifically
authorized by the GTCS. Sequential shifting transmissions
are permitted with a 75 lb. weight penalty. Air, hydraulic
or electric actuation of the gearshift mechanism is not
allowed.
A functional reverse is defined as “operable by the driver
from his normal seated position and capable of sustained
movement of the vehicle, under its own power, in a reverse
direction.” A driver-operated device for locking out reverse
gear may be added provided it does not prevent prompt
engagement of reverse in an emergency situation.
c.
3.
Front engine/transmission vehicles shall locate the front
mounting surface of the transmission within sixteen (16)
inches of the back of the engine block.
4.
Any shift linkage may be used.
5.
The linkage between the clutch pedal and the clutch
housing/clutch actuating mechanism is unrestricted.
A mechanical linkage may be replaced with a hydraulic
system.
6.
Transmission mountings are unrestricted.
Final Drive
1. Any axle tube, final drive housing, gear ratio, limited slip
or locked differential may be used. Final drive units which
permit ratio changes while the car is in motion are prohibited.
2.
5.
Heavy duty propeller shaft(s) and/or drive shaft(s) may
be used. A minimum of two (2) steel 360 degree “loops”
shall be installed of sufficient strength to prevent the
driveshaft(s) from contacting the ground in the event of
shaft and/or U-joint failure. Said loops shall be located
within twelve (12) inches of the front of the shaft, and as
close as practical to the rear universal joint.
Suspension (GT-1)
a. Ride Height
1. No part of the car to the rear of the front tire opening,
including the exhaust, may touch the ground when two (2)
tires on the same side of the vehicle are deflated.
GCR - 253
GTCS
b.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
b.
c.
d.
e.
Suspension Components
1. Suspension components may be reinforced, modified, or
replaced with units of alternate design, and their mounting
points may be relocated. The addition or substitution of anti
roll bars, camber compensating devices, and/or suspension stabilizers is permitted. If these devices or any other
suspension components extend into the driver/passenger
compartment, they shall be completely sealed off from
said compartment by metal panels.
2.
Hubs, bearings, spindles, axles, U-joints, CV joints, bushings, ball joints, and rod ends may be freely modified or
substituted.
3.
The wheelbase of the automobile shall not be changed or
relocated in the fore/aft direction. A tolerance of +/- 2.00
inches from published specification shall be permitted
unless otherwise noted in the GTCS.
Springs/Shock Absorbers
1. Suspension springs may be replaced with others of unrestricted origin and type.
2.
Shock absorbers are unrestricted, except that the number
of shock absorbers fitted shall not be changed from that of
the standard production automobile.
3.
Shock absorber mountings are unrestricted.
Suspension Control
1. The manufacturer’s basic system of front suspension shall
be retained, i.e., independent. Strut type front suspension
may be replaced with a double A-arm type suspension.
2.
The manufacturer’s basic system of rear suspension may
be retained, i.e., independent, live axle, etc.. All forms
of independent rear suspension may be replaced with a
closed tube beam, live axle suspension. Cars originally
equipped with live axle rear suspension shall not replace
said suspension with any type of independent suspension.
3.
Automobiles originally manufactured as FWD vehicles may
convert to RWD, but shall only use a closed tube beam,
live axle rear suspension.
Steering
1. The front wheels only shall be steered by the driver.
2.
6.
The type of steering is unrestricted, provided that a collapsible type of steering column is used.
Brakes (GT-1)
a. Brake Components
1. The use of any dual master cylinder and/or pressure equalizing device is permitted. All cars shall be equipped with
a dual braking system operated by a single control. In the
case of leakage or failure to any point in the system, effective braking power shall be maintained to at least two (2)
wheels.
GCR - 254
7.
2.
Servo assist braking systems are unrestricted.
3.
Backing plates or shields may be removed. Brake air ducts
may be fitted, provided they extend only in a forward
direction, and that no changes are made in the bodywork
for their installation.
4.
Parking brakes may be removed.
5.
The brake lines shall be steel tubing, metal braided hose,
or flexible brake hose. Lines may be relocated and given
additional protection.
6.
Brake discs, calipers, and/or drums are unrestricted,
provided that the discs or drums are mounted in the same
location (e.g., outboard vs. in-board) as the standard
production automobile.
7.
Water spray brake cooling systems are permitted. No
water cooled calipers are permitted.
8.
Carbon brake rotors are prohibited.
Wheels and Tires (GT-1)
a. Wheels
1. Wheels shall be made of steel, aluminum, magnesium,
or a combination thereof. Multi-piece wheels shall utilize
mechanical fasteners (bolts, rivets, etc.) for assembly.
b.
8.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
2.
Wheels may be thirteen (13), fourteen (14), fifteen (15),
or sixteen (16) inches in diameter, but all four (4) wheels
shall be of the same diameter.
3.
Wheels shall have a maximum width of twelve (12) inches
in the front and (13) inches in the rear.
4.
Centerlock or quickchange wheels are permitted.
Tires
1. Tires are unrestricted, except that they must meet the
requirements of GCR Section 9.3.44.
Body/Structure (GT-1)
a. The intent of these bodywork/configuration rules is to maintain
the recognizable external features of the standard production
automobile while providing for necessary safety and performance modifications.
1.
Lightening of the bodywork is permitted, but the exterior
shape of the body shall not be changed except where
specifically authorized herein.
2.
The method of bodywork attachment is unrestricted, and
shall meet the requirements of the GCR. Section 9.3.32.,
“Loss of Bodywork.”
3.
Maximum overall car width shall not exceed 84.75”.
4.
Trans Am approved bodywork and wheelbase specificaGCR - 255
GTCS
9.1.2.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
tions are allowed unless otherwise specifically prohibited
by these rules. Trans Am bodywork shall be in a configuration that is approved for past or present Trans Am competition.
5.
Convertible tops, sunroofs, and removable panels shall
meet GCR Section 9.3.17. As of 1/1/2002, all newly classified convertible models will be required to compete with
a windshield and hardtop. Convertible models classified
before 1/1/2002 will be allowed to compete without a
windshield and/or top, regardless of log book issue date,
unless specified differently on the vehicle specification
line.
6.
Two (2) hood louvers are allowed, they must be located on
the hood/front fender between the radiator and the rearward edge of the hood, max. size of 20” x 10” with a
minimum of five (5) slots.
b.
Any bodywork components may be fabricated of alternate
material(s), provided that their shape remains as specified
herein, unless specifically prohibited elsewhere in these rules.
c.
Fenders may be flared for tire clearance, provided that their
shape and opening contour in horizontal projection is similar to
the original opening.
d.
1.
Modified wheel opening(s) shall not confuse the identity
of the car. The fender flares shall completely cover the
highest point of the tires, and may extend into the doors
and bumpers.
2.
Rear fenders may have holes or slots to accommodate
exhaust outlets. These holes or slots shall be below a line
seven (7) inches above the bottom of the rocker panel,
and shall be no wider than seven (7) inches.
3.
The inner fender panels separating the wheel wells from
the engine compartment may be altered, replaced, or
removed, provided that there are panels which provide
total separation between the wheel wells and the driver/
passenger compartment.
The hood and deck lid/trunk hinges and latches may be
removed. The hood and deck lid/trunk may be “molded in”
with other bodywork components to create “one-piece” front
and rear ends. Misalignments or modifications to create ventilation openings where none previously existed are prohibited.
The hood may be modified for clearance of an airbox, provided
that such alteration does not confuse the identity of the car.
e.
Bumpers that are not an integral part of the bodywork may be
removed, providing that all projecting hardware is also removed.
Alternately, they may be replaced with replicas of alternate
material(s). In those cases where bumpers are an integral part
of the bodywork, they may be replaced with replicas of alternate material(s). Bumper bracket holes in the bodywork may be
covered, provided such covering serves no other purpose.
GCR - 256
Grand Touring Category Specifications
f.
The standard grille(s) or approved facsimile(s) shall be retained,
except where covered by the front spoiler or intermediate
spoiler mounting device.
g.
The original angle of the windshield shall be maintained unless
alternate components and/or specifications are specifically
authorized in the GTCS.
h.
All cars may use a standard safety glass windshield, mounted
in the stock location and at the stock angle. In addition to
any other method of retention, the windshield shall be secured
within the specifications of GCR Section 9.3.52., “Windshield
Clips.” Polycarbonate windshields such as Lexan are allowed.
Alternate windshields must be of 6mm minimum thickness.
Alternate material windshields must be identical in size and
curvature to the original glass component. Alternate material
windshields must have in addition, three (3) inner supports to
prevent the windshield from collapsing inward. These supports
must be 0.75” by .125” minimum straps of aluminum.
Spacing between these inner supports must be eight (8) inches
minimum
i.
The rear quarter (side) and rear windows may be made of clear,
transparent, and uncolored polycarbonate material having a
minimum thickness of 3mm.
1.
j.
k.
Ducts may be installed in the side windows or window
openings for the purpose of supplying cooling air to the
driver and/or differential/transmission coolers. Air passing
through the differential/transmission coolers may be
exhausted through an opening identical in size and location to the rear license plate frame.
Doors
1. Driver and passenger door window glass or plastic shall be
removed. Inside door handles, door panels, window cranks
and mechanisms, and other interior trim pieces may be
removed.
2.
The doors shall be pinned or otherwise positively fastened
to prevent their opening in the event of an accident. Standard door hinges and latches may be removed, but the
doors shall remain capable of being opened or removed,
unless the doors are integral to the remainder of the bodywork.
3.
Doors may contain holes or slots to accommodate exhaust
outlets. Any such openings in the door(s) shall be below a
line ten (10) inches above the bottom of the rocker, and no
wider than seven (7) inches. A maximum of two (2) such
exhaust openings are permitted on the door.
Spoilers
1. A front spoiler may be fitted. It shall not protrude beyond
the overall outline of the car as viewed from above except
for a front splitter that may extend up to two (2.0) inches.
The spoiler shall not extend aft of the forward most part of
the front fender opening (cutout), and shall not be mounted
more than four (4) inches above the horizontal centerline of
the front wheel hubs. Full-width bottom shrouding of the
GCR - 257
GTCS
9.1.2.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
front spoiler/nosebox area (front undertray) is permitted
but must be flat and can extend no farther rearward than
the center of the engine harmonic balancer. Undertray may
not be stepped or curved. Undertray may be angled in side
view to produce a maximum height at the trailing edge of
3.25 inches above the ground.
Openings are permitted for the purpose of ducting air to the
brakes, radiator, airbox and/or oil cooler(s); equal openings
may be placed in the standard lower front panel directly
behind openings placed in the spoiler. Joint separations
need not be shown. The spoiler ”pan” area forward of the
leading edge of the front wheel openings shall be flat and
follow, but not exceed, the line of the front fender/spoiler
bottom. No components may protrude or extend below
this plane.
2.
The Club Racing specified rear wing or a flat plane rear
spoiler may be used. If a flat plane rear spoiler is used, it
shall be contiguous with the rear bodywork rearward of
the rear window, and shall comply with the following:
A. Height: No higher than eight (8) inches, measured from
the bodywork along the face of the spoiler, from the
point of attachment to the top of the spoiler. In the
case of a spoiler with a curved top edge conforming to
the shape of the bodywork (rearview), the measurement is to be made perpendicular to the tangent of
the body at the point of attachment. In the case of a
spoiler mounted with a vertical mounting flange on the
rear face of the bodywork, the measurement shall be
made ignoring any slight amount of mounting flange
exposed due to the curvature of the rear bodywork at
the point of attachment.
B.
Width and Overhang: No wider than the body,
excluding fender flares, from the forward most point
of the spoiler (or mounting flanges) rearward. It shall
not extend rearwards of the rearmost extremity of
the bodywork for the entire width of the car (when
viewed vertically from above the car at any point, the
spoiler shall not protrude beyond the bodywork).
C. Mounting: Spoilers shall be strong enough to be self
supporting, and shall be mounted directly to the rear
hatch, deck, or trunk lid. A mounting flange no greater
than one and one-half (1-1/2) inches wide, contiguous
with the bodywork (either forward facing on the top
surface of the bodywork or downward facing on the
rear surface of the bodywork) shall be employed.
No other forward facing sheet metal supports are
permitted. Supplemental bracing may be added in the
form of two (2) rods (maximum diameter one-quarter
inch), mounted at least ten (10) inches inboard from
the ends of the spoiler. Small rear supports may be
added.
D. Configuration: the spoiler shall be a single plane spoiler
(a straight line in any vertical cross-section), uniform
in height from the rear bodywork. There shall be no
GCR - 258
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
gaps or openings below the spoiler for its entire width.
Only enough curvature (in a fore-and-aft direction as
viewed from above) shall be permitted to facilitate
mounting. The use of fences, end rails, Gurney lips,
wickerbills, or other forward facing lips or aerodynamic devices is prohibited.
l.
E.
Club Racing wing assembly specs: Unmodified
single element Liebeck airfoil #1LD104E scaled to a
chord length of 10.75 inches. The maximum crosssectional tolerance of the wing profile is 0.060 inch.
A maximum 0.50 inch Gurney tab is allowed at the
trailing edge of the wing element. The tab must be
mounted 90 degrees to the upper wing surface. No
air may pass between the tab and the wing. The wing
end plates must fit within a rectangle measuring 11.00
inches long by 4.00 inches tall. No portion of the wing
element or tab may extend beyond the perimeter of
the endplate. The endplates must be mounted parallel
to the vehicle centerline, and must be perpendicular
to the ground. Endplates must be flat, with no curvature or Gurney tabs. The maximum width of the entire
wing assembly (wing element, endplates, Gurney tab,
and mounting hardware) is 72.00 inches.
F.
Wing mounting specs: The entire wing assembly must
be mounted at least 2.00 inches below the peak of
the roof (measured at vehicle centerline). Trailing edge
of wing assy. must be located within an area defined
by a point; 6” forward of rearmost bodywork and the
rearmost bodywork (measured at vehicle centerline).
Two wing mounting posts must be used, with each
one located between 16”-20” inboard from end of
wing. Max. wing angle from horizontal is 30-degrees.
Glass/plastic headlights, front parking and signal lights, lenses,
and bulbs shall be removed. Other front lighting parts and
ancillaries may be removed. Headlight, front parking and signal
light, and similar standard openings in the front of the car
may be used for ducting air to the engine, front brakes, and/
or coolers. Such ducting may pass through interior panels for
these purposes.
1.
The cross sectional area of a single duct shall not exceed
the cross sectional area for the original (single) headlight
lens.
2.
It is not permitted to relocate the standard openings for
headlights, parking lights, signal lights, etc.. The headlight
openings shall be covered with a wire screen or a panel of
an alternate material, provided that such covering does not
confuse the identity of the car.
3.
The side marker light assemblies shall be removed, and the
resultant openings shall be completely closed.
m. The windshield wiper system is unrestricted.
GCR - 259
GTCS
NOTE: O.E.M. rear spoilers are not permitted unless
specifically listed on the vehicle’s specification form.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
n.
Floors
1. Driver/Passenger Compartment: The floor of the driver/
passenger compartment shall maintain the basic shape
and position of the original floor, i.e., flat and horizontal,
relative to the car and rocker panels. It may not be curved,
angled, recessed, or channeled other than as specifically
authorized by these rules, and shall be made of steel and/
or aluminum only.
A. On the passenger side of the driver/passenger compartment (only), the floor may be raised up to ten (10)
inches, or a secondary floor installed at that level, to
accommodate the installation of the exhaust system
and mufflers. Such raising of the floor shall serve no
other purpose.
B.
9.
The driver/passenger compartment floor shall cover the
area from the forward firewall the full width between
the rocker panels, and shall extend no further aft than
the forward most point of the rear wheel openings.
The floor panels between the rocker panels and the
outboard frame rails may be cut out or removed.
2.
For front engine cars – floor panels between the engine
bay firewall and the forward most point of the front wheel
openings are prohibited. For mid or rear engine cars – floor
panels between the engine bay firewall and the rearward
most point of the rear wheel opening are prohibited.
3.
The fuel cell bottom and/or floor behind the rear wheel
opening shall be flat, angled upwards, and shall follow, but
not exceed, the line of the rear fender bottom.
Driver/Passenger Compartment - Trunk (GT-1)
a. Seating
1. All standard production seats and seat backs shall be
removed. The driver’s seat shall be replaced with a onepiece bucket-type race seat. Such seat shall be installed
so that a second seat of the same dimensions could be
simultaneously fitted to the passenger’s side of the car (no
center seating).
b.
Steering Wheel
1. Any steering wheel and wheel quick release mechanism
complying with GCR Section 9.3.41., may be used.
c.
Gauges/Accessories/Driver Convenience
1. The replacement, addition, or removal of accessories
(gauges, switches, indicators, etc.) is permitted. Such
installations and/or modifications shall have no influence
on the mechanical performance of the car. Similarly, they
shall not include the substitution or replacement of any
element of the bodywork or chassis except where specifically authorized by these rules.
2.
Fresh-air ducts to the driver may be added to the A-pillar
area. They shall be distinctly separate parts from the bodywork. Roof louvers (vents) are allowed for the express
purpose of venting the driver’s compartment. A maximum
GCR - 260
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
of 24 square inches of open area and a maximum number
of twelve openings are allowed. Each opening shall be no
larger than 4” x ½”.
d.
The use of any mirror(s) meeting the requirements of GCR
Section 9.3.34., is permitted.
Interior Modifications - Firewall/Bulkheads
1. Modifications may be made to the driver/passenger
compartment for the convenience of the driver and to
permit the installation of required safety equipment. Such
modifications shall have no influence on the mechanical
performance of the car. Similarly, they shall not include
the substitution or replacement of any element of the
bodywork or chassis except where specifically authorized
by these rules.
2.
Floor mats, upholstery, and all interior trim shall be
removed.
3.
There shall be a firewall between the driver/passenger
compartment and the engine compartment/ bay. It shall be
made of steel and/or aluminum and shall be transversely
positioned in the approximate location of the original.
A. It shall extend, at minimum, from the left outboard
frame rail to the right outboard frame rail, and at
maximum from the left outer door skin to the right
outer door skin.
B.
4.
It shall be designed, in conjunction with the floor and
driver/passenger compartment interior panels and
bulkheads, to prevent the passage of and isolate the
driver from flame, fluids, and debris.
There shall be a steel and/or aluminum bulkhead completely
separating the driver/passenger compartment from the
compartment containing the fuel cell.
A. The forward most element of this separation shall
consist of a vertical transverse bulkhead behind the
driver, extending the full width of the compartment
from the floor to the top of the door.
B.
Behind this rear bulkhead there shall be a steel and/
or aluminum horizontal bulkhead the full width of
the interior of the car or between the inner fenders
extending from the vertical bulkhead to the rear of the
fuel cell.
C. These two bulkheads shall, together, completely cover
and isolate the rear suspension, coolers, ducting, etc.
so that none of these items are visible when viewed
from above. The fuel cell shall also be covered and
isolated unless the car is equipped with the optional
bulkhead listed below in Paragraph 5.
D. All fuel filler, overflow, vent, discriminator, or return
lines or components that extend beyond the limits of
the vertical or horizontal bulkheads into the driver/
GCR - 261
GTCS
3.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
passenger compartment shall be metal, metal braided
line, or independently shielded with an additional steel
and/or aluminum bulkhead.
5.
An additional vertical, transverse bulkhead is permitted
behind the driver. It shall be located above the mandatory vertical bulkhead and shall allow the driver adequate
vision to the rear. It is recommended that this additional
bulkhead be made of a clear, transparent polycarbonate
material.
10. Safety (GT-1)
a. Steering Column/Locks
1. The steering column shall be a collapsible type, either by
layout design or by column construction, and shall comply
with GCR Section 9.3.41, “Steering Wheel Locks.”
b.
Fuel Cell
1. The maximum fuel cell capacity shall be 120 liters (31.68
gallons U.S.).
2.
No part of the fuel cell shall be closer to the ground than
six (6) inches, unless contained within the basic structural
frame rails of the vehicle and located forward of the rear
axle.
3.
The fuel cell shall be located in approximately the same
location as in the original vehicle, or may be relocated
behind the rear axle. It shall not be located within the
protected area of the driver/passenger compartment unless
specifically authorized in the GTCS.
c.
Kill Switch/Battery
1. The battery is unrestricted, provided that it meets the
specifications of GCR Section 9.3.9., “Batteries.”
d.
Brake Lights
1. Two (2) operating brake lights and two (2) operating tail
lights are required at the rear of the car.
2.
e.
Hoses/Lines
1. All fuel, oil, and coolant lines (including those lines that
perform fill, overflow, vent, return, etc., functions) which
pass through the driver/passenger compartment shall be
made of metal or metal braided hose, and shall be equipped
with AN-Series threaded couplers.
2.
E.
1.
The original tail light and brake light lenses shall be retained,
and shall be located in their original positions.
For front engine cars, no oil or fuel line located to the
rear of the transverse engine compartment firewall shall
be located in a compartment or otherwise restricted
area which also contains any component of the exhaust
system.
APPROVED AUTOMOBILES/NOTES
Notes (GT-1)
a. Carburetors/Fuel Injection
1. All cars shall use a single Holley Model 4150 carburetor,
GCR - 262
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
2.
Unless otherwise specified or permitted by the GTCS, fuel
injection is prohibited on GT-1 automobiles as of January
1, 1994.
3.
Pushrod V-6 engines may run a single Holley Model 4500
carburetor, but the minimum weight shall be increased to
that of the same displacement fuel injected car.
4.
V-8 engine cars with engine displacements of greater than
366 cubic inches (6.0 liters) shall use a one and threeeighths (1-3/8) inch throttle bore restrictor plate, mounted
beneath the carburetor, as specified in the diagram.
Required Restrictor Plate for GT Engines over 6.0 Liters (366CID).
Throttle Restrictor Plate Material: Aluminum, Thickness 0.75” Maximum.
1.375” Restrictor – Hole must be maintained for a depth of 0.125” Min.
Relief angles to clear Butterflies, Unrestricted.
5.
b.
Refer to Sections D.1.b. and c. of these rules for additional
induction system specifications.
Weight
1. The weight chart is applicable to all cars unless alternate
weight(s) is/are specified in the GTCS.
WEIGHT CHART FOR GT-1
Type - cubic inches (liters)
= Carb
V-6
V-8
V-8
V-8
V-8
-
up to 275 (4.5)
up to 311 (5.1)
312 (5.1) to 335 (5.5)
336 (5.5) to 366 (6.0)
over 366 (6.0) *
=
=
=
=
=
2430
2680
2780
2880
3180
*With restrictor to 1-3/8” throttle bores per restrictor plate diagram.
Weight in pounds with driver
Note: Ford engines without inline valves (meaning the valves are splayed
or canted) shall add 60 lbs.
Note: GM engines using the SB-2 head shall add 60 lbs.
GCR - 263
GTCS
restricted to one and eleven-sixteenths (1-11/16) inch
throttle bore, unless alternate carburetion and/or dimensions are specified in the GTCS.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
2.
All cars using a production based manual transmission
having no more than four (4) forward speeds and a working
reverse speed may reduce the listed weight by fifty (50)
pounds.
Note: A production based manual transmission is defined
as a unit that retains original type gears (i.e., no straight
cut, dog ring type gears). It shall be located in the same
basic position as used in the production automobile,
retaining the standard bellhousing dimensions, and may
use any shift linkage.
3.
All cars competing on ten (10) inch wide rims may reduce
the listed weight by fifty (50) pounds.
c. Approved Automobile List (GT-1)
Make/Model
American Motors Corporation
Concord
Javelin
Spirit
Wheelbase
108.0”
109.0”
96.0”
Chrysler Corporation
Chrysler Laser X/T
97.0”
Dodge Daytona
97.0”
Dodge Avenger
106.0”
Dodge Viper GTS
96.2”
Note: Viper shall use a class legal Dodge engine.
Dodge Viper Competition Coupe
8.3L sealed engine (4.03” x 3.96”), Comp. ratio: 9.6:1, Trans
ratios: 2.66, 1.78, 1.30, 1.00, 0.74, 0.50, Wheelbase: 98.8”,
Track (F&R): 62.8” / 63.3”, Wheels (F&R): 18x11 / 18x13, Tire
size (F&R): 305/30 / 335/30, Weight: 3175 lbs. Cars must remain
in the original configuration, factory optional equipment is not
allowed. May use fuel meeting the requirements for IT cars per the
GCR.
Ford Motor Company - Ford
Mustang (1965-68)
108.6”
Mustang (1969-70)
108.0”
Mustang (1979-93)
100.5”
Mustang (1994-1998)
100.5”
Mustang (1999-)
100.5”
Roof height 46.5” min. (measured from the ground). Air may be ducted
to the carburetor airbox through an opening in the back of the hood,
rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20”, maximum length 3.5”.
Opening may extend 1” into the windshield. Approved SCCA Pro Racing
bodywork allowed.
Probe V-6 or V-8
99.0”
Thunderbird (1983-89)
104.0”
Thunderbird (1990-)
105.0”
Taurus (2 door) (98-)
110.0”
Ford Motor Company - Lincoln/Mercury
Capri (1979-86)
100.5”
General Motors Corporation - Buick
Regal
Somerset
108.1”
108.1”
GCR - 264
Grand Touring Category Specifications
General Motors Corporation - Chevrolet
Beretta
103.4”
Only a beam-type, live-axle rear suspension is permitted.
Camaro (1967-69) *
108.0”
Camaro (1970-81) *
108.0”
Camaro (1982-92) V-6 or V-8*
101.0”
Camaro (1993-) V-6 or V-8*
102.0”
Corvette (1963-67) *
98.0”
Corvette (1968-77) *
98.0”
Corvette (1978-82) *
98.0”
Corvette (1984 -96) V-6 or V-8*
96.2”
Corvette (1997) V-8
104.5”
* Alternate transmissions: THM350 based or THM400 based 3 speed.
Corvette C6 (bodywork only) (05-) **
102.0”
** Bodywork from ACP only, 2” front splitter allowed. Front and rear
diffuser included in ACP kit shall not be utilized – undertray must comply
with GT1 rules.
Lumina (1990-)
106.0”
Monte Carlo (95-00)
106.0”
Monte Carlo (01-02)
110.0”
Monza
97.0”
Air may be ducted to the carburetor airbox through an opening in the
back of the hood, rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20”, maximum
length 3.5”. Opening may extend 1” into the windshield. Approved SCCA
Pro Racing bodywork allowed.
LS1 V8 engine allowed with stock plastic intake manifold @ 2680 lbs.
General Motors Corporation - Oldsmobile
Cutlass Ciera (1987-)
105.0”
Cutlass (1988-)
104.0”
Toronado (1987-)
105.0”
Aurora (2dr.)
106.0”
Air may be ducted to the carburetor airbox through an opening in the
back of the hood, rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20”, maximum
length 3.5”. Opening may extend 1” into the windshield. Approved SCCA
Pro Racing bodywork allowed.
General Motors Corporation - Pontiac
Fiero
94.0”
3300cc (4-cyl.), multi-carb and fuel injected weight = 1830 lbs.
3100cc (GM V-6) multi-carb and fuel injected weight = 1830 lbs.
4500cc Chevrolet 90 deg V-6 weight = 2430 lbs.
V-6 engine may be repositioned longitudinally in the engine bay along
vehicle centerline. GM V-6 bow tie block #10051141 may be used.
Mid engine configuration – may place fuel cell within the protected area
of the driver/passenger compartment provided that it meets all constraints
of GCR section 9.3.26.
Transverse V-6 may deduct fifty (50) lbs.
Firebird/Trans-Am (1969)*
108.0”
Firebird/Trans-Am (1970-81)*
108.0”
Firebird/Trans-Am (1982-1992 )*
101.0”
Firebird/Trans-Am (1993- )*
102.0”
Grand Prix
106.0”
*Alternate transmissions: THM350 based or THM400 based 3 speed. Air
may be ducted to the carburetor airbox through an opening in the back of
the hood, rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20”, maximum length
3.5”. Opening may extend 1” into the windshield. Approved SCCA Pro
Racing bodywork allowed.
GCR - 265
GTCS
9.1.2.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
LS1 V8 engine allowed with stock plastic intake manifold @ 2680 lbs.
Jaguar
XK8 / XKR
Note: shall use a class legal Ford engine.
100.5”
Mazda
RX-7
95.2”/95.7”
RX-8
102”
12A engine, multi-carb or fuel inj. weight = 1780 lbs.
13B engine, multi carb or fuel inj. weight = 1770 lbs.
20B engine, multi carb or fuel inj. weight = 2100lbs.
Nissan
300ZX/Z31
101.2”
3000cc V-6 engine, multi-carbs weight = 1880 lbs.
300ZX/Z32 (1990- )
101.2”
VG30D V-6 engine, (3) 48mm IDF with 40mm venturis weight = 1930
lbs. Permitted alternate hood: P/N 99996-Z32HP
Porsche
911
89.4”
3800cc 6, multi-carb or fuel injection weight, twin-plug head, dual ignition
distributor weight = 1880 lbs. Factory spoiler P/N 930-512-023-00 &
930-512-021-00 (or kit# 930-512-901-01). Entire assembly only (with
rubber lip). No alternate materials, no reproductions.
911 Cup 3.8 RSR
with the following additional specifications: Wheels: (F) 18 x 12, (R) 18
x 13, Allow FIA GT-2 front bumper cover, Allow FIA GT-2 “banana”
rear spoiler, Transmission: 6 speed, Type G50/30, Weight: 2310 lbs (w
/ driver). Original, factory-installed Matter roll cage structures permitted.
May use fuel per the IT specs of GCR section 9.3.25.
Boxster
89.4”
alternate engine: 3.8 liter air-cooled, multi-carb or fuel injection, twin-plug
head, dual ignition distributor. weight =1880lbs. Shall have windshield
and hardtop installed by 1/1/2003.
GT3 R/RS (00-02)
3600cc, Wheels: (F) 18 x 10”, (R) 18 x 11”, Allow FIA GT-2 front bumper
cover, Allow FIA GT-2 “banana” rear spoiler, Transmission: 6 speed Type
G50/30, Original, factory-installed Matter roll cage structures permitted,
weight 2425lbs. May use fuel per the IT specs of GCR section 9.3.25.
997 GT3 Cup
Shall run as delivered for the GT3 Cup Challenge except that tires are
unrestricted and fuel per IT specs. Cars shall meet the safety requirements
as specified in the GCR except that original, factory installed roll cage is
permitted. Competitors shall have a copy of the Cup Challenge rules in
their possession. Minimum weight 2810 lbs w/ driver.
Panoz
Esperanté
Note: Shall use a class legal Ford engine.
Shelby
Cobra
106.0”
90.0”
GCR - 266
9.1.2.
F.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GT-2, 3, LITE PREPARATION RULES
Front-engined GT cars registered as GT cars prior to January 1, 1990 may
be converted to Section F.2., specifications, but shall meet ALL specifications of Section F.2.
F.2.
GT cars registered as GT cars after January 1, 1990.
All front engined GT cars registered as GT cars after January 1, 1990
shall utilize McPherson strut or double A-arm front suspension. A-arm
front suspensions shall have the shocks attached to the outboard end
of an upper or lower control arm. Rocker arms, push-pull rods, etc., are
prohibited. Front wheel drive cars may convert to rear wheel drive. Cars
classified in GT2-Lite that retain the original front wheel drive (FWD)
configuration may retain the original type of rear suspension with no
weight penalty or use a beam axle.
Cars classified in GT2-Lite running front engine, rear wheel drive (RWD)
may use independent rear suspension (IRS), by choice at a weight increase
equal to 2.5% of the car’s specified weight.
All 1990 model year and later rear and mid-engined GT cars may use the
manufacturer’s original type of suspension or double A-arm front and rear
independent suspension as defined above. All rear and mid-engined GT
cars manufactured prior to the 1990 model year shall retain the manufacturer’s original type of front and rear suspension.
All GT cars registered as GT cars after January 1, 1990 or updated to
Section F.2.. specifications shall utilize left side driver placement.
F.3.
a.
Safety Equipment required on all cars.
Bulkheads
1. A metal bulkhead shall separate the driver/front passenger
compartment from the compartment containing the fuel cell.
The fuel cell, cap, filler neck, and all fittings shall be isolated
so that in case of spillage, leakage, or failure, fuel will not
reach the driver. The bulkhead separating the driver/passenger
compartment from the fuel cell shall not be above the bottom of
the rear window and the bottom of the side/quarter windows.
An additional vertical, transverse bulkhead is permitted behind
the driver. It shall be located above the mandatory vertical
bulkhead and shall allow the driver adequate vision to the rear.
It is recommended that this additional bulkhead be made of a
clear, transparent polycarbonate material.
b. Fuel Cells
A safety fuel cell complying with GCR Section 9.3.26., shall be installed.
All fuel cell vents shall incorporate check valves to prevent fuel spillage.
Dry-break refueling couplings and discriminator valves may be installed,
provided they do not extend beyond the bodywork.
c.
Windows
GCR - 267
GTCS
F.1.
GT Cars registered as GT cars prior to January 1, 1990.
All GT cars registered as GT cars prior to January 1, 1990 shall use
the manufacturer’s original engine location, i.e., front, mid, rear; drive
location, i.e., front or rear, and type of front and rear suspension, i.e.,
MacPherson strut, double A-arm, live axle, semi trailing arm, etc., unless
authorized by the GTCS for a specific make and model.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
1.
Windshield safety clips and rear window safety straps shall be
installed on all closed cars. Three (3) clips (3 inch x 1 inch x
1/8 inch) shall be bolted or riveted to the body at the top of the
windshield. Two (2) clips (3 inch x 1 inch x 1/8 inch) shall be
bolted or riveted to the cowl and extend over the bottom edge
of the windshield. Clips shall be spaced a minimum of twelve
(12) inches apart. The rear window shall be secured with two
(2) metal straps (1 inch wide x 1/8 inch thick) bolted or riveted
to the body at the top and bottom of the rear window. Polycarbonate windshields such as Lexan are allowed. Alternate windshields must be of 6mm minimum thickness. Alternate material windshields must be identical in size and curvature to the
original glass component. Alternate material windshields must
have in addition, three (3) inner supports to prevent the windshield from collapsing inward. These supports must be 0.75”
by .125” minimum straps of aluminum. Spacing between these
inner supports must be six (6) inches minimum.
3.
Windshield - Open Cars: The windshield and all side and rear
glass on open cars shall be completely removed, including all
mounting brackets and fixtures, and a suitable windscreen
installed.
Said windscreen shall be made of a transparent material and
shall not exceed the height or width of the original windshield/
screen. The replacement windscreen shall be fitted within the
vertical planes of the frontmost and rearmost elements of the
original windshield/screen.
4.
Ducts may be installed in the side windows or window openings for the purpose of supplying cooling air to the driver and/
or differential/transmission coolers and/or the rear brakes. Air
passing through the differential/transmission coolers may be
exhausted through an opening identical in size and location to
the rear license plate frame.
F.4.
Authorized Modifications
The following modifications are authorized on all GT-2, 3, and Lite cars.
Modifications shall not be made unless specifically authorized herein. No
permitted component/modification shall additionally perform a prohibited
function.
a.
General
1. It is not permitted to make any changes, alterations, or modifications to any component produced by the manufacturer,
unless specifically authorized by these rules, or required by the
GCR.
2.
Any springs (including torsion bars) may be replaced by others
of unrestricted origin, unless specifically prohibited by these
rules.
3.
Where alternate suspension and/or drive train equipment is
authorized, modifications to the car/chassis are permitted to
install authorized equipment, provided the modifications serve
no other purpose.
4.
All component parts of the bodywork, such as hood, doors,
fenders, deck lid, rocker panels, windshield surround, roof,
etc., may be lightened or replaced by ones of alternate mateGCR - 268
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
rials, provided the shape, size, and relative position is identical
to the original or approved alternate. The original size, angle,
and relative position of the windshield shall be maintained.
Convertible tops, sunroofs, and removable panels shall meet
GCR Section 9.3.17.
5.
Spare wheel and tire shall be removed.
6.
Glass and/or plastic headlights, front parking lights, front
signal lights, lenses, and bulbs shall be removed. Headlight
openings shall be covered with a wire mesh screen or panel
having the same contour as the original lens, mounted so that
the headlight bezel/rim remains in place, maintaining the standard appearance of the Production automobile. Side marker
light assemblies shall be removed and the resulting openings
covered with a plate whose dimensions do not exceed those of
the original parts; side marker lights that are an integral part of
the taillight assembly cannot be removed. Other lighting parts
and operating mechanisms may be removed. In the case of
pop-up headlights, the entire assembly may be removed and
the opening covered with a screen or plate (as above, without
the headlight bezel/rim requirement) which provides a stock
appearance. It is not permitted to relocate the standard headlight, parking light, signal light, etc., openings. Taillights shall
be in the original location and shall be the original style/type of
taillight for the make, model, and year of car.
Ducts from headlights, front parking lights, and front signal
lights in the front of the car may be used for ducting air to
the engine, front brakes, and/or oil cooler(s). These ducts may
pass through interior panels for this purpose. The cross section
area of a single duct shall not exceed the cross sectional area
of the original (single) headlight.
b. Chassis and Bodywork
The purpose of the following rules is to maintain recognizable external
features of the manufacturer’s make and model, while providing necessary safety and performance modifications.
Restrictions regarding external body shape and use of belly pans are
aimed at preventing attempts to obtain ground effect or streamlining.
Provisions in the rules permit one-off chassis and frames, to reduce the
cost of building and repairing GT cars, not to permit high technology
(streamlining and/or ground effects). Semi-monocoque or monocoque
construction is prohibited.
1.
The external shape of the body cannot be changed, except
when specifically authorized. Standard grills, window openings, or approved facsimiles shall be retained. All external
trim and model identification may be removed. Misalignment
or modifications to create ventilation where none previously
existed are prohibited. One piece front and one piece rear
bodywork is allowed. Rocker panels and doors may be parted
and/or integrated with associated body panels. Rocker panels
GCR - 269
GTCS
Vents may be added to the roof panel or rear window for
the express purpose of venting the driver’s compartment. A
maximum of 24 square inches of open area and a maximum
number of twelve openings are allowed. Each opening shall be
no larger than 4” x ½”.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
of an alternate material may be a flat vertical panel having the
same dimensions as the original component when viewed from
the side. Overall width of the vehicle/rocker panel measured at
the door sill must remain stock. Roof/A-pillars shall be separate
pieces. The cowl trim panel may be modified or removed.
2.
Chassis, frame, or subframe may be lightened, reinforced, or
replaced, provided components and attachments are not relocated, except where specifically permitted. Reinforcing does
not authorize the use of belly pans forward of the firewall,
or aft of the front edge of the rear wheel opening. The floor
behind the rear wheel opening shall be flat and follow, but not
exceed, the line of the rear fender bottom. Only the fuel cell
container may protrude or extend below this plane.
3.
No part of the bodywork or chassis, to the rear of the front
wheel opening, shall touch the ground when both tires on the
same side of the car are deflated.
4.
The firewall and floor may be replaced with aluminum alloy or
steel. Firewalls may be modified or notched.
5.
Bumpers may be removed providing all projecting hardware is
removed except when it (they) are an integral part of the bodywork, in which case it (they) may be replaced with replica(s)
of different material. Non-integral bumpers may be replaced
with a replica of alternate material or removed. Bumper bracket
holes in the bodywork may be covered provided such covering
serves no other purpose.
6.
All standard production seats and seat backs shall be removed.
The driver’s seat shall be replaced with a one-piece buckettype race seat. Such seat shall be installed so that a second
seat of the same dimensions could be simultaneously fitted to
the passenger’s side of the car (no center seating).
7.
Doors shall be pinned or otherwise positively fastened to
prevent their opening in case of an accident. Standard door
hinges and latch mechanisms may be removed, but the doors
shall be capable of being opened or removed unless integrated
into the bodywork. Interior door panels may be removed and
the door window slots may be covered. Pins or straps may
be added to hood and deck lid to supplement or replace the
latches. Hood and deck lid hinges may be removed.
8.
All driver and front passenger door window glass shall be
removed. Window cranks and mechanisms may be removed.
Rear quarter, rear side, and rear windows may be of transparent (clear) polycarbonate material, minimum thickness 3mm,
but shall remain in the same position in the frame or opening
as the original glass it replaces; rubber molding optional. Rear
windows/hatchbacks and deck lids shall be completely closed.
No bumper blocks or other means of poor alignment of bodywork will be permitted. Rear quarter (side) windows may be
run in their original open or closed position.
9.
Fenders may be flared for tire clearance, provided their shape
and opening contour, in the horizontal projection, is similar and
proportional to the original opening. Rear doors on 4-door automobiles may be considered part of the fender for purposes
GCR - 270
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
of fender flaring. The tire shall not extend beyond the fender
openings at the highest point of the tire. The rear fender flares
on GT-2 cars may extend forward into the door, no more than
26 inches from the rear axle centerline (GT-2 only). Wheel
opening location may be altered in accordance with the allowable wheelbase tolerance in order to maintain vehicle’s stock
appearance. Ventilation openings, other than those which are
standard production on the recognized model, are prohibited.
11. Replacement, addition, or removal of accessories (gauges,
switches, indicators, etc.), or other interior modifications for
driver convenience, or to permit installation of required safety
equipment, is authorized provided such modifications have no
influence whatever on the mechanical performance of the car.
Such modifications do not include the substitution or replacement of any bodywork or chassis component except those
specifically authorized by these rules. Floor mats and all interior trim shall be removed.
12. A spoiler may be fitted to the front of the car. It shall not
protrude beyond the overall outline of the car as viewed from
above except in GT2 where a front splitter may extend up to
two (2) inches. In all classes, the spoiler shall not extend aft of
the forward most part of the front fender opening (cutout), and
shall not be mounted more than four (4) inches above the horizontal centerline of the front wheel hubs. The spoiler shall not
cover the normal grill opening at the front of the car. An intermediate mounting device may be used on cars whose front
bodywork is above the four (4) inch minimum. Openings are
permitted for the purpose of ducting air to the brakes, radiator,
airbox and/or oil cooler(s); equal openings may be placed in the
standard lower front panel directly behind openings placed in
the spoiler. When bumpers are retained, the spoiler and bumper
shall appear to be two separate parts. The spoiler ”pan” area
forward of the leading edge of the front wheel openings shall
be flat and follow, but not exceed, the line of the front fender/
spoiler bottom. No components may protrude or extend below
this plane.
13. A spolier may be fitted to the rear of the car. It shall be contiguous with the bodywork and shall comply with the following:
A. Height (max): six (6.0) inches (GT-2 & 3) or five (5.0)
inches (GT-Lite) measured from the bodywork along the
face of the spoiler from the point of attachment to the
top of the spoiler. In the case of a spoiler with a curved
top edge conforming to the shape of the bodywork (rearview), the measurement is to be made perpendicular to the
tangent of the body at the point of attachment. In the case
of a spoiler mounted with a vertical mounting flange on the
bodywork, the measurement shall be made ignoring any
slight amount of mounting flanges (see below) exposed
due to the curvature of the rear bodywork at the point of
attachment.
B.
Width and Overhang: If roof mounted, no wider than the
GCR - 271
GTCS
10. Front and rear inner fender panels may be altered, replaced, or
removed provided there are panels providing total separation
between driver compartment and wheel wells.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
roof at its mounting point when viewed from above the
car. Mounting to be no further rearward than the forward
most part of the rear window. If rear mounted, no wider
than the body, excluding fender flares, from the forward
most part of the spoiler (or mounting flange) rearward.
Shall not extend rearwards of the rearmost extremity of
the bodywork for the entire width of the car (when viewed
vertically from above the car at any point, the spoiler shall
not protrude beyond the bodywork).
C. Mounting: Spoilers shall be strong enough to be selfsupporting. A mounting flange no greater than one and onehalf (1-1/2) inches wide, contiguous with the bodywork,
(either forward facing on the top surface of the bodywork
or downward facing on the rear surface of the bodywork)
shall be employed. Supplemental forward bracing may
be added in the form of two (2) rods, mounted at least
ten (10) inches inboard from the ends of the spoiler. Rear
supports may be added.
D. Configuration: The spoiler shall be a single plane spoiler (a
straight line in any vertical cross section) uniform in height
from the bodywork with no more than 1/8” gaps/openings
below the spoiler to facilitate imperfect mounting. The
gaps/ openings are to be included in the overall height of
the spoiler. Only enough curvature (in a fore and aft direction as viewed from above) shall be permitted to facilitate mounting. The use of fences, end rails, Gurney flaps,
wickerbills, or other forward facing lips or aerodynamic
devices is prohibited.
NOTE: O.E.M. rear spoilers are not permitted unless specifically listed on the vehicle’s specification form.
c.
Suspension and Wheels
1. Wheelbase will be homologated on a case by case basis as
requested by the manufacturer. Wheelbase may be changed
from -3” to +1” from printed stock dimensions in a fore/aft
direction.
2.
Suspension components may be reinforced, modified, or
replaced as long as the type of suspension is not changed from
that authorized in this GTCS.
3.
Suspension mounting points, including suspension springs,
may be relocated.
4.
Suspension springs may be replaced with others of unrestricted
origin.
5.
Modifications or substitution of hubs, bearing, spindles,
axle shafts, universal B joints, flex joints, and CV joints is
permitted.
6.
Addition or substitution of antiroll bars, camber compensating
devices, and/or suspension stabilizers is permitted. If these
devices extend into the driver/passenger compartment, they
shall be completely sealed off by metal panels.
7.
Suspension bushings and joints may be replaced by others of
GCR - 272
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
8.
Steering arms, pitman arms, and steering linkage component
parts may be modified, reinforced, or substituted. The steering
system may be changed and/or relocated.
9.
The steering wheel may be replaced and rake of the steering
column may be altered. A collapsible type of steering column
equivalent to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 204
is required in all cars registered after January 1, 1983 and
highly recommended for prior registered cars. GT cars registered after January 1, 1990 or GT cars converted to Section
F.2., specifications shall have left side driver placement.
10. Substitute wheels of any type may be used. All four (4) wheels
shall be of the same diameter except in GT2. GT2 cars may
run any tire/wheel combination provided that the tire does not
exceed a maximum cross section width of 12.0” in the front
and 13.75” in the rear. The maximum wheel size for GT3 cars
is 15 x 7” and for GTL cars is 13 x 7” unless alternates are
listed on the vehicle specification line. Alternatively, any wheel
up to 15 x 7” may be used in GTL with a weight penalty equal
to four percent of the car’s weight as listed on the spec line.
The minimum vehicle weight shall be rounded to the nearest
pound.
11. Shock absorbers: It is not permitted to alter the number of
shock absorbers. The make of shock absorber and its points
of attachment may be moved. Shock absorbers may have
load bearing capacity; e.g., gas filled or coil over. When using
load bearing shocks, the original springs may be removed. GT
cars registered after January 1, 1990 or GT cars converted
to Section F.2., specifications shall have the shock absorber
attached to the outboard end of an upper or lower control arm.
Rocker arms, push-pull rods, etc., are prohibited.
d.
e.
Electrical Systems
1. Standard battery may be replaced by one of different make and
capacity. The battery may be relocated and shall be securely
mounted and enclosed in a non-conductive protective box.
2.
The electrical/electronic system may be modified or replaced
provided an operating starter motor and two (2) brake lights
are retained.
3.
Any distributor or transistorized ignition system (including
crank triggered), firing the same number of spark plugs as the
original distributor, may be used.
4.
Magneto ignition is prohibited unless listed in the GTCS. Ignition wiring and spark plugs are unrestricted.
Engine and Drive Train/General
1. Exhaust manifold(s), header(s), tailpipe(s), and muffler(s) may
be of unrestricted origin. The exhaust pipe(s) and/or muffler(s)
may be recessed into the floor panel and rocker panel. The
exhaust may be recessed into the bottom of the door or rear
fender below a line seven (7) inches above the bottom of the
rocker. There maybe a maximum of two (2) such areas in the
GCR - 273
GTCS
different material and/or design. Offset bushings and spherical
bearings are permitted, including adjustable type.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
door or fender, with the maximum length for each no more
than seven (7) inches. Note that the exhaust outlet shall still
be mounted as low as possible; this does not authorize exhaust
outlets through the door. Exhaust opening(s) shall exit to the
rear of the wheelbase centerline and away from the body.
180 degree headers: The passenger’s side floor pan may be
raised not more than ten (10) inches to accommodate the
installation of the exhaust system and muffler(s) provided such
raising of the floor serves no other purpose. Exhaust may pass
through the rear bodywork no higher than the rear axle centerline.
2.
Exhaust emission control air pumps, associated lines and
nozzles, and EGR devices cannot be modified in any way except
that they may be completely removed. When air nozzles are
removed from the cylinder head, the holes shall be completely
plugged.
3.
Substitution or modification of the clutch and/or flywheel is
permitted.
4.
It is permitted to lighten, balance, or modify in shape, by
tooling, the standard or optional components of the engine and
drive train, provided it is always possible to identify them as
such. Material shall not be added to these components unless
specifically authorized by these rules.
5.
Alternate engine and drive train components considered replacement parts, such as seals, bearings, valve guides, pushrods,
water pump, timing chains/belts and sprockets, nuts, bolts,
studs, washers, and gaskets are permitted. Bushings or offset
keys of unrestricted origin may be installed.
6.
The substitution of valve spring retainers and keepers is
permitted. Valve springs are unrestricted (including number)
provided the type and location remain unchanged.
7.
Generator (alternator), crankshaft, and water pump pulleys
may be altered or replaced with others of unrestricted origin.
Any crankshaft vibration dampener is allowed.
8.
Any oil pan (sump), oil pump(s), and/or pickups are allowed. Oil
pump(s) shall be driven mechanically by the engine. Dry sump
GCR - 274
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
systems are permitted. The oil tank shall be located within the
bodywork. The oil tank, cap, and all fittings shall be isolated
so that in case of spillage, leakage, or failure, oil will not reach
the driver. Any oil filter(s) may be used.
Installation of any vent or breather on the engine, transmission,
or differential is permitted (See “Oil Catch Tanks”). Crankcase
vacuum devices are prohibited.
10. Any readily available transmission having a functional reverse
and no more than five (5) forward speeds may be used, providing
the location is the same as the production automobile. Any
shift linkage may be used. If a sequential shift gearbox is used,
the car must carry a weight penalty equal to 1.25 percent of
the weight as listed on the spec line. If a synchromesh engagement transmission is used, the weight may be reduced by 1.25
percent of the weight listed on the spec line. A synchromesh
gearbox is one having a friction mechanism to allow engagement. Note: The minimum vehicle weight is to be rounded to
the nearest pound. Air, hydraulic or electric actuation of the
gearshift mechanism is not allowed. For front engine, rear drive
cars requiring the transmission to be attached to the engine,
the transmission front seal shall be within twelve (12) inches
of the back of the engine block. On front engine/rear drive
cars, the transmission front seal is that seal which is within 5”
of the gear on the input shaft which meshes with the foremost
gear on the counter/layshaft.”
A functional reverse is defined as “operable by the driver from
his normal seated position and capable of sustained movement
of the vehicle, under its own power, in a reverse direction.”
A driver-operated device for locking out reverse gear may be
added provided it does not prevent prompt engagement of
reverse in an emergency situation.
11. Heavy duty propeller shaft(s) and/or drive shaft(s) may be
used. Steel retaining strap(s) shall be used to prevent drive
shaft failure from dropping or entering driver compartment.
12. Any axle tube, final drive housing, gear ratio, limited slip, or
locked differential may be used. Final drive units which permit
ratio changes while the car is in motion are prohibited. GT
cars registered after January 1, 1990 or GT cars converted to
Section F.2., specifications, using the front engine/rear drive
configuration, shall use a “closed tube” rear axle housing.
13. Engine and transmission mounts may be of alternate shape
and/or material. Cars with engines mounted longitudinal to the
chassis MAY relocate the engine in a longitudinal, not lateral,
direction within the following restrictions: (Note: A tolerance
of up to a 1.0 inch setback is allowed if the engine is relocated.)
A. V8, V6, and V4 engines shall align the center of the foremost spark plug hole in line with the front axle spindles.
B.
In-line six (6) cylinder engines shall align the center of the
first spark plug hole (from the front) in line with the front
axle spindles.
GCR - 275
GTCS
9.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
C. In-line four (4) cylinder engines shall align the center of the
first spark plug hole (from the front) in line with the front
axle spindles.
D. Rotary engines shall align the forward most spark plug
hole in line with front axle spindles.
E.
The engine may be rotated about the crankshaft centerline (lean over) a maximum of fifteen (15) degrees unless
otherwise noted and shall not cause hood bulges.
14. Any transverse mounted engine may be rotated for axle/CV
joint alignment. Any readily available transmission having a
functional reverse and no more than five (5) forward speeds
may be used, provided it is mounted to the rear of the engine.
All transverse engines may be rotated 180 degrees. A transverse mounted engine may be rotated to a longitudinal position that places the crankshaft centerline on the longitudinal
centerline of the car (shall conform to all restrictions in Section
9.1.2.F.4.e). The engine may be rotated about the crankshaft
(lean over) a maximum of fifteen (15) degrees unless otherwise
noted and shall not cause hood bulges. Rear axle / suspension
per GTCS 9.1.2.F.2.
f.
Engine, Reciprocating
1. Engines may be rebored a maximum of 1.2mm (0.047 inch)
over the standard bore size listed in the GTCS. A cylinder block
from any model from the same manufacturer which is of the
same material and dimensionally identical throughout, except
for non-critical bosses, is permitted.
2.
Crankshaft main bearing caps may be modified or substituted.
Main bearing cap straps or girdles and/or additional main
bearing cap bolts may be used, provided that no material is
added to the block for their attachment.
3.
The crankshaft may be replaced with another of the same
basic material, but with no change in stroke and provided the
angles of the crank throws remain the same. The engine firing
order shall remain unchanged.
4.
Connecting rods may be replaced with any connecting rod of
steel (ferrous) material. Aluminum, titanium, and non-metal
connecting rods are prohibited, except where fitted as standard.
5.
Any pistons and piston pins may be used.
6.
Any camshaft(s) may be used, provided locations are (is) the
same as standard.
7.
Any cam followers may be used, except that roller cam
followers shall not be used unless fitted as standard equipment.
8.
Any rocker arms and rocker assembly supports may be used.
9.
Valve sizes are unrestricted except when limited by the GTCS
for specific automobiles. Centerlines shall not be altered.
Valves may be of alternate material; non-metal is prohibited.
GCR - 276
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
10. Compression ratio may be altered by machining, using any
head gasket(s) or elimination of head gasket(s).
h.
i.
Engine, Rotary Piston
1. The capacity of the working chamber(s) shall not be changed.
2.
The eccentric shaft may be replaced with another of the same
basic material, but no changes in eccentricity or journal dimensions are permitted.
3.
Rotor is unrestricted, providing the material and number of
lobes remain unchanged.
4.
Alternate rotor housings are allowed only as listed in the GTCS
for specific automobiles. No changes are allowed in the epitrochoidal curve in alternate housing.
Cooling Systems
1. Cooling fan(s) may be modified, substituted, or removed. Electrically operated cooling fan(s) may be installed, provided it
(they) serve no other purpose. The use of any engine, transmission, and/or differential oil coolers(s) is (are) permitted
provided it (they) are mounted completely within or under
the bodywork, but not in the driver/passenger compartment.
Associated oil cooler pumps and lines are permitted for the
transmission and differential. Air ducts may be fitted to the oil
cooler(s) as specifically authorized herein.
2.
Any water radiator is allowed, provided there are no changes
in the exterior bodywork to accommodate its use. It shall not
be located in the driver/ passenger compartment. Separate
expansion or header tank(s) are permitted, provided they are
mounted in the engine compartment. The heater core may be
removed entirely but not modified or replaced.
3.
Sealing or shrouding the airflow area between the normal grill
opening and the water radiator is permitted.
4.
On water cooled cars, thermostats may be modified or replaced
with blanking sleeves or restrictors.
5.
Alternate fan and fan shroud are permitted on air cooled
engines.
Fuel Induction System
All inducted air shall pass through venturi(s), maximum one (1) per
cylinder or rotor.
1.
Any air filter(s) may be used, or the filter(s) may be removed.
Velocity stack(s) and/or air box(es) may be fitted. Air may be
ducted to the carburetor(s) provided the ducting is contained
within the engine compartment and air is supplied through
normal openings in the bodywork (or as specifically authorized
herein).
2.
Any fuel pump(s) may be used and the location(s) may be
changed. Fuel pump(s) shall not be located in the driver/
passenger compartment.
GCR - 277
GTCS
g.
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
3.
All fuel/oil lines passing through the driver/passenger compartment shall be steel or metal braided hose. Number of fuel lines
is unrestricted.
4.
Carburetors:
A. Reciprocating engines: Carburetor(s) and intake manifold(s)
are unrestricted except as limited in the GTCS for a specific
make/ model. All cars with restricted carburetion are
required to use I.R. manifolds with no plenums or balance
pipes unless using an SIR or otherwise restricted for
specific automobiles. Intake manifold(s) shall be attached
to the head(s) without modification to the head(s).
B.
Rotary engines: Carburetor and intake manifold are unrestricted except as limited in the GTCS for a specific make/
model. All cars with restricted carburetion are required
to use I.R. manifolds with no plenums or balance pipes,
unless using an SIR. Intake manifold(s) shall be attached to
the end cover(s) or rotor housing(s) without modification
to the end cover(s) or rotor housing(s).
C. No portion of the intake manifold(s) may extend into the
intake ports (reciprocating and rotary engines.)
D. Carburetors shall incorporate a butterfly-type throttle plate
for engine speed control.
5.
E.
Where Weber or Weber-type carburetors are specified and
used, they shall retain their standard configurations of fuel
distribution. This is to prohibit annular discharge carburetors.
F.
Where Weber carburetors are specified, Weber-type carburetors may be substituted. The following are approved
Weber-type carburetors: Weber, Solex, SK, Mikuni,
Delorto, Berg, and PMO.
Any car may utilize fuel injection, whether originally equipped
with fuel injection or not. The following restrictions apply.
A. Both method and manufacturer are open.
B.
Intake manifold shall be of the individual runner type,
unless using an SIR or otherwise notes on the vehicle spec
line. Cars using an SIR may use any manifold type.
C. Only butterfly-type throttle control, one per cylinder or
rotor, is permitted unless using an SIR. Cars using an
SIR may use any butterfly-type throttle control. If intake
restrictors are specified on the vehicle specification line,
the restrictors shall be round orifices (unless otherwise
specified) and located within four (4) inches of the throttle
butterfly. SIR location is unrestricted so long as all SIR
criteria are met. Restrictors shall be a minimum .060”
thickness and of the specified diameter.
D. All inducted air for each cylinder must pass through the
specified restrictor. Fuel injected cars, unless otherwise
specified, shall use the same individual venturi restriction
size specified for a car using carbureted induction.
GCR - 278
j.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
E.
The number of injectors shall be one (1) per cylinder (unless
otherwise noted on the vehicle specification line).
F.
Rotary engines may use two (2) injectors per rotor.
6.
Supercharging/turbocharging is prohibited.
7.
Float(s) shall not be removed or altered to produce (a) floatless
carburetor(s).
8.
Any throttle linkage may be used.
9.
Induction systems shall be equipped with a positive method of
throttle closing by means of (an) external spring(s).
Brakes
1. Any dual master cylinders and/or pressure equalizing/regulating
device(s) are permitted.
2.
Servo-assist systems are unrestricted.
3.
Backing plates/dirt shields may be ventilated or removed. Brake
air ducts may be fitted within the provisions of these rules.
4.
The hand brake may be removed.
5.
Brake lines shall be steel or metal braided hose. They may be
relocated and may be given additional protection.
6.
Brake calipers and/or drums are unrestricted except as limited
by the GTCS for a specific make/model. Brake rotors shall be
ferrous material but are otherwise unrestricted. Brake rotors/
drums shall be located in the original position (e.g., inboard vs.
outboard).
7.
Water cooled brakes are permitted, maximum reservoir capacity
two (2) gallons, maximum line size 3/16 inch I.D. The water
shall be atomized by an atomizing nozzle, and the water shall
enter the air duct a minimum of twelve (12) inches from the
centerline of the spindle/axle.
GCR - 279
GTCS
9.1.2.
9.1.2.
GT2
Cars - ACURA
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
NSX
NA
2dr
RWD
99.6
RSX
NA
2dr
FWD
101.2
No mid-engine mounting
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
The fuel cell(s) may be relocated to the front trunk area.
Engines - ACURA
Engine Family
GCR - 280
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
87.0 x 84.0
1997
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Automotive type
sidedraft
1950
DOHC
87.0 x 90.7
2157
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Automotive type
sidedraft
1950
DOHC
89.9 x 78.0
2971
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Automotive type
sidedraft
2280
DOHC
93.0 x 78.0
3176
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Automotive
type w/ 40mm
choke(s)
2330
SOHC
89.0 x 86.0
3210
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
2280
SOHC
89.0 x 93.0
3471
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
2280
Notes
Cars - ALFA ROMEO
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
GTV
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
Notes
Hood modifications allowed for carburetors.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
Engines - ALFA ROMEO
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
SOHC
88.0 x 68.3
2492
Alum,
Crossflow
2
46 IDA or
(3) 48mm
automotive
type w/ 42mm
choke(s)
2030
SOHC
93.0 x 72.6
2959
Alum,
Crossflow
2
46 IDA or
(3) 48mm
automotive
type w/ 42mm
choke(s)
2180
Notes
Cars - AUDI
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
TT Coupe
NA
2dr
FWD
97.3
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
82.5 x 92.8
1984
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) automotive
type w/ 48mm
choke(s)
1850
Engines - AUDI
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
GT2
Notes
Cars - BMW
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
325
84-91
2dr
RWD
101.2
M3 (E30)
88-91
2dr
RWD
101.2
M3 (E36)
95-99
2dr
RWD
106.3
M3 (E46)
00-
2dr
RWD
106.3
330ci (E46)
01-
2dr
RWD
107.3
Notes
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 281
Model
9.1.2.
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
S14
DOHC
93.4 x 84.0
2302
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
2080
M20
SOHC
84.1 x 75.0
2494
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(3) 48mm w/
40mm choke(s)
2080
M50
DOHC
84.1 x 75.0
2494
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
2280
S50
DOHC
86.0 x 85.8
2990
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(3) 45mm
Weber w/ 38mm
choke(s)
2280
S52
DOHC
86.4 x 89.6
3152
Alum,
Crossflow
4
36.5mm SIR
2280
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Cars - CHEVROLET
Model
Years
Body Style
Notes
Cavilier Z24
NA
2dr
FWD
104.0
Monza
75-80
2dr
RWD
97.0
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
GM racing block #XGB615 and cylinder head
#XGBH614 allowed.
Engines - CHEVROLET
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
89.9 x 89.03
2210
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
1950
DOHC
92.2 x 85.09
2272
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) 48mm w/
38mm choke(s)
2080
DOHC
90.0 x 94.0
2392
Alum,
Crossflow
4
35mm SIR
2080
OHV
101.6 x 82.6
2679
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) automotive
type w/ 48mm
choke(s)
2030
OHV
89.0 x 84.0
3136
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
or 39mm SIR
2150
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 282
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
Engines - BMW
GT2
Cars - CHRYSLER/DODGE/PLYMOUTH
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Breeze / Stratus
Neon
NA
2dr
FWD
108.0
NA
2dr, 4dr
FWD
Daytona / Laser
104.0
84-87
2dr
FWD
97.0
Notes
Turbo Z body panels allowed.
Engines - CHRYSLER/DODGE/PLYMOUTH
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
87.5 x 83.0
1995
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
1950
DOHC
87.5 x 83.0
1995
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
1950
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(2) automotive
type w/ 50mm
choke(s)
2080
Cars - FERRARI
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
308 GTB
76-
2dr
RWD
92.1
Fuel cell(s) must comply with GCR 9.3.26 but may be relocated to front trunk or remain in OEM
saddle tank locations.
288, 328, 348, 355
NA
2dr
RWD
96.5
Fuel cell(s) must comply with GCR 9.3.26 but may be relocated to front trunk or remain in OEM
saddle tank locations. Engine may be rotated longitudinally.
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - FERRARI
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
81.0 x 71.0
2926
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(4) Weber 40
DCNF
2280
DOHC
83.5 x 68.0
2980
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
2280
Notes
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
SOHC
Notes
9.1.2.
GCR - 283
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
GT2
Cars - FORD
Model
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Capri I, II
NA
2dr
RWD
100.8
Mustang
74-78
2dr
RWD
100.8
Mustang
79-93
2dr
RWD
100.5
Probe
NA
2dr
FWD
99.0/102.9
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - FORD
Engine Family
GCR - 284
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
91.0 x 77.0
1993
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type
1950
DOHC
90.82 x 77.05
1997
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) Automotive
Type
1950
DOHC
84.5 x 74.2
2496
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
2250
OHV
90.0 x 66.8
2550
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
2180
OHV
93.0 x 68.6
2796
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
2180
OHV
93.0 x 72.6
2934
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
2180
DOHC
83.5 x 68.0
2980
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
2280
Notes
World Products 2.9 OHV cylinder head allowed.
Cars - INFINITI
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
G20
99-02
4dr
FWD
102.4/97.5
Notes
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Years
Engines - INFINITI
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
GT2
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
1950
Notes
Cars - HONDA
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Prelude
93-
2dr
FWD
100.4
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - HONDA
Engine Family
DOHC
87.0 x 90.7
2157
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
2180
DOHC
86.9 x 95.0
2252
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
2230
Notes
VTEC not allowed.
Cars - JAGUAR
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
XKE Coupe, Roadster
NA
2dr
RWD
96.0
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Roadster windshield may be removed and a low front hoop roll cage fitted.
Engines - JAGUAR
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
87.1 x 105.9
3781
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(3) 2” SU or (2)
1.75” Stromberg
or (3) 48mm
auto-type on I.R.
manifold
2250
DOHC
92.0 x 105.9
4235
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(3) 2” SU or (2)
1.75” Stromberg
or (3) 48mm
auto-type on I.R.
manifold
2250
Notes
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 285
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
Model
9.1.2.
GT2
Cars - LOTUS
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Esprit
75-
2dr
RWD
96.0
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
95.3 x 76.2
2174
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) automotive
type w/ 48mm
choke(s)
2180
Wheelbase (in)
Engines - LOTUS
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
GT2
Notes
Cars - MAZDA
GCR - 286
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
MX-5 / Miata
90-
2dr
RWD
89.2
RX-7
NA
2dr
RWD
95.2 / 95.5
/ 95.7
RX-8
NA
2dr
RWD
98.0
Head
Type
Notes
Engines - MAZDA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
12A
Street Port
12A
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
2292
40mm choke(s)
1880
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
Street / Bridge /
Peripheral Port
2292
Unrestricted
automotive type
1980
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
13B
Street / Bridge Port
2616
(1) auto-type
2bbl w/ 44mm
choke(s)
1980
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
13B
Peripheral Port
2616
Unrestricted
automotive type
2080
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
Renesis
Street Port
2701
44mm choke(s)
1980
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
Engines - MAZDA (cont.)
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
20B
GT2
89.0 x 79.5
Street Port
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
2967
Alum,
Crossflow
4
6 individual
throttle bodies
w/ 40mm
choke(s)
2280
Hood bulge allowed.
40mm SIR
2280
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
3924
Notes
Cars - MERCEDES BENZ
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
190E
85-92
4dr
RWD
104.9
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
2599
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
2200
9.1.2.
Engines - MERCEDES BENZ
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
GT2
82.9 x 80.3
Notes
Cars - MERCURY
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Capri
79-86
2dr
RWD
100.8
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - MERCURY
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
OHV
93.0 x 68.6
2796
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
2180
OHV
93.0 x 72.6
2934
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
2180
Notes
World Products 2.9 OHV cylinder head allowed.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 287
Model
9.1.2.
GT2
Cars - NISSAN
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
240Z / 260Z / 280Z
-78
2dr
RWD
90.7
280-Z 2+2
NA
2dr
RWD
102.6
Notes
Headlight covers allowed.
GCR - 288
280-ZX
79-
2dr
RWD
91.3
240-SX
NA
2dr
RWD
97.5
240-SX S13
NA
2dr
RWD
97.5
Hood bulge allowed.
240-SX S14
NA
2dr
RWD
99.4
Hood bulge allowed.
300-ZX Z31
-89
2dr
RWD
91.3
Hood bulge allowed.
300-ZX Z32
90-
2dr
RWD
96.5/101.2
Hood bulge allowed.
350Z
NA
2dr
RWD
97.5 / 99.4 Doors may be pinned from the bottom at door bar height. Hood bulge allowed.
/104.3/90.7
/91.3/102.6
/104.3/91.3
/96.5/101.2
/ 104.4
Engines - NISSAN
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
SR20DE/VE
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
1950
L24
SOHC
83.0 x 73.3
2380
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(3) 50mm w/
46mm choke(s)
2080
KA24E
SOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
Alum,
Crossflow
3
(2) Automotive
type sidedraft w/
48mm choke(s)
2080
KA24DE
DOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
2080
VQ25
DOHC
85.0 x 73.3
2495
Alum,
Crossflow
4
35mm SIR
2130
Notes
Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and 11090RRZ30
allowed.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
Engines - NISSAN (cont.)
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
SOHC
83.0 x 79.0
2565
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(3) 50mm w/
46mm choke(s)
2080
L28
DOHC
87.0 x 77.2
2754
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(3) 50mm w/
46mm choke(s)
2080
L28
SOHC
86.1 x 79.0
2760
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(3) 50mm w/
46mm choke(s)
2080
VG30
SOHC
86.1 x 83.0
2899
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(3) 50mm w/
46mm choke(s)
2180
VQ30
DOHC
87.0 x 83.0
2960
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Automotive type
sidedraft w/
40mm choke(s)
or 37mm SIR
2280
An SCCA approved F.I. kit of OEM origin is allowed.
Contact the National Office for part numbers
and specs. Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and
11090RRZ30 allowed.
VQ30
DOHC
93.0 x 73.3
2988
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Automotive type
sidedraft w/
40mm choke(s)
or 37mm SIR
2280
Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and 11090RRZ30
allowed.
VQ35
DOHC
95.5 x 81.4
3498
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
2280
Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and 11090RRZ30
allowed.
Cars - PANOZ
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Esperante GTS
NA
2dr
RWD
107.6
Cars must be prepared to Panoz Esperante GTS specifications and competitors must have a copy
of the current GTS rules in their possession. Wheels: (F) 18x10 (R)18x11, Track (F) 64.0 (R)67.8.
Any tire with a diameter of 17” or 18” may be used provided the tire does not exceed a maximum
cross section width of 11.5” in the front and 12.5” in the rear.
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
5754
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Holly 4bbl. 750
cfm #0-4779C.
ProForm 67100C
throttle body
- Panoz part
#GTS6-3349
allowed.
2880
Maximum compression ratio of 10.5:1. Fresh air
intake air cleaner housing Panoz #GTS9-3348
allowed.
Engines - PANOZ
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
OHV
101.6 x 88.9
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
L26
9.1.2.
GCR - 289
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
GT2
Cars - PONTIAC
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Fiero
NA
2dr
FWD
93.4
May convert to front engine/rear wheel drive. If OEM engine location is used (i.e. rear-engine) IRS
weight penalty is waived. Air cleaner may protrude through engine hatch.
Grand Am
NA
2dr
FWD
103.4
Sunfire GT
NA
2dr
FWD
104.0
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - PONTIAC
Engine Family
GCR - 290
LE5 Ecotech
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
86.0 x 94.6
2198
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
1950
DOHC
88.9 x 89.03
2210
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
1950
DOHC
92.2 x 85.09
2272
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 48mm w/
38mm choke(s)
2080
DOHC
90.0 x 94.0
2392
Alum,
Crossflow
4
35mm SIR
2080
OHV
101.6 x 96.2
2471
Iron,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 48mm
choke(s)
1930
OHV
101.6 x 82.6
2679
Iron,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 48mm
choke(s)
2030
OHV
89.0 x 76.0
2837
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
or 39mm SIR
2080
OHV
89.0 x 84.0
3136
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
or 39mm SIR
2150
OHV
92.0 x 84.0
3350
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
or 39mm SIR
2230
OHV
94.0 x 84.0
3498
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
or 39mm SIR
2280
Notes
GM racing block #XGB615 and cylinder head
#XGBH614 allowed.
Factory aluminum cylinder heads allowed.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
GT2
Cars - PORSCHE
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
911 Coupe & Targe
68-
2dr
RWD
89.4
Factory spoiler: 930-512-023-00 & 530-512-021-00 (or kit #930-512-901-01), no reproductions.
Windshield may be removed on Targa and a low front hoop roll cage may be fitted.
914-6
NA
2dr
RWD
96.5
Top panels may remain if bolted or pinned. Roof of alt. material allowed. Windshield may be
removed and a low front roll cage may be fitted. 75-76 bumpers allowed.
944
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
968
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
Boxster
NA
2dr
RWD
95.1
Top panels may remain if bolted or pinned. Roof of alt. material allowed. Windshield may be
removed and a low front roll cage may be fitted.
996 GT3 Cup
98-05
2dr
RWD
92.5
Cars must be prepared to Porsche Cup Specifications except that cars must meet all SCCA safety
standards unless otherwise noted. Competitors must have a current copy of the Porsche Cup
rules in their possession. An alternate hood is allowed provided it is a facsimile of the stock part.
Original, factory-installed Matter/IMV roll cage allowed. Any wheel, including 5-bolt, may be used
provided it does not exceed 18x9 (F) and 18x11 (R). Battery size and location is unrestricted.
Shocks are unrestricted but they shall be installed in the stock location using the stock pick-up
points. Side window glass must be removed and windshield clips must be installed per GCR section
9.3.52.
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
Engines - PORSCHE
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
80.0 x 66.0
1991
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 46mm
choke(s)
2030
OEM 2-valve air-cooled heads may be modified to
utilize two spark plugs per cylinder. Alt. head: 911104-302-OR (w/ sealed injector port).
SOHC
84.0 x 66.0
2195
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 46mm
choke(s)
2030
OEM 2-valve air-cooled heads may be modified to
utilize two spark plugs per cylinder. Alt. head: 911104-302-OR (w/ sealed injector port).
SOHC
84.0 x 70.4
2341
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 46mm
choke(s)
2030
SOHC
100.0 x 78.9
2478
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Weber-type
w/ 48mm
choke(s)
2080
DOHC
85.5 x 72.0
2480
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) Weber-type
w/ 34mm
choke(s)
2080
Alt. 4 valve head #944 104 013 03.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Years
9.1.2.
GCR - 291
Model
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
104.0 x 78.9
2681
Alum,
Crossflow
2
35.5mm SIR
2150
90.0 x 70.4
2687
Alum,
Crossflow
4
36mm SIR
2180
SOHC
100.0 x 88.0
2766
Alum,
Crossflow
2
36mm SIR
2180
SOHC
95.0 x 70.4
2808
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 46mm
choke(s)
2030
DOHC
104.0 x 88.0
2981
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
automotive type
2180
SOHC
95.0 x 70.4
2992
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 46mm
choke(s)
2080
DOHC
93.0 x 78.0
3179
Alum,
Crossflow
4
40mm choke(s)
2380
DOHC
Unspecified
3200
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 46mm
choke(s)
2160
DOHC
Unspecified
3400
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive
type w/ 46mm
choke(s)
2220
DOHC
Unspecified
3600
Alum,
Crossflow
2
35.5mm SIR
2160
DOHC
Unspecified
3600
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
automotive type
2280
DOHC
Unspecified
3800
Alum,
Crossflow
2
36.5mm SIR
2280
DOHC
100.0 x 76.4
3595
Alum,
Crossflow
4
OEM fuel injection w/ stock,
unmodified
throttle body
2730
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 292
SOHC
DOHC
Notes
9.1.2.
Engines - PORSCHE (cont.)
Porsche Cup car only. Must run fuel meeting the
specs for IT cars per the Porsche Cup rules.
GT2
Cars - SUNBEAM
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Tiger
NA
2dr
RWD
86.0
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
Ford C30 FAB,
C30F-9510E,
C40F-9519-1E*
*Manifold: Stock
Sunbeam Tiger
manifold only.
Holley P/N 080507-1
(390 CFM) on
unrestricted
manifold. A
restrictor plate
between the
carburetor
and plenum is
mandatory for
cars running the
390cfm carburetor: 0.060” flat
steel or aluminum plate with
four (4) 1 1/16”
holes. Spacer
is unrestricted.
The restrictor
plate shall be
positioned within
4” of the throttle
butterflies. All
inducted air shall
pass through the
specified restrictor plate.
2280
Cylinder Heads: Any Ford 260, 289, or 302 Windsor
V-8 cast-iron production cylinder head, delivered on
U.S. model cars or trucks, and bearing unmodified
factory casting numbers beginning in C, D, E, or
F are allowed. Competitor shall be able to provide
documentation from the manufacturer identifying
application(s), displacement, engine family, and
casting identification. Ford Motorsport engine blocks
(P/N M-6010-A50 & M-6010-B50) are allowed.
Windshield may be removed and a low front hoop roll cage may be fitted.
Engines - SUNBEAM
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
96.5 x 72.9
4265
Iron,
Crossflow
2
OHV
101.6 x 72.9
4728
Iron,
Crossflow
2
2280
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 293
9.1.2.
OHV
GTCS
9.1.2.
GT2
Cars - TOYOTA
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Celica incl, GTS
82-89
Celica incl. GTS
90-05
MR-2
Notes
2dr
FWD
99.4
2dr
RWD
99.4
RWD only.
91-
2dr
RWD
94.5
No factory rear spoiler/wing. Fuel cell may be relocated to front trunk area. 3S front engine - rear
drive conversion @ 1950 lbs.
Solora
00-
2dr
FWD
107.1 /
102.4/97.0
Supra
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - TOYOTA
GCR - 294
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
3S
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Automotive type
sidedraft
1950
5S
DOHC
87.0 x 91.0
2164
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Automotive type
sidedraft
1950
2RZ
DOHC
95.0 x 86.0
2438
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
2080
5M
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
2759
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(3) 45mm
Weber w/ 38mm
choke(s)
2180
1MZ
DOHC
87.5 x 83.0
2995
Alum,
Crossflow
4
6 individual
throttle bodies
w/ 40mm
choke(s) or
37mm SIR
2280
2GR
DOHC
94.0 x 86.36
3594
Alum,
Crossflow
4
37mm SIR
2280
Notes
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
GT2
Cars - VOLKSWAGEN
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Corrado
NA
2dr
FWD
97.3
Golf incl. GTI
NA
2dr
FWD
97.3
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - VOLKSWAGEN
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
82.5 x 92.8
1984
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) Automotive
type w. 48mm
choke(s)
1980
DOHC
81.0 x 90.3
2782
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) Automotive
type w. 48mm
choke(s)
2280
9.1.2.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 295
DOHC
Notes
GTCS
9.1.2.
GT3
Cars - ACURA
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Integra
-93
2dr
FWD
96.5
Integra
94-
2dr
FWD
101.2
RSX
02-05
2dr
FWD
96.5/101.2
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - ACURA
Engine Family
GCR - 296
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
D16A
SOHC
74.9 x 89.9
1590
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 48mm w/
42mm choke(s).
1900
B16A
DOHC
81.0 x 77.4
1595
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 48mm w/
42mm choke(s).
2000
B18C
DOHC
81.0 x 87.2
1797
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 48mm w/
42mm choke(s).
2000
B18B
DOHC
81.0 x 89.0
1834
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 45mm w/
38mm choke(s)
2100
K20A
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2100
K24
DOHC
87.0 x 99.0
2354
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2180
Notes
Cars - ALFA ROMEO
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
GTV 1750 / 2000
NA
2dr
RWD
92.5
Sport Sedan
NA
2dr
RWD
98.8
Notes
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
Engines - ALFA ROMEO
Engine Family
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
DOHC
80.0 x 88.5
1779
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1800
Alt. Head: 19510-01053-04 (twin plug), w/ 100 lb.
penalty.
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1962
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2000
Alt. Head: 19510-01053-04 (twin plug), w/ 100 lb.
penalty.
Cars - AMC
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Gremlin
-78
2dr
RWD
96.0
Spirit
79-
2dr
RWD
96.0
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
9.1.2.
Engines - AMC
Engine Family
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
OHV
95.3 x 88.8
2537
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Holley 5210/2V
2380
OHV
95.3 x 88.9
3805
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Carter YF-1V,
Holley 500 CFM
2bbl.
2600
Notes
Cars - AUDI
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
TT Coupe
NA
2dr
FWD
95.6 / 97.3
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - AUDI
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) 50mm w/
50mm choke(s)
1800
DOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2000
Notes
Alt. Eurospec Sports cyl. head may be used.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 297
Model
9.1.2.
GT3
Cars - BMW
Model
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
2002 / 2002ti/tii
NA
2dr
RWD
100.5/98.5
318 Coupe
92-
2dr
RWD
106.0
318i
83-91
4dr
RWD
101.2
318i / 320i
77-82
4dr
RWD
100.9
E36
00-
2, 4dr
RWD
106.0 /
101.2 /
100.9
Z3
NA
2dr
RWD
96.3
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - BMW
Engine Family
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
89.0 x 71.0
1767
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1800
DOHC
84.0 x 81.0
1796
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s)
2010
DOHC
85.0 x 83.5
1895
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s)
2010
SOHC
89.0 x 80.0
1991
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1810
DOHC
93.4 x 84.0
2302
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2180
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Cars - CHEVROLET
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Vega
NA
2dr
RWD
97.0
Corvair Coupe / Yenko Stinger
NA
2dr
RWD
108.0
Cavalier Z-24
NA
2dr
FWD
101.2
Notes
Corvair coupes may be modified to Yenko configuration. Non-tube frame track 59.7 (F), 62.9
(R). Rear wheel width: 8”. Engine may be centered (side to side) to allow installation of alternate
transaxle.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 298
Years
Engines - CHEVROLET
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
SOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2000
DOHC
88.9 x 80.3
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
2300
SOHC
88.9 x 92.1
2287
Iron, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
2180
OHV
87.4 x 74.7
2689
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Weber 40
IDT or IDA w/
36mm choke(s),
or (4) Rochester
7025023 &
7026026 1.5”
1bbl carbs.
2225
Notes
9.1.2.
Cars - CHRYSLER/DODGE/PLYMOUTH
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Neon
NA
2dr, 4dr
FWD
104.0
Daytona / Laser
84-88
2dr
FWD
97.0
Daytona / Laser
89-
2dr
FWD
97.3
Horizon
NA
2dr
FWD
96.7
Omni 024 / Shelby Charger
79-82
2dr
FWD
96.6
Shadow
NA
2dr
FWD
97.0
Notes
Engines - CHRYSLER/DODGE/PLYMOUTH
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
DOHC
85.0 x 88.0
1997
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 45mm w/
34mm choke(s)
2150
SOHC
85.0 x 88.0
1997
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s)
1900
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s)
2030
Notes
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 299
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
GT3
Cars - FIAT
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
131 Coupe & Sedan, Brava
NA
2dr, 4dr
RWD
98.0
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
84.1 x 89.9
1995
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2000
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Engines - FIAT
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
GT3
Notes
Cars - FORD
Model
Notes
GCR - 300
Capri
NA
2dr
RWD
100.8
Mustang II
74-78
2dr
RWD
96.2
Mustang
79-93
2dr
RWD
100.4
Mustang
94-98
2dr
RWD
101.2
Pinto
NA
2dr
RWD
94.0
Probe
NA
2dr
FWD
99.0/102.9
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Non-tube frame track: 60.52 (F&R). Spoiler: #D9FZ-6440555-A, End Pieces: D9FZ-6428010-A
and D9FZ-6428011-A.
Engines - FORD
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
91.0 x 77.0
1993
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1900
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2080
SOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) 48mm w/
42mm choke(s)
1900
Notes
Alt. head: SVO #M-6049-A230 w/ 45mm choke(s).
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
Engines - FORD (cont.)
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Duratech
GT3
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
SOHC
86.0 x 94.0
2189
Alum,
Crossflow
3
(2) 45mm w/
38mm choke(s)
2080
DOHC
87.5 x 94.0
2260
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2180
Notes
Cars - HONDA
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
88-91
3dr
FWD
90.6
92-95
2dr
FWD
98.4
Hood bulge allowed, no openings.
CRX
84-87
3dr
FWD
86.6
CRX
88-91
3dr
FWD
90.6
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
9.1.2.
Hood bulge allowed, no openings.
Engines - HONDA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
EW
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
Alum,
Crossflow
3
33mm SIR
1820
D15B
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s)
1900
D16A
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 48mm w/
42mm choke(s)
1900
B16A
DOHC
81.0 x 77.4
1595
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 48mm w/
42mm choke(s)
2000
B18C
DOHC
81.0 x 87.2
1797
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 48mm w/
42mm choke(s)
2000
B18B
DOHC
81.0 x 89.0
1834
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 45mm w/
38mm choke(s)
2100
K20A
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2100
K24
DOHC
87.0 x 99.0
2354
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2180
Notes
Alt. heads: #12100-PE3-000 or #12100-PE7-000.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 301
Civic
Civic Coupe
9.1.2.
GT3
Cars - MAZDA
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
98.8
Notes
GCR - 302
626
83-87
4dr
FWD
MX-3
NA
2dr
FWD
96.3
MX-5 / Miata
-05
2dr
RWD
89.2 / 91.0
MX-5
2006
2dr
RWD
91.7
MX-6
88-
2dr
FWD
99.0/102.8
RX-2
NA
2dr
RWD
97.3
RX-3
NA
2dr
RWD
91.0
RX-7
NA
2dr
RWD
95.3 / 95.5
/ 95.7
RX-8
NA
2dr
RWD
98.0
Protégé
NA
4dr
FWD
98.4
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Non-tube frame track: 63.2 (F), 62.8 (R).
Engines - MAZDA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
B6D
DOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) auto-type w/
42mm choke(s).
1900
BP
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) auto-type w/
38mm choke(s).
2020
SOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) auto-type w/
42mm choke(s).
1900
DOHC
87.38 x 83.06
1999
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2000
SOHC
86.0 x 94.0
2189
Alum,
Crossflow
3
(2) auto-type w/
38mm choke(s).
1980
DOHC
87.5 x 94.0
2260
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2180
MZR
MZR
Notes
Hood bulge allowed w/ no openings.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
Engines - MAZDA (cont.)
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
12A
Street Port
12A
Valves/
Cyl.
Notes
2292
(1) auto-type
2bbl w/ 42mm
choke(s).
2000
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
Bridge Port
2292
(1) auto-type
2bbl w/ 40mm
choke(s).
2000
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
12A
Peripheral Port
2292
37mm SIR
2180
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
13B
Street Port
2616
Unrestricted
2180
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
13B
Bridge / Peripheral Port
2616
37mm SIR
2180
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
Renesis
Street Port
2703
Unrestricted
2180
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
Renesis
Bridge / Peripheral Port
2703
37mm SIR
2180
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
Cars - MERCURY
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Capri
79-86
2dr
FWD
100.4
Cougar
99-02
2dr
FWD
103.0 /
106.4
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - MERCURY
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
91.0 x 77.0
1993
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1900
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
Iron,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2180
Notes
Alt. Head: SVO #M-6049-A230 w/ 45mm choke(s).
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Weight
(lbs)
9.1.2.
GCR - 303
Fuel
Induction
GT3
Head
Type
9.1.2.
GT3
Cars - MITSUBISHI / EAGLE
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Talon
NA
2dr
FWD
97.3
Ecplise
NA
2dr
FWD
97.3
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - MITSUBISHI / EAGLE
Engine Family
GCR - 304
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
85.0 x 88.0
1997
Alum,
Crossflow
4
(2) 45mm w/
34mm choke(s).
2150
SOHC
85.0 x 88.0
1997
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s).
1900
SOHC
97.5 x 92.0
2213
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s).
2030
Notes
Cars - NISSAN
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
200-SX / S10
77-79
2dr
RWD
92.1
200-SX / S11
80-83
2dr
RWD
94.5
200-SX / S12
84-88
2dr
RWD
95.5
200-SX SER
95-97
2dr
RWD
95.7 / 99.8
240-SX / S13
NA
2dr
RWD
97.5
Hood bulge allowed, no openings.
240-SX / S14
NA
2dr
RWD
99.4
Hood bulge allowed, no openings.
240Z / 260Z / 280Z
NA
2dr
RWD
90.7
280-ZX
-79
2dr
RWD
91.3
300-ZX
NA
2dr
RWD
91.3 / 96.5
/ 101.2
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
GT3
Cars - NISSAN (cont.)
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
350Z
NA
2dr
RWD
95.3 / 98.4
/104.3/94.5
/ 92.1/95.3
/ 97.5/ 99.4
/ 104.3
Notes
NA
2, 4dr
RWD
98.4
NA
2, 4dr
RWD
95.3
Sentra SER Spec V
2002
4dr
FWD
95.7
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
Engines - NISSAN
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
L18
SOHC
85.0 x 78.0
1770
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1800
Alt. Heads: #11041-22010, 11041-U0600-A,
11041-U0602-SV, 11041-21901, 11041-N7120.
L20
SOHC
85.0 x 86.0
1952
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
50mm w/ 50mm
choke(s)
1780
Alt. Heads: #11041-22010, 11041-U0600-A,
11041-U0602-SV, 11041-21901, 11041-N7120.
SOHC
84.5 x 88.0
1974
Alum,
Crossflow
2
50mm w/ 50mm
choke(s)
1900
SR20DE/VE
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2000
L20 w/ Z22 block
SOHC
87.0 x 86.0
2045
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
50mm w/ 50mm
choke(s)
1850
NAPZ
SOHC
87.0 x 92.0
2188
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
50mm w/ 50mm
choke(s)
1930
L24
SOHC
83.0 x 73.3
2380
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
KA24E
SOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
Alum,
Crossflow
3
(2) 45mm w/
34mm choke(s)
2180
KA24DE
DOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2180
High port (89-94) and low port (95-01) allowed.
An SCCA approved F.I. kit of OEM origin is allowed.
Contact the SCCA National Office for p/n’s and
specs.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 305
Engine Family
9.1.2.
710
PL510
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
L26
SOHC
83.0 x 79.0
2565
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
L28
SOHC
86.1 x 79.0
2760
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
VG30
SOHC
86.1 x 83.0
2899
Alum,
Crossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
Notes
Cars - PONTIAC
GCR - 306
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Fiero
NA
2dr
RWD
93.4
May convert to front engine/rear wheel drive. If OEM engine location is used (rear engine) IRS
weight penalty is waived. Air cleaner may protrude through engine hatch.
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
2677
Alum,
Crossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
Engines - PONTIAC
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
OHV
GT3
101.6 x 82.55
Notes
Cars - PORSCHE
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
911 Coupe & Targa
68-
2dr
RWD
87.0 / 89.4
Windshield may be removed on Targa and a low front hoop may be fitted. Rear rim width: 8”.
Factory spoiler: #930-512-023-00 & 930-512-021-00 (or kit #930-512-901-01). No alternate
materials or reproductions.
914
NA
2dr
RWD
96.5
Top panels may remain if securely bolted or pinned. Windshield may be removed and a low front
hoop roll cage fitted. (75-76) bumpers allowed.
924
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
944
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
Boxster
NA
2dr
RWD
96.5
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
Engines - NISSAN (cont.)
Engines - PORSCHE
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
1968
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) auto-type
w/ (1) throat
per cyl.
1800
Intake manifold: #021-129-705R. Sleeves: Cast Iron.
Alt. Head: Type 1/Type 3.
SOHC
86.5 x 84.4
1984
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) Weber 45
DCOE w/ 42mm
choke(s)
2000
Alt. Head: #933-104-302-50.
SOHC
80.0 x 66.0
1991
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) 40 IDA/
IDS/IDT 3C, (6)
Solex 40 PI, or
(2) 46 IDA/IDS
w/ 40mm
choke(s).
1950
OEM 2-valve air cooled heads may be modified to
utilize two (2) spark plugs per cyl. Alt Head: 911104-302-OR (w/sealed injector port).
SOHC
84.0 x 66.0
2195
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) 40 IDA/
IDS/IDT 3C, (6)
Solex 40 PI, or
(2) 46 IDA/IDS
w/ 40mm
choke(s).
2030
OEM 2-valve air cooled heads may be modified to
utilize two (2) spark plugs per cyl.
SOHC
84.0 x 70.4
2341
Alum,
Crossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
SOHC
100.0 x 78.9
2478
Alum,
Crossflow
2
34mm SIR
2215
SOHC
100.4 x 78.9
2681
Alum,
Crossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
SOHC
90.0 x 70.4
2687
Alum,
Crossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
SOHC
100.0 x 88.0
2766
Alum,
Crossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
SOHC
92.0 x 70.4
2808
Alum,
Crossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
SOHC
95.0 x 70.4
2992
Alum,
Crossflow
2
33mm SIR
2200
Alt. 4 valve head: #944 104 013 03 w/ 33mm SIR.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
94.0 x 70.9
9.1.2.
GCR - 307
OHV
9.1.2.
GT3
Cars - SAAB
Years
900
79-
99E, CM, EMS, GL, LE
NA
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
2dr
FWD
99.4
2, 4dr
RWD
97.4
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - SAAB
Engine Family
GCR - 308
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
87.0 x 78.0
1854
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1900
SOHC
90.0 x 78.0
1985
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2000
DOHC
90.0 x 78.0
1985
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2000
Cars - SCION
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
tC
05-
2dr
FWD
93.7
Wheelbase (in)
GT3
Notes
Notes
May use any class legal Toyota engine.
Cars - TOYOTA
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Celica
94-99
2dr
FWD
99.4
Celica
00-05
2dr
FWD
102.4/93.7
Celica Sport, Coupe GT, ST,
Liftback GT
NA
2dr
FWD
98.3
Corolla
NA
2, 4dr
FWD
94.5/102.4
/ 93.7
MR-2
-89
2dr
RWD
91.3
Notes
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
GT3
Cars - TOYOTA (cont.)
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
91.3
Notes
MR-2
99-02
2dr
FWD
Paseo
92-99
2dr
FWD
93.7
Tercel
91-
4dr
FWD
95.3 / 93.7
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - TOYOTA
Engine Family
81.0 x 77.0
1587
Alum,
Crossflow
4
48mm w/ 42mm
choke(s)
1900
OHV
85.0 x 78.0
1770
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1800
3S
SOHC
84.2 x 90.1
1998
Alum,
Crossflow
2
48mm w/ 42mm
choke(s)
1820
20R
SOHC
88.5 x 89.0
2189
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2180
2AZ
DOHC
88.5 x 96.0
2362
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2180
DOHC
95.0 x 86.0
2438
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2180
2TG cyl. head allowed.
Alt. head: #11101-75015.
Cars - TRIUMPH
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
GT6, GT6+ & Mk III
-74
2dr
RWD
83.0
TR-250 / TR-6
NA
2dr
RWD
88.0
Notes
Windshield may be removed and a low front hoop roll cage fitted.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 309
GT3
DOHC
Notes
9.1.2.
4AG
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
OHV
74.7 x 75.9
1998
Iron, NonCrossflow
2
(3) Weber 40
DCOE w/ 34mm
choke(s)
1870
OHV
74.7 x 95.0
2498
Iron, NonCrossflow
2
(3) 45mm w/
40mm choke(s)
2080
Notes
GCR - 310
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GT3
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Cars - VOLKSWAGEN
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Beetle
98-01
2dr
FWD
98.9
Corrado
NA
3dr
FWD
97.3
Golf & GTI
NA
3, 5dr
FWD
97.3 / 98.9
Jetta
NA
4dr
FWD
97.3
Rabbit
75-84
3, 5dr
FWD
94.5
Scirocco
NA
3dr
FWD
94.5
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - VOLKSWAGEN
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
Engines - TRIUMPH
Notes
SOHC
79,5 x 86.4
1715
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s)
1800
Alt. Eurospec Sports cyl. head may be used.
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
Alum,
Crossflow
2
(2) 45mm w/
45mm choke(s)
1850
Alt. Eurospec Sports cyl. head may be used.
DOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
Alum,
Crossflow
4
45mm w/ 38mm
choke(s)
2000
SOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
Alum,
Crossflow
2
50mm w/ 50mm
choke(s)
1750
DOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
Alum,
Crossflow
4
33mm SIR
2000
Alt. Eurospec Sports cyl. head may be used.
GT3
Cars - VOLVO
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
122S
NA
2dr
RWD
102.5
142 / 142E
NA
2dr
RWD
102.5
242 / 244DL
NA
2dr
RWD
104.0
S40
NA
4dr
FWD
100.4
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - VOLVO
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
88.9 x 80.0
1986
Iron, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1930
B20
SOHC
92.0 x 80.0
2127
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2180
B21
SOHC
96.0 x 80.0
2320
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2180
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 311
OHV
Notes
9.1.2.
Engine Family
GTCS
Cars - Acura
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Integra
(-93)
2dr
FWD
96.5
May use any class legal Honda engine.
Integra
(94-)
2dr
FWD
101.2
May use any class legal Honda engine.
RSX
(02-05)
2dr
FWD
96.5 /
101.2
May use any class legal Honda engine.
GCR - 312
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
GTL
9.1.2.
GTL
Cars - ALFA ROMEO
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
GT-1300 Junior
NA
2dr
RWD
92.5
GTA Junior
NA
2dr
RWD
92.5
Notes
Alfetta GT
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
Guilia 1300
NA
2dr
RWD
98.8
Guilia 1300 TI
NA
2dr
RWD
98.8
GTV 1600
NA
2dr
RWD
92.5
GTV 1750 / 2000
NA
2dr
RWD
92.5
Giulietta Spider / Giulia Spider
NA
2dr
RWD
86.6 / 88.6
all Spider models
(-94)
2dr
RWD
88.6
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - ALFA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
78.0 x 67.5
1130
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1655
DOHC
74.0 x 75.0
1290
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1655
Notes
Engines - ALFA (cont.)
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
DOHC
80.0 x 67.5
1357
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1655
DOHC
78.0 x 82.0
1570
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1910
DOHC
80.0 x 75.0
1508
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1850
DOHC
80.0 x 88.5
1779
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
Notes
Cars - AMC
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
AMC/Renault Alliance
NA
3dr
FWD
93.5
AMC/Renault Encore
NA
2dr
FWD
93.5
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - AMC
Engine Family
GTL
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Notes
OHV
73.0 x 77.0
1296
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1712
Alternate crossflow head #7700597627.
OHV
76.0 x 77.0
1397
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1807
Alternate crossflow head #7700597627.
Cars - BLMI
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Austin-Healey Sprite
NA
2dr
RWD
80.0
MG Midget
NA
2dr
RWD
80.0
Mini Cooper
NA
2dr
FWD
80.2
Notes
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 313
Model
9.1.2.
GTL
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
GTL
Cars - BLMI (cont.)
Model
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Austin America
NA
2dr
FWD
93.5
BMW Mini
02-05
2dr
FWD
97.1
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - BLMI
Engine Family
GCR - 314
W10B16
GTL
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Notes
OHV
62.992 x 76.2
948
Iron, nonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1210
RWD add 50 lbs.
OHV
70.6 x 61.91
970
Iron, nonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1236
RWD add 50 lbs. Reduce by 100 lbs with original
suspension and 10” wheels. Front and rear body
seams may be removed. Pierce/PBS aluminum cylinder head allowed.
OHV
70.6 x 68.26
1071
Iron, nonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1331
RWD add 50 lbs. Reduce by 100 lbs with original
suspension and 10” wheels. Front and rear body
seams may be removed. Pierce/PBS aluminum cylinder head allowed.
OHV
64.516 x 83.82
1098
Iron, nonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1380
RWD add 50 lbs.
OHV
2.78 x 3.20
(70.6 x 81.33)
alt. bore:
73.5 max. or
74.0 max.
1275
1380
1399
Iron, nonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1569
1380 @
1648
1399 @
1708
SOHC
77.0 x 85.8
1598
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1900
RWD add 50 lbs. Roll cage meeting requirements for
cars under 1500lbs are acceptable for cars registered
prior to 1/1/82. Reduce by 100 lbs with original suspension and 10” wheels. Front and rear body seams
may be removed. Pierce/PBS aluminum cylinder head
allowed.
Cars - BMW
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
1600-2 / 1602
NA
2dr
RWD
98.5
Notes
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Years
Engines - BMW
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
GTL
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
84.0 x 71.0
1573
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1918
Notes
Cars - DODGE
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Colt Coupe
NA
2dr
FWD
96.0
Omni
NA
2dr
FWD
99.2
024
1978
2dr
FWD
96.7
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Mitsubishi bodywork allowed.
9.1.2.
Engines - DODGE
Engine Family
GTL
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
79.0 x 86.0
1597
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1910
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
1715
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
Notes
Cars - FIAT
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
124 Sport Coupe
NA
2dr
RWD
95.3
124 Special
NA
2dr
RWD
95.3
128 Coupe
NA
2dr
FWD
87.5
128
NA
2dr
FWD
96.4
131 Coupe
NA
2dr
RWD
98.0
131 Sedan
NA
4dr
RWD
98.0
X19
NA
2dr
RWD
86.7
Notes
Removable roof panel must be in place
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 315
Model
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
80.0 x 55.5
1116
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1417
OHC
86.0 x 55.5
1290
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1645
OHV
80.0 x 71.5
1438
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1902
SOHC
86.4 x 64.0
1498
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1815
DOHC
80.0 x 79.2
1592
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1918
DOHC
80.0 x 80.0
1608
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
DOHC
84.0 x 79.2
1756
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Anglia Super
NA
2dr
RWD
90.5
Cortina GT
64-68
2dr
RWD
98.0
Escort Super
68-74
2dr
RWD
96.0
Escort Lynx, EXP, LN7
81-90
1982
2dr
FWD
94.2
Escort Mexico
70-74
2dr
RWD
96.0
Fiesta
78-80
2dr
FWD
90.0
Pinto
NA
2dr
RWD
94.0
GTL
Roll cage meeting requirements for cars under
1500 lbs are acceptable for cars registered prior to
1/1/82.
Cars - FORD
Model
Notes
Non-tube frame track: (F&R) 60.52”
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 316
OHC
Notes
9.1.2.
Engines - FIAT
Engines - FORD
Engine Family
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
OHV
3.19 x 2.29
1198
Iron, Noncrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1598
Alternate 1500cc Block: casting # 27333E6015 @
+23 lbs.
OHV
3.19 x 2.48
1297
Iron, Non
crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1598
Alternate 1500cc Block: casting # 27333E6015
w/ 23 lb penalty, 1600cc block w/ 25 lb penalty.
Any Formula Ford cyl. head may be used, including
aluminum version w/ 75 lb. penalty.
OHV
81.0 x 73.2
1499
Iron, Non
crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1902
OHV
81.0 x 77.5
1598
Iron,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1902
SOHC
80.0 x 79.5
1598
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1918
DOHC
80.6 x 88.0
1796
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1950
Any Formula Ford cylinder head may be used,
including aluminum version.
Alt. 2.0L cyl block may be sleeved to specified
bore size.
Cars - HONDA
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Civic
73-79
3dr
FWD
86.6
Civic
80-87
3dr
FWD
88.6
CRX
84-87
3dr
FWD
86.6
Civic
84-87
2dr, 3dr
FWD
93.7
Civic
84-87
4dr
FWD
96.5
CRX
88-91
3dr
FWD
90.6
Hood bulge permitted, no openings.
Civic
88-91
3dr
FWD
98.4
Hood bulge permitted, no openings.
Civic
92-95
2dr
FWD
103.2
Hood bulge permitted, no openings.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GTL
Disp.
(cc)
9.1.2.
GCR - 317
Zetec
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
EB
SOHC
70.0 x 76.0
1170
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1640
Alt heads: #12100-634-000.
EB
SOHC
72.0 x 76.0
1237
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1726
Alt heads: #12100-634-000.
EN
SOHC
72.0 x 82.0
1335
Alum,
Crossflow
3
24mm SIR
1769
Alt. Heads: #12100-PB9-000 (2 valve, Crossflow
w/ unrestricted fuel induction), 12100-PA1-000.
EW
SOHC
74.0 x 78.0
1342
Alum,
Crossflow
3
24mm SIR
1800
Alt. Heads: #12100-PE3-000 or 12100-PE7-000.
EW
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
Alum,
Crossflow
3
24mm SIR
1900
Alt. Heads: #12100-PE3-000 or 12100-PE7-000.
D15
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1900
D16
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1900
D16A
DOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1900
B16A
DOHC
81.0 x 77.4
1595
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1900
B18
DOHC
81.0 x 87.2
81.0 x 89.0
1797
1834
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1950
Cars - LANCIA
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Scorpion
76-77
2dr
RWD
90.5
Trunk mounted fuel cell is permitted. Fabric roof panel may be replaced with alternate material.
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
1756
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
Engines - LANCIA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
84.0 x 79.2
Notes
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 318
GTL
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
Engines - HONDA
GTL
Cars - LOTUS
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Cortina
64-66
2dr
RWD
97.5
Cortina
67
2dr
RWD
98.0
Elan S2, S4 (Rdstr, Cpe,
Drphead)
NA
2dr
RWD
84.0
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
82.6 x 73.0
1558
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1918*
Wheelbase (in)
Windshield may be removed and a low front hoop roll cage may be fitted. Weight 1600 lbs.
Engines - LOTUS
Engine Family
DOHC
Cars - MAZDA
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Protégé
1999
2dr
FWD
96.5/98.4/
102.8
Protégé 5
2002
5dr
FWD
96.3/102.8
GLC
NA
2dr
FWD
93.1/98.4
MX-3
92-94
2dr
FWD
91.1/96.3
MX-5 / Miata
90-05
2dr
RWD
89.2
323
88-91
2dr
FWD
94.5
2dr
FWD
97.0
3
Notes
OEM roof spoiler is permitted (P/N:B25T-51-960C-XX, “XX”=color code)
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 319
GTL
Notes
9.1.2.
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
73.0 x 76.0
1272
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1730
1500cc block and head w/1300 (1365)cc crankshaft
(#E301-11-301 or equivalent) is permitted. Alt. head:
# E515-10-100B.
SOHC
77.0 x 69.6
1296
Alum,
Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1693
1500cc block and head w/1300 (1365)cc crankshaft
(#E301-11-301 or equivalent) is permitted. Alt. head:
# E515-10-100B.
SOHC
77.0 x 80.0
1490
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1830
Alt. Head: #E515-10-100B.
SOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1910
DOHC
78.0 x 83.8
1597
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1900
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1950
27mm SIR
1950
Street Port
2292
Engine setback from the front spindle centerline to
the front spark plug is 4.5”.
Cars - NISSAN
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
PL510
68-73
2dr, 4dr
RWD
95.3
1200 (B110)
70-73
2dr
RWD
90.6
B210
74-78
2dr, 3dr,
4dr
RWD
92.1
210 (B310)
79-82
2dr, 3dr,
4dr
RWD
92.1 or
94.2
Pulsar (N12)
83-86
3dr
FWD
95.1
Pulsar (KN13)
87-90
3dr
FWD
95.1
Sentra (B11)
82-85
2dr, 3dr,
4dr
FWD
94.5
Sentra (B12)
86-90
2dr, 3dr,
4dr
FWD
94.5
Sentra (B13)
91-94
2dr, 4dr
FWD
95.7
Notes
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 320
SOHC
12A
GTL
Disp.
(cc)
9.1.2.
Engines - MAZDA
GTL
Cars - NISSAN (cont.)
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
200SX SE-R (B14)
95-97
2dr
FWD
95.7 or
99.8
240SX (S13/S14)
NA
2dr
RWD
97.5
Sentra SE-R (B15U)
2002
4dr
FWD
95.7 or
99.8
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
Engines - NISSAN
Engine Family
OHV
73.0 x 70.0
alt. bore:
75.2 max.
1171
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1598
(1638 w/
alt. bore)
Alt heads: #11041-H2303, 11041-H5704, 11041H9204.
A12A
OHV
75.0 x 70.0
alt. bore:
77.2 max.
1237
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1693
(1733 w/
alt. bore)
Alt heads: #11041-H2303, 11041-H5704, 11041H9204. 1237cc with A14 Block @1716 lbs.
A12A w/A14 Block
OHV
75.0 x 70.0
alt. bore:
77.2 max.
1237
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1716
(1756 w/
alt. bore)
Alt heads: #11041-H2303, 11041-H5704, 11041H9204.
A13
OHV
73.0 x 77.0
alt. bore:
75.2 max.
1288
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1769
(1809 w/
alt. bore)
Alt heads: #11041-H2303, 11041-H5704, 11041H9204.
A14
OHV
76.0 x 77.0
1397
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1780
Alt heads: #11041-H2303, 11041-H5704, 11041H9204.
A15
OHV
76.0 x 82.0
1488
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1850
Alt heads: #11041-H2303, 11041-H5704, 11041H9204.
E15
SOHC
76.0 x 82.0
1488
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1850
Alt head: #11041-15M00.
E16
SOHC
76.0 x 88.0
1597
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1918
Alt heads: #11041-15M00, 11041-17M00.
L16
SOHC
83.0 x 73.7
1595
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1918
Alt Heads: #11041-22010, 11041-U0600A, 11041U0602-SV, 11041-N7120, 11041-21901.
SR16VE
DOHC
86.0 x 68.7
1596
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1900
Alt. Heads: #11040-1N591.
L18
SOHC
85.0 x 78.0
1770
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
#11041-22010, 11041-U0600-A, 11041-U0602SV, 11041-21901, 11041-N7120.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 321
A12
9.1.2.
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
9.1.2.
GTL
Cars - OPEL
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
1900
1995
Notes
2dr
RWD
95.7
Mk 51
2dr
RWD
95.7
Mk 53
2dr
RWD
95.7
Sport Coupe Rallye
2dr
RWD
95.7
Mk 57R
2dr
RWD
95.7
Sport Coupe
2dr
RWD
2dr
RWD
95.7
2dr
RWD
95.7
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
93.0 x 69.9
1897
Iron, Noncrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
2dr
RWD
96.5
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
Mk 77
GT 1900
1995
GCR - 322
Engines - OPEL
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
GTL
Notes
Cars - PORSCHE
Model
Years
914-4
Notes
Engines - PORSCHE
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
OHV
93.0 x 66.0
1795
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
Material may be added as required only to relocate
spark plug hole as per 2.0L head. Alum crossflow
head from 2.0L may be utilized.
OHV
90.0 x 66.0
1679
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
Material may be added as required only to relocate
spark plug hole as per 2.0L head. Alum crossflow
head from 2.0L may be utilized.
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
GTL
Cars - RENAULT
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
R5
NA
2dr
FWD
94.6
Left Hand Drive Wheelbase - 95.8.
R1228
1978
2dr
FWD
96.6
Left Hand Drive Wheelbase - 95.8.
LeCar
78-79
2dr
FWD
94.6
Left Hand Drive Wheelbase - 95.8. (Firewall modifications permitted with use of alt. head.)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - RENAULT
Engine Family
Notes
OHV
73.0 x 77.0
1289
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1712
Alt Head: #7700597627.
OHV
76.0 x 77.0
1397
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1850
Alt Head: #7700597627.
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Sedan
-1964
4dr
FWD
98.4
Sonnet
NA
2dr
FWD
84.6
Sonnet III
NA
2dr
FWD
84.6
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Engines - SAAB
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Notes
OHV
89.9 x 58.9
1496
Iron,
crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1880
Intake manifold: #379050.
OHV
89.9 x 66.8
1696
Iron,
crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
Intake manifold: #379050.
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Cars - SAAB
Model
9.1.2.
GCR - 323
GTL
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Cars - SCION
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Xa
(05-06)
5dr
FWD
93.3
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
GL Coupe
NA
2dr
FWD
96.6
CVT transmission prohibited.
Justy (2WD)
88-94
2dr
FWD
89.9
CVT transmission prohibited.
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
May use any class legal Toyota engine.
Cars - SUBARU
Model
Notes
Engines - SUBARU
GCR - 324
Engine Family
GTL
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
78.0 x 83.0
1189
Alum,
Crossflow
3
Unrestricted
1593
OHV
3.23 x 2.36
1267
Alum, Noncrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1724
Notes
Cars - SUZUKI
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Swift
98-
2dr
FWD
89.2
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
1299
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1830
Engines - SUZUKI
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
74.0 x 75.5
Notes
Grand Touring Category Specifications
Model
GTL
9.1.2.
GTL
GTL
Cars - TOYOTA
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Corolla 1200
NA
2dr
RWD
90.0 or
91.9
Rollcage meeting requirements for cars under 1500lbs are acceptable for cars registered prior to
1/1/82
Corolla SR-5
-74
2dr
RWD
91.9
Corolla SR-5
75
2dr
RWD
93.3
Corolla Sport Coupe & Lift
Back
76-79
2dr, 3dr, 4dr
Corolla
80-83
2dr, 3dr
RWD
94.5
Corolla
84
2dr, 3dr, 4dr
RWD
90.6
Corolla Sport / Sport Coupe
(8V)
84-87
2dr, 3dr
RWD
94.5
Corolla SR-5 / Sport Coupe
88
2dr
FWD
95.7
Starlet
81
3dr
RWD
90.6
Tercel
91-
2dr, 3dr
FWD
93.7
Paseo
92-99
3dr
FWD
93.7
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
93.3
9.1.2.
Engines - TOYOTA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
3K
OHV
75.0 x 66.0
1166
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1660
4K
OHV
75.0 x 73.0
1290
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1693
OHV
77.5 x 77.0
1452
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1880
5K
OHV
80.5 x 73.0
1486
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1750
4A-C/L/LC
SOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1902
2T-C
OHV
85.0 x 70.0
1588
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1897
Notes
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 325
Model
Engine Family
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
3TC
OHV
85.0 x 78.0
1770
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1920
4AG
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1900
Notes
GCR - 326
Grand Touring Category Specifications
GTL
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Cars - VOLKSWAGEN
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
1300/1500/ 1600 (Bug)
65-69
2dr
rear
engine
94.5
1600 (Bug) / Super Beetle
70-77
2dr
rear
engine
95.3
Rabbit
75-84
3dr, 5dr
FWD
94.5
Scirocco
3dr
FWD
94.5
Corrado
3dr
FWD
94.5
3dr, 5dr
FWD
94.5
Golf Mark - IV
3dr, 5dr
FWD
98.2
Jetta Mark - IV
4dr
FWD
98.2
3dr
FWD
Golf
Beeetle
85-
98-01
Notes
Engines - VOLKSWAGEN
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
9.1.2.
Engines - TOYOTA (cont.)
Notes
air cooled, flat 4
OHV
77.0 x 69.0
1285
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1569
Siamesed intake port.
air cooled, flat 4
OHV
77.0 x 69.0
1285
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted
1664
Dual intake port.
air cooled, flat 4
OHV
83.0 x 69.0
1493
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1880
Alt. Heads: #043-101-375H.
Engines - VOLKSWAGEN (cont.)
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
85.5 x 69.0
1584
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1880
Alt. Heads: #043-101-375H.
water cooled
SOHC
76.5 x 80.0
1471
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1910
Alt. Heads: #026-103-373G, 049-103-351C,
Eurospec Sports head.
water cooled
SOHC
79.5 x 80.0
1588
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1910
Alt. Heads: #026-103-373G, 049-103-351C,
Eurospec Sports head.
air cooled
OHV
90.0 x 66.0
1679
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1900
Alt. Heads: #043-101-375-H.
water cooled
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
1715
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1950
Alt. Eurospec cyl. head may be used.
water cooled
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
25mm SIR
1950
Alt. Eurospec cyl. head may be used.
water cooled
DOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
Alum,
Crossflow
4
24mm SIR
1950
air cooled
OHV
93.0 x 66.0
1795
Alum,
Crossflow
2
25mm SIR
1950
GTL
Alt. Heads: #043-101-375-H.
Cars - YUGO
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
GV
86-89
2dr
RWD
84.6
Disp.
(cc)
Head
Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel
Induction
Weight
(lbs)
1116
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
27mm SIR
1645
Engines - YUGO
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
SOHC
80.0 x 55.5
Notes
GTCS
Grand Touring Category Specifications
OHV
9.1.2.
GCR - 327
air cooled, flat 4
NOTES:
GCR - 328
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
9.1.3. IMPROVED TOURING CATEGORY
These specifications are part of the SCCA GCR and all automobiles shall
conform with GCR Section 9.
Cars from the previous four (4) model years and the current model year
will not be eligible. No car older than a 1968 model of any listed vehicle
will be accepted for Improved Touring competition. Turbocharged/Supercharged cars are not eligible for Improved Touring competition. Cars need
not be eligible for state license or registration.
B.
INTENT
It is the intent of these rules to restrict modifications to those useful and
necessary to construct a safe race car. This class is intended to allow a
variety of popular, inexpensive cars to be eligible; however, those determined by the Club to be outside of these parameters will not be classified. Entrants shall not be guaranteed the competitiveness of any car,
and competition adjustments, other than as outlined in section 9.1.3.C,
are not allowed. Other than those specifically allowed by these rules, no
component or part normally found on a stock example of a given vehicle
may be disabled, altered, or removed for the purpose of obtaining any
competitive advantage.
Note: This new statement of purpose and intent eliminates the dual
purpose version which does not accurately reflect the current IT technology. In addition, it emphasizes the philosophy that we will give you a
place to race your car and have fun, but not guarantee that you will be
competitive.
C.
SPECIFICATIONS
The SCCA shall publish the Improved Touring Category Specifications
(ITCS) containing the officially recognized specifications for each car
eligible to compete in the Improved Touring Category during the calendar
year.
To maintain the stock basis of Improved Touring, updating and/or backdating of components is only permitted within cars of the same make,
model, body type (e.g., sedan, station wagon, convertible, etc.), and
engine size as listed on a single Improved Touring Specification Line.
Any updated/backdated components shall be substituted as a complete
assembly (engine long block, transmission/transaxle, induction system,
differential/axle housing). No interchange of parts between assemblies
is permitted, and all parts of an assembly shall be as originally produced
for that assembly (such parts may, however, be coated, painted or
plated). Additionally, it is not permitted to “create” a model or type of
car by updating or backdating assemblies. Parts or assemblies which the
manufacturer lists in factory service manuals or parts guides for a particular model which supersede or replace original parts or assemblies are
permitted. Documentation of the superseding parts or assemblies must be
supplied to the Club Racing Department and the appropriate part numbers
listed on that particular model’s specification line.
GCR - 329
ITCS
A.
PURPOSE
Improved Touring classes are intended to provide the membership with the
opportunity to compete in low cost cars with limited modifications, suitable for racing competition. To that end, cars will be models, as offered
for sale in the United States. They will be prepared to manufacturer’s
specifications except for modifications permitted by these rules.
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Stock replacement parts may be obtained from sources other than the
manufacturer provided they are the exact equivalent of the original parts.
The intent of this rule is to allow the competitor to obtain replacement
parts from standard industry outlets, e.g., auto-parts distributors, rather
than from the manufacturer. It is not intended to allow parts that do not
meet all dimensional and material specifications of new parts from the
manufacturer.
To establish the originality and configuration of the vehicle, each driver/
entrant shall have a factory shop manual for the specific make, model, and
year of the automobile. This manual shall be presented when so requested
at any technical inspection. If the factory shop manual is no longer available from the vehicle manufacturer, an aftermarket shop manual will be
accepted with proof of non-availability from the vehicle manufacturer.
The proof of legality shall rest upon the protestor and/or protestee.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) shall correspond with the automobile classified, and will determine the model and type for competition purposes. A minimum of two (2) VIN plates and/or stampings is
required.
During the initial vehicle classification process, the Club shall assess
vehicle performance factors such as—but not limited to—manufacturer’s
published specifications for engine type, displacement, horsepower, and
torque; vehicle weight; brake type and size; suspension design; and aerodynamic efficiency. Based on such factors, a minimum allowable weight
shall be established. At the end of the second, third, and fourth years of
classification, the vehicle’s racing performance relative to other vehicles
in its class shall be evaluated. If the Club deems that, in the interest
of fostering greater equity within a class, a vehicle should be reclassified to another Improved Touring class, such a reclassification shall be
made. Alternatively or additionally, if the Club deems that an upward or
downward revision in the minimum allowable weight is warranted, such
a “performance compensation adjustment” shall be made. Any performance compensation adjustments made after the second and third years
of classification shall be provisional. At the end of a vehicle’s fourth year
of Improved Touring classification, an assessment of class equity shall be
made and the vehicle’s minimum weight shall be established.
On rare occasion—and only after careful review of the actual racing
performance of a particular make/model/year of vehicle—the Club may
reclassify a vehicle, revise a vehicle’s minimum allowable weight, and/or
in the most extreme situation an intake restrictor may be required. Such
an action shall be taken solely for the purpose of restoring equity within
the vehicle’s class.
D.
AUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS
The following modifications are authorized on all Improved Touring Category cars. Modifications shall not be made unless authorized herein. No
permitted component/modification shall additionally perform a prohibited
function.
1.
Reciprocating Engines (only)
a. Any carburetor jets, needles, and/or metering rods may be
used in the stock or approved optional carburetor(s). Alternate
needle valves are permitted. Removable jets may be replaced
or resized. The number of carburetors may not be changed
from standard. No venturi (including secondary or auxiliary) of
any carburetor may be modified in any way.
GCR - 330
Improved Touring Category Specifications
1.
Certain cars have optional carburetors listed. On these
cars, adaptor(s) may be used to mount the optional
carburetor(s), provided the adaptor serves no performance
function, i.e., plenum chamber, etc.
2.
External throttle linkage to the standard or optional
carburetor(s) may be modified or changed. Choke mechanisms, plates, rods, and actuating cables, wires, or hoses
may be removed. Method of operating the secondary
throttle may not be modified.
3.
The original, standard intake manifold shall be maintained.
No porting or polishing of the manifold is permitted except
as allowed by rule D.1.l.
4.
All air entering the intake tract shall pass through the
carburetor or fuel injection air inlet. Air intake source shall
be within the confines of the engine compartment or stock
location.
5.
All single carbureted cars may fit an approved optional
carburetor. Approved optional carburetors are:
1 Weber 32 DGV/DGAV/DGEV
1 Weber 32/36 DGV/DGAV/DGEV
1 Weber 32/36 DFV/DFAV/DFEV
1Weber 34 DAT/DATR/DATRA/DMTR
1 Holley-Weber 5200
Weber carburetor(s) with swaged fuel inlet fitting shall be
replaced by drilling and tapping the carburetor body for a
threaded fitting.
Fuel injection manifold(s) shall not be replaced with carburetor manifold(s) from a different model, type, or engine
size in order to fit an optional carburetor. All cars equipped
with multiple carburetors shall run the original induction
system, except for modifications allowed by Sections
D.1.a., and D.1.a.2., above.
6.
The engine management computer may be altered or
replaced. A throttle position sensor and its wiring may
be added or replaced. A MAP sensor and its wiring may
be added. Other existing sensors, excluding the stock air
metering device, may be substituted for equivalent units.
7.
Wires and connectors in the engine wiring harness may be
modified or replaced.
b.
Any fuel pump(s)/filter(s) may be used. Pump(s) may be relocated, but shall not be located in the driver/passenger compartment. If a mechanical pump is replaced, a blanking plate may
be used to cover the original mounting location. Fuel line(s)
may be replaced, relocated, and given additional protection.
If the relocated line(s) passes through the driver/ passenger
compartment, it/they shall be metal or metal braided, and shall
be securely fastened. An external fuel pump pressure regulator
may be installed.
c.
Air cleaner assemblies may be modified, removed or replaced.
GCR - 331
ITCS
9.1.3.
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Velocity stacks, ram air or cowl induction are not permitted
unless fitted as original equipment. Air intake source shall be
within the confines of the engine compartment or stock location. Air intake hoses, tubes, pipes, resonators, intake mufflers,
housings, etc., located ahead of the carburetor/throttle body
may be removed or substituted. On cars so equipped, the air
metering/measuring device (i.e. air flow meter, air mass meter,
MAF) must be operational and shall not be modified.
d.
Exhaust emission control air pumps, associated lines, nozzles,
and electrical/mechanical EGR devices may be removed. If
such items are not removed, they shall not be modified in any
way. If EGR devices/nozzles are removed from a cylinder head
or manifold, any holes remaining shall be completely plugged.
Water to an intake manifold may be blocked or removed as
part of the emission system.
1.
If fitted, catalytic converter(s) may be removed.
2.
Those vehicles which have emission control devices
removed and which are not registered and licensed for
street operation may use any gasoline meeting the requirements of GCR Section 9.3.25.A., Fuel.
3.
Those vehicles registered and licensed for street use shall
use the fuel specified by the workshop/owner’s manual.
e.
Any ignition system which utilizes the original distributor for
spark timing and distribution is permitted. Internal distributor
components and distributor cap may be substituted. Crankfire
ignition systems are prohibited unless fitted as original equipment. Any spark plugs and ignition wires may be used. Ignition
timing is unrestricted. Batteries may be replaced with those of
alternate manufacture provided they are of similar amp-hour
capacity and weight and are fitted in the standard location.
Additional battery hold-down devices may be used, and are
strongly recommended. Cars originally equipped with two (2)
6-volt batteries may replace them with one (1) 12-volt battery
installed in either of the original battery locations.
f.
Cars originally equipped with plastic/phenolic timing gears may
substitute metal gears, provided that the design, dimensions,
and cam timing remain as stock. Adjustable timing gears are
prohibited on all cars unless fitted as stock.
g.
Any exhaust header and exhaust system may be used. Exhaust
shall exit behind the driver, and shall be directed away from
the car body. Original exhaust system heat shields may be
removed. A suitable muffler may be necessary to meet sound
control requirements.
h.
Oil pans, pan baffles, scrapers, windage trays, oil pickups,
lines, and filters are unrestricted. Oil and power steering hoses
may be replaced with metal braided hose (i.e. Aeroquip). A
pressure accumulator/”Accusump” may be fitted. The location
of the filter and accumulator are unrestricted, but they shall
be securely mounted within the bodywork. All oil lines that
pass into or through the driver/passenger compartment shall
be metal or metal braided hose. Dry sump systems are prohibited unless fitted as standard equipment. Engine oil and oil
GCR - 332
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
i.
Oil catch tanks are permitted. All engine breathers or vapor
recirculation lines, if disconnected, shall vent to a catch tank of
one (1) quart minimum capacity. Such catch tanks shall not be
mounted in the driver/passenger compartment. Original valve
cover(s) may be modified to alter or to add breather/filler.
j.
Engines may be bored to a maximum of .040 inch over standard bore size. Factory replacement pistons or their equivalent
with the exception of diameter shall be used. Cast or forged
equivalent pistons shall provide the same dome/dish/valve relief
configuration, ring groove width and spacing, pin height relationship, weigh no less than the factory standard bore pistons.
Piston rings are unrestricted.
k.
Balancing and “blueprinting” of the engine assembly are
permitted. Lightening of parts beyond the minimum material
removal necessary to balance is prohibited.
l.
Manifold and cylinder head port matching is permitted. No
material may be removed further than one (1) inch in from
the manifold to cylinder head mounting face(s). Carburetor
mounting surface(s) shall not be modified, and external dimensions of the cylinder head or intake manifold may not be
reduced to facilitate internal porting. Two piece manifolds are
not intended to be port matched at their intermediate point.
Valve guide material is unrestricted.
Where a factory specification for original cylinder head thickness can be proven, a tolerance of .025 inch less than the
service limit will be permitted. Under no circumstances may
the compression ratio be increased by more than one-half
(.5) point. An offset key may be used to return cam timing
to the factory specifications. On engines with dual overhead
camshafts, this key shall be installed on the crankshaft only.
m. Any clutch disc and pressure plate of stock diameter may be
used, provided that they shall be bolted directly to an unmodified stock flywheel. Balancing of the flywheel/clutch/pressure
plate assembly is permitted. Lightening of the flywheel beyond
the minimum material removal necessary to balance is prohibited. The addition of an external scattershield per GCR 9.3.39.,
is permitted and recommended.
n.
Alternate water pump, alternator, power steering, and crankshaft pulleys of any diameter or material may be used. Type of
accessory drive (e.g., V-belt, toothed belt, etc.) shall remain as
stock.
o.
Hardware items (nuts, bolts, etc.) may be replaced with similar
items performing the same fastening function(s). Cylinder head
gasket(s) may be replaced with any gasket(s) having the same
compressed thickness as stock. Other engine gaskets are unrestricted. Engine drive belts may be replaced with others of
equivalent OEM specifications.
p.
All engine components not otherwise listed in these rules shall
meet factory specifications for stock parts. Where factory
GCR - 333
ITCS
additives are unrestricted.
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
specifications are absent or unclear, e.g., cylinder head thickness and/or combustion chamber depth, etc., the Club may
establish an acceptable dimension and/or allowable tolerance
from stock. Engine compartment cosmetic trim pieces may be
removed.
2.
3.
4.
q.
The application and/or use of any painting, coating, plating,
or impregnating substance (i.e. anti-friction, thermal barrier,
oil shedding coatings, chrome, anodizing, etc.) to any internal
engine surface, including intake manifold internal surface, is
prohibited.
r.
One (1) engine stayrod may be added.
s.
The engine management computer or ECU may be altered
provided that all modifications are done within the original
housing.
Rotary engines (only)
a. Any porting or polishing is prohibited.
b.
Rules D.1.a.-k., and D.1.m.-s., also apply.
c.
Crankshaft pulley is unrestricted.
d.
Alternate rotor seals and springs are permitted.
Engine Cooling System
a. Any radiator may be used, provided it is mounted in the original
location, maintains the same plane as the original core and
requires no body or structure modifications to install. No new
openings created by fitting an alternate radiator may be used
for the purpose of ducting air to the engine.
b.
Oil cooler(s) may be added or substituted. Location within the
bodywork is unrestricted, provided that it/they are not mounted
within the driver/passenger compartment.
c.
Cooling fans may be removed or replaced. Electrically operated
fans with manual or automatic actuation may be fitted.
d.
Thermostats may be modified, removed, or replaced with
blanking sleeves or restrictors.
e.
Air conditioning systems may be removed in whole or in part.
f.
Screens of one-fourth (1/4) inch minimum mesh may be mounted
in front of the radiator and/or oil cooler(s) and contained within
the bodywork.
g.
Engine coolant fluid, coolant/heater hoses and clamps may
be substituted. Heater hoses may be plugged. Heater water
control valve(s) may be added or substituted. Heater core and
hoses shall not be removed.
Transmission/Final Drive
a. Any final drive ratio is permitted provided it fits the stock differential/transaxle housing without modification to the housing.
b.
Any limited-slip or locked differential is permitted.
GCR - 334
9.1.3.
c.
No alteration to the stock transmission gear ratios for the
make, model, type and engine size of automobile is allowed.
d.
Hardware items (nuts, bolts, etc.) may be replaced by similar
items performing the same fastening function(s).
e.
Shift lever may be bent above tunnel or floor.
f.
Traction control, if available, must be disabled by disconnecting
or removing a minimum of three wheel speed sensors.
Chassis
a. Ride Height
1. Minimum ride height is five (5) inches, to be measured
without driver at the lowest point of the rocker panel, but
not to include welded seams or fasteners.
b.
c.
Springs and Shock Absorbers
1. Shock absorbers may be replaced provided they attach to
the original mounting points. The number and type (e.g.,
tube, lever, etc.) of shock absorbers shall be the same
as stock. The interchange of gas and hydraulic shock
absorbers is permitted. Remote reservoir shock absorbers
are prohibited. External adjustments of shock control shall
be limited to two (2). No shock absorber may be capable
of adjustment while the car is in motion.
2.
MacPherson strut equipped cars may substitute struts, and
/or may use alternate inserts. Spring seat ride height location may be altered from stock. Remote reservoir struts
and/or inserts are prohibited.
3.
Springs of any origin may be used, provided they are of
the same number and type as originally fitted, i.e., coil,
leaf, torsion bar, and that they shall be installed in the original location using the original system of attachment. The
joining of two or more coil springs by any means is prohibited. The use of tender springs are permitted. Shackles
or spacers may be used to adjust leaf spring ride height.
Spacers, including threaded units with adjustable spring
seats, may be used with coil springs. Coil over threaded
body shock/struts are permitted.
4.
Spacers or lowering blocks may be used between leaf
springs and the point(s) of attachment to the axle
housing.
Suspension Control
1. Any anti-roll bar(s), traction bar(s), panhard rod or watts
linkage may be added or substituted, provided its/their
installation serves no other purpose. The mounts for these
devices may be welded or bolted to the structure of the
vehicle. No suspension control mount or component shall
be located in the trunk or driver/passenger compartment
unless installed by the manufacturer as original equipment.
Traction bars used to control axle rotation shall be one
piece solid bar or tube. Heim rod ends may be fitted.
2.
On those cars where an anti-roll bar also acts as a suspenGCR - 335
ITCS
5.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
sion locating device, the diameter of the bar may be
changed. Bar attachment and pivot points on the chassis
and control arms shall remain as stock, except as provided
for in these Rules, Sections D.5.d.1., and 3.
d.
Suspension Mounting Points
1. Cars equipped with MacPherson strut suspension may
decamber wheels by the use of eccentric bushings at
control arm pivot points, by the use of eccentric bushings at the strut-to-bearing-carrier joint, and/or by use
of slotted adjusting plates at the top mounting point. If
slotted plates are used, they shall be located on existing
chassis structure and may not serve as a reinforcement for
that structure. Material may be added or removed from the
top of the strut tower to facilitate installation of adjuster
plate.
2.
On other forms of suspension, camber adjustment may be
achieved by the use of shims and/or eccentric bushings.
3.
All forms of suspension may adjust caster by means of
shims or eccentric bushings. Additionally, MacPherson
strut-equipped cars may adjust caster at the upper strut
mounting point/plate.
4.
Independent rear suspension mounting holes may be
slotted and reinforced for purposes of camber and/or toe
adjustment. Material may be removed from the top of the
strut tower to facilitate installation of adjuster plate.
5.
Cars may add one (1) front stayrod, located in one of the
following areas:
A. Between lower suspensions mounting points.
B.
Between the upper strut towers on Mac-Pherson strut
equipped cars.
C. Between upper front shock absorber mounts on cars
with other forms of suspension.
6.
6.
Bushing material, including that used to mount a suspension subframe to the chassis, is unrestricted. This includes
the use of spherical bearings, so long as no suspension
component is modified to facilitate their installation. Retention of spherical bearings by use of tack welds is allowed,
as long as the welds serve no other purpose.
7.
Rubber bump stops may be removed, modified, or
replaced, but their chassis mounts, brackets, etc., may
not be altered in any way.
8.
No other relocation or reinforcement of any suspension
component or mounting point is permitted.
9.
Hardware items (nuts, bolts, etc.) may be replaced by
similar items performing the same fastening function(s).
Brakes
a. Brake pads, brake linings, and brake fluid are unrestricted.
GCR - 336
7.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
b.
Backing plates and dirt shields may be ventilated or removed.
Air ducts may be fitted to the brakes, provided that they extend
in a forward direction only, and that no changes are made in
the body/structure for their use. Brake rotors and drums shall
not be modified other than for truing within manufacturer’s
specifications.
c.
Brake lines may be replaced with steel lines or Teflon-lined
metal braided hose. Lines/hoses may be relocated and may
be given additional protection. Brake fittings, adaptors, and
connectors are unrestricted. Brake system circuitry may be
revised, but no modification or substitution of the original
master cylinder, its location, or mounting is permitted. Cars
with antilock braking systems must disabled a minimum of
three wheel speed sensors. Components that perform no other
function than to assist in the activation of the ABS portion of
the brake system may be removed.
d.
Brake proportioning valves may be used provided that they are
of the in-line, pressure limiting type.
e.
Parking brakes, mechanisms, and actuating components may
be removed.
Wheels/Tires
a. Any wheel/tire may be used within the following limitations:
1.
Cars originally equipped with twelve (12) inch wheels may
fit thirteen (13) inch wheels. Cars originally equipped with
metric 365 wheels may fit fourteen (14) inch wheels, and
cars originally equipped with metric 390 wheels may fit
fifteen (15) inch wheels. The above-mentioned cars as
well as those cars originally equipped with thirteen (13)
inch or fourteen (14) inch wheels may fit up to a fifteen
(15) inch wheel. Cars may not fit wheel diameters smaller
than those listed on their spec line. All other cars shall
retain the wheel diameter fitted as original equipment for
their make, model, and type. Knockoff/quickchange type
wheels are prohibited. Wheels must be made of metal.
Cars classified in ITR may utilize any wheel diameter up to
17” or retain their stock diameter wheels if larger.
2.
Any DOT-approved tire is permitted. Racing, recapped, or
regrooved tires are not allowed. Tire size is unrestricted.
The only modifications allowed to tires are having treads
“shaved” or “trued.”
3.
Track may be changed to accommodate larger tires,
provided that there is safe tire/fender/chassis clearance
under all conditions of steer, bump, and rebound. Wheel
spacers are permitted.
4.
Tire tread (that portion of the tire that contacts the ground
under static conditions) shall not protrude beyond the
fender opening when viewed from the top perpendicular to
the ground. To determine compliance, the vehicle should
be rolled through a powdered substance, as raced with
driver, in order to indicate the tire tread contact patch
under static conditions.
GCR - 337
ITCS
9.1.3.
9.1.3.
8.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
5.
Any wheel stud, bolt, and or nut is permitted.
6.
Maximum allowable rim widths: ITR - 8.5 inches, classes
ITS and ITA - seven (7) inches; classes ITB and ITC - six
(6) inches.
Body/Structure
a. Fenders and wheel openings shall remain unmodified. It is
permitted to roll under or flatten any interior lip on the wheel
opening for tire clearance. Cars with plastic/composite fenders
may remove any interior wheel opening lip, but the resulting
material edge shall be no thinner than the basic fender material
thickness. Non-metallic inner fender liners may be removed.
b.
A front spoiler/air dam is permitted. It shall not protrude beyond
the overall outline of the body when viewed from above perpendicular to the ground, or aft of the forward most part of the front
fender opening. This body outline does not include bumpers or
bumper mounts. The spoiler/air dam shall be mounted to the
body, and may extend no higher than four (4) inches above the
horizontal centerline of the front wheel hubs. It shall not cover
the normal grille opening(s) at the front of the car. Openings are
permitted for the purposes of ducting air to the brakes, cooler,
and radiator. Dealer installed or limited production front/rear
spoilers/air dams/wings are prohibited. The spoiler shall have
no support or reinforcement extending aft of the forward most
part of the front fender wheel opening.
NOTE: Integrated bumper assemblies are defined as those
designs where an external non-metallic bumper cover completely
encloses the primary energy-absorbing bumper and where this
cover could be installed in its normal position with the underlying bumper removed. On cars with integrated bumpers, the
front spoiler or airdam may be attached to the bumper cover.
Where an air dam/spoiler is used, two total openings may
be cut in the front valance to allow the passage of up to a
three (3) inch diameter duct leading to each front brake/rotor
assembly.
Where no air dam/spoiler is used, two total openings of a
maximum size five (5) inches by seven (7) inches maybe cut
in the front valance so that brake ducts can be added with a
three (3) inch diameter hose leading to each front brake/rotor
assembly.
c.
No part of the car, except for the exhaust system and suspension components, shall be lower than the lowest part of the
wheel rims.
d.
Windshield clips and rear window straps per the GCR Section
9.3.52. are permitted and recommended.
e.
Hood and trunk pins, clips, or positive action external latches
are permitted. Stock hood and trunk latches may be disabled
or removed; if so, some positive action external fastening
method shall be used. Engine compartment insulation may be
removed.
f.
Convertible tops and attaching hardware shall be completely
GCR - 338
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
9.
g.
Any paint scheme and markings meeting GCR specifications
are permitted.
h.
All chassis/structural/electrical repair, if performed, shall be
in concurrence with factory procedures, specifications, and
dimensions. Unless specifically authorized by the manufacturer
for repair or allowed by these rules, no reinforcement, i.e.,
seam welding, material addition, etc., is permitted.
i.
Body repair shall be performed using every reasonable effort to
maintain stock body contours, lips, etc. Any body repair modification having as its purpose increased clearance is prohibited.
In those circumstances where stock trim/molding pieces are
unavailable through all normal replacement channels, proof of
such unavailability shall be provided by the competitor.
j.
Radio antennas may be removed. Antennas for two-way radio
may be added.
k.
Body side moldings, rocker panel moldings and wheel opening
trim pieces (not stock flares) may be removed. Resulting holes
may be filled.
Driver/Passenger Compartment - Trunk
a. The driver’s seat (only) shall be replaced with a one-piece
bucket-type race seat. Factory seat tracks/brackets may be
modified, reinforced, and/or removed to facilitate replacement
mountings provided they perform no other function. All other
seats may be removed.
b.
Any steering wheel except wood rimmed types may be used.
Any shift knob may be used.
c.
Gauges and instruments may be added, replaced, or removed.
They may be installed in the original instrument(s) location
using a mounting plate(s), or any other location using a secure
method of attachment. Other than modifications made to
mount instruments and provide for roll cage installation, the
remainder of the dash “board” or panel shall remain intact.
d.
Any interior or exterior mirrors may be used.
e.
Front passenger seat, rear seat back, rear seat bottom
cushion(s), sun visors, seat belts and their attaching hardware and bracketry may be removed. In any automobile where
allowed removal of rear seats, upholstery, etc., creates an
GCR - 339
ITCS
removed. Note: Convertible model cars are permitted if they
were only available as convertibles (e.g. MG Midget), or if the
convertible model is specifically allowed on the vehicle spec line.
Convertible models may compete with their respective OEM
hardtop. All latches shall be replaced with positive fasteners.
Manual and electric sunroofs, original or aftermarket, where
the panel is not normally removable shall be retained and run
in the closed position. Components (motors, cables, rails) may
be removed provided the panel is securely retained. Removable sunroof or T-top may be retained if bolted or welded in,
or removed completely. Glass sunroofs must be removed. All
sunroofs may be replaced with panel or replacement skin of
the same material as the original surrounding roof material.
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
opening between the driver/passenger compartment and an
exposed gas tank, fuel cell, or part thereof, a metal bulkhead
which completely fills such opening shall be installed (See GCR
9.3.26.1.)
f.
Carpets, center consoles, floor mats, headliners, sun roof liner
and frame, dome lights, grab handles, and their insulating,
attaching or operating mechanisms may be removed. Door
interior trim panels may be replaced with 0.060” aluminum
securely attached to the door. All other interior trim panels,
except the dashboard, may be removed. Other than to provide
for the installation of required safety equipment or other authorized modifications, no other driver/passenger compartment
alterations or gutting are permitted.
g.
Any removable covers used to cover spare tires, tools, bins,
etc., may be removed along with attaching hardware and
bracketry. Carpets, mats, and their insulating or attaching
materials may be removed from the floor and recesses of the
cargo/ trunk/spare tire area.
h.
Dead pedal/foot rest and heel stop may be added.
i.
Ducting may be added to provide fresh air to the driver/
passenger compartment. This ducting shall be located in the
driver and/or passenger window area, with no modifications
to the bodywork. Only the cooling duct is permitted in the
window area. It is not permitted to otherwise fill in the window
area.
j.
Audio systems may be removed in their entirety. Two-way
radios are permitted.
k.
Modifications may be made to the foot pedals to improve the
comfort of and control accessibility to the driver.
l.
Ballast may be used. All ballast shall be located in the front
passenger footwell/seating area, aft of the firewall and any
footwell angle, and forward of the aft-edge of the forwardmost passenger door opening, unless otherwsie specified on
the vehicle’s spec line. OEM front passenger seat location.
1.
It shall be in segments no heavier than fifty (50) pounds,
and shall be capable of being removed to be weighed apart
from the car.
2.
Each segment shall be fastened with a minimum of two
(2) one-half (1/2) inch bolts and positive lock nuts of SAE
Grade 5 or better, and shall utilize large-diameter, loaddistributing washers.
3.
Holes may be drilled in the front passenger footwell/seating
area floorpan for purposes of mounting the ballast (only),
and said floorpan may be reinforced as required for the
same purpose.
10. Safety
a. Steering lock mechanisms shall be removed.
b.
The stock fuel tank may be replaced with a fuel cell. The fuel
GCR - 340
9.1.3.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
cell shall be located within twelve (12) inches of the original
fuel tank location. Additional reinforcement may be added to
support the fuel cell, but such reinforcement shall not attach
to the roll cage. Floor pan may be modified for installation. See
GCR Section 9.3.26., for requirements.
c.
Spare wheels and tires may be removed.
d.
Air bag systems shall be disarmed and may be removed.
e.
If so equipped, the rolling door lock mechanism may be deactivated by unplugging the components.
ITCS
E.
MEASUREMENT STANDARDS
Measurement standards shall be as specified in Appendix C. with the
following exceptions: Wheelbase has a tolerance of + 2”/- 1”.
GCR - 341
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Acura Integra
Type R
(98-01)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 87.2
1797
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
10.6
101.2
15
3.23, 2.10, 1.46,
1.11, 0.85
Acura Legend
(91-95)
6 Cyl
SOHC
90.0 x 84.0
3206
9.6
114.6
Acura RSX-S
(2002)
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.1 x 86.0
1988
(I) 35.2
(E) 30.2
11.0
101.2
16
3.27, 2.13, 1.52,
1.15, 0.92, 0.74
(F) 300
Vented Disc
(R) 260
Solid Disc
2665
BMW 325i/is
(92-95)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.1 x 75.0
2494
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.5
106.3
15 / 16
4.23, 2.52, 1.67,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 287 Disc
(R) 280 Disc
2765
BMW 325i/ci
Coupe E46
(01-02)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.1 x 75.0
2494
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.5
107.3
16
4.23, 2.52, 1.66,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 286
Vented Disc
(R) 276
Vented Disc
2800
BMW 328i/is
E36
(96-99)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 84.0
2793
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.2
107.3
17
4.21, 2.49, 1.66,
1.24, 1.00
(F) 300
Vented Disc
(R) 295
Vented Disc
2850
BMW 328i/ci
E46
(99-00)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 84.0
2793
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.2
107.3
16
4.23, 2.52, 1.66,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 300
Vented Disc
(R) 295
Vented Disc
2900
BMW 330i
(01-02)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 89.6
2979
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.2
107.3
17
4.21, 2.45, 1.66,
1.24, 1.00
(F) 325
Vented Disc
(R) 325
Vented Disc
3290
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
BMW M3
(88-91)
4 Cyl
DOHC
93.5 x 84.1
2302
2650
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
BMW Z3 2.8L
Coupe & Rdstr.
(97-00)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 84.0
2793
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.2
96.3
BMW Z3 3.0L
Coupe & Rdstr.
(01-02)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 89.6
2979
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.2
96.3
(F) 286
Vented Disc
(R) 260
Solid Disc
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
2535
3135
101.0
17
4.20, 2.49, 1.66,
1.24, 1.00
(F) 300
Vented Disc
(R) 294
Vented Disc
2800
3240
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 342
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITR
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Chevrolet
Camaro
(97-99)
V-6
OHV
96.5 x 86.36
3790
(I) 45.72
(E) 38.6
9.4
101.1
16
3.75, 2.19, 1.41,
1.00, 0.72
(F) 302 Disc
(R) 305 Disc
2815
Dodge Stealth
R/T (non-turbo
FWD)
(91-96)
V-6
DOHC
91.2 x 79.5
2972
10.0
97.2
16
3.09, 1.83, 1.22,
0.89, 0.74
(F) 277 Disc
(R) 267 Disc
3120
Ford Contour
SVT
(98-00)
V-6
DOHC
82.4 x 79.5
2544
(I) 32.0
(E) 26.0
10.0
106.5
16
3.42, 2.14, 1.45,
1.03, 0.77
(F) 279 Disc
(R) 251 Disc
2590
Ford Mustang
(99-02)
V-6
SOHC
96.8 x 86.0
3797
(I) 47.3
(E) 37.1
9.3
101.3
16
3.37, 1.99, 1.33,
1.00, 0.67
(F) 276
Vented Disc
(R) 266
Solid Disc
2670
Ford Taurus
SHO
(89-95)
V-6
DOHC
89.0 x 80.0
2986
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
9.8
106.0
Honda Prelude
(93-96)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 95.0
2259
(I) 34.0
(E) 29.0
9.8
100.4
15
3.31, 1.86, 1.32,
1.03, 0.81
(F) 259 Disc
(R) 259 Disc
2570
Honda Prelude
(non SH)
(97-01)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 90.0
2157
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
10.0
101.8
16
3.31, 1.95, 1.31,
1.07, 0.87 or 3.29,
1.96, 1.34, 1.03,
0.81
(F) 280
Vented Disc
(R) 258
Solid Disc
2640
Honda Prelude
SH
(97-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 90.0
2157
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
10.0
101.8
16
3.31, 1.95, 1.31,
1.07, 0.87 or 3.29,
1.96, 1.34, 1.03,
0.81
(F) 280
Vented Disc
(R) 258
Solid Disc
2640
Honda S2000
(00-02)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 84.0
1997
(I) 36.0
(E) 31.0
11.0
94.5
16
3.13, 2.05, 1.48,
1.16, 0.97, 0.81
(F) 300
Vented Disc
(R) 282
Solid Disc
3005
Lexus IS300
(01-02)
6 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
2997
10.5
105.1
16
3.57, 2.06, 1.38,
1.00, 0.85
(F) 296
Vented Disc
(R) 307.1
Solid Disc
3145
Lexus SC300
(92-00)
6 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
2997
10.5
105.9
16
Brakes Std.
(mm)
3.60, 2.12, 1.39,
1.02, 0.77
Weight
(lbs)
2890
3290
ITCS
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
GCR - 343
ITR
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Mitsubishi
3000 GT (nonturbo FWD)
(91-99)
V-6
DOHC
91.2 x 79.5
2972
Nissan 300ZX
(89-96)
V-6
DOHC
87.0 x 83.0
2960
Nissan Maxima
(00-01)
V-6
DOHC
Pontiac Firebird
(97-99)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
GCR - 344
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
10.0
97.2
16
3.09, 1.83, 1.22,
0.89, 0.74
(F) 277 Disc
(R) 267 Disc
3120
(I) 34.0
(E) 29.5
10.5
96.5
16
3.21, 1.93, 1.30,
1.00, 0.75
(F) 295 Disc
(R) 297 Disc
3250
93.0 x 73.3
2988
(I) 36.3
(E) 31.5
10.0
108.3
16
3.29, 1.85, 1.27,
0.95, 0.80
(F) 280
Vented Disc
(R) 278
Solid Disc
3040
V-6
OHV
96.5 x 86.36
3790
(I) 45.72
(E) 38.6
9.4
101.1
16
3.75, 2.19, 1.41,
1.00, 0.72
(F) 302 Disc
(R) 305 Disc
2815
Porsche 911SC
(78-83)
6 Cyl
SOHC
95.0 x 70.4
2994
(I) 49.0
(E) 41.5
9.8
89.4
(F) 282.5
Vented Disc
(R) 290
Vented Disc
2630
Porsche 944S2
(89-91)
4 Cyl
DOHC
104.0 x 88.0
2990
(I) 37.0
(E) 33.0
10.9
94.5
3.18, 2.00, 1.44,
0.91, 0.78
(F) 298
Vented Disc
(R) 299
Vented Disc
2810
Porsche 968
(93-97)
4 Cyl
DOHC
104.0 x 88.0
2990
(I) 37.0
(E) 33.0
10.9
94.5
16
3.50, 2.06, 1.40,
1.03, 0.83, 0.78
(F) 298
Vented Disc
(R) 299
Vented Disc
3055
Porsche
Boxster
(97-99)
6 Cyl
DOHC
85.5 x 72.0
2480
11.0
95.1
16
3.50, 2.12, 1.43,
1.03, 0.79
(F) 298
Vented Disc
(R) 292
Vented Disc
2830
Toyota Celica
GTS
(00-02)
4 Cyl
DOHC
82.0 x 85.0
1796
11.5
102.3
15
3.17, 2.05, 1.48,
1.17, 0.92, 0.73
(F) 272
Vented Disc
(R) 267
Solid Disc
2380
Toyota Supra
(87-92)
6 Cyl
DOHC
83.1 x 90.9
2956
9.2
102.2
Toyota Supra
(93-97)
6 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
2997
10.0
100.4
(I) 32.0
(E) 27.5
(I) 33.5
(E) 29.0
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
2925
16
3.29, 1.89, 1.28,
1.00, 0.78
(F) 294
Vented Disc
(R) 305
Vented Disc
3220
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITR
ITS
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Acura Integra
GSR
(92-93)
4 Cyl
DOHC
VTEC
81.0 x 81.4
1678
(I) 33.0
(E) 38.0
9.3
100.4
14
3.31, 2.11, 1.46,
1.11, 0.88
(F) 262 x 21
Vented Disc
(R) 239 x 10
Solid Disc
2430
Acura Integra
GSR (3 door)
(94-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
VTEC
81.0 x 87.2
1797
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
10.0
101.2
15
3.23, 1.9, 1.36,
1.0, 0.79
(F) 262 x 21
Vented Disc
(R) 239 x 10
Solid Disc
2590
Alfa Romeo
GTV-6
(81-86)
V-6
SOHC
88.0 x 68.3
2492
(I) 41.0
(E) 36.5
9.0
94.5
15
3.50, 1.96, 1.26,
0.95, 0.78
(F) 267 Disc
(R) 249 Disc
2680
Bosch L-Jetronic Fuel Injection
Alfa Romeo
Milano 2.5L
(87-89)
V-6
SOHC
88.0 x 68.3
2492
(I) 41.0
(E) 36.6
9.0
98.8
15
2.88, 1.72, 1.23,
0.95, 0.78 or 3.50,
1.96, 1.26, 0.95,
0.78 or 3.50, 1.96,
1.35, 1.03, 0.78 or
2.88, 1.72, 1.23,
0.95, 0.78
(F) 267 Disc
(R) 249 Disc
2780
Bosch L-Jetronic Fuel Injection
Alfa Romeo
Milano 3.0L
(87-89)
V-6
SOHC
93.0 x 72.6
2959
(I) 44.0
(E) 36.6
9.5
98.8
15
2.88, 1.72, 1.23,
0.95, 0.78
(F) 267 Disc
(R) 249 Disc
2780
Bosch L-Jetronic Fuel Injection
BMW 323i
(E46)
(98-00)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.1 x 75.0
2494
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.5
107.3
15 / 16
4.23, 2.52, 1.66,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 286
Vented Disc
(R) 276
Vented Disc
3000
BMW 325i/is
(87-91)
6 Cyl
SOHC
3.31 x 2.95
2494
(I) 41.9
(E) 36.1
8.8
101.0
14
3.83, 2.20, 1.40,
1.00, 0.81
(F) 262 Disc
(R) 259 Disc
2750
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
BMW 325i/is
(2 & 4door)
(92-95)
6 Cyl
DOHC
84.1 x 75.0
2494
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
(1992):
10.0
(93-95):
10.5
106.3
15 / 16
4.23, 2.52, 1.67,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 287 Disc
(R) 280 Disc
2850
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock. 29mm SIR required and
must comply with Appendix B.
Ford Mustang
LX V-6
(94-98)
V-6
OHV
96.8 x 86.0
3797
(I) 45.0
(E) 37.0
9.0
101.3
15
3.35, 1.93, 1.29,
1.00, 0.73
(F) 275
Vented Disc
(R) 267 Disc
2850
Ford Probe GT
(1993)
V-6
DOHC
84.5 x 74.2
2495
(I) 32.2
(E) 27.8
9.2
102.9
15 / 16
3.31, 1.83, 1.31,
1.03, .80
(F) 258 Disc
(R) 261 Disc
2570
Ford Contour
V-6 (non-SVT)
(1995)
V-6
DOHC
82.4 x 79.5
2544
(I) 32.0
(E) 26.0
9.7
106.5
15
3.42, 2.14, 1.45,
1.03, 0.77
(F) 259 Disc
(R) 252 Disc
2665
ITCS
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 345
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Honda Civic
Del Sol VTEC
(94-96)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.4
1595
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
10.2
93.3
14
3.307, 2.105,
1.458, 1.107,
0.848
(F) 262 Disc
(R) 239 Disc
2430
Petty-bar style cage is permitted. Rear cage
braces may pass through rear window. Roll cage
for cars under 2200 lbs are acceptable for cars
registered with SCCA before 5/1/06.
Honda Civic Si
(99-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.4
1595
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
10.2
103.2
15
3.23, 2.11, 1.46,
1.11, 0.88
(F) 262
Vented Disc
(R) 239
Solid Disc
2430
Roll cage for cars under 2200 lbs are acceptable
for cars registered with SCCA before 5/1/06.
Honda
Prelude Si
(92-93)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 95.0
2259
(I) 34.0
(E) 29.0
9.8
100.4
15
3.31, 1.86, 1.32,
1.03, 0.81
(F & R) 259
Disc
2555
Honda
Prelude Si
VTEC
(93-96)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 90.0
2157
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
10.0
100.4
15
3.31, 1.95, 1.36,
1.07, 0.87
(F) 280
Vented Disc
(R) 258
Solid Disc
2905
Honda
Prelude SH
(97-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 90.0
2157
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
10.0
101.8
16
3.31, 1.95, 1.31,
1.07, 0.87 & 3.29,
1.96, 1.34, 1.03,
0.81
(F) 280 x 24
Vented Disc
(R) 258 x 9
Solid Disc
2905
Honda
Prelude non-SH
(97-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 90.0
2157
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
10.0
101.8
16
3.31, 1.95, 1.31,
1.07, 0.87 & 3.29,
1.96, 1.34, 1.03,
0.81
(F) 280 x 24
Vented Disc
(R) 258 x 9
Solid Disc
2825
Jensen Healey
(Roadster)
(73-79)
4 Cyl
DOHC
95.2 x 69.3
1973
8.4
92.0
13
3.37, 2.16, 1.58,
1.24, 1.00
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 229 x 45
Drum
2240
Mazda 626
LX/ES
(93-97)
V-6
DOHC
84.5 x 74.2
2495
(I) 32.2
(E) 27.8
9.2
102.9
15
3.31, 1.83, 1.31,
1.03, .80
(F) 258
Vented Disc
(R) 261
Solid Disc
2570
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata
(99-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
(I) 33.10
(E) 28.15
9.5
89.2
14 / 15
3.14, 1.89, 1.33,
1.00, 0.81
(F) 255
Vented Disc
(R) 252
Solid Disc
2375
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata
(01-02)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
(I) 33.10
(E) 28.15
10.0
89.2
15 / 16
3.14, 1.89, 1.33,
1.00, 0.81
(F) 255 or
269.5
Vented Disc
(R) 252 or
267.9
Solid Disc
2375
(2) Zenith-Stromberg IV Carburetors
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 346
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITS
ITS
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Mazda MX-6
(1993)
V-6
DOHC
84.5 x 74.2
2495
(I) 32.2
(E) 27.8
9.2
102.9
15
3.31, 1.83, 1.31,
1.03, .80
(F) 258
Vented Disc
(R) 261
Solid Disc
2570
Mazda RX-7
(13B)
(84-85)
2 Rotor
2616
9.4
95.3
14
3.62, 2.19, 1.42,
1.00, 0.76 & 3.62,
1.19, 1.42, 1.00,
0.81
(F) 250 Disc
(R) 256 Disc
2350
Mazda RX-7
(13B)
(86-91)
2 Rotor
2616
9.4/9.7
95.7
14 / 15
3.48, 2.00, 1.37,
1.00, 0.71 & 3.48,
2.00, 1.37, 1.00,
0.70 & 3.48, 2.00,
1.37, 1.00, 0.76
(F) 250 Disc
(R) 256 Disc
alt.
(F) 277 Disc
(R) 272 Disc
2680
Mercedes-Benz
190 E 2.3L
16V
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.5 x 80.3
2299
(I) 38.0
(E) 33.0
104.9
15
Mercedes-Benz
190 E 2.6L
12V
(87-93)
6 Cyl
SOHC
82.9 x 80.3
2599
(I) 40.0
(E) 35.0
9.2
104.9
15
3.86, 2.18, 1.38,
1.00, 0.80
(F) 262 Disc
(R) 258 Disc
2880
Mercury
Cougar
(1999)
6 Cyl
DOHC
82.4 x 79.5
2544
(I) 32.0
(E) 28.0
9.7
106.4
16
3.42, 2.14, 1.48,
1.11, 0.85
(F) 278
Vented Disc
(R) 253
Solid Disc
2650
Nissan/Datsun
240-Z
(70-73)
6 Cyl
SOHC
83.0 x 73.3
2380
(I) 42.0
(E) 33.0
9.0
90.7
14
3.55, 2.20, 1.42,
1.00 & 3.59, 2.25,
1.42, 1.00
(F) 272 Disc
(R) 229 x 41
Drum
2430
(2) Hitachi-SU (1V) Carburetors
Nissan/Datsun
260-Z
(73-74)
6 Cyl
SOHC
83.0 x 79.0
2565
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.0
8.8
90.7
14
3.59, 2.25, 1.42,
1.00
(F) 272 Disc
(R) 229 x 41
Drum
2480
(2) Hitachi-SU (1V) Carburetors
Nissan/Datsun
280-Z
(75-78)
6 Cyl
SOHC
86.1 x 79.0
2760
(I) 44.2
(E) 35.3
8.3
90.7
14
3.32, 2.08, 1.31,
1.00 & 3.32, 2.08,
1.31, 1.00, 0.86
(F) 272 Disc
(R) 229 x 41
Drum
2505
Nissan (Bosch) L-Jetronic fuel injection
Nissan/Datsun
280-ZX 2+2
(79-83)
6 Cyl
SOHC
86.1 x 79.0
2760
(I) 44.2
(E) 35.3
8.3
102.6
14
3.32, 2.08, 1.31,
1.00 & 3.32, 2.08,
1.31, 1.00, 0.86
(F) 252
Vented Disc
(R) 258or269
Solid Disc
2530
Nissan (Bosch) L-Jetronic fuel injection
Nissan/Datsun
280-ZX
(79-83)
6 Cyl
SOHC
86.1 x 79.0
2760
(I) 44.2
(E) 35.3
8.3
91.3
14
3.32, 2.08, 1.31,
1.00 & 3.32, 2.08,
1.31, 1.00, 0.86
(F) 252
Vented Disc
(R) 258or269
Solid Disc
2530
Nissan (Bosch) L-Jetronic fuel injection
16” wheel not allowed. 5th and 6th intake port
actuators and valves may be removed or disabled.
2800
ITCS
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 347
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Nissan 200-SX
V-6
(1987)
V-6
SOHC
87.0 x 83.0
2960
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.0
9.0
95.4
15
3.32, 1.90, 1.31,
1.00, 0.76
(F) 274 Disc
(R) 290 Drum
2725
Nissan 240-SX
/ S13
(91-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
(I) 38.1
(E) 31.8
9.5
97.4
15 / 16
3.32, 1.90, 1.31,
1.00, 0.76
(F) 257 Disc
(R) 258 Disc
2650
Nissan 240-SX
/ S14
(95-98)
4 Cyl
DOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
(I) 38.1
(E) 31.8
9.5
99.4
15 / 16
3.32, 1.90, 1.31,
1.00, 0.76
(F) 257
Vented Disc
(R) 258
Solid Disc
2650
Nissan 300-ZX
(84-88)
6 Cyl
SOHC
87.0 x 83.0
2960
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.0
9.0
91.3
15
3.35, 2.06, 1.38,
1.00, 0.78 or 3.32,
1.90, 1.31, 1.00,
0.76
(F) 274 Disc
(R) 290 Disc
2725
Bosch L-Jetronic Fuel Injection
Nissan 300-ZX
2+2
(1986)
6 Cyl
SOHC
87.0 x 83.0
2960
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.0
9.0
95.7
15
3.35, 2.06, 1.38,
1.00, 0.78 or 3.32,
1.90, 1.31, 1.00,
0.76
(F) 274 Disc
(R) 290 Disc
2725
Bosch L-Jetronic Fuel Injection
Nissan Sentra
SER Spec V
(2002)
4 Cyl
DOHC
89.0 x 100.0
2488
(I) 35.8
(E) 30.8
9.6
99.8
17
3.15, 1.94, 1.39,
1.06, 0.81, 0.63
(F) 305
Vented Disc
(R) 278
Solid Disc
2825
Oldsmobile
Achieva SCX
(92-93)
4 Cyl
DOHC
92.0 x 85.1
2263
(I) 36.6
(E) 31.5
10.0
103.4
14 / 15
3.50, 2.05, 1.38,
1.03, 0.81
(F) 259 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2655
Alternate rear bearing, flange and disc brakes
from (Genereal Motors) Saturn are allowed. 16”
wheel not allowed.
Oldsmobile
Calais
(88-89)
4 Cyl
DOHC
92.0 x 85.1
2263
(I) 36.6
(E) 31.5
10.1
103.4
14 / 15
3.50, 2.05, 1.38,
0.94, 0.72 & 3.50,
2.19, 1.38, 1.03,
0.81
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 201 x 46
Drum
2505
Alternate rear bearing, flange and disc brakes
from (Genereal Motors) Saturn are allowed. 16”
wheel not allowed.
Oldsmobile
Calais
(90-91)
4 Cyl
DOHC
92.0 x 85.1
2263
(I) 36.6
(E) 31.5
10.1
103.4
14 / 15
3.50, 2.05, 1.38,
0.94, 0.72 & 3.50,
2.19, 1.38, 1.03,
0.81
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 201 x 46
Drum
2655
Alternate rear bearing, flange and disc brakes
from (Genereal Motors) Saturn are allowed. 16”
wheel not allowed.
Pontiac GrandAm (Quad 4)
(88-91)
4 Cyl
DOHC
92.2 x 85.1
2272
(I) 36.6
(E) 31.5
10.1
103.4
14 / 15
3.50, 2.05, 1.38,
0.94, 0.72 & 3.50,
2.19, 1.38, 1.03,
0.81
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 201 x 46
Drum
2505
Alternate rear bearing, flange and disc brakes
from (Genereal Motors) Saturn are allowed. 16”
wheel not allowed.
Porsche 911
T&E
(68-69)
6 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 66.0
1991
(I) 42.0
(E) 38.0
9.1
1968:
87.0
1969:
89.3
14 / 15
3.09, 1.89, 1.32,
1.04, 0.79
(F) 282 Disc
(R) 290 Disc
2385
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 348
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITS
ITS
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Porsche 911
T&E
(70-71)
6 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 66.0
2195
(I) 46.1
(E) 40.1
9.1
89.3
15
3.09, 1.89, 1.32,
1.04, 0.79
(F) 282 Disc
(R) 290 Disc
2485
Porsche 911
T&E
(72-73)
6 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 70.4
2341
(I) 46.1
(E) 40.1
8.0
89.3
15
3.09, 1.89, 1.32,
1.04, 0.79
(F) 282 Disc
(R) 290 Disc
2585
Porsche 924-S
(86-88)
4 Cyl
SOHC
100.0 x 78.9
2479
(I) 45.0
(E) 40.0
10.2
94.5
15 / 16
3.60, 2.13, 1.46,
1.07, 0.83
(F) 283 Disc
(R) 289 Disc
2575
Porsche 944
(2V)
(83-88)
4 Cyl
SOHC
100.0 x 78.9
2479
(I) 45.0
(E) 40.0
10.2
94.5
15 / 16
3.60, 2.13, 1.46,
1.07, 0.73 & 3.60,
2.13, 1.46, 1.07,
0.83
(F) 283 Disc
(R) 289 Disc
2575
Maximum wheel size is 16 x 7 @ all 4 corners.
Porsche 944
2.7L
(1989)
4 Cyl
SOHC
104.0 x 78.9
2681
(I) 45.0
(E) 40.0
10.2
94.5
15 / 16
3.60, 2.13, 1.46,
1.07, 0.73 & 3.60,
2.13, 1.46, 1.07,
0.83
(F) 283 Disc
(R) 289 Disc
2635
Maximum wheel size is 16 x 7 @ all 4 corners.
Porsche 944S
(4V)
(87-88)
4 Cyl
DOHC
100.0 x 78.9
2479
(I) 37.0
(E) 33.0
10.9
94.5
15 / 16
3.50, 2.059, 1.40,
1.034, 0.829
(F) 282 Disc
(R) 289 Disc
2850
Toyota Supra
(82-85)
6 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
2759
(I) 44.0
(E) 36.0
9.2
103.0
14 / 15
3.29, 1.89, 1.28,
1.00, 0.78
(F) 256 Disc
(R) 264 Disc
2750
Toyota Supra
(86 1/2-87)
6 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 91.0
2954
(I) 32.0
(E) 27.5
9.2
102.2
16
3.29, 1.89, 1.28,
1.00, 0.78
(F) 299 Disc
(R) 290 Disc
3380
Triumph TR8
(80-82)
8 Cyl
OHV
88.9 x 71.1
3528
(I) 39.9
(E) 34.3
8.1
85.0
13
3.32, 2.09, 1.39,
1.00, 0.83
(F) 249 Disc
(R) 229 x 46
Drum
2610
Volkswagen
Corrado SLC
V-6
DOHC
81.0 x 90.3
2782
(I) 39.0
(E) 34.2
10.0
97.3
15
3.30, 1.94, 1.31,
1.03, 0.84
(F) 280
Vented Disc
(R) 226
Solid Disc
2680
Volkswagen
Golf GTI VR-6
(95-99.5)
V-6
DOHC
81.0 x 90.3
2782
(I) 39.0
(E) 34.2
10.0
97.3
15
3.30, 1.94, 1.31,
1.03, 0.84
(F) 280
Vented Disc
(R) 226
Solid Disc
2680
ITCS
Notes:
(2) Stromberg 1V Carburetors or Lucas/Bosch
L-Jetronic Injection Convertible allowed @2560
lbs.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 349
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Volkswagen
Jetta VR-6
(94-96)
V-6
DOHC
81.0 x 90.3
2782
(I) 39.0
(E) 34.2
10.0
97.3
15
3.30, 1.94, 1.31,
1.03, 0.84
(F) 280
Vented Disc
(R) 226
Solid Disc
2680
Volvo 850 GLT
(93-97)
Inline 5
DOHC
83.0 x 90.0
2435
10.5
2665.0
15
3.38, 1.90, 1.19,
1.03, 0.84
(F) 279
Vented Disc
(R) 292
Solid Disc
2635
Notes:
GCR - 350
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITS
ITA
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Acura Integra
1.6
(86-89)
4 Cyl
DOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
(I) 30.0
(E) 27.0
9.3
96.5
14
3.18, 1.95, 1.29,
1.03, 0.85
(F) 242 Disc
(R) 239 Disc
2200
Acura Integra
(90-93)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 89.0
1835
(I) 31.0
(E) 28.0
9.2
100.4
14
3.17, 1.86, 1.26,
0.94, 0.74
(F) 262 Disc
(R) 239 Disc
2595
Acura Integra
GS/LS/RS(3
door)
(94-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 89.0
1835
(I) 31.0
(E) 28.0
9.2
101.2
14
3.23, 1.9, 1.27,
0.97, 0.71
(F) 262 x 21
Vented Disc
(R) 239 x 10
Solid Disc
2620
AMC Spirit
(79-83)
6 Cyl
OHV
95.3 x 99.1
4235
(I) 45.5
(E) 35.9
8.3
96.0
14
3.98, 2.14, 1.42,
1.00 & 3.50, 2.21,
1.43, 1.00 & 4.04,
2.39, 1.49, 1.00
(F) 274 Disc
(R) 254 Drum
2730
Audi GT Coupe
(1987)
5 Cyl
SOHC
82.5 x 86.4
2309
(I) 39.5
(E) 31.0
8.0
99.8
14
2.85, 1.52, 0.97,
0.70, 0.54
(F) 256
Vented Disc
(R) 245 x 10
Solid Disc
2490
BMW 318
(E36)
(92-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 81.0
1796
10.0
106.3
15
4.23, 2.52, 1.67,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 287 x 23
Vented Disc
(R) 280 x 11
Solid Disc
2600
BMW 318i/is
Twin Cam
(90-91)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.7 x 81.0
1799
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.0
101.2
14 / 15
3.72, 2.02, 1.32,
1.00, 0.81
(F&R)
259 Disc
2600
BMW 318ti &
Club Sport
(1995)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 81.0
1796
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.0
106.3
15 / 16
4.23, 2.52, 1.67,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 286
Solid Disc
(R) 272
Solid Disc
2600
BMW 318ti /
Sport
(96-99)
4 Cyl
DOHC
85.1 x 83.6
1895
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.0
106.3
16
4.23, 2.52, 1.67,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 286
Solid Disc
(R) 272
Solid Disc
2600
BMW 318i/is
(96-99)
4 Cyl
DOHC
85.1 x 83.6
1895
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.0
106.3
15
4.23, 2.52, 1.67,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 286
Solid Disc
(R) 272
Solid Disc
2600
BMW 325e/es
(2 & 4 door)
(84-87)
6 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 81.0
2693
(I) 40.0
(E) 34.0
9.0
101.2
14
ZF: 3.84, 2.20,
1.39, 1.00, 0.81 &
Gertrag: 3.83, 2.20,
1.40, 1.00, 0.81
(F) 287 x 23
Vented Disc
(R) 280 x 11
Solid Disc
2550
ITCS
Notes:
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 351
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
BMW 2002tii
(71-74)
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 80.0
1990
(I) 46.0
(E) 38.0
9.0
98.4
13
3.76, 2.02, 1.32,
1.00
(F) 256 Disc
(R) 230 Drum
2310
BMW Z3 1.9
(96-98)
4 Cyl
DOHC
85.1 x 83.6
1895
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
10.0
96.3
16
4.23, 2.52, 1.66,
1.22, 1.00
(F) 286
Solid Disc
(R) 272
Solid Disc
2600
Buick Skyhawk
V-6
(75-80)
6 Cyl
OHV
96.6 x 86.4
3786
(I) 43.5
(E) 38.1
8.0
97.0
13
3.50, 2.48, 1.66,
1.00 & 3.11, 2.20,
1.47, 1.00 & 3.10,
1.89, 1.27, 1.00,
0.80 & 2.95, 1.94,
1.34, 1.00, 0.80
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 242 Drum
2810
Chevrolet
Cavalier Z-24
(86-87)
6 Cyl
OHV
89.0 x 76.0
2800
(I) 43.6
(E) 36.2
8.9
101.2
14
3.92, 2.04, 1.36,
0.92, 0.75
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2480
Chevrolet
Citation X-11
(81-83)
6 Cyl
OHV
89.0 x 76.0
2800
(I) 43.6
(E) 36.2
8.9
104.9
14
3.31, 1.95, 1.24,
0.81
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2620
Chevrolet
Corvair 140
(68-69)
6 Cyl
OHV
87.3 x 74.7
2685
(I) 43.8
(E) 34.6
8.6
108.0
13
3.11, 2.20, 1.47,
1.00
(F & R)
242 Drum
2580
(4) Rochester Carburetors: (2) 7025023 & (2)
7026026, All w/1.375” venturi.
Chevrolet
Cosworth Vega
Twin Cam
(75-76)
4 Cyl
DOHC
88.9 x 80.3
1998
8.0
97.0
13
3.41, 2.08, 1.40,
1.00, 0.80
(F) 251 Disc
(R) 242 Drum
2580
Bendix MPC Fuel injection
Chevrolet
Monza V-6
(78-80)
6 Cyl
OHV
96.6 x 86.4
3786
(I) 43.5
(E) 38.1
8.0
97.0
13
3.50, 2.48, 1.66,
1.00 & 3.11, 2.20,
1.47, 1.00 & 3.10,
1.89, 1.27, 1.00,
0.80 & 2.95, 1.94,
1.34, 1.00, 0.80
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 242 Drum
2810
Chrysler Neon
SOHC (2&4
door) (incl.
ACR)
(95-99)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 83.0
1995
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
9.8
104.0
14
3.54, 2.12, 1.36,
1.03, 0.81
(F) 257 x 20
Disc
(R) 257 x 9
Disc
2450
Chrysler Neon
DOHC (2 &
4 door) (incl.
ACR)
(95-99)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.5 x 83.0
1995
(I) 34.8
(E) 30.5
9.6
104.0
14
3.54, 2.12, 1.36,
1.03, 0.81
(F) 257 x 20
Disc
(R) 257 x 9
Disc
2650
Kugelfischer Mechanical Fuel Injection
Alternate rear bearing, flange, and disc brakes
from Saturn are allowed. 16” wheels not allowed.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 352
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITA
ITA
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Dodge Daytona
(1986)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 104.0
2501
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.0
97.0
14
3.29, 2.08, 1.45,
1.04, 0.72
(F) 257 Disc
2620
Dodge Omni
GLH 2.2
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.6
99.1
15
3.29, 2.08, 1.45,
1.04, 0.72
(F) 256 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2350
Dodge Stratus
(95-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.5 x 83.0
1995
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
9.8
108.0
15
3.54, 2.13, 1.36,
1.03, 0.72
(F) 254
Vented Disc
(R) 229
Solid Disc
3000
Ford Escort
GT/LX-E 1.8L
16V
(91-95)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
9.0
98.4
14 / 15
3.30, 1.83, 1.31,
1.03, 0.79
(F) 235 Disc
(R) 232 Disc
2325
Ford Escort
ZX2
(98-00)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.8 x 88.0
1988
(I) 32.0
(E) 28.0
10.0
98.4
15
3.32, 1.83, 1.23,
0.91, 0.72
(F) 259
Vented Disc
(R) 228 Drum
2400
Ford Focus
ZX-3
(00-01)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.8 x 88.0
1988
(I) 32.0
(E) 28.0
9.6
103.0
15
3.67, 2.14, 1.45,
1.03, 0.77
(F) 258
Solid Disc
(R) 252
Solid Disc or
203 Drum
2400
Ford Mustang
II V-6
(74-78)
6 Cyl
OHV
93.0 x 68.6
2796
(I) 39.9
(E) 32.3
8.2
96.2
13
3.50, 2.21, 1.43,
1.00
(F) 237 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2840
Ford Mustang
V-6
(1979)
6 Cyl
OHV
93.0 x 68.6
2796
(I) 39.9
(E) 32.3
8.7
100.4
14
3.98, 2.14, 1.42,
1.00
(F) 237 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
3000
Honda Civic
Del Sol S
(1993)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.2
93.3
13
3.25, 1.76, 1.17,
0.91, 0.70
(F) 240 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2140
Rear cage braces may pass through rear window.
Honda Civic
Del Sol Si
(93-97)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
(I) 30.0
(E) 26.0
9.2
93.3
14
3.25, 1.90, 1.25,
0.90, 0.75
(F) 240 Disc
(R) 239 Disc
2330
Rear cage braces may pass through rear window.
Honda Civic Si
(89-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.1
98.4
14
3.25, 1.89, 1.26,
0.94, 0.77
(F) 242 Disc
(R) 181 Drum
2250
PGM Fuel Injection
Honda Civic Si
(92-95)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
(I) 30.0
(E) 26.0
9.2
101.3
14
3.25, 1.90, 1.25,
0.91, 0.70
(F) 262 Disc
(R) 201 Disc
2330
Improved Touring Category Specifications
ITCS
Notes:
9.1.3.
GCR - 353
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Honda Civic DX
(3 & 4 door)
(92-95)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.2
3 door:
101.3
4 door:
103.2
13
3.25, 1.76, 1.17,
0.91, 0.70
(F) 240 x 21
Vented Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2050
Honda Civic EX
Coupe
(96-00)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
(I) 30.0
(E) 26.0
9.6
103.2
14
3.25, 1.90, 1.25,
0.91, 0.70
(F) 262
Vented Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2305
Honda Civic EX
Coupe/Sedan
VTEC
(92-95)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
(I) 30.0
(E) 26.0
9.2
103.2
14
3.25, 1.90, 1.25,
0.91, 0.70
(F) 262 x 20
Vented Disc
(R) 201 Drum
or Solid Disc
2305
Honda Civic EX
(90-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.1
98.4
14
3.25, 1.89, 1.26,
0.94, 0.77
(F) 262
Vented Disc
(R) 181 Drum
2250
Honda CRX Si
(88-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.1
90.6
14
3.25, 1.89, 1.26,
0.94, 0.77
(F) 242 Disc
(R) 181 Drum
(R) 239 Disc
2250
Honda CRX
1.5L (standard)
(88-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.2
90.6
13
(3.25, 1.65, 1.03,
0.82) or (3.25,
1.89, 1.26, 0.94,
0.77)
(F) 242 x 21
Vented Disc
(R) 181 x 39
Drum
2000
Honda
Prelude-S
(1992)
4 Cyl
SOHC
85.1 x 95.0
2157
(I) 34.0
(E) 29.0
9.4
100.4
14
3.31, 1.86, 1.32,
1.03, 0.81
(F & R)
259 Disc
2680
Honda
Prelude Si
(88-91)
4 Cyl
80.0 x 91.0
1950
(I) 30.0
(E) 35.0
14
3.181, 1.842,
1.250, 0.937,
0.771
Honda
Prelude Si
(90-91)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 95.0
2056
(I) 33.1
(E) 28.1
3.31, 1.81, 1.29,
0.96, 0.81
(F) 214
Vented Disc
(R) 208
Vented Disc
Isuzu Impulse
(83-87)
4 Cyl
OHC
Mazda Cosmo
(76-78)
2 Rotor
Mazda MX-3
V-6
V-6
DOHC
75.0 x 69.6
1844
2550
9.4
101.0
13 / 14
87.0 x 82.0
1949
9.2
96.0
14
2616
9.2
99.0
14
3.68, 2.26, 1.40,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 204 Disc
(R) 242 Drum
2780
9.2
96.3
15
3.31, 1.83, 1.31,
1.03, 0.80
(F) 257 Disc
(R) 252 Disc
2510
(I) 28.5
(E) 23.1
2550
2855
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 354
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITA
ITA
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata
(90-93)
4 Cyl
DOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
(I) 31.1
(E) 26.3
9.4
89.2
14
3.14, 1.89, 1.33,
1.00, 0.81
(F) 235 Disc
(R) 232 Disc
2255
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata
includes R
(94-97)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
(I) 33.10
(E) 28.15
9.0
89.2
14
3.14, 1.89, 1.33,
1.00, 0.81
(F) 255 Disc
(R) 251 Disc
2380
Mazda Protege
LX
(90-93)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
9.0
98.4
14
3.30, 1.83, 1.31,
1.03, 0.79
(F) 257
Vented Disc
(R) 252
Solid Disc
2325
Mazda Protege
ES
(95-98)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
9.4
102.6
14
3.42, 1.84, 1.29,
1.02, 0.78
(F) 257
Vented Disc
(R) 252
Solid Disc
2325
Mazda RX-2
(71-74)
2 Rotor
2292
9.4
97.2
13
3.68, 2.26, 1.40,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2300
Mazda RX-3
/ 3SP
(72-78)
2 Rotor
2292
9.4
91.0
13
3.74, 2.20, 1.44,
(F) 232 Disc
1.00, 0.79 & 3.74, (R) 201 Drum
2.20, 1.44, 1.00, & (R) 229 Drum
3.68, 2.26, 1.40,
1.00, 0.86 & 3.38,
2.00, 1.39, 1.00,
0.79
2280
Mazda RX-4
(74-78)
2 Rotor
2616
9.2
99.0
13
3.68, 2.26, 1.40,
1.00 & 3.38, 2.08,
1.32, 1.00, 0.79
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2550
Mazda RX-7
(12A)
(79-85)
2 rotor
2292
9.4
95.3
13
3.68, 2.22, 1.43,
1.00, 0.83
(F) 227 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
(R) 236 Disc
2280
Mercedes-Benz
190E 2.3L 8V
4 Cyl
SOHC
95.5 x 80.3
2299
(I) 46.1
(E) 39.1
9.0
104.9
14 / 15
3.91, 2.17, 1.37,
1.00, 0.78
(F) 262 Disc
(R) 258 Disc
2730
Mercury Capri
I V-6
72-74)
6 Cyl
OHV
90.0 x 66.8
2550
93.0 x 68.5
2796
(I) 39.9
(E) 32.3
8.2
100.8
13
3.65, 1.97, 1.37,
1.00
(F) 244 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2390
Mercury Capri
II V-6
(76-77)
6 Cyl
OHV
93.0 x 68.5
2796
(I) 39.9
(E) 32.3
8.2
100.8
13
3.65, 1.97, 1.37,
1.00
(F) 249 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2670
ITCS
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 355
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Mercury Capri
(91-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
(I) 31.1
(E) 26.3
9.4
94.7
14 / 15
3.31, 1.83, 1.23,
0.97, 0.80
(F) 260
Vented Disc
(R) 221
Solid Disc
2440
Mercury Tracer
LTS
(91-96)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1839
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
9.0
98.4
14
3.30, 1.83, 1.31,
1.03, 0.79
(F) 235 Disc
(R) 232 Disc
2430
Merkur Scorpio
(87-89)
V-6
OHV
93.0 x 72.0
2935
(I) 46.0
(E) 36.0
9.2
108.0
15
3.36, 1.81, 1.26,
1.00, 0.83
(F) 260
Vented Disc
(R) 260
Solid Disc
2815
Mitsubishi
Eclipe / Eagle
Talon
(95-98)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.5 x 83.0
1997
(I) 34.93
(E) 30.63
9.6
98.8
14
3.54, 2.13, 1.36,
1.03, 0.81
(F) 204
Vented Disc
(R) 222
Solid Disc or
231 x 41.3
Drum
2600
Nissan 200 SX
SE-R
(95-98)
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
(I) 34.2
(E) 30.2
9.5
95.7
15
3.06, 1.83, 1.29,
0.98, 0.76
(F) 247
Vented Disc
(R) 234
Solid Disc
2490
Nissan 240-SX
/ S13
(89-90)
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
(I) 34.0
(E) 40.0
9.5
97.4
15
3.32, 1.90, 1.31,
1.00, 0.76
(F) 252 Disc
(R) 258 Disc
2630
Nissan NX2000
(91-93)
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
(I) 34.2
(E) 30.2
9.5
95.7
14
3.06, 1.83, 1.29,
0.98, 0.76
(F) 257 Disc
(R) 234 Disc
2515
Nissan Sentra
SE-R
(91-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
(I) 34.2
(E) 30.2
9.5
95.7
14
3.06, 1.83, 1.29,
0.98, 0.76
(F) 249 Disc
(R) 234 Disc
2490
Nissan Pulsar
NX
(87-91)
4 Cyl
DOHC
76.0 x 88.0
1597
(I) 37.0
(E) 30.0
9.4
13
3.06, 1.83, 1.21,
0.90, 0.76
(F) 258 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2250
Plymouth Laser
/ Eagle Talon
/ Mitsubishi
Eclipse 2.0L
(90-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
85.0 x 88.0
1997
(I) 34.0
(E) 30.5
9.0
13
3.36, 1.95, 1.29,
0.94, 0.76
(F & R)
264 Disc
2500
97.2
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Front brake discs may be stock 257 x 22mm
ABS discs w/ 4-lug hub & ABS front calipers.
KN13 engine
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 356
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITA
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Pontiac Fiero
GT & Formula
V-6 2.8
(85-88)
6 Cyl
OHV
89.0 x 76.0
2837
(I) 43.7
(E) 36.3
8.5
93.4
14 / 15
3.50, 2.05, 1.38,
0.94, 0.72 & 3.31,
1.95, 1.24, 0.81
Porsche 912-E
(1976)
4 Cyl
OHV
94.0 x 71.0
1971
(I) 42.0
(E) 36.0
7.6
89.4
15
3.18, 1.83, 1.26,
0.96, 0.72
Saab 900 16V
(B212i)
(91-92)
4 Cyl
DOHC
2118
Saturn SC
Coupe & SC2
(91-96)
4 Cyl
DOHC
82.0 x 90.0
1901
(I) 32.3
(E) 27.4
9.5
99.2
15
3.25, 2.01, 1.42,
1.03, 0.73
(F) 251 x 18
Vented Disc
(R) 245 x 11
Solid Disc
or 200 x 30
Drum
2330
Saturn SL2
(91-95)
4 Cyl
DOHC
82.0 x 90.0
1901
(I) 32.3
(E) 27.4
9.5
102.4
15
3.25, 2.01, 1.42,
1.03, 0.73
(F) 251 x 18
Vented Disc
(R) 245 x 11
Solid Disc
or 200 x 30
Drum
2360
Saturn SC1 &
SC2 Coupe
(1997)
4 Cyl
DOHC
82.0 x 90.0
1901
(I) 32.3
(E) 27.4
9.5
102.4
15
3.25, 2.01, 1.42,
1.03, 0.73
(F) 251 x 18
Vented Disc
(R) 245 x 11
Solid Disc
or 200 x 30
Drum
2360
Toyota Celica
Supra
(79-81)
6 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
2759
8.8
102.9
14
3.29, 1.89, 1.28,
1.00, 0.79
Toyota Celica
GTS
(86-88)
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
(I) 33.5
(E) 29.0
9.2
94.5
14
3.59, 2.02, 1.38,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 231 Disc
2500
Toyota Celica
GT Coupe/Liftback
(89-93)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 91.0
2164
(I) 32.0
(E) 27.0
9.5
99.4
14
3.29, 2.04, 1.32,
1.03, 0.82
(F) 255 Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2590
Toyota Celica
GTS Coupe
& HB
(1989)
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
(I) 33.5
(E) 29.0
9.2
99.4
14
3.29, 2.04, 1.32,
1.03, 0.82
(F) 258 Disc
(R) 269 Disc
2615
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 357
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITA
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
(F) 260 or
247 Disc
(R)260 or
247 Disc
2600
“Petty Bar” style cage is permitted. Rear cage
braces may pass through rear window.
(F) 282 Disc
(R) 290 Disc
2480
2680
2930
ITCS
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Toyota Celica
GT Liftback /
Coupe
(94-99)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 91.0
2164
(I) 32.0
(E) 27.0
9.5
100.0
15
3.29, 1.96, 1.32,
1.03, 0.82
(F) 273
Vented Disc
(R) 267
Solid Disc
2400
Toyota Corolla
GTS
(84-87)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
(I) 30.7
(E) 26.0
9.0
95.0
14
3.59, 2.02, 1.38,
1.00, 0.86
(F & R)
231 Disc
2210
Toyota Corolla
GTS
(88-92)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
(I) 30.7
(E) 26.0
9.4
94.5
14
3.59, 2.02, 1.38,
1.00, 0.86
(F & R)
231 Disc
2300
Toyota MR-2
1.6L
(85-89)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
(I) 30.7
(E) 26.0
9.4
91.3
14
3.17, 1.90, 1.31,
0.97, 0.82 & 3.23,
1.91, 1.26, 0.92,
0.73
(F) 244 Disc
(R) 239 Disc
(F) 257 Disc
(R) 262 Disc
2270
Factory aero package allowed (wing & skirts).
Trunk mounted fuel cell with no larger capacity
than stock is permitted. “Petty Bar” style cage
is permitted. Rear cage braces may pass through
rear window.
Toyota MR-2
(90-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 91.0
2164
(I) 32.0
(E) 27.0
9.5
94.5
14
3.29, 1.96, 1.32,
1.03, 0.82
(F) 258 Disc
(R) 263 Disc
2545
Rear cage braces may pass through the rear
window.
Triumph GT-6
Mk.III
(70-74)
6 Cyl
OHV
74.2 x 76.0
1998
(I) 36.5
(E) 32.0
9.25
83.0
13
2.65, 1.78, 1.25,
1.00, 0.80
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2005
(1) Stromberg 150CP
Triumph TR6
(69-76)
6 Cyl
OHV
74.7 x 95.0
2498
(I) 36.83
(E) 32.00
8.5
88.0
15
3.14, 2.01, 1.33,
1.00
(F) 273 Disc
(R) 228.6
Drum
2060
Volkswagen
Golf GTI 16V
(87-89)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
10.0
97.3
14
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.91
(F & R)
245 Disc
2220
Volkswagen
Golf Golf GTI
2.0 16V
(90-92)
4 Cyl
DOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
10.0
97.3
15
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.91
(F & R)
245 Disc
2475
Volkswagen
Jetta GLI 16V
(87-89)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
10.0
94.5
14
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.89
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 x 30
Drum
2280
Volkswagen
Jetta GLI
(91-92)
4 Cyl
DOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
10.0
97.3
15
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.91
(F) 256 Disc
(R) 245 Disc
2475
Volkswagen
Scirocco 16V
(86-88)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
10.0
94.5
14
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.91
(F) 256 Disc
(R) 239 Disc
2320
(I) 32.0
(E) 28.0
(I) 32.0
(E) 28.0
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Bosch K-Jetronic Fuel Injection
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 358
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITA
ITB
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Alfa Romeo Alfetta GT, GTV,
Sprint Veloce
(75-79)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1962
(I) 44.2
(E) 40.2
9.0
95
14
3.30, 2.00, 1.37,
1.04, 0.83
(F) 261 Disc
(R) 249 Disc
2520
Alfa Romeo
Alfetta Sedan
(75-79)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1962
(I) 44.0
(E) 41.0
9.0
98.8
14
3.30, 2.00, 1.37,
1.04, 0.83
(F) 261 Disc
(R) 249 Disc
2605
Alfa Romeo
GTV2000
(72-75)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1962
(I) 44.0
(E) 41.0
9.0
92.5
14
3.30, 2.00, 1.37,
1.04, 0.83
(F) 261 Disc
(R) 267 Disc
2410
Alfa Romeo all
Spider models
(72-89)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1962
(I) 44.0
(E) 41.0
9.0
88.6
14
3.30, 2.00, 1.37,
1.04, 0.83
(F) 268 Disc
(R) 263 Disc
2400
Alfa Romeo
Spider Quadrifoglio
(85-89)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1962
(I) 44.0
(E) 41.0
9.0
88.6
15
3.30, 2.00, 1.37,
1.04, 0.83
(F) 268 Disc
(R) 263 Disc
2400
Alfa Romeo all
Spider models
(90-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1962
(I) 44.0
(E) 41.0
10.0
88.6
14 / 15
3.30, 2.00, 1.37,
1.04, 0.83
(F) 268 Disc
(R) 263 Disc
2400
Audi 4000 &
4000S
(1986)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
77-81 SPICA Mech. fuel injection, 82- Bosch LJetronic injection 5.
2500
Audi 5+5
(81-83)
5 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
2144
81.0 x 86.4
2226
(I) 38.0
(E) 31.0
8.0
99.8
14
Audi Coupe
(81-84)
5 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
2144
81.0 x 86.4
2226
(I) 38.0
(E) 31.0
2226:
(E) 33.0
8.0
2226:
8.5
99.8
Audi GT Coupe
(84-86)
5 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
2226
(I) 38.0
(E) 33.0
8.5
BMW 318i
(84-86)
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 71.0
1767
(I) 44.0
(E) 38.0
9.3/9.0
2.85, 1.52, 0.97,
0.70, 0.54
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 200 Disc
2490
14
2.85, 1.52, 0.97,
(F) 239 Disc
0.70, 0.54 or 3.45, (R) 200 x 40
1.70, 1.10, 0.75,
Drum
0.60, or 3.46, 1.94,
1.29, 0.97, 0.80
2490
99.8
14
3.45, 1.70, 1.10,
0.75, 0.60 or 3.45,
1.70, 1.06, 0.77,
0.60 or 2.85, 1.52,
1.07, 0.78, 0.64
(F) 256
Vented Disc
(R) 200 x 40
Drum
2540
101.2
14
3.72, 2.02, 1.32,
1.00, 0.81
(F) 261 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2395
ITCS
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 359
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
BMW 320i 1.8
(80-83)
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 71.0
1767
(I) 44.0
(E) 38.0
8.8
100.9
13
3.68, 2.00, 1.33,
1.00, 0.80
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 250 Drum
2460
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
BMW 320i 2.0
(77-79)
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 80.0
1990
(I) 44.0
(E) 38.0
8.1
100.9
13
3.76, 2.02, 1.32,
1.00
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 250 Drum
2510
Trunk mounted fuel cell may be used but shall
be no larger than stock.
BMW 2002
(68-76)
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 80.0
1990
(I) 44.0
(I) 46.0 w/
E12 head
(E) 38.0
8.5
98.4
13
3.76, 2.02, 1.32,
1.00
(F) 240 Disc
(R) 232 Drum
2280
Dodge Charger
/ 024
(81-85)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.0
96.6
13 / 14
3.29, 1.89, 1.21,
0.88 or 3.29, 1.89,
1.21, 0.88, 0.72 or
3.29, 2.08, 1.45,
1.04, 0.72
(F) 228 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2320
Dodge Shelby
Charger
(83-84)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.6
96.5
15
3.29, 2.08, 1.45,
1.04, 0.72
(F) 256 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2430
Dodge Colt
GT 2.0
(76-77)
4 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 90.0
1995
(I) 41.9
(E) 34.0
8.5
95.3
13
3.37, 2.04, 1.36,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2280
Dodge Daytona
2.2
(84-89)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.0
96.6
14
3.29, 2.08, 1.45,
1.04, 0.72
(F) 257 Disc
(R) Drum
2630
Dodge Omni
2.2
(80-90)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.0
99.2
13 / 14
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.97 or 3.29, 1.89,
1.21, 0.88 or 3.29,
1.89, 1.21, 0.88,
0.72 or 3.29, 2.08,
1.45, 1.04, 0.72
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2320
Dodge Shadow
(89-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.5
97.2
14 / 15
3.29, 2.08, 1.45,
1.04, 0.72
(F) 259 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2680
Bosch/Holley TBI
Fiat 124 Spider
2.0
(79-83)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 90.0
1995
(I) 41.7
(E) 36.3
8.5
89.7
13 / 14
3.67, 2.10, 1.36,
1.00, 0.88
(F & R)
227 Disc
2330
Weber 28/32 DHA Carburetor, Bosch L-Jetronic
injection, Bosch CIS injection
Fiat Brava 2.0
(79-81)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 90.0
1995
(I) 41.7
(E) 36.3
8.1
98.0
13
3.61, 2.04, 1.35,
1.00, 0.87
(F) 227 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2530
79-mid 80: Weber 28/32 ADHA carburetor, Mid
80 on: Bosch CIS injection
Fiat Spider 1.8
(74-78)
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 79.2
1756
(I) 41.7
(E) 36.3
8.0
89.7
13
3.67, 2.10, 1.36,
1.00, 0.88 or 3.61,
2.05, 1.36, 1.00,
0.87
(F & R)
227 Disc
2230
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 360
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITB
ITB
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Ford Capri I 2.0
4 Cyl
SOHC
91.0 x 77.0
1993
(I) 42.2
(E) 36.2
9.2
100.8
13
3.65, 1.97, 1.37,
1.00
(F) 244 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2300
Ford Escort/GT
1.9
(86-90)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.0 x 88.0
1859
(I) 42.0
(E) 37.0
or
(I) 39.0
(I) 34.0
9.0
94.2
13 / 14
/ 15
3.21, 1.81, 1.15,
0.78 or 3.60, 2.12,
1.39, 1.02, 0.75 or
3.60, 2.12, 1.39,
1.02, 0.77
(F) 235
Vented Disc
(R) 180 or
203 Drum
2280
Ford Escort
EXP
(86-88)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.0 x 88.0
1859
(I) 42.0
(E) 37.0
9.5
94.3
14 / 15
3.60, 2.12, 1.39,
1.02, 0.77 or 0.75
(F) 235 x 24
Vented disc
(R) 180
Solid Disc
2415
Ford Mustang
2.3
(79-93)
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
(I) 44.1
(E) 38.1
9.5
100.4
13 / 14
/ 15
3.98, 2.14, 1.42,
1.00 or 3.98, 2.14,
1.49, 1.00 or 4.07,
2.57, 1.66, 1.00 or
3.72, 2.23, 1.48,
1.00, 0.76 or 3.97,
2.34, 1.46, 1.00,
0.79 or 4.05, 2.43,
1.48, 1.00, 0.82
(F) 237 or
255.5 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2550
Ford Mustang
II 2.3
(74-78)
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
(I) 44.1
(E) 38.1
9.0
96.2
13
3.98, 2.14, 1.42,
1.00
(F) 237 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2830
Ford Pinto 2.0
(71-74)
4 Cyl
SOHC
91.0 x 77.0
1993
8.6
94.0
13
3.65, 1.97, 1.37,
1.00
(F) 237 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2230
Ford Pinto 2.3
(74-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
(I) 44.1
(E) 38.1
9.0
94.5
13
3.98, 2.14, 1.42,
1.00 or 3.65, 1.97,
1.37, 1.00
(F) 237 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2490
Ford Probe
GL/LX 2.2L
non-turbo
(89-92)
4 Cyl
SOHC
86.0 x 94.0
2184
(I) 32.5
(E) 34.0
8.6
99.0
14
3.31, 1.83, 1.23,
0.91, 0.71
(F) 264
Vented Disc
(R) 228.6
Drum
2530
Geo Prism GSi
(1990)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1588
(I) 30.5
(E) 25.4
10.3
95.7
14
3.17, 1.90, 1.31,
0.97, 0.82
(F) 259 Disc
(R) 242 Disc
2455
Geo Storm GSi
(90-91)
4 Cyl
DOHC
80.0 x 79.0
1588
(I) 31.0
(E) 28.0
9.8
96.5
14 / 15
3.91, 2.15, 1.45,
1.03, 0.83
(F) 248 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2380
Honda Accord
1.7L
(79-83)
4 Cyl
SOHC
77.0 x 94.0
1751
(I) 34.1
(E) 28.1
8.8
93.7
13
3.18, 1.84, 1.20,
0.90, 0.72 or 3.38,
2.80, 2.38, 1.56,
0.97
(F) 191 Disc
(R) 193 Drum
2270
ITCS
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 361
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Honda
Accord Lxi 12V
Coupe & HB
(86-89)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.7 x 91.0
1955
(I) 30.1
(E) 35.1
9.3
102.4
13 / 14
3.181, 1.842,
1.208, 0.878,
0.694
(F) 240 or
214 Disc
(R) 200 x
42.5 Drum
2550
Honda Accord
SE-i
(1989)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.7 x 91.0
1955
(I) 30.1
(E) 35.1
9.3
102.4
14
3.181, 1.842,
1.208, 0.878,
0.694
(F) 240 or
214 Disc
(R) 240 Disc
2550
Honda Civic Si
(86-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
(I) 27.1
(E) 33.0
8.7
93.7
13
2.92, 1.76, 1.81,
0.85, 0.71
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2130
Honda Civic
DX (sedan &
HB)
(88-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.2
98.4
13
3.25, 1.89, 1.26,
0.94, 0.77
(F) 242 x 21
Vented Disc
(R) 181 x 39
Drum
2240
Honda CRX Si
(84-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
(I) 27.1
(E) 33.1
8.7
86.6
13 / 14
2.92, 1.76, 1.18,
0.85, 0.71
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 Dum
2130
Honda CRX HF
1.5L
(88-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.6
90.6
13
3.25, 1.65, 1.03,
0.92, 0.69
(F) 231 x 17
Solid Disc
(R) 180 x 39
Drum
2030
Honda Prelude
1.8
(83-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 91.0
1829
(I) 30.0
(E) 35.0
9.1
96.5
13 / 14
3.18, 1.94, 1.25,
0.93, 0.76
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 237 Disc
2350
Honda
Prelude Si
(86-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.7 x 91.0
1955
(I) 30.1
(E) 35.1
8.8
96.5
13
3.181, 1.842,
1.250, 0.937,
0.771
(F) 207
Vented Disc
(R) 208
Solid Disc
2450
Isuzu Stylus XS
(1991)
4 Cyl
OHC
80.0 x 79.0
1588
(I) 31.0
(E) 28.0
9.8
96.5
14
3.91, 2.15, 1.45,
1.00, 0.83
(F) 246 Disc
(R) 254 Disc
2430
Mazda 323 1.6
(1989)
4 Cyl
SOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
(I) 38.1
(E) 32.1
9.3
94.5
14
3.42, 1.84, 1.29,
0.92, 0.73
(F) 238 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2190
Mazda 323 1.6
(86-88)
4 Cyl
SOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
(I) 38.1
(E) 32.1
9.3
94.5
13 / 14
3.42, 1.84, 1.29,
0.92, 0.73 or 3.42,
1.84, 1.29, 0.92
(F) 238 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2060
Mazda 626
(83-84)
4 Cyl
SOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
(I) 44.0
(E) 36.0
8.6
98.8
14
3.31, 1.83, 1.23,
0.97, 0.80
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2300
Notes:
PGM Fuel Injection
Plastic front fenders, nose, lower body segments
(Aero package) permitted. PGM fuel injection.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 362
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITB
ITB
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Mazda 626
DX/LX
(93-97)
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 92.0
1991
(I) 31.6
(E) 27.7
9.0
102.8
14
3.31, 1.83, 1.23,
0.91, 0.72
(F) 258
Vented Disc
(R) 261
Solid Drum
2550
Mazda MX-6
(88-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
86.1 x 94.0
2189
(I) 32.5
(E) 34.0
8.6
99.0
14
3.31, 1.83, 1.23,
0.91, 0.72
(F) 265 Disc
2530
Mercury
Bobcat 2.3
(74-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
(I) 44.1
(E) 38.1
9.0
94.5
13
3.98, 2.14, 1.42,
1.00 or 3.65, 1.97,
1.37, 1.00
(F) 237 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2520
Mercury Capri
2.3
(79-86)
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
(I) 44.1
(E) 38.1
9.5
100.4
13 / 14
3.98, 2.14, 1.42,
1.00 or 3.98, 2.14,
1.49, 1.00 or 4.07,
2.57, 1.66, 1.00 or
3.72, 2.23, 1.48,
1.00, 0.76 or 4.05,
2.43, 1.48, 1.00,
0.82
(F) 237 or
255.5 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2640
MGB 1.8
(68-80)
4 Cyl
OHV
80.3 x 89.0
1798
(I) 41.4
(E) 34.3
8.8
91.0
14
3.64, 2.21, 1.37,
1.00, 0.79 (0.82
or 0.88), or 3.44,
2.17, 1.38, 1.00
(F) 273 Disc
(R) 254 Drum
2050
68-72: (2) SU HS4 Carburetors, 73-74: (2) SU
HIF Carburetors, 75-80: (1) Zenith/Stromberg
Carburetor.
MGB GT 1.8
(68-74)
4 Cyl
OHV
80.3 x 89.0
1798
(I) 41.4
(E) 34.3
8.8
91.0
14
3.64, 2.21, 1.37,
1.00, 0.79 (0.82
or 0.88)
(F) 273 Disc
(R) 254 Drum
2100
(2) SU HS4 Carburetors.
Mini Cooper
(2002)
4 Cyl
SOHC
77.0 x 85.8
1598
(I) 30.3
(E) 23.3
10.6
97.1
15 / 16
3.42, 1.95, 1.33,
1.05, 0.85
(F) 276
Vented Disc
(R) 239
Solid Disc
2500
Nissan/Datsun
200-SX / S10
(L20)
(77-79)
4 Cyl
SOHC
85.1 x 86.1
1952
(I) 42.1
(E) 35.2
8.5
92.0
13
3.38, 2.01, 1.31,
1.00, 0.85
(F) 244 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2350
Nissan/Datsun
200-SX / S10
(Z20)
(80-81)
4 Cyl
SOHC
85.1 x 86.1
1952
(I) 42.2
(E) 38.2
8.5
94.5
14
3.32, 2.08, 1.31,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 270 Disc
2530
Nissan/Datsun
200-SX / S11
(Z22)
(82-83)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.0 x 92.0
2187
(I) 42.2
(E) 38.2
8.5
94.5
14
3.59, 2.24, 1.41,
1.00, 0.81
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 270 Disc
2705
Improved Touring Category Specifications
ITCS
Notes:
9.1.3.
GCR - 363
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Nissan/Datsun
200-SX / S12
(CA20)
(84-86)
4 Cyl
SOHC
84.5 x 88.0
1974
(I) 41.2
(E) 35.2
8.5
95.5
14 / 15
3.59, 2.24, 1.41,
1.00, 0.81 or 3.59,
2.08, 1.36, 1.00,
0.81
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 270 Disc
2530
Nissan/Datsun
HL-510 2.0
(78-81)
4 Cyl
SOHC
85.1 x 86.1
1952
(I) 42.1
(E) 35.2
8.5
94.5
13
3.17, 1.92, 1.31,
1.00, 0.85 or 3.38,
2.01, 1.31, 1.00,
0.85
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2280
Nissan/Datsun
610
(1973)
4 Cyl
SOHC
85.0 x 78.0
1770
(I) 42.2
(E) 35.2
8.5
98.4
13
3.38, 2.01, 1.31,
1.00
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2450
Nissan/Datsun
610
(74-76)
4 Cyl
SOHC
85.1 x 86.1
1952
(I) 42.2
(E) 35.2
8.5
98.4
13
3.38, 2.01, 1.31,
1.00
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2450
Nissan Sentra
/ B12
(1989)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.0 x 88.0
1597
(I) 29.0
(E) 32.8
9.4
95.7
14
3.33, 1.96, 1.29,
0.90, 0.76
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 204 Drum
2165
Nissan Sentra
E/XE/CXE/SL/
Limited Edition
(91-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
76.0 x 88.0
1597
(I) 34.0
(E) 24.0
9.5
95.7
13
3.33, 1.96, 1.29,
0.93, 0.73
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 258 Disc
2520
Opel 1900
Sedan
(71-75)
4 Cyl
SOHC
93.0 x 69.9
1897
(I) 40.0
(I) 42.0
(E) 34.0
7.6
95.7
13
3.43, 2.16, 1.37,
1.00
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2180
Opel GT 1900
(69-73)
4 Cyl
SOHC
93.0 x 69.9
1897
(I) 40.0
(I) 42.0
(E) 34.0
9.0
95.7
13
3.43, 2.16, 1.37,
1.00
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2180
(1) Solex 32 DIDTA-4 Carburetor
Opel Manta 1.9
(71-75)
4 Cyl
SOHC
93.0 x 69.9
1897
(I) 40.0
(I) 42.0
(E) 34.0
7.6
95.7
13
3.43, 2.16, 1.37,
1.00
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2230
(1) Solex 32 DIDTA-4 Carburetor or Bosch LJetronic injection
Plymouth
Fire Arrow 2.6
(79-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
91.0 x 98.0
2555
(I) 43.0
(E) 35.0
8.2
92.1
13
3.37, 2.04, 1.36,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 226 Disc
(R) 229 Disc
2360
Plymouth
Horizon 2.2
(80-90)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.0
99.2
13 / 14
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.97 or 3.29, 1.89,
1.21, 0.88 or 3.29,
1.89, 1.21, 0.88,
0.72 or 3.29, 2.08,
1.45, 1.04, 0.72
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2320
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 364
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITB
ITB
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Plymouth TC3 /
Turismo 2.2
(81-85)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
9.0
96.6
13 / 14
3.29, 1.89, 1.21,
0.88 or 3.29, 1.89,
1.21, 0.88, 0.72 or
3.29, 2.08, 1.45,
1.04, 0.72
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2320
Pontiac Fiero
2.5
(84-87)
4 Cyl
OHV
101.6 x 76.2
2471
(I) 43.7
(E) 36.3
9.0
93.4
13 / 14
3.53, 1.95, 1.24,
0.84 or 3.73, 2.04,
1.45, 1.03, 0.74
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 256 Disc
2550
GM Throttle body injection. “Petty Bar” style
cage is permitted. Rear cage braces may pass
through rear window.
Pontiac Fiero
2.5
(1988)
4 Cyl
OHV
101.6 x 76.2
2471
(I) 43.7
(E) 36.3
9.0
93.4
13 / 14
3.53, 1.95, 1.24,
0.84 or 3.73, 2.04,
1.45, 1.03, 0.74
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 256 Disc
2550
GM Throttle body injection. “Petty Bar” style
cage is permitted. Rear cage braces may pass
through rear window.
Porsche 914-4
1.8
(74-75)
4 Cyl
OHV
93.0 x 66.0
1795
(I) 40.9
(E) 34.0
7.3
96.5
15
3.09, 1.89, 1.26,
0.93, 0.71
(F) 280 Disc
(R) 282 Disc
2080
“Petty Bar” style cage is permitted. Rear cage
braces may pass through rear window.
Porsche 914-4
2.0L
(73-76)
4 Cyl
OHV
94.0 x 71.0
1971
(I) 42.0
(E) 36.0
7.6
96.5
15
3.09, 1.89, 1.26,
0.93, 0.71
(F) 280 Disc
(R) 282 Disc
2260
Torsion bar front suspension. “Petty Bar” style
cage is permitted. Rear cage braces may pass
through rear window.
Porsche 924 &
Sebring
(77-82)
4 Cyl
SOHC
86.5 x 84.4
1984
(I) 38.0
(I) 40.0
(E) 33.0
8.0
8.5
9.0
94.5
14 / 15
3.60, 2.13, 1.36,
0.97, 0.73
(F) 257 Disc
(R) 232 Drum
(F) 282 Disc
(R) 290 Disc
2600
Renault
Alliance GTA
(1987)
4 Cyl
SOHC
3.23 x 3.66
1965
(I) 38.5
(E) 32.5
9.5
15
3.09, 1.84, 1.32,
0.97, 0.76
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 204 Drum
2140
Saab 900
(79-88)
4 Cyl
SOHC
90.0 x 78.0
1985
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.5
9.3
99.1
15
3.54, 2.00, 1.34,
0.96, 0.78 or 3.80,
2.15, 1.44, 1.04,
0.84
(F) 278 Disc
(R) 268 Disc
(R) 258 Disc
2680
Saab 900 16V
B202i
(86-90)
4 Cyl
DOHC
90.0 x 78.0
1985
(I) 32.0
(E) 29.0
10.2
99.0
15
3.80, 2.15, 1.44,
1.04, 0.84
(F) 276 Disc
(R) 276.5
Disc
2680
Saab 99E
(1972)
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.0 x 78.0
1854
9.0
97.4
15
3.39, 2.15, 1.45,
0.95
(F & R)
270 Disc
2637
Bosch injection
Saab 99EMS
2.0
(73-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
90.0 x 78.0
1985
9.0
97.4
15
3.44, 2.07, 1.39,
1.00 or 3.57, 2.08,
1.39, 1.00 or 3.31,
2.00, 1.34, 0.98
(F) 280 Disc
(R) 270 Disc
2540
Bosch injection
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.5
ITCS
Notes:
Bosch K or L-Jetronic injection
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 365
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Suzuki Swift
GT/GTi
(89-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
73.9 x 75.4
1299
(I) 36.0
(E) 30.0
10.0
89.2
14
3.42, 1.89, 1.28,
0.91, 0.76
(F) 248
Vented Disc
(R) 237
Solid Disc
1895
Suzuki Swift
GA
(89-94)
4 Cyl
DOHC
73.9 x 75.4
1299
(I) 36.0
(E) 30.0
10.0
89.2
14
3.42, 1.89, 1.28,
0.91, 0.76
(F) 229 x 17
Vented Disc
(R) 180 x 25
Drum
1735
Toyota Celica
I 2.0L
(71-73)
4 Cyl
SOHC
88.5 x 80.1
1968
8.5
95.5
13
3.58, 2.08, 1.40,
1.00
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 228 x
40.6
Drum
2350
Toyota Celica
I 2.2
(74-77)
4 Cyl
SOHC
88.5 x 89.0
2189
(I) 43.0
(E) 36.6
8.4
95.5
13
3.29, 2.04, 1.39,
1.00, 0.85
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 228 Drum
2300
Toyota Celica
II 2.2
(78-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
88.5 x 89.0
2189
(I) 43.0
(E) 36.6
8.4
98.4
14
3.29, 2.04, 1.39,
1.00, 0.85
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2430
(CP)
2490
(HB)
Toyota Celica
II 2.4
(81-82)
4 Cyl
SOHC
92.0 x 89.0
2366
(I) 45.0
(E) 37.0
9.0
98.4
14
3.57, 2.06, 1.39,
1.00, 0.85
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2470
(CP)
2510
(HB)
Toyota Celica
III 2.4
(83-85)
4 Cyl
SOHC
92.0 x 89.0
2366
(I) 45.0
(E) 37.0
9.0
98.4
14
3.29, 1.89, 1.28,
1.00, 0.78
(F) 256 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2350
(1) Aisan 2 bbl or Bosch L-Jetronic injection
Toyota Celica
III GTS
(83-85)
4 Cyl
SOHC
92.0 x 89.0
2366
(I) 45.0
(E) 37.0
9.0
98.4
14
3.29, 1.89, 1.28,
1.00, 0.78
(F) 256 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2425
Bosch L-Jetronic injection
Toyota Celica
ST
(1986)
4 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 90.0
1995
8.7
99.4
13
3.29, 2.04, 1.32,
1.03, 0.82
(F) 241 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2480
Toyota Corolla
1.8
(80-82)
4 Cyl
OHV
85.0 x 78.0
1770
9.1
94.5
13
3.59, 2.02, 1.39,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 226 Disc
(R) 228 Drum
2050
Toyota Corolla
SR-5
(1987)
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
9.0
94.5
13
(F) 226 Disc
(R) 228 Drum
2330
(I) 41.9
(E) 35.9
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 366
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITB
ITB
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Toyota FX-16
(1987)
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
(I) 30.7
(E) 26.0
9.4
95.7
14
3.17, 1.90, 1.31,
0.97, 0.82
Triumph TR-7
2.0
(76-81)
4 Cyl
SOHC
90.3 x 78.0
1998
(I) 39.6
(E) 32.5
8.0
85.0
13
3.32, 2.08, 1.39,
1.00, 0.83 or 2.65,
1.78, 1.25, 1.00
(F) 248 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2440
(CP)
2420
(Conv.)
Volkswagen
Golf III
(93-97)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
10.0
97.3
14
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.97, 0.80 or 3.45,
1.94, 1.37, 1.03,
0.85
(F) 257 Disc
(R) 227 Disc
or 200 Drum
2350
Volkswagen
Golf GTI / GT
/ GL
(85-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
(I) 40.0
(E) 33.0
10.0
97.3
13 / 14
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.89
(F & R)
244 Disc or
(R) 244 Drum
2280
Volkswagen
Jetta/ GL / GLI
(85-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
(I) 40.0
(E) 33.0
10.0
97.3
13 / 14
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.89
(F) 244 Disc
(R) 244 Disc
or Drum
2280
Volkswagen
Jetta III
(93-97)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
10.0
97.3
14
3.46, 1.94, 1.21,
0.97, 0.81
(F) 257 Disc
(R) 227 Disc
or 200 Drum
2350
Volkswagen
Rabbit GTI
(83-84)
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
(I) 40.0
(E) 33.0
8.5
94.5
14
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.91
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2080
Bosch K-Jetronic injection
Volkswagen
Scirocco II 8V
(83-88)
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
(I) 40.0
(E) 33.0
8.5
94.5
13 / 14
3.45, 2.12, 1.44,
1.13, 0.91
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2130
Bosch K-Jetronic injection.
Volvo 142 /
144 2.0
(69-74)
4 Cyl
OHV
88.9 x 80.0
1986
(I) 44.0
(E) 35.0
10.5
103.0
15
3.13, 1.99, 1.36,
1.00, 0.80 & 3.13,
1.99, 1.36, 1.00
(F) 272 Disc
(R) 295 Disc
2640
Bosch injection - 1970 Ser. #112400 up.
10.3
104.3
14 / 15
4.03, 2.16, 1.37,
1.00, 0.80 or 4.03,
2.16, 1.37, 1.00,
0.82
(F) 262 x 15
Vented Disc
(R) 280 x 11
Solid Rotor
2780
96.0 x 80.0
2320
(F & R)
244 Disc
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
2445
Volvo 242 /
244 2.0
(1975)
4 Cyl
OHV
88.9 x 80.0
1986
(I) 44.0
(E) 35.0
8.7
104.0
14
3.41, 1.99, 1.36,
1.00, 0.80
(F) 262 Disc
(R) 280 Disc
2780
Volvo 242 /
244 2.1
(76-81)
4 Cyl
SOHC
92.0 x 80.0
2127
(I) 44.0
(E) 37.0
9.3
104.0
14 / 15
3.71, 2.16, 1.37,
1.00, 0.80
(F) 265 Disc
(R) 282 Disc
2780
ITCS
Includes 1985 Golf Cup cars prepared to IT
specifications.
Bosch CIS injection
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Volvo 240 2.3
(83-85)
Brakes Std.
(mm)
9.1.3.
GCR - 367
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Austin-Healey
Sprite
(68-69)
4 Cyl
OHV
71.0 x 81.0
1275
(I) 33.2
(E) 30.6
8.8
80
13
3.20, 1.92, 1.34,
1.00
(F) 211 Disc
(R) 178 Drum
1615
BMW 1600
(68-71)
4 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 71.0
1573
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.0
8.6
98.4
13
3.84, 2.05, 1.35,
1.00
(F) 257 Disc
(R) 232 Drum
2160
Chevrolet
Chevette 1.6
(76-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.0 x 75.7
1598
(I) 39.1
(E) 32.1
8.6
94.3
13
3.75, 2.16, 1.38,
1.00 or 4.13, 2.50,
1.48, 1.00, 0.86
(F) 246 Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2130
Dodge Colt
(89-92)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.5 x 82.0
1468
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
9.4
93.9
13
3.36, 1.95, 1.29,
0.94, 0.78
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 181 Drum
2270
Dodge Colt 1.6
(FWD)
(79-84)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.9 x 86.0
1597
(I) 38.3
(E) 31.3
8.5
90.6
13
4.23, 2.37, 1.47,
1.11 or 3.27, 1.83,
1.14, 0.86
(F) 227 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2040
Dodge Colt 1.6
(RWD)
(71-78)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.9 x 86.0
1597
(I) 38.3
(E) 31.3
8.5
92.1
13
3.21, 2.00, 1.31,
1.00, 0.85 or 3.53,
2.19, 1.44, 1.00
(F) 227 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2190
Fiat X-1/9 1.3
(74-78)
4 Cyl
SOHC
86.0 x 55.5
1290
(I) 36.2
(E) 31.2
8.5
86.7
13
3.58, 2.24, 1.45,
0.96 or 3.58, 2.24,
1.45, 0.85
(F & R)
227 Disc
2090
Trunk mounted fuel cell with no larger capacity
than stock is allowed. “Petty Bar” style cage is
permitted. Rear cage braces may pass through
the rear window.
Fiat Bertone &
X-1/9 1.5L
(79-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
86.4 x 63.9
1498
(I) 36.0
(E) 33.0
8.5
86.7
13
3.58, 2.24, 1.45,
0.85 or 3.58, 2.24,
1.45, 1.04, 0.86 or
3.58, 2.24, 1.46,
1.03, 0.86
(F & R)
227 Disc
2150
79-80 Carburetor, Mid-80 Bosch L-Jetronic injector. Trunk mounted fuel cell with no larger
capacity than stock is allowed. “Petty Bar” style
cage is permitted. Rear cage braces may pass
through the rear window.
Fiat 124 Coupe
(70-73)
4 Cyl
DOHC
80.0 x 79.2
1592
80.0 x 80.0
1608
(I) 41.7
(E) 36.3
8.0 / 8.5
95.3
13
3.80, 2.18, 1.41,
1.00, 0.91 or 3.67,
2.10, 1.36, 1.00,
0.88
(F & R)
227 Disc
2200
Fiat 124 Spider
(70-73)
4 Cyl
DOHC
80.0 x 79.2
1592
80.0 x 80.0
1608
(I) 41.7
(E) 36.3
8.0 / 8.5
89.7
13
3.67, 2.10, 1.36,
1.00, 0.88 or 3.61,
2.05, 1.36, 1.00,
0.87
(F & R)
227 Disc
2170
Fiat 128 Coupe
4 Cyl
SOHC
86.0 x 55.5
1290
(I) 36.0
(E) 31.0
8.5
87.5
13
3.583, 2.235,
1.454, 0.959
(F) 227
Solid Disc
(R) 185.4
Drum
1950
One barrel manifold
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 368
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITC
ITC
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Ford Cortina
GT
(68-70)
4 Cyl
OHV
80.97 x 77.62
1598
Ford Escort
EXP
(82-85)
4 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 79.5
1598
(I) 42.0
(E) 37.0
Ford Escort
/ GT
(81-85)
4 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 79.5
1598
(I) 42.0
(E) 37.0
Ford Festiva
(88-93)
4 Cyl
OHV
71.0 x 83.6
1324
Ford Fiesta
(78-80)
4 Cyl
OHV
81.0 x 78.0
1598
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
98.0
13
9.0
94.2
13
3.60, 2.12, 1.39,
1.02 or 3.58, 2.05,
1.36, 0.95
(F) 236 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2130
8.8
94.3
13
3.21, 1.81, 1.15,
0.78 or 3.60, 2.12,
1.39, 1.02, 0.75 or
3.60, 2.12, 1.39,
1.02, 0.77
(F) 236 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2100
1989:
8.6
1990:
9.7
90.2
13 / 12
3.45, 1.94, 1.28,
0.86
(F) 218 Disc
(R) 170 Drum
1870
9.0
90.0
13 / 12
3.58, 2.06, 1.29,
0.88
(F) 221 Disc
(R) 178 Drum
1780
Geo Spectrum
(1989)
4 Cyl
SOHC
77.0 x 79.0
1481
9.6
86.8
13
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2020
Geo Storm
1.6L
(90-93)
4 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 79.0
1588
(I) 28.0
(E) 32.0
9.8
96.5
15
3.909, 2.150,
1.448, 1.027,
0.829
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 200 x 25
Drum
2355
Honda Accord
1.6
(76-78)
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 93.0
1599
(I) 35.1
(E) 28.1
8.0
93.7
13
3.18, 1.82, 1.18,
0.84, 0.71
(F) 188 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2180
Honda Civic
1.2
(73-79)
4 Cyl
SOHC
72.0 x 76.0
1237
EB1&2:
(I) 34.0
(E) 30.0
EB3:
(I) 36.0
(E) 32.0
8.3
86.8
13 / 12
3.00, 1.79, 1.18,
0.85 or 3.18, 1.82,
1.18, 0.85, 0.66
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1710
Honda Civic
CVCC 1.5
(75-79)
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
(I) 35.0
(E) 29.0
8.1
86.6
13 / 12
3.00, 1.74, 1.13,
0.78, 0.66 or 3.18,
1.82, 1.18, 0.85 or
3.18, 1.82, 1.18,
0.85, 0.71
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1820
Honda Civic
CVCC
(80-83)
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
(I) 35.1
(E) 28.1
9.3
88.6
13
2.92, 1.76, 1.18,
0.85, 0.71 or 3.18,
1.82, 1.18, 0.85,
0.71
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1870
(I) 35.8
(E) 31.5
Comp.
Ratio
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
1780
ITCS
Induction: 89: Carburetion, 90: Fuel Injection.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 369
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Honda Civic
standard (HB &
Sedan)
(88-91)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.2
98.4
13
3.25, 1.65, 1.03,
0.82
(F) 240 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2140
Honda Civic HB
/ Sedan
(84-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
(I) 27.1
(E) 32.1
9.6
93.7
13
2.92, 1.76, 1.18,
0.85, 0.71
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1955
Honda Civic CX
(3-door HB)
(92-95)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
9.1
101.2
13
3.25, 1.76, 1.07,
0.85, 0.70
(F) 240 x 21
Vented Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2170
Honda CRX 1.5
(84-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
(I) 27.1
(E) 32.1
9.6
86.6
13
2.92, 1.76, 1.18,
0.85, 0.71
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1955
Hyundai Excel
(86-94)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.5 x 82.0
1469
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
9.4
93.9
13
3.36, 1.95, 1.29,
0.94
(F) 242 x 19
Vented Disc
(R) 182 x 45
Drum
2370
Isuzu (Buick/
Opel) I-Mark
(76-82)
4 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 82.0
1817
(I) 42.4
(E) 34.0
8.5
94.3
13
3.51, 2.17, 1.42,
1.00 or 3.79, 2.18,
1.42, 1.00, 0.86
(F) 237 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2280
Isuzu I-Mark
(88-89)
4 Cyl
SOHC
77.0 x 79.0
1471
9.6
94.6
13
3.73, 2.04, 1.33,
0.92, 0.74 or 3.27,
2.04, 1.45, 1.03,
0.83
(F) 225 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2130
Mazda GLC
(RWD)
(1980)
4 Cyl
SOHC
77.0 x 76.0
1415
(I) 36.0
(E) 31.0
9.0
91.1
13
3.66, 2.19, 1.43,
1.00 or 3.66, 2.19,
1.43, 1.00, 0.83
(F) 207 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
2080
Mazda GLC
(FWD)
(81-85)
4 Cyl
SOHC
77.0 x 80.0
1490
(I) 36.0
(E) 31.0
9.0
93.1
13
3.42, 1.95, 1.29,
0.92, 0.73
(F) 226 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2000
Mercury LN7
(82-85)
4 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 79.5
1598
(I) 42.0
(E) 37.0
9.0
94.2
13
3.60, 2.12, 1.39,
1.02 or 3.58, 2.05,
1.36, 0.95
(F) 236 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2130
Mercury Lynx
1.6
(81-84)
4 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 79.5
1598
(I) 42.0
(E) 37.0
8.8
94.3
13
3.58, 2.05, 1.23,
0.81
(F) 236 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2100
MG Midget
(68-74)
4 Cyl
OHV
71.0 x 81.0
1275
(I) 33.2
(E) 30.6
8.8
80.0
13
3.20, 1.92, 1.34,
1.00
(F) 211 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1615
Notes:
CVCC Cylinder head
Plastic front fenders, nose, lower body segments. CVCC Cylinder head.
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 370
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITC
ITC
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
MG Midget
Mk III
(75-79)
4 Cyl
OHV
73.7 x 87.5
1491
(I) 36.6
(E) 29.7
8.0
80.0
13
3.41, 2.11, 1.43,
1.00
(F) 211 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1740
Mitsubishi
Mirage
(1989)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.5 x 82.0
1468
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
9.4
93.9
13
3.36, 1.95, 1.29,
0.94, 0.78
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2270
Nissan/Datsun
1200
(71-73)
4 Cyl
OHV
73.0 x 70.0
1171
9.0
90.6
13 / 12
3.76, 2.17, 1.40,
1.00
(F) 213 Disc
(R) 198 Drum
1740
Nissan/Datsun
210 1.4
(79-82)
4 Cyl
OHV
76.0 x 77.0
1397
(I) 37.2
(E) 30.0
8.9
92.1
13
3.51, 2.17, 1.39,
1.00 or 3.51, 2.17,
1.32, 1.00, 0.82
(F) 245 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2080
Nissan/Datsun
210 1.5
(79-82)
4 Cyl
OHV
76.0 x 82.0
1488
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
8.9
92.1
13
3.51, 2.17, 1.39,
1.00 or 3.51, 2.17,
1.32, 1.00, 0.82
(F) 245 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2080
Nissan/Datsun
B210
(74-78)
4 Cyl
OHV
76.0 x 77.0
1397
(I) 37.2
(E) 30.0
8.5
92.1
13
3.51, 2.17, 1.39,
1.00 or 3.51, 2.17,
1.32, 1.00, 0.82
(F) 245 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2010
Nissan/Datsun
PL-510
(68-73)
4 Cyl
SOHC
83.0 x 73.7
1595
(I) 41.9
(E) 33.0
8.5
95.3
13
3.38, 2.01, 1.31,
1.00
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2170
Nissan Pulsar
NX
(83-86)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.0 x 88.0
1597
(I) 37.0
(E) 30.0
9.4
95.1
13
3.06, 1.83, 1.21,
0.90, 0.73
(F) 240 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2080
Nissan Sentra /
B11 1.5
(82-83)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.0 x 82.0
1488
(I) 37.0
(E) 30.0
9.3
94.5
13
3.33, 1.95, 1.29,
0.90, 0.73
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1980
(SD)
2100
(HB)
Nissan Sentra /
B12 1.6
(83-86)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.0 x 88.0
1597
(I) 37.0
(E) 30.0
9.4
94.5
13
3.33, 1.95, 1.29,
0.90, 0.73
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1980
(SD)
2100
(HB)
Nissan Sentra /
B12 (E16)
(87-88)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.0 x 88.0
1597
(I) 37.0
(E) 30.0
9.4
95.7
13 / 14
3.33, 1.96, 1.29,
0.90, 0.76
(F) 238 Disc
(R) 203 Drum
2180
Plymouth
Arrow 1.6
(76-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.9 x 86.0
1597
(I) 38.0
(E) 31.0
8.5
90.6
13
3.21, 2.00, 1.31,
1.00, 0.85 or 3.53,
2.19, 1.44, 1.00
(F) 227 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
2190
ITCS
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
9.1.3.
GCR - 371
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Plymouth
Champ 1.6
(79-83)
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.9 x 86.0
1597
(I) 38.0
(E) 31.0
8.5
90.6
13
4.23, 2.37, 1.47,
1.11 or 3.27, 1.83,
1.14, 0.86
(F) 227 Disc
(R) 155 Drum
2040
Plymouth Colt
1.5
(1989)
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.5 x 82.0
1468
(I) 35.0
(E) 30.0
9.4
93.9
13
3.36, 1.95, 1.29,
0.94, 0.78
(F) 232 Disc
(R) 181 Drum
2270
Plymouth
Horizon 1.7
(78-79)
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
1716
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.2
8.2
99.2
13
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.97
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2050
Plymouth
Horizon TC3
1.7
(79-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
1716
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.2
8.2
96.7
13
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.97
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 201 Drum
2110
Porsche 914-4
1.7
(70-73)
4 Cyl
OHV
90.0 x 66.0
1679
(I) 39.4
(E) 33.0
8.2
96.4
15
3.09, 1.89, 1.26,
0.93, 0.71
(F) 280 Disc
(R) 282 Disc
2080
“Petty Bar” style cage is permitted. Rear cage
braces may pass through rear window.
Renault
Alliance 1.4
(83-87)
4 Cyl
OHV
76.0 x 77.0
1397
(I) 34.2
(E) 30.3
8.8
97.8
13 / 14
3.72, 2.06, 1.27,
0.90, 0.73
2070
Bendix T.B. injection
Renault
Alliance 1.7
(84-87)
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 83.5
1721
9.5
97.8
13 / 14
3.72, 2.06, 1.32,
0.97, 0.79
2100
Bendix T.B. injection
Renault Encore
1.4
(83-87)
4 Cyl
OHV
76.0 x 77.0
1397
8.8
97.8
13 / 14
3.72, 2.06, 1.27,
0.90, 0.73
2070
Bendix T.B. injection
Renault Encore
1.7
(84-86)
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 83.5
1721
9.5
97.8
13 / 14
3.72, 2.06, 1.32,
0.97, 0.79
2100
Bendix T.B. injection
Renault LeCar/
R-5 1.3
(76-78)
4 Cyl
OHV
73.0 x 77.0
1289
(I) 33.5
(E) 29.0
9.5
95.8 L
94.6 R
13
3.89, 2.38, 1.52,
1.03
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1910
Renault LeCar/
R-5 1.4
(79-84)
4 Cyl
OHV
76.0 x 77.0
1397
(I) 34.2
(E) 30.3
8.8
95.8 L
94.6 R
13
3.84, 2.38, 1.52,
1.03
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
1910
Toyota Corolla
/ SR5
(83-87)
4 Cyl
OHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
9.0
94.5
13
3.586, 2.021,
1.383, 1.000,
0.860
(F) 231.5
Disc
(R) 229 x 40
Drum
2270
(I) 34.2
(E) 30.3
Notes:
Improved Touring Category Specifications
GCR - 372
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITC
ITC
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Toyota Corolla
/ SR5 (2TC)
(71-74)
4 Cyl
OHV
85.0 x 70.0
1588
(I) 41.0
(E) 36.0
8.5 fed
9.0 cal
91.9
13
3.59, 2.02, 1.38,
1.00 or 3.59, 2.02,
1.38, 1.00, 0.86
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 231 Drum
2130
Screwed-on fender flares standard equipment
on SR5.
Toyota Corolla
/ SR5 1.6
(75-79)
4 Cyl
OHV
85.0 x 70.0
1588
(I) 40.0
(E) 34.0
8.5
91.9
13
3.59, 2.02, 1.38,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 231 Drum
2230
Screwed-on fender flares standard equipment
on SR5.
Toyota Starlet
(81-83)
4 Cyl
OHV
75.0 x 73.0
1290
(I) 36.0
(E) 29.0
9.0
90.6
13
3.79, 2.12, 1.32,
1.00, 0.86
(F) 226 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
1850
Triumph
Spitfire
(73-80)
4 Cyl
OHV
73.7 x 87.5
1493
(I) 36.6
(E) 29.7
8.0
83.0
13
3.75, 2.16, 1.39,
1.00
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 178 Drum
1840
Triumph
Spitfire Mk III
(68-70)
4 Cyl
OHV
73.7 x 75.9
1296
(I) 33.0
(E) 29.7
9.0
83.0
13
3.75, 2.16, 1.39,
1.00
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 178 Drum
1750
Volkswagen
Beetle
(68-77)
4 Cyl
OHV
85.5 x 69.0
1584
(I) 35.5
(E) 32.0
7.3
94.5
15
3.78, 2.06, 1.26,
0.93
(F & R)
230 x 40
Drum
2000
Volkswagen
Super Beetle
(71-77)
4 Cyl
OHV
85.5 x 69.0
1584
(I) 35.5
(E) 32.0
7.5
94.5
15
3.78, 2.06, 1.20,
0.93 or 3.80, 2.06,
1.26, 0.89
(F) 244 Drum
(R) 231 Drum
2000
Volkswagen
Beetle
(98-99)
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.5 x 92.8
1984
(I) 39.5
(E) 32.9
10.0
98.9
16
3.78, 2.12, 1.36,
1.03, 0.84
(F) 280
Vented Disc
(R) 232
Solid Drum
2760
Volkswagen
Jetta 1.7
(82-84)
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
1715
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.0
8.2
94.5
13
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.91, 0.71
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2080
Volkswagen
Rabbit
(75-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 73.4
1457
76.5 x 80.0
1471
79.5 x 80.0
1588
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.0
8.2
94.5
13
3.45, 1.94, 1.37,
0.97 or 3.45, 1.94,
1.29, 0.97 or 3.45,
1.94, 1.29, 0.97,
0.76
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
(R) 180 Drum
2000
78-79: Bosch CIS injection, 80: carbureted, 76:
carbureted, 77, 80: Bosch CIS injection
Volkswagen
Rabbit 1.7
(81-84)
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
1715
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.0
8.2
94.5
13
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.91, 0.71
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2050
Bosch CIS injection
Improved Touring Category Specifications
ITCS
9.1.3.
GCR - 373
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke(mm)/
Displ. (cc)
Valves
IN & EX
(mm)
Comp.
Ratio
Wheelbase
(inch)
Wheel
Dia.
(inch)
Gear Ratios
Brakes Std.
(mm)
Weight
(lbs)
Notes:
Volkswagen
Scirocco
(75-80)
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 73.4
1457
76.5 x 80.0
1471
79.5 x 80.0
1588
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.0
79: 8.0
8.2
94.5
13
3.45, 1.94, 1.37,
0.97 or 3.45, 1.94,
1.29, 0.97 or 3.45,
1.94, 1.29, 0.97,
0.76
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2040
Volkswagen
Scirocco I 1.7
(1981)
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
1715
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.0
8.2
94.5
13
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.91, 0.71
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2110
Bosch CIS injection
Volkswagen
Scirocco II 1.7
(82-84)
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
1715
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.0
8.2
94.5
13
3.45, 1.94, 1.29,
0.91, 0.71
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 Drum
2110
Bosch CIS injection
Yugo GV
(1986)
4 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 55.5
1116
(I) 36.15
(E) 31.15
9.2
84.6
13
3.91, 2.06, 1.35,
0.96
(F) Disc
(R) Drum
1850
GCR - 374
Improved Touring Category Specifications
Engine
Type
9.1.3.
ITC
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
9.1.4. PREPARED CATEGORY
These specifications are a part of the SCCA GCR and all automobiles shall
confirm with GCR section 9.
A.
Purpose
Vehicles used in the series must be identifiable with the vehicles offered
for sale to the public and available through the manufacturer’s normal
distribution channels in the US. The intent of these rules is to allow older
World Challenge cars to compete in Club Racing with minimal modifications and allow new cars to be built to the same spec as well. No model
years older than 1990 will be permitted. The B Prepared (World Challenge
GT based) target performance is 450hp. The D Prepared (World Challenge
Touring based) target performance is 250hp. The SCCA does not guarantee the competitiveness of any car.
B.
Eligibility
Vehicles meeting one of the followingg criterion may compete in the
Prepared category;
• Cars built specifically under these Prepared rules
• Currently classified World Challenge cars, using the vehicle’s most
recent VTS sheet, (GT cars in B Prepared and Touring cars in D.)
Note: Competitors are responsible for providing the up-to-date VTS.
• GCR listed IT cars, 1990 and newer, under the current IT specifications.
Note: While IT cars may not be competitive in the Prepared category,
competition within the category will allow regional competitors to experience a national event.
• Cars eligible for the SCCA Pro Racing MX-5 Cup series, using
the current set of Pro Racing Rules, except that any DOT tire is
permitted provided it does not exceed 225/45/17, the claim rule
will not be in effect, fuel per IT specs, and a head and neck restraint
is optional.
Note: Competitors must have a copy of the current rules in their possession.
C.
1.
Bodywork
Standard body appearance must be strictly maintained. Standard
body appearance is considered to include the OEM grille and badge.
A photographic replica is not sufficient. Teams choosing not to
utilize the OEM grille opening for airflow may mount a close-out
panel behind the grille. OEM spoilers and wings, and aftermarket
wings and spoilers are permitted. OEM side skirts may be used
if they were available on the car from the dealer provided they
meet the minimum ride height rule. Aftermarket side skirts may
be used provided that they meet the minimum ride height, have
no openings/ducts in them other than for jacking insert(s), are no
wider than the approved fascias, do not extend any higher than the
bottom of the door and do not reinforce the chassis.
2.
Body and frame seams, and joints, may be welded, but additional
reinforcing material/brackets are not permitted. The OEM radiator
GCR - 375
PCS-A
Vehicle modifications will be limited to those required to meet SAFETY
SPECIFICATIONS and AUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS listed herein.
Unless a particular modification, or part, is approved in these rules, the
vehicle and all of its relevant parts and assemblies shall be stock for the
correct make and model of car.
9.1.4.
Prepared Category Specifications
supports may be replaced, or reinforced, in order to make repairs
easier. The radiator supports shall not reinforce the rest of the
chassis, or diminish the OEM crush zones.
3.
Bumper brackets may be modified, but bumpers must remain in
OEM locations.
4.
Non-essential body items and trim may be removed including
attaching brackets and supporting structure. Any holes in bodywork exposed by the removal of these items shall be covered up,
or filled in.
5.
All of vehicle’s doors must be able to be opened from both inside
and outside of the vehicle. Latches and hinges for the doors may
be modified, but must remain in working order. Aftermarket latches
and hinges may be used but shall not protrude beyond outer surface
of bodywork. Latches and hinges for the hood and trunk/decklid are
not required to be used. If latches and hinges are not used on the
hood, or trunk/decklid, a minimum of four (4) pins shall be used to
secure the body panel(s).
6.
Two (2) hood pins, equally spaced across front of hood, are required
within 24” of the leading edge of the hood.
7.
Openings in the bodywork may be temporarily covered, wholly or
partially, with tape for purpose of regulating airflow. Bodywork
openings may be more permanently closed-off using close-out
panels mounted behind body opening. Bodywork seams may not
be taped at all. Bodywork may only be taped to temporarily secure
it after contact.
8.
All bodywork and windows shall be sufficiently rigid, adequately
supported, and properly secured such that it does not noticeably
flutter, move, or deform while vehicle is in motion.
D.
1.
Chassis
All cars shall have the OEM rear package shelf and/or rear seat
back support structure installed if applicable. As an alternative, a
metallic close out panel may be installed that would simulate the
rear package shelf and/or the rear seat back support structure if
applicable. If a close out panel is used to clean up the appearance
of the rear package shelf and/or rear seat bulkhead in conjunction
with the OEM structure, the close out panel material is free.
2.
Cables, wiring and lines may be replaced, rerouted, and/or protected.
3.
When applicable, two (2) steel, 360-degree loops of sufficient
strength must be located as close as possible to the front and rear
universal joints to prevent the driveshaft from dropping in case of
failure of either universal joint. Floor materials and cross members
may also be utilized to provide this protection.
4.
It is permitted to attach a plate, or pad, under the car to provide for
jacking of the car, provided it serves no other purpose. It is prohibited to install any kind of device, which protrudes from the rocker
panel or side of the car. However, tubes may be attached to the roll
cage, or chassis, and extend to the inner surface of the rocker panel,
or bodywork, and act as a receptacle for a jacking fixture. Air jacks
are permitted, but no air source may be carried on board.
GCR - 376
5.
Minimum ride height is three inches 76.2mm (3”). Ride height
will be measured from the lowest part, or component, of the car,
excluding suspension, and complete wheels.
6.
The OEM firewall between the cockpit and engine compartment
shall be intact to prevent the passage of flames from the engine
compartment to the cockpit. Any holes in the firewall must be of
the minimum size for the passage of controls and wires, and must
be completely sealed.
7.
Both front windows, driver’s and passenger’s, shall be down (preferably removed) whenever the vehicle is on track. The OEM window
opening on the front doors shall not be filled in with any material,
other than the material required to mount a NACA-duct for driver
cooling. If used, the NACA-duct shall be mounted in the front,
lower, corner of the window opening. The area closed off to mount
the NACA-duct shall not exceed 50 square-inches. In rain conditions, a quarter window larger than 50 square-inches may be used
in the area normally used to mount the permitted NACA-duct, in
an attempt to minimize the amount of water entering the cockpit.
Enough open area for the driver to exit through in an emergency
shall remain open at all times.
8.
All vehicles must use a stock, uncracked, OEM equivalent, safety
glass windshield, or 6mm (1/4”) minimum thickness Lexan replacement, mounted in the stock location, at the stock angle and maintaining the stock profile.
9.
Windshield clips, per GCR section 9.3.53 are permitted and recommended.
10. Side windows, not including the front door windows, and rear
windows may be replaced by clear Lexan-type plastic material
having a minimum thickness of 3mm (1/8”), but must retain the
same shape, size, and location as the original glass. NACA-ducts
may be mounted in the side windows. The rear window must be
secured by two (2) additional straps (25mm wide x 3mm thick),
bolted or riveted to the body at both the top and bottom of the rear
window. If a Lexan rear window is mounted with multiple, evenly
spaced, screws around each side of its perimeter, safety straps are
not required. If a DOT spec glass rear window is used in conjunction with the OEM method of mounting, safety straps are recommended, but not required.
11. Windows may be mounted and sealed with silicone. Any silicone
used to bridge the gap between the perimeter of the window and
the chassis shall be neat in appearance and uniform in thickness.
Tape may only be used to seal the windows during wet track
sessions for the purpose of reducing the amount of water entering
the cockpit.
12. OEM side window framework shall be intact.
13. Acrylic, or glass, removable/moveable roof panels may be replaced
with the same material as the surrounding roof. All brackets, mounts,
and moldings must be removed. Fabric tops are not permitted, and
shall be removed along with all associated hardware. It may be
replaced with an OEM hardtop if one is available.
14. Unused mounting tabs and brackets that are non-structural,
GCR - 377
PCS-A
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
9.1.4.
Prepared Category Specifications
excluding the rear seat back support and package tray, may be
removed.
15. The OEM “rain gutter/tray” at base of the windshield shall be intact
and in the OEM location.
16. The floor pan may be modified to provide clearance for the exhaust
system routing.
E.
1.
Engine
Alternate engines may be used, given that the manufacturer of the
vehicle and engine are the same (e.g. Acura engine installed into a
Honda auto).
2.
The crankshaft shall be a stock OEM part for the specific engine,
but may be tooled enough to achieve balance. The standard weight
reduction allowance for balancing of the crankshaft is 0.5 lbs.
The standard weight reduction allowance for the balancing of the
reciprocating assembly is 15 grams. Alternate connecting rods are
permitted.
3.
Blocks may be sleeved to repair cylinder walls.
4.
Rocker arms, lifters, followers, pushrods, valve springs, keepers,
retainers, guides, seats, and valves are free, TITANIUM is NOT
permitted, except for the retainers. The head may be machined to
fit valvetrain components.
5.
Valve lift is limited to .600”. Camshafts and timing is free.
6.
Cars produced with an electronic throttle body may use the OEM
electronic throttle body. The OEM electronic throttle body may be
converted to manual actuation and the actuation cam on a manual
throttle body may be changed to alter the opening/closing rate of
the butterfly
7.
The ignition system components may be replaced freely provided
that the type of ignition remains the same as stock.
8.
Engine calibration (spark and fuel) is free. A programmable ECU
is permitted. The RPM limit set within the engine management
system shall be the same for all gears (i.e. 1st gear shall not have
a lower RPM limit than 2nd-6th gears).
9.
Fuel injector(s) and fuel rail(s) must maintain the original number
and mounting location(s), but are otherwise free. Fuel pumps and
fuel filters are free in type, size and number.
10. The location and type of the fuel pressure regulator(s) are free
provided they are mounted within the engine compartment.
11. The ring gear diameter must be the same as the production flywheel.
Flywheels shall be ferrous metal, or aluminum, but are otherwise
free. Titanium flywheels are not permitted. Clutch and pressure
plate design is free.
12. Oil pan and oil pickup may be baffled, modified, or replaced to
prevent surge. OEM oil pump may be modified, or replaced with an
OEM-style oil pump. Cars using a wet-sump oil system shall safety
wire the oil drain plug, or in some other way secure the oil drain
GCR - 378
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
plug, to prevent the plug from accidentally coming out.
13. Vents, breathers, and oil filters may be added, or substituted. All
emission control devices may be removed and the resulting holes
plugged.
14. Replacement gaskets and seals are free, including head gaskets.
Replacement gaskets and seals must be made out of material(s)
designed to seal the parts of an engine. Replacement gaskets and
seals may not perform any other functions. Head gaskets may be
used to adjust compression ratio.
15. The intake and exhaust ports, may be ported. The valve guide may
be machined as part of this porting.
16. Variable cam timing (VTEC, VANOS, etc.) and variable length intake
manifolds may be partially, or wholly, disabled. Variable cam timing
systems that use multiple cam lobes for each valve(s) may remove
lobes from the camshaft(s) that are not being used.
18. Cars utilizing forced induction may not have a boost controller within
reach of the driver. A car must enter pit lane to have the boost level
changed by the crew if necessary. Teams must be prepared to
demonstrate the boost adjustment process to officials.
F.
Cooling Systems
1. Water Cooling
Provided that the stock method of cooling is retained, the cooling system
is free, including cooling fans, but the water radiator must remain in the
approximate OEM location. The mounting angle may be changed.
2. Engine Oil Cooling
Coolers for the engine oil are free in number, type and location.
3. Intake Air Cooling
Cars utilizing forced induction may install intercoolers.
4. Water Spray Systems
Water may not be sprayed on any intercoolers, radiators, etc. Water
spray systems may only be used to inject water into the brake ducts.
G.
Exhaust System
The exhaust system may be modified, or replaced. Outlets must be located
rearward of the midpoint of the wheelbase. The exhaust pipe may not
protrude more than 76.2mm (3”) at the point where it exits the bodywork.
If the exhaust pipe(s) exit the bodywork at the widest part of the body
such that any extension of the exhaust pipe(s) beyond the body would
make pipe(s) the widest point, the exhaust pipe(s) must be trimmed flush
(+/- 0.5”) with the bodywork at the point that they exit the body. Minor
body modifications are permitted to allow for exhaust systems. Modifications shall serve no other purpose. The underbody rocker panels may be
modified for the installation of the exhaust system, but these modifications may only serve to provide clearance for the exhaust system. The
exhaust system must be adequately isolated from the driver’s compartment. If the exhaust system is routed in such a way that damage to it
could cause hot exhaust to contact any part of the fuel system, there
GCR - 379
PCS-A
17. In order to increase the compression ratio, the bottom of the head
may be machined. Alternate pistons are permitted and/or the
pistons may be machined. Compression is limited to 12.0:1.
9.1.4.
Prepared Category Specifications
shall be a metallic heat shield protecting the fuel system components.
This heat shield shall be located at least 76.2mm (3”) away from the
exhaust system, and there shall be at least 76.2mm (3”) between the
heat shield and the fuel system components.
H.
1.
Drivetrain
Alternate differential housings are permitted from the same model
of vehicle. Differential may be open, locked, or of a limited-slip
type. The internals of limited-slip type differentials may be modified
to change the amount of slip limiting. Differentials with external, or
electric, adjustability are prohibited. Driveshaft and half-shafts may
be aftermarket, but shall be the OEM-type and use the same types
of materials as stock.
2.
Vent and/or breather lines may be added to transmission and/or
differential. One (1) transmission and one (1) differential cooler is
permitted.
I.
J.
Fluid Piping & Fuel Tank
1. Fuel Cells/Tanks
The use of a fuel cell is required unless the stock fuel tank is located
between the axle centerlines and within the main chassis structure (i.e.
frame rails, etc.). Additional straps and/or protection may be required.
All fuel cells MUST comply with GCR 9.3.26. Proper bracing to protect
the fuel cell in the event of a rear-end crash is required. If a fuel cell is
installed in the rear hatch/rear trunk area, the OEM floorpan in that area
may be replaced with metal in order to make it easier to mount the fuel
cell and close out the area around the fuel cell.
2.
There must be a metal bulkhead completely separating the cockpit
from the compartment containing the fuel cell. This does not negate
the requirement that the fuel cell bladder be contained in a metal
container.
3.
No line containing engine coolant may pass through the cockpit.
No hydraulic fluid lines may have removable connectors inside the
cockpit.
4.
Coolant catch tanks are required.
5.
All fluid hoses, lines, reservoirs, and tanks that are in the cockpit,
or cargo area that is open to the driver, shall be separated from
the driver by rigid metallic and/or non-metallic enclosures and/or
deflection shields to prevent fluid from spraying on the driver in
case of a leak. Magnesium is prohibited. Waterproof flexible wraps
may also be used to prevent fluid from spraying on the driver. The
floor of these enclosures, or the area under the deflection shields,
shall be designed to prevent the accumulation of fluids.
6.
Cooling of fuel is prohibited. This applies equally, whether the fuel
is in the car, or not.
1.
Oil System
If oil storage tanks are not located in the original position they must
be surrounded by a 10 mm thick crushable structure. Provided that
the oil tank is not located in close proximity to the outer surface
of the bodywork, and there is some of the structure of the vehicle
between the oil tank and the bodywork, the car’s structure will
meet the 10mm crushable structure rule.
GCR - 380
2.
If the oil tank is located in the cockpit area, or a trunk area that is
open to the driver, it must be separated from the driver by a metal
enclosure made up of .036” steel, or .059” aluminum. This is in
addition to the 10mm thick crushable structure that is required in
section 9.1.4.I.2. The floor of the enclosure must be designed to
prevent accumulation of fluids.
3.
An Oil catch tank is required per GCR section 9.3.37
4.
Accusump-type systems may be used.
5.
Dry-sump systems are permitted provided:
a. B Prepared: The dry-sump system is limited to five (5) stages.
It shall consist of one (1) pressure stage and a maximum of
four (4) scavenge stages. If the OEM-style pressure pump is
used it shall count as the one permitted pressure stage. There
may be a maximum of two (2) two-port scavenge stages, or
a maximum of four (4) single-port scavenge stages, or any
combination such that oil is not being scavenged from more
than a maximum of four locations.
b.
K.
1.
D Prepared: The dry-sump system is limited to three (3) stages.
It shall consist of one (1) pressure stage and a maximum of
two (2) scavenge stages. If the OEM-style pressure pump is
used it shall count as the one permitted pressure stage. There
may be a maximum of one (1) two-port scavenge stage, or a
maximum of two (2) single-port scavenge stages, such that
oil is not being scavenged from more than a maximum of two
locations.
Electrical System
The electrical system is free provided that:
a. The battery may be replaced with any equivalent battery of the
same type. Battery may be relocated, but must be secured by
a tie-down bracket and positive terminal must be covered to
prevent accidental sparking.
b.
If located in the cockpit, the battery must be placed behind the
front seats, or in the passenger seat area, and the protection
box must include an air vent that exits outside the cockpit.
c.
All cars, except cars with pop-up headlights, shall have clear
OEM headlight assemblies in place in the stock headlight positions. If headlight assemblies are used, they may be the clear
OEM assemblies for any country that the car is sold in. Additionally, the headlight assembly may consist of a replica bucket
and the OEM lens. There shall be an operational light bulb
within both the low and high beam placements. The operational light bulbs need not be of OEM origin, but must produce
approximately the same light output as the OEM low beams.
Cars produced with pop-up headlights may have an alternate
light configuration.
d.
Fog/driving lights, parking lights and associated attaching hardware may be removed. The resulting openings may be used
to duct air, or be filled/covered. Any ducting may not extend
beyond the outer surface of the bodywork.
e.
Whenever the track surface is wet, thereby causing spray, all
cars on the track shall turn on their headlights and tail/rain
GCR - 381
PCS-A
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
9.1.4.
Prepared Category Specifications
lights.” The brake lights must continue to be functional whenever the tail/rain lights are used. The tail/rain lights must be
dimmer than the brake lights are when they come on.
L.
1.
f.
Each car must be fitted with at least one effective windshield
wiper motor, which must be in working order throughout the
event. Wiper blades, arms and associated hardware may be
substituted freely, or removed.
g.
Each car must have an effective defogging/demisting system
that is capable of keeping the windshield clear during wet
sessions. Anti-fog films meet this requirement.
Suspension and Steering
The use of active suspension is forbidden. All suspension members
must be made from a metallic material(s). Chromium plating of
suspension members is forbidden.
2.
Original suspension pick-up points below the upper line of the
wheel rim must be used within a tolerance of 25 mm; however,
the body/frame around the pick-up points may be reinforced. This
reinforcement shall be limited to a radius of six inches (6”). The
25mm tolerance applies to pick-up points on chassis only.
3.
Suspension mounting points above the upper line of the wheel rim
must be retained within a tolerance of 75 mm, however, the body/
frame around the pick-up points may be reinforced. This reinforcement shall be limited to a radius of six inches (6”). The 75mm tolerance applies to pick-up points on chassis only.
4.
Suspension springs are free. Coil-over units may be added to supplement, or replace, OEM springs. Attaching points may be reinforced.
It is permitted to use threaded spring seats for adjustability.
5.
Shock absorbers and struts are free. Driver adjustable systems,
or electronically controlled shocks, are not permitted. If a reservoir/adjustment canister is used, only one may be used per shock.
The shocks at each individual wheel may not be connected in any
way.
6.
Stabilizer bars are free, and may be added, removed, or substituted. Driver adjustable stabilizer bars are not permitted. Adjustment controls for stabilizer bars may be located within the cockpit,
but must be out of the reach of the driver. Adjustments to sway
bars during practice, qualifying and race must be done by a crewmember in pit lane.
7.
Suspension components shall be the stock OEM pieces, but they
may be reinforced. Heim joints are permitted on suspension components. Standard suspension bushings may be replaced with solid,
or spherical, bushings.
8.
Alternate control arms permitted.
9.
Cars that come with a solid rear axle, or trailing arm suspension are
permitted an aftermarket or fabricated rear suspension.
10. Slotted plates may be added over original shock mounts on front
and rear shock towers for camber/caster adjustment. One bolt-in
brace may connect the front strut towers, and one bolt-in brace
GCR - 382
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
may connect the rear strut towers.
11. The spindle and/or outer joint on the a-arm and/or strut may be
moved in order to correct bump steer caused by changing the
vehicle ride height. These components are not limited to the 25mm
of movement that applies to the suspension pick-up points located
on the chassis.
12. All steering components, with the exception of the steering wheel,
column and tie-rods/toe-links, must be original equipment supplied
by the manufacturer. These parts may be strengthened provided
the original part can still be identified.
13. The steering wheel may be replaced with an aftermarket, or racing
steering wheel. Wood-rimmed steering wheels are not allowed.
An all-metal quick release coupling on the steering wheel may be
added.
15. Power steering may be disconnected, an OEM manual steering rack
for that model may be fitted, an electric power steering pump may
be fitted, or an OEM electric-assisted steering rack may be used.
M.
1.
Brakes
Brake lines may be relocated, and rubber lines may be replaced
with armored brake lines. Original equipment master cylinders and
pedals may be replaced. Hand brakes may be removed. Aftermarket
brake proportioning valves are allowed. Non-pressurized brake fluid
lines and master cylinders need not be metal, metal shielded, or
bulkheaded. Pressurized brake fluid lines must be metal, metal
shielded, or bulkheaded.
2.
Brake pad friction material is free.
3.
Backing plates and dust shields may be modified, ventilated, or
removed.
4.
Brake duct inlets incorporated in the front spoiler as standard, or
light openings, other than headlights, may be used to duct air to
the front brakes. Additionally, brake ducts may be fitted into intermediate mounting surface of allowed splitter.
5.
Water spray cooling systems are permitted. The amount of water
carried for injection into the brake duct is free. Water-cooled calipers are forbidden.
6.
Wheel fans are not permitted.
7.
Power assisted braking systems are permitted.
8.
The balance of braking forces between the two wheels on an axle
shall be equal and non-adjustable.
GCR - 383
PCS-A
14. A collapsible steering column shall be used. Most current OEM
steering columns have at least two (2) universal joints in them that
would allow the steering column to fold on impact. This type of
design (at least one (1) universal joint) must also be used in any
steering column extension(s) that may be used to reach the driver’s competition seating position. Steering lock mechanism must
be removed.
9.1.4.
9.
Prepared Category Specifications
The balance of braking forces between the front and rear axles may
only be adjusted by the driver through:
a. Direct intervention on the position of the center of the joint, on
the linkage lever of the hydraulic pumps of the front and rear
circuits.
b.
Direct intervention on a proportional valve, in which the intake
pressure is adjusted through a pre-loaded spring.
10. Brake calipers, whether OEM or aftermarket, shall be mounted in
stock location.
11. Titanium piston inserts are permitted.
N.
1.
2.
3.
Tires & Wheels
Tires
a. All cars will use a D.O.T. approved tire of radial ply construction with a molded tread pattern. Retread tires will NOT be
allowed.
b.
Tire size is free.
c.
The only modification allowed to tires is having the tread
“shaved.”
d.
Filing, buffing, or any other disguising of tire sidewall is prohibited. Chemical treatments, or any means to artificially enhance
tire performance is prohibited.
Wheels / Hubs
a. The standard wheels may be replaced with direct, bolt-on
racing/aftermarket wheels under the following provisions:
1.
Loose wheel spacers of any type are not recommended.
2.
All cars must run the same size wheel on the same axle.
3.
Lug nuts and/or wheel studs are free as long as at least
two (2) threads of the wheel studs are visible and the
outside edge of the nuts and studs are inside the wheel rim
when properly mounted.
4.
As viewed from above at the centerline of the wheel; the
fender shall completely cover the “tread” portion of the
tire. Only the tire sidewalls may be visible.
5.
The wheel material is free, but they must be constructed of
metallic material(s). No modifications (including grinding)
are allowed on a vendor-supplied wheel.
6.
Valve stems and caps are free.
Wheel Attachment
a. Center-locking type hubs and wheels may be used if vehicle
is supplied with them from the manufacturer. If vehicle is not
supplied with center-locking type wheels they may be used
in conjunction with an adapter that bolts onto the OEM, or
approved, hub.
b.
If a single wheel nut is used, a safety spring must be in place
GCR - 384
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
on the nut whenever the car is running and must be replaced
after each wheel change. These springs must be painted DayGlo red or orange. Alternatively, another method of retaining
the wheels may be used provided it has been approved by
FIA.
O.
1.
Cockpit
In-car cameras must be securely mounted to the roll cage or vehicle
structure.
2. The following items must be removed from the cockpit:
Tool kit, spare tire, supplemental restraint systems (SRS) and passive
restraint systems.
4. The following items may be installed in the cockpit:
Safety equipment/structures, seat, controls necessary for driving,
instrumentation, electronic equipment, radio, camera, battery, driver
cooling system, driver ventilation system, replacement door panels/
interior trim, anti-sway bar controls (not within reach of driver). None
of the above items may hinder cockpit exit.
5.
The above components shall be attached/contained to the chassis
in such a way as to be able to withstand 25-g deceleration. Any
sharp edges shall be covered, padded, protected, etc. to prevent
injury to driver, crew, course workers, and officials.
6.
Seat Location – The chassis shall not be modified to make additional
clearance for the driver’s seat. The driver’s seat shall be located
in the same lateral location as the OEM seat. The driver’s seat
shall be located longitudinally so that the seat back, at the driver’s
shoulders, does not break an imaginary vertical plane located at
the front of the rear seat platform. On 2-seat vehicles the seat
back may go back to the OEM rear bulkhead, package tray, etc.
It is recommended that the floor be reinforced in the areas where
the seat is mounted to the chassis. Vehicles with a non-metallic
floor shall add tubing elements, with a minimum wall thickness of
.090”, connecting metallic parts of the chassis, or within the cage
structure, to mount the seat to.
7.
Stock dash/instrument panel cover (dash pad) must be used.
Original instruments/gauges may be replaced, or supplemented,
with additional engine monitoring gauges. Accessories, lights and
switches may be added or removed. Box-type extensions from the
dash pad may be used to mount switches and controls, in the areas
where the OEM insert panels were mounted, so that they more
easily accessible to the driver. Audio and video systems may be
removed.
8.
Vertical bulkheads, and enclosures, within the cockpit shall not
be any higher than the bottom of the side windows, and shall not
extend more than 457mm (18”) above the floorpan. No bulkhead(s)
shall cover the rear footwells.
GCR - 385
PCS-A
3. The following items may also be removed:
Headliner, sun visor, carpeting, carpet pad and/or insulation, soundproofing, OEM seats, all trim except the dashboard, heating and air
conditioning systems, window winding mechanisms, central locking
systems, audio system, and any other systems fitted to the original car
solely for the comfort of the driver and/or passengers.
9.1.4.
9.
Prepared Category Specifications
a.
Sedan Body (4-door) & Hatchback Body (3-door) - Any bulkheads positioned in front of the plane determined by the OEM
rear seat back shall not extend laterally from one side of the
chassis to the other, but rather shall only be large enough to
cover the individual components necessary.
b.
Coupe Body (2-door) - Any bulkheads positioned in front of the
plane determined by the OEM rear seat back, if applicable, may
extend laterally from one side of the chassis to the other.
DASH PAD MODIFICATION – It is permitted to modify the dash
pad in order to run the roll cage tubes through the dash area as long
as the dash pad is modified only enough for roll cage fitment. If
necessary, the dash pad may be parted to ease installation around
roll cage. Any such parting shall be done in such a way as to minimize the appearance that they have been separated once pieces of
dash pad are installed.
10. If the pedal box is not mounted rearward of any angle of the
floorpan/firewall, there shall be one (1) brace extending from each
of the front down tubes to protect the driver’s legs. They must be
integrated into the frame, or chassis, to provide substantial support
for the front hoop.
P.
1.
2.
Aerodynamics
When the wing and splitter are measured, there will be a 6mm
(1/4”) variance permitted to account for flexure of the fascias, offcourse excursions and any light body contact. There will be no variance greater than 6mm (1/4”) permitted unless the car has severe
body damage that would affect the measuring of the wing and/or
splitter.
The splitter protrusion will generally be measured at five (5) key
points. Those five (5) key points will consist of the centerline of
the car, the approximate center of each front corner, and each end
of the splitter in front of the front tire. This does not allow for the
areas of the splitter between the key points to stick-out more than
specified in section 9.1.4.1. or 9.1.4.2.
9.1.4.1.
A.
1.
B PREPARED SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
B Prepared Body/Chassis
Aerodynamics
a. A front splitter may be added that does not extend more than
2.0 inches past the original, or approved, bodywork as viewed
from above for the entire profile of the splitter. Splitters shall
not extend laterally any further than the widest point of the
outside sidewall of the front tires with the wheels pointed
straight ahead, and the “dry” set-up on the car. Additionally, the splitters may not extend more than 50.8mm (2.0”)
beyond the bodywork, regardless of where the outside edges
of the front tires are. The splitter shall consist of a single flat
plane. The splitter shall have no vertical deviations, fences,
etc., unless they are part of the production bodywork for street
use. Splitter designs may incorporate openings for brake ducts
provided it does not affect the standard body appearance. The
allowed splitter may close out the underbody from the leading
edge of the approved bodywork, back to the centerline of the
GCR - 386
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
b.
A rear wing may be added. Each wing shall be mounted to
trunk/deck lid with two (2) mounting brackets. The wing, and
the portion of the mounting brackets located externally to the
trunk/deck lid, may only be reinforced by a diagonal strut having
no aerodynamic effect, and/or by affixing the external parts of
the brackets to internal parts of the brackets within the trunk/
cargo area. The internal parts of the brackets may protrude
through the trunk/deck lid to allow for the two parts of each
bracket to be fastened together. The rear wing, including any
wicker bill, shall be mounted level with, or below, the peak of
the roof. The trailing edge of the rear wing may be mounted
no further rearward than the rear, center-point of the approved
bodywork. The wing and endplates shall not be any wider than
the widest part of the bodywork, not including mirrors and
fender flares/lips. The rear wing is limited to a single element
with a chord length of 12” and a width no wider than the
widest part of the car, not including fender flares and mirrors,
or a max width of 72”, whichever is the lesser. A wicker may
be added provided it does not cause the wing/wicker assembly
to exceed the stated maximum dimensions.
2.
Exterior Bodywork
a. OEM non-metallic composite body panels (i.e. plastic fascias,
fiberglass hoods, etc.) may be replaced with panels of any type
composite, provided that the panel maintains the OEM profiles.
All cars may replace the hood, trunk/deck lid and doors with
non-metallic composite parts. Hoods may have heat exhaust
vents installed in it. The hood vents are limited to 2 vents with
a max total plan area of 144 square inches. The vents shall not
expose the mechanical components of the car when looking
down from above. The permitted transmission and differential
coolers may vent through rear license plate frame. There shall
be a screen, painted the same color as the surrounding bodywork, covering the vent opening. Any OEM non-functional,
decorative vents/ducts may be made to be functional provided
the exterior body appearance is not modified.
3.
Chassis
a. Fasteners are free. Fasteners may be replaced with adhesives.
b.
Rounded coverings may be used at the rear of the front window
openings to bridge gap between the leading edge of b-pillar and
inner edge of main roll hoop. The material and design of these
coverings is free, but shall be neat in appearance and securely
fastened.
c.
A third (3rd) tube on each side may extend through the firewall
to the chassis in the engine compartment. These tubes shall
not extend forward of the shock towers.
d.
Inner fender panels may be modified or replaced for tire clearance and/or permitted suspension modifications. OEM producGCR - 387
PCS-A
front axle. The splitter may be mounted to the front fascia
via a vertical intermediate mounting surface. Additionally, a
maximum of four (4) rods, or cables, may be used to support
the front, and/or sides, of the splitter. No other material(s) may
be used external to the body to support the splitter. Singleplane vertical close-out panel(s) may be used to bridge gap
between front fascia and splitter.
9.1.4.
Prepared Category Specifications
tion-type appearance shall be maintained.
e.
An underbody close-out panel(s) may be used in the area
behind the rear axle. These panels shall not alter the external
appearance of the car when looking from the rear and sides of
the car (i.e. we want to have to lay on the ground to see them).
If the production car uses underbody trim pieces, the OEM
trim pieces may be removed or replaced, but any close-out
panel(s) used may not visually hide any more of the mechanical
components, when looking from the rear and sides of the car,
than the OEM trim pieces do. The close-out panels shall not
completely bridge the gap between the rear floor pan area and
the rear axle centerline. On rear engine cars, any close-out
panels shall not extend any further forward than the rear axle
centerline. Cars with a fuel cell, engine, etc. that extend down
into external visual range shall fit the close-out panel(s) around
the component in such a way that it does not alter the external
appearance of the car.
f.
Weight Requirements- All cars shall meet the required minimum
weight of 3100 lbs. Cars with sequential shift transmissions
shall meet the required minimum weight of 3200 lbs.
4. Convertible Tops
Convertibles model cars may compete with a hardtop or as an open car.
B.
1.
Engine/Drivetrain
Intake Requirements
a.
All cars shall use a Single Inlet Restrictor system as defined in
Appendix B, unless noted ootherwise.
b.
The following restrictors shall be used:
2 valve engine - 42mm SIR
4 or more valve engine - 40mm SIR
Rotary engine - 44mm SIR
c.
Supercharging/Turbocharging is permitted with an SIR as listed
above. The SIR shall be positioned upstream of the compressor
inlet.
d.
Carburetors are permitted with an SIR as listed above.
2.
Carbon clutches are permitted.
3.
The crankshaft may be equivalent aftermarket part (same material,
weight, and dimensions as OEM part), but may be tooled enough
to achieve balance.
4.
Engine may be lowered 38mm vertically from OEM location.
5.
Transmissions and Ratios are free. Forward gears are limited to
six speeds. Cadillac CTS-V (Mid Valley spacer) and Pontiac GTO
(Tilton spacer) are allowed to space the transmission 8 inches back
with the designated spacer.
6.
Cars may modify, or replace, motor and gearbox mounts provided
that the engine is located in the specified location. This includes
the use of “torque plates”. All engines will be mounted in the stock
position unless otherwise specified.
GCR - 388
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
Engine Setback Allowance:
1. Cadillac CTS-V and Pontiac GTO - 214mm from stock location
(78mm from firewall)
2. Ford Mustang (99-04) 4” from stock location
3. Ford Mustang (05-06) 8” from stock location
4. GM F-Body (93-02) 4” from stock location
7.
Traction Control/Launch Control is permitted, but must operate
solely through the engine managements system (i.e. spark and fuel
control), and may not interface with, or affect, the braking system
or throttle control.
C.
Brakes
1. Rotors
One (1) or two (2) piece ferrous rotors may not exceed 355mm diameter by 33mm thick (355x33mm).
3.
Anti-Lock Braking Systems (ABS) are permitted on cars utilizing the
OEM brake components as supplied.
4.
Brake duct water spray cooling systems are approved.
D.
1.
Cockpit
The required dash pad and center console may be made of any
material. The dash pad shall maintain the stock profile.
2.
Bulkheads
a. 2-Seat Vehicles:
There shall be a vertical bulkhead in the OEM position if applicable.
It may extend upward to the bottom of the side windows, and
then extend horizontally rearward to close-off the area behind the
cockpit. The bulkhead may be a non-metallic material if all fluid
lines, hoses, reservoirs and tanks that would otherwise be open to
the driver are contained in proper metallic enclosures.
b. 2-Door, 4-Seat Vehicles:
No bulkheads shall cover the rear floorboard area. The bulkhead
used in front of the rear seat back support may extend laterally
from one side of the chassis to the other, but must be below the
bottom of the side windows.
E.
1.
Wheels
Wheels may not exceed 18x13 rear and 18x11front.
9.1.4.2.
A.
1.
D PREPARED SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
Body/Chassis
Aerodynamics
a. Front Splitter: A front splitter may be added that is a flat,
single-plane, with an exposed top surface of not more than
3”, that does not extend more than 1.5” past the approved
bodywork as viewed from above for the entire profile of the
GCR - 389
PCS-A
2. Permitted Calipers
The standard production calipers or any caliper with six or less pistons
may be used. 4-piston calipers may use a maximum of four (4) pads per
caliper. 6-piston calipers are limited to two (2) pads per caliper.
9.1.4.
Prepared Category Specifications
front fascia. The 3” exposed top surface of splitter will be
measured from the point on the approved bodywork that sticks
out the furthest in the area directly above any point on the
splitter and defined by the top surface of the splitter and a
point 1” vertically from the splitter top surface. Splitters in TC
shall not extend laterally any further than the widest point of
the outside sidewall of the front tires with the wheels pointed
straight ahead, and the “dry” set-up on the car. Additionally,
the splitters may not extend more than 1.5” beyond the bodywork, regardless of where the outside edges of the front tires
are. The splitter shall have no vertical deviations. The allowed
splitter may close out the underbody from the leading edge
of the approved bodywork, back to the centerline of the front
axle. The splitter may be mounted to the front fascia via a
vertical intermediate mounting surface. If the vertical mounting
surface overlaps the front fascia, it may not overlap more than
2”. Additionally, a maximum of four (4) rods, or cables, may
be used to support the front, and/or sides, of the splitter. No
other material(s) may be used external to the body to support
the splitter. A single-plane vertical close-out panel(s) may be
used to bridge gap between front fascia and splitter. Splitter
designs may incorporate openings for brake ducts provided it
does not affect the standard body appearance.
b.
2.
Rear Wing: Each wing shall be mounted to trunk/deck lid with
two (2) mounting brackets. Each mounting bracket shall attach
to wing at a point that is at least two inches (2”) inboard of
endplates. The wing, and the portion of the mounting brackets
located externally to the trunk/deck lid, may only be reinforced
by a diagonal strut having no aerodynamic effect, and/or by
affixing the external parts of the brackets to internal parts of
the brackets within the trunk/cargo area. The internal parts of
the brackets may protrude through the trunk/deck lid to allow
for the two parts of each bracket to be fastened together.
The rear wing shall be mounted a min. of 6.0” below the peak
of the roof. Cars with a wagon-style body (i.e. Protege 5,
Civic Type R, etc.) competing in D Prepared may have the
rear wing mounted a maximum of 4.0” above the roofline.
The mounting position will be measured between the highest
points of the roof and wing. The trailing edge of the rear wing
may be mounted no further rearward than the rear, centerpoint of the approved bodywork. Removable OEM spoilers and
wings are not permitted. Wings shall be a single element with
a max chord length of 10.75” and max element width of 48”.
A wicker may be added provided it does not cause the wing/
wicker assembly to exceed the stated maximum dimensions.
Exterior Body Panels
a. All cars may replace the hood and trunk/deck lid with nonmetallic composite parts. The OEM profiles shall be maintained
on the part. All other body panels shall be OEM parts.
b.
The OEM front and rear fascias shall maintain the OEM crushable structure/support. The OEM crushable structure/support
may be lightened as long as it is still recognizable as being the
OEM crushable structure/support. The bumper shock absorbers
may be removed. The OEM front and rear fascias shall be
attached at the stock locations, but fasteners are free.
c.
Fasteners are free provided they are of the same material
GCR - 390
9.1.4. Prepared Category Specifications
family, and diameter as the fastener it is replacing.
3.
Chassis
a. Inner fender panels may be modified, but not replaced, for tire
clearance and/or permitted suspension modifications. OEM
production-type appearance shall be maintained.
b.
Convertibles model cars may compete with a hardtop or as an
open car.
4. Weight Requirements
All cars shall meet the required minimum weight of 2700 lbs. Cars with
sequential shift transmissions shall meet the required minimum weight
of 2800 lbs.
1.
Engine/Intake Requirements
Engines up to 3000 cubic centimeters are permitted.
2.
Intake Requirements- All cars shall use a Single Inlet Restrictor
system as defined in section Appendix B, unless noted otherwise.
3.
The following restrictors shall be used:
2 valve engine - 31mm SIR
4 valve engine - 30mm SIR
Rotary engine - 33mm SIR
4.
Turbocharging/Supercharging is permitted with an SIR as listed
above, and shall use the factory original unit (no aftermarket
turbo/superchargers). The SIR shall be positioned upstream of
the compressor inlet. Factory turbo/superchargers may not be
converted to models that did not originally come equipped with
forced induction. Swapping of turbo/superchargers between makes
and models is prohibited.
C.
1.
Drivetrain
Carbon clutches are NOT permitted.
2.
Engine and gearbox mounts may be solid.
3.
Transmission and Ratios are free. Forward gears are limited to six
speeds.
D.
1.
Brakes
Rotors: One (1), or two (2), piece ferrous rotors not to exceed
328mm diameter by 32mm thick (328x32mm).
2.
Permitted Calipers: The standard production calipers or any 4piston calipers may be used.
3.
Anti-Lock Braking Systems: Any car equipped with an OEM ABS
system shall completely remove all ABS components.
E.
F.
1.
1.
Suspension
Alternate suspensions are permitted. Alternate suspensions are
limited to the original type. Items such as brake calipers, springs,
and shock/struts shall remain located on the alternate suspension
in the OEM location.
Wheels
Wheels may not exceed 17x8.
GCR - 391
PCS-A
B.
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
9.1.5. PRODUCTION CATEGORY
A.
Philosophy
The Production category exists to provide the membership with an
opportunity to compete in series produced cars. While a Production car
retains many stock components, the current rules allow for high performance modifications to enhance the safety, power and handling of the
car. Production cars are specified at two levels of preparation, Level 1
(Full Prep) and Level 2 (Limited Prep). The commitment for the future of
Production is to the Level 2 formula. Every aspect of a car being classed
will be considered. The normal criteria for consideration are, but not
limited to: engine size and configuration, horsepower potential, driveline components, brakes, car weight, suspension configuration, wheels,
and body style. Any car with an aspect or aspects that the Club Racing
Board feels has fallen outside the current classes and cars classed, can
be excluded from one or all of the current Production classes. The Club
can alter specifications to equate the competition potential of each car in
its modified form.
1.
Production cars are specified at two levels, Level 1 and Level 2.
Cars can be specified at either level or a combination of both.
2.
Classification will be based on the specifications of the base model
of the car, as it was delivered for sale in the United States.
3.
Cars submitted for new classification in the Production Category
must be series produced in quantities of no less than 3000 within
a twelve month period.
C.
Specifications
The SCCA will publish Production Car Specifications (PCS) each year. The
PCS will contain the specifications for each car eligible to compete in the
Production Category for that calendar year.
1.
Each line of the PCS will list the make, model(s), level of drive
train and suspension/steering preparation, along with all other car
specific specifications.
2.
Cars can be updated or backdated within the specifications for
the makes and models listed on the same specification line of the
PCS.
3.
The use of non stock components may be permitted. Non stock
components can be permitted to equate competition potential.
4.
Track specifications will be set at 103% of the car’s stock track
plus 2.5 inches.
D.
Interpretation
1.
An addition, modification, substitution or removal, must not be
made unless specifically authorized.
2.
An authorized addition, modification, substitution or removal can
GCR - 393
PCS-B
B.
Classification
The Club will use the following guidelines when determining a car’s suitability for classification in the Production category:
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
not perform a prohibited function. An authorized addition, modification, substitution or removal of one component does not permit the
addition, modification, substitution or removal of any other component unless the addition, modification, substitution or removal is
specifically authorized.
3.
The levels of preparation on the cars specification line are the only
levels that apply to that car. Authorized modifications in one level
of preparation can not be used to determine or justify authorized
modifications in another level of preparation.
4.
The entrant of a car prepared to any of the level 2 specifications,
must be in possession of a factory workshop manual at all competitions.
5.
When the PCS refers to a component as being unrestricted, this
permits the addition, modification, substitution or removal of that
component.
6.
A rule that pertains to a specific component supersedes a general
rule that might otherwise apply.
7.
If any word is used in the Production car specifications is defined in
the technical glossary of the GCR, it will be interpreted as defined.
Terms with corresponding glossary definitions are bold highlighted
throughout the PCS.
E.
Authorized Modifications
1.
Drive Train Level 1
a. Drive Train Component Modification
1. Stock and permitted alternate components of the drive
train can be modified by any mechanical or chemical
means. Modification of a drive train component does not
permit relocation of that component.
b.
2.
No material or mechanical extension can be added to any
stock or alternate component, unless specifically authorized by these rules. Repairs to a stock or alternate component are permitted, provided the repair serves no prohibited function.
3.
Stock and permitted alternate components of the drive
train can have thermal barrier and friction altering coatings
applied.
Induction System
1. All inducted air must pass through the venturi(s) of the
car’s carburetor(s). On cars where the use of one (1) 40
DCN, DCNF, IDF carburetor is required, can fit one (1) of
the following permitted optional carburetors:
1. Weber 32 DGV/DGAV/DGEV
2. Weber 32/36 DGV/DGAV/DGEV
3. Weber 32/36 DFV/DFAV/DFEV
4. Weber 34 DAT/DATR/DATRA/DMTR
5. Holley-Weber 5200.
Where Weber carburetors are specified, Weber type carburetors can be substituted. The following are permitted
Weber type carburetors:
GCR - 394
9.1.5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Solex
SK
Mikuni
Delorto
Berg
PMO
Stock or permitted alternate sidedraft carburetor(s) can
use an adaptor plate and/or a spacer in addition to any
stock spacer, between the carburetor(s) and the intake
manifold. Material for the adaptor plate and spacer
is unrestricted. No adaptor plate or spacer can serve
any purpose other than to space out and/or mate the
carburetor(s) to the permitted intake manifold. The
adapter or spacer cannot create a plenum or change the
carburetor(s) orientation. The maximum thickness for
the adapter, spacer, stock spacer or combination of all
is 1.25”. For the purpose of these rules an Isolator is a
spacer.
3.
Stock or permitted alternate downdraft carburetor(s) can
use an adaptor plate and/or a spacer in addition to any
stock spacer, between the carburetor(s) and the intake
manifold. Material for the adaptor plate and spacer is unrestricted. No adaptor plate or spacer can serve any purpose
other than to space out, or mate the carburetor(s) to the
permitted intake manifold. The adapter or spacer cannot
change the carburetor(s) orientation. Adaptors and spacers
can have a bore larger than the throttle bore of the stock
or permitted alternate carburetor(s). The maximum thickness for the adapter, spacer, stock spacer or combination
of all is 1.25”. For the purpose of these rules an Isolator is
a spacer.
4.
Car’s permitted to utilize fuel injection, must use the stock
manifold and throttle body. The throttle body bore size
must remain stock. The throttle body can be ported and
polished. The number of injection nozzles must remain the
same as stock. The mounting position and injection point
of the injection nozzle must be stock. The stock type of
fuel injection must be maintained (electronic, mechanical,
electro-mechanical). The fuel injection system is otherwise
unrestricted.
5.
All carburetors must retain the stock method of fuel
distribution. Utilization or modification of a carburetor’s
components to effect an annular discharge configuration
is prohibited.
6.
Air cleaners, velocity stacks, air supply ducts and cold air
boxes are unrestricted.
7.
Stock or permitted alternate intake manifold(s) can be
ported and polished. It/they can be cut apart to facilitate
this work. When the manifold is re-welded, the external
dimensions of the manifold must remain unchanged from
stock.
8.
No portion of the intake manifold(s) can extend into the
inlet ports of the cylinder head or rotary engine end plate.
GCR - 395
PCS-B
2.
Production Category Specifications
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
No modification of the cylinder head or end plate is allowed
when fitting a permitted alternate intake manifold. Port to
port balance pipes or tubes in all intake manifolds can be
plugged or restricted.
9.
The accelerator pedal and linkage to the throttle butterfly
is unrestricted. Electric throttle control is prohibited unless
fitted as stock. Two spring loaded systems of positive
throttle closure are strongly recommended.
c.
Fuel pumps, lines, filters, and pressure regulators are unrestricted, provided no component serves any fuel cooling
purpose. Fuel lines can pass through the driver/passenger
compartment. If a mechanical pump is removed, a blanking
plate can be used to cover the stock opening.
d.
Emission system components, control devices, associated
lines, nozzles and wiring must be removed and any resultant
holes plugged. The plugs must serve no other purpose.
e.
Cylinder Head
1. Porting, polishing, and machining within the limits of
Production Car Rule E.1.a.1 E.1.a.2., is permitted. Valve
guides and valve seats are unrestricted.
f.
2.
If the stock fuel injection is removed and carburetors are
utilized, the stock fuel injection ports in the cylinder head
must be plugged. The plugs must serve no other purpose.
3.
The cylinder head can be machined to utilize o-rings to
replace or supplement the cylinder head gasket.
4.
Holes resulting from the removal of EGR valves and air
nozzles must be plugged. The plugs must serve no other
purpose.
Camshaft and Valve Gear
1. Camshafts are unrestricted. Any lifters, tappets or cam
followers of the same type and diameter as stock are
permitted. The interchange of hydraulic and solid lifters is
permitted.
2.
Camshaft timing chains, gears, belts, and sprockets are
unrestricted provided that they are of the same type and
outside diameter as fitted stock. Single row or double row
camshaft timing chains can be used. Adjustable timing
gears are permitted.
3.
A timing chain/belt tensioner can be added to an engine
where a tensioner is not fitted as stock, provided that it
acts upon the portion of the chain/belt that travels from
the final cam sprocket/gear to the crankshaft. The timing
belt cover can be removed.
4.
Any metal valves meeting the specified head diameter can
be used. Any valve springs of the same type as stock can
be used. Valve retainers, lash pads, valve keepers, seals
and adjustment shims are unrestricted.
5.
Pushrods, valve rocker arms, shafts and attendant assemGCR - 396
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
blies are unrestricted.
h.
i.
j.
Block and Cylinders
1. The block can be rebored no more than 1.2mm (.0472
in) larger than the maximum dimension given on the
specification line for that make, model, and displacement.
A cylinder block from any model from the same manufacturer, which is of the same material and dimensionally identical throughout, except for non-critical bosses,
is permitted. Oil passages can be re-routed, enlarged,
restricted or plugged.
2.
Cylinders or cylinder sleeves of any material can be fitted
to the block.
3.
Crankshaft main bearing caps and main bearing cap bolts
are unrestricted.
4.
The block can be machined to utilize o-rings to replace or
supplement a cylinder head gasket.
5.
Crankshaft oil seal(s) are unrestricted.
Pistons and Connecting Rods
1. Pistons, pins, clips and/or pin retainers and piston rings are
unrestricted. Pistons must be constructed of metal.
2.
Alternate ferrous connecting rods of the same crank pin
center to the piston pin center dimension as stock are
permitted.
3.
Connecting rod bolts and nuts are unrestricted.
Crankshaft and Flywheel
1. An alternate crankshaft is permitted. The crankshaft
must be constructed of ferrous material, and must have
the same stroke as stock. Journal diameters can be a
maximum undersize of 0.045 from stock diameter. The
crankshaft must retain the stock throw angles and firing
order.
2.
The direction of crankshaft rotation must remain stock.
3.
External Crankshaft vibration dampeners are unrestricted.
4.
Any flywheel of stock diameter or larger can be used,
provided it attaches to the standard or permitted alternate
crankshaft at the stock location. Additional fasteners can
be used. The diameter of the flywheel includes the diameter of the starter ring. Cars that are permitted a specific
alternate transmission on the specification line can use
a flywheel of stock diameter or larger for that alternate
transmission.
5.
Clutch assemblies, clutch linkage and release bearings are
unrestricted. Carbon clutch components are prohibited.
Oiling System
1. Any mechanically driven oil pump can be used. Chassis
components can be modified to allow installation of the
GCR - 397
PCS-B
g.
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
oil pump. Dry sump systems are permitted. The dry sump
tank must be mounted within the bodywork.
k.
l.
2.
The Oil pan/sump, scraper(s), baffle(s), windage tray(s), oil
pickup(s), pressure accumulator(s) and oil filter(s) are unrestricted. The filter(s) and pressure accumulator(s) must be
securely mounted within the bodywork. Oil lines are unrestricted. Oil Lines can pass through the driver/passenger
compartment.
3.
Breather vents are unrestricted.
4.
No part of the oiling system can be connected to the
exhaust system.
Electrical System
1. The use of any driver operated electric starter is permitted.
The starter must be installed in the same general location
as the stock starter. The starter must be mounted on the
same side of the flywheel and engine as stock.
2.
Ignition systems are unrestricted. Magneto ignition systems
are prohibited. If the distributor is removed a blanking plate
can be fitted in its place. Components that allow the incremental adjustment of ignition timing by the driver during
competition are prohibited.
3.
The generator or alternator is unrestricted. If a generator or
altenator is used it must be mounted in the same general
location as stock.
4.
Batteries are unrestricted.
5.
All other components of the electrical system are unrestricted.
Exhaust System
1. The exhaust header and exhaust system is unrestricted.
Floor pans can be altered only to recess mufflers. No modifications can be made to the bodywork to fit any other part
of the exhaust system.
m. Other Engine Components
1. The use of alternate engine components which are normally
expendable and considered replacement parts, such as
fasteners, gaskets, seals, bearings, water pumps, etc., is
permitted. Electrically driven water pumps are prohibited.
2.
Bushings can be installed where none are fitted as stock,
provided they are concentric, and that the centerline of the
bushed part is not changed.
3.
The addition of alignment aides, such as dowels, bolts or
keys can be added to engine components.
4.
Other than the limitations in 9.1.5.E.1.f.2, engine drive
pulleys are unrestricted.
5.
Engine steady bars are unrestricted.
GCR - 398
9.1.5.
6.
o.
2.
Engine mounts of alternate design and/or material can be
used, but there can be no change to the engine’s fore, aft
or vertical location except as permitted in 9.1.5.E.1.o.6.
Engine mounts must attach to the engine in their stock
location.
Transmission
1. The Transmission is unrestricted, providing that it is fit in
the same basic location as stock. Sequential shifting transmissions are prohibited. Pneumatic, hydraulic or electric
actuation of the gear shift mechanism is prohibited.
2.
All transmissions must have a reverse gear that is operable
by the driver from his normal seated position and capable
of sustained movement of the car, under its own power, in
the reverse direction. A driver operated device for locking
out the reverse gear can be added, provided it does not
prevent prompt engagement of reverse in an emergency
situation.
3.
Shift linkage is unrestricted. The shift linkage opening in
the transmission tunnel or tunnel cover can be modified to
allow the installation of the alternate shift linkage.
4.
The transmission tunnel and tunnel cover can be altered to
allow the installation of an alternate transmission and/or
drive shaft. Cars equipped with a removable transmission
tunnel cover as stock can substitute the stock transmission tunnel cover with one of an alternate material.
Final Drive
1. Driveshaft(s) are unrestricted.
2.
Final drive ratio is unrestricted.
3.
Internal differential components are unrestricted. Electric
control of the differential is prohibited.
4.
Substitution of the differential housing is only permitted on
front engine/front drive or rear engine/rear drive cars through
the use of an alternate transaxle.
5.
Axle shafts, bearings, bearing carriers, hubs, and universal
joints/CV joints are unrestricted.
6.
Transverse engine cars can rotate the engine about the
crankshaft centerline to align axle shafts/constant velocity
joints. On rear engine/rear drive cars the engine/drive
train can be relocated vertically upward, to a maximum of
one inch, to allow alignment of suspension and driveline
components.
Drive Train Level 2
a. Drive train Component Modification
1. Stock and permitted alternate components of the drive
train can be modified by any mechanical or chemical
means. Modification of a drive train component does not
permit relocation of that component.
2.
No material or mechanical extension can be added to any
GCR - 399
PCS-B
n.
Production Category Specifications
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
stock or alternate component unless specifically authorized by these rules. Repairs to a stock or alternate component are permitted provided the repair serves no prohibited
function.
3.
b.
Stock and permitted alternate components of the drive
train can have thermal barrier and friction altering coatings
applied.
Induction System
1. All inducted air must pass through the venturi(s) of the
cars carburetor(s). All single carbureted cars may fit a
permitted optional carburetor. Permitted optional carburetors are:
1. Weber 32 DGV/DGAV/DGEV
2. Weber 32/36 DGV/DGAV/DGEV
3. Weber 32/36 DFV/DFAV/DFEV
4. Weber 34 DAT/DATR/DATRA/DMTR
5. Holley-Weber 5200
The stock or permitted alternate carburetor must not be
modified. Carburetor jets needles, metering rods and needle
valves are unrestricted. Choke mechanisms, plates, rods,
and actuating cables, wires, or hoses can be removed. The
number of carburetors must not be changed from stock.
2.
Stock or permitted alternate sidedraft carburetor(s) can use
an adaptor plate and/or a spacer in addition to any stock
spacer, between the carburetor(s) and the intake manifold.
Material for the adaptor plate and spacer is unrestricted.
No adaptor plate or spacer can serve any purpose other
than to space out and/or mate the carburetor(s) to the
permitted intake manifold. The adapter or spacer cannot
create a plenum or change the carburetor(s) orientation.
The maximum thickness for the adapter, spacer, stock
spacer or combination of all is 1.25”. For the purpose of
these rules an Isolator is a spacer.
3.
Stock or permitted alternate downdraft carburetor(s) can
use an adaptor plate and/or a spacer in addition to any
stock spacer, between the carburetor(s) and the intake
manifold. Material for the adaptor plate and spacer is unrestricted. No adaptor plate or spacer can serve any purpose
other than to space out, or mate the carburetor(s) to the
permitted intake manifold. The adapter or spacer cannot
change the carburetor(s) orientation. Adaptors and spacers
can have a bore larger than the throttle bore of the stock
or permitted alternate carburetor(s). The maximum thickness for the adapter, spacer, stock spacer or combination
of all is 1.25”. For the purpose of these rules an Isolator is
a spacer.
4.
Fuel Injection: All inducted air must pass through the
throttle body and be subject to control by the throttle
butterfly. The stock throttle body casting/housing must
be retained. The inside dimensions of the throttle body
casting/housing and all dimensions of the throttle butterfly
must remain stock. The throttle butterfly shaft must not
be relocated. The outside diameter of the portion of the
throttle butterfly shaft located in the throttle body bore
GCR - 400
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
5.
All carburetors must retain the stock method of fuel
distribution. Utilization or modification of a carburetor’s
components to effect an annular discharge configuration
is prohibited.
6.
Air cleaners, velocity stacks, air supply ducts and cold air
boxes are unrestricted.
7.
The intake manifold may be port matched on the port
mating surface to a depth of no more than one inch. Balance
pipes or tubes on all intake manifolds can be plugged or
restricted. The intake manifold can not otherwise be modified.
8.
The accelerator pedal and linkage to the throttle butterfly
is unrestricted. Electric throttle control is prohibited unless
fitted as stock. Two spring loaded systems of positive
throttle closure are strongly recommended.
c.
Fuel pumps, lines, filters, and pressure regulators are unrestricted, provided no component serves any fuel cooling
purpose. Fuel lines can pass through the driver/passenger
compartment. If a mechanical pump is removed, a blanking
plate can be used to cover the stock opening.
d.
Emission system components, control devices, associated
lines, nozzles and wiring must be removed and any resultant
holes plugged. The plugs must serve no other purpose.
e.
The Cylinder Head can only be modified:
1. To install an alternate camshaft, and/or adjustable cam
gears.
2.
To port match on the port mating surface to a depth of no
more than one inch.
3.
To facilitate the installation of permitted alternate components, provided the modification serves no other function.
4.
To achieve the maximum specified compression ratio by
the machining of the deck surface.
5.
To completely plug the holes resulting from the removal of
EGR valves and air nozzles. The plugs must serve no other
purpose.
GCR - 401
PCS-B
must be no smaller than stock. The contour of the interface between the throttle butterfly shaft and the butterfly
must remain stock. The throttle butterfly and any throttle
butterfly to shaft screws/bolts can be attached to the
throttle butterfly shaft by any means including welding
or brazing. Holes or slots can be created in the throttle
butterfly for purposes of idle adjustment only. The number
of injectors must remain stock. The mounting position
and injection point must be stock. The original type of
fuel injection must be maintained (electronic, mechanical,
electro-mechanical). In all other respects the fuel injection
system is unrestricted.
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
f.
g.
6.
To completely plug the stock fuel injection ports in the
cylinder head, if the stock fuel injection is removed and
carburetors are utilized. The plugs must serve no other
purpose.
7.
To utilize O-rings to replace or supplement a cylinder head
gasket.
8.
To fit valve seats. Valve seats are unrestricted. Valve seat
angles are unrestricted. The valve seat insert can be no
taller than one half inch.
Camshaft and Valve Gear
1. Camshafts are unrestricted. Any lifters, tappets/cam
followers of the same type and diameter as stock are
permitted. The interchange of hydraulic and solid lifters is
permitted.
2.
Camshaft timing chains, gears, belts, and sprockets are
unrestricted provided that they are of the same type, and
outside diameter as fitted stock. Single row or double row
timing chains can be used. Adjustable timing gears are
permitted.
3.
A timing chain/belt tensioner can be added to an engine
where a tensioner is not fitted as stock, provided that it
acts upon the portion of the chain/belt that travels from
the final cam sprocket/gear to the crankshaft. The timing
belt cover can be removed.
4.
Any ferrous (including stainless steel) material valves
meeting the specified head and stock stem diameter can
be used. Any ferrous valve springs of the same type as
stock, can be used. Valve retainers, Spring retainers, lash
Pads, valve keepers, seals and adjustment shims are unrestricted.
5.
Pushrods are unrestricted. Rocker shafts when utilized
in the same stock system can be replaced by an alternate shaft, and is unrestricted. Valve rocker arms, cam
followers, rocker ratios and rocker/follower ratios must be
stock.
6.
Valve guide material is unrestricted, but must have stock
external dimensions.
7.
Where maximum valve lift is specified, valve lift is measured
at the valve with zero lash or clearance.
Block and Cylinders
1. The block can be rebored no more than 1.2mm (.0472
in) larger than the maximum dimension given on the
specification line for that make, model, and displacement.
A cylinder block from any model from the same manufacturer, which is of the same material and dimensionally identical throughout, except for non-critical bosses,
is permitted. Oil passages can be re-routed, enlarged,
restricted or plugged.
2.
Cylinders or cylinder sleeves of any material can be fitted
GCR - 402
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
to the block.
i.
j.
k.
Crankshaft main bearing caps and main bearing cap bolts
are unrestricted.
4.
The block can be machined to utilize o-rings to replace or
supplement a cylinder head gasket.
5.
Crankshaft oil seal(s) are unrestricted.
Pistons and Connecting Rods
1. Pistons, pins, clips and/or pin retainers and piston rings are
unrestricted. Pistons must be constructed of metal.
2.
Stock connecting rods are required, but can be lightened
and balanced.
3.
Connecting rod bolts and nuts are unrestricted.
Crankshaft and Flywheel
1. Stock crankshafts are required. The Crankshaft can
be lightened and balanced. Journal diameters can be a
maximum undersize of 0.045 from stock diameter.
2.
The direction of the crankshaft rotation must remain
stock.
3.
The use of any external crankshaft vibration dampener is
permitted.
4.
Any flywheel of stock diameter or larger can be used,
provided it attaches to the standard or permitted alternate
crankshaft at the stock location. Additional fasteners can
be used. The diameter of the flywheel includes the diameter of the starter ring. Cars that are permitted a specific
alternate transmission on the specification line can use
a flywheel of stock diameter or larger for that alternate
transmission.
5.
Clutch assemblies, clutch linkage and release bearings are
unrestricted. Carbon clutch components are prohibited.
Oiling System
1. Any mechanically driven oil pump can be used. Chassis
components can be modified to allow installation of the oil
pump. Dry sump systems are prohibited.
2.
The Oil pan/sump, scraper(s), baffle(s), windage tray(s), oil
pickup(s), pressure accumulator(s) and oil filter(s) are unrestricted. The filter(s) and pressure accumulator(s) must be
securely mounted within the bodywork. Oil lines are unrestricted. Oil Lines can pass through the driver/passenger
compartment.
3.
Breather vents are unrestricted.
4.
No part of the oiling system can be connected to the
exhaust system.
Electrical System
GCR - 403
PCS-B
h.
3.
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
l.
1.
The use of any driver operated electric starter is permitted.
The starter must be installed in the same general location
as the stock starter. The starter must be mounted on the
same side of the flywheel and engine as stock.
2.
Ignition systems are unrestricted. Magneto ignition systems
are prohibited. If the distributor is removed a blanking plate
can be fitted in its place. Components that allow the incremental adjustment of ignition timing by the driver during
competition are prohibited.
3.
The generator or alternator is unrestricted. If a generator or
altenator is used it must be mounted in the same general
location as stock.
4.
Batteries are unrestricted.
5.
All other components of the electrical system are unrestricted.
Exhaust System
1. The exhaust header and exhaust system is unrestricted.
Floor pans can be altered only to recess mufflers. No modifications can be made to the bodywork to fit any other part
of the exhaust system.
m. Other Engine Components
1. The use of alternate engine components which are normally
expendable and considered replacement parts, such as
fasteners, gaskets, seals, bearings, water pumps, etc., is
permitted. Electrically driven water pumps are prohibited.
n.
2.
Bushings can be installed where none are fitted as stock,
provided they are concentric, and that the centerline of the
bushed part is not changed.
3.
The addition of alignment aides, such as dowels, bolts or
keys can be added to engine components.
4.
Other than the limitations in 9.1.5.E.1.f.2, engine drive
pulleys are unrestricted.
5.
Engine steady bars are unrestricted.
6.
Engine mounts of alternate design and/or material can be
used, but there can be no change to the engine’s fore, aft
or vertical location except as permitted in 9.1.5.E.1.o.6.
Engine mounts must attach to the engine in their stock
location.
Transmission
1. The Transmission is unrestricted, providing that it is fit in
the same basic location as stock. Sequential shifting transmissions are prohibited. Pneumatic, hydraulic or electric
actuation of the gear shift mechanism is prohibited.
2.
All transmissions must have a reverse gear that is operable
by the driver from his normal seated position and capable
of sustained movement of the car, under its own power, in
the reverse direction. A driver operated device for locking
GCR - 404
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
out the reverse gear can be added, provided it does not
prevent prompt engagement of reverse in an emergency
situation.
Shift linkage is unrestricted. The shift linkage opening in
the transmission tunnel or tunnel cover can be modified to
allow the installation of the alternate shift linkage.
4.
The transmission tunnel and tunnel cover can be altered to
allow the installation of an alternate transmission and/or
drive shaft. Cars equipped with a removable transmission
tunnel cover as stock, can substitute the stock transmission tunnel cover with one of an alternate material.
5.
There is no weight penalty for the use of a stock transmission utilizing stock case, gear ratios and synchromesh
style gear engagement. An alternate transmission that uses
stock type, circular, beveled synchronizers, imposes a 2.5%
weight penalty. An alternate transmission that uses a gear
engagement mechanism different than stock type, circular,
beveled synchronizers imposes a 5% weight penalty.
Final Drive
1. Drive shaft(s) are unrestricted.
2.
Final drive ratio is unrestricted.
3.
Internal differential components are unrestricted. Electric
control of the differential is prohibited.
4.
Substitution of the differential housing is only permitted on
front engine/front drive or rear engine/rear drive cars through
the use of an alternate transaxle.
5.
Axle shafts, bearings, bearing carriers, hubs, and universal
joints/CV joints are unrestricted.
6. Transverse engine cars can rotate the engine about the
crankshaft centerline to align axle shafts/constant velocity
joints. On rear engine/rear drive cars the engine/drive
train can be relocated vertically upward, to a maximum of
one inch, to allow alignment of suspension and driveline
components.
3.
Drive Train Rotary Engine Level 2
a. Modifications
1. The capacity of the working chambers must not be changed
from stock.
2.
The eccentric shaft can be replaced with another made
from a ferrous material, but no changes in the eccentricity
of journal dimensions are permitted.
3.
Rotary engine rotors are unrestricted.
4.
Street Porting of the engine only. Bridge porting, peripheral
porting, and eyelash porting are prohibited. Contact SCCA
National Office for details of Street porting.
5.
Modification of the water jacket in the area of the spark
GCR - 405
PCS-B
o.
3.
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
plug, for cooling purposes is permitted.
4.
Suspension and Steering Level 1
a. The stock system of suspension, e.g., live axle, swing axle,
McPherson strut, A-arm, etc. must be retained.
b.
Ride height is unrestricted.
c.
Bolt on suspension cross members/sub-frames are unrestricted.
d.
Suspension pickup/pivot points are unrestricted. Suspension
Components including anti-roll bars, camber compensating
devices, panhard rods, watts linkage and suspension stabilizers
are unrestricted. These components can pass through any
portion of the car with the exception of exterior body work.
If these components extend into the driver/passenger/trunk
compartments, they must be covered with metal panels.
e.
Suspension bushings, bearings and ball joints are unrestricted.
f.
Springs and Shock Absorbers
1. Any springs or torsion bars can be used, provided the
quantity of these items remains as stock. The location and
attachment points of springs and torsion bars are unrestricted. Spacers/lowering blocks can be used between
leaf springs and the axle housing. The use of tender springs
is permitted, provided the tender springs are completely
compressed when the car is at static ride height. Static
ride height will be determined with the driver seated in the
normal driving position.
2.
Shock absorbers and McPherson struts/Chapman struts
are unrestricted. All cars can fit coil-over type springs with
tubular, load bearing shock absorbers or struts. Such items
must not exceed one spring and shock/strut per wheel.
A. Attachment points for the shock absorbers and
McPherson struts/Chapman struts are unrestricted.
Rear attachment points can be located in the driver/
passenger/trunk compartment, but must be covered
with metal panels.
B.
When lever shocks are replaced with tubular shocks,
the entire shock assembly can be replaced with a link
and bracket that performs the control function.
C. Bump stops and bracketry are unrestricted.
D. No shock absorber, McPherson struts/Chapman struts
can be capable of adjustment by the driver while the
car is in motion, unless fitted as stock.
3.
g.
Rockers, rocker arms, push and/or pull rods are prohibited.
Steering
1. The stock steering system must be retained e.g. rack and
pinion, reciprocating ball, worm and sector. The steering
system can be relocated.
GCR - 406
9.1.5.
2.
Steering system components are unrestricted.
3.
The steering column is unrestricted. A collapsible type
steering column is strongly recommended. The driver’s
normal seated position must not be relocated.
4.
Cars equipped with power steering as standard equipment
can modify, substitute, disable and/or remove the power
pump, related hoses and mounting brackets.
Suspension and Steering Level 2
a. Ride height is unrestricted.
b.
c.
Suspension Components
1. Suspension control arms are unrestricted, provided the
quantity of these items remains as stock.
2.
Suspension bushings, bearings and ball joints are unrestricted.
3.
Any anti-roll bar(s) and rear axle traction bar(s), rear axle
panhard rod and watts linkage can be added or substituted,
provided its/their installation serves no other purpose. The
mounts for these devices can be welded or bolted to the
car. These devices and their mounts can not be located in
the trunk or driver/passenger compartment unless fitted
as stock. Rear axle traction bar(s) used to control axle
housing rotation must be solid bar or tube.
4.
When a cars anti-roll bar also acts as a suspension locating
device, the bars attachment points and pivot points on the
chassis and suspension control arms must remain in the
stock location.
5.
Bump stops and bracketry are unrestricted.
Suspension Mounting Points
1. Cars equipped with a McPherson strut/Chapman strut
suspension can adjust camber and caster at the upper
strut mounting point. The upper strut mounting point must
remain on stock chassis structure. Slotted adjusting plates
at the upper mounting point are permitted. The slotted
plates must be located on the stock chassis structure.
Material can be removed or added to the top of the strut
tower to facilitate installation of the slotted adjuster plate,
provided it serves no other purpose.
2.
All forms of suspension can adjust camber and caster by
the use of shims.
3.
Rear independent suspension mounting holes can be
slotted within the limits of the stock structure for the sole
purpose of camber and/or toe adjustment.
4.
Suspension cross member/sub frame mounting bushing
material is unrestricted.
5.
Suspension pickup/pivot axis points can be reinforced but
must remain in the stock location.
GCR - 407
PCS-B
5.
Production Category Specifications
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
d.
Springs and Shock Absorbers
1. Any springs or torsion bars can be used, provided the quantity and type of these items remains as stock. Springs and
torsion bars must be installed in the stock location using
the stock system of attachment. The use of tender springs
is permitted, provided the tender springs are completely
compressed when the car is at static ride height. Static
ride height will be determined with the driver seated in the
normal driving position.
2.
Shock absorbers are unrestricted, provided the quantity and type (i.e. tube, lever) of these items remains as
fitted stock. Shock absorbers must be installed in the
stock location using the stock system of attachment. The
mounting of the remote reservoir of a remote reservoir
shock absorber is unrestricted. No shock absorber can be
capable of adjustment by the driver while the car is in
motion, unless fitted as stock.
3.
Macpherson/chapman struts must be installed in the stock
location using the stock system of attachment. Remote
reservoir strut dampeners are permitted. The mounting of
the remote reservoir of a remote reservoir Macpherson/
chapman strut is unrestricted. No Macpherson/chapman
strut can be capable of adjustment by the driver while the
car is in motion, unless fitted as stock.
4.
Macpherson/chapman strut:
A. Macpherson/chapman strut suspensions that are a
two piece spindle/bearing carrier and bolt on damper
design, can replace the bolt on damper portion of the
Macpherson/chapman strut with any replacement
damper.
B.
Macpherson/chapman strut suspensions that are a one
piece spindle/bearing carrier and strut tube design, can
modify the stock strut tube in order to fit a replacement damper, coil spring and perch. The spindle/
bearing carrier portion of the strut can be modified
in order to fit an alternate strut tube and any replacement damper. One piece design Macpherson/chapman
strut suspensions can gusset between the tube and
spindle/bearing carrier portion of the strut for the sole
purpose of strengthening the strut tube.
C. Macpherson/chapman strut suspensions that are a
one piece spindle/bearing carrier and strut tube design
that also incorporates an integral steering arm must
retain the stock steering arm in its stock location.
D. Macpherson/chapman struts that are a bearing
carrier, cannot modify or replace the bearing carrier
under the unrestricted bearing carrier rule in section
9.1.5.E.2.o.5.
5.
All types of suspensions can modify the brake caliper
mounting portion of the spindle/bearing carrier, if necessary to fit an approved alternate brake caliper.
6.
Shackles or spacers/lowering blocks can be used with leaf
GCR - 408
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
springs to adjust ride height.
6.
Spacers and threaded sleeves with adjustable spring seats
can be used with coil springs. Coil-over threaded body
shocks/struts are permitted if coil-over shocks/struts were
fitted as stock.
8.
Bump stops are unrestricted.
Steering
1. Steering system components can be reinforced by the
addition of material and/or the addition of support to the
stock component.
2.
Bushings locating or retaining any steering system components can be replaced by bushings of any material. The
alternate bushing can not relocate the component it
retains.
3.
The outer tie rod end can be replaced by a rod end. The
rod end can be coupled to the steering system by a rod
or threaded tube of unrestricted origin and material. The
tapered hole in the steering arm on the outboard side of
the tie rod (rod end) can be drilled or reamed to allow a
bolt to be used to retain the rod end to the steering arm.
The rod end can be moved up or down by the installation
of spacers for the sole purpose of reducing bump steer.
4.
The steering column is unrestricted. A collapsible type
steering column is strongly recommended. The driver’s
normal seated position must not be relocated.
5.
Cars equipped with power steering as standard equipment
can modify, substitute, disable and/or remove the power
pump, related hoses and mounting brackets.
Cooling System Level 1 and 2
a. Water radiators are unrestricted. The radiator must be installed
in approximately the same the location as stock. There can
be no modifications to the body, chassis, or internal structure
of the car to accommodate the radiator, other than mounting
brackets and attachment fasteners. A separate cooling system
expansion tank can be mounted in the engine compartment.
Coolant lines can run through the driver/passenger compartment.
b.
Coolant lines are unrestricted. Openings resulting from the
removal of a coolant line can be plugged, the plugs must serve
no other purpose. Internal cooling passages can be restricted
or plugged, the plugs must serve no other purpose.
c.
Radiator Fans are unrestricted. Electrically operated fans must
be mounted within four (4) inches of the radiator.
d.
Radiator Shroud
1. Radiator shrouds are unrestricted.
2.
Sealing the area between the radiator, its shroud, any
fan(s), and the stock grille opening is permitted. No alternate radiator shroud can extend behind the radiator further
GCR - 409
PCS-B
e.
7.
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
than the rear edge of the rearmost mounted fan. If no
cooling fan is fitted, the alternate shroud must end at the
rear most edge of the radiator.
7.
e.
Air cooled engine shrouding and fans are unrestricted.
f.
Thermostat and Thermostat housings are unrestricted. Thermostats can be replaced with a blanking sleeve or restrictor.
g.
Oil/Lubricant Coolers
1. Engine, transmission, and differential coolers are unrestricted. Coolers must be mounted completely within or
under the bodywork, but can not be mounted in the driver/
passenger compartment.
2.
Transmission and differential cooler pumps are unrestricted.
3.
Air ducts can be fitted to the cooler(s). No Ducting can
extend forward of the most forward part of the front of
the body or front air dam.
Brakes Level 1 and 2
a. Stock calipers must be retained. Cars fitted with integral hat
brake rotors can convert to a two piece design hat and brake
rotor. The alternate design hat must be made of ferrous or
aluminum material. Alternate discs can be used, but must be
made of ferrous material. Alternate drums can be used, but
must be made of a ferrous or aluminum material. Alternate
discs and drums must be the stock diameter, width and design.
Brake rotors can not be cross drilled or slotted unless fitted as
stock.
b.
Cars fitted with rear drum brakes, can convert to rear disc
brakes. When converting from rear drum brakes to rear disc
brakes:
1.
Rear brake rotors can be no larger in diameter than the
largest permitted front brake rotor. Rear brake rotors must
be solid and made of a ferrous material. Rear brake rotors
can not be cross drilled or slotted.
2.
Rear brake rotor hats can be made of a ferrous or aluminum
material.
3.
Rear calipers and mounting brackets are unrestricted but
must be made of a ferrous or aluminum material.
The standard and alternate brake listings on a vehicle’s specification line, does not prohibit a car that was fitted with rear
drum brakes as stock from converting to rear disc brakes under
this rule.
c.
Dual braking systems are required. Any dual brake master
cylinder(s) and pedal assembly can be fitted. Pressure equalizing and proportioning valve devices are unrestricted.
d.
Servo assists are unrestricted.
e.
Drum brake wheel cylinders are unrestricted.
GCR - 410
9.1.5.
f.
Brake pads and brake linings are unrestricted.
g.
Brake lines are unrestricted.
h.
The hand brake and its operating mechanism can be removed.
i.
Brake Ducting
1. Brake air ducts can be fitted.
The front brake duct inlet(s) must not extend to the side
beyond the centerlines of the front wheels, or forward of
the forward most part of the front of the body or front air
dam.
3.
Rear brake duct inlet(s) must face forward, they must be
located no more than 24” forward of the rear axle centerline and must not extend to the side beyond the centerlines of the rear wheels.
4.
Backing plates and dust shields are unrestricted.
Wheels and Tires Level 1 and 2
a. Wheels, wheel spacers and wheel fans are unrestricted
b.
9.
2.
Spare tires and wheels must be removed.
Body/Structure Level 1 and 2
a. Modifications
1. The body, unibody, frame and their components can be
lightened, provided that structural rigidity is not compromised to the point of requiring additional support. No nonstock openings can be created in the bodywork. The lightening of the cars structure can not create any openings
into the cockpit, or from the wheel well to the engine/trunk
compartments.
2.
The hood, hatchback, deck lid and fenders can be replaced
by components of an alternate material, provided their
appearance remains stock. Factory bolt-on fenders can be
replaced in their entirety. Cars with non-removable fenders
can replace the front fender panels going forward from the
foremost door opening and the rear fender panels going
rearward from the rearmost door opening. Closed cars
must not remove stock material above a horizontal line
placed at the lowest point of the driver’s door window
opening.
3.
The exterior contour of all fenders can be flared. The
fender when viewed from the top perpendicular to the
ground must cover the portion of the tire that contacts
the ground while the car is at rest. No replacement fender
or fender flare can alter the basic body configuration or
change the fender openings size, location and shape when
viewed from the side.
4.
One piece front body sections are permitted only on cars
manufactured in that stock configuration. One piece front
body sections must retain inner wheel wells if fitted as
stock. The inner wheel wells can be constructed of an
GCR - 411
PCS-B
8.
Production Category Specifications
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
alternate material.
5.
Wheel wells can be altered, using the stock type of material, in order to provide clearance for tires and wheels.
Wheel well alterations must not result in the creation of
any additional openings between the wheel well and the
engine, passenger and trunk compartments. Existing openings between the wheel well and these compartments can
be covered but can not be enlarged. Non metal wheel wells
can be removed. If the removal of the non metal wheel
well creates an opening to the engine, passenger or trunk
compartments the created openings must be covered.
6.
Misalignment or modification of the bodywork to create
ventilation where none existed stock, is prohibited.
All bodywork must be completely closed and securely
fastened while the car is in competition. The hood and
deck lid hinges can be removed. The hood and deck lid
must be securely fastened; the manner in which they are
secured is unrestricted. Door hinges must be retained in
their stock location. Door hinges must be functional but
can be lightened. Doors must be securely fastened closed,
provided they can be opened or removed quickly in an
emergency situation. Door handles can be removed and
any resultant holes must be covered. The cover must not
change the stock exterior contour of the door.
7.
Bumpers that are integrated into the front or rear bodywork, can be replaced by replica components of an alternate material. The energy absorbing bumper components
behind the front or rear bumper cover can be removed.
Bumpers which are not an integral part of the body can
be removed or replaced by components of an alternate
material, provided their appearance remains as stock. If a
bumper is removed, all mounting bracketry which projects
outside the body must also be removed. Bumper bracket
holes in the body created by removal of a bumper can be
covered provided the covering serves no other purpose.
8.
Glass - Windshield and Door
A. Open cars must remove the windshield glass, door
window glass, quarter window glass, rear glass, vent
glass, frames/channels and all mounting brackets.
Window winding mechanisms can be removed. A
replacement windshield must be installed. The replacement windshield must be fitted within the vertical
planes of the front most and rear most elements of
the stock windshield and frame. The replacement
windshield must not exceed the height or width of
the stock windshield and frame. Any portion of the
windshield that is in the driver’s line of sight, must be
constructed of a clear material. No part of the replacement windshield can be constructed of glass.
B.
Closed cars can retain or replace the stock glass
windshield. The replacement windshield must be
constructed of a polycarbonate material with a
minimum thickness of 6mm, and must be identical
in size and curvature to the stock glass windshield.
Replacement windshields must have a minimum of
GCR - 412
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
three inner supports to prevent the windshield from
collapsing inward. Inner windshield supports must be
a minimum of 0.75” by .125” straps of aluminum.
The inner supports must be mounted a minimum of
eight inches apart. Closed cars can replace the rear
window with clear polycarbonate material having a
minimum thickness of 3mm.
C. Closed cars can remove all door window, quarter
window and vent window glass. Window winding
mechanisms can be removed. Door window, vent
window and quarter window frames/channels can be
removed. Door window slots can be covered. Closed
cars can install clear polycarbonate material having a
minimum thickness of 3mm to replace the rear, door,
vent and quarter window glass. The windows in the
rear door of a 4 door car and quarter windows can be
run in their stock open or closed position. Ducts can
be installed in the door, vent and quarter windows or
resultant door window openings, for the sole purpose
of supplying cooling air to the driver.
E.
9.
All glass sunroof and T-top panels must be removed.
The resulting opening(s) must be covered with panels
of stock contour and of the same material as the stock
surrounding roof structure. Stock metal sunroof and Ttop panels may be either securely retained in the closed
position or replaced with panels of stock contour and
of the same material as the stock surrounding roof
structure.
Air Dams: An air dam can be fitted to the front of the
car. It must not protrude beyond the overall outline of the
car as viewed from above, or extend aft of the forward
most part of the front fender opening (cutout), and must
not be mounted more than four inches above the horizontal centerline of the front wheel hubs. An intermediate
mounting device can be used on cars whose front bodywork is above the four inch maximum. If the air dam covers
any portion of the stock grille, an opening must be created
in the air dam. The width of the opening must be equal
to or greater than the widest horizontal measurement of
the portion of the grille that would otherwise be covered.
The height of the opening must be equal to or greater
than the distance measured perpendicularly to the ground,
between the lowest and highest point of the portion of
the grille that would otherwise be covered. The opening in
the air dam must be symmetrically aligned in both planes
to the grille. Openings in the air dam are permitted for
the purpose of ducting air to the brakes, radiator, and/or
oil coolers. Openings can be cut in the front valance to
allow the passage of up to a three inch duct or a rectangular or square duct with a maximum area of seven square
inches leading to each front brake. These openings can
serve no other purpose. When bumpers are used or when
they are part of the bodywork, the air dam and bumper/
GCR - 413
PCS-B
D. Targa type top cars can be prepared to either closed
car or open car windshield and window specifications.
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
replica bumper must appear to be two (2) separate components. The air dam can have no support or reinforcement
extending aft of the forward most part of the front fender
opening (cutout).
10. Glass and/or plastic headlight, front parking and signal
light lenses and bulbs can be removed. All other lighting
components can be removed. The headlight bezels/rims
must remain in their stock locations. If the headlights are
removed, openings behind the headlight bezels/rims must
be covered with wire mesh screens or solid panels. These
covers must be of the same or flatter contour as the stock
headlight lenses.
A. Retractable or “pop up” headlight assemblies can be
run in their open, partially opened, closed position or
removed in their entirety. The openings created by
the removal of the assembly must be covered with
screens or panels. These covers must be the same
or flatter contour as the stock assembly in its closed
position, but need not retain any bezels/rims.
B.
The openings created by the removal of front lighting
components/assemblies, can be used to duct air to the
engine, radiator, oil cooler(s), and front brakes. Holes
for the ducting no larger than 7.25” in diameter can be
cut in interior panels provided the holes are completely
filled by the ducts.
C. Side marker light assemblies can be removed and the
openings covered with a solid panel.
D. Cars that have plastic or glass headlight covers fitted
as stock, must remove those covers and either replace
them with duplicates of an alternate material mounted
in the stock location or the covers can be removed to
allow the ducting of air.
E.
Taillights must be the stock type and mounted in the
stock location.
11. Open cars must remove convertible, removable tops and
all attaching bracketry and fasteners.
12. Windshield wiper system can be modified, substituted
or removed. Holes created in the body by the removal of
these components can be covered.
13. Radio antennas can be removed. Holes created in the body
by the removal of the antenna can be covered.
14. Heater plenums that do not serve as a major part of the
structure of the firewall can be removed or modified. Any
resulting holes must be covered with metal panels.
15. Non-metal floor pans can be replaced with metal floor pans
of a minimum .060” thickness. The metal floor pan must
have the same overall dimensions and be mounted in the
same location as the stock component.
GCR - 414
9.1.5.
Production Category Specifications
b.
The instrument panel/dashboard and all contents are unrestricted. Gauges/Instruments are unrestricted.
c.
Modifications can be made to the Driver/Passenger/Trunk
compartment to permit the installation of required safety equipment and to improve driver comfort and driver control of the
car. Covers for all equipment located in the driver/passenger
compartment forward of the rear most portion of the door
opening can not extend higher than six inches below the
highest point of the door. The installation of a dry sump tank
and cover that extends above six inches below the highest
point of the door is permitted but must be located completely
within 18” of the front firewall on front engine cars or within
18” of the rear bulkhead on rear engine cars and no higher than
the cowl.
d.
All interior trim, floor covering, upholstery panels and stock
seats can be removed.
11. Safety Level 1 and 2
a. Fuel cells are required on all Production Category cars, unless
the car uses a stock plastic (non-metal) fuel tank which
installed in its stock location, has the centerline of the fuel tank
located between the axle centerlines of the car and between
the frame rails. When the stock fuel tank is retained, it must
be installed in its stock location, additional retention straps and
other protection can be mandated on a car-by-car basis. Fuel
cell mounting, location and fuel cell or stock fuel tank filler cap
and vents, must meet the specifications of the GCR section
9.3.26.
12. General preparation Level 1 and 2
a. Fastener items can be replaced by similar items performing the
same fastening function(s).
b.
Any paint scheme or markings meeting GCR specifications are
permitted.
c.
Two way radios are permitted. A hole can be created in the
body to mount a radio antenna.
d.
Fluids and Lubricants are unrestricted.
GCR - 415
PCS-B
10. Driver/Passenger/Trunk Compartment Level 1 and 2
a. The driver’s seat must be replaced with a one-piece racing
seat. The driver’s seat must be installed so that a second seat
of the same dimensions could be simultaneously fitted to the
passenger’s side of the car (no center seating). All cars registered after July 1, 1985 must have the driver seated on the left
when the car is viewed from the rear.
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
Acura Integra
(86-89)
2
1950
* 1999
** 2048
4 Cyl
DOHC
75.0 x 90.0
(2.95x3.54)
1590
(97.0)
Alum
Alum
(I) 30.0/(1.18)
(E) 27.0/(1.06)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2451
(96.5)
1489/1504
(58.6/59.2)
Acura Integra
(90-93)
2
2050
* 2101
** 2153
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 89.0
(3.19x3.50)
1835
(112.0)
Alum
Alum
(I) 31.0/(1.22)
(E) 28.0/(1.10)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2550
(100.4)
1567/1567
(61.7/61.7)
Acura Integra
GSR
(94-00)
2
2090
* 2142
** 2195
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.1 x 87.2
(3.19x3.43)
1800
(109.8)
Alum
Alum
(I) 33.0/(1.30)
(E) 28.0/(1.10)
Fuel injection
2570
(101.2)
62.3 / 62.1
Acura Integra
Type-R
(97-00)
2
2165
* 2219
** 2273
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 87.2
1797
Alum
Alum
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
Fuel injection
101.2
62.3 / 62.1
Alfa Romeo
Alfetta GT
(75-79)
1
1950
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
(3.31x3.48)
1961
(119.6)
Alum
Alum
(I) 44.15/(1.74)
(E)40.15/(1.58)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 44mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2413
(95.0)
1445/1440
(56.9/56.7)
Alfa Romeo
GTV 2000
1
1950
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
(3.31x3.48)
1961
(119.6)
Alum
Alum
(I) 44.15/(1.74)
(E)40.15/(1.58)
(2) 40, 45, 48 DCOE, 40 DHLA, 48 DHLA.
44mm choke(s) req’d, or fuel injection.
2350
(92.5)
1415/1377
(55.7/54.2)
Alfa Romeo
GTV-6
(81-86)
2
2300
* 2358
** 2415
V-6
SOHC
88.0 x 68.3
(3.46x2.69)
2492
(152.0)
Alum
Alum
(I) 41.0/(1.61)
(E) 36.5/(1.44)
Fuel injection
2401
(94.5)
1466/1443
(57.7/56.8)
Alfa Romeo
all Spider models
(-1994)
1
2050
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
(3.31x3.48)
1961
(119.6)
Alum
Alum
(I) 44.15/(1.74)
(E)40.15/(1.58)
(2) 40, 45, 48 DCOE, 40 DHLA, 48 DHLA.
44mm choke(s) req’d, or fuel injection.
2250
(88.6)
1430/1377
(56.3/54.2)
Alfa Romeo
Spider Duetto &
1750 Spider
(thru 1971)
1
1870
4 Cyl
DOHC
78.0 x 82.0
(3.07x3.23)
80.0 x 88.4
(3.15x3.48)
1570
(96.0)
1779
(108.5)
Alum
Alum
(I) 41.1 / (1.62)
(E) 37.1/(1.46)
(2) Weber 40 DCOE 27, (2) Weber 40 DCOE
32, (2) Weber 45 DCOE w/ 42mm choke(s),
(2) Zenith 75 CDSE, or (3) 2” SU.
2250
(88.6)
1415/1359
(55.7/53.5)
Austin-Healey
3000 Mk. I, II, III
1
2340
6 Cyl
OHV
83.3 x 88.9
(3.28x3.50)
2912
(177.6)
Iron
Iron
(I) 44.5 / (1.75)
(E) 39.6/(1.56)
(2) 1.75” SU or Stromberg or (3) 1.75” or 2”
SU or Stromberg on stock 3-carb intake manifold
2329
(91.7)
1359/1384
(53.5/54.5)
BMW 2002 /
2002tii
1
2050
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 80.0
(3.50x3.15)
1990
(121.5)
Iron
Alum
(I) 46.0 / (1.81)
(E) 38.0/(1.50)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s), (2)
Auto-type sidedraft w/ 38mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
2499
(98.4)
1430/1430
(56.3/56.3)
BMW 318i &
320i
1
2050
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 80.0
(3.50x3.15)
1990
(121.5)
Iron
Alum
(I) 46.0 / (1.81)
(E) 38.0/(1.50)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s), (2)
Auto-type sidedraft w/ 38mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
2563
(100.9)
1481/1494
(58.3/58.8)
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Wheel- Track (F/R)
base
mm/(in.)
mm/(in.)
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 416
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
EP
EP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Notes:
Acura Integra
(86-89)
Acura Integra
(90-93)
Acura Integra
GSR
(94-00)
Acura Integra
Type-R
(97-00)
Alfa Romeo
Alfetta GT
(75-79)
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
(F) 242 / (9.53) Disc
(R) 239 / (9.41) Disc
(F) 242 / (9.53) Disc
(R) 239 / (9.41) Disc
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted
Comp ratio limited to 10.5:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
15 x 7
5
(F) 286 Vented Disc
(R) 260 Solid Disc
Comp ratio limited to 10.5:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
15 x 7
5
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 267 (10.5) Disc
Alfa Romeo
GTV 2000
Alfa Romeo
GTV-6
(81-86)
Alfa Romeo
all Spider models
(-1994)
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 267 (10.5) Disc
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
15 x 7
5
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 267 (10.5) Disc
Alfa Romeo
Spider Duetto &
1750 Spider
(thru 1971)
Austin-Healey
3000 Mk. I, II, III
BMW 2002/
2002tii
15 x 7
5
(F) 264 (10.4) Disc
(R) 246 (9.7) Disc
15 x 7
4
15 x 7
4
BMW 318i &
320i
15 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 286 (11.3) Disc
(R) 279 (11.0) Drum
(F) 256 (10.1) Disc
(R) 230 x 40 (9.1 x
1.6) Drum
(F) 254 (10.0) Disc
(R) 249 x 41 (9.8 x
1.6) Drum
(F) Alfa GTV-6 front calipers, Brembo aluminum
(R) Alfa Spider rear calipers,
ATE cast iron
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
Niki Lauda Edition rear spoiler
Rear Disc: #H82462
Laycock overdrive: .88, .82, .79, May use 5 speed gearbox w/o overdrive.
Niki Lauda Edition rear spoiler
(F) 256 x 22 Disc,
calipers: 34111101859,
34111101860
Trunk mounted fuel cell allowed, 1800cc engine from 318i allowed
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 267 (10.5) Disc
Front Discs:
#105802205232
Rear Discs:
#105802205333
(F & R) 264 (10.4) Disc
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 267 (10.5) Disc
9.1.5.
GCR - 417
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
BMW Z3 1.9L
2
2050
* 2101
** 2153
4 Cyl
DOHC
85.1 x 83.6
(3.35x3.29)
1895
(115.6)
Iron
Alum
(I) 33.0 /(1.30)
(E) 30.5/(1.20)
(2) Auto-type sidedrafts w/ 30mm choke(s), or
fuel injection.
BMW 325i/is
(E30)
(84-91)
(excl. conv.)
2
2300
* 2358
** 2415
6 Cyl
SOHC
84.1 x 75.0
(3.31x2.95)
2494
(152.1)
Iron
Alum
(I) 41.9 / (1.65)
(E) 36.1/(1.42)
BMW 318is
(1991)
2
2100
* 2153
** 2205
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.1 x 81.0
1796
Iron
Alum
BMW 318is E36
(92-95)
2
2150
* 2204
** 2258
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.1 x 81.0
1796
Iron
Chevrolet
Cavalier 2.0
(82-87)
1
2130
4 Cyl
OHV
89.0 x 80.0
(3.50x3.15)
1990
(121.5)
Chevrolet
Corvair Coupe
(65-69)
1
2290
6 Cyl
OHV
87.4 x 74.7
(3.44x2.94)
Dodge Neon
(95-99)
2
2000
* 2050
** 2100
4 Cyl
DOHC
Dodge Neon
(95-99)
2
2000
* 2050
** 2100
Dodge Omni GLH
2.2
1
Dodge Shelby
Charger / Omni
024
(83-84)
Elva Courier
Mk. I, II & III
1622 & 1798
Wheel- Track (F/R)
base
mm/(in.)
mm/(in.)
2446
(96.3)
1481/1565
(58.3/61.6)
Fuel injection
2565
(101.0)
1499/1506
(59.0/59.3)
(I) 33.0 / (1.30)
(E) 30.5/(1.20)
Fuel injection
2570
1499/1506
Alum
(I) 33.0
(E) 30.5
Fuel injection
2700
1513/1518
Iron
Alum
(I) 43.0 / (1.69)
(E) 37.0/(1.46)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2570
(101.2)
1407/1402
(55.4/55.2)
2689
(164.0)
Alum
Alum
(I) 43.7 / (1.72)
(E) 34.5/(1.36)
(4) 1 bbl 1.5” Rochester 7025023 or 7026026
on stock manifold, (2) 3 bbl carbs on I.R. manifold. 34mm choke(s) req’d. Holley 390 CFM
w/ center mount, I.R. manifold.
2743
(108.0)
1516/1572
(59.7/61.9)
87.5 x 83.0
1995
Iron
Alum
(I) 34.8
(E) 30.5
Fuel injection
104
61.5 / 61.5
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 83.0
1995
Iron
Alum
(I) 33.0
(E) 28.0
Fuel injection
104
61.5 / 61.5
2130
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
(3.44x3.62)
2213
(135.0)
Iron
Alum
(I) 40.6 / (1.60)
(E) 35.4/(1.39)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 34mm choke(s), (2)
Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
2517
(99.1)
1560/1549
(61.4/61.0)
1
2030
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
(3.44x3.62)
2213
(135.0)
Iron
Alum
(I) 40.6 / (1.60)
(E) 35.4/(1.39)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 30mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2451
(96.5)
1486/1473
(58.5/58.0)
1
1622cc:
1530
1798cc:
1630
4 Cyl
OHV
76.2 x 88.9
(3.00x3.50)
80.3 x 88.9
(3.16x3.50)
1622
(99.0)
1798
(109.7)
Iron
Iron
(I) 39.9 / (1.57)
(E) 34.3/(1.35)
(2) 1.75in SU or Stromberg
2286
(90.0)
1359/1387
(53.5/54.6)
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 418
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
EP
EP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
BMW Z3 1.9L
15 x 7
5
BMW 325i/is
(E30)
(84-91)
(excl. conv.)
BMW 318is
(1991)
BMW 318is E36
(92-95)
Chevrolet
Cavalier 2.0
(82-87)
Chevrolet
Corvair Coupe
(65-69)
15 x 7
5
(F) 286 (11.3) Disc
(R) 280 (11.0) Disc
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max.Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .400”. Trunk mounted fuel cell allowed.
15 x 7
5
5
13 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
(F) 286 Vented Disc
(R) 272 Solid Disc
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 200 x 45 Drum
Comp. Ratio limited to 11.0:1, Valve lift limited to .500”. Trunk mounted fuel cell allowed.
15 x 7
15 x 7
4
(F&R)241 (9.5)
Drum
Dodge Neon
(95-99)
Dodge Neon
(95-99)
Dodge Omni GLH
2.2
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
Dodge Shelby
Charger / Omni
024
(83-84)
Elva Courier
Mk. I, II & III
1622 & 1798
15 x 7
5
(F) 257 Vented Disc
(R) 257 Solid Disc
(F) 257 Vented Disc
(R) 257 Solid Disc
(F) 256 (10.1) Disc
(R) 200 x 33 (7.9 x
1.3) Drum
(F) 256 (10.1) Disc
(R) 200 x 33 Drum
14 x 6
(1622cc)
15 x 7
(Mk. III
1798cc)
4
Notes:
Comp. Ratio limited to 11.0:1, Valve lift limited to .500”. Trunk mounted fuel cell allowed.
(F&R) 270 x 26 Vented Disc Yenko Stinger rear quarter windows, rear decklid, and trunk flaps are permitted. Cylinder barrels
Calipers shall be ferrous or
of alternate material are permitted.
aluminum and shall be limited to (1) piston per side.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .500”.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .500”.
(F) 229 (9.0) Disc
(R) 254 (10.0) Drum
(w / MGA axle)
(F) 279 (11.0) Disc
(R) Mk.4T 229 (9.0)
ATB 7224 MGA axle housing assy., Only the Mk.III 1622cc is allowed to update to the 1798cc
engine including the 15” wheel. A Mk.III making this update may use the 13” wheels.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
(F) 229 (9.0) Drum
(R) 203 (8.0) Drum
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
9.1.5.
GCR - 419
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Elva Courier
Mk. III, IV 1800
& Mk, IV R & C
1
1622cc:
1530
1798cc:
1630
4 Cyl
OHV
80.3 x 88.9
(3.16x3.50)
1798
(109.7)
Iron
Iron
(I) 39.9 / (1.57)
(E) 34.3/(1.35)
(2) 1.75in SU or Stromberg
2286
(90.0)
1359/1387
(53.5/54.6)
Fiat 124 Sport
Spider 1600 &
124 Spider 2000
1
2070
4 Cyl
DOHC
80.0 x 80.0
(3.15x3.15)
84.1 x 89.9
(3.31x3.54)
1608
(98.1)
1995
(121.7)
Iron
Alum
(I) 41.7 / (1.64)
(E) 36.6/(1.44)
(2) Weber 40 IDF-40IFI, (2) Solex C40P116,
34mm choke(s) req’d, or fuel injection.
2281
(89.8)
1440/1407
(56.7/55.4)
Ford Escort 1.9
(85-87)
1
1870
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.0 x 88.0
(3.23x3.46)
1859
(113.4)
Iron
Alum
(I) 42.0 / (1.65)
(E) 37.0/(1.46)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2393
(94.2)
1455/1488
(57.3/58.6)
Ford Mustang
2.3
(79-93)
1
2300
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
Iron
Iron
(I) 44.1
(E) 38.1
2550
(100.4)
60.8 / 61.2
Ford Pinto
1
2190
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
(3.78x3.13)
2301
(140.4)
Iron
Iron
(I) 44.1 / (1.74)
(E) 38.1/(1.50)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s),
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32 mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold.
2388
(94.0)
1488/1509
(58.6/59.4)
Ford Probe
(93-97)
2
2000
* 2050
** 2100
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 92.0
1991
Iron
Alum
(I) 31.5
(E) 27.6
Fuel injection
2614
64.1 / 64.1
Honda Civic
Del Sol Si
(93-94)
2
2090
* 2142
** 2195
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
(2.95x3.54)
Alum
Alum
(I) 30.0 / (1.18)
(E) 26.0/(1.02)
Fuel injection
2370
(93.3)
1567/1557
(61.7/61.3)
Honda CRX Si
(88-91)
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
(2.95x3.54)
1590
(97.0)
Alum
Alum
(I) 29.0 / (1.14)
(E) 25.0/(0.98)
(1) 40 DCOE w/ 34mm choke(s), (2) Auto-type
sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on I.R. manifold,
or fuel injection.
2304
(90.7)
1560/1567
(61.4/61.7)
Honda Civic Si
(88-91)
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
(2.95x3.54)
1590
(97.0)
Alum
Alum
(I) 29.0 / (1.14)
(E) 25.0/(0.98)
(1) 40 DCOE w/ 34mm choke(s), (2) Auto-type
sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on I.R. manifold,
or fuel injection.
2500
(98.4)
1560/1567
(61.4/61.7)
Honda Civic Si
(99-00)
2
2090
* 2142
** 2195
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.4
(3.19x3.05)
1595
Alum
Alum
(I) 33.0 / (1.30)
(E) 28.0 /(1.10)
Fuel injection
2370
(93.3)
1567/1557
(61.7/61.3)
Honda Prelude Si
2
2320
* 2378
** 2436
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 95.0
(3.43x3.74)
2259
(137.8)
Alum
Alum
(I) 34.0 / (1.34)
(E) 29.0/(1.14)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2550
(100.4)
1615/1605
(63.6/63.2)
Honda Prelude Si
VTEC
(1993)
2
2730
* 2798
** 2867
4 Cyl
DOHC
87.0 x 90.0
2157
Alum
Alum
(I) 35.0 / (1.38)
(E) 30.0/(1.18)
Fuel injection
2550
(100.4)
1632/1622
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Carb. No. & Type
(1) Holley-Weber 5200 or fuel injection.
Wheel- Track (F/R)
base
mm/(in.)
mm/(in.)
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 420
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
EP
EP
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Elva Courier
Mk. III, IV 1800
& Mk, IV R & C
15 x 7
4
(F) 229 (9.0) Drum
(R) 203 (8.0) Drum
Fiat 124 Sport
Spider 1600 &
124 Spider 2000
Ford Escort 1.9
(85-87)
Ford Mustang
2.3
(79-93)
Ford Pinto
15 x 7
5
(F) 226 (8.9) Disc
(R) 226 (8.9) Disc
15 x 7
4 or 5
15 x 7
4 or 5
15 x 7
4 or 5
Ford Probe
(93-97)
Honda Civic
Del Sol Si
(93-94)
Honda CRX Si
(88-91)
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
Honda Civic Si
(88-91)
15 x 7
5
Honda Civic Si
(99-00)
Honda Prelude Si
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
Honda Prelude Si
VTEC
(1993)
15 x 7
5
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Notes:
(F) 229 (9.0) Disc
(R) 254 (10.0) Drum
(w/ MGA axle)
(F) 279 (11.0) Disc
(R) Mk.4T 229 (9.0)
(F & R) 254 (10.0) Disc
Alternate rotor: # 82346805
Mk.IV T R & C have IRS, Mk.III & IV 1800 have live axle. ATB 7224 MGA axle housing assy.,
Only the Mk.III 1622cc is allowed to update to the 1798cc engine including the 15” wheel. A
Mk.III making this update may use the 13” wheels.
(F) 235 (9.3) Disc
(R) 180 (7.1) Drum
(F) 256 Vented Disc
(R) 229 Drum
(F) 236 (9.3) Disc
(R) 229 x 36 (9.0x
1.4) Drum
(F) 258 Vented Disc
(R) 228 Drum
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
(F) 241 (9.5) Disc
(R) 239 (9.4) Disc
(R) 180 x 38
(7.1 x 1.5) Drum
(F) 241 (9.5) Disc
(R) 239 (9.4) Disc
(R) 180 x 38
(7.1 x 1.5) Drum
(F) 240 (9.4) Disc
(R) 239 (9.4) Disc
(F&R) 259 (10.2)
Disc
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
Intake manifold: #124A20079-3, Allow alternate PBS intake manifold.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .500”.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1 Valve lift limited to .500”.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.5:1, Valve lift limited to .500”.
Single 40 DCOE requires “dual Y” manifold w / no balance tubes or plenum.
Single 40 DCOE requires “dual Y” manifold w / no balance tubes or plenum.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1., Valve lift limited to .500”.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .300”.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
Trans.
Speeds
9.1.5.
GCR - 421
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Hyundai Tiburon
FX 2.0L
(97-98)
2
2090
* 2142
** 2195
4 Cyl
DOHC
82.0 x 93.5
(3.23x3.68)
1975
Alum
Alum
Jensen-Healey
and GT
1
2090
4 Cyl
DOHC
85.3 x 69.3
(3.75x2.73)
1973
(120.4)
Alum
Alum
See
Notes
1460
4 Cyl
DOHC
(Ford
ZETEC)
84.8 x 88.0
(3.34x3.46)
1989
(121.3)
Iron
Alum
Lotus Mk 46, 54,
65 Europa
1
1330
4 Cyl
OHV
75.9 x 81.0
(2.99x3.19)
77.0 x 84.1
(3.03x3.31)
1470
(89.7)
1565
(95.5)
Alum
Alum
Lotus Super
Seven Series
Four
1
1610
4 Cyl
OHV
81.0 x 77.7
(3.19x3.06)
1599
(97.5)
Iron
Iron
Mazda RX-2
2
2050
* 2101
** 2153
Rotary
12A
2292
(139.8)
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata 1.6L
(-1993)
1
2220
4 Cyl
DOHC
78.0 x 83.6
(3.07x3.29)
1597
(97.4)
Iron
Alum
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata 1.8L
(90-97)
1/2
See
Notes
Carb:
2220
F.I.:
2280
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
(3.27x3.35)
1840
(112.2)
Iron
Alum
Lotus /
Caterham 7
America
GCR - 422
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
Wheel- Track (F/R)
base
mm/(in.)
mm/(in.)
Fuel injection
2474
(97.4)
1466/1450
(57.7/57.1)
(2) Weber 45 DCOE on I.R. Manifold w/ 34mm
choke(s)
2337
(92.0)
1448/1422
(57.0/56.0)
IT fuel injection prep
2235
(88.0)
1336/1349
(52.6/53.1)
(I) 37.6 / (1.48)
(E) 31.2/(1.23)
(1) Solex 1 3/8” DIDSA2, (1) Weber 45 DCOE
w / “Dual-Y” manifold
2311
(91.0)
1440/1440
(56.7/56.7)
(I) 38.4 / (1.51)
(E) 31.8/(1.25)
(1) Weber 32 DFM, DFD w/ 28mm primary &
28mm secondary, (1) Weber DCNF w/ 28mm
choke(s).
2286
(90.0)
1331/1400
(52.4/55.1)
(1) Nikki 4 bbl carburetor w/ primary choke(s)
bored to match secondary choke(s) on a stock
manifold or (1) Auto-type 2 bbl w/ 38mm
choke(s) on a “dual-y” manifold”
2469
(97.2)
1372/1369
(54.0/53.9)
(I) 31.1 / (1.22)
(E) 26.3/(1.04)
(1) 40mm Auto-type sidedraft w/ 30mm
choke(s), (2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm
choke(s) on I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2266
(89.2)
1478/1491
(58.2/58.7)
(I) 33.1 / (1.30)
(E) 28.2/(1.11)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2266
(89.2)
1483/1509
(58.4/59.4)
(I) 35.6 / (1.40)
(E) 30.5/(1.22)
Production Category Specifications
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
EP
EP
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Hyundai Tiburon
FX 2.0L
(97-98)
Jensen-Healey
and GT
15 x 6
5
(F) 257 (10.1) Disc
(R) 203 (8.0) Drum
15 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 254 (10.0) Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
Lotus /
Caterham 7
America
13 x 6
5
Lotus Mk 46, 54,
65 Europa
13 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 229 (9.0) Disc
(R) 203 (8.0) Drum
Lotus Super
Seven Series
Four
Mazda RX-2
13 x 6
4
(F) 229 (9.0) Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
15 x 7
5
(F) 231 (9.1) Disc
(R) 201 (7.9) Drum
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata 1.6L
(-1993)
15 x 7
5
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata 1.8L
(90-97)
15 x 7
5
(F) 235 (9.3)
Vented Disc
(R) 231 (9.1)
Soli Disc
(F) 235 (9.3)
Vented Disc
(R) 231 (9.1)
Solid Disc
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Notes:
Comp Ratio limited to 10.5:1., Valve lift limited to .450”.
(F) 257 (10.1) Disc
Toyota rear differential w / 8” ring gear (4WD rear)
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
(F) 267 (10.5) Vented Disc
(R) 267 x 20 Disc from TR-8
(F&R) 229 (9.0)
Disc
Comp. Ratio limited. to 10.0:1. Level 2 suspension preparation. Stock intake manifold may be port
matched on port mating surface to a depth of no more than 1”. Manifold may not be otherwise altered.
Any camshaft may be used, valve lift limited to .380”. Valve lift measured at valve with zero lash or
clearance. Stock cam gears may be replaced. All engine parts not specified shall be prepared per IT
engine preparation rules. Stock transmission with helical gears req’d. Gear ratios: 3.36, 1.81, 1.26,
1.00, 0.82, Permitted Fuel: cars may use fuel meeting the requirements for IT cars per GCR Section
9.3.25. The rollcage may be modified or replaced. The rollcage must have a full-width, high front & rear
hoop, using the OEM cage mounting points. The side intrusion bars shall remain outside the passenger
compartment. The Caterham “clamshell” front fender is required. Front fenders shall be mounted in the
normal position as provided from the factory. Front fenders may be modified as described here. The
fender mounting flange shall be a minimum of 36” in length. At the rear of the fender, the lower edge
of the mounting flange shall extend no higher than 8-1/2” above the undertray of the vehicle. At its
maximum width, the fender shall be no narrower that 20-1/2” as measured along the upper curvature.
At a point 18” rearward from the front of the flange, the fender shall be no narrower than 7” along
the upper curvature and at 34” the fender shall be no less than 3” along the upper curvature. From
34” rearward, a radius may provide a transition between the outer and the rearmost fender edges. The
contours resulting from this modification shall be gradual and describe a smooth curve in plan view. No
further modifications are allowed.
(F) 244 (9.6) Disc
(R) 231 (9.1) Disc
from twin cam
(F) 244 (9.6) Disc
Renault R-16 (non-crossflow) cylinder head casting. Trunk mounted fuel cell is permitted. Any
available transaxle with the same number of forward gears mounted in standard position.
(F) 227 (8.9) Disc
(F) 250 Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
(R) 236 Disc
(R) 256 Disc
(F) 254 (10.0) Vented Disc
(R) 251 (9.9) Solid Disc
(F) 254 (10.0)
Vented Disc
(R) 251 (9.9)
Solid Disc
Headlights & associated hardware may be removed. NOTE: Rear edge of front fenders shall be
4.5” above body undertray. Floor pans: One (1) right, One (1) left, attached to bottom of frame
tubes. Area beneath transmission / driveshaft shall remain open.
Level 1 dry sump, intake manifold porting permitted.
“Dual Y” manifold required w / single DCOE carb., no plenum or balance tubes. 1994 Mazda
Miata (1840cc) differential housing is permitted. OEM hardtop allowed.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Drivetrain Level 2 preparation only. Listed
spec line weight does not change with alternate or stock transmission. Level 1, dry sump, connecting rods, intake manifold porting, crankshafts permitted. OEM hard top allowed.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
Trans.
Speeds
9.1.5.
GCR - 423
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata
(94-97)
2
2050
* 2101
** 2153
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
1840
Iron
Alum
(I) 33.1
(E) 28.2
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata
(99-02)
2
2100
* 2153
** 2205
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 85.0
(3.27x3.35)
1840
(112.2)
Iron
Alum
(I) 33.1 / (1.30)
(E) 28.2/(1.11)
Mazda
Protégé ES
(01-03)
2
2000
* 2050
** 2100
4 Cyl
DOHC
83.0 x 92.0
1991
Iron
Alum
(I) 31.5
(E) 27.6
Mazda RX-3 &
3SP
(72-78)
2
1975
* 2024
** 2074
Rotary
12A
Mazda RX-7
(12A / 13B)
(79-85)
2
12A:
2050
* 2101
** 2153
13B:
2190
* 2245
** 2300
Rotary
Mazda RX-7
(13B)
(86-91)
2
2350
* 2409
** 2468
MGB & MGB-GT
1
Mercedes-Benz
190E 2.3L
(8-valve)
(84-93)
Carb. No. & Type
Wheel- Track (F/R)
base
mm/(in.)
mm/(in.)
Fuel injection
2266
58.4 / 59.4
(1) 40mm Auto-type sidedraft w/ 30mm
choke(s), (2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 28mm
choke(s) on I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2266
(89.2)
1483/1509
(58.4/59.4)
Fuel injection
102.8
60.8 / 61.0
2292
(139.8)
(1) Nikki 4 bbl carburetor w/ primary choke(s)
bored to match secondary choke(s) on a stock
manifold or (1) Auto-type 2 bbl w/ 38mm
choke(s) on a “dual-y” manifold”
2311
(91.0)
1410/1410
(55.5/55.5)
12A
13B (84-85
6-port only)
2292
(139.8)
2616
(159.6)
12A: (1) Nikki 4 bbl carburetor w/ primary
choke(s) bored to match secondary choke(s)
on a stock manifold or (1) Auto-type 2 bbl w/
38mm choke(s) on a “dual-y” manifold”. 13B:
(1) Auto-type 2 bbl w/ 38mm choke(s) on a
“dual-y” manifold, or fuel injection.
2421
(95.3)
1524/1499
(60.0/59.0)
Rotary
13B
2616
(159.6)
(1) Auto-type 2 bbl w/ 42mm choke(s) on a
“dual-y” manifold, or fuel injection.
2431
(95.7)
1542/1532
(60.7/60.3)
1760
4 Cyl
OHV
80.3 x 88.9
(3.16x3.50)
1798
(109.7)
Iron
Iron
(I) 39.9 / (1.57)
(I) 41.4 / (1.63)
(E) 34.3/(1.35)
(2) 1.5” SU HS-4, (2) 2” SU or Stromberg, (2)
1.75” SU
2311
(91.0)
1346/1351
(53.0/53.2)
2
2190
* 2245
** 2300
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.5 x 80.3
(3.80x3.16)
2299
(140.2)
Iron
Alum
(I) 46.1 / (1.81)
(E) 39.1/(1.54)
Fuel injection
2665
(104.9)
1529/1510
(60.2/59.4)
Mercury Capri
2.3
(79-86)
1
2300
4 Cyl
SOHC
96.0 x 79.4
2301
Iron
Iron
(I) 44.1
(E) 38.1
(1) Holley-Weber 5200 or fuel injection.
2550
(100.4)
60.8 / 61.2
Nissan/Datsun
240-Z
2
2270
* 2327
** 2384
6 Cyl
SOHC
83.0 x 73.3
(3.27x2.89)
2380
(145.2)
Iron
Alum
(I) 42.0 / (1.65)
(E) 33.0/(1.30)
2304
(90.7)
1445/1438
(56.9/56.6)
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
(2) Hitachi-SU (1bbl) 46mm throttle bores
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 424
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
EP
EP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Mazda
MX-5 / Miata
(94-97)
Mazda MX-5 /
Miata
(99-02)
15 x 7
5
(F) 235 Vented Disc
(R) 231 Solid Disc
15 x 7
5
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted. OEM hardtop allowed.
Variable valve timing prohibited.
Mazda
Protégé ES
(01-03)
Mazda RX-3 &
3SP
(72-78)
15 x 7
5
(F) 235 (9.3)
(F) 254 (10.0) Vented Disc
Vented Disc
(R) 251 (9.9) Solid Disc
(R) 231 (9.1)
Solid Disc
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
15 x 7
5
(F) 231 (9.1) Disc
(R) 201 (7.9) Drum
Level 1 dry sump, intake manifold porting permitted.Alternate multi-piece hub and rotor allowed
provided they are of the same dimensions as original and weigh a minimum of 10.2 lbs.
Mazda RX-7
(12A / 13B)
(79-85)
Mazda RX-7
(13B)
(86-91)
MGB & MGB-GT
15 x 7
5
(F) 227 (8.9) Disc
(R) 200 (7.9) Drum
15 x 7
5
(F) 250 (9.8) Disc
(R) 256 (10.1) Disc
15 x 7
4
(F) 273 (10.8) Disc
(R) 254 (10.0) Drum
Mercedes-Benz
190E 2.3L
(8-valve)
(84-93)
Mercury Capri
2.3
(79-86)
Nissan/Datsun
240-Z
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
15 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 256 Vented Disc
(R) 229 Drum
15 x 7
4
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
(F) 254 Vented Disc
(R) 251 Solid Disc
Notes:
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted. OEM hardtop allowed.
Level 1 dry sump, intake manifold porting permitted. Alternate multi-piece hub and rotor allowed
provided they are of the same dimensions as original and weigh a minimum of 10.2 lbs. Limited
Prep Transmission.
Level 1 dry sump, intake manifold porting permitted. OEM or aftermarket rear spoiler not permitted.
17th 8152 (0.75”) wheel cylinders, Alternate intake manifold for 2” SU: #12 H2838, Laycock
overdrive, May use 5 speed gearbox w/o overdrive. Alt. Manifold: Any individual runner manifold with runner length of 3.0-4.0” measured flange to flange.
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .500”.
(F) 252 (9.92) Vented Disc
(R) 258 or 269 Solid Disc
Discs and calipers from
280-ZX.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve Lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
(F) 227 (8.9) Disc
Discs and calipers from 7985 12A RX-7
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
(F) 250 (9.8) Disc
Discs and calipers from ‘84’85 RX-7 GSL-SE
(F) 250 (9.8) Disc
(R) 236 (9.3) Disc
(R) 256 (10.1) Disc
(F) 277 (10.9) Disc
(R) 272 (10.7) Disc
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .500”.
9.1.5.
GCR - 425
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Nissan/Datsun
260-Z
2
2390
* 2450
** 2510
6 Cyl
SOHC
83.0 x 79.0
(3.27x3.11)
2565
(156.5)
Iron
Alum
(I) 42.0 / (1.65)
(E) 35.0/(1.38)
(2) Hitachi-SU (1bbl) 46mm throttle bores
2304
(90.7)
1445/1438
(56.9/56.6)
Nissan/Datsun
SRL 311U
Roadster
1
2000
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.1 x 83.1
(3.43x3.27)
1982
(120.9)
Iron
Alum
(I) 46.0 / (1.81)
(E) 36.1/(1.42)
(2) Mikuni PHH 44mm. 38mm choke(s) req’d,
(2) Hitachi-SU (1bbl) 46mm throttle bores.
2281
(89.8)
1364/1288
(53.7/50.7)
(w / 6”)
1389/1313
(54.7/51.7)
(w / 7”)
Nissan 200-SX
/ S10
(77-79)
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
85.1 x 86.1
(3.35x3.39)
1952
(119.1)
Iron
Alum
(I) 42.1 / (1.66)
(E) 35.2/(1.39)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s),
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 30mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold.
2337
(92.0)
1453/1405
(57.2/55.3)
Nissan 200-SX
SE-R
2
2170
* 2224
** 2279
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
(3.39x3.39)
1998
(121.9)
Iron
Alum
(I) 34.2 / (1.35)
(E) 30.2/(1.19)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2431
(95.7)
1537/1516
(60.5/59.7)
Nissan 240-SX
/ S13
2
2420
* 2481
** 2541
4 Cyl
SOHC
(3 valve)
89.0 x 96.0
(3.50x3.78)
2389
(145.7)
Iron
Alum
(I) 34.0 / (1.34)
(E) 40.0/(1.57)
(2) Auto-type w/ 30mm choke(s), or fuel injection.
2474
(97.4)
1524/1524
(60.0/60.0)
Nissan 240-SX
S13/S14
(91-98)
2
2600
* 2665
** 2730
4 Cyl
DOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
Iron
Alum
(I) 38.1
(E) 31.8
S13: 97.4
S14: 99.4
1587/1577
Nissan NX-2000
2
2170
* 2224
** 2279
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
(3.39x3.39)
1998
(121.9)
Iron
Alum
(I) 34.2 / (1.35)
(E) 30.2/(1.19)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2431
(95.7)
1524/1501
(60.0/59.1)
Nissan Sentra
SE-R
(90-94)
2
2170
* 2224
** 2279
4 Cyl
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
(3.39x3.39)
1998
(121.9)
Iron
Alum
(I) 34.2 / (1.35)
(E) 30.2/(1.19)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2431
(95.7)
1524/1501
(60.0/59.1)
Nissan/Datsun
HL510
(78-81)
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
85.1 x 86.1
(3.35x3.39)
1952
(119.1)
Iron
Alum
(I) 42.1 / (1.66)
(E) 35.2/(1.39)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s),
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 30mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold.
2388
(94.0)
1478/1448
(58.2/57.0)
Porsche 911
2.2L
1
2050
Oppos’d
6 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 66.0
(3.31x2.60)
2195
(133.9)
Alloy
Alloy
(I) 46.1 / (1.81)
(E) 40.1/(1.58)
(2) IDA-3C carburetors. 34mm choke(s) max.
2271
(89.4)
58.2 / 57.4
Porsche 914-4
1
1870
4 Cyl
OHV
94.0 x 70.9
(3.70x2.79)
1968
(120.1)
Alum
Alum
(I) 41.9 / (1.65)
(E) 36.1/(1.42)
(2) Solex 40 PII-4, (2) weber 40 IDF, (2)
Del’Orto 40mm, 38mm choke(s) max, or fuel
injection.
2451
(96.5)
1435/1478
(56.5/58.2)
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Carb. No. & Type
Fuel injection
Wheel- Track (F/R)
base
mm/(in.)
mm/(in.)
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 426
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
EP
EP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Nissan/Datsun
260-Z
15 x 7
4
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
Nissan/Datsun
SRL 311U
Roadster
15 x 7
5
(F) 285 (11.2) Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
Nissan 200-SX
/ S10
(77-79)
Nissan 200-SX
SE-R
Nissan 240-SX
/ S13
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
(F) 244 (9.6) Disc
(R) 229 x 40
(9.0 x 1.6) Drum
(F) 249 (9.8) Disc
(R) 234 (9.2) Disc
(F) 252 (9.9) Disc
(R) 258 (10.2) Disc
Nissan 240-SX
S13/S14
(91-98)
Nissan NX-2000
15 x 7
5
(F) 257 Vented Disc
(R) 258 Solid Disc
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
15 x 7
5
Nissan Sentra
SE-R
(90-94)
Nissan/Datsun
HL510
(78-81)
Porsche 911
2.2L
Porsche 914-4
15 x 7
5
(F) 249 (9.8) Disc
(R) 234 (9.2) Disc
(F) 249 (9.8) Disc
(R) 234 (9.2) Disc
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. RLevel 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
4 or 5
15 x 7
5
(F) 252 (9.92) Vented Disc
(R) 258 or 269 Solid Disc
Discs and calipers from
280-ZX.
(F) 279 x 26 Vented Disc
Front calipers from: 240,
260, or 280Z (1970-78)
w/spacers Rotor origin is
unrestricted
(F) Stock 257 x 22 (10.1 x
.87) ABS discs w/ 4-lug hub
& ABS front calipers.
(F) 251 (9.9) Vented Discs
Discs and calipers from
280-ZX.
(F&R) 300 (11.8) Disc
Front “M” calipers permitted, 914-6 calipers & discs
allowed
Notes:
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve Lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Comp Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Cylinder barrels of alternate material are permitted.
Standard intake manifold: Porsche part #021 129 705N. Alternate manifolds with the same
length and configuration (4-5¼” center line axis) are allowed. (i.e. Pierce manifold part #
99004.822. Top panel may remain in place if securley bolted or pinned. Cylinder barrels of
alternate material are permitted.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
(F) 244 (9.6) Disc
(R) 229 x 40
(9.0 x 1.6) Drum
(F) 282 (11.1) Disc
(R) 290 (11.4) Disc
(F) 282 (11.1) Disc
(R) 285 (11.2) Disc
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
9.1.5.
GCR - 427
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
Porsche 914-6
2.0L
1
1950
Oppos’d
6 Cyl
SOHC
80.0 x 66.0
(3.15x2.60)
1991
(121.5)
Alloy
Alloy
(I) 41.9 / (1.65)
(E) 38.1/(1.50)
(2) IDA-3C carburetors. 38mm choke(s) max.
2451
(96.5)
1452/1499
(57.2/59.0)
Porsche 924
1
2140
4 Cyl
OHC
86.5 x 84.4
(3.41x3.32)
1984
(121.0)
Iron
Alum
(I) 40.0 / (1.57)
(E) 33.0/(1.30)
(2) Auto-type w/ 30mm choke(s)
2400
(94.5)
1420/1392
(55.9/54.8)
Porsche 944/
924S 2.5L (2V)
(83-88)
2
2340
* 2399
** 2457
4 Cyl
SOHC
100.0x78.9
(3.94x3.11)
2479
(151.2)
Iron
Alum
(I) 45.0 / (1.77)
(E) 40.0/(1.57)
Fuel injection
2400
(94.5)
1568/1542
(61.7/60.7)
Porsche 944S
(87-88)
2
2800
* 2870
** 2940
4 Cyl
DOHC
100.0x78.9
2479
Iron
Alum
(I) 37.0
(E) 33.0
Fuel injection
2400
1568/1542
Toyota Celica II
2.4L
(81-82)
(excl. conv.)
2
2140
* 2194
** 2247
4 Cyl
SOHC
92.0 x 89.0
(3.62x3.50)
2366
(144.3)
Iron
Alum
(I) 45.0 / (1.77)
(E) 37.0/(1.46)
Carburetion
2500
(98.4)
1486/1456
(58.5/57.3)
Toyota Celica
2.4L
(83-85)
(excl. conv.)
2
2140
* 2194
** 2247
4 Cyl
SOHC
92.0 x 89.0
(3.62x3.50)
2366
(144.3)
Iron
Alum
(I) 45.0 / (1.77)
(E) 37.0/(1.46)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 36mm choke(s), or
fuel injection.
2500
(98.4)
1486/1456
(58.5/57.3)
Toyota Corolla
GTS (4AG)
(84-89)
1
2060
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
(3.19x3.03)
1587
(96.8)
Iron
Alum
(I) 30.7 / (1.21)
(E) 26.0/(1.02)
(1) DCOE w/ 36mm choke(s), (2) Auto-type
sidedraft w/ 36mm choke(s) on I.R. manifold,
or fuel injection.
2413
(95.0)
1524/1524
(60.0/60.0)
Toyota MR-2
1
2060
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
(3.19x3.03)
1587
(96.8)
Iron
Alum
(I) 30.7 / (1.21)
(E) 26.0/(1.02)
(1) DCOE w/ 36mm choke(s), (2) Auto-type
sidedraft w/ 36mm choke(s) on I.R. manifold,
or fuel injection.
2319
(91.3)
1532/1532
(60.3/60.3)
Triumph GT6
1
1830
6 Cyl
OHV
74.7 x 76.0
(2.94x2.99)
1998
(121.9)
Iron
Iron
(I) 36.6 / (1.44)
(E) 32.0/(1.26)
(2) 1.5” SU or Stromberg
2108
(83.0)
1387/1387
(54.6/54.6)
Triumph TR4A,
IRS
1
1870
4 Cyl
OHV
86.1 x 92.0
(3.39x3.62)
2138
(130.4)
Iron
Iron
(I) 39.6 / (1.56)
(E) 33.0/(1.30)
(2) 1.75” SU or Stromberg, (2) 2” SU
2235
(88.0)
1346/1334
(53.0/52.5)
1387/1361
(54.6/53.6)
Triumph TR250,
TR6
1
2190
6 Cyl
OHV
74.7 x 95.0
(2.94x3.74)
2498
(152.4)
Iron
Iron
(I) 36.6 / (1.44)
(I) 36.8 / (1.45)
(E) 32.0/(1.26)
(3) Weber 40 DCOE on I.R. manifold. 28mm
choke(s) req’d.
2235
(88.0)
1367/1354
(53.8/53.3)
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Wheel- Track (F/R)
base
mm/(in.)
mm/(in.)
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 428
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
EP
EP
Porsche 914-6
2.0L
Porsche 924
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
Porsche 944/
924S 2.5L (2V)
(83-88)
Porsche 944S
(87-88)
Toyota Celica II
2.4L
(81-82)
(excl. conv.)
Toyota Celica
2.4L
(83-85)
(excl. conv.)
Toyota Corolla
GTS (4AG)
(84-89)
Toyota MR-2
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
5
14 x 7
5
15 x 7
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Notes:
(F) 282 (11.1) Disc
(F&R) 300 (11.8) Disc
(R) 287 (11.3) Disc
(F) 257 (10.1) Disc
(F) 282 (11.1) Disc
(R) 231 (9.1) Drum
(R) 290 (11.4) Disc
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
Cylinder barrels of alternate material are permitted.
(F) 282 Vented Disc
(R) 289 Vented Disc
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
Comp. Ratio limited to 11.5:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
5
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1, Valve lift limited to .500”.
15 x 7
5
(F & R) 231 (9.1)
Disc
Dual Y manifold required w / single DCOE carb., no plenum or balance tubes
15 x 7
5
(F) 244 (9.6) Disc
(R) 239 (9.4) Disc
Triumph GT6
13 x 7
4
Triumph TR4A,
IRS
15 x 7
4
(F) 246 (9.7) Disc
(R) 203 (8.0) Drum
(F) 279 (11.0) Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
Triumph TR250,
TR6
15 x 7
4
(F) 273 (10.8) Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.7:1, Valve lift limited to .475”. Dry sump is allowed.
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
(F) 257 (10.1) Disc
(R) 262 ( 10.3) Disc
(F) Calipers & discs from
TR-6 (std. or alt)
(R) 254 (10.0) Drum
Drum may be 9” or 10” and
of alfin or steel.
(F) 284 (11.2) Vented Disc
(R) 224 (8.8) Drum
(R) 229 Alfin Drum
(R) 273 (10.8) Disc
Disc: # C32764 Caliper: #
60-12796 LH # 60-12797
RH
Trunk mounted fuel cell allowed. “Dual Y” manifold required w / single DCOE carb., no plenum
or balance tubes. Panel between trunk and engine compartment may be modified for the purposes of ducting air to the carbs.
(2) 1.75” carburetors @ 1970 lbs. Laycock overdrive, May use 5 speed gearbox w/o overdrive.
Three (3) Weber 40mm DCOE w/28mm venturi on individual runner manifold @ 2020 lb.
Laycock overdrive, May use 5 speed gearbox w/o overdrive
Laycock overdrive, May use 5 speed gearbox w/o overdrive
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
Trans.
Speeds
9.1.5.
GCR - 429
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Triumph TR7
1
2050
4 Cyl
SOHC
90.3 x 78.0
(3.56x3.07)
1998
(121.9)
Iron
Alum
(I) 39.6 / (1.56)
(E) 32.5/(1.28)
(2) Weber 45 DCOE. 32mm choke(s) req’d.
2159
(85.0)
1532/1499
(60.3/59.0)
Volkswagen Golf
GTI
(87-89)
2
2050
* 2101
** 2153
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 86.4
(3.19x3.40)
1780
(108.6)
Iron
Alum
(I) 32.0 / (1.26)
(E) 28.0/(1.10)
Fuel injection
2472
(97.3)
1522/1519
(59.9/59.8)
Volvo 142 /
142E
1
2050
4 Cyl
OHV
88.9 x 80.0
(3.50x3.15)
1986
(121.1)
Iron
Iron
(I) 44.0 / (1.73)
(E) 35.0/(1.38)
(2) Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
2616
(103.0)
1415/1415
(55.7/55.7)
Volvo P-1800,
1800S, 1800E,
1800ES Sports
Coupe
1
2050
4 Cyl
OHV
84.2 x 80.0
(3.31x3.15)
88.9 x 80.0
(3.50x3.15)
1780
(108.6)
1982
(120.9)
Iron
Iron
1780:
(I) 41.9 / (1.65)
(E) 35.0/(1.38)
1982:
(I) 43.9 / (1.73)
(E) 39.9/(1.57)
(2) 1.75” SU, (2) 1.75” Stromberg CDSE, (2)
1.75” SU HS6, (2) 2.0” SU, or fuel injection.
2451
(96.5)
1407/1407
(55.4/55.4)
GCR - 430
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Carb. No. & Type
Wheel- Track (F/R)
base
mm/(in.)
mm/(in.)
Production Category Specifications
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
EP
EP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Triumph TR7
15 x 7
4 or 5
Volkswagen Golf
GTI
(87-89)
Volvo 142 /
142E
Volvo P-1800,
1800S, 1800E,
1800ES Sports
Coupe
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all 4
wheels.
15 x 7
5
15 x 7
4
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 295 (11.6) Disc
(F) 279 (11.0) Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
(F) 248 (9.8) Disc
(R) 203 (8.0) Drum
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
(F) 267 (10.5) Vented Disc
(R) 229 (9.0) Drum
(R) 267 x 20 (10.5 x .78)
Disc
Discs from TR-8 and alt.
JRT brake kit is # STN
0068.
Notes:
Rear Spoiler: # V-775, Alt. Manifold: # V-740
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .330”.
Bosch Fuel Injection
(F) 272 (10.7) Disc
(R) 295 (11.6) Disc
Bosch Fuel Injection
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 431
9.1.5.
Wheels
(max)
PCS-B
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Acura Integra
1600
(86-89)
2
1940
* 1989
** 2037
4 Cyl
DOHC
75.0 x 90.0
(2.95x3.54)
1590
Alum
Alum
(I) 30.0/(1.18)
(E) 27.0/(1.06)
Acura Integra LS
(95-01)
2
2235
* 2291
** 2347
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 89.0
1835
Alum
Alum
Alfa Romeo
Alfetta GT &
Alfetta Sedan
(75-79)
2
GT:
2365
* 2424
** 2483
Sedan:
2465
* 2527
** 2588
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1961
Alum
Alfa Romeo
Giulia Spider
Veloce
1
1850
4 Cyl
DOHC
75.2x79.14
(3.07x3.23)
1570
(25.12)
Alfa Romeo
Giulia Sprint/
Spider
1
1918
4 Cyl
DOHC
75.2x79.14
(3.07x3.23)
Alfa Romeo
GTV 1750
Spider 1750 /
Berlina 1750
(67-72)
2
GTV /
Berlina:
1865
* 1912
** 1958
Spider:
1950
* 1999
** 2048
4 Cyl
DOHC
Alfa Romeo
GTV & Berlina
(72-74)
2
2165
* 2219
** 2273
4 Cyl
DOHC
Wheelbase
mm/(in.)
Track
(F/R)
mm/(in.)
Fuel injection
2251
(88.6)
1489/1504
(58.6/59.2)
(I) 31.0
(E) 28.0
Fuel injection
2570
62.3 / 62.1
Alum
(I) 44.15
(E) 40.15
Fuel injection, 34mm restrictor required between air filter and butterfly.
GT: 95.0
Sedan:
98.8
56.9 / 56.7
Alum
Alum
(I) 39.69 (1.62)
(E) 35.77(1.46)
(2) 40 DCOE or (2) auto-type sidedraft on IR
manifold.
2170.7 or
2121.7
(88.6 or
86.6)
1335.3/
1310.8
(54.5/53.5)
1570
(25.12)
Alum
Alum
(I) 39.69(1.62)
(E) 35.77(1.46)
(1) Solex 32 PAIA, (1) 36 DCD Weber
Spider:
2170.7
/2121.7
(88.6 /
86.6)
Sprint:
2295.7
(93.7)
1352.4/
1310.8
(55.2/53.5)
80.0 x 88.4
1779
Alum
Alum
(I) 41.1
(E) 37.1
Fuel injection, 34mm restrictor required be- GTV: 92.5
tween air filter and butterfly.
Spider:
88.6
Berlina:
101.8
GTV:
55.7 / 54.2
Spider:
56.3 / 54.2
Berlina:
52.1 / 50.2
84.0 x 88.5
1961
Alum
Alum
(I) 44.15
(E) 40.15
Fuel injection, 34mm restrictor required be- GTV: 92.5
tween air filter and butterfly.
Berlina:
101.8
GTV:
55.7 / 54.2
Berlina:
52.1 / 50.2
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Carb. No. & Type
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 432
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
FP
FP
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Notes:
Acura Integra
1600
(86-89)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1 Valve lift limited to .390”.
Acura Integra LS
(95-01)
15 x 7
5
(F) 262 Vented Disc
(R) 239 Solid Disc
Comp. Ratio limited to 11.0:1 Valve lift limited to .450”.
Alfa Romeo
Alfetta GT &
Alfetta Sedan
(75-79)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1 Valve lift limited to .450”.
Alfa Romeo
Giulia Spider
Veloce
15 x 6
5
(F) 10.6 Disc
(R) 10.5 Drum
Alfa Romeo
Giulia Sprint /
Spider
15 x 6
5
(F) 10.6 Disc
(R) 10.5 Drum
Alfa Romeo
GTV 1750 /
Spider 1750 /
Berlina 1750
(67-72)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1 Valve lift limited to .450”.
Alfa Romeo
GTV & Berlina
(72-74)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1 Valve lift limited to .450”.
(F) 10.5 Drum
(3 shoe)
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
Trans.
Speeds
9.1.5.
GCR - 433
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
Wheelbase
mm/(in.)
Track
(F/R)
mm/(in.)
Alfa Romeo
Spider
(72-86)
2
2265
* 2322
** 2378
4 Cyl
DOHC
84.0 x 88.5
1961
Alum
Alum
(I) 44.15
(E) 40.15
Fuel injection, 34mm restrictor required between air filter and butterfly. (72-80) w/ Spica,
(81-86) w/ Bosch
88.6
56.3 / 54.2
Austin-Healey
Sprite Mk. II,
III, IV
MG Midget Mk I,
II, III, IV & 1500
1
1275 @
1680
1500 @
1660
4 Cyl
OHV
68.11x78.4
(2.78x3.20)
71.05x84.3
(2.90x3.44)
1275
(77.78)
1491
(90.95)
Iron
Iron
1275cc:
(I) 32.1(1.31)
(E) 28.42(1.16)
1500cc:
(I) 35.28(1.44)
(E) 28.67(1.17)
(2) 1.25” SU, (2) 1.5” SU CD4 (1275 only),
(1) 1.5” Zenith, (1) 1.5” Stromberg SD, (1)
1.5” SU, maximum spacer block (isolator)
length 1.25”.
1960
(80.0)
1229.9/
1193.2
(50.2/48.7)
BMW 320i (E21)
(77-79)
2
2110
* 2163
** 2216
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 80.0
1990
Iron
Alum
(I) 46.0(1.88)
(E) 38.0(1.55)
(1) 40 DCNF w/ 32mm chokes, fuel injection.
100.9
1481/1494
(58.3/58.8)
BMW 320i (E21)
(80-83)
2
2060
* 2112
** 2163
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 71.0
1767
Iron
Alum
(I) 44.0
(E) 38.0
(1) 40 DCNF w/ 32mm chokes, or fuel injection
100.9
1481/1494
(58.3/58.8)
BMW 318i (E30)
(84-85)
2
2060
* 2112
** 2163
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 71.0
1767
Iron
Alum
(I) 44.0
(E) 38.0
(1) 40 DCNF w/ 32mm chokes, or fuel injection.
101.2
59.0 / 59.3
BMW 1600
1
1990
4 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 71.0
1537
Iron
Alum
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s), (2)
40 DCOE side draft w/ 36mm choke(s).
98.4
57.3 / 57.3
BMW 2002/tii
2
2075
* 2127
** 2179
4 Cyl
SOHC
89.0 x 80.0
1990
(121.39)
Iron
Alum
(I) 46.0(1.88)
(E) 38.0(1.55)
Fuel injection, or (1) 40 DCNF w/ 32mm
choke(s).
2410.8
(98.4)
1379.4/
1379.4
(56.3/56.3)
Chevrolet
Chevette 1.6
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.0 x 75.7
1598
Iron
Iron
(I) 39.1
(E) 32.1
(2) auto type side draft w/ 36mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold.
94.3
55.75 /
55.75
Dodge Shelby
Charger / Omni
024
(83-84)
2
2250
* 2306
** 2363
4 Cyl
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
Iron
Alum
(I) 40.6
(E) 35.4
Carburetion of Fuel injection
96.5
61.4 / 61.0
Fiat 124 Sport
Spider
(-1977)
1
1875
4 Cyl
DOHC
3.15 x 3.15
3.15 x 3.12
3.31 x 3.12
1608
1592
1756
Iron
Alum
(I) 1.64
(E) 1.43
(1)
34
34
(1)
95.3/89.8
56.7 / 55.4
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
34 DFH1, 26/34 DHSA1, 28/36 DHSA2,
DMSA1/100, (1) 32 ADFA2/100 ATL, (1)
DMS201, 36 DCNF w/ 30mm choke(s)),
40 DCNF w/ 30mm choke(s).
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 434
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
FP
FP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Notes:
Alfa Romeo
Spider
(72-86)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Austin-Healey
Sprite Mk. II,
III, IV
MG Midget Mk I,
II, III, IV & 1500
13 x 6
4
(F) 203.4 (8.3) Disc
(R) 171.5 (7.0)
Drum
BMW 320i (E21)
(77-79)
15 x 7
4
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 250 Drum
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .450”. Trunk mounted fuel cell allowed.
BMW 320i (E21)
(80-83)
15 x 7
5
(F) 254 Disc
(R) 250 Drum
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .450”. Trunk mounted fuel cell allowed.
BMW 318i (E30)
(84-85)
15 x 7
5
(F) 261 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .450”. Trunk mounted fuel cell allowed.
BMW 1600
15 x 7
4
(F) 10.1 Disc
(R) 9.1 x 1.6 Drum
Factory 2bbl intake manifold from EP BMW 2002 is permitted.
BMW 2002/tii
15 x 7
4
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .450”. Orientation of the alternate carburetor is unrestricted. The alternate carb adapter may not be thicker than 1.25”. The adapter may
have a bore larger than the throttle bore of the approved alternate carburetor.
Chevrolet
Chevette 1.6
15 x 7
4 or 5
Dodge Shelby
Charger / Omni
024
(83-84)
15 x 7
5
(F) 256 Vented Disc
(R) 200 Drum
Fiat 124 Sport
Spider
(-1977)
13 x 7
5
(F) 8.97 Disc
(R) 8.94 Disc
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1 Valve lift limited to .450”.
(F) 231.6 (9.12) Disc
Alternate intake manifold for 1275 (#NPN 500), 9.125 Disc (#208715), Calipers (#27H-4651),
Battery tray may be removed, Parts may not be interchanged between engine units.
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.5:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
(F&R) 10.0 Disc
Alternate rotor (#82346805). Allow (2) 40 IDF w/ 28mm choke(s) @ 1965 lbs. Orientation
of the alternate carburetor is unrestricted. The alternate carb adaptor may not be thicker than
1.25 inches. The adapter may have a bore larger than the throttle bore of the approved alternate carburetor.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
(F) 9.68 Disc
(R) 7.88 Drum
9.1.5.
GCR - 435
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
Wheelbase
mm/(in.)
Track
(F/R)
mm/(in.)
Fiat X-1/9 &
Bertone
1
1815
4 Cyl
SOHC
3.40 x 2.52
1498
Iron
Alum
(I) 1.43
(E) 1.31
(1) 34 DMTR w/ 34mm primary & secondary
throttle bores, (1) 36 DCNF w/34mm choke(s)
and manifold adapter, or fuel injection, (1) 40
DCNF w/ 34mm choke(s).
86.7
56.3 / 56.6
Ford Capri 2000
(71-74)
1
2050
4 Cyl
SOHC
91.0 x 77.0
1993
Iron
Iron
(I) 42.2
(E) 36.2
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 34mm choke(s), (2)
Automotive-type sidedraft w/30mm choke(s)
on I.R. manifold.
100.8
55.5 / 54.5
Ford Fiesta
(78-80)
1
1790
4 Cyl
OHV
81.0 x 78.0
1598
Iron
Iron
(I) 1.41
(E) 1.24
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF, (2) auto type side draft
on I.R. manifold. 30mm choke(s) required.
90.0
56.5 / 56.0
Ford Pinto
1
2030
4 Cyl
SOHC
91.0 x 77.0
1993
Iron
Iron
(I) 42.2
(E) 36.2
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 34mm choke(s), (2)
Automotive-type sidedraft w/30mm choke(s)
on I.R. manifold.
94.0
58.6 / 59.4
Honda Civic 1.5
(88-91)
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
Alum
Alum
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
(2) auto type side draft w/30mm venturi on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
98.4
59.8 / 60.0
Honda Civic /
Civic Si
(84-87)
1
1900
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
Alum
Alum
(I) 27.1
(E) 32.1
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/32mm choke(s), (2)
auto type side draft w/32mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
93.7
59.3 / 59.9
Honda Civic
Del Sol
2
2190
* 2245
** 2300
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.4
(3.19x3.05)
1595
Alum
Alum
(I) 33.0/(1.30)
(E) 28.0/(1.10)
Fuel injection
2370
(93.3)
567/1557
(61.7/61.3)
Honda Civic Si
(88-91)
2
1900
* 1948
** 1995
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
Alum
Alum
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
Fuel injection
2500
1560/1567
Honda Civic Si
(92-95)
2
1950
*1999
**2048
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
Alum
Alum
(I) 30.0
(E) 26.0
Fuel injection
2573
62.3 / 61.9
Honda Civic EX
VTEC SOHC
(92-95)
2
1950
* 1999
** 2048
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
(2.95x3.54)
1590
(97.0)
Alum
Alum
(I) 30.0 / (1.18)
(E) 26.0/(1.02)
Fuel injection
2621
(103.2)
1567/1557
(61.7/61.3)
Honda CRX 1.5
(88-91)
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 84.5
1493
Alum
Alum
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
(2) auto type side draft w/30mm venturi on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
90.6
59.8 / 60.0
Honda CRX /
CRX Si
(84-87)
1
1900
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
Iron
Alum
(I) 27.1
(E) 32.1
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/32mm choke(s), (2)
auto type side draft w/32mm venturi on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
86.6
59.3 / 59.9
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 436
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
FP
FP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Fiat X-1/9 &
Bertone
13 x 7
5
(F&R) 8.94 Disc
Ford Capri 2000
(71-74)
15 x 7
4
(F) 9.6 Disc
(R) 9.0 x 2.25 Drum
Ford Fiesta
(78-80)
13 x 7
4
(F) 8.7 Disc
(R) 7.0 x 1.16 Drum
Ford Pinto
15 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 9.30 Disc
(R) 9.0 x 1.38 Drum
Honda Civic 1.5
(88-91)
15 x 7
5
(F) 240 Disc
(R) 180 x 30 Drum
Honda Civic /
Civic Si
(84-87)
13 x 7
5
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 x 30 Drum
Intake manifold from carbureted version of car is required
Honda Civic
Del Sol
15 x 7
5
(F) 262 (10.3) Disc
(R) 239 (9.4) Disc
Comp. Ratio limited to 11.0:1. Valve lift: .410” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted. May be prepared as a
coupe or “targa top”, Petty-bar roll cage allowed in lieu of rearward roll cage braces.
Honda Civic Si
(88-91)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
Honda Civic Si
(92-95)
15 x 7
5
(F) 262 Vented Disc
(R) 201 Solid Disc
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
Honda Civic EX
VTEC SOHC
(92-95)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.5:1, Valve lift limited to .500”.
Honda CRX 1.5
(88-91)
15 x 7
5
(F) 240 Disc
(R) 180 x 30 Drum
Honda CRX /
CRX Si
(84-87)
13 x 7
5
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 x 30 Drum
(F&R) Lancia 9.875 x .40
Disc
Notes:
Fuel cell may be located in front trunk, Crankshaft (#4211630), Alternate grille for ‘79: ‘78
X19 grill & valence, Top panels may remain in place if securely bolted or pinned, Engine hatch
rain tray may be removed, 4 speed trans from GP X19. Orientation of the alternate carburetor is
unrestricted. The alternate carb adapter may not be thicker than 1.25 inches. The adapter may
have a bore larger than the throttle bore of the approved alternate carburetor.
Formula Ford spec cylinder head and intake manifold may be used.
Production Category Specifications
PCS-B
9.1.5.
GCR - 437
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Honda CRX Si
(88-91)
2
1900
* 1948
** 1995
4 Cyl
SOHC
75.0 x 90.0
1590
Alum
Alum
(I) 29.0
(E) 25.0
Honda Prelude
(84-87)
2
2080
* 2132
** 2184
4 Cyl
12V
SOHC
80.0 x 91.0
1829
Iron
Alum
Lancia Scorpion
(1976)
1
2030
4 Cyl
DOHC
3.31 x 3.12
1756
Iron
Lotus 7 & 7
America
1
1045
4 Cyl
OHV
3.19 x 1.91
2.48 x 3.00
997
948
Lotus Super
Seven
1
1530
4 Cyl
OHV
81.0 x 72.9
(3.19x2.87)
Mazda 626
(84-87)
2
2000
* 2050
** 2100
4 Cyl
SOHC
Mazda GLC /
323
(86-88)
2
1800
* 1845
** 1890
Mazda Miata
1.6L
(90-93)
2
Mercury Capri
1.6L
(91-94)
MGA 1500/1600
/ 1622 Coupe &
Roadster
Wheelbase
mm/(in.)
Track
(F/R)
mm/(in.)
Fuel injection
2235
1560/1567
(I) 30.0
(E) 35.0
(2) auto type side draft w/30mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold
96.5
62.1 / 62.1
Alum
(I) 1.67
(E) 1.44
(2) Weber 40 IDF - 40IDI, (2) Solex C40P116,
(2) DCOE w / 36mm choke(s)
90.5
59.8 / 61.5
Iron
Iron
(I) 1.30 / 1.16
(E) 1.20 / 1.00
997cc: Two (2) 1.25” SU, 948cc: Two (2)
1.25” or 1.125” SU or Stromberg
88.0
50.9 / 52.0
1503
(91.7)
Iron
Iron
(I) 36.6 (1.44)
(E) 30.2 (1.19)
(2) weber DCOE on I.R. manifold w/ 30mm
choke(s)
2235
(88.0)
1293/1321
(50.9/52.0)
or
1293/1397
(50.9/55.0)
(w / series 4
rearend)
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Iron
Alum
(I) 44.0
(E) 36.0
Carburetion or Fuel injection
2510
60.5 / 60.3
4 Cyl
SOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
Iron
Alum
(I) 38.1
(E) 32.1
(2) auto type side draft w/32mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
94.5
57.4 / 58.4
2075
* 2127
** 2179
4 Cyl
DOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
Iron
Alum
(I) 31.1
(E) 26.3
Fuel injection
2266
1479/1491
2
1950
* 1999
** 2048
4 Cyl
DOHC
78.0 x 83.6
1597
Iron
Alum
(I) 31.1
(E) 26.3
Fuel injection
2406
1479/1524
1
1960
4 Cyl
OHV
2.88 x 3.50
2.97 x 3.50
3.00 x 3.50
1469
1588
1622
Iron
Iron
(I)1.63
(I) 1.57
(I) 1.50
(E) 1.44
(E) 1.35
(E) 1.28
(2) 1.5” or 1.75” SU or Stromberg
94.0
52.0 / 53.3
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Carb. No. & Type
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 438
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
FP
FP
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Honda CRX Si
(88-91)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1, Valve lift limited to .450”.
Honda Prelude
(84-87)
13 x 7
5
(F) 229 Vented Disc
(R) 237 Solid Disc
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Lancia Scorpion
(1976)
15 x 7
5
(F & R) 8.9 Disc
(F&R) 254 x 10 Solid Disc
Trunk mounted fuel cell is permitted. Fabric roof panel may be replaced with alternate material.
Lotus 7 & 7
America
13 x 6
4
(F) 8.0 Drum
(R) 7.0 Drum
COA-B405/6 front
9.0 disc brake kit
Front track w/alternate front brakes : 51.8”, Authorized frame modification: Info. Available
from SCCA. BMC Mk. III transmission case w/948cc. Headlights and associated hardware may
be removed. Manifold unrestricted for 2 SU carbs. Wood floorboards may be replaced with
metal. rear edge of the front fenders is to be 4.5” above the body undertray.
Lotus Super
Seven
13 x 6
4
(F) 203 (8.0) Drum
(R) 178 (7.0) Drum
(F) 229 (9.0) Disc
#OAOB 405/6
(7/8” track increase)
(F) 244 (9.6) Disc
Authorized frame modification: Info. available from SCCA. Headlights & associated hardware
may be removed. Series 4 axle housing is permitted. NOTE: Rear edge of front fenders shall be
4.5” above the body undertray.
Mazda 626
(84-87)
15 x 7
5
(F) 254 Solid Disc
(R) 231 Drum
Comp. Ratio limited to 11.0:1 Valve lift limited to .450”.
Mazda GLC /
323
(86-88)
14 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 238 Disc
(R) 200 Drum
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1. Valve lift: .500” max. Level 1 dry sump, connecting rods, intake
manifold porting, crankshaft, rocker arms and cam followers permitted.
Mazda Miata
1.6L
(90-93)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .390”. OEM hardtop allowed. 1994 Mazda
Miata (1840cc) differential housing permitted, part #’s MA0227600A and MA0327100A.
Mercury Capri
1.6L
(91-94)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .390”.
MGA 1500/1600
/ 1622 Coupe &
Roadster
15 x 7
4
(F) 11.0 Disc
(R) 10.0 Drum
(F) 10.0 Drum
(F&R) 11.0 Disc
Notes:
It is permitted to replace wood floor boards with metal. MGB intake manifold permitted. Cylinder block (3 main bearing) from MGB. MGB 18G/18GA series 3 main bearing crankshaft
allowed.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
Trans.
Speeds
9.1.5.
GCR - 439
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
MGB & MGB-GT
1
2000
4 Cyl
OHV
80.3 x 88.9
(3.16x3.50)
1798
(109.7)
Iron
Iron
(I) 39.9(1.57)
(I) 41.4(1.63)
(E)34.3(1.35)
Nissan/Datsun
PL510
1
1990
4 Cyl
SOHC
83.0 x 73.7
1595
Iron
Alum
(I) 44.2
(I) 41.9
(E) 35.3
(E) 33.0
Nissan/Datsun
SPL 311/311-U
1
1920
4 Cyl
OHV
3.43 x 2.63
1595
Iron
Iron or
Alum
Opel GT
1
1950
4 Cyl
OHV
93.0 x 69.9
1897
Iron
Opel Manta
(71-75)
1
1950
4 Cyl
OHV
93.0 x 69.9
1897
Porsche 356,
A, C (1500,
1600)C (1600)
SC,B, Super 90
Cabriolet
1
1920
4 Cyl
OHV
3.25 x 2.91
3.15 x 2.91
Porsche 912
Coupe / Targa
(-1969)
1
1950
4 Cyl
OHV
Porsche 914-4
1
2020
Saab 900S
(85-94)
2
Sedan:
2160
* 2214
** 2268
Conv.
2260
* 2317
** 2373
Wheelbase
mm/(in.)
Track
(F/R)
mm/(in.)
2311
(91.0)
1346/1351
(53.0/53.2)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s),
(2) auto type side draft w/ 36mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold.
95.3
54.5 / 54.5
(I) 1.86
(I) 1.66
(I) 1.69
(E) 1.47
(E) 1.38
(E) 1.26
(2) Mikuni PHH 44mm, 38mm choke(s) required, (2) Hitachi-SU (1 bbl) 46mm throttle
bores.
89.8
54.7 / 51.7
Iron
(I) 40.0 / 42.0
(E) 34.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/32mm choke(s), (2)
auto type side draft w/32mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
95.7
52.9 / 54.1
Iron
Iron
(I) 40.0 / 42.0
(E) 34.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF IDF w/32mm choke(s), (2)
auto type side draft w/32mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
95.7
55.5 / 55.1
1582
1488
Alum
Alum
(I) 1.58
(E) 1.34
(2) Zenith 32 NDIX, (2) Solex 32 PBIC, (2) Solex 40 PBIC, (2) Solex P II 4 or PJ54. 38mm
choke(s) req’d.
82.7
55.0 / 53.7
3.25 x 2.91
1582
Alum
Alum
(I) 1.58
(E) 1.34
(2) Solex PII-4. 38mm chok(s) req’d.
87.0 or
89.2
57.5 / 56.2
4 Cyl
OHV
90.0 x 66.0
93.0 x 66.0
1679
1795
Alum
Alum
(I) 1.55/1.65
(E) 1.30/1.34
(2) Solex 40 PII-4, (2) weber 40 IDF, (2)
Del’Orto 40mm. 36mm choke(s) req’d.
96.5
56.5 / 58.2
4 Cyl
DOHC
90.0 x 78.0
1985
Iron
Alum
(I) 32.0
(E) 29.0
Fuel injection
2515
60.5 / 60.9
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Carb. No. & Type
(2) 1.75” SU or Stromberg
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 440
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
FP
FP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
MGB & MGB-GT
15 x 7
4
(F) 273 (10.8) Disc
(R) 254 (10.0)
Drum
Nissan/Datsun
PL510
15 x 7
4
(F) 9.1 Disc
(R) 9.0 Drum
Nissan/Datsun
SPL 311/311-U
15 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 11.2 Disc
(R) 9.0 Drum
Opel GT
13 x 7
4
(F) 247 Disc
(R) 229 Drum
(F) 247 Vented Discs and
calipers from Opel Omega
/ 75 Opel 1900 Ascona /
Manta, kit # 91305079.
Opel Manta
(71-75)
13 x 7
4
(F) 9.7 Disc
(R) 9.0 Drum
(F) 247 Vented Discs and
calipers from Opel Omega
/ 75 Opel 1900 Ascona /
Manta, kit # 91305079.
Porsche 356, A,
C (1500,1600),
C (1600) SC,
B, Super 90
Cabriolet
15 x 7
4
(F) 10.8 Disc
(R) 11.2 Disc
(F & R)11.0 Drum
# 64442095-60mm front
brakes & vent backing
plates
64451101018 - Alum front hood, 64451201018 - Alum rear hood, 64453100410 - Alum
door, 64453100310 - Alum door. Cylinder barrels of alternate material are permitted.
Porsche 912
Coupe / Targa
(-1969)
15 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 11.1 Disc
(R) 11.2 Disc
901351 / 35240115
Vented Rotors
Cylinder barrels of alternate material are permitted.
Porsche 914-4
15 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 11.1 Disc
(R) 11.2 Disc
914-6 calipers & rotors
allowed. Front “M” calipers
may be used on rear rotors.
Standard intake manifold: Porsche part #021 129 705N. Alternate manifolds with the same
length and configuration (4-5¼” center line axis) are allowed. (i.e. Pierce manifold part #
99004.822. Top panel may remain in place is securley bolted or pinned. Cylinder barrels of
alternate material are permitted.
Saab 900S
(85-94)
15 x 7
5
Notes:
17th 8152 (0.75”) wheel cylinders, Alt. Manifold: Any individual runner manifold with runner
length of 3.0-4.0” measured flange to flange. 4 speed gearbox w/o overdrive.
1977-78 Datsun 240/260/
280Z front rotors and
calipers and rear aluminum
drums are permitted.
Allow any originally-delivered or superceding cylinder ead. Alternate cylinder head: P/N: 11041V9182 casting #V912.
Comp. Ratio limited to 11.0:1 Valve lift limited to .380”.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
(F) 276 Disc
(R) 276.5 Disc
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
9.1.5.
GCR - 441
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
Wheelbase
mm/(in.)
Track
(F/R)
mm/(in.)
Sunbeam Alpine
I, II, III, IV, V,
& Harrington
LeMans
1
1976
4 Cyl
OHV
3.21 x 3.25
3.21 x 3.00
3.11 x 3.00
1725
1592
1494
Iron
Alum
(I) 1.50/1.48/
1.43/1.44
(E) 1.21/1.18
1.17/1.18
(2) Zenith-Stromberg 150CD, (1) Solex 32
PAIA, (1) Zenith 36 WIP2
86.0
55.1 / 54.0
Suzuki Swift GT
& GTi
1
1780
4 Cyl
DOHC
2.91 x 2.97
1780
Alum
Alum
(I) 29.0
(E) 23.9
(1) 40 DCOE, (2) auto type side draft on I.R.
manifold, 28mm choke(s) required, or fuel injection w/ 52mm throttle body.
89.3
58.4 / 57.4
Toyota Corolla
2TC
(71-74)
1
1950
4 Cyl
OHV
85.0 x 70.0
1588
Iron
Alum
(I) 41.9
(I) 41.0
(E) 36.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF, (2) auto type side
draft w/ 36mm choke(s) on I.R. manifold.
91.9
54.5 / 55.5
Toyota MR-2
1.6L
(85-89)
2
2075
* 2127
** 2179
4 Cyl
DOHC
81.0 x 77.0
1587
Iron
Alum
(I) 30.7
(E) 26.0
Fuel injection
2320
1532/1532
Triumph Spitfire
Mk.III
1
1730
4 Cyl
OHV
2.90x2.992
1296
Iron
Iron
(I) 1.30
(E) 1.17
(2) 1.25” or 1.50” Stromberg or SU, (1) CDSE
Stromberg, (1) 1.50” SU, maximum spacer
block (isolator) length 1.25”.
83.0
53.6 / 52.6
Triumph Spitfire
Mk. IV & 1500
1
1296:
1730
1493:
1660
4 Cyl
OHV
2.90x2.992
2.90 x 3.44
1296
1493
Iron
Iron
(E) 1.17
1296cc:
(I) 1.30
1493cc:
(I) 1.44
1296cc = (2) 1.25” or 1.50” SU or Stromberg, 1493cc = (1) 1.5” Stromberg type SU,
(1) 1.5” SU, or (1) 1.75” SU
83.0
53.6 / 54.6
Turner 1500
1
1700
4 Cyl
OHV
3.19 x 2.86
1498
Iron
Iron
(I) 1.45
(E) 1.20
(1) 28/36 DCD 22, 32/36 DGN, 36 DCNF
w/30mm choke(s), (1) 40 DCNF w/ 30mm
choke(s), (2) Weber DCOE on I.R. manifold w/
30mm choke(s).
82.0
48.9 / 48.2
Volkswagen Golf
1.8
(85-92)
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
(3.19x3.40)
1780
(108.6)
Iron
Alum
(I) 40.0 / (1.57)
(E) 33.0/(1.30)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s), (2)
Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
2472
(97.3)
1494/1486
(58.8/58.5)
Volkswagen
Jetta (includes
GLI)
(82-84)
1
1920
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
(3.13x3.40)
81.0 x 86.4
(3.19x3.40)
1715
(104.6)
1780
(108.6)
Iron
Alum
1715:
(I) 34.0 / (1.34)
(E) 31.0/(1.22)
1780:
(I) 40.0 / (1.57)
(E) 33.0/(1.30)
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 38mm choke(s), (2)
Auto-type sidedraft w/ 34mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
2400
(94.5)
58.9 / 57.2
Volkswagen
Jetta 1.8
(85-92)
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
81.0 x 86.4
1780
Iron
Alum
(I) 40.0
(E) 33.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 36mm choke(s), (2)
Auto-type sidedraft w/ 32mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
2472
1494/1486
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 442
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
FP
FP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Notes:
Sunbeam Alpine
I, II, III, IV, V,
& Harrington
LeMans
13 x 6
4
(F) 10.0 Disc
(R) 9.0 Drum
Laycock overdrive (0.803)
Suzuki Swift GT
& GTi
15 x 7
5
(F) 248 Disc
(R) 237 Disc
“Dual Y” manifold required, no plenum or balance tubes.
Toyota Corolla
2TC
(71-74)
15 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 229 Disc
(R) 231 Drum
Toyota MR-2
1.6L
(85-89)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Triumph Spitfire
Mk.III
13 x 6
4
(F) 9.0 Disc
(R) 7.0 Drum
(F) 9.7 Disc
(R) 8.0 Drum
May use Triumph GT6
caliper as alternate front
caliper.
Laycock “D” (0.802). NOTE: Roll cage for cars under 1500 lbs are acceptable for cars registered with SCCA before 4/1/82.
Triumph Spitfire
Mk. IV & 1500
13 X 6
4
(F) 9.0 Disc
(R) 7.0 Drum
(F) 9.7 Disc
(R) 8.0 Drum
May use Triumph GT6
caliper as alternate front
caliper.
Parts may not be interchanged between two engine units, Laycock “D” (0.802). 1493cc may
use (2) 1.25” SU carbs on 1296cc. manifold @ 1830 lbs. NOTE: Roll cage for cars under 1500
lbs are acceptable for cars registered with SCCA before 4/1/82.
Turner 1500
13 x 6
4
(F) 9.0 Disc
(R) 8.5 Drum
(F) 9.7 Disc (Spitfire)
Hobbs mech-a-matic gearbox ratios: 1=3.78, 2=2.32, 3=1.46, 4=4.00. 125E crankshaft
Volkswagen
Golf 1.8
(85-92)
15 x 7
5
(F) 239 (9.4) Disc
(R) 180 x 30
(7.1 x 1.2) Drum
(F) 239 (9.4) Vented Disc
(R) 239 (9.4) Disc
Original carbureted manifold or alternate manifold is permitted. VW cyl. head #026103351BF
or #026103265HX permitted.
Volkswagen
Jetta (includes
GLI)
(82-84)
15 x 7
5
(F) 239 (9.4) Disc
(R) 180 x 30
(7.1 x 1.2) Drum
(F) 239 (9.4) Vented Disc
Intake manifold unrestricted w/ single downdraft carburetor. VW cyl. head #026103351BF or
#026103265HX permitted.
Volkswagen
Jetta 1.8
(85-92)
15 x 7
5
(F) 239 Disc
(R) 180 x 30 Drum
(F) 239 Vented Disc
(R) 239 Disc
Original carbureted manifold or alternate manifold is permitted. VW cyl. head #026103351BF
or #026103265HX permitted.
Comp. Ratio limited to 10.0:1, Valve lift limited to .400”. Trunk mounted fuel cell with no larger
capacity than stock is permitted.
Production Category Specifications
PCS-B
9.1.5.
GCR - 443
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
Wheelbase
mm/(in.)
Track
(F/R)
mm/(in.)
Volkswagen
Rabbit
1457/1471
(includes Cabriolet/Convertible
1
1600
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.5 x 80.0
79.5 x 73.4
1471
1457
Iron
Alum
(I) 40.0
(I) 34.0
(E) 33.0
(E) 31.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 32mm choke(s), or
fuel injection.
94.5
58.9 / 57.2
Volkswagen
Rabbit 1588
(includes Cabriolet /Convertible
1
1750
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 80.0
1588
Iron
Alum
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 32mm choke(s), or
(2) auto type side draft w/ 30mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
94.5
58.9 / 57.2
Volkswagen
Rabbit (includes
Convertible)
1715 / 1780
1
2000
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
(3.13x3.40)
81.0 x 86.4
(3.19x3.40)
1715
(104.6)
1780
(108.6)
Iron
Alum
see Jetta
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 38mm choke(s). (2)
Auto-type sidedraft w/34mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
2400
(94.5)
58.9 / 57.2
Volkswagen
Scirocco
1457/1471
1
1600
4 Cyl
SOHC
76.5 x 80.0
79.5 x 73.4
1471
1457
Iron
Alum
(I) 40.0
(I) 34.0
(E) 33.0
(E) 31.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 32mm choke(s), or
fuel injection.
94.5
58.9 / 57.2
Volkswagen
Scirocco 1588
1
1750
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 80.0
1588
Iron
Alum
(I) 34.0
(E) 31.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 32mm choke(s), or
(2) auto type side draft w/ 30mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold, or fuel injection.
94.5
58.9 / 57.2
Volkswagen
Scirocco 1715 /
1780
1
1950
4 Cyl
SOHC
79.5 x 86.4
(3.13x3.40)
81.0 x 86.4
(3.19x3.40)
1715
(104.6)
1780
(108.6)
Iron
Alum
see Jetta
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/ 38mm choke(s). (2)
Auto-type sidedraft w/34mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
2400
(94.5)
58.9 / 57.2
Volvo P-1800/
E/S /1800ES
Sports Coupe
1
1995
4 Cyl
OHV
3.31 x 3.15
3.50 x 3.15
1780
1982
Iron
Iron
(I) 1.57 / 1.65
/ 1.73
(E) 1.38
(2) 1.75” SU, (2) 1.75” CDSE Stromberg, (2)
1.75” SU HS6
96.5
55.4 / 55.4
Volvo 142 / 144
2.0
(69-74)
2
2100
* 2153
** 2205
4 Cyl
OHV
88.9 x 80.0
1986
Iron
Iron
(I) 44.0
(E) 35.0
103.0
55.7 / 55.7
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Fuel injection
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 444
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
FP
FP
Trans.
Speeds
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
Notes:
Volkswagen
Rabbit
1457/1471
(includes Cabriolet/Convertible
13 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 9.41 Disc
(R) 7.86 x 1.57
Drum
Factory roll bar must be removed on Cabriolet. Intake manifold unrestricted with single down
draft carburetor. Only 1457cc engine may use fuel injection.
Volkswagen
Rabbit 1588
(includes Cabriolet /Convertible
13 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 9.41 Disc
(R) 7.1 x 1.57 Drum
Intake manifold unrestricted with single down draft carburetor.
Volkswagen
Rabbit (includes
Convertible)
1715 / 1780
15 x 7
5
Volkswagen
Scirocco
1457/1471
13 x 7
Volkswagen
Scirocco 1588
(F) 239 (9.4)
Vented Disc
Intake manifold unrestricted w/ single downdraft carburetor.
4 or 5
(F) 9.41 Disc
(R) 7.86 x 1.19
Drum
Front calipers from 1980
Scirocco.
Intake manifold unrestricted with single down draft carburetor. Only 1457cc engine may use
fuel injection.
13 x 7
4 or 5
(F) 9.41 Disc
(R) 7.1 x 1.19 Drum
Volkswagen
Scirocco 1715 /
1780
15 x 7
5
(F) 239 (9.4) Disc
(R) 180 x 30
(7.1 x 1.2) Drum
(F) 239 (9.4) Vented Disc
Intake manifold unrestricted w/ single downdraft carburetor.
Volvo P-1800/
E/S /1800ES
Sports Coupe
15 x 7
4
(F) 11.0 Disc
(R) 9.0 Drum
(F) 10.7 Disc
(R) 11.6 Disc
Allow D20-E engine assembly
Volvo 142 / 144
2.0
(69-74)
15 x 7
5
Factory spec @ all
4 wheels
Intake manifold unrestricted with single down draft carburetor.
Comp. Ratio limited to 12.0:1 Valve lift limited to .450”.
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
(F) 239 (9.4) Disc
(R) 180 x 30
(7.1 x 1.2) Drum
9.1.5.
GCR - 445
Wheels
(max)
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
Carb. No. & Type
Wheelbase
mm/(in.)
Track
(F/R)
mm/(in.)
Alfa Romeo
Giulietta Sprint
& Spider, 750
& 101, Normale (Spider) &
Veloce (Super
Spider)
1
1879
(1980
w/ dual
carbs)
4 Cyl
DOHC
2.91 x 2.95
1290
Alum
Alum
(I) 1.46
(E) 1.34
(1) Solex 35 APAIG, (1) 36 DCD Weber, (2)
Weber DCOE w/30mm choke(s)
Sprint: 93.7
750 Spider:
86.6
101 Spider:
88.6
54.5 / 53.5
BMW 1600
1
2100
4 Cyl
SOHC
84.0 x 71.0
1573
Iron
Alum
(I) 42.0
(E) 35.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w / 32mm choke(s), (2)
40 DCOE sidedraft carbs w/ 32mm chokes.
98.4
56.3 / 56.3
Chevrolet
Chevette 1.6
1
2080
4 Cyl
SOHC
82.0 x 75.7
1598
Iron
Iron
(I) 39.1
(E) 32.1
(2) auto type sidedraft w/ 30mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold
94.3
54.75/
54.75
Fiat 124 Sport
Coupe
1
1975
4 Cyl
DOHC
3.15 x 2.81
1438
Iron
Alum
(I) 1.64
(E) 1.43
(1) Weber 34 DFH-1, (1) Weber 34 DMSA-1,
(1) 34 DMS 201
89.8
56.7 / 55.4
Fiat X-1/9 &
Bertone
1
1960
4 Cyl
SOHC
86.0 x 55.5
1290
Iron
Alum
(I) 1.43
(E) 1.21
(E) 1.23
(1) Weber 32 DMTR w/32mm primary &
secondary throttle bores, (1) Weber 32
DATRA/100 w / 32mm primary & secondary throttle bores, (1) 40 DCNF w/ 32mm
choke(s).
86.7
56.3 / 56.6
Ford Escort /
Mercury Lynx
(81-84)
1
2020
4 Cyl
SOHC
3.15 x 3.13
1589
Iron
Alum
(I) 42.0
(E) 37.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF, w/ 32mm choke(s).
(2) auto type sidedraft w/28mm choke(s) on
I.R. manifold
94.3
57.2 / 58.5
Honda Civic
1
1830
4 Cyl
OHV
72.0 x 76.0
1237
Iron
Alum
EB1&2:
(I) 34.0
(E) 30.0
EB3:
(I) 36.0
(E) 32.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF, 28mm choke(s)
req’d.
86.8
53.7 / 52.9
Honda Civic /
Civic Si
(84-87)
1
2200
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
Alum
Alum
(I) 27.1
(E) 32.1
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/32mm choke(s), (2)
auto type side draft w/32mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
93.7
59.3 / 59.9
Honda CRX /
CRX Si
(84-87)
1
2200
4 Cyl
SOHC
74.0 x 86.5
1488
Iron
Alum
(I) 27.1
(E) 32.1
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w/32mm choke(s), (2)
auto type side draft w/32mm choke(s) on I.R.
manifold, or fuel injection.
86.6
59.3 / 59.9
Mazda GLC
(FWD)
1
1920
4 Cyl
SOHC
77.0 x 80.0
1490
Iron
Alum
(I) 36.0
(E) 31.0
(1) 40 DCN, DCNF, IDF w / 32mm choke(s)
93.1
57.2 / 57.4
* Alternate transmission w/ stock type syncros
** Alternate transmission w/ non-stock type syncros (i.e. dog-ring)
Production Category Specifications
GCR - 446
Prep.
Level
9.1.5.
GP
GP
Wheels
(max)
Trans.
Speeds
Alfa Romeo
Giulietta Sprint
& Spider, 750
& 101, Normale (Spider) &
Veloce (Super
Spider)
15 x 6
4 or 5
BMW 1600
13 x 6
4
Chevrolet
Chevette 1.6
13 x 6
4 or 5
13 x 6.5
5
(F&R) 8.94 Disc
(F&R) 10.0 x .40 Disc (Lancia), Alt rotor: #82346805
Fiat X-1/9 &
Bertone
13 x 6
4
(F&R) 8.94 Disc
(F&R) 10.0 x .40 Disc
(Lancia)
5 speed transmission from new “FP” model. Top panels may remain in place if securely bolted
or pinned. Alt. Crankshaft: #4292177. Engine hatch rain tray may be removed. Trunk mounted
fuel cell allowed. Orientation of the alternate carburetor is unrestricted. The alternate carb
adapter may not be thicker than 1.25 inches. The adapter may have a bore larger than the
throttle bore of the approved alternate carburetor.
Ford Escort /
Mercury Lynx
(81-84)
13 x 6
4
(F) 9.3 Disc
(R) 8.0 x 1.3 Drum
Honda Civic
13 x 6
4 or 5
(F) 9.0 Disc
(R) 7.0 x 1.4 Drum
Brake Calipers: Right Front:
P/N 45210-663-674, Left
Front: P/N 45230-663-674
Orientation of the alternate carburetor is unrestricted. The alternate carburetor adaptor may
not be thicker than 1.25”. The adaptor may have a bore larger than the throttle bore of the
approved alternate carburetor.
Honda Civic /
Civic Si
(84-87)
13 x 7
5
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 x 30 Drum
Honda CRX /
CRX Si
(84-87)
13 x 7
5
(F) 231 Disc
(R) 180 x 30 Drum
Mazda GLC
(FWD)
13 x 6
5
(F) 8.9 Disc
(R) 7.1 x 1.2 Drum
Fiat 124 Sport
Coupe
Brakes Std.
(mm/(in.))
(F) 10.3 Drum
(R) 10.0 Drum
Brakes Alt.: mm/(in.)
(F) 10.6 Disc (girling)
(R) 10.5 Drum
(F) 10.7 Disc
Notes:
Sebring headrest
(F) 10.1 Disc
(R) 9.1 x 1.6 Drum
Factory 2bbl intake manifold from EP BMW 2002 is permitted.
(F) 9.68 Disc
(R) 7.88 Drum
PCS-B
Production Category Specifications
Orientation of the alternate carburetor is unrestricted.
9.1.5.
GCR - 447
Intake manifold from carbureted version of car is required
Weight
(lbs)
Engine
Type
Bore x
Stroke
mm/(in.)
Displ.
cc/(ci)
Block
Mat’l
Head/PN
& Mat’l
Valves
IN & EX
mm/(in.)
MGA 1500 /
1600 / 1622
Coupe
1
2060
4 Cyl
OHV
2.88 x 3.50
2.97 x 3.50
3.00 x 3.50
1469
1588
1622
Iro